Carl Sagan Cosmos [ Full Color Illustrated]

Other Books by Carl Sagan

Broca’s Brain: Reflections on the Romance of Science

The Dragons of Eden: Speculations on the Evolution of Human
Intelligence

Murmurs of Earth: The Voyager Interstellar Record (with F. D.
Drake, Ann Druyan, Timothy Ferris, Jon Lomberg and Linda
Salzman Sagan)

The Cosmic Connection: An Extraterrestrial Perspective
Other Worlds

Mars and the Mind of Man (with Ray Bradbury, Arthur C.
Clarke, Bruce Murray and Walter Sullivan)

Intelligent Life in the Universe (with L S. Shklovskii)

Communication with Extraterrestrial Intelligence (Editor)

UFOs: A Scientific Debate (Editor, with Thornton Page)

COSMOS

Quasar inside a giant elliptical galaxy, dominating a rich cluster of galaxies. Painting by Adolf Schaller.

COSMOS

CUtLSMMN

RANDOM HOUSE
NEW YORK

Copyright ® 1980 by Carl Sagan Productions, Inc.

All rights reserved under International and Pan-American Copyright Conventions. Published in the United States by
Random House, Inc., New York, and simultaneously in Canada by Random House of Canada Limited, Toronto.

Library of Congress Cataloging in Publication Data

Sagan, Carl, 193 A
Cosmos.

Based on C. Sagan’s 13-part television series.

Bibliography: p.

Includes index.

1. Astronomy—Popular works. I. Cosmos (Television program)

QB44.2.S235 520 80-5286

ISBN 0-394'50294'9 (hardcover)

ISBN 0-394-71596-9 (pbk.)

Manufactured in the United States of America

First paperback edition April 1983

9876

Design: Robert Aulicino

Since this page cannot legibly accommodate all acknowledgments, they appear on the next page.

Grateful acknowledgment is made to the following for permission to reprint previously published material:

American Folklore Society: Excerpt from “Chukchee Tales” by Waldemar Borgoras from Journal of American Folklore,
volume 41 (1928). Reprinted by permission of the American Folklore Society.

Ballantine Books: Illustration by Darrell K. Sweet for the cover of Red Planet by Robert A. Heinlein, copyright © 1949
by Robert A. Heinlein, renewed 1976 by Robert A. Heinlein. Illustration by Michael Whelan for the cover of With
Friends Like These ... by Alan Dean Foster, copyright © 1977 by Alan Dean Foster. Illustration by The Brothers
Hildebrandt for the cover of Stellar Science-Fiction Stories #2, edited by Judy-Lynn del Rey, copyright © 1976 by
Random House, Inc. All the above are published by Ballantine Books, a division of Random House, Inc., used by
permission.

City of Bayeux: A scene of the Tapisserie de Bayeux is reproduced with special authorization from the City Bayeux.

CoEvolution Quarterly: A portion of the Computer Photo Map of Galaxies, © CoEvolution Quarterly. $5.00 postpaid
from CoEvolution Quarterly, Box 428, Sausalito, CA 94966.

J. M. Dent (Sc. Sons, Ltd.: Excerpts from the J. M. Rodwell translation of The Koran (An Everyman’s Library Series).
Reprinted by permission of J. M. Dent (Sc Sons, Ltd.

J. M. Dent (Sc Sons, Ltd., and E. P. Dutton: Excerpt from Pensees by Blaise Pascal, translated by W. F. Trotter (An
Everyman’s Library Series). Reprinted by permission of the publisher in the United States, E. P. Dutton, and the
publisher in England, J. M. Dent <Sc Sons, Ltd.

Encyclopaedia Britannica, Inc.: Quote by Isaac Newton (Optics), quote by Joseph Fourier ( Analytic Theory of Heat),
and A Question Put to Pythagoras by Anaximenes (c. 600 B.C.). Reprinted with permission from Great Books of the
Western World. Copyright 1952 by Encyclopaedia Britannica, Inc.

Harvard University Press: Quote by Democritus of Abdera taken from Loeb Classical Library. Reprinted by permis¬
sion of Harvard University Press.

Indiana University Press: Excerpts from Ovid, Metamorphoses, translated by Rolfe Humphries, copyright 1955 by
Indiana University Press. Reprinted by permission of the publisher.

Liveright Publishing Corporation: Lines reprinted from The Bridge, a poem by Hart Crane, with the permission of
Liveright Publishing Corporation. Copyright 1933, © 1958, 1970 by Liveright Publishing Corporation.

Oxford University Press: Excerpt from Zurvan: A Zoroastrian Dilemma by R. C. Zaehner (Clarendon Press—1955).
Reprinted by permission of Oxford University Press.

Penguin Books, Ltd.: One line from Enuma Elish, Sumer, in Poems of Heaven and Hell from Ancient Mesopotamia,
translated by N. K. Sandars (Penguin Classics, 1971). Copyright © N. K. Sandars, 197 L Twelve lines from Lao Tzu,
Tao Te Ching, translated by D. C. Lau (Penguin Classics, 1963). Copyright © D. C. Lau, 1963. Reprinted by
permission of Penguin Books, Ltd.

Pergamon Press, Ltd.: Excerpts from Giant Meteorites by E. L. Krinov are reprinted by permission of Pergamon Press,
Ltd.

Simon (Sc Schuster, Inc.: Quote from the Bhagavad Gita from Lawrence and Oppenheimer by Nuel Pharr Davis (1968,
page 239), and excerpt from The Sand Reckoner by Archimedes taken from The World of Mathematics by James
Newman (1956, volume 1, page 420). Reprinted by permission of Simon <Sc Schuster, Inc.

Simon <Sc Schuster, Inc., and Bruno Cassirer, Ltd.: Quote from The Last Temptation of Christ by Nikos Kazantzakis.
Reprinted by permission of the publisher in the United States, Simon (Sc Schuster, Inc., and the publisher in England,
Bruno Cassirer (Publishers), Ltd., Oxford. Copyright © 1960 by Simon (Sc Schuster, Inc.

The University of Oklahoma Press: Excerpt from Popol Vuh: The Sacred Book of the Ancient Quiche Maya, by Adrian
Recinos, 1950. Copyright © 1950 by the University of Oklahoma Press. Reprinted by permission of the University of
Oklahoma Press.

For Ann Druyan

In the vastness of space and the immensity of time,
it is my joy to share
a planet and an epoch with Annie.

Contents

Introduction — xi

1 — The Shores of the Cosmic Ocean — 3
2 — One Voice in the Cosmic Fugue — 23
3 — The Harmony of Worlds — 45
4 — Heaven and Hell — 73
5 — Blues for a Red Planet — 105
6 — Travelers’ Tales —137
7 — The Backbone of Night — 167
8 — Travels in Space and Time —195

9 — The Lives of the Stars — 217

10 — The Edge of Forever — 245

11 — The Persistence of Memory — 269
12 — Encyclopaedia Galactica — 291
13 — Who Speaks for Earth? — 317
Appendix 1: Reductio ad A bsurdum and the Square Root of Two — 347
Appendix 2: The Five Pythagorean Solids — 348
For Further Reading — 350
Index -357

INTRODUCTION

The time will come when diligent research over long
periods will bring to light things which now lie hidden. A
single lifetime, even though entirely devoted to the sky,
would not be enough for the investigation of so vast a
subject . . . And so this knowledge will be unfolded only
through long successive ages. There will come a time when
our descendants will be amazed that we did not know
things that are so plain to them . . . Many discoveries are
reserved for ages still to come, when memory of us will
have been effaced. Our universe is a sorry little affair unless
it has in it something for every age to investigate . . . Nature
does not reveal her mysteries once and for all.

—Seneca, Natural Questions ,
Book 7, first century

In ancient times, in everyday speech and custom, the most
mundane happenings were connected with the grandest cosmic
events. A charming example is an incantation against the worm
which the Assyrians of 1000 B.C. imagined to cause toothaches.
It begins with the origin of the universe and ends with a cure for
toothache:

After Anu had created the heaven,

And the heaven had created the earth,

And the earth had created the rivers,

And the rivers had created the canals,

And the canals had created the morass,

And the morass had created the worm,

The worm went before Shamash, weeping,

His tears flowing before Ea:

“What wilt thou give me for my food,

What wilt thou give me for my drink?”

“I will give thee the dried fig
And the apricot.”

“What are these to me? The dried fig
And the apricot!

Lift me up, and among the teeth
And the gums let me dwell!...”

Because thou hast said this, O worm,

May Ea smite thee with the might of
His hand!

(Incantation against toothache.)

Its treatment: Second-grade beer . . . and oil thou shalt mix
together;

The incantation thou shalt recite three times thereon and
shalt put the medicine upon the tooth.

xii - Introduction

Our ancestors were eager to understand the world but had not
quite stumbled upon the method. They imagined a small, quaint,
tidy universe in which the dominant forces were gods like Anu,
Ea, and Shamash. In that universe humans played an important if
not a central role. We were intimately bound up with the rest of
nature. The treatment of toothache with second-rate beer was
tied to the deepest cosmological mysteries.

Today we have discovered a powerful and elegant way to
understand the universe, a method called science; it has revealed
to us a universe so ancient and so vast that human affairs seem at
first sight to be of little consequence. We have grown distant
from the Cosmos. It has seemed remote and irrelevant to every¬
day concerns. But science has found not only that the universe
has a reeling and ecstatic grandeur, not only that it is accessible to
human understanding, but also that we are, in a very real and
profound sense, a part of that Cosmos, born from it, our fate
deeply connected with it. The most basic human events and the
most trivial trace back to the universe and its origins. This book
is devoted to the exploration of that cosmic perspective.

In the summer and fall of 1976, as a member of the Viking
Lander Imaging Flight Team, I was engaged, with a hundred of
my scientific colleagues, in the exploration of the planet Mars.
For the first time in human history we had landed two space
vehicles on the surface of another world. The results, described
more fully in Chapter 5, were spectacular, the historical signifi¬
cance of the mission utterly apparent. And yet the general public
was learning almost nothing of these great happenings. The press
was largely inattentive; television ignored the mission almost
altogether. When it became clear that a definitive answer on
whether there is life on Mars would not be forthcoming, interest
dwindled still further. There was little tolerance for ambiguity.
When we found the sky of Mars to be a kind of pinkish-yellow
rather than the blue which had erroneously first been reported,
the announcement was greeted by a chorus of good-natured boos
from the assembled reporters—they wanted Mars to be, even in
this respect, like the Earth. They believed that their audiences
would be progressively disinterested as Mars was revealed to be
less and less like the Earth. And yet the Martian landscapes are
staggering, the vistas breathtaking. I was positive from my own
experience that an enormous global interest exists in the explo¬
ration of the planets and in many kindred scientific topics—the
origin of life, the Earth, and the Cosmos, the search for extrater¬
restrial intelligence, our connection with the universe. And I was
certain that this interest could be excited through that most
powerful communications medium, television.

My feelings were shared by B. Gentry Lee, the Viking Data
Analysis and Mission Planning Director, a man of extraordinary
organizational abilities. We decided, gamely, to do something
about the problem ourselves. Lee proposed that we form a

Introduction - xiii

production company devoted to the communication of science in an
engaging and accessible way. In the following months we were
approached on a number of projects. But by far the most inter-
esting was an inquiry tendered by KCET, the Public Broadcasting
Service’s outlet in Los Angeles. Eventually, we jointly agreed to
produce a thirteen-part television series oriented toward astron-
omy but with a very broad human perspective. It was to be
aimed at popular audiences, to be visually and musically stum
ning, and to engage the heart as well as the mind. We talked with
underwriters, hired an executive producer, and found ourselves
embarked on a three-year project called Cosmos. At this writing
it has an estimated worldwide viewing audience of 140 million
people, or 3 percent of the human population of the planet Earth.
It is dedicated to the proposition that the public is far more
intelligent than it has generally been given credit for; that the
deepest scientific questions on the nature and origin of the world
excite the interests and passions of enormous numbers of people.
The present epoch is a major crossroads for our civilization and
perhaps for our species. Whatever road we take, our fate is
indissolubly bound up with science. It is essential as a matter of
simple survival for us to understand science. In addition, science
is a delight; evolution has arranged that we take pleasure in
understanding—those who understand are more likely to survive.
The Cosmos television series and this book represent a hopeful
experiment in communicating some of the ideas, methods and
joys of science.

The book and the television series evolved together. In some
sense each is based on the other. Many illustrations in this book
are based on the striking visuals prepared for the television series.
But books and television series have somewhat different audi¬
ences and admit differing approaches. One of the great virtues of
a book is that it is possible for the reader to return repeatedly to
obscure or difficult passages; this is only beginning to become
possible, with the development of videotape and video-disc
technology, for television. There is much more freedom for the
author in choosing the range and depth of topics for a chapter in
a book than for the procrustean fifty-eight minutes, thirty sec¬
onds of a noncommercial television program. This book goes
more deeply into many topics than does the television series.
There are topics discussed in the book which are not treated in
the television series and vice versa. The sequence of drawings,
after Tenniel, of Alice and her friends in high- and low-gravity
environments were uncertain, at this writing, to survive the
rigors of television editing. I am delighted that these charming
illustrations by the artist, Brown, and the accompanying discus¬
sion have found a home here. On the other hand, explicit rep¬
resentations of the Cosmic Calendar, featured in the television
series, do not appear here—in part because the Cosmic Calendar
is discussed in my book The Dragons of Eden; likewise, I do not

xiv — Introduction

here discuss the life of Robert Goddard in much detail, because
there is a chapter in Brocas Brain devoted to him. But each
episode of the television series follows fairly closely the corre-
sponding chapter of this book; and I like to think that the plea-
sure of each will be enhanced by reference to the other.

For clarity, I have in a number of cases introduced an idea
more than once—the first time lightly, and with deeper passes on
subsequent appearances. This occurs, for example, in the intro-
duction to cosmic objects in Chapter 1, which are examined in
greater detail later on; or in the discussion of mutations, enzymes
and nucleic acids in Chapter 2. In a few cases, concepts are
presented out of historical order. For example, the ideas of the
ancient Greek scientists are presented in Chapter 7, well after the
discussion of Johannes Kepler in Chapter 3. But I believe an
appreciation of the Greeks can best be provided after we see
what they barely missed achieving.

Because science is inseparable from the rest of the human
endeavor, it cannot be discussed without making contact, some¬
times glancing, sometimes head-on, with a number of social,
political, religious and philosophical issues. Even in the filming of
a television series on science, the worldwide devotion to military
activities becomes intrusive. Simulating the exploration of Mars
in the Mohave Desert with a full-scale version of the Viking
Lander, we were repeatedly interrupted by the United States Air
Force, performing bombing runs in a nearby test range. In Alex¬
andria, Egypt, from nine to eleven A.M. every morning, our hotel
was the subject of practice strafing runs by the Egyptian Air
Force. In Samos, Greece, permission to film anywhere was with¬
held until the very last moment because of NATO maneuvers
and what was clearly the construction of a warren of under¬
ground and hillside emplacements for artillery and tanks. In
Czechoslovakia the use of walkie-talkies for organizing the film¬
ing logistics on a rural road attracted the attention of a Czech Air
Force fighter, which circled overhead until reassured in Czech
that no threat to national security was being perpetrated. In
Greece, Egypt and Czechoslovakia our film crews were accom¬
panied everywhere by agents of the state security apparatus.
Preliminary inquiries about filming in Kaluga, U.S.S.R., for a
proposed discussion of the life of the Russian pioneer of astro¬
nautics Konstantin Tsiolkovsky were discouraged—because, as
we later discovered, trials of dissidents were to be conducted
there. Our camera crews met innumerable kindnesses in every
country we visited; but the global military presence, the fear in
the hearts of the nations, was everywhere. The experience con¬
firmed my resolve to treat, when relevant, social questions both
in the series and in the book.

The essence of science is that it is self-correcting. New experi¬
mental results and novel ideas are continually resolving old mys¬
teries. For example, in Chapter 9 we discuss the fact that the Sun

Introduction — xv

seems to be generating too few of the elusive particles called
neutrinos. Some proposed explanations are listed. In Chapter 10
we wonder whether there is enough matter in the universe
eventually to stop the recession of distant galaxies, and whether
the universe is infinitely old and therefore uncreated. Some light
on both these questions may since have been cast in experiments
by Frederick Reines, of the University of California, who be-
lieves he has discovered (a) that neutrinos exist in three different
states, only one of which could be detected by neutrino tele-
scopes studying the Sun; and (b) that neutrinos—unlike light-
have mass, so that the gravity of all the neutrinos in space may
help to close the Cosmos and prevent it from expanding forever.
Future experiments will show whether these ideas are correct.
But they illustrate the continuing and vigorous reassessment of
received wisdom which is fundamental to the scientific enter-
prise.

On a project of this magnitude it is impossible to thank every-
one who has made a contribution. However, I would like to
acknowledge, especially, B. Gentry Lee; the Cosmos production
staff, including the senior producers Geoffrey Haines-Stiles and
David Kennard and the executive producer Adrian Malone; the
artists Jon Lomberg (who played a critical role in the original
design and organization of the Cosmos visuals), John Allison,
Adolf Schaller, Rick Sternbach, Don Davis, Brown, and Anne
Norcia; consultants Donald Goldsmith, Owen Gingerich, Paul
Fox, and Diane Ackerman; Cameron Beck; the KCET manage-
ment, particularly Greg Andorfer, who first carried KCET’s pn>
posal to us, Chuck Allen, William Lamb, and James Loper; and
the underwriters and co-producers of the Cosmos television
series, including the Atlantic Richfield Company, the Corpora-
tion for Public Broadcasting, the Arthur Vining Davis Founda-
tions, the Alfred P. Sloan Foundation, the British Broadcasting
Corporation, and Polytel International. Others who helped in
clarifying matters of fact or approach are listed at the back of the
book. The final responsibility for the content of the book is,
however, of course mine. I thank the staff at Random House,
particularly my editor, Anne Freedgood, and the book designer,
Robert Aulicino, for their capable work and their patience when
the deadlines for the television series and the book seemed to be
in conflict. I owe a special debt of gratitude to Shirley Arden, my
Executive Assistant, for typing the early drafts of this book and
ushering the later drafts through all stages of production with her
usual cheerful competence. This is only one of many ways in
which the Cosmos project is deeply indebted to her. I am more
grateful than I can say to the administration of Cornell Univer¬
sity for granting me a two-year leave of absence to pursue this
project, to my colleagues and students there, and to my col¬
leagues at NASA, JPL and on the Voyager Imaging Team.

My greatest debt for the writing of Cosmos is owed to Ann

xvi — Introduction

Druyan and Steven Soter, my co-writers in the television series.
They made fundamental and frequent contributions to the basic
ideas and their connections, to the overall intellectual structure
of the episodes, and to the felicity of style. I am deeply grateful
for their vigorous critical readings of early versions of this book,
their constructive and creative suggestions for revision through
many drafts, and their major contributions to the television script
which in many ways influenced the content of this book. The
delight I found in our many discussions is one of my chief
rewards from the Cosmos project.

Ithaca and Los Angeles
May 1980

COSMOS

A small cluster of galaxies, including a spiral and an elliptical Painting by Adolf Schaller.

THE SHORES
OF THE COSMIC OCEAN

The first men to be created and formed were called the Sorcerer of Fatal
Laughter, the Sorcerer of Night, Unkempt, and the Black Sorcerer . . . They
were endowed with intelligence, they succeeded in knowing all that there is
in the world. When they looked, instantly they saw all that is around them,
and they contemplated in turn the arc of heaven and the round face of the
earth .. . [Then the Creator said]: “They know all. . . what shall we do with
them now? Let their sight reach only to that which is near; let them see only
a little of the face of the earth! . . . Are they not by nature simple creatures
of our making? Must they also be gods?”

—The Popol Vuh of the Quiche Maya

Have you comprehended the expanse of the earth?
Where is the way to the dwelling of light,

And where is the place of darkness . . . ?

—The Book of Job

It is not from space that I must seek my dignity, but from the government of
my thought. I shall have no more if I possess worlds. By space the universe
encompasses and swallows me up like an atom; by thought I comprehend
the world.

—Blaise Pascal, Pensees

The known is finite, the unknown infinite; intellectually we stand on an islet
in the midst of an illimitable ocean of inexplicability. Our business in every
generation is to reclaim a little more land.

-T. H. Huxley, 1887

4 — Cosmos

A more extended cluster of galaxies, in¬
cluding (bottom right ) an irregular galaxy.
Painting by Adolf Schaller and Rick
Sternbach.

A rare ring galaxy, with one of its constit¬
uent stars glowing blue in a supernova ex¬
plosion. Painting by Adolf Schaller.

The Cosmos is all that is or ever was or ever will

BE. Our feeblest contemplations of the Cosmos stir us—there is a
tingling in the spine, a catch in the voice, a faint sensation, as if a
distant memory, of falling from a height. We know we are ap¬
proaching the greatest of mysteries.

The size and age of the Cosmos are beyond ordinary human
understanding. Lost somewhere between immensity and eternity
is our tiny planetary home. In a cosmic perspective, most human
concerns seem insignificant, even petty. And yet our species is
young and curious and brave and shows much promise. In the
last few millennia we have made the most astonishing and unex¬
pected discoveries about the Cosmos and our place within it,
explorations that are exhilarating to consider. They remind us
that humans have evolved to wonder, that understanding is a
joy, that knowledge is prerequisite to survival. I believe our
future depends on how well we know this Cosmos in which we
float like a mote of dust in the morning sky.

Those explorations required skepticism and imagination both.
Imagination will often carry us to worlds that never were. But
without it, we go nowhere. Skepticism enables us to distinguish
fancy from fact, to test our speculations. The Cosmos is rich
beyond measure—in elegant facts, in exquisite interrelationships,
in the subtle machinery of awe.

The Shores of the Cosmic Ocean — 5

The surface of the Earth is the shore of the cosmic ocean.

From it we have learned most of what we know. Recently, we
have waded a little out to sea, enough to dampen our toes or, at
most, wet our ankles. The water seems inviting. The ocean calls.

Some part of our being knows this is from where we came. We
long to return. These aspirations are not, I think, irreverent,
although they may trouble whatever gods may be.

The dimensions of the Cosmos are so large that using familiar
units of distance, such as meters or miles, chosen for their utility
on Earth, would make little sense. Instead, we measure distance
with the speed of light. In one second a beam of light travels Exploding radio galaxy with symmetrical
186,000 miles, nearly 300,000 kilometers or seven times around jets. Painting by Adolf Schaller.
the Earth. In eight minutes it will travel from the Sun to the
Earth. We can say the Sun is eight light-minutes away. In a year,
it crosses nearly ten trillion kilometers, about six trillion miles, of
intervening space. That unit of length, the distance light goes in a
year, is called a light-year. It measures not time but distances—
enormous distances.

The Earth is a place. It is by no means the only place. It is not
even a typical place. No planet or star or galaxy can be typical,
because the Cosmos is mostly empty. The only typical place is
within the vast, cold, universal vacuum, the everlasting night of
intergalactic space, a place so strange and desolate that, by com¬
parison, planets and stars and galaxies seem achingly rare and
lovely. If we were randomly inserted into the Cosmos, the
chance that we would find ourselves on or near a planet would
be less than one in a billion trillion trillion* (10 33 , a one followed
by 33 zeroes). In everyday life such odds are called compelling.

Worlds are precious.

From an intergalactic vantage point we would see, strewn like
sea froth on the waves of space, innumerable faint, wispy tendrils
of light. These are the galaxies. Some are solitary wanderers;
most inhabit communal clusters, huddling together, drifting end¬
lessly in the great cosmic dark. Before us is the Cosmos on the
grandest scale we know. We are in the realm of the nebulae,
eight billion light-years from Earth, halfway to the edge of the
known universe.

A galaxy is composed of gas and dust and stars—billions upon
billions of stars. Every star may be a sun to someone. Within a
galaxy are stars and worlds and, it may be, a proliferation of
living things and intelligent beings and spacefaring civilizations.

But from afar, a galaxy reminds me more of a collection of lovely
found objects—seashells, perhaps, or corals, the productions of
Nature laboring for aeons in the cosmic ocean.

There are some hundred billion (10 11 ) galaxies, each with, on

* We use the American scientific convention for large numbers: one
billion = 1,000,000,000 = 10 9 ; one trillion = 1,000,000,000,000 =
10 12 , etc. The exponent counts the number of zeroes after the one.

6 — Cosmos

The large-scale texture of the Cosmos: a small sampling from a map of the million brightest galaxies, all within a
billion light-years distance from the Earth. Each little square is a galaxy containing billions of stars. The map is based
on a telescopic survey, taking twelve years to complete, by Donald Shane and Carl Wirtanen at the University of
California’s Lick Observatory. Courtesy Stewart Brand.

The Shores of the Cosmic Ocean — 7

the average, a hundred billion stars. In all the galaxies, there are
perhaps as many planets as stars, 10 11 * 10 11 = 10 22 , ten billion
trillion. In the face of such overpowering numbers, what is the
likelihood that only one ordinary star, the Sun, is accompanied
by an inhabited planet? Why should we, tucked away in some
forgotten corner of the Cosmos, be so fortunate? To me, it seems
far more likely that the universe is brimming over with life. But
we humans do not yet know. We are just beginning our explora-
tions. From eight billion light-years away we are hard pressed to
find even the cluster in which our Milky Way Galaxy is embed¬
ded, much less the Sun or the Earth. The only planet we are sure
is inhabited is a tiny speck of rock and metal, shining feebly by
reflected sunlight, and at this distance utterly lost.

But presently our journey takes us to what astronomers on
Earth like to call the Local Group of galaxies. Several million

A barred spiral galaxy, so-called from the
bar of stars and dust which transects the
core. Painting by Jon Lomberg.

A typical spiral galaxy. Painting by Jon
Lomberg.

8 - Cosmos

The Milky Way from slightly above the
plane of its spiral arms, which are illume
nated by billions of hot, young blue stars.
The galactic core, illuminated by older,
redder stars, is seen in the distance. Paint-
ing by Jon Lomberg.

light-years across, it is composed of some twenty constituent
galaxies. It is a sparse and obscure and unpretentious cluster. One
of these galaxies is M31, seen from the Earth in the constellation
Andromeda. Like other spiral galaxies, it is a huge pinwheel of
stars, gas and dust. M31 has two small satellites, dwarf elliptical
galaxies bound to it by gravity, by the identical law of physics
that tends to keep me in my chair. The laws of nature are the
same throughout the Cosmos. We are now two million light-
years from home.

Beyond M31 is another, very similar galaxy, our own, its spiral
arms turning slowly, once every quarter billion years. Now, forty
thousand light-years from home, we find ourselves falling toward
the massive center of the Milky Way. But if we wish to find the
Earth, we must redirect our course to the remote outskirts of the
Galaxy, to an obscure locale near the edge of a distant spiral arm.

Our overwhelming impression, even between the spiral arms,
is of stars streaming by us—a vast array of exquisitely self-lumi¬
nous stars, some as flimsy as a soap bubble and so large that they
could contain ten thousand Suns or a trillion Earths; others the

The Shores of the Cosmic Ocean — 9

A globular cluster of stars, orbiting the galactic core. Painting by Anne Norcia.

10 — Cosmos

The core of the Milky Way Galaxy, seen
edge-on. Painting by Adolf Schaller.

A red giant star (foreground) and a spiral
arm in the distance, seen edge-on. Painting
by John Allison and Adolf Schaller.

size of a small town and a hundred trillion times denser than lead.
Some stars are solitary, like the Sun. Most have companions.
Systems are commonly double, two stars orbiting one another.
But there is a continuous gradation from triple systems through
loose clusters of a few dozen stars to the great globular clusters,
resplendent with a million suns. Some double stars are so close
that they touch, and starstuff flows between them. Most are as
separated as Jupiter is from the Sun. Some stars, the supernovae,
are as bright as the entire galaxy that contains them; others, the
black holes, are invisible from a few kilometers away. Some shine
with a constant brightness; others flicker uncertainly or blink
with an unfaltering rhythm. Some rotate in stately elegance;
others spin so feverishly that they distort themselves to oblate¬
ness. Most shine mainly in visible and infrared light; others are
also brilliant sources of X-rays or radio waves. Blue stars are hot
and young; yellow stars, conventional and middle-aged; red stars,
often elderly and dying; and small white or black stars are in the
final throes of death. The Milky Way contains some 400 billion
stars of all sorts moving with a complex and orderly grace. Of all
the stars, the inhabitants of Earth know close-up, so far, but one.

Each star system is an island in space, quarantined from its
neighbors by the light-years. I can imagine creatures evolving
into glimmerings of knowledge on innumerable worlds, every
one of them assuming at first their puny planet and paltry few
suns to be all that is. We grow up in isolation. Only slowly do we
teach ourselves the Cosmos.

Some stars may be surrounded by millions of lifeless and rocky
worldlets, planetary systems frozen at some early stage in their
evolution. Perhaps many stars have planetary systems rather like
our own: at the periphery, great gaseous ringed planets and icy
moons, and nearer to the center, small, warm, blue-white, cloud-

A black dust cloud, and stars embedded in
gaseous nebulosities; behind them is the
Milky Way, edge-on. Painting by Adolf
Schaller and John Allison.

The Shores of the Cosmic Ocean -11

covered worlds. On some, intelligent life may have evolved,
reworking the planetary surface in some massive engineering
enterprise. These are our brothers and sisters in the Cosmos. Are
they very different from us? What is their form, biochemistry,
neurobiology, history, politics, science, technology, art, music,
religion, philosophy? Perhaps some day we will know them.

We have now reached our own backyard, a light-year from
Earth. Surrounding our Sun is a spherical swarm of giant snow¬
balls composed of ice and rock and organic molecules: the come¬
tary nuclei. Every now and then a passing star gives a tiny
gravitational tug, and one of them obligingly careens into the
inner solar system. There the Sun heats it, the ice is vaporized,
and a lovely cometary tail develops.

We approach the planets of our system, largish worlds, cap¬
tives of the Sun, gravitationally constrained to follow nearly
circular orbits, heated mainly by sunlight. Pluto, covered with
methane ice and accompanied by its solitary giant moon Charon,
is illuminated by a distant Sun, which appears as no more than a
bright point of light in a pitch-black sky. The giant gas worlds,
Neptune, Uranus, Saturn—the jewel of the solar system—and
Jupiter all have an entourage of icy moons. Interior to the region
of gassy planets and orbiting icebergs are the warm, rocky prov¬
inces of the inner solar system. There is, for example, the red
planet Mars, with soaring volcanoes, great rift valleys, enormous
planet-wide sandstorms, and, just possibly, some simple forms of
life. All the planets orbit the Sun, the nearest star, an inferno of
hydrogen and helium gas engaged in thermonuclear reactions,
flooding the solar system with light.

Finally, at the end of all our wanderings, we return to our tiny,
fragile, blue-white world, lost in a cosmic ocean vast beyond our
most courageous imaginings. It is a world among an immensity of
others. It may be significant only for us. The Earth is our home,
our parent. Our kind of life arose and evolved here. The human
species is coming of age here. It is on this world that we developed

The interior of a black dust cloud, where
young stars are just beginning to shine.
Nearby icy planets are evaporating and
the released gas is being blown away, like a
comet’s tail. Painting by Adolf Schaller.

A rapidly rotating, flashing pulsar at the
center of a supernova remnant. Painting
by John Allison.

The nebula, or illuminated gas cloud, sur¬
rounding a supernova explosion. Painting
by John Allison.

12 — Cosmos

The other side of the Orion Nebula, un-
observable from Earth. The three blue
stars comprise the belt of Orion in the
conventional terrestrial constellation.
Painting by John Allison.

An approach to the interior of the Great
Nebula in Orion. The gas is shining in
several colors, stimulated by the light of
hot stars. Part of the nebula is obscured by
a cloud of absorbing dust. The Orion
Nebula can be seen from the Earth with
the naked eye. Painting by John Allison.

our passion for exploring the Cosmos, and it is here that we
are, in some pain and with no guarantees, working out our des^
tiny.

Welcome to the planet Earth—a place of blue nitrogen skies,
oceans of liquid water, cool forests and soft meadows, a world
positively rippling with life. In the cosmic perspective it is, as I
have said, poignantly beautiful and rare; but it is also, for the
moment, unique. In all our journeying through space and time, it
is, so far, the only world on which we know with certainty that
the matter of the Cosmos has become alive and aware. There
must be many such worlds scattered through space, but our
search for them begins here, with the accumulated wisdom of the
men and women of our species, garnered at great cost over a
million years. We are privileged to live among brilliant and
passionately inquisitive people, and in a time when the search for
knowledge is generally prized. Human beings, born ultimately of
the stars and now for a while inhabiting a world called Earth,
have begun their long voyage home.

The discovery that the Earth is a little world was made, as so

The Shores of the Cosmic Ocean - 13

We emerge through the dark dust of the
Orion Nebula to its hidden interior, bril¬
liantly illuminated by hot young stars.
Painting by John Allison.

The Pleiades, young stars that have re^
cently left the nebulae in which they were
born, still trailing clouds of illuminated
dust. Painting by Adolf Schaller.

14 - Cosmos

Pluto, covered with methane frost, and its
giant moon Charon. Usually the outer-
most planet, Plutos orbit has recently can
ried it interior to the orbit of Neptune.
Painting by John Allison.

Saturn. Model by Adolf Schaller, Rick
Sternbach and John Allison.

Io, the innermost large moon of Jupiter.
Model by Don Davis.

many important human discoveries were, in the ancient Near
East, in a time some humans call the third century b.c., in the
greatest metropolis of the age, the Egyptian city of Alexandria.
Here there lived a man named Eratosthenes. One of his envious
contemporaries called him “Beta,” the second letter of the Greek
alphabet, because, he said, Eratosthenes was second best in the
world in everything. But it seems clear that in almost everything
Eratosthenes was “Alpha.” He was an astronomer, historian, ge-
ographer, philosopher, poet, theater critic and mathematician.
The titles of the books he wrote range from Astronomy to On
Freedom from Pain . He was also the director of the great library
of Alexandria, where one day he read in a papyrus book that in
the southern frontier outpost of Syene, near the first cataract of
the Nile, at noon on June 21 vertical sticks cast no shadows. On
the summer solstice, the longest day of the year, as the hours
crept toward midday, the shadows of temple columns grew
shorter. At noon, they were gone. A reflection of the Sun could
then be seen in the water at the bottom of a deep well. The Sun
was directly overhead.

It was an observation that someone else might easily have
ignored. Sticks, shadows, reflections in wells, the position of the
Sun—of what possible importance could such simple everyday
matters be? But Eratosthenes was a scientist, and his musings on
these commonplaces changed the world; in a way, they made the
world. Eratosthenes had the presence of mind to do an experi¬
ment, actually to observe whether in Alexandria vertical sticks
cast shadows near noon on June 21. And, he discovered, sticks
do.

Eratosthenes asked himself how, at the same moment, a stick
in Syene could cast no shadow and a stick in Alexandria, far to
the north, could cast a pronounced shadow. Consider a map of
ancient Egypt with two vertical sticks of equal length, one stuck
in Alexandria, the other in Syene. Suppose that, at a certain
moment, each stick casts no shadow at all. This is perfectly easy
to understand—provided the Earth is flat. The Sun would then
be directly overhead. If the two sticks cast shadows of equal
length, that also would make sense on a flat Earth: the Sun’s rays
would then be inclined at the same angle to the two sticks. But
how could it be that at the same instant there was no shadow at
Syene and a substantial shadow at Alexandria? (See p. 16.)

The only possible answer, he saw, was that the surface of the
Earth is curved. Not only that: the greater the curvature, the
greater the difference in the shadow lengths. The Sun is so far
away that its rays are parallel when they reach the Earth. Sticks
placed at different angles to the Sun’s rays cast shadows of dif¬
ferent lengths. For the observed difference in the shadow
lengths, the distance between Alexandria and Syene had to be
about seven degrees along the surface of the Earth; that is, if you
imagine the sticks extending down to the center of the Earth,

The Shores of the Cosmic Ocean — 15

they would there intersect at an angle of seven degrees. Seven
degrees is something like one-fiftieth of three hundred and sixty
degrees, the full circumference of the Earth. Eratosthenes knew
that the distance between Alexandria and Syene was approxi-
mately 800 kilometers, because he hired a man to pace it out.
Eight hundred kilometers times 50 is 40,000 kilometers: so that
must be the circumference of the Earth.*

This is the right answer. Eratosthenes’ only tools were sticks,
eyes, feet and brains, plus a taste for experiment. With them he
deduced the circumference of the Earth with an error of only a
few percent, a remarkable achievement for 2,200 years ago. He
was the first person accurately to measure the size of a planet.

The Mediterranean world at that time was famous for seafar-
ing. Alexandria was the greatest seaport on the planet. Once you
knew the Earth to be a sphere of modest diameter, would you
not be tempted to make voyages of exploration, to seek out
undiscovered lands, perhaps even to attempt to sail around the
planet? Four hundred years before Eratosthenes, Africa had been
circumnavigated by a Phoenician fleet in the employ of the
Egyptian Pharaoh Necho. They set sail, probably in frail open
boats, from the Red Sea, turned down the east coast of Africa up
into the Atlantic, returning through the Mediterranean. This
epic journey took three years, about as long as a modern Voyager
spacecraft takes to fly from Earth to Saturn.

After Eratosthenes’ discovery, many great voyages were an
tempted by brave and venturesome sailors. Their ships were tiny.
They had only rudimentary navigational instruments. They used
dead reckoning and followed coastlines as far as they could. In an
unknown ocean they could determine their latitude, but not their
longitude, by observing, night after night, the position of the
constellations with respect to the horizon. The familiar constel¬
lations must have been reassuring in the midst of an unexplored
ocean. The stars are the friends of explorers, then with seagoing
ships on Earth and now with spacefaring ships in the sky. After
Eratosthenes, some may have tried, but not until the time of
Magellan did anyone succeed in circumnavigating the Earth.
What tales of daring and adventure must earlier have been re¬
counted as sailors and navigators, practical men of the world,
gambled their lives on the mathematics of a scientist from Alex¬
andria?

In Eratosthenes’ time, globes were constructed portraying the
Earth as viewed from space; they were essentially correct in the
well-explored Mediterranean but became more and more inaccu¬
rate the farther they strayed from home. Our present knowledge
of the Cosmos shares this disagreeable but inevitable feature. In

* Or if you like to measure things in miles, the distance between Alex¬
andria and Syene is about 500 miles, and 500 miles x 50 = 25,000
miles.

Olympus Mons (Mount Olympus), a giant
volcanic construct, 30 kilometers high and
500 kilometers across, on the surface of
Mars. Model by Don Davis.

A portrait of the Sun. Painting by Anne
Norcia.

Parallel Sun Rays

From the shadow length in Alexandria,
the angle A can be measured. But from
simple geometry (“if two parallel straight
lines are transected by a third line, the
alternate interior angles are equal”), angle
B equals angle A. So by measuring the
shadow length in Alexandria, Eratos¬
thenes concluded that Syene was A = B
= 7° away on the circumference of the
Earth.

16 — Cosmos

Looking up from the bottom of the well
in ancient Syene, near present-day Abu
Simbel, in Egypt, which according to local
tradition is the origin of Eratosthenes’
study of the circumference of the Earth.

the first century, the Alexandrian geographer Strabo wrote:

Those who have returned from an attempt to circumnavi¬
gate the Earth do not say they have been prevented by an
opposing continent, for the sea remained perfectly open,
but, rather, through want of resolution and scarcity of pro¬
vision. . . . Eratosthenes says that if the extent of the At¬
lantic Ocean were not an obstacle, we might easily pass by
sea from Iberia to India. ... It is quite possible that in the
temperate zone there may be one or two habitable Earths.

. . . Indeed, if [this other part of the world] is inhabited, it is
not inhabited by men such as exist in our parts, and we
should have to regard it as another inhabited world.

Humans were beginning to venture, in almost every sense that
matters, to other worlds.

The subsequent exploration of the Earth was a worldwide
endeavor, including voyages from as well as to China and Poly¬
nesia. The culmination was, of course, the discovery of America
by Christopher Columbus and the journeys of the following few
centuries, which completed the geographical exploration of the
Earth. Columbus’ first voyage is connected in the most straight¬
forward way with the calculations of Eratosthenes. Columbus
was fascinated by what he called “the Enterprise of the Indies,” a
project to reach Japan, China and India not by following the
coastline of Africa and sailing East but rather by plunging boldly
into the unknown Western ocean—or, as Eratosthenes had said
with startling prescience, “to pass by sea from Iberia to India.”
Columbus had been an itinerant peddler of old maps and an

A flat map of ancient Egypt. When
the Sun is directly overhead, verti¬
cal obelisks cast no shadows in
Alexandria or in Syene.

A flat map of ancient Egypt. When
the Sun is not directly overhead,
vertical obelisks cast shadows of
equal length in Alexandria and in
Syene.

A curved map of ancient Egypt.
The Sun can be directly overhead in
Syene but not in Alexandria, thus
accounting for the fact that the
obelisk in Syene casts no shadow,
while that in Alexandria casts a
pronounced shadow.

The Shores of the Cosmic Ocean — 17

Maps of the world. In the time of Homer,
the world was thought to extend no fan
ther than the basin of the Mediterranean
(which means “middle of the Earth”), sun
rounded by a world ocean. Significant inn
provements were added by Eratosthenes
and by Ptolemy. By the eleventh century,
ancient geographical knowledge had been
well-preserved (and extended to China) by
the Arabs, but almost totally lost among
the Europeans, who imagined a flat Earth
centered on Jerusalem. The last map be¬
fore the discovery of America (shown in
outline ) is that of the Florentine astron¬
omer Toscanelli. Columbus probably car¬
ried Toscanelli’s map with him on his first
voyage. The name America, commem¬
orating Columbus’ friend Amerigo Ves¬
pucci, was suggested in Waldseemuller’s
(1507) book, An Introduction to Cosmog¬
raphy. Reproduced courtesy Scottish
Geographical Magazine.

assiduous reader of the books by and about the ancient geogra¬
phers, including Eratosthenes, Strabo and Ptolemy. But for the
Enterprise of the Indies to work, for ships and crews to survive
the long voyage, the Earth had to be smaller than Eratosthenes
had said. Columbus therefore cheated on his calculations, as the
examining faculty of the University of Salamanca quite correctly
pointed out. He used the smallest possible circumference of the
Earth and the greatest eastward extension of Asia he could find
in all the books available to him, and then exaggerated even
those. Had the Americas not been in the way, Columbus’ expe¬
ditions would have failed utterly.

The Earth is now thoroughly explored. It no longer promises
new continents or lost lands. But the technology that allowed us

WHEEL MAP

Tzuago Hundi XI Coat.

18 — Cosmos

to explore and inhabit the most remote regions of the Earth now
permits us to leave our planet, to venture into space, to explore
other worlds. Leaving the Earth, we are now able to view it from
above, to see its solid spherical shape of Eratosthenian dimen¬
sions and the outlines of its continents, confirming that many of
the ancient mapmakers were remarkably competent. What a
pleasure such a view would have given to Eratosthenes and the
other Alexandrian geographers.

It was in Alexandria, during the six hundred years beginning
around 300 B.C., that human beings, in an important sense, began
the intellectual adventure that has led us to the shores of space.
But of the look and feel of that glorious marble city, nothing
remains. Oppression and the fear of learning have obliterated
almost all memory of ancient Alexandria. Its population was
marvelously diverse. Macedonian and later Roman soldiers,

Egyptian priests, Greek aristocrats, Phoenician sailors, Jewish
merchants, visitors from India and sub-Saharan Africa—

everyone, except the vast slave population—lived together in
harmony and mutual respect for most of the period of Alexan¬
dria’s greatness.

The city was founded by Alexander the Great and constructed
by his former bodyguard. Alexander encouraged respect for alien
cultures and the open-minded pursuit of knowledge. According
to tradition—and it does not much matter whether it really hap¬
pened—he descended beneath the Red Sea in the world’s first
diving bell. He encouraged his generals and soldiers to marry

Persian and Indian women. He respected the gods of other na¬

tions. He collected exotic lifeforms, including an elephant for
Aristotle, his teacher. His city was constructed on a lavish scale,
to be the world center of commerce, culture and learning. It was
graced with broad avenues thirty meters wide, elegant architec¬
ture and statuary, Alexander’s monumental tomb, and an enor¬
mous lighthouse, the Pharos, one of the seven wonders of the
ancient world.

But the greatest marvel of Alexandria was the library and its
associated museum (literally, an institution devoted to the spe¬
cialties of the Nine Muses). Of that legendary library, the most
that survives today is a dank and forgotten cellar of the Sera-
peum, the library annex, once a temple and later reconsecrated to
knowledge. A few moldering shelves may be its only physical
remains. Yet this place was once the brain and glory of the
greatest city on the planet, the first true research institute in the
history of the world. The scholars of the library studied the
entire Cosmos. Cosmos is a Greek word for the order of the
universe. It is, in a way, the opposite of Chaos . It implies the deep
interconnectedness of all things. It conveys awe for the intricate
and subtle way in which the universe is put together. Here was a
community of scholars, exploring physics, literature, medicine,
astronomy, geography, philosophy, mathematics, biology, and

The Shores of the Cosmic Ocean — 19

Cheng Ho, c» 1430 AD . LaPerouse, 1785

engineering. Science and scholarship had come of age. Genius Exploratory routes of some of the great

flourished there. The Alexandrian Library is where we humans voyages of discovery,

first collected, seriously and systematically, the knowledge of the
world.

In addition to Eratosthenes, there was the astronomer Hip¬
parchus, who mapped the constellations and estimated the
brightness of the stars; Euclid, who brilliantly systematized ge¬
ometry and told his king, struggling over a difficult mathematical
problem, “There is no royal road to geometry”; Dionysius of
Thrace, the man who defined the parts of speech and did for the
study of language what Euclid did for geometry; Herophilus, the
physiologist who firmly established that the brain rather than the
heart is the seat of intelligence; Heron of Alexandria, inventor of
gear trains and steam engines and the author of Automata , the
first book on robots; Apollonius of Perga, the mathematician
who demonstrated the forms of the conic sections*—ellipse, pa¬
rabola and hyperbola—the curves, as we now know, followed in
their orbits by the planets, the comets and the stars; Archimedes,
the greatest mechanical genius until Leonardo da Vinci; and the
astronomer and geographer Ptolemy, who compiled much of
what is today the pseudoscience of astrology: his Earth-centered

* So called because they can be produced by slicing through a cone at
various angles. Eighteen centuries later, the writings of Apollonius on
conic sections would be employed by Johannes Kepler in understanding
for the first time the movement of the planets.

20 — Cosmos

Serapis, a synthetic god, combining Greek
and Egyptian attributes, introduced into
Egypt by Ptolemy I in the third century
B.C. He bolds a scepter as Cerberus, the
three-headed dog of the underworld,
waits at bis feet.

Alexander the Great, with crook and flail,
and pharaonic headgear, as he might have
appeared in the Library of Alexandria.

The lost books of Aristarchus, as they
might have been stored on the shelves of
the Alexandrian Library.

universe held sway for 1,500 years, a reminder that intellectual
capacity is no guarantee against being dead wrong. And among
those great men was a great woman, Hypatia, mathematician and
astronomer, the last light of the library, whose martyrdom was
bound up with the destruction of the library seven centuries after
its founding, a story to which we will return.

The Greek Kings of Egypt who succeeded Alexander were
serious about learning. For centuries, they supported research
and maintained in the library a working environment for the best
minds of the age. It contained ten large research halls, each
devoted to a separate subject; fountains and colonnades; botani-
cal gardens; a zoo; dissecting rooms; an observatory; and a great
dining hall where, at leisure, was conducted the critical discussion
of ideas.

The heart of the library was its collection of books. The
organizers combed all the cultures and languages of the world.
They sent agents abroad to buy up libraries. Commercial ships
docking in Alexandria were searched by the police—not for com
traband, but for books. The scrolls were borrowed, copied and
then returned to their owners. Accurate numbers are difficult to
estimate, but it seems probable that the Library contained half a
million volumes, each a handwritten papyrus scroll. What hap¬
pened to all those books? The classical civilization that created
them disintegrated, and the library itself was deliberately de¬
stroyed. Only a small fraction of its works survived, along with a
few pathetic scattered fragments. And how tantalizing those bits
and pieces are! We know, for example, that there was on the
library shelves a book by the astronomer Aristarchus of Samos,
who argued that the Earth is one of the planets, which like them
orbits the Sun, and that the stars are enormously far away. Each
of these conclusions is entirely correct, but we had to wait nearly
two thousand years for their rediscovery. If we multiply by a
hundred thousand our sense of loss for this work of Aristarchus,
we begin to appreciate the grandeur of the achievement of classi¬
cal civilization and the tragedy of its destruction.

We have far surpassed the science known to the ancient
world. But there are irreparable gaps in our historical knowledge.
Imagine what mysteries about our past could be solved with a
borrower’s card to the Alexandrian Library. We know of a
three-volume history of the world, now lost, by a Babylonian
priest named Berossus. The first volume dealt with the interval
from the Creation to the Flood, a period he took to be 432,000
years or about a hundred times longer than the Old Testament
chronology. I wonder what was in it.

The ancients knew that the world is very old. They sought to
look into the distant past. We now know that the Cosmos is far
older than they ever imagined. We have examined the universe
in space and seen that we live on a mote of dust circling a
humdrum star in the remotest corner of an obscure galaxy. And

The Shores of the Cosmic Ocean - 21

if we are a speck in the immensity of space, we also occupy an The Great Hall of the ancient Library of

instant in the expanse of ages. We now know that our unf Alexandria in Egypt. A reconstruction

verse—or at least its most recent incarnation—is some fifteen or based on scholarly evidence,
twenty billion years old. This is the time since a remarkable
explosive event called the Big Bang. At the beginning of this
universe, there were no galaxies, stars or planets, no life or civili-
zations, merely a uniform, radiant fireball filling all of space. The
passage from the Chaos of the Big Bang to the Cosmos that we
are beginning to know is the most awesome transformation of
matter and energy that we have been privileged to glimpse. And
until we find more intelligent beings elsewhere, we are ourselves
the most spectacular of all the transformations—the remote de¬
scendants of the Big Bang, dedicated to understanding and fur¬
ther transforming the Cosmos from which we spring.

Life on Earth: A scanning electron micrograph of a mite, with hibiscus pollen. Courtesy JeamPaul Revel, California
Institute of Technology.

Chapter II

ONEVOICE

IN THE COSMIC FUGUE

I am bidden to surrender myself to the Lord of the Worlds.

He it is who created you of the dust. . .

—The Koran, Sura 40

The oldest of all philosophies, that of Evolution, was bound hand and foot
and cast into utter darkness during the millennium of theological scholastic^
ism. But Darwin poured new lifeblood into the ancient frame; the bonds
burst, and the revivified thought of ancient Greece has proved itself to be a
more adequate expression of the universal order of things than any of the
schemes which have been accepted by the credulity and welcomed by the
superstition of 70 later generations of men.

-T. H. Huxley, 1887

Probably all the organic beings which have ever lived on this earth have
descended from some one primordial form, into which life was first
breathed. . . . There is grandeur in this view of life . . . that, whilst this
planet has gone cycling on according to the fixed law of gravity, from so
simple a beginning endless forms most beautiful and most wonderful have
been, and are being, evolved.

—Charles Darwin, The Origin of Species, 1859

A community of matter appears to exist throughout the visible universe, for
the stars contain many of the elements which exist in the Sun and Earth. It is
remarkable that the elements most widely diffused through the host of stars
are some of those most closely connected with the living organisms of our
globe, including hydrogen, sodium, magnesium, and iron. May it not be
that, at least, the brighter stars are like our Sun, the upholding and energiz¬
ing centres of systems of worlds, adapted to be the abode of living beings?

—William Huggins, 1865

24 — Cosmos

All MY LIFE I HAVE WONDERED about the possibility of life
elsewhere. What would it be like? Of what would it be made?
All living things on our planet are constructed of organic mole¬
cules—complex microscopic architectures in which the carbon
atom plays a central role. There was once a time before life,
when the Earth was barren and utterly desolate. Our world is
now overflowing with life. How did it come about? How, in the
absence of life, were carbon-based organic molecules made? How
did the first living things arise? How did life evolve to produce
beings as elaborate and complex as we, able to explore the mys¬
tery of our own origins?

Dark cloud of interstellar dust. Such cloud
complexes are filled with simple organic
gases; the individual dust grains them¬
selves may be composed in part of organic
molecules. Painting by Adolf Schaller.

And on the countless other planets that may circle other suns,
is there life also? Is extraterrestrial life, if it exists, based on the
same organic molecules as life on Earth? Do the beings of other
worlds look much like life on Earth? Or are they stunningly
different—other adaptations to other environments? What else is
possible? The nature of life on Earth and the search for life
elsewhere are two sides of the same question—the search for who
we are.

In the great dark between the stars there are clouds of gas and
dust and organic matter. Dozens of different kinds of organic
molecules have been found there by radio telescopes. The abun¬
dance of these molecules suggests that the stuff of life is every¬
where. Perhaps the origin and evolution of life is, given enough
time, a cosmic inevitability. On some of the billions of planets in
the Milky Way Galaxy, life may never arise. On others, it may
arise and die out, or never evolve beyond its simplest forms. And
on some small fraction of worlds there may develop intelligences
and civilizations more advanced than our own.

Occasionally someone remarks on what a lucky coincidence it
is that the Earth is perfectly suitable for life—moderate tempera¬
tures, liquid water, oxygen atmosphere, and so on. But this is, at
least in part, a confusion of cause and effect. We earthlings are
supremely well adapted to the environment of the Earth because
we grew up here. Those earlier forms of life that were not well
adapted died. We are descended from the organisms that did
well. Organisms that evolve on a quite different world will
doubtless sing its praises too.

All life on Earth is closely related. We have a common organic
chemistry and a common evolutionary heritage. As a result, our
biologists are profoundly limited. They study only a single kind
of biology, one lonely theme in the music of life. Is this faint and
reedy tune the only voice for thousands of light-years? Or is there
a kind of cosmic fugue, with themes and counterpoints, disso¬
nances and harmonies, a billion different voices playing the life
music of the Galaxy?

Let me tell you a story about one little phrase in the music of
life on Earth. In the year 1185, the Emperor of Japan was a
seven-year-old boy named Antoku. He was the nominal leader of

One Voice in the Cosmic Fugue — 25

a clan of samurai called the Heike, who were engaged in a long
and bloody war with another samurai clan, the Genji. Each
asserted a superior ancestral claim to the imperial throne. Their
decisive naval encounter, with the Emperor on board ship, oc¬
curred at Danno-ura in the Japanese Inland Sea on April 24,
1185. The Heike were outnumbered, and outmaneuvered. Many
were killed. The survivors, in massive numbers, threw them¬
selves into the sea and drowned. The Lady Nii, grandmother of
the Emperor, resolved that she and Antoku would not be cap¬
tured by the enemy. What happened next is told in The Tale of
the Heike:

The Emperor was seven years old that year but looked
much older. He was so lovely that he seemed to shed a
brilliant radiance and his long, black hair hung loose far
down his back. With a look of surprise and anxiety on his
face he asked the Lady Nii, “Where are you to take me?”

She turned to the youthful sovereign, with tears stream¬
ing down her cheeks, and . . . comforted him, binding up
his long hair in his dove-colored robe. Blinded with tears,
the child sovereign put his beautiful, small hands together.

He turned first to the East to say farewell to the god of Ise
and then to the West to repeat the Nembutsu [a prayer to
the Amida Buddha]. The Lady Nii took him tightly in her
arms and with the words “In the depths of the ocean is our
capitol,” sank with him at last beneath the waves.

A samurai in the armor of feudal Japan. In
Japanese literature, The Tale of the Heike
has a significance comparable to that of
the Iliad in the literature of the West.
Courtesy, C.C. Lee.

The entire Heike battle fleet was destroyed. Only forty-three
women survived. These ladies-in-waiting of the imperial court
were forced to sell flowers and other favors to the fishermen near
the scene of the battle. The Heike almost vanished from history.
But a ragtag group of the former ladies-in-waiting and their off¬
spring by the fisherfolk established a festival to commemorate
the battle. It takes place on the twenty-fourth of April every year
to this day. Fishermen who are the descendants of the Heike
dress in hemp and black headgear and proceed to the Akama
shrine which contains the mausoleum of the drowned Emperor.
There they watch a play portraying the events that followed the
Battle of Danno-ura. For centuries after, people imagined that
they could discern ghostly samurai armies vainly striving to bail
the sea, to cleanse it of blood and defeat and humiliation.

The fishermen say the Heike samurai wander the bottoms of
the Inland Sea still—in the form of crabs. There are crabs to be
found here with curious markings on their backs, patterns and
indentations that disturbingly resemble the face of a samurai.
When caught, these crabs are not eaten, but are returned to the
sea in commemoration of the doleful events at Danno-ura.

This legend raises a lovely problem. How does it come about
that the face of a warrior is incised on the carapace of a crab? The
answer seems to be that humans made the face. The patterns on
the crab’s shell are inherited. But among crabs, as among people,

A Heike crab from the Japanese Inland
Sea.

26 — Cosmos

there are many different hereditary lines. Suppose that, by
chance, among the distant ancestors of this crab, one arose with a
pattern that resembled, even slightly, a human face. Even before
the battle of Danno-ura, fishermen may have been reluctant to
eat such a crab. In throwing it back, they set in motion an
evolutionary process: If you are a crab and your carapace is
ordinary, the humans will eat you. Your line will leave fewer
descendants. If your carapace looks a little like a face, they will
throw you back. You will leave more descendants. Crabs had a
substantial investment in the patterns on their carapaces. As the
generations passed, of crabs and fishermen alike, the crabs with
patterns that most resembled a samurai face survived preferen-
dally until eventually there was produced not just a human face,
not just a Japanese face, but the visage of a fierce and scowling
samurai. All this has nothing to do with what the crabs want .
Selection is imposed from the outside. The more you look like a
samurai, the better are your chances of survival. Eventually,
there come to be a great many samurai crabs.

This process is called artificial selection. In the case of the
Heike crab it was effected more or less unconsciously by the
fishermen, and certainly without any serious contemplation by
the crabs. But humans have deliberately selected which plants
and animals shall live and which shall die for thousands of years.
We are surrounded from babyhood by familiar farm and domes-
tic animals, fruits and trees and vegetables. Where do they come
from? Were they once free-living in the wild and then induced to
adopt a less strenuous life on the farm? No, the truth is quite
different. They are, most of them, made by us.

Ten thousand years ago, there were no dairy cows or ferret
hounds or large ears of com. When we domesticated the ances-
tors of these plants and animals—sometimes creatures who
looked quite different—we controlled their breeding. We made
sure that certain varieties, having properties we consider desir¬
able, preferentially reproduced. When we wanted a dog to help
us care for sheep, we selected breeds that were intelligent, obedi¬
ent and had some pre-existing talent to herd, which is useful for
animals who hunt in packs. The enormous distended udders of
dairy cattle are the result of a human interest in milk and cheese.
Our com, or maize, has been bred for ten thousand generations
to be more tasty and nutritious than its scrawny ancestors; in¬
deed, it is so changed that it cannot even reproduce without
human intervention.

The essence of artificial selection—for a Heike crab, a dog, a
cow or an ear of com—is this: Many physical and behavioral traits
of plants and animals are inherited. They breed true. Humans, for
whatever reason, encourage the reproduction of some varieties
and discourage the reproduction of others. The variety selected
for preferentially reproduces; it eventually becomes abundant;
the variety selected against becomes rare and perhaps extinct.

One Voice in the Cosmic Fugue — 27

But if humans can make new varieties of plants and animals,
must not nature do so also? This related process is called natural
selection. That life has changed fundamentally over the aeons is
entirely clear from the alterations we have made in the beasts and
vegetables during the short tenure of humans on Earth, and from
the fossil evidence. The fossil record speaks to us unambiguously
of creatures that once were present in enormous numbers and
that have now vanished utterly.* Far more species have become
extinct in the history of the Earth than exist today; they are the
terminated experiments of evolution.

The genetic changes induced by domestication have occurred
very rapidly. The rabbit was not domesticated until early medb
eval times (it was bred by French monks in the belief that new^
born bunnies were fish and therefore exempt from the
prohibitions against eating meat on certain days in the Church
calendar); coffee in the fifteenth century; the sugar beet in the
nineteenth century; and the mink is still in the earliest stages of
domestication. In less than ten thousand years, domestication has
increased the weight of wool grown by sheep from less than one
kilogram of rough hairs to ten or twenty kilograms of uniform,
fine down; or the volume of milk given by cattle during a lacta^
tion period from a few hundred to a million cubic centimeters. If
artificial selection can make such major changes in so short a
period of time, what must natural selection, working over billions
of years, be capable of? The answer is all the beauty and diversity
of the biological world. Evolution is a fact, not a theory.

That the mechanism of evolution is natural selection is the
great discovery associated with the names of Charles Darwin and
Alfred Russel Wallace. More than a century ago, they stressed
that nature is prolific, that many more animals and plants are
born than can possibly survive and that therefore the envirom
ment selects those varieties which are, by accident, better suited
for survival. Mutations—sudden changes in heredity—breed true.
They provide the raw material of evolution. The environment
selects those few mutations that enhance survival, resulting in a
series of slow transformations of one lifeform into another, the
origin of new speciesd

* Although traditional Western religious opinion stoutly maintained the
contrary, as for example, the 1770 opinion of John Wesley: “Death is
never permitted to destroy [even] the most inconsiderable species.”

t In the Mayan holy book the Popol Vuh, the various forms of life are
described as unsuccessful attempts by gods with a predilection for ex-
periment to make people. Early tries were far off the mark, creating the
lower animals; the penultimate attempt, a near miss, made the monkeys.
In Chinese myth, human beings arose from the body lice of a god named
Pan Ku. In the eighteenth century, de Buffon proposed that the Earth
was much older than Scripture suggested, that the forms of life somehow
changed slowly over the millennia, but that the apes were the forlorn

28 — Cosmos

Darwin’s words in The Origin of Species were:

Man does not actually produce variability; he only uninten-
tionally exposes organic beings to new conditions of life,
and then Nature acts on the organisation, and causes varia¬
bility. But man can and does select the variations given to
him by Nature, and thus accumulate them in any desired
manner. He thus adapts animals and plants for his own
benefit or pleasure. He may do this methodically, or he may
do it unconsciously by preserving the individuals most use¬
ful to him at the time, without any thought of altering the
breed. . . . There is no obvious reason why the principles
which have acted so efficiently under domestication should
not have acted under Nature. . . . More individuals are
born than can possibly survive. . . . The slightest advantage
in one being, of any age or during any season, over those
with which it comes into competition, or better adaptation
in however slight a degree to the surrounding physical con¬
ditions, will turn the balance.

T. H. Huxley, the most effective nineteenth-century defender
and popularizer of evolution, wrote that the publications of Dar¬
win and Wallace were a “flash of light, which to a man who has
lost himself in a dark night, suddenly reveals a road which,
whether it takes him straight home or not, certainly goes his
way. . . . My reflection, when I first made myself master of the
central idea of the ‘Origin of Species,’ was, ‘How extremely stupid
not to have thought of that!’ I suppose that Columbus’ compan¬
ions said much the same. . . . The facts of variability, of the
struggle for existence, of adaptation to conditions, were no¬
torious enough; but none of us had suspected that the road to the
heart of the species problem lay through them, until Darwin and
Wallace dispelled the darkness.”

Many people were scandalized—some still are—at both ideas,
evolution and natural selection. Our ancestors looked at the
elegance of life on Earth, at how appropriate the structures of
organisms are to their functions, and saw evidence for a Great
Designer. The simplest one-celled organism is a far more complex
machine than the finest pocket watch. And yet pocket watches
do not spontaneously self-assemble, or evolve, in slow stages, on
their own, from, say, grandfather clocks. A watch implies a
watchmaker. There seemed to be no way in which atoms and
molecules could somehow spontaneously fall together to create
organisms of such awesome complexity and subtle functioning as
grace every region of the Earth. That each living thing was
specially designed, that one species did not become another, were
notions perfectly consistent with what our ancestors with their

descendants of people. While these notions do not precisely reflect the
evolutionary process described by Darwin and Wallace, they are an¬
ticipations of it—as are the views of Democritus, Empedocles and other
early Ionian scientists who are discussed in Chapter 7.

One Voice in the Cosmic Fugue — 29

limited historical records knew about life. The idea that every
organism was meticulously constructed by a Great Designer pro-
vided a significance and order to nature and an importance to
human beings that we crave still A Designer is a natural, ap¬
pealing and altogether human explanation of the biological
world. But, as Darwin and Wallace showed, there is another
way, equally appealing, equally human, and far more compelling:
natural selection, which makes the music of life more beautiful as
the aeons pass.

The fossil evidence could be consistent with the idea of a
Great Designer; perhaps some species are destroyed when the
Designer becomes dissatisfied with them, and new experiments
are attempted on an improved design. But this notion is a little
disconcerting. Each plant and animal is exquisitely made; should
not a supremely competent Designer have been able to make the
intended variety from the start? The fossil record implies trial and
error, an inability to anticipate the future, features inconsistent
with an efficient Great Designer (although not with a Designer of
a more remote and indirect temperament).

When I was a college undergraduate in the early 1950’s, I was
fortunate enough to work in the laboratory of H. J. Muller, a
great geneticist and the man who discovered that radiation pro¬
duces mutations. Muller was the person who first called my
attention to the Heike crab as an example of artificial selection.
To learn the practical side of genetics, I spent many months
working with fruit flies, Drosophila melanogaster (which means
the black-bodied dew-lover)—tiny benign beings with two wings
and big eyes. We kept them in pint milk bottles. We would cross
two varieties to see what new forms emerged from the rear¬
rangement of the parental genes, and from natural and induced
mutations. The females would deposit their eggs on a kind of
molasses the technicians placed inside the bottles; the bottles
were stoppered; and we would wait two weeks for the fertilized
eggs to become larvae, the larvae pupae, and the pupae to emerge
as new adult fruit flies.

One day I was looking through a low-power binocular micro¬
scope at a newly arrived batch of adult Drosophila immobilized
with a little ether, and was busily separating the different varie¬
ties with a camels-hair brush. To my astonishment, I came upon
something very different: not a small variation such as red eyes
instead of white, or neck bristles instead of no neck bristles. This
was another, and very well-functioning, kind of creature with
much more prominent wings and long feathery antennae. Fate
had arranged, I concluded, that an example of a major evolu¬
tionary change in a single generation, the very thing Muller had
said could never happen, should take place in his own laboratory.
It was my unhappy task to explain it to him.

With heavy heart I knocked on his office door. “Come in,”
came the muffled cry. I entered to discover the room darkened

30 — Cosmos

except for a single small lamp illuminating the stage of the mu
croscope at which he was working. In these gloomy surroundings
I stumbled through my explanation. I had found a very different
kind of fly. I was sure it had emerged from one of the pupae in
the molasses. I didn’t mean to disturb Muller but .. . “Does it
look more like Lepidoptera than Diptera?” he asked, his face
illuminated from below. I didn’t know what this meant, so he
had to explain: “Does it have big wings? Does it have feathery
antennae?” I glumly nodded assent.

Muller switched on the overhead light and smiled benignly. It
was an old story. There was a kind of moth that had adapted to
Drosophila genetics laboratories. It was nothing like a fruit fly and
wanted nothing to do with fruit flies. What it wanted was the
fruit flies’ molasses. In the brief time that the laboratory techni-
cian took to unstopper and stopper the milk bottle—for example,
to add fruit flies—the mother moth made a dive-bombing pass,
dropping her eggs on the run into the tasty molasses. I had not
discovered a macro-mutation. I had merely stumbled upon an¬
other lovely adaptation in nature, itself the product of micromu¬
tation and natural selection.

The secrets of evolution are death and time—the deaths of
enormous numbers of lifeforms that were imperfectly adapted to
the environment; and time for a long succession of small muta¬
tions that were by accident adaptive, time for the slow accumula¬
tion of patterns of favorable mutations. Part of the resistance to
Darwin and Wallace derives from our difficulty in imagining the
passage of the millennia, much less the aeons. What does seventy
million years mean to beings who live only one-millionth as long?
We are like butterflies who flutter for a day and think it is
forever.

What happened here on Earth may be more or less typical of
the evolution of life on many worlds; but in such details as the
chemistry of proteins or the neurology of brains, the story of life
on Earth may be unique in all the Milky Way Galaxy. The Earth
condensed out of interstellar gas and dust some 4-6 billion years
ago. We know from the fossil record that the origin of life
happened soon after, perhaps around 4.0 billion years ago, in the
ponds and oceans of the primitive Earth. The first living things
were not anything so complex as a one-celled organism, already a
highly sophisticated form of life. The first stirrings were much
more humble. In those early days, lightning and ultraviolet light
from the Sun were breaking apart the simple hydrogen-rich mol¬
ecules of the primitive atmosphere, the fragments spontaneously
recombining into more and more complex molecules. The prod¬
ucts of this early chemistry were dissolved in the oceans, forming
a kind of organic soup of gradually increasing complexity, until
one day, quite by accident, a molecule arose that was able to
make crude copies of itself, using as building blocks other molecules

One Voice in the Cosmic Fugue — 31

in the soup. (We will return to this subject later.)

This was the earliest ancestor of deoxyribonucleic acid, DNA,
the master molecule of life on Earth. It is shaped like a ladder
twisted into a helix, the rungs available in four different molecu¬
lar parts, which constitute the four letters of the genetic code.
These rungs, called nucleotides, spell out the hereditary instruc¬
tions for making a given organism. Every lifeform on Earth has a
different set of instructions, written out in essentially the same
language. The reason organisms are different is the differences in
their nucleic acid instructions. A mutation is a change in a nu¬
cleotide, copied in the next generation, which breeds true. Since
mutations are random nucleotide changes, most of them are
harmful or lethal, coding into existence nonfunctional enzymes.
It is a long wait before a mutation makes an organism work
better. And yet it is that improbable event, a small beneficial
mutation in a nucleotide a ten-millionth of a centimeter across,
that makes evolution go.

Four billion years ago, the Earth was a molecular Garden of
Eden. There were as yet no predators. Some molecules repro¬
duced themselves inefficiently, competed for building blocks and
left crude copies of themselves. With reproduction, mutation
and the selective elimination of the least efficient varieties, evo¬
lution was well under way, even at the molecular level. As time
went on, they got better at reproducing. Molecules with special¬
ized functions eventually joined together, making a kind of mo¬
lecular collective—the first cell. Plant cells today have tiny
molecular factories, called chloroplasts, which are in charge of
photosynthesis—the conversion of sunlight, water and carbon
dioxide into carbohydrates and oxygen. The cells in a drop of
blood contain a different sort of molecular factory, the mito¬
chondrion, which combines food with oxygen to extract useful
energy. These factories exist in plant and animal cells today but
may once themselves have been free-living cells.

By three billion years ago, a number of one-celled plants had
joined together, perhaps because a mutation prevented a single
cell from separating after splitting in two. The first multicellular
organisms had evolved. Every cell of your body is a kind of
commune, with once free-living parts all banded together for the
common good. And you are made of a hundred trillion cells. We
are, each of us, a multitude.

Sex seems to have been invented around two billion years ago.
Before then, new varieties of organisms could arise only from the
accumulation of random mutations—the selection of changes,
letter by letter, in the genetic instructions. Evolution must have
been agonizingly slow. With the invention of sex, two organisms
could exchange whole paragraphs, pages and books of their
DNA code, producing new varieties ready for the sieve of selec¬
tion. Organisms are selected to engage in sex—the ones that find
it uninteresting quickly become extinct. And this is true not only

32 — Cosmos

Trilobite fossils. At top, three blind sped-
mens from half a billion years ago. In
center and bottom are later, more highly
evolved specimens, with their eyes beam
tifully preserved. The trilobites are one of
many products of the Cambrian explo-
sion. Reprinted from Trilobites by Rio-
cardo Levi-Setti by permission of the
University of Chicago Press. Copyright
© 1975 by the University of Chicago.

of the microbes of two billion years ago. We humans also have a
palpable devotion to exchanging segments of DNA today.

By one billion years ago, plants, working cooperatively, had
made a stunning change in the environment of the Earth. Green
plants generate molecular oxygen. Since the oceans were by now
filled with simple green plants, oxygen was becoming a major
constituent of the Earth’s atmosphere, altering it irreversibly from
its original hydrogen-rich character and ending the epoch of
Earth history when the stuff of life was made by nonbiological
processes. But oxygen tends to make organic molecules fall to
pieces. Despite our fondness for it, it is fundamentally a poison
for unprotected organic matter. The transition to an oxidizing
atmosphere posed a supreme crisis in the history of life, and a
great many organisms, unable to cope with oxygen, perished. A
few primitive forms, such as the botulism and tetanus bacilli,
manage to survive even today only in oxygen-free environments.
The nitrogen in the Earth’s atmosphere is much more chemically
inert and therefore much more benign than oxygen. But it, too, is
biologically sustained. Thus, 99 percent of the Earth’s atmo¬
sphere is of biological origin. The sky is made by life.

For most of the four billion years since the origin of life, the
dominant organisms were microscopic blue-green algae, which
covered and filled the oceans. Then some 600 million years ago,
the monopolizing grip of the algae was broken and an enormous
proliferation of new lifeforms emerged, an event called the Cam¬
brian explosion. Life had arisen almost immediately after the
origin of the Earth, which suggests that life may be an inevitable
chemical process on an Earth-like planet. But life did not evolve
much beyond blue-green algae for three billion years, which
suggests that large lifeforms with specialized organs are hard to
evolve, harder even than the origin of life. Perhaps there are
many other planets that today have abundant microbes but no
big beasts and vegetables.

Soon after the Cambrian explosion, the oceans teemed with
many different forms of life. By 500 million years ago there were
vast herds of trilobites, beautifully constructed animals, a little
like large insects; some hunted in packs on the ocean floor. They
stored crystals in their eyes to detect polarized light. But there are
no trilobites alive today; there have been none for 200 million
years. The Earth used to be inhabited by plants and animals of
which there is today no living trace. And of course every species
now on the planet once did not exist. There is no hint in the old
rocks of animals like us. Species appear, abide more or less briefly
and then flicker out.

Before the Cambrian explosion species seem to have suc¬
ceeded one another rather slowly. In part this may be because the
richness of our information declines rapidly the farther into the
past we peer; in the early history of our planet, few organisms had
hard parts and soft beings leave few fossil remains. But in part the

One Voice in the Cosmic Fugue — 33

sluggish rate of appearance of dramatically new forms before the
Cambrian explosion is real; the painstaking evolution of cell
structure and biochemistry is not immediately reflected in the
external forms revealed by the fossil record. After the Cambrian
explosion, exquisite new adaptations followed one another with
comparatively breathtaking speed. In rapid succession, the first
fish and the first vertebrates appeared; plants, previously re-
stricted to the oceans, began the colonization of the land; the first
insect evolved, and its descendants became the pioneers in the
colonization of the land by animals; winged insects arose together
with the amphibians, creatures something like the lungfish, able
to survive both on land and in the water; the first trees and the
first reptiles appeared; the dinosaurs evolved; the mammals
emerged, and then the first birds; the first flowers appeared; the
dinosaurs became extinct; the earliest cetaceans, ancestors to the
dolphins and whales, arose and in the same period the pri-
mates—the ancestors of the monkeys, the apes and the humans.
Less than ten million years ago, the first creatures who closely
resembled human beings evolved, accompanied by a spectacular
increase in brain size. And then, only a few million years ago, the
first true humans emerged.

Human beings grew up in forests; we have a natural affinity for
them. How lovely a tree is, straining toward the sky. Its leaves
harvest sunlight to photosynthesize, so trees compete by shad'
owing their neighbors. If you look closely you can often see two
trees pushing and shoving with languid grace. Trees are great and
beautiful machines, powered by sunlight, taking in water from
the ground and carbon dioxide from the air, converting these
materials into food for their use and ours. The plant uses the
carbohydrates it makes as an energy source to go about its planty
business. And we animals, who are ultimately parasites on the
plants, steal the carbohydrates so we can go about our business.
In earing the plants we combine the carbohydrates with oxygen
dissolved in our blood because of our penchant for breathing air,
and so extract the energy that makes us go. In the process we
exhale carbon dioxide, which the plants then recycle to make
more carbohydrates. What a marvelous cooperative arrange-
ment—plants and animals each inhaling the other’s exhalations, a
kind of planet-wide mutual mouth-to-stoma resuscitation, the
entire elegant cycle powered by a star 150 million kilometers
away.

There are tens of billions of known kinds of organic mole¬
cules. Yet only about fifty of them are used for the essential
activities of life. The same patterns are employed over and over
again, conservatively, ingeniously for different functions. And at
the very heart of life on Earth—the proteins that control cell
chemistry, and the nucleic acids that carry the hereditary instruc¬
tions—we find these molecules to be essentially identical in all the
plants and animals. An oak tree and I are made of the same stuff.

Close relatives: an oak tree and a human.

34 - Cosmos

Photomicrograph of human blood cells,
courtesy D. Golde, UCLA. The dough'
nut'shaped cells are normal red blood
cells, which carry oxygen. The larger
clumps are white blood cells, which engulf
foreign microorganisms.

If you go far enough back, we have a common ancestor.

The living cell is a regime as complex and beautiful as the
realm of the galaxies and the stars. The elaborate machinery of
the cell has been painstakingly evolved over four billion years.
Fragments of food are transmogrified into cellular machinery.
Today’s white blood cell is yesterday’s creamed spinach. How
does the cell do it? Inside is a labyrinthine and subtle architecture
that maintains its own structure, transforms molecules, stores
energy and prepares for self-replication. If we could enter a cell,
many of the molecular specks we would see would be protein
molecules, some in frenzied activity, others merely waiting. The
most important proteins are enzymes, molecules that control the
cell’s chemical reactions. Enzymes are like assemblydine workers,
each specializing in a particular molecular job: Step 4 in the
construction of the nucleotide guanosine phosphate, say, or Step
11 in the dismantling of a molecule of sugar to extract energy, the
currency that pays for getting the other cellular jobs done. But
the enzymes do not run the show. They receive their instruc¬
tions—and are in fact themselves constructed—on orders sent
from those in charge. The boss molecules are the nucleic acids.
They live sequestered in a forbidden city in the deep interior, in
the nucleus of the cell.

If we plunged through a pore into the nucleus of the cell, we
would find something that resembles an explosion in a spaghetti
factory—a disorderly multitude of coils and strands, which are
the two kinds of nucleic acids: DNA, which knows what to do,
and RNA, which conveys the instructions issued by DNA to the
rest of the cell. These are the best that four billion years of
evolution could produce, containing the full complement of in¬
formation on how to make a cell, a tree or a human work. The
amount of information in human DNA, if written out in ordi¬
nary language, would occupy a hundred thick volumes. What is
more, the DNA molecules know how to make, with only very
rare exceptions, identical copies of themselves. They know ex¬
traordinarily much.

DNA is a double helix, the two intertwined strands resembling
a “spiral” staircase. It is the sequence or ordering of the nucleo¬
tides along either of the constituent strands that is the language
of life. During reproduction, the helices separate, assisted by a
special unwinding protein, each synthesizing an identical copy of
the other from nucleotide building blocks floating about nearby
in the viscous liquid of the cell nucleus. Once the unwinding is
underway, a remarkable enzyme called DNA polymerase helps
ensure that the copying works almost perfectly. If a mistake is
made, there are enzymes which snip the mistake out and replace
the wrong nucleotide by the right one. These enzymes are a
molecular machine with awesome powers.

In addition to making accurate copies of itself—which is what
heredity is about—nuclear DNA directs the activities of the

One Voice in the Cosmic Fugue — 35

cell—which is what metabolism is about—by synthesizing another
nucleic acid called messenger RNA, each of which passes to the
extranuclear provinces and there controls the construction, at the
right time, in the right place, of one enzyme. When all is done, a
single enzyme molecule has been produced, which then goes
about ordering one particular aspect of the chemistry of the cell

Human DNA is a ladder a billion nucleotides long. Most
possible combinations of nucleotides are nonsense: they would
cause the synthesis of proteins that perform no useful function.
Only an extremely limited number of nucleic acid molecules are
any good for lifeforms as complicated as we. Even so, the number
of useful ways of putting nucleic acids together is stupefyingly
large—probably far greater than the total number of electrons
and protons in the universe. Accordingly, the number of possible
individual human beings is vastly greater than the number that
have ever lived: the untapped potential of the human species is
immense. There must be ways of putting nucleic acids together
that will function far better—by any criterion we choose—than
any human being who has ever lived. Fortunately, we do not yet
know how to assemble alternative sequences of nucleotides to
make alternative kinds of human beings. In the future we may
well be able to assemble nucleotides in any desired sequence, to
produce whatever characteristics we think desirable—a sobering
and disquieting prospect.

Evolution works through mutation and selection. Mutations
might occur during replication if the enzyme DNA polymerase
makes a mistake. But it rarely makes a mistake. Mutations also
occur because of radioactivity or ultraviolet light from the Sun or
cosmic rays or chemicals in the environment, all of which can
change the nucleotides or tie the nucleic acids up in knots. If the
mutation rate is too high, we lose the inheritance of four billion
years of painstaking evolution. If it is too low, new varieties will
not be available to adapt to some future change in the environ-
ment. The evolution of life requires a more or less precise bah
ance between mutation and selection. When that balance is
achieved, remarkable adaptations occur.

A change in a single DNA nucleotide causes a change in a
single amino acid in the protein for which that DNA codes. The
red blood cells of people of European descent look roughly glob¬
ular. The red blood cells of some people of African descent look
like sickles or crescent moons. Sickle cells carry less oxygen and
consequently transmit a kind of anemia. They also provide major
resistance against malaria. There is no question that it is better to
be anemic than to be dead. This major influence on the function
of the blood—so striking as to be readily apparent in photographs
of red blood cells—is the result of a change in a single nucleotide
out of the ten billion in the DNA of a typical human cell. We are
still ignorant of the consequences of changes in most of the other
nucleotides.

Scanning electron micrographs at succes¬
sively higher magnifications of human
blood cells. Most of the cells at top are red
blood cells. The cell being approached,
filling the picture at bottom, is a B-
lymphocyte, which we enter on the next
page. It is about one ten-thousandth of a
centimeter across. Courtesy Jean-Paul
Revel, California Institute of Technology.

36 — Cosmos

One Voice in the Cosmic Fugue — 37

A voyage into the living cell: The human lymphocyte (page 35) is fairly typical of higher organisms on Earth. Cells
are characteristically about 100 micrometers (^m) across (=0.1 millimeters, the smallest object the human eye
can see unaided). Passing through the cell membrane, about 0.01 jim thick, we encounter ropy extensions of the
membrane (a), called the endoplasmic reticulum (ER) which plays a major role in the architecture of the cell. Within
the cytoplasm (b), we see a few of the numerous ribosomes (e.g., the cluster of five dark globules), some attached to
proteins or messenger RNA, sent from the DNA in the nucleus. Ribosomes are about 0.02 jim across. The threads are
microtubules, coursing toward the nucleus (light blue, in background). Shaped like sausages, the mitochondria (b, c),
about 1 \i m thick and 10 ji m long, power the cell. They have their own DNA; their ancestors may once have been
freediving microbes. The ER is connected to the cell nucleus (c, d). When we plunge through a tunneklike pore (0.05
jim across) in the nuclear membrane (e), we emerge into the nucleus (f), filled with strands of DNA, and resembling “an
explosion in a spaghetti factory.” Five full turns of twists of each DNA helix are shown in (g), corresponding to about
4,000 constituent atoms. One full molecule of human DNA has about a hundred million such twists and about a
hundred billion atoms, as many as the number of stars in a typical galaxy. One such twist is seen in (h). Each of the two
green strands marks the backbone of the molecule, made of alternating sugars and phosphates. Shown in yellow, buff,
red, and brown are the nitrogen-containing nucleotide bases that form the links or cross-struts between the two
helices. (They represent molecules called adenine, thymine, guanine and cytosine. Adenine bonds only with thymine;
guanine bonds only with cytosine.) The language of life is determined by the sequence of nucleotide bases. The
individual spheres in this precise model correspond to atoms of hydrogen (the smallest), carbon, nitrogen, oxygen and
phosphorus. The DNA unwinding enzyme (called a helicase), in blue (i), supervises the breaking of chemical bonds
between adjacent nucleotide bases preparatory to DNA reproduction: A molecule of the enzyme DNA polymerase
(blue) supervises the attachment of nearby building blocks onto one of the strands of DNA (j). Each strand of an
original double helix copies the other in DNA self-replication. When an arriving nucleotide does not match its
partner, DNA polymerase removes it, an activity that molecular biologists call “proofreading.” A rare proofreading
error makes a mutation: the genetic instructions have been changed. A typical human DNA polymerase will add a few
dozen nucleotides every second. Ten thousand of them may be working on a DNA molecule at any given moment
during its replication. Such exquisite molecular machines exist in every plant, animal and microorganism on Earth.
Paintings (a-f) by Frank Armitage, John Allison and Adolf Schaller. Computer graphics (g-j) by James Blinn and Pat
Cole, Jet Propulsion Laboratory. All colors are arbitrary.

38 - Cosmos

Synthesis of organic matter at the Labora-
tory for Planetary Studies, Cornell Uni-
versity. A transparent mixture of the gases
methane, ammonia, hydrogen sulfide and
water begins to be sparked in a glass flask
(top). After a few hours of sparking, the
interior of the flask is coated ( bottom) with
a rich variety of organic molecules rele-
vant for the origin of life. Courtesy Bk
shun Khare.

We humans look rather different than a tree. Without a doubt
we perceive the world differently than a tree does. But down
deep, at the molecular heart of life, the trees and we are essen-
dally identical. We both use nucleic acids for heredity; we both
use proteins as enzymes to control the chemistry of our cells.
Most significantly, we both use precisely the same code book for
translating nucleic acid information into protein information, as
do virtually all the other creatures on the planet.* The usual
explanation of this molecular unity is that we are, all of us—trees
and people, angler fish and slime molds and paramecia—de-
scended from a single and common instance of the origin of life
in the early history of our planet. How did the critical molecules
then arise?

In my laboratory at Cornell University we work on, among
other things, prebiological organic chemistry, making some notes
of the music of life. We mix together and spark the gases of the
primitive Earth: hydrogen, water, ammonia, methane, hydrogen
sulfide—all present, incidentally, on the planet Jupiter today and
throughout the Cosmos. The sparks correspond to lightning—
also present on the ancient Earth and on modern Jupiter. The
reaction vessel is initially transparent: the precursor gases are
entirely invisible. But after ten minutes of sparking, we see a
strange brown pigment slowly streaking the sides of the vessel.
The interior gradually becomes opaque, covered with a thick
brown tar. If we had used ultraviolet light—simulating the early
Sun—the results would have been more or less the same. The tar
is an extremely rich collection of complex organic molecules,
including the constituent parts of proteins and nucleic acids. The
stuff of life, it turns out, can be very easily made.

Such experiments were first performed in the early 1950’s by
Stanley Miller, then a graduate student of the chemist Harold
Urey. Urey had argued compellingly that the early atmosphere of
the Earth was hydrogen-rich, as is most of the Cosmos; that the
hydrogen has since trickled away to space from Earth, but not
from massive Jupiter; and that the origin of life occurred before
the hydrogen was lost. After Urey suggested that such gases be
sparked, someone asked him what he expected to make in such
an experiment. Urey replied, “Beilstein.” Beilstein is the massive

* The genetic code turns out to be not quite identical in all parts of all
organisms on the Earth. At least a few cases are known where the
transcription from DNA information into protein information in a mi-
tochondrion employs a different code book from that used by the genes
in the nucleus of the very same cell. This points to a long evolutionary
separation of the genetic codes of mitochondria and nuclei, and is com
sistent with the idea that mitochondria were once free-living organisms
incorporated into the cell in a symbiotic relationship billions of years ago.
The development and emerging sophistication of that symbiosis is, in¬
cidentally, one answer to the question of what evolution was doing
between the origin of the cell and the proliferation of many-celled or¬
ganisms in the Cambrian explosion.

One Voice in the Cosmic Fugue — 39

German compendium in 28 volumes, listing all the organic moh
ecules known to chemists.

Using only the most abundant gases that were present on the
early Earth and almost any energy source that breaks chemical
bonds, we can produce the essential building blocks of life. But in
our vessel are only the notes of the music of life—not the music
itself. The molecular building blocks must be put together in the
correct sequence. Life is certainly more than the amino acids that
make up its proteins and the nucleotides that make up its nucleic
acids. But even in ordering these building blocks into long-chain
molecules, there has been substantial laboratory progress. Amino
acids have been assembled under primitive Earth conditions into
molecules resembling proteins. Some of them feebly control use-
ful chemical reactions, as enzymes do. Nucleotides have been put
together into strands of nucleic acid a few dozen units long.
Under the right circumstances in the test tube, short nucleic acids
can synthesize identical copies of themselves.

No one has so far mixed together the gases and waters of the
primitive Earth and at the end of the experiment had something
crawl out of the test tube. The smallest living things known, the
viroids, are composed of less than 10,000 atoms. They cause
several different diseases in cultivated plants and have probably
most recently evolved from more complex organisms rather than
from simpler ones. Indeed, it is hard to imagine a still simpler
organism that is in any sense alive. Viroids are composed exclu-
sively of nucleic acid, unlike the viruses, which also have a
protein coat. They are no more than a single strand of RNA with
either a linear or a closed circular geometry. Viroids can be so
small and still thrive because they are thoroughgoing, unremit¬
ting parasites. Like viruses, they simply take over the molecular
machinery of a much larger, well-functioning cell and change it
from a factory for making more cells into a factory for making
more viroids.

The smallest known free-living organisms are the PPLO
(pleuropneumonia-like organisms) and similar small beasts. They
are composed of about fifty million atoms. Such organisms, hav¬
ing to be more self-reliant, are also more complicated than viroids
and viruses. But the environment of the Earth today is not
extremely favorable for simple forms of life. You have to work
hard to make a living. You have to be careful about predators. In
the early history of our planet, however, when enormous
amounts of organic molecules were being produced by sunlight in
a hydrogen-rich atmosphere, very simple, nonparasitic organisms
had a fighting chance. The first living things may have been
something like free-living viroids only a few hundred nucleotides
long. Experimental work on making such creatures from scratch
may begin by the end of the century. There is still much to be
understood about the origin of life, including the origin of the
genetic code. But we have been performing such experiments for

40 - Cosmos

A science fiction alien by Edd Cartier.
Compare with the scanning electron mi¬
crograph of a terrestrial mite, shown as the
frontispiece of this chapter. Source: Ham-
lyn Group Picture Library.

only some thirty years. Nature has had a four-billion-year head
start. All in all, we have not done badly.

Nothing in such experiments is unique to the Earth. The initial
gases, and the energy sources, are common throughout the
Cosmos. Chemical reactions like those in our laboratory vessels
may be responsible for the organic matter in interstellar space and
the amino acids found in meteorites. Some similar chemistry
must have occurred on a billion other worlds in the Milky Way
Galaxy. The molecules of life fill the Cosmos.

But even if life on another planet has the same molecular
chemistry as life here, there is no reason to expect it to resemble
familiar organisms. Consider the enormous diversity of living
things on Earth, all of which share the same planet and an
identical molecular biology. Those other beasts and vegetables
are probably radically different from any organism we know
here. There may be some convergent evolution because there
may be only one best solution to a certain environmental prob¬
lem—something like two eyes, for example, for binocular vision
at optical frequencies. But in general the random character of the
evolutionary process should create extraterrestrial creatures very
different from any that we know.

I cannot tell you what an extraterrestrial being would look like.

I am terribly limited by the fact that I know only one kind of life,
life on Earth. Some people—science fiction writers and artists, for
instance—have speculated on what other beings might be like. I
am skeptical about most of those extraterrestrial visions. They
seem to me to rely too much on forms of life we already know.
Any given organism is the way it is because of a long series of
individually unlikely steps. I do not think life anywhere else
would look very much like a reptile, or an insect or a human-
even with such minor cosmetic adjustments as green skin, pointy
ears and antennae. But if you pressed me, I could try to imagine
something rather different:

On a giant gas planet like Jupiter, with an atmosphere rich in
hydrogen, helium, methane, water and ammonia, there is no
accessible solid surface, but rather a dense, cloudy atmosphere in
which organic molecules may be falling from the skies like manna
from heaven, like the products of our laboratory experiments.
However, there is a characteristic impediment to life on such a
planet: the atmosphere is turbulent, and down deep it is very hot.
An organism must be careful that it is not carried down and fried.

To show that life is not out of the question in such a very
different planet, my Cornell colleague E. E. Salpeter and I have
made some calculations. Of course, we cannot know precisely
what life would be like in such a place, but we wanted to see if,
within the laws of physics and chemistry, a world of this sort
could possibly be inhabited.

One way to make a living under these conditions is to repro¬
duce before you are fried and hope that convection will carry

One Voice in the Cosmic Fugue — 41

some of your offspring to the higher and cooler layers of the
atmosphere. Such organisms could he very little. We call them
sinkers. But you could also be a floater, some vast hydrogen
balloon pumping helium and heavier gases out of its interior and
leaving only the lightest gas, hydrogen; or a hot-air balloon,
staying buoyant by keeping your interior warm, using energy
acquired from the food you eat. Like familiar terrestrial balloons,
the deeper a floater is carried, the stronger is the buoyant force
returning it to the higher, cooler, safer regions of the atmosphere.
A floater might eat preformed organic molecules, or make its
own from sunlight and air, somewhat as plants do on Earth. Up
to a point, the bigger a floater is, the more efficient it will be.
Salpeter and I imagined floaters kilometers across, enormously
larger than the greatest whale that ever was, beings the size of
cities.

The floaters may propel themselves through the planetary
atmosphere with gusts of gas, like a ramjet or a rocket. We
imagine them arranged in great lazy herds for as far as the eye can
see, with patterns on their skin, an adaptive camouflage implying
that they have problems, too. Because there is at least one other
ecological niche in such an environment; hunting. Hunters are
fast and maneuverable. They eat the floaters both for their or¬
ganic molecules and for their store of pure hydrogen. Hollow
sinkers could have evolved into the first floaters, and self-
propelled floaters into the first hunters. There cannot be very
many hunters, because if they consume all the floaters, the hunt¬
ers themselves will perish.

Physics and chemistry permit such lifeforms. Art endows
them with a certain charm. Nature, however, is not obliged to
follow our speculations. But if there are billions of inhabited
worlds in the Milky Way Galaxy, perhaps there will be a few
populated by the sinkers, floaters and hunters which our imagi¬
nations, tempered by the laws of physics and chemistry, have
generated.

Biology is more like history than it is like physics. You have to
know the past to understand the present. And you have to know
it in exquisite detail. There is as yet no predictive theory of
biology, just as there is not yet a predictive theory of history.
The reasons are the same: both subjects are still too complicated
for us. But we can know ourselves better by understanding other
cases. The study of a single instance of extraterrestrial life, no
matter how humble, will deprovincialize biology. For the first
time, the biologists will know what other kinds of life are possi¬
ble. When we say the search for life elsewhere is important, we
are not guaranteeing that it will be easy to find—only that it is
very much worth seeking.

We have heard so far the voice of life on one small world
only. But we have at last begun to listen for other voices in the
cosmic fugue.

ROBERTA.

tlBINLBIIM

RED PLANET

ILL'J J

A variety of standard science fiction
aliens.

42 — Cosmos

Hunters and floaters, imaginary but possible lifeforms in the atmosphere of a Jupiter-like planet. The cloud patterns
are mainly those discovered by Voyager on Jupiter. Ice crystals in the high atmosphere are responsible for the halo
around the Sun. Details on facing page show (a) a herd of floaters in the updrafts over an atmospheric storm system; (b)
floaters through a break in the clouds; (c) floaters high above ammonia cirrus clouds; (d and e) close-ups of floaters:
note camouflage patterns, a protective coloration against hunters; (f) a hunter in attack configuration; (g) a herd of
camouflaged hunters at high altitudes. Paintings by Adolf Schaller.

One Voice in the Cosmic Fugue - 43

i.-fc

- &&

A decorative detail from a paper computer to determine the size of the Earth’s shadow on the Moon during a lunar
eclipse. Printed in 1540, three years before the publication of Copernicus’ book, and thirtyone years before the birth
of Johannes Kepler. From the Astronomicum Caesarium of Petrus Apianus, Ingolstadt, Germany.

Chapter III

THE HARMONY OF
WORLDS

Do you know the ordinances of the heavens?

Can you establish their rule on Earth?

—The Book of Job

All welfare and adversity that come to man and other creatures come
through the Seven and the Twelve. Twelve Signs of the Zodiac, as the
Religion says, are the twelve commanders on the side of light; and the seven
planets are said to be the seven commanders on the side of darkness. And
the seven planets oppress all creation and deliver it over to death and all
manner of evil: for the twelve signs of the Zodiac and the seven planets rule
the fate of the world.

—The late Zoroastrian book, the Menok i Xrat

To tell us that every species of thing is endowed with an occult specific
quality by which it acts and produces manifest effects, is to tell us nothing;
but to derive two or three general principles of motion from phenomena,
and afterwards to tell us how the properties and actions of all corporeal
things follow from those manifest principles, would be a very great step.

—Isaac Newton, Optics

We do not ask for what useful purpose the birds do sing, for song is their
pleasure since they were created for singing. Similarly, we ought not to ask
why the human mind troubles to fathom the secrets of the heavens. . . .
The diversity of the phenomena of Nature is so great, and the treasures
hidden in the heavens so rich, precisely in order that the human mind shall
never be lacking in fresh nourishment.

—Johannes Kepler, Mysteriurn Cosmographicum

46 — Cosmos

The northern constellation called The Big
Dipper in North America. In France it is
called The Casserole.

The same group of seven stars (connected
by red lines) in England is called The
Plough.

In China, it was imagined to be the com
stellation of The Celestial Bureaucrat,
seated on a cloud and accompanied on his
rounds about the north pole of the sky by
his eternally hopeful petitioners. The
above animated and photographed by
Judy Kreijanovsky (Cartoon Kitchen).

If we lived on a planet where nothing ever changed,

there would be little to do. There would be nothing to figure out.
There would be no impetus for science. And if we lived in an
unpredictable world, where things changed in random or very
complex ways, we would not be able to figure things out. Again,
there would be no such thing as science. But we live in an
imbetween universe, where things change, but according to pat-
terns, rules, or, as we call them, laws of nature. If I throw a stick
up in the air, it always falls down. If the sun sets in the west, it
always rises again the next morning in the east. And so it be¬
comes possible to figure things out. We can do science, and with
it we can improve our lives.

Human beings are good at understanding the world. We
always have been. We were able to hunt game or build fires only
because we had figured something out. There was a time before
television, before motion pictures, before radio, before books.
The greatest part of human existence was spent in such a time.
Over the dying embers of the campfire, on a moonless night, we
watched the stars.

The night sky is interesting. There are patterns there. Without
even trying, you can imagine pictures. In the northern sky, for
example, there is a pattern, or constellation, that looks a little
ursine. Some cultures call it the Great Bear. Others see quite
different images. These pictures are not, of course, really in the
night sky; we put them there ourselves. We were hunter folk,
and we saw hunters and dogs, bears and young women, all
manner of things of interest to us. When seventeenth-century
European sailors first saw the southern skies they put objects of
seventeenth-century interest in the heavens—toucans and pea¬
cocks, telescopes and microscopes, compasses and the sterns of
ships. If the constellations had been named in the twentieth
century, I suppose we would see bicycles and refrigerators in the
sky, rock-and-roll “stars” and perhaps even mushroom clouds—a
new set of human hopes and fears placed among the stars.

Occasionally our ancestors would see a very bright star with a
tail, glimpsed for just a moment, hurtling across the sky. They
called it a falling star, but it is not a good name: the old stars are
still there after the falling star falls. In some seasons there are
many falling stars; in others very few. There is a kind of regularity
here as well.

Like the Sun and the Moon, stars always rise in the east and set
in the west, taking the whole night to cross the sky if they pass
overhead. There are different constellations in different seasons.
The same constellations always rise at the beginning of autumn,
say. It never happens that a new constellation suddenly rises out
of the east. There is an order, a predictability, a permanence
about the stars. In a way, they are almost comforting.

Certain stars rise just before or set just after the Sun—and at
times and positions that vary with the seasons. If you made

The Harmony of Worlds — 47

careful observations of the stars and recorded them over many
years, you could predict the seasons. You could also measure the
time of year by noting where on the horizon the Sun rose each
day. In the skies was a great calendar, available to anyone with
dedication and ability and the means to keep records.

Our ancestors built devices to measure the passing of the
seasons. In Chaco Canyon, in New Mexico, there is a great
roofless ceremonial kiva or temple, dating from the eleventh
century. On June 21, the longest day of the year, a shaft of

sunlight enters a window at dawn and slowly moves so that it

covers a special niche. But this happens only around June 21. I

imagine the proud Anasazi people, who described themselves as

“The Ancient Ones,” gathered in their pews every June 21,
dressed in feathers and rattles and turquoise to celebrate the
power of the Sun. They also monitored the apparent motion of
the Moon: the twenty-eight higher niches in the kiva may repre¬
sent the number of days for the Moon to return to the same
position among the constellations. These people paid close at¬
tention to the Sun and the Moon and the stars. Other devices
based on similar ideas are found at Angkor Wat in Cambodia;
Stonehenge in England; Abu Simbel in Egypt; Chichen Itza in
Mexico; and the Great Plains in North America.

Some alleged calendrical devices may just possibly be due to
chance—an accidental alignment of window and niche on June
21, say. But there are other devices wonderfully different. At one
locale in the American Southwest is a set of three upright slabs
which were moved from their original position about 1,000 years
ago. A spiral a little like a galaxy has been carved in the rock. On
June 21, the first day of summer, a dagger of sunlight pouring
through an opening between the slabs bisects the spiral; and on
December 21, the first day of winter, there are two daggers of
sunlight that flank the spiral, a unique application of the midday
sun to read the calendar in the sky.

Why did people all over the world make such an effort to
learn astronomy? We hunted gazelles and antelope and buffalo
whose migrations ebbed and flowed with the seasons. Fruits and
nuts were ready to be picked in some times but not in others.
When we invented agriculture, we had to take care to plant and
harvest our crops in the right season. Annual meetings of far-
flung nomadic tribes were set for prescribed times. The ability to
read the calendar in the skies was literally a matter of life and
death. The reappearance of the crescent moon after the new
moon; the return of the Sun after a total eclipse; the rising of the
Sun in the morning after its troublesome absence at night were
noted by people around the world: these phenomena spoke to
our ancestors of the possibility of surviving death. Up there in
the skies was also a metaphor of immortality.

The wind whips through the canyons in the American South¬
west, and there is no one to hear it but us—a reminder of the

In medieval Europe, the same stars were
seen as Charles’ Wain, or Wagon.

The ancient Greeks and Native Ameri¬
cans saw these stars as the tail of The
Great Bear—Ursa Major.

This larger group of stars, containing The
Big Dipper, was portrayed by the ancient
Egyptians as a curious procession of a bull,
a horizontal man or god, and a hippopot¬
amus with a crocodile on its back. The
above animated and photographed by
Judy Kreijanovsky (Cartoon Kitchen).

48 — Cosmos

Casa Bonita, an eleventh-century Anasazi
apartment house of 800 rooms.

Casa Rincanada, an Anasazi temple with a
near perfect east-west alignment.

Interior of Casa Rincanada, showing six
higher and two lower niches.

40,000 generations of thinking men and women who preceded
us, about whom we know almost nothing, upon whom our
civilization is based.

As ages passed, people learned from their ancestors. The more
accurately you knew the position and movements of the Sun and
Moon and stars, the more reliably you could predict when to
hunt, when to sow and reap, when to gather the tribes. As
precision of measurement improved, records had to be kept, so
astronomy encouraged observation and mathematics and the de¬
velopment of writing.

But then, much later, another rather curious idea arose, an
assault by mysticism and superstition into what had been largely
an empirical science. The Sun and stars controlled the seasons,
food, warmth. The Moon controlled the tides, the life cycles of
many animals, and perhaps the human menstrual* period—of
central importance for a passionate species devoted to having
children. There was another kind ot object in the sky, the wan¬
dering or vagabond stars called planets. Our nomadic ancestors
must have felt an affinity for the planets. Not counting the Sun
and the Moon, you could see only five of them. They moved
against the background of more distant stars. If you followed
their apparent motion over many months, they would leave one
constellation, enter another, occasionally even do a kind of slow
loop-the-loop in the sky. Everything else in the sky had some real
effect on human life. What must the influence of the planets be?

In contemporary Western society, buying a magazine on as¬
trology—at a newsstand, say—is easy; it is much harder to find one
on astronomy. Virtually every newspaper in America has a daily
column on astrology; there are hardly any that have even a
weekly column on astronomy. There are ten times more astrolo¬
gers in the United States than astronomers. At parties, when I
meet people who do not know I am a scientist, I am sometimes
asked, “Are you a Gemini?” (chances of success, one in twelve), or
“What sign are you?” Much more rarely am I asked, “Have you
heard that gold is made in supernova explosions?” or “When do
you think Congress will approve a Mars Rover?”

Astrology contends that which constellation the planets are in
at the moment of your birth profoundly influences your future.
A few thousand years ago, the idea developed that the motions
of the planets determined the fates of kings, dynasties, empires.
Astrologers studied the motions of the planets and asked them¬
selves what had happened the last time that, say, Venus was
rising in the Constellation of the Goat; perhaps something similar
would happen this time as well. It was a subtle and risky business.
Astrologers came to be employed only by the State. In many
countries it was a capital offense for anyone but the official

The root of the word means “Moon.

The Harmony of Worlds — 49

astrologer to read the portents in the skies: a good way to over¬
throw a regime was to predict its downfall Chinese court astrol¬
ogers who made inaccurate predictions were executed. Others
simply doctored the records so that afterwards they were in
perfect conformity with events. Astrology developed into a
strange combination of observations, mathematics and careful
record-keeping with fuzzy thinking and pious fraud.

But if the planets could determine the destinies of nations,
how could they avoid influencing what will happen to me to¬
morrow? The notion of a personal astrology developed in Alex¬
andrian Egypt and spread through the Greek and Roman worlds
about 2,000 years ago. We today can recognize the antiquity of
astrology in words such as disaster , which is Greek for “bad star,”
influenza , Italian for (astral) “influence”; mazeltov , Hebrew—and,
ultimately, Babylonian—for “good constellation,” or the Yiddish
word shlamazel , applied to someone plagued by relentless ill-for¬
tune, which again traces to the Babylonian astronomical lexicon.
According to Pliny, there were Romans considered sideratio ,
“planet-struck.” Planets were widely thought to he a direct cause of
death. Or consider consider : it means “with the planets,” evi¬
dently a prerequisite for serious reflection. The table on p. 51
shows the mortality statistics in the City of London in 1632.
Among the terrible losses from infant and childhood diseases
and such exotic illnesses as “the rising of the lights” and “the
King’s evil,” we find that, of 9,535 deaths, 13 people succumbed
to “planet,” more than died of cancer. 1 wonder what the symp¬
toms were.

And personal astrology is with us still: consider two different
newspaper astrology columns published in the same city on the
same day. For example, we can examine the New York Post and
the New York Daily News on September 21, 1979. Suppose you
are a Libra—that is, born between September 21 and October 22.
According to the astrologer for the Post , “a compromise will help
ease tension”; useful, perhaps, but somewhat vague. According to
the Daily News's astrologer, you must “demand more of your¬
self,” an admonition that is also vague but also different. These
“predictions” are not predictions; rather they are pieces of ad¬
vice—they tell what to do, not what will happen. Deliberately,
they are phrased so generally that they could apply to anyone.
And they display major mutual inconsistencies. Why are they
published as unapologetically as sports statistics and stock market
reports?

Astrology can be tested by the lives of twins. There are many
cases in which one twin is killed in childhood, in a riding acci¬
dent, say, or is struck by lightning, while the other lives to a
prosperous old age. Each was born in precisely the same place
and within minutes of the other. Exactly the same planets were
rising at their births. It astrology were valid, how could two such
twins have such profoundly different fates? It also turns out that

Sunlight enters a window and illuminates
a niche near dawn on June 21 at Casa
Rincanada.

A striking Anasazi solstice marker from
around the year 1000.

“Medicine Wheel” from Saskatchewan,
built around 600 B.C.: the oldest astro¬
nomical observatory in the Americas. Its
diameter is about eighty meters. The cairn
at left is for sighting the sunrise at the
summer solstice. Photo by Dr. John Eddy.

50 — Cosmos

The retrograde motion, over many
months through the background consteb
lations, of the planet Mars, shown in red.

The apparent motion, over many months,
through the same constellations of many
planets.

astrologers cannot even agree among themselves on what a given
horoscope means. In careful tests, they are unable to predict the
character and future of people they know nothing about except
their time and place of birth.*

There is something curious about the national flags of the
planet Earth. The flag of the United States has fifty stars; the
Soviet Union and Israel, one each; Burma, fourteen; Grenada and
Venezuela, seven; China, five; Iraq, three; Sao Tome e Principe,
two; Japan, Uruguay, Malawi, Bangladesh and Taiwan, the Sun;
Brazil, a celestial sphere; Australia, Western Samoa, New Zea¬
land and Papua New Guinea, the constellation of the Southern
Cross; Bhutan, the dragon pearl, symbol of the Earth; Cambodia,
the Angkor Wat astronomical observatory; India, South Korea
and the Mongolian Peoples’ Republic, cosmological symbols.
Many socialist nations display stars. Many Islamic countries dis¬
play crescent moons. Almost half of our national flags exhibit
astronomical symbols. The phenomenon is transcultural, non¬
sectarian, worldwide. It is also not restricted to our time: Su¬
merian cylinder seals from the third millennium B.C. and Taoist
flags in prerevolutionary China displayed constellations. Nations,
I do not doubt, wish to embrace something of the power and
credibility of the heavens. We seek a connection with the
Cosmos. We want to count in the grand scale of things. And it
turns out we are connected—not in the personal, small-scale un¬
imaginative fashion that the astrologers pretend, but in the deepest
ways, involving the origin of matter, the habitability of the
Earth, the evolution and destiny of the human species, themes to
which we will return.

Modern popular astrology runs directly back to Claudius Pto-
lemaeus, whom we call Ptolemy, although he was unrelated to
the kings of the same name. He worked in the Library of Alex¬
andria in the second century. All that arcane business about
planets ascendant in this or that solar or lunar “house” or the
“Age of Aquarius” comes from Ptolemy, who codified the Babylonian

*Skepticism about astrology and related doctrines is neither new nor
exclusive to the West. For example, in the Essays on Idleness, written in
1332 by Yoshida Kenko, we read:

The Yin-Yang teachings [in Japan] have nothing to say on the
subject of the Red Tongue Days. Formerly people did not avoid
these days, but of late—I wonder who is responsible for starting
this custom—people have taken to saying things such as, “An
enterprise begun on a Red Tongue Day will never see an end,” or,
“Anything you say or do on a Red Tongue Day is bound to come
to naught: you lose what you’ve won, your plans are undone.”
What nonsense! If one counted the projects begun on carefully
selected “lucky days” which came to nothing in the end, they
would probably be quite as many as the fruitless enterprises begun
on the Red Tongue days.

The Harmony of Worlds -51

astrological tradition. Here is a typical horoscope from
Ptolemy’s time, written in Greek on papyrus, for a little girl born
in the year 150: “The birth of Philoe. The 10th year of Anton-
inus Caesar the lord, Phamenoth 15 to 16, first hour of the night.
Sun in Pisces, Jupiter and Mercury in Aries, Saturn in Cancer,
Mars in Leo, Venus and the Moon in Aquarius, horoscopus
Capricorn.” The method of enumerating the months and the
years has changed much more over the intervening centuries
than have the astrological niceties. A typical excerpt from Pto-
lemy’s astrological book, the Tetrabiblos , reads: “Saturn, if he is in
the orient, makes his subjects in appearance dark-skinned, robust,
black-haired, curly-haired, hairy-chested, with eyes of moderate
size, of middling stature, and in temperament having an excess of
the moist and cold.” Ptolemy believed not only that behavior
patterns were influenced by the planets and the stars but also that
questions of stature, complexion, national character and even
congenital physical abnormalities were determined by the stars.
On this point modern astrologers seem to have adopted a more
cautious position.

But modern astrologers have forgotten about the precession of
the equinoxes, which Ptolemy understood. They ignore atmo¬
spheric refraction, about which Ptolemy wrote. They pay almost
no attention to all the moons and planets, asteroids and comets,
quasars and pulsars, exploding galaxies, symbiotic stars, cataclys¬
mic variables and X-ray sources that have been discovered since
Ptolemy’s time. Astronomy is a science—the study of the universe
as it is. Astrology is a pseudoscience—a claim, in the absence of
good evidence, that the other planets affect our everyday lives.
In Ptolemy’s time the distinction between astronomy and astrol¬
ogy was not clear. Today it is.

As an astronomer, Ptolemy named the stars, listed their
brightnesses, gave good reasons for believing that the Earth is a
sphere, set down rules for predicting eclipses and, perhaps most
important, tried to understand why planets exhibit that strange,
wandering motion against the background of distant
constellations. He developed a predictive model to understand
planetary motions and decode the message in the skies. The
study of the heavens brought Ptolemy a kind of ecstasy. “Mortal
as I am,” he wrote, “I know that I am born for a day. But when I
follow at my pleasure the serried multitude of the stars in their
circular course, my feet no longer touch the Earth ...”

Ptolemy believed that the Earth was at the center of the
universe; that the Sun, Moon, planets and stars went around the
Earth. This is the most natural idea in the world. The Earth
seems steady, solid, immobile, while we can see the heavenly
bodies rising and setting each day. Every culture has leaped to the
geocentric hypothesis. As Johannes Kepler wrote, “It is therefore
impossible that reason not previously instructed should imagine
anything other than that the Earth is a kind of vast house with

Pfaturaland Political

OBSERVATIONS

Mentioned in a following Index,

and made upon the

Bills of Mortality.

By fOHU^C gPAV^CT,

Citizen of

LONDON.

With refercnce to the Government , fyHgton, Trade }
Growth, Ayrt, Diftafes , and the feveral Changes of the
faid City.

' me ut miretur Turba, laboro.

Contetpus pautir Lcfhnbut -—

LONDON,

Printed by The : Roycroft , for Job Martin, Jams AUeJby A
and T bo: Dust, at the Sign of the Bell in St. Pouf s
Church-yard, MDCLXIJ.

The cover of John Graunt’s 1632 book on
actuarial statistics.

The Diseases, and Casttalties this year being 1632.

A Bortive, and Stilborn ..
2V Affrighted .

Aired .

445

1

628

1 Grief.

1 Jaundies.

11

43

8

Ague .

43

Impostume.

74

Apoplox, and Mcagrom

17

Kil’d by several accidents. .

46

Bit with a mad dog. ..

1

King's Evil.

38

Bleeding .

3

Lethargie .

2

Bloody flux, scowring.

and

Livcrgrown .

87

flux .

348

Luuatiquc .

5

Brused, Issues, sores.

and

Made away themselves.

15

ulcers,.

28

Measles .

80

Burnt, and Scalded. . ..

5

Murthered .

7

Burst, and Rupture.. ..

9 !

Over-laid, and starved at

Cancer, and Wolf.

10

nurse.

7

Canker .

1

Palsia.

25

Childbed.

171

Piles.

1

Chrisomes, and Infants.

2268

Plague.

8

Cold, and Cough.

55

Planet .

13

Colick, Stone, and Strangury

56

Pleurisie, and Spleen.

36

Consumption .

1797

Purples, and spotted Feaver

38

Convulsion .

241

Quinsie .

7

Cut of the Stone.

5

Rising of the Lights.

98

Dead in the street,

and

Sciatica .

1

starved .

6

Scurvcy, and Itch.

9

Dropsie, and Swelling.

267

Suddenly .

62

Drowned.

34

Surfet.

86

Executed, and prest to death

18

Swine Pox.

6

Falling Sickness.

7 !

Teeth .

470

Fever .

nos

Thrush, and Sore mouth. ..

40

Fistula .

13

Tympany .

13

Flocks, and small Pox.

531

Tissick .

34

French Pox.

12

Vomiting .

1

Gangrene .

5

Worms .

27

Gout .

4 j

f Males .. . .4994"] f Males . . . .49321 Whereof,

Christened ^ Females. . 4590 Buried -j Females. . 4603 of the

(_In all.... 9584 j ^In all.... 9535 J Plague. 8

Increased in the Burials in the 122 Parishes, and at the Pest-

house this year. 993

Decreased of the Plague in the 122 Parishes, and at the rest-
house this year. 266 po]

Causes of death in London, 1632. From
Graunt.

52 — Cosmos

Nicholas Copernicus. Painting by Jean-
Leon Huens, © National Geographic So-
ciety.

Johannes Kepler. Tycho Brahe hangs on
his wall. Painting by Jean-Leon Huens,
© National Geographic Society.

the vault of the sky placed on top of it; it is motionless and within
it the Sun being so small passes from one region to another, like a
bird wandering through the air.” But how do we explain the
apparent motion of the planets—Mars, for example, which had
been known for thousands of years before Ptolemy’s time? (One
of the epithets given Mars by the ancient Egyptians was sekded-ef
em khetkhet, which means “who travels backwards,” a clear refen
ence to its retrograde or loop-the-loop apparent motion.)

Ptolemy’s model of planetary motion can be represented by a
little machine, like those that, serving a similar purpose, existed
in Ptolemy’s time.* The problem was to figure out a “real” motion
of the planets, as seen from up there, on the “outside,” which
would reproduce with great accuracy the apparent motion of the
planets, as seen from down here, on the “inside.”

The planets were imagined to go around the Earth affixed to
perfect transparent spheres. But they were not attached directly
to the spheres, but indirectly, through a kind of off-center wheel.
The sphere turns, the little wheel rotates, and, as seen from the

* Four centuries earlier, such a device was constructed by Archimedes
and examined and described by Cicero in Rome, where it had been
carried by the Roman general Marcellus, one of whose soldiers had,
gratuitously and against orders, killed the septuagenarian scientist during
the conquest of Syracuse.

The Harmony of Worlds - 53

Earth, Mars does its loop-the-loop. This model permitted rea-
sonably accurate predictions of planetary motion, certainly good
enough for the precision of measurement available in Ptolemy’s
day, and even many centuries later.

Ptolemy’s aetherial spheres, imagined in medieval times to be
made of crystal, are why we still talk about the music of the
spheres and a seventh heaven (there was a “heaven,” or sphere
for the Moon, Mercury, Venus, the Sun, Mars, Jupiter and Sa¬
turn, and one more for the stars). With the Earth the center of
the Universe, with creation pivoted about terrestrial events, with
the heavens imagined constructed on utterly unearthly principles,
there was little motivation for astronomical observations. Sup¬
ported by the Church through the Dark Ages, Ptolemy’s model
helped prevent the advance of astronomy for a millennium. Fi¬
nally, in 1543, a quite different hypothesis to explain the appar¬
ent motion of the planets was published by a Polish Catholic
cleric named Nicholas Copernicus. Its most daring feature was
the proposition that the Sun, not the Earth, was at the center of
the universe. The Earth was demoted to just one of the planets,
third from the Sun, moving in a perfect circular orbit. (Ptolemy
had considered such a heliocentric model but rejected it imme¬
diately; from the physics of Aristotle, the implied violent rotation
of the Earth seemed contrary to observation.)

It worked at least as well as Ptolemy’s spheres in explaining the
apparent motion of the planets. But it annoyed many people. In
1616 the Catholic Church placed Copernicus’ work on its list of
forbidden books “until corrected” by local ecclesiastical censors,
where it remained until 1835.* Martin Luther described him as
“an upstart astrologer . . . This fool wishes to reverse the entire
science of astronomy. But Sacred Scripture tells us that Joshua
commanded the Sun to stand still, and not the Earth.” Even some
of Copernicus’ admirers argued that he had not really believed in
a Sun-centered universe but had merely proposed it as a conve¬
nience for calculating the motions of the planets.

The epochal confrontation between the two views of the
Cosmos—Earth-centered and Sun-centered—reached a climax in
the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries in the person of a man
who was, like Ptolemy, both astrologer and astronomer. He lived
in a time when the human spirit was fettered and the mind
chained; when the ecclesiastical pronouncements of a millennium
or two earlier on scientific matters were considered more reliable
than contemporary findings made with techniques unavailable to
the ancients; when deviations, even on arcane theological mat¬
ters, from the prevailing doxological preferences, Catholic or

* In a recent inventory of nearly every sixteenth-century copy of Coper¬
nicus’ book, Owen Gingerich has found the censorship to have been
ineffective: only 60 percent of the copies in Italy were “corrected,” and
not one in Iberia.

54 — Cosmos

Zl

US & n
US A A

tfss $

S 9 9
S i* la

S n ur

VSk? IS
if&iA t?

4 a*n?4r z*

* ?

W2i^ifT

<i nii*>€

II £ 251

53 f,f 8

(ID I

i atteffjr

z JO

Calendar page for November, showing Sagittarius the
Archer. From a German astrological manuscript writ¬
ten about 1450.

A medieval discussion of the relative lengths of the
day and night.

The geocentric pre-Copemican Universe in Christian
Europe. At center, Earth is divided into Heaven (tan)
and Hell (brown). The elements water (green), air
(blue) and fire (red) surround the Earth. Moving out¬
ward, concentrically, are the spheres containing the
seven planets, the Moon and the Sun, as well as the
“Twelve Orders of the Blessed Spirits,” the Cherubim
and the Seraphim. German manuscript, c. 1450.

The signs of the Zodiac, with Sun and Moon at
center. At the corners are the four winds. Colors
refer to the four terrestrial “elements” of earth
(brown), air (blue), water (green) and fire (red). Ger¬
man astrological manuscript, c. 1450.

The Harmony of Worlds -55

Paper computers with four movable disks for predicting solar and lunar eclipses. From the Astronomicum
Caesarium of Petrus Apianus, 1540.

Left: A paper computer for determining when the Moon
reaches one of its aspects with respect to a planet. A pearl
would be attached to the thread and used as an indicator.

From the Astronomicum Caesarium. Right: A “planet page” for Mercury, which is shown as the deep'blue circular
symbol. Various constellations surround Mercury (Cassiopeia seated just below, Orion slaying a beast to her right),
and on the ground are the various human activities that astrologers believed to be ruled by the planets. German
astrological manuscript, c. 1450.

56 — Cosmos

In Ptolemy’s Earthcentered system, the
little sphere called the epicycle containing
the planet turns while attached to a larger
rotating sphere, producing retrograde ap'
parent motion against the background of
distant stars.

In Copernicus’ system, the Earth and
other planets move in circular orbits about
the Sun. As the Earth overtakes Mars, the
latter exhibits its retrograde apparent mo-
tion against the background of distant
stars.

Protestant, were punished by humiliation, taxation, exile, torture
or death. The heavens were inhabited by angels, demons and the
Hand of God, turning the planetary crystal spheres. Science was
barren of the idea that underlying the phenomena of Nature
might be the laws of physics. But the brave and lonely struggle of
this man was to ignite the modern scientific revolution.

Johannes Kepler was born in Germany in 1571 and sent as a
boy to the Protestant seminary school in the provincial town of
Maulbronn to be educated for the clergy. It was a kind of boot
camp, training young minds in the use of theological weaponry
against the fortress of Roman Catholicism. Kepler, stubborn,
intelligent and fiercely independent, suffered two friendless years
in bleak Maulbronn, becoming isolated and withdrawn, his
thoughts devoted to his imagined unworthiness in the eyes of
God. He repented a thousand sins no more wicked than another’s
and despaired of ever attaining salvation.

But God became for him more than a divine wrath craving
propitiation. Kepler’s God was the creative power of the Cosmos.
The boy’s curiosity conquered his fear. He wished to learn the
eschatology of the world; he dared to contemplate the Mind of
God. These dangerous visions, at first insubstantial as a memory,
became a lifelong obsession. The hubristic longings of a child
seminarian were to carry Europe out of the cloister of medieval
thought.

The sciences of classical antiquity had been silenced more than
a thousand years before, but in the late Middle Ages some faint
echoes of those voices, preserved by Arab scholars, began to
insinuate themselves into the European educational curriculum.
In Maulbronn, Kepler heard their reverberations, studying, be^
sides theology, Greek and Latin, music and mathematics. In the
geometry of Euclid he thought he glimpsed an image of perfect
tion and cosmic glory. He was later to write: “Geometry existed
before the Creation. It is co^eternal with the mind of God . . .
Geometry provided God with a model for the Creation . . .
Geometry is God Himself.”

In the midst of Kepler’s mathematical raptures, and despite his
sequestered life, the imperfections of the outside world must also
have molded his character. Superstition was a widely available
nostrum for people powerless against the miseries of famine,
pestilence and deadly doctrinal conflict. For many, the only cen
tainty was the stars, and the ancient astrological conceit pros^
pered in the courtyards and taverns of feanhaunted Europe.
Kepler, whose attitude toward astrology remained ambiguous all
his life, wondered whether there might be hidden patterns um
derlying the apparent chaos of daily life. If the world was crafted
by God, should it not be examined closely? Was not all of
creation an expression of the harmonies in the mind of God? The
book of Nature had waited more than a millennium for a reader.

In 1589, Kepler left Maulbronn to study for the clergy at the

The Harmony of Worlds - 57

great university in Tubingen and found it a liberation. Con-
fronted by the most vital intellectual currents of the time, his
genius was immediately recognized by his teachers—one of
whom introduced the young man to the dangerous mysteries of
the Copernican hypothesis. A heliocentric universe resonated
with Kepler’s religious sense, and he embraced it with fervor.
The Sun was a metaphor for God, around Whom all else re-
volves. Before he was to be ordained, he was made an attractive
offer of secular employment, which—perhaps because he felt
himself indifferently suited to an ecclesiastical career—he found
himself accepting. He was summoned to Graz, in Austria, to
teach secondary school mathematics, and began a little later to
prepare astronomical and meteorological almanacs and to cast
horoscopes. “God provides for every animal his means of suste-
nance,” he wrote. “For the astronomer, He has provided astroh

ogy-”

Kepler was a brilliant thinker and a lucid writer, but he was a
disaster as a classroom teacher. He mumbled. He digressed. He
was at times utterly incomprehensible. He drew only a handful of
students his first year at Graz; the next year there were none. He
was distracted by an incessant interior clamor of associations and
speculations vying for his attention. And one pleasant summer
afternoon, deep in the interstices of one of his interminable
lectures, he was visited by a revelation that was to alter radically
the future of astronomy. Perhaps he stopped in mid-sentence. His
inattentive students, longing for the end of the day, took little
notice, I suspect, of the historic moment.

There were only six planets known in Kepler’s time: Mercury,
Venus, Earth, Mars, Jupiter and Saturn. Kepler wondered why
only six? Why not twenty, or a hundred? Why did they have the
spacing between their orbits that Copernicus had deduced? No
one had ever asked such questions before. There were known to
be five regular or “platonic” solids, whose sides were regular
polygons, as known to the ancient Greek mathematicians after
the time of Pythagoras. Kepler thought the two numbers were
connected, that the reason there were only six planets was be-
cause there were only five regular solids, and that these solids,
inscribed or nested one within another, would specify the dis¬
tances of the planets from the Sun. In these perfect forms, he
believed he had recognized the invisible supporting structures for
the spheres of the six planets. He called his revelation The
Cosmic Mystery. The connection between the solids of Pytha-
goras and the disposition of the planets could admit but one
explanation: the Hand of God, Geometer.

Kepler was amazed that he—immersed, so he thought, in sin-
should have been divinely chosen to make this great discovery.
He submitted a proposal for a research grant to the Duke of
Wiirttemberg, offering to supervise the construction of his nested
solids as a three-dimensional model so that others could glimpse

58 - Cosmos

The five perfect solids of Pythagoras and
Plato. See Appendix 2.

Kepler’s Cosmic Mystery, the spheres of
the six planets nested in the five perfect
solids of Pythagoras and Plato. The out'
ermost perfect solid is the cube.

the beauty of the holy geometry. It might, he added, be com
trived of silver and precious stones and serve incidentally as a
ducal chalice. The proposal was rejected with the kindly advice
that he first construct a less expensive version out of paper, which
he promptly attempted to do: “The intense pleasure I have re'
ceived from this discovery can never be told in words ... I
shunned no calculation no matter how difficult. Days and nights I
spent in mathematical labors, until I could see whether my hy'
pothesis would agree with the orbits of Copernicus or whether
my joy was to vanish into thin air.” But no matter how hard he
tried, the solids and the planetary orbits did not agree well. The
elegance and grandeur of the theory, however, persuaded him
that the observations must be in error, a conclusion drawn when
the observations are unobliging by many other theorists in the
history of science. There was then only one man in the world
who had access to more accurate observations of apparent plam
etary positions, a selfexiled Danish nobleman who had accepted
the post of Imperial Mathematician in the Court of the Holy
Roman Emperor, Rudolf II. That man was Tycho Brahe. By
chance, at Rudolf s suggestion, he had just invited Kepler, whose
mathematical fame was growing, to join him in Prague.

A provincial schoolteacher of humble origins, unknown to all
but a few mathematicians, Kepler was diffident about Tycho’s
offer. But the decision was made for him. In 1598, one of the

The Harmony of Worlds — 59

many premonitory tremors of the coming Thirty Years’ War
engulfed him. The local Catholic archduke, steadfast in dogmatic
certainty, vowed he would rather “make a desert of the country
than rule over heretics.”* Protestants were excluded from eco-
nomic and political power, Kepler’s school was closed, and
prayers, books and hymns deemed heretical were forbidden. Fi-
nally the townspeople were summoned to individual examina-
tions on the soundness of their private religious convictions,
those refusing to profess the Roman Catholic faith being fined a
tenth of their income and, upon pain of death, exiled forever
from Graz. Kepler chose exile: “Hypocrisy I have never learned. I
am in earnest about faith. 1 do not play with it.”

Leaving Graz, Kepler, his wife and stepdaughter set out on the
difficult journey to Prague. Theirs was not a happy marriage.
Chronically ill, having recently lost two young children, his wife
was described as “stupid, sulking, lonely, melancholy.” She had
no understanding of her husband’s work and, having been raised
among the minor rural gentry, she despised his impecunious
profession. He for his part alternately admonished and ignored
her, “for my studies sometimes made me thoughtless; but I
learned my lesson, I learned to have patience with her. When 1
saw that she took my words to heart, I would rather have bitten
my own finger than to give her further offense.” But Kepler
remained preoccupied with his work.

He envisioned Tycho’s domain as a refuge from the evils of
the time, as the place where his Cosmic Mystery would be com
firmed. He aspired to become a colleague of the great Tycho
Brahe, who for thirtyTive years had devoted himself, before the
invention of the telescope, to the measurement of a clockwork
universe, ordered and precise. Kepler’s expectations were to be
unfulfilled. Tycho himself was a flamboyant figure, festooned
with a golden nose, the original having been lost in a student
duel fought over who was the superior mathematician. Around
him was a raucous entourage of assistants, sycophants, distant
relatives and assorted hangers-on. Their endless revelry, their
innuendoes and intrigues, their cruel mockery of the pious and
scholarly country bumpkin depressed and saddened Kepler:
“Tycho ... is superlatively rich but knows not how to make use
of it. Any single instrument of his costs more than my and my
whole family’s fortunes put together.”

Impatient to see Tycho’s astronomical data, Kepler would be
thrown only a few scraps at a time: “Tycho gave me no opportu¬
nity to share in his experiences. He would only, in the course of a

* By no means the most extreme such remark in medieval or Reforma¬
tion Europe. Upon being asked how to distinguish the faithful from the
infidel in the siege of a largely Albigensian city, Domingo de Guzman,
later known as Saint Dominic, allegedly replied: “Kill them all. God will
know his own.”

60 — Cosmos

meal and, in between other matters, mention, as if in passing,
today the figure of the apogee of one planet, tomorrow the nodes
of another . . . Tycho possesses the best observations . . . He also
has collaborators. He lacks only the architect who would put all
this to use.” Tycho was the greatest observational genius of the
age, and Kepler the greatest theoretician. Each knew that, alone,
he would be unable to achieve the synthesis of an accurate and
coherent world system, which they both felt to be imminent. But
Tycho was not about to make a gift of his life’s work to a much
younger potential rival. Joint authorship of the results, if any, of
the collaboration was for some reason unacceptable. The birth of
modern science—the offspring of theory and observation—tee^
tered on the precipice of their mutual mistrust. In the remaining
eighteen months that Tycho was to live, the two quarreled and
were reconciled repeatedly. At a dinner given by the Baron of
Rosenberg, Tycho, having robustly drunk much wine, “placed
civility ahead of health,” and resisted his body’s urgings to leave,
even if briefly, before the baron. The consequent urinary infec^
tion worsened when Tycho resolutely rejected advice to temper
his eating and drinking. On his deathbed, Tycho bequeathed his
observations to Kepler, and “on the last night of his gentle de^
lirium, he repeated over and over again these words, like some-
one composing a poem: ‘Let me not seem to have lived in vain
. . . Let me not seem to have lived in vain.’ ”

After Tycho’s death, Kepler, now the new Imperial Mathe^
matician, managed to extract the observations from Tycho’s re^
calcitrant family. His conjecture that the orbits of the planets are
circumscribed by the five platonic solids was no more supported
by Tycho’s data than by Copernicus’. His “Cosmic Mystery” was
disproved entirely by the much later discoveries of the planets
Uranus, Neptune and Pluto—there are no additional platonic
solids* that would determine their distances from the sun. The
nested Pythagorean solids also made no allowance for the exis^
tence of the Earth’s moon, and Galileo’s discovery of the four
large moons of Jupiter was also discomfiting. But far from be^
coming morose, Kepler wished to find additional satellites and
wondered how many satellites each planet should have. He
wrote to Galileo: “I immediately began to think how there could
be any addition to the number of the planets without overturn^
ing my Mysterium Cosmographicum, according to which Euclid’s
five regular solids do not allow more than six planets around the
Sun ... I am so far from disbelieving the existence of the four
circumjovial planets that I long for a telescope, to anticipate you,
if possible, in discovering two around Mars, as the proportion
seems to require, six or eight round Saturn, and perhaps one each
round Mercury and Venus.” Mars does have two small moons,
and a major geological feature on the larger of them is today

* The proof of this statement can be found in Appendix 2.

The Harmony of Worlds - 61

called the Kepler Ridge in honor of this guess. But he was em
tirely mistaken about Saturn, Mercury and Venus, and Jupiter
has many more moons than Galileo discovered. We still do not
really know why there are only nine planets, more or less, and
why they have the relative distances from the Sun that they do.
(See Chapter 8.)

Tycho’s observations of the apparent motion of Mars and
other planets through the constellations were made over a period
of many years. These data, from the last few decades before the
telescope was invented, were the most accurate that had yet been
obtained. Kepler worked with a passionate intensity to unden
stand them: What real motion of the Earth and Mars about the
Sun could explain, to the precision of measurement, the apparent
motion of Mars in the sky, including its retrograde loops through
the background constellations? Tycho had commended Mars to
Kepler because its apparent motion seemed most anomalous,
most difficult to reconcile with an orbit made of circles. (To the
reader who might be bored by his many calculations, he later
wrote: “If you are wearied by this tedious procedure, take pity on
me who carried out at least seventy trials.”)

Pythagoras, in the sixth century B.C., Plato, Ptolemy and all the
Christian astronomers before Kepler had assumed that the
planets moved in circular paths. The circle was thought to be a
“perfect” geometrical shape and the planets, placed high in the
heavens, away from earthly “corruption,” were also thought to be
in some mystical sense “perfect.” Galileo, Tycho and Copernicus
were all committed to uniform circular planetary motion, the
latter asserting that “the mind shudders” at the alternative, be^
cause “it would be unworthy to suppose such a thing in a
Creation constituted in the best possible way.” So at first Kepler
tried to explain the observations by imagining that the Earth and
Mars moved in circular orbits about the Sun.

After three years of calculation, he believed he had found the
correct values for a Martian circular orbit, which matched ten of
Tycho’s observations within two minutes of arc. Now, there are
60 minutes of arc in an angular degree, and 90 degrees, a right
angle, from the horizon to the zenith. So a few minutes of arc is a
very small quantity to measure—especially without a telescope. It
is oneTifteenth the angular diameter of the full Moon as seen
from Earth. But Kepler’s replenishable ecstasy soon crumbled
into gloom—because two of Tycho’s further observations were
inconsistent with Kepler’s orbit, by as much as eight minutes of
arc:

Divine Providence granted us such a diligent observer in
Tycho Brahe that his observations convicted this . . . cah
culation of an error of eight minutes; it is only right that we
should accept God’s gift with a grateful mind ... If I had
believed that we could ignore these eight minutes, I would
have patched up my hypothesis accordingly. But, since it

62 — Cosmos

Kepler’s first law: A planet (P) moves in an
ellipse with the Sun (S) at one of the two
foci.

Kepler’s second law: A planet sweeps out
equal areas in equal times. It takes as long
to travel from B to A as from F to E as
from D to C; and the shaded areas BSA,
FSE and DSC are all equal.

was not permissible to ignore, those eight minutes pointed

the road to a complete reformation in astronomy.

The difference between a circular orbit and the true orbit
could be distinguished only by precise measurement and a com
rageous acceptance of the facts: “The universe is stamped with
the adornment of harmonic proportions, but harmonies must
accommodate experience.” Kepler was shaken at being compelled
to abandon a circular orbit and to question his faith in the Divine
Geometer. Having cleared the stable of astronomy of circles and
spirals, he was left, he said, with “only a single cartful of dung,” a
stretchedout circle something like an oval.

Eventually, Kepler came to feel that his fascination with the
circle had been a delusion. The Earth was a planet, as Copernicus
had said, and it was entirely obvious to Kepler that the Earth,
wracked by wars, pestilence, famine and unhappiness, fell short
of perfection. Kepler was one of the first people since antiquity to
propose that the planets were material objects made of imperfect
stuff like the Earth. And if planets were “imperfect,” why not
their orbits as well? He tried various ovaldike curves, calculated
away, made some arithmetical mistakes (which caused him at
first to reject the correct answer) and months later in some des-
peration tried the formula for an ellipse, first codified in the
Alexandrian Library by Apollonius of Perga. He found that it
matched Tycho’s observations beautifully: “The truth of nature,
which I had rejected and chased away, returned by stealth
through the back door, disguising itself to be accepted . . . Ah,
what a foolish bird I have been!”

Kepler had found that Mars moves about the Sun not in a
circle, but in an ellipse. The other planets have orbits much less
elliptical than that of Mars, and if Tycho had urged him to study
the motion of, say, Venus, Kepler might never have discovered
the true orbits of the planets. In such an orbit the Sun is not at
the center but is offset, at the focus of the ellipse. When a given
planet is at its nearest to the Sun, it speeds up. When it is at its
farthest, it slows down. Such motion is why we describe the
planets as forever falling toward, but never reaching, the Sun.
Kepler’s first law of planetary motion is simply this: A planet
moves in an ellipse with the Sun at one focus.

In uniform circular motion, an equal angle or fraction of the
arc of a circle is covered in equal times. So, for example, it takes
twice as long to go two-thirds of the way around a circle as it
does to go one-third of the way around. Kepler found something
different for elliptical orbits: As the planet moves along its orbit,
it sweeps out a little wedge-shaped area within the ellipse. When
it is close to the Sun, in a given period of time it traces out a large
arc in its orbit, but the area represented by that arc is not very
large because the planet is then near the Sun. When the planet is
far from the Sun, it covers a much smaller arc in the same period

The Harmony of Worlds — 63

of time, but that arc corresponds to a bigger area because the Sun
is now more distant. Kepler found that these two areas were
precisely the same no matter how elliptical the orbit: the long
skinny area, corresponding to the planet far from the Sun, and
the shorter, squatter area, when the planet is close to the Sun, are
exactly equal. This was Kepler’s second law of planetary motion:
Planets sweep out equal areas in equal times.

Kepler’s first two laws may seem a little remote and abstract:
planets move in ellipses, and sweep out equal areas in equal
dmes. Well, so what? Circular motion is easier to grasp. We
might have a tendency to dismiss these laws as mere mathemati-
cal tinkering, something removed from everyday life. But these
are the laws our planet obeys as we ourselves, glued by gravity to
the surface of the Earth, hurtle through interplanetary space. We
move in accord with laws of nature that Kepler first discovered.
When we send spacecraft to the planets, when we observe dou-
ble stars, when we examine the motion of distant galaxies, we
find that throughout the universe Kepler’s laws are obeyed.

Many years later, Kepler came upon his third and last law of
planetary motion, a law that relates the motion of various planets
to one another, that lays out correctly the clockwork of the solar
system. He described it in a book called The Harmonies of the
World. Kepler understood many things by the word harmony:
the order and beauty of planetary motion, the existence of
mathematical laws explaining that motion—an idea that goes
back to Pythagoras—and even harmony in the musical sense, the
“harmony of the spheres.” Unlike the orbits of Mercury and
Mars, the orbits of the other planets depart so little from cir¬
cularity that we cannot make out their true shapes even in an
extremely accurate diagram. The Earth is our moving platform
from which we observe the motion of the other planets against
the backdrop of distant constellations. The inner planets move
rapidly in their orbits—that is why Mercury has the name it does:
Mercury was the messenger of the gods. Venus, Earth and Mars
move progressively less rapidly about the Sun. The outer planets,
such as Jupiter and Saturn, move stately and slow, as befits the
kings of the gods.

Kepler’s third or harmonic law states that the squares of the
periods of the planets (the times for them to complete one orbit)
are proportional to the cubes of their average distance from the
Sun; the more distant the planet, the more slowly it moves, but
according to a precise mathematical law: P 2 = a 3 where P repre¬
sents the period of revolution of the planet about the Sun, mea¬
sured in years, and a the distance of the planet from the Sun
measured in “astronomical units.” An astronomical unit is the
distance of the Earth from the Sun. Jupiter, for example, is five
astronomical units from the Sun, and a 3 = 5 * 5 x 5 =125.
What number times itself equals 125? Why, 11, close enough.
And 11 years is the period for Jupiter to go once around the Sun.

.2

I «

o

.*s

s

Kepler’s third or harmonic law, a precise
connection between the size of a planet’s
orbit and the period for it to go once
around the Sun. It clearly applies to
Uranus, Neptune and Pluto, planets dis¬
covered long after Kepler’s death.

64 — Cosmos

A similar argument applies for every planet and asteroid and
comet

Not content merely to have extracted from Nature the laws of
planetary motion, Kepler endeavored to find some still more
fundamental underlying cause, some influence of the Sun on the
kinematics of worlds. The planets sped up on approaching the
Sun and slowed down on retreating from it. Somehow the distant
planets sensed the Sun’s presence. Magnetism also was an infhn
ence felt at a distance, and in a stunning anticipation of the idea
of universal gravitation, Kepler suggested that the underlying
cause was akin to magnetism:

My aim in this is to show that the celestial machine is to be
likened not to a divine organism but rather to a clockwork
. . . , insofar as nearly all the manifold movements are can
ried out by means of a single, quite simple magnetic force, as
in the case of a clockwork [where] all motions [are caused]
by a simple weight.

Magnetism is, of course, not the same as gravity, but Kepler’s
fundamental innovation here is nothing short of breathtaking: he
proposed that quantitative physical laws that apply to the Earth
are also the underpinnings of quantitative physical laws that
govern the heavens. It was the first nonmystical explanation of
motion in the heavens; it made the Earth a province of the
Cosmos. “Astronomy,” he said “is part of physics.” Kepler stood
at a cusp in history; the last scientific astrologer was the first
astrophysicist.

Not given to quiet understatement, Kepler assessed his dis¬
coveries in these words:

With this symphony of voices man can play through the
eternity of time in less than an hour, and can taste in small
measure the delight of God, the Supreme Artist. ... I yield
freely to the sacred frenzy . . . the die is cast, and I am
writing the book—to be read either now or by posterity, it
matters not. It can wait a century for a reader, as God
Himself has waited 6,000 years for a witness.

Within the “symphony of voices,” Kepler believed that the speed
of each planet corresponds to certain notes in the Latinate musk
cal scale popular in his day—do, re, mi, fa, sol, la, ti, do. He
claimed that in the harmony of the spheres, the tones of Earth
are fa and mi, that the Earth is forever humming fa and mi, and
that they stand in a straightforward way for the Latin word for
famine. He argued, not unsuccessfully, that the Earth was best
described by that single doleful word.

Exactly eight days after Kepler’s discovery of his third law, the
incident that unleashed the Thirty Years’ War transpired in
Prague. The war’s convulsions shattered the lives of millions,
Kepler among them. He lost his wife and son to an epidemic
carried by the soldiery, his royal patron was deposed, and he was

The Harmony of Worlds — 65

excommunicated by the Lutheran Church for his uncompromis-
ing individualism on matters of doctrine. Kepler was a refugee
once again. The conflict, portrayed by both the Catholics and
the Protestants as a holy war, was more an exploitation of rein
gious fanaticism by those hungry for land and power. In the past,
wars had tended to be resolved when the belligerent princes had
exhausted their resources. But now organized pillage was intro-
duced as a means of keeping armies in the field. The savaged
population of Europe stood helpless as plowshares and pruning
hooks were literally beaten into swords and spears.*

Waves of rumor and paranoia swept through the countryside,
enveloping especially the powerless. Among the many scapegoats
chosen were elderly women living alone, who were charged with
witchcraft: Kepler’s mother was carried away in the middle of the
night in a laundry chest. In Kepler’s little hometown of Weil der
Stadt, roughly three women were tortured and killed as witches
every year between 1615 and 1629. And Katharina Kepler was a
cantankerous old woman. She engaged in disputes that annoyed
the local nobility, and she sold soporific and perhaps hallucin¬
ogenic drugs as do contemporary Mexican curanderas. Poor
Kepler believed that he himself had contributed to her arrest.

It came about because Kepler wrote one of the first works of
science fiction, intended to explain and popularize science. It was
called the Somnium , “The Dream.” He imagined a journey to the
Moon, the space travelers standing on the lunar surface and
observing the lovely planet Earth rotating slowly in the sky
above them. By changing our perspective we can figure out how
worlds work. In Kepler’s time one of the chief objections to the
idea that the Earth turns was the fact that people do not feel the
motion. In the Somnium he tried to make the rotation of the
Earth plausible, dramatic, comprehensible: “As long as the multi¬
tude does not err, ... I want to be on the side of the many.
Therefore, I take great pains to explain to as many people as
possible.” (On another occasion he wrote in a letter, “Do not
sentence me completely to the treadmill of mathematical calcu¬
lations—leave me time for philosophical speculations, my sole
delight. ” t )

* Some examples are still to be seen in the Graz armory.

f Brahe, like Kepler, was far from hostile to astrology, although he
carefully distinguished his own secret version of astrology from the more
common variants of his time, which he thought conducive to supersti¬
tion. In his book Astronomiae Instauratae M echanica, published in
1598, he argued that astrology is “really more reliable than one would
think” if charts of the position of the stars were properly improved.
Brahe wrote: “I have been occupied in alchemy, as much as by the
celestial studies, from my 23rd year.” But both of these pseudosciences,
he felt, had secrets far too dangerous for the general populace (although
entirely safe, he thought, in the hands of those princes and kings from
whom he sought support). Brahe continued the long and truly dangerous

66 — Cosmos

The Moon from the Earth: The view
from just outside the atmosphere.

With the invention of the telescope, what Kepler called “lunar
geography” was becoming possible. In the Somnium, he described
the Moon as filled with mountains and valleys and as “porous, as
though dug through with hollows and continuous caves,” a ref¬
erence to the lunar craters Galileo had recently discovered with
the first astronomical telescope. He also imagined that the Moon
had its inhabitants, well adapted to the inclemencies of the local
environment. He describes the slowly rotating Earth viewed
from the lunar surface and imagines the continents and oceans of
our planet to produce some associative image like the Man in the
Moon. He pictures the near contact of southern Spain with
North Africa at the Straits of Gibraltar as a young woman in a
flowing dress about to kiss her lover—although rubbing noses
looks more like it to me.

Because of the length of the lunar day and night Kepler de¬
scribed “the great intemperateness of climate and the most vio¬
lent alternation of extreme heat and cold on the Moon,” which is
entirely correct. Of course, he did not get everything right. He
believed, for example, that there was a substantial lunar atmo¬
sphere and oceans and inhabitants. Most curious is his view of
the origin of the lunar craters, which make the Moon, he says,
“not dissimilar to the face of a boy disfigured with smallpox.” He
argued correctly that the craters are depressions rather than
mounds. From his own observations he noted the ramparts sur¬
rounding many craters and the existence of central peaks. But he
thought that their regular circular shape implied such a degree of
order that only intelligent life could explain them. He did not
realize that great rocks falling out of the sky would produce a
local explosion, perfectly symmetric in all directions, that would
carve out a circular cavity—the origin of the bulk of the craters
on the Moon and the other terrestrial planets. He deduced in¬
stead “the existence of some race rationally capable of construct¬
ing those hollows on the surface of the Moon. This race must
have many individuals, so that one group puts one hollow to use
while another group constructs another hollow.” Against the
view that such great construction projects were unlikely, Kepler
offered as counterexamples the pyramids of Egypt and the Great
Wall of China, which can, in fact, be seen today from Earth
orbit. The idea that geometrical order reveals an underlying
intelligence was central to Kepler’s life. His argument on the lunar

tradition of some scientists who believe that only they and the tem¬
poral and ecclesiastical powers can be trusted with arcane knowledge: “It
serves no useful purpose and is unreasonable, to make such things gen¬
erally known.” Kepler, on the other hand, lectured on astronomy in
schools, published extensively and often at his own expense, and wrote
science fiction, which was certainly not intended primarily for his scien¬
tific peers. He may not have been a popular writer of science in the
modern sense, but the transition in attitudes in the single generation that
separated Tycho and Kepler is telling.

The Harmony of Worlds — 67

craters is a clear foreshadowing of the Martian canal controversy
(Chapter 5). It is striking that the observational search for extra-
terrestrial life began in the same generation as the invention of
the telescope, and with the greatest theoretician of the age.

Parts of the Somnium were clearly autobiographical The hero,
for example, visits Tycho Brahe. He has parents who sell drugs.
His mother consorts with spirits and daemons, one of whom
eventually provides the means to travel to the moon. The Sorrv
nium makes clear to us, although it did not to all of Kepler’s
contemporaries, that “in a dream one must be allowed the liberty
of imagining occasionally that which never existed in the world
of sense perception.” Science fiction was a new idea at the time of
the Thirty Years’ War, and Kepler’s book was used as evidence
that his mother was a witch.

In the midst of other grave personal problems, Kepler rushed
to Wiirttemberg to find his seventy-four-year-old mother
chained in a Protestant secular dungeon and threatened, like
Galileo in a Catholic dungeon, with torture. He set about, as a
scientist naturally would, to find natural explanations for the
various events that had precipitated the accusations of witch-
craft, including minor physical ailments that the burghers of
Wiirttemberg had attributed to her spells. The research was
successful, a triumph, as was much of the rest of his life, of reason
over superstition. His mother was exiled, with a sentence of
death passed on her should she ever return to Wiirttemberg; and
Kepler’s spirited defense apparently led to a decree by the Duke
forbidding further trials for witchcraft on such slender evidence.

The upheavals of the war deprived Kepler of much of his
financial support, and the end of his life was spent fitfully, pleading
for money and sponsors. He cast horoscopes for the Duke of
Wallenstein, as he had done for Rudolf II, and spent his final
years in a Silesian town controlled by Wallenstein and called
Sagan. His epitaph, which he himself composed, was: “I measured
the skies, now the shadows I measure. Sky-bound was the mind,
Earth-bound the body rests.” But the Thirty Years’ War obli¬
terated his grave. If a marker were to be erected today, it might
read, in homage to his scientific courage: “He preferred the hard
truth to his dearest illusions.”

Johannes Kepler believed that there would one day be “celes¬
tial ships with sails adapted to the winds of heaven” navigating
the sky, filled with explorers “who would not fear the vastness” of
space. And today those explorers, human and robot, employ as
unerring guides on their voyages through the vastness of space
the three laws of planetary motion that Kepler uncovered during
a lifetime of personal travail and ecstatic discovery.

The Earth from the Moon: The view that
Kepler dreamed of.

The lifelong quest of Johannes Kepler, to understand the
motions of the planets, to seek a harmony in the heavens,
culmi-nated thirty-six years after his death, in the work of

68 — Cosmos

Newton. Newton was born on January 4, 1643, so tiny that,
as his mother told him years later, he would have fit into a quart
mug. Sickly, feeling abandoned by his parents, quarrelsome, um
sociable, a virgin to the day he died, Isaac Newton was perhaps
the greatest scientific genius who ever lived.

Even as a young man, Newton was impatient with insubstam
tial questions, such as whether light was “a substance or an accb
dent,” or how gravitation could act over an intervening vacuum.
He early decided that the conventional Christian belief in the
Trinity was a misreading of Scripture. According to his biogra^
pher, John Maynard Keynes,

He was rather a Judaic Monotheist of the school of Mab
monides. He arrived at this conclusion, not on so^to^speak
rational or sceptical grounds, but entirely on the interpreta^
tion of ancient authority. He was persuaded that the re^
vealed documents gave no support to the Trinitarian
doctrines which were due to late falsifications. The re^
vealed God was one God. But this was a dreadful secret
which Newton was at desperate pains to conceal all his life.

Like Kepler, he was not immune to the superstitions of his day
and had many encounters with mysticism. Indeed, much of
Newton’s intellectual development can be attributed to this tern
sion between rationalism and mysticism. At the Stourbridge Fair
in 1663, at age twenty, he purchased a book on astrology, “out of
a curiosity to see what there was in it.” He read it until he came to
an illustration which he could not understand, because he was
ignorant of trigonometry. So he purchased a book on trigononv
etry but soon found himself unable to follow the geometrical
arguments. So he found a copy of Euclid’s Elements of Geometry ,
and began to read. Two years later he invented the differential
calculus.

As a student, Newton was fascinated by light and transfixed by
the Sun. He took to the dangerous practice of staring at the Sun’s
image in a looking glass:

In a few hours I had brought my eyes to such a pass that I
could look upon no bright object with neither eye but I saw
the Sun before me, so that I durst neither write nor read but
to recover the use of my eyes shut my self up in my
chamber made dark three days together (Sc used all means
to divert my imagination from the Sun. For if I thought
upon him I presently saw his picture though I was in the
dark.

In 1666, at the age of twenty-three, Newton was an undergrade
ate at Cambridge University when an outbreak of plague forced
him to spend a year in idleness in the isolated village of
Woolsthorpe, where he had been born. He occupied himself by
inventing the differential and integral calculus, making funda^
mental discoveries on the nature of light and laying the foundation

The Harmony of Worlds — 69

for the theory of universal gravitation* The only other year
like it in the history of physics was Einstein’s “Miracle Year” of
1905* When asked how he accomplished his astonishing discow
eries, Newton replied unhelpfully, “By thinking upon them*” His
work was so significant that his teacher at Cambridge, Isaac
Barrow, resigned his chair of mathematics in favor of Newton
five years after the young student returned to college*

Newton, in his mid-forties, was described by his servant as
follows:

I never knew him to take any recreation or pastime either in
riding out to take the air, walking, bowling, or any other
exercise whatever, thinking all hours lost that were not
spent in his studies, to which he kept so close that he
seldom left his chamber unless [to lecture] at term time * * *
where so few went to hear him, and fewer understood him,
that ofttimes he did in a manner, for want of hearers, read
to the walls*

Students both of Kepler and of Newton never knew what they
were missing*

Newton discovered the law of inertia, the tendency of a mow
ing object to continue moving in a straight line unless something
influences it and moves it out of its path* The Moon, it seemed to
Newton, would fly off in a straight line, tangential to its orbit,
unless there were some other force constantly diverting the path
into a near circle, pulling it in the direction of the Earth* This
force Newton called gravity, and believed that it acted at a
distance* There is nothing physically connecting the Earth and
the Moon* And yet the Earth is constantly pulling the Moon
toward us* Using Kepler’s third law, Newton mathematically
deduced the nature of the gravitational force** He showed that
the same force that pulls an apple down to Earth keeps the Moon
in its orbit and accounts for the revolutions of the then recently
discovered moons of Jupiter in their orbits about that distant
planet*

Things had been falling down since the beginning of time*
That the Moon went around the Earth had been believed for all
of human history* Newton was the first person ever to figure out
that these two phenomena were due to the same force* This is
the meaning of the word “universal” as applied to Newtonian
gravitation* The same law of gravity applies everywhere in the
universe*

It is a law of the inverse square* The force declines inversely as
the square of distance* If two objects are moved twice as far
away, the gravity now pulling them together is only one-quarter

Isaac Newton. Painting by Jean-Leon
Huens, © National Geographic Society.

* Sadly, Newton does not acknowledge his debt to Kepler in his master¬
piece the Principia. But in a 1686 letter to Edmund Halley, he says of his
law of gravitation: “I can affirm that I gathered it from Kepler’s theorem

about twenty years ago.”

70 - Cosmos

as strong. If they are moved ten times farther away, the gravity is
ten squared, 10 2 = 100 times smaller. Clearly, the force must in
some sense be inverse—that is, declining with distance. If the
force were direct, increasing with distance, then the strongest
force would work on the most distant objects, and I suppose all
the matter in the universe would find itself careering together
into a single cosmic lump. No, gravity must decrease with dis¬
tance, which is why a comet or a planet moves slowly when far
from the Sun and faster when close to the Sun—the gravity it
feels is weaker the farther from the Sun it is.

All three of Kepler’s laws of planetary motion can be derived
from Newtonian principles. Kepler’s laws were empirical, based
upon the painstaking observations of Tycho Brahe. Newton’s
laws were theoretical, rather simple mathematical abstractions
from which all of Tycho’s measurements could ultimately be
derived. From these laws, Newton wrote with undisguised pride
in the Principia, “I now demonstrate the frame of the System of
the World.”

Later in his life, Newton presided over the Royal Society, a
fellowship of scientists, and was Master of the Mint, where he
devoted his energies to the suppression of counterfeit coinage.
His natural moodiness and reclusivity grew; he resolved to abam
don those scientific endeavors that brought him into quarrelsome
disputes with other scientists, chiefly on issues of priority; and
there were those who spread tales that he had experienced the
seventeendvcentury equivalent of a “nervous breakdown.”
However, Newton continued his lifelong experiments on the
border between alchemy and chemistry, and some recent evi¬
dence suggests that what he was suffering from was not so much
a psychogenic ailment as heavy metal poisoning, induced by
systematic ingestion of small quantities of arsenic and mercury. It
was a common practice for chemists of the time to use the sense
of taste as an analytic tool.

Nevertheless his prodigious intellectual powers persisted um
abated. In 1696, the Swiss mathematician Johann Bernoulli chaL
lenged his colleagues to solve an unresolved issue called the
brachistochrone problem, specifying the curve connecting two
points displaced from each other laterally, along which a body,
acted upon only by gravity, would fall in the shortest time.
Bernoulli originally specified a deadline of six months, but ex^
tended it to a year and a half at the request of Leibniz, one of the
leading scholars of the time, and the man who had, indepem
dently of Newton, invented the differential and integral calculus.
The challenge was delivered to Newton at four P.M. on January
29, 1697. Before leaving for work the next morning, he had
invented an entire new branch of mathematics called the calculus
of variations, used it to solve the brachistochrone problem and
sent off the solution, which was published, at Newton’s request,
anonymously. But the brilliance and originality of the work

The Harmony of Worlds — 71

betrayed the identity of its author. When Bernoulli saw the solu¬
tion, he commented, “We recognize the lion by his claw.”
Newton was then in his fifty-fifth year.

The major intellectual pursuit of his last years was a concor-
dance and calibration of the chronologies of ancient civilizations,
very much in the tradition of the ancient historians Manetho,
Strabo and Eratosthenes. In his last, posthumous work, “The
Chronology of Ancient Kingdoms Amended,” we find repeated
astronomical calibrations of historical events; an architectural
reconstruction of the Temple of Solomon; a provocative claim
that all the Northern Hemisphere constellations are named after
the personages, artifacts and events in the Greek story of Jason
and the Argonauts; and the consistent assumption that the gods
of all civilizations, with the single exception of Newton’s own,
were merely ancient kings and heroes deified by later generations.

Kepler and Newton represent a critical transition in human
history, the discovery that fairly simple mathematical laws pen
vade all of Nature; that the same rules apply on Earth as in the
skies; and that there is a resonance between the way we think and
the way the world works. They unflinchingly respected the ac-
curacy of observational data, and their predictions of the motion
of the planets to high precision provided compelling evidence
that, at an unexpectedly deep level, humans can understand the
Cosmos. Our modern global civilization, our view of the world
and our present exploration of the Universe are profoundly in¬
debted to their insights.

Newton was guarded about his discoveries and fiercely com¬
petitive with his scientific colleagues. He thought nothing of
waiting a decade or two after its discovery to publish the inverse
square law. But before the grandeur and intricacy of Nature, he
was, like Ptolemy and Kepler, exhilarated as well as disarmingly
modest. Just before his death he wrote: “I do not know what I
may appear to the world; but to myself I seem to have been only
like a boy, playing on the seashore, and diverting myself, in now
and then finding a smoother pebble or a prettier shell than ordi¬
nary, while the great ocean of truth lay all undiscovered before

me.

Comet West, photographed from Earth in February 1976 by Martin Grossman of Gromau, West Germany. The great
tail is blown away from the icy nucleus of the comet by a wind of protons and electrons from the Sun, which has set
below this horizon.

Chapter IV

HEAVEN AND HELL

Nine worlds I remember.

—The Icelandic Edda of Snorri Sturluson, 1200

I am become death, the shatterer of worlds.

—Bhagavad Gita

The doors of heaven and hell are adjacent and identical.

— Nikoss Kazantzakis, The Last Temptation of Christ

The earth is a lovely and more or less placid place.

Things change, but slowly. We can lead a full life and never
personally encounter a natural disaster more violent than a
storm. And so we become complacent, relaxed, unconcerned.
But in the history of Nature, the record is clear. Worlds have
been devastated. Even we humans have achieved the dubious
technical distinction of being able to make our own disasters,
both intentional and inadvertent. On the landscapes of other
planets where the records of the past have been preserved, there
is abundant evidence of major catastrophes. It is all a matter of
time scale. An event that would be unthinkable in a hundred
years may be inevitable in a hundred million. Even on the Earth,
even in our own century, bizarre natural events have occurred.

In the early morning hours of June 30, 1908, in Central Sb
beria, a giant fireball was seen moving rapidly across the sky.
Where it touched the horizon, an enormous explosion took
place. It leveled some 2,000 square kilometers of forest and
burned thousands of trees in a flash tire near the impact site. It
produced an atmospheric shock wave that twice circled the
Earth. For two days afterward, there was so much tine dust in the
atmosphere that one could read a newspaper at night by scattered
light in the streets of London, 10,000 kilometers away.

74 — Cosmos

Soviet geologist L. A. Kulik (right) and an
assistant survey the site of the 1908 Tun-
guska Event, in Central Siberia, Spring
1930. Kulik is positioning a theodolite and
wearing a mosquito net. Courtesy Sow
foto.

The government of Russia under the Czars could not be
bothered to investigate so trivial an event, which, after all, had
occurred far away, among the backward Tungus people of Si¬
beria. It was ten years after the Revolution before an expedition
arrived to examine the ground and interview the witnesses.
These are some of the accounts they brought back:

Early in the morning when everyone was asleep in the tent,
it was blown up into the air, together with the occupants.
When they fell back to Earth, the whole family suffered
slight bruises, but Akulina and Ivan actually lost conscious¬
ness. When they regained consciousness they heard a great
deal of noise and saw the forest blazing round them and
much of it devastated.

I was sitting in the porch of the house at the trading station
of Vanovara at breakfast time and looking towards the
north. I had just raised my axe to hoop a cask, when sud¬
denly . . . the sky was split in two, and high above the forest
the whole northern part of the sky appeared to be covered
with fire. At that moment I felt a great heat as if my shirt
had caught fire. ... I wanted to pull off my shirt and throw
it away, but at that moment there was a bang in the sky,
and a mighty crash was heard. I was thrown on the ground
about three sajenes away from the porch and for a moment
I lost consciousness. My wife ran out and carried me into
the hut. The crash was followed by a noise like stones
falling from the sky, or guns firing. The Earth trembled, and
when I lay on the ground I covered my head because I was
afraid that stones might hit it. At that moment when the
sky opened, a hot wind, as from a cannon, blew past the
huts from the north. It left its mark on the ground. . . .

When I sat down to have my breakfast beside my plough, I
heard sudden bangs, as if from gun-fire. My horse fell to its
knees. From the north side above the forest a flame shot up.

. . . Then I saw that the fir forest had been bent over by the
wind and I thought of a hurricane. I seized hold of my
plough with both hands, so that it would not be carried
away. The wind was so strong that it carried off some of the
soil from the surface of the ground, and then the hurricane
drove a wall of water up the Angara. I saw it all quite
clearly, because my land was on a hillside.

The roar frightened the horses to such an extent that some
galloped off in panic, dragging the ploughs in different di¬
rections, and others collapsed.

The carpenters, after the first and second crashes, had
crossed themselves in stupefaction, and when the third
crash resounded they fell backwards from the building onto
the chips of wood. Some of them were so stunned and
utterly terrified that I had to calm them down and reassure

Heaven and Hell — 75

them. We all abandoned work and went into the village.
There, whole crowds of local inhabitants were gathered in
the streets in terror, talking about this phenomenon.

I was in the fields . . . and had only just got one horse
harnessed to the harrow and begun to attach another when
suddenly I heard what sounded like a single loud shot to
the right. I immediately turned round and saw an elongated
flaming object flying through the sky. The front part was
much broader than the tail end and its color was like fire in
the day-time. It was many times bigger than the sun but
much dimmer, so that it was possible to look at it with the
naked eye. Behind the flames trailed what looked like dust.
It was wreathed in little puffs, and blue streamers were left
behind from the flames. ... As soon as the flame had dis¬
appeared, bangs louder than shots from a gun were heard,
the ground could be felt to tremble, and the window panes
in the cabin were shattered.

. . . I was washing wool on the bank of the River Kan.
Suddenly a noise like the fluttering of the wings of a frighn
ened bird was heard . . . and a kind of swell came up the
river. After this came a single sharp bang so loud that one
of the workmen . . . fell into the water.

This remarkable occurrence is called the Tunguska Event.
Some scientists have suggested that it was caused by a piece of
hurtling antimatter, annihilated on contact with the ordinary
matter of the Earth, disappearing in a flash of gamma rays. But
the absence of radioactivity at the impact site gives no support to
this explanation. Others postulate that a mini black hole passed
through the Earth in Siberia and out the other side. But the
records of atmospheric shock waves show no hint of an object
booming out of the North Atlantic later that day. Perhaps it was
a spaceship of some unimaginably advanced extraterrestrial civk
lization in desperate mechanical trouble, crashing in a remote
region of an obscure planet. But at the site of the impact there is
no trace of such a ship. Each of these ideas has been proposed,
some of them more or less seriously. Not one of them is strongly
supported by the evidence. The key point of the Tunguska
Event is that there was a tremendous explosion, a great shock
wave, an enormous forest fire, and yet there is no impact crater at
the site. There seems to be only one explanation consistent with
all the facts: In 1908 a piece of a comet hit the Earth.

In the vast spaces between the planets there are many objects,
some rocky, some metallic, some icy, some composed partly of
organic molecules. They range from grains of dust to irregular
blocks the size of Nicaragua or Bhutan. And sometimes, by
accident, there is a planet in the way. The Tunguska Event was
probably caused by an icy cometary fragment about a hundred
meters across—the size of a football field—weighing a million

Devastated taiga forest at Tunguska. The
photograph was taken 5 kilometers from
“ground zero” and 21 years after the event.
The trees are all pointing away from the
impact point. Courtesy Sovfoto.

76 — Cosmos

tons, moving at about 30 kilometers per second, 70,000 miles per
hour.

If such an impact occurred today it might be mistaken, espe¬
cially in the panic of the moment, for a nuclear explosion. The
cometary impact and fireball would simulate all effects of a one-
megaton nuclear burst, including the mushroom cloud, with two
exceptions: there would be no gamma radiation or radioactive
fallout. Could a rare but natural event, the impact of a sizable
cometary fragment, trigger a nuclear war? A strange scenario: a
small comet hits the Earth, as millions of them have, and the
response of our civilization is promptly to self-destruct. It might
be a good idea for us to understand comets and collisions and
catastrophes a little better than we do. For example, an American
Vela satellite detected an intense double flash of light from the
vicinity of the South Atlantic and Western Indian Ocean on
September 22, 1979. Early speculation held that it was a clandes¬
tine test of a low yield (two kilotons, about a sixth the energy of
the Hiroshima bomb) nuclear weapon by South Africa or Israel.
The political consequences were considered serious around the
world. But what if the flashes were instead caused by the impact
of a small asteroid or a piece of a comet? Since airborne over¬
flights in the vicinity of the flashes showed not a trace of unusual
radioactivity in the air, this is a real possibility and underscores
the dangers in an age of nuclear weapons of not monitoring
impacts from space better than we do.

A comet is made mostly of ice—water (H 2 0) ice, with a little
methane (CH 4 ) ice, and some ammonia (NH 3 ) ice. Striking the
Earth’s atmosphere, a modest cometary fragment would produce
a great radiant fireball and a mighty blast wave, which would
burn trees, level forests and be heard around the world. But it
might not make much of a crater in the ground. The ices would
all be melted during entry. There would be few recognizable
pieces of the comet left—perhaps only a smattering of small grains

T

Detail from the eleventh-century Bayeux
Tapestry, recording appearance of Halley’s
Comet in April 1066. Latin inscription to
left of the highly stylized comet reads:
“These men wonder at the star.” A cour¬
tier hastens to report the event to Harold
of England, whose defeat at the hands of
William the Conqueror the comet was
popularly believed to portend (see inva¬
sion ships at bottom). The tapestry was
commissioned by Queen Matilde, wife of
William.

Heaven and Hell - 77

Giotto’s Adoration of the Magi , c. 1304,
depicting the Star of Bethlehem as a (pre-
sumably) nonmiraculous comet. The ap'
parition of Comet Halley in 1301 very
likely served as Giotto’s model. Courtesy
SCALA/Editorial Photocolor Archives.

Aztec depiction of the observation of a
bright comet by the Emperor Moctezuma,
who accepted the popular superstition
that comets presage catastrophes, with'
drew in morose depression, and thus un¬
wittingly abetted the Spanish Conquest. It
is an excellent example of a self-fulfilling
prophecy. From Historia de las Indias de
Nueva Espana by Diego Duran.

from the nondcy parts of the cometary nucleus. Recently, the
Soviet scientist E. Sobotovich has identified a large number of
tiny diamonds strewn over the Tunguska site. Such diamonds are
already known to exist in meteorites that have survived impact,
and that may originate ultimately from comets.

On many a clear night, if you look patiently up at the sky, you
will see a solitary meteor blazing briefly overhead. On some
nights you can see a shower of meteors, always on the same few
days of every year—a natural fireworks display, an entertainment
in the heavens. These meteors are made by tiny grains, smaller
than a mustard seed. They are less shooting stars than falling
fluff. Momentarily brilliant as they enter the Earth’s atmosphere,
they are heated and destroyed by friction at a height of about

78 — Cosmos

Turkish representation of the Great
Comet of 1577. (Compare with figure im-
mediately below.) The excitement sun
rounding the arrival of the comet led
directly to the founding of the Istanbul
Observatory. Courtesy University of
Istanbul Library.

Broadside printed in Prague by Peter Co-
dicillus shows the Great Comet of 1577
stretching above the Moon and Saturn
while an artist sketches it by lantern light.
Tycho Brahes determination that this
comet was more distant than the moon
led him to remove comets from the realm
of terrestrial phenomena and place them
correctly as celestial bodies. From the
Wikiana Collection, Zentralbibliothek,
Zurich. Photograph by Owen Gingerich.

100 kilometers. Meteors are the remnants of comets.* Old
comets, heated by repeated passages near the Sun, break up,
evaporate and disintegrate. The debris spreads to till the full
cometary orbit. Where that orbit intersects the orbit of the
Earth, there is a swarm of meteors waiting for us. Some part of
the swarm is always at the same position in the Earth’s orbit, so
the meteor shower is always observed on the same day of every
year. June 30, 1908 was the day of the Beta Taurid meteor
shower, connected with the orbit of Comet Encke. The Turn
guska Event seems to have been caused by a chunk of Comet
Encke, a piece substantially larger than the tiny fragments that
cause those glittering, harmless meteor showers.

Comets have always evoked fear and awe and superstition.
Their occasional apparitions disturbingly challenged the notion
of an unalterable and divinely ordered Cosmos. It seemed in¬
conceivable that a spectacular streak of milk-white flame, rising
and setting with the stars night after night, was not there for a
reason, did not hold some portent for human affairs. So the idea
arose that comets were harbingers of disaster, auguries of divine
wrath—that they foretold the deaths of princes, the fall of king¬
doms. The Babylonians thought that comets were celestial
beards. The Greeks thought of flowing hair, the Arabs of flam¬
ing swords. In Ptolemy’s time comets were elaborately classified
as “beams,” “trumpets,” “jars” and so on, according to their shapes.
Ptolemy thought that comets bring wars, hot weather and “dis¬
turbed conditions.” Some medieval depictions of comets resem¬
ble unidentified flying crucifixes. A Lutheran “Superintendent” or
Bishop of Magdeburg named Andreas Celichius published in
1578 a “Theological Reminder of the New Comet,” which of¬
fered the inspired view that a comet is “the thick smoke of
human sins, rising every day, every hour, every moment, full of
stench and horror before the face of God, and becoming gradu¬
ally so thick as to form a comet, with curled and plaited tresses,
which at last is kindled by the hot and fiery anger of the Supreme
Heavenly Judge.” But others countered that if comets were the
smoke of sin, the skies would be continually ablaze with them.

The most ancient record of an apparition of Halley’s (or any
other) Comet appears in the Chinese Book of Prince Huai Nan ,
attendant to the march of King Wu against Zhou of Yin. The
year was 1057 B.C. The approach to Earth of Halley’s Comet in
the year 66 is the probable explanation of the account by Josephus

* That meteors and meteorites are connected with the comets was first
proposed by Alexander von Humboldt in his broad-gauge popularization
of all of science, published in the years 1845 to 1862, a work called Kosmos .
It was reading Humboldt’s earlier work that fired the young Charles
Darwin to embark on a career combining geographical exploration and
natural history. Shortly thereafter he accepted a position as naturalist
aboard the ship H.M.S. Beagle, the event that led to The Origin of
Species .

Heaven and Hell - 79

of a sword that hung over Jerusalem for a whole year. In
1066 the Normans witnessed another return of Halley’s Comet.
Since it must, they thought, presage the fall of some kingdom, the
comet encouraged, in some sense precipitated, the invasion of
England by William the Conqueror. The comet was duly noted
in a newspaper of the time, the Bayeux Tapestry. In 1301,
Giotto, one of the founders of modern realistic painting, wit¬
nessed another apparition of Comet Halley and inserted it into a
nativity scene. The Great Comet of 1466—yet another return of
Halley’s Comet—panicked Christian Europe; the Christians
feared that God, who sends comets, might be on the side of the
Turks, who had just captured Constantinople.

The leading astronomers of the sixteenth and seventeenth
centuries were fascinated by comets, and even Newton became a
little giddy over them. Kepler described comets as darting
through space “as the fishes in the sea,” but being dissipated by
sunlight, as the cometary tail always points away from the sun.
David Hume, in many cases an uncompromising rationalist, at
least toyed with the notion that comets were the reproductive
cells—the eggs or sperm—of planetary systems, that planets are
produced by a kind of interstellar sex. As an undergraduate,
before his invention of the reflecting telescope, Newton spent
many consecutive sleepless nights searching the sky for comets
with his naked eye, pursuing them with such fervor that he felt ill
from exhaustion. Following Tycho and Kepler, Newton con¬
cluded that the comets seen from Earth do not move within our
atmosphere, as Aristotle and others had thought, but rather are
more distant than the Moon, although closer than Saturn.
Comets shine, as the planets do, by reflected sunlight, “and they
are much mistaken who remove them almost as far as the fixed
stars; for if it were so, the comets could receive no more light
from our Sun than our planets do from the fixed stars.” He
showed that comets, like planets, move in ellipses: “Comets are a
sort of planets revolved in very eccentric orbits about the Sun.”
This demystification, this prediction of regular cometary orbits,
led his friend Edmund Halley in 1707 to calculate that the comets
of 1531, 1607 and 1682 were apparitions at 76-year intervals of
the same comet, and predicted its return in 1758. The comet duly
arrived and was named for him posthumously. Comet Halley has
played an interesting role in human history, and may be the
target of the first space vehicle probe of a comet, during its return
in 1986.

Modern planetary scientists sometimes argue that the collision
of a comet with a planet might make a significant contribution to
the planetary atmosphere. For example, all the water in the
atmosphere of Mars today could be accounted for by a recent
impact of a small comet. Newton noted that the matter in the
tails of comets is dissipated in interplanetary space, lost to the
comet and little by little attracted gravitationally to nearby

Highly stylized representation of the
Comet of 1556 over a German town,
probably Nuremberg. Wikiana Collec¬
tion. Photograph by Owen Gingerich.

80 — Cosmos

Comet Ikeya-Seki, discovered in 1965 by
two dedicated Japanese amateur astron¬
omers. The tail is roughly fifty million ki-
lometers long. Photographed at Kitt Peak
National Observatory by Michael Belton.

planets. He believed that the water on the Earth is gradually
being lost, “spent upon vegetation and putrefaction, and com
verted into dry earth. . . . The fluids, if they are not supplied
from without, must be in a continual decrease, and quite fail at
last.” Newton seems to have believed that the Earth’s oceans are
of cometary origin, and that life is possible only because come-
tary matter falls upon our planet. In a mystical reverie, he went
still further: “I suspect, moreover, that it is chiefly from the
comets that spirit comes, which is indeed the smallest but the
most subtle and useful part of our air, and so much required to
sustain the life of all things with us.”

As early as 1868 the astronomer William Huggins found an
identity between some features in the spectrum of a comet and
the spectrum of natural or “olefiant” gas. Huggins had found
organic matter in the comets; in subsequent years cyanogen, CN,
consisting of a carbon and a nitrogen atom, the molecular frag¬
ment that makes cyanides, was identified in the tails of comets.
When the Earth was about to pass through the tail of Halley’s
Comet in 1910, many people panicked. They overlooked the fact
that the tail of a comet is extravagantly diffuse: the actual danger
from the poison in a comet’s tail is far less than the danger, even
in 1910, from industrial pollution in large cities.

But that reassured almost no one. For example, headlines in
the San Francisco Chronicle for May 15, 1910, include “Comet
Camera as Big as a House,” “Comet Comes and Husband Re¬
forms,” “Comet Parties Now Fad in New York.” The Los Angeles
Examiner adopted a light mood: “Say! Has That Comet Cyan-
ogened You Yet? . . . Entire Human Race Due for Free Gaseous
Bath,” “Expect ‘High Jinks,” “Many Feel Cyanogen Tang,” “Vic¬
tim Climbs Trees, Tries to Phone Comet.” In 1910 there were
parties, making merry before the world ended of cyanogen pol¬
lution. Entrepreneurs hawked anti-comet pills and gas masks, the
latter an eerie premonition of the battlefields of World War I.

Some confusion about comets continues to our own time. In
1957, I was a graduate student at the University of Chicago’s
Yerkes Observatory. Alone in the observatory late one night, I
heard the telephone ring persistently. When I answered, a voice,
betraying a well-advanced state of inebriation, said, “Lemme talk
to a shtrominer.” “Can I help you?” “Well, see, we’re havin’ this
garden party out here in Wilmette, and there’s somethin’ in the
sky. The funny part is, though, if you look straight at it, it goes
away. Rut if you don’t look at it, there it is.” The most sensitive
part of the retina is not at the center of the field of view. You can
see faint stars and other objects by averting your vision slightly. I
knew that, barely visible in the sky at this time, was a newly
discovered comet called Arend-Roland. So I told him that he
was probably looking at a comet. There was a long pause, fol¬
lowed by the query: “Wash’ a comet?” “A comet,” I replied, “is a
snowball one mile across.” There was a longer pause, after which

Heaven and Hell — 81

the caller requested, “Lemme talk to a real shtrominer.” When
Halley’s Comet reappears in 1986, I wonder what political leaders
will fear the apparition, what other silliness will then he upon us.

While the planets move in elliptical orbits around the Sun,
their orbits are not very elliptical At first glance they are, by and
large, indistinguishable from circles. It is the comets—especially
the long-period comets—that have dramatically elliptical orbits.
The planets are the old-timers in the inner solar system; the
comets are the newcomers. Why are the planetary orbits nearly
circular and neatly separated one from the other? Because if
planets had very elliptical orbits, so that their paths intersected,
sooner or later there would be a collision. In the early history of
the solar system, there were probably many planets in the process
of formation. Those with elliptical crossing orbits tended to col¬
lide and destroy themselves. Those with circular orbits tended to
grow and survive. The orbits of the present planets are the orbits
of the survivors of this collisional natural selection, the stable
middle age of a solar system dominated by early catastrophic
impacts.

In the outermost solar system, in the gloom far beyond the

A rare 1910 photograph of Comet Halley
with Venus, lower left. Courtesy Camera
Press—Photo Trends.

82 - Cosmos

The head of Comet Halley, May 1910.
Photographed at Helwan Observatory,
Egypt, with a 30-inch reflecting telescope
by H. Knox Shaw.

Comet Humason, photographed with the
48-inch Schmidt telescope of the Hale
Observatories, 1961, and named after its
discoverer, Milton Humason (Chapter
10). In this time exposure, the streaks are
distant stars.

planets, there is a vast spherical cloud of a trillion cometary
nuclei, orbiting the Sun no faster than a racing car at the Indian-
apolis 500.* A fairly typical comet would look like a giant tum¬
bling snowball about 1 kilometer across. Most never penetrate
the border marked by the orbit of Pluto. But occasionally a
passing star makes a gravitational flurry and commotion in the
cometary cloud, and a group of comets finds itself in highly
elliptical orbits, plunging toward the Sun. After its path is further
changed by gravitational encounters with Jupiter or Saturn, it
tends to find itself, once every century or so, careering toward the
inner solar system. Somewhere between the orbits of Jupiter and
Mars it would begin heating and evaporating. Matter blown
outwards from the Sun’s atmosphere, the solar wind, carries
fragments of dust and ice back behind the comet, making an
incipient tail. If Jupiter were a meter across, our comet would be
smaller than a speck of dust, but when fully developed, its tail
would be as great as the distances between the worlds. When
within sight of the Earth on each of its orbits, it would stimulate
outpourings of superstitious fervor among the Earthlings. But
eventually they would understand that it lived not in their at¬
mosphere, but out among the planets. They would calculate its
orbit. And perhaps one day soon they would launch a small
space vehicle devoted to exploring this visitor from the realm of
the stars.

Sooner or later comets will collide with planets. The Earth and
its companion the Moon must be bombarded by comets and
small asteroids, debris left over from the formation of the solar
system. Since there are more small objects than large ones, there
should be more impacts by small objects than by large ones. An
impact of a small cometary fragment with the Earth, as at Tun-
guska, should occur about once every thousand years. But an
impact with a large comet, such as Halley’s Comet, whose nu¬
cleus is perhaps twenty kilometers across, should occur only
about once every billion years.

When a small, icy object collides with a planet or a moon, it
may not produce a very major scar. But if the impacting object is
larger or made primarily of rock, there is an explosion on impact

*The Earth is r = 1 astronomical unit = 150,000,000 kilometers from
the Sun. Its roughly circular orbit then has a circumference of 27rr - 10 9 km.
Our planet circulates once along this path every year. One year =
3 x 10 7 seconds. So the Earth’s orbital speed is 10 9 km/3 x 10 7 sec *
30 km/sec. Now consider the spherical shell of orbiting comets that
many astronomers believe surrounds the solar system at a distance
-100,000 astronomical units, almost halfway to the nearest star. From
Kepler’s third law (p. 63) it immediately follows that the orbital period
about the Sun of any one of them is about (10 5 ) 3/2 = 10 7 * 5 ~ 3 x 10 7
or 30 million years. Once around the Sun is a long time if you live in the
outer reaches of the solar system. The cometary orbit is 2tra = 2i r x 10 5
x 1.5 x 10 8 km - 10 14 km around, and its speed is therefore only
10 14 km/10 15 sec = 0.1 km/sec ~ 220 miles per hour.

Heaven and Hell — 83

that carves out a hemispherical howl called an impact crater. And
if no process rubs out or fills in the crater, it may last for billions
of years. Almost no erosion occurs on the Moon and when we
examine its surface, we find it covered with impact craters, many
more than can be accounted for by the rather sparse population
of cometary and asteroidal debris that now fills the inner solar
system. The lunar surface offers eloquent testimony of a previous
age of the destruction of worlds, now billions of years gone.

Impact craters are not restricted to the Moon. We find them
throughout the inner solar system—from Mercury, closest to the
Sun, to cloud-covered Venus to Mars and its tiny moons, Phobos
and Deimos. These are the terrestrial planets, our family of
worlds, the planets more or less like the Earth. They have solid
surfaces, interiors made of rock and iron, and atmospheres rang'
ing from near-vacuum to pressures ninety times higher than the
Earth’s. They huddle around the Sun, the source of light and
heat, like campers around a fire. The planets are all about 4-6
billion years old. Like the Moon, they all bear witness to an age
of impact catastrophism in the early history of the solar system.

As we move out past Mars we enter a very different regime—
the realm of Jupiter and the other giant or jovian planets. These
are great worlds, composed largely of hydrogen and helium, with
smaller amounts of hydrogen-rich gases such as methane, am¬
monia and water. We do not see solid surfaces here, only the
atmosphere and the multicolored clouds. These are serious
planets, not fragmentary worldlets like the Earth. A thousand
Earths could fit inside Jupiter. If a comet or an asteroid dropped
into the atmosphere of Jupiter, we would not expect a visible
crater, only a momentary break in the clouds. Neverthe¬
less, we know there has been a many-billion-year history of
collisions in the outer solar system as well—because Jupiter has a
great system of more than a dozen moons, five of which were
examined close up by the Voyager spacecraft. Here again we find
evidence of past catastrophes. When the solar system is all ex¬
plored, we will probably have evidence for impact catastrophism
on all nine worlds, from Mercury to Pluto, and on all the smaller
moons, comets and asteroids.

There are about 10,000 craters on the near side of the Moon,
visible to telescopes on Earth. Most of them are in the ancient
lunar highlands and date from the time of the final accretion of
the Moon from interplanetary debris. There are about a thou¬
sand craters larger than a kilometer across in the maria (Latin for
“seas”), the lowland regions that were flooded, perhaps by lava,
shortly after the formation of the Moon, covering over the pre¬
existing craters. Thus, very roughly, craters on the Moon should
be formed today at the rate of about 10 9 years/10 4 craters, = 10 5
years/crater, a hundred thousand years between cratering events.
Since there may have been more interplanetary debris a few
billion years ago than there is today, we might have to wait even

Break-up of Comet West (see fronti¬
spiece, this chapter) into four fragments.
Photographed by C. F. Knuckles and A. S.
Murrell, New Mexico State University
Observatory.

84 - Cosmos

Meteor Crater, Arizona. This crater is 1.2 kilometers in
diameter and was probably produced 15,000 to 40,000
years ago when a lump of iron 25 meters across impacted
the Earth at a speed of 15 kilometers per second. The
energy released was equivalent to that of a 4'megaton
nuclear explosion.

Dawn at Crater Copernicus, just north of the lunar
equator. It is 100 kilometers in diameter. Its ray system is
prominent when, unlike this photograph, it is illuminated
directly faceon. Apollo Orbiter photo. Courtesy NASA.

Earthrise over rolling hills and complex overlapping craters on the Moon. Apollo Orbiter photo. Courtesy NASA.

Heaven and Hell — 85

longer than a hundred thousand years to see a crater form on the
Moon. Because the Earth has a larger area than the Moon, we
might have to wait something like ten thousand years between
collisions that would make craters as big as a kilometer across on
our planet. And since Meteor Crater, Arizona, an impact crater
about a kilometer across, has been found to be twenty or thirty
thousand years old, the observations on the Earth are in agree-
ment with such crude calculations.

The actual impact of a small comet or asteroid with the Moon
might make a momentary explosion sufficiently bright to be visi¬
ble from the Earth. We can imagine our ancestors gazing idly up
on some night a hundred thousand years ago and noting a
strange cloud arising from the unilluminated part of the Moon,
suddenly struck by the Sun’s rays. But we would not expect such
an event to have happened in historical times. The odds against
it must be something like a hundred to one. Nevertheless, there
is an historical account which may in fact describe an impact on
the Moon seen from Earth with the naked eye: On the evening of
June 25, 1178, five British monks reported something extraordi¬
nary, which was later recorded in the chronicle of Gervase of
Canterbury, generally considered a reliable reporter on the polit¬
ical and cultural events of his time, after he had interviewed the
eyewitnesses who asserted, under oath, the truth of their story.
The chronicle reads:

There was a bright New Moon, and as usual in that phase
its horns were tilted towards the east. Suddenly, the upper
horn split in two. From the midpoint of the division, a
flaming torch sprang up, spewing out fire, hot coals, and
sparks.

The astronomers Derral Mulholland and Odile Calame have
calculated that a lunar impact would produce a dust cloud rising
off the surface of the Moon with an appearance corresponding
rather closely to the report of the Canterbury monks.

If such an impact were made only 800 years ago, the crater
should still be visible. Erosion on the Moon is so inefficient,
because of the absence of air and water, that even small craters a
few billion years old are still comparatively well preserved. From
the description recorded by Gervase, it is possible to pinpoint the
sector of the Moon to which the observations refer. Impacts
produce rays, linear trails of fine powder spewed out during the
explosion. Such rays are associated with the very youngest craters
on the Moon—for example, those named after Aristarchus and
Copernicus and Kepler. But while the craters may withstand
erosion on the Moon, the rays, being exceptionally thin, do not.
As time goes on, even the arrival of micrometeorites—fine dust
from space—stirs up and covers over the rays, and they gradually
disappear. Thus rays are a signature of a recent impact.

The meteoriticist Jack Hartung has pointed out that a very
recent, very fresh-looking small crater with a prominent ray system

The rayed crater Bruno (top) on the Moon.
Apollo Orbiter photo. Courtesy NASA.

86 - Cosmos

Apollo 16 astronaut sets up laser retrore-
flector experiment on the Moon. Cour-
tesy NASA.

Laser beam directed at retroreflectors em-
placed on the lunar surface. The telescope
is the 82-inch reflector of McDonald Ob'
servatory, University of Texas.

lies exactly in the region of the Moon referred to by the
Canterbury monks. It is called Giordano Bruno after the six¬
teenth-century Roman Catholic scholar who held that there are
an infinity of worlds and that many are inhabited. For this and
other crimes he was burned at the stake in the year 1600 .

Another line of evidence consistent with this interpretation
has been provided by Calame and Mulholland. When an object
impacts the Moon at high speed, it sets the Moon slightly wob¬
bling. Eventually the vibrations die down but not in so short a
period as eight hundred years. Such a quivering can be studied by
laser reflection techniques. The Apollo astronauts emplaced in
several locales on the Moon special mirrors called laser retro-
reflectors. When a laser beam from Earth strikes the mirror and
bounces back, the round-trip travel time can be measured with
remarkable precision. This time multiplied by the speed of light
gives us the distance to the Moon at that moment to equally
remarkable precision. Such measurements, performed over a
period of years, reveal the Moon to be librating, or quivering
with a period (about three years) and amplitude (about three
meters), consistent with the idea that the crater Giordano Bruno
was gouged out less than a thousand years ago.

All this evidence is inferential and indirect. The odds, as I
have said, are against such an event happening in historical times.
But the evidence is at least suggestive. As the Tunguska Event
and Meteor Crater, Arizona, also remind us, not all impact ca¬
tastrophes occurred in the early history of the solar system. But
the fact that only a few of the lunar craters have extensive ray
systems also reminds us that, even on the Moon, some erosion
occurs.* By noting which craters overlap which and other signs of

* On Mars, where erosion is much more efficient, although there are
many craters there are virtually no ray craters, as we would expect.

Heaven and Hell —87

lunar stratigraphy, we can reconstruct the sequence of impact and
flooding events of which the production of crater Bruno is pen
haps the most recent' example. On page 89 is an attempt to
visualize the events that made the surface of the lunar hemb
sphere we see from Earth.

The Earth is very near the Moon. If the Moon is so severely
cratered by impacts, how has the Earth avoided them? Why is
Meteor Crater so rare? Do the comets and asteroids think it
inadvisable to impact an inhabited planet? This is an unlikely
forbearance. The only possible explanation is that impact craters
are formed at very similar rates on both the Earth and the Moon,
but that on the airless, waterless Moon they are preserved for
immense periods of time, while on the Earth slow erosion wipes
them out or fills them in. Running water, windblown sand and
mountaimbuilding are very slow processes. But over millions or
billions of years, they are capable of utterly erasing even very
large impact scars.

On the surface of any moon or planet, there will be external
processes, such as impacts from space, and internal processes,
such as earthquakes; there will be fast, catastrophic events, such
as volcanic explosions, and processes of excruciating slowness,
such as the pitting of a surface by tiny airborne sand grains.
There is no general answer to the question of which processes
dominate, the outside ones or the inside ones; the rare but vio
lent events, or the common and inconspicuous occurrences. On
the Moon, the outside, catastrophic events hold sway; on Earth,
the inside, slow processes dominate. Mars is an intermediate case.

Between the orbits of Mars and Jupiter are countless asteroids,
tiny terrestrial planets. The largest are a few hundred kilometers
across. Many have oblong shapes and are tumbling through
space. In some cases there seem to be two or more asteroids in
tight mutual orbits. Collisions among the asteroids happen fre^
quently, and occasionally a piece is chipped off and accidentally
intercepts the Earth, falling to the ground as a meteorite. In the
exhibits, on the shelves of our museums are the fragments of
distant worlds. The asteroid belt is a great grinding mill, produce
ing smaller and smaller pieces down to motes of dust. The bigger
asteroidal pieces, along with the comets, are mainly responsible
for the recent craters on planetary surfaces. The asteroid belt may
be a place where a planet was once prevented from forming
because of the gravitational tides of the giant nearby planet
Jupiter; or it may be the shattered remains of a planet that blew
itself up. This seems improbable because no scientist on Earth
knows how a planet might blow itself up, which is probably just
as well.

The rings of Saturn bear some resemblance to the asteroid
belt: trillions of tiny icy moonlets orbiting the planet. They may
represent debris prevented by the gravity of Saturn from accren
ing into a nearby moon, or they may be the remains of a moon

The densely cratered surface, of the lunar
farside. Until the advent of space vehicles
this view was entirely unknown to the in¬
habitants of Earth. It was first observed by
the Luna vehicles of the Soviet Union.
The gravitational tides of our planet force
the Moon to perform a rotation once a
month, resulting in a hemisphere perma-
nently facing the Earth and one perma-
nently averted. The dark blotches at
upper right are small maria. Maria are
more prominent in the Earthdacing
hemisphere and produce the “Man in the
Moon.” Apollo Orbiter photo. Courtesy
NASA.

88 - Cosmos

Heaven and Hell — 89

f

e

The formation of the Moon, (a-d): The final stages of accretion, some 4.6 to 5 billion years ago. The energy released
by the impact of the last generation of infalling debris to strike the Moon melts its surface. As most of the nearby
debris is swept up by the Moon, it gradually cools, (ed): Impact of an asteroid 3.9 billion years ago, forming a cavity,
spraying ejecta, generating an expanding shock wave and attendant reheating of the surface. The resulting basin (i)
becomes flooded (pk), probably by molten basaltic rocks, perhaps 2.7 billion years ago. The prominent dark basin is
now called Mare Imbrium, easily visible from the Earth with the naked eye. More recent impacts have produced the
rayed craters Eratosthenes (1) and Copernicus (m). Slow erosion on the Moon has reduced the contrast between Mare
Imbrium and its surroundings. Paintings by Don Davis, with the advice of the U.S. Geological Survey, Branch of
Astrogeology.

90 - Cosmos

The Southern Hemisphere of the planet
Mercury. Overlapping craters and promi-
nent ray craters are evident in this Mariner
10 image. The surfaces of Mercury and
the Moon are so similar because they were
both subject to major impact explosions
billions of years ago, and have expert
enced little surface erosion since. This is a
photomosaic. The black cutouts at bot¬
tom are regions never photographed.
Courtesy NASA.

The outlying provinces, seen at left as
concentric cracks and ridges, of the great
Caloris Basin on the broiling surface of
Mercury. Mariner 10 photomosaic. Cour¬
tesy NASA.

that wandered too close and was torn apart by the gravitational
tides. Alternatively, they may be the steady state equilibrium
between material ejected from a moon of Saturn, such as Titan,
and material falling into the atmosphere of the planet. Jupiter and
Uranus also have ring systems, discovered only recently, and
almost invisible from the Earth. Whether Neptune has a ring is a
problem high on the agenda of planetary scientists. Rings may be
a typical adornment of Jovian-type planets throughout the
cosmos.

Major recent collisions from Saturn to Venus were alleged in a
popular book, Worlds in Collision , published in 1950 by a psy¬
chiatrist named Immanuel Velikovsky. He proposed that an ob¬
ject of planetary mass, which he called a comet, was somehow
generated in the Jupiter system. Some 3,500 years ago, it careered
in toward the inner solar system and made repeated encounters
with the Earth and Mars, having as incidental consequences the
parting of the Red Sea, allowing Moses and the Israelites to
escape from Pharoah, and the stopping of the Earth from rotating
on Joshua’s command. It also caused, he said, extensive vulcan-
ism and floods.* Velikovsky imagined the comet, after a compli¬
cated game of interplanetary billiards, to settle down into a
stable, nearly circular orbit, becoming the planet Venus—which
he claimed never existed before then.

As I have discussed at some length elsewhere, these ideas are
almost certainly wrong. Astronomers do not object to the idea of
major collisions, only to major recent collisions. In any model of
the solar system it is impossible to show the sizes of the planets
on the same scale as their orbits, because the planets would then

* As far as I know, the first essentially nonmystical attempt to explain a
historical event by cometary intervention was Edmund Halley’s proposal
that the Noachic flood was “the casual Choc [shock] of a Comet.”

Heaven and Hell — 91

he almost too small to see. If the planets were really shown to
scale, as grains of dust, we would easily note that the chance of
collision of a particular comet with the Earth in a few thousand
years is extraordinarily low. Moreover, Venus is a rocky and
metallic, hydrogen-poor planet, whereas Jupiter—where Vein
kovsky supposed it comes from—is made almost entirely of hy-
drogen. There are no energy sources for comets or planets to be
ejected by Jupiter. If one passed by the Earth, it could not “stop”
the Earth’s rotation, much less start it up again at twenty-four
hours a day. No geological evidence supports the idea of an
unusual frequency of vulcanism or floods 3,500 years ago. There
are Mesopotamian inscriptions referring to Venus that predate
the time when Velikovsky says Venus changed from a comet
into a planet.* It is very unlikely that an object in such a highly
elliptical orbit could he rapidly moved into the nearly perfectly
circular orbit of present-day Venus. And so on.

Many hypotheses proposed by scientists as well as by non¬
scientists turn out to be wrong. But science is a self-correcting
enterprise. To be accepted, all new ideas must survive rigorous
standards of evidence. The worst aspect of the Velikovsky affair
is not that his hypotheses were wrong or in contradiction to
firmly established facts, but that some who called themselves
scientists attempted to suppress Velikovsky’s work. Science is
generated by and devoted to free inquiry: the idea that any
hypothesis, no matter how strange, deserves to be considered on
its merits. The suppression of uncomfortable ideas may be com¬
mon in religion and politics, but it is not the path to knowledge; it
has no place in the endeavor of science. We do not know in
advance who will discover fundamental new insights.

Venus has almost the same mass,' 1 ' size, and density as the
Earth. As the nearest planet, it has for centuries been thought of
as the Earth’s sister. What is our sister planet really like? Might it
he a balmy, summer planet, a little warmer than the Earth be¬
cause it is a little closer to the Sun? Does it have impact craters, or
have they all eroded away? Are there volcanoes? Mountains?
Oceans? Life?

The first person to look at Venus through the telescope was
Galileo in 1609. He saw an absolutely featureless disc. Galileo
noted that it went through phases, like the Moon, from a thin
crescent to a full disc, and for the same reason: we are sometimes
looking mostly at the night side of Venus and sometimes mostly
at the day side, a finding that incidentally reinforced the view
that the Earth went around the Sun and not vice versa. As
optical telescopes became larger and their resolution (or ability to

* The Adda cylinder seal, dating from the middle of the third millenium
B.C., prominently displays Inanna, the goddess of Venus, the morning
star, and precursor of the Babylonian Ishtar.

Crater Yuty at 22°N, 34°W on Mars.
Surrounding it are several layers of surface
material ejected in the impact that pro¬
duced the crater. The splash pattern sug¬
gests that the excavated material flowed
outward on some lubricant, probably
subsurface ice melted by the impact. A
small earlier crater just below Yuty has not
been buried by the ejecta, indicating that
the ejecta layer is thin. Mariner 9 photo.
Courtesy NASA.

A crater on the northern escarpment of
Capri Chasma, Mars. The slow enlarge¬
ment of the valley has begun to crack and
erode the crater. Mariner 9 photomosaic.
Courtesy NASA.

t It is, incidentally, some 30 million times more massive than the most
massive comet known.

92 — Cosmos

\

¥

Dark variable markings in and near craters
in Memnonia on Mars. Drifting bright
sand and dust covers and uncovers urn
derlying dark material. Windblown fine
particles also cover over and erode craters
and other geological forms. Mariner 9
photo. Courtesy NASA.

Dark, possibly volcanic material blown by
winds out of a crater in Mesogaea on
Mars. Mariner 9 photo. Courtesy NASA.

discriminate fine detail) improved, they were systematically
turned toward Venus. But they did no better than Galileo’s.
Venus was evidently covered by a dense layer of obscuring
cloud. When we look at the planet in the morning or evening
skies, we are seeing sunlight reflected off the clouds of Venus.
But for centuries after their discovery, the composition of those
clouds remained entirely unknown.

The absence of anything to see on Venus led some scientists to
the curious conclusion that the surface was a swamp, like the
Earth in the Carboniferous Period. The argument—if we can
dignify it by such a word—went something like this:

“I can’t see a thing on Venus.”

“Why not?”

“Because it’s totally covered with clouds.”

“What are clouds made of?”

“Water, of course.”

“Then why are the clouds of Venus thicker than the
clouds on Earth?”

“Because there’s more water there.”

“But if there is more water in the clouds, there must be
more water on the surface. What kind of surfaces are very-
wet:

bwamps.

And if there are swamps, why not cycads and dragonflies and
perhaps even dinosaurs on Venus? Observation: There was ab-
solutely nothing to see on Venus. Conclusion: It must be covered
with life. The featureless clouds of Venus reflected our own
predispositions. We are alive, and we resonate with the idea of
life elsewhere. But only careful accumulation and assessment of
the evidence can tell us whether a given world is inhabited.
Venus turns out not to oblige our predispositions.

The first real clue to the nature of Venus came from work with
a prism made of glass or a flat surface, called a diffraction grating,
covered with fine, regularly spaced, ruled lines. When an intense
beam of ordinary white light passes through a narrow slit and
then through a prism or grating, it is spread into a rainbow of
colors called a spectrum. The spectrum runs from high frequen¬
cies* of visible light to low ones—violet, blue, green, yellow,
orange and red. Since we see these colors, it is called the spectrum
of visible light. But there is far more light than the small segment
of the spectrum we can see. At higher frequencies, beyond the
violet, is a part of the spectrum called the ultraviolet: a perfectly
real kind of light, carrying death to the microbes. It is invisible to
us, but readily detectable by bumblebees and photoelectric cells.
There is much more to the world than we can see. Beyond the

* Light is a wave motion; its frequency is the number of wave crests, say,
entering a detection instrument, such as a retina, in a given unit of time,
such as a second. The higher the frequency, the more energetic the
radiation.

Heaven and Hell - 93

ultraviolet is the X^ray part of the spectrum, and beyond the
X-rays are the gamma rays. At lower frequencies, on the other
side of red, is the infrared part of the spectrum. It was first
discovered by placing a sensitive thermometer in what to our
eyes is the dark beyond the red. The temperature rose. There
was light falling on the thermometer even though it was invisible
to our eyes. Rattlesnakes and doped semiconductors detect infra^
red radiation perfectly well. Beyond the infrared is the vast spec^
tral region of the radio waves. From gamma rays to radio waves,
all are equally respectable brands of light. All are useful in as^
tronomy. But because of the limitations of our eyes, we have a
prejudice, a bias, toward that tiny rainbow band we call the
spectrum of visible light.

In 1844, the philosopher Auguste Comte was searching for an
example of a sort of knowledge that would be always hidden. He
chose the composition of distant stars and planets. We would
never physically visit them, he thought, and with no sample in
hand it seemed we would forever be denied knowledge of their
composition. But only three years after Comte’s death, it was
discovered that a spectrum can be used to determine the chemis^
try of distant objects. Different molecules and chemical elements
absorb different frequencies or colors of light, sometimes in the
visible and sometimes elsewhere in the spectrum. In the spectrum
of a planetary atmosphere, a single dark line represents an image
of the slit in which light is missing, the absorption of sunlight
during its brief passage through the air of another world. Each
such line is made by a particular kind of molecule or atom. Every
substance has its characteristic spectral signature. The gases on
Venus can be identified from the Earth, 60 million kilometers
away. We can divine the composition of the Sun (in which
helium, named after the Greek sun god Helios, was first found);
of magnetic A stars rich in europium; of distant galaxies analyzed
through the collective light of a hundred billion constituent stars.
Astronomical spectroscopy is an almost magical technique. It
amazes me still. Auguste Comte picked a particularly unfortunate
example.

> a>

& <D (5 O C 5

o =3 35 = o -O

'> -O 05 o 2?

\

visible

gamma rays

0.1A

\ 4000-7000A y

\ /

✓

X-rays

ultraviolet

infrared

A spectrum produced when a bright light
passes through a slit and then through a
glass prism. If a gas that strongly absorbed
visible light were in the light path, the
rainbow pattern would be interrupted by
a set of dark lines characteristic of the gas.

Schematic diagram of the electromagnetic
spectrum, ranging from the shortest
wavelengths (gamma rays) to the longest
(radio waves). The wavelength of light is
measured in Angstroms (A), micrometers
(^m), centimeters (cm) and meters (m).

radio

1A

10A

100A 1000A ym 10/um lO^xxm 1000/dm 1cm 10cm

10 / 000A=1/Hm 10,000/xm =lcm

lm

94 - Cosmos

Phobos, the innermost moon of Mars.
Crater Stickney is shown at top. If the
impacting object that produced this crater
had been a little larger, Phobos might
have been disintegrated. Viking 1 Orbiter
photo. Courtesy NASA.

Close-up of the system of grooves on
Phobos, possibly caused by the gravita¬
tional tides of Mars. Phobos and its sister
moon Deimos seem to have significant
organic matter on their surfaces which ac¬
counts for their dark color. Both may be
captured asteroids. The dimensions of this
little moon are roughly 27 * 21 x ^ki¬
lometers, with the long axis pointing
towards the center of Mars. Viking 1 Or-
biter photo. Courtesy NASA.

If Venus were soaking wet, it should be easy to see the water
vapor lines in its spectrum. But the first spectroscopic searches,
attempted at Mount Wilson Observatory around 1920, found
not a hint, not a trace, of water vapor above the clouds of Venus,
suggesting an arid, desert-like surface, surmounted by clouds of
fine drifting silicate dust. Further study revealed enormous quan¬
tities of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere, implying to some
scientists that all the water on the planet had combined with
hydrocarbons to form carbon dioxide, and that therefore the
surface of Venus was a global oil field, a planet-wide sea of
petroleum. Others concluded that there was no water vapor
above the clouds because the clouds were very cold, that all the
water had condensed out into water droplets, which do not have
the same pattern of spectral lines as water vapor. They suggested
that the planet was totally covered with water—except perhaps
for an occasional limestone-encrusted island, like the cliffs of
Dover. But because of the vast quantities of carbon dioxide in
the atmosphere, the sea could not be ordinary water; physical
chemistry required carbonated water. Venus, they proposed, had
a vast ocean of seltzer.

The first hint of the true situation came not from spectroscopic
studies in the visible or near-infrared parts of the spectrum, but
rather from the radio region. A radio telescope works more like a
light meter than a camera. You point it toward some fairly broad
region of the sky, and it records how much energy, in a particular
radio frequency, is coming down to Earth. We are used to radio
signals transmitted by some varieties of intelligent life—namely,
those who run radio and television stations. But there are many
other reasons for natural objects to give off radio waves. One is
that they are hot. And when, in 1956, an early radio telescope
was turned toward Venus, it was discovered to be emitting radio
waves as if it were at an extremely high temperature. But the real
demonstration that the surface of Venus is astonishingly hot
came when the Soviet spacecraft of the Venera series first pene¬
trated the obscuring clouds and landed on the mysterious and
inaccessible surface of the nearest planet. Venus, it turns out, is
broiling hot. There are no swamps, no oil fields, no seltzer
oceans. With insufficient data, it is easy to go wrong.

When I greet a friend, I am seeing her in reflected visible light,
generated by the Sun, say, or by an incandescent lamp. The light
rays bounce off my friend and into my eye. But the ancients,
including no less a figure than Euclid, believed that we see by
virtue of rays somehow emitted by the eye and tangibly, actively
contacting the object observed. This is a natural notion and can
still be encountered, although it does not account for the invis¬
ibility of objects in a darkened room. Today we combine a laser
and a photocell, or a radar transmitter and a radio telescope, and
in this way make active contact by light with distant objects. In
radar astronomy, radio waves are transmitted by a telescope on

Heaven and Hell — 95

Earth, strike, say, that hemisphere of Venus that happens to he
facing the Earth, and bounce hack. At many wavelengths the
clouds and atmosphere of Venus are entirely transparent to radio
waves. Some places on the surface will absorb them or, it they
are very rough, will scatter them sideways and so will appear dark
to radio waves. By following the surface features moving with
Venus as it rotates, it was possible for the first time to determine
reliably the length of its day—how long it takes Venus to spin
once on its axis. It turns out that, with respect to the stars, Venus
turns once every 245 Earth days, but backwards, in the opposite
direction from all other planets in the inner solar system. As a
result, the Sun rises in the west and sets in the east, taking 118
Earth days from sunrise to sunrise. What is more, it presents
almost exactly the same face to the Earth each time it is closest to
our planet. However the Earth’s gravity has managed to nudge
Venus into this Earthdocked rotation rate, it cannot have hap'
pened rapidly. Venus could not be a mere few thousand years old
but, rather, it must be as old as all the other objects in the inner
solar system.

Radar pictures of Venus have been obtained, some from
ground-based radar telescopes, some from the Pioneer Venus
vehicle in orbit around the planet. They show provocative evi¬
dence of impact craters. There are just as many craters that are
not too big or too small on Venus as there are in the lunar
highlands, so many that Venus is again telling us that it is very
old. But the craters of Venus are remarkably shallow, almost as it
the high surface temperatures have produced a kind of rock that
flows over long periods of time, like taffy or putty, gradually
softening the relief. There are great mesas here, twice as high as
the Tibetan plateau, an immense rift valley, possibly giant vol¬
canoes and a mountain as high as Everest. We now see before us
a world previously hidden entirely by clouds—its features first
explored by radar and by space vehicles.

The surface temperatures on Venus, as deduced from radio
astronomy and confirmed by direct spacecraft measurements are
around 480°C or 900°F, hotter than the hottest household oven.
The corresponding surface pressure is 90 atmospheres, 90 times
the pressure we feel from the Earth’s atmosphere, the equivalent
of the weight of water 1 kilometer below the surface of the
oceans. To survive tor long on Venus, a space vehicle would
have to be refrigerated as well as built like a deep submersible.

Something like a dozen space vehicles from the Soviet Union
and United States have entered the dense Venus atmosphere,
and penetrated the clouds; a few of them have actually survived
for an hour or so on the surface.* Two spacecraft in the Soviet
* Pioneer Venus was a successful U.S. mission in 1978-79, combining an
Orbiter and four atmospheric entry probes, two of which briefly survived
the inclemencies of the Venus surface. There are many unexpected
developments in mustering spacecraft to explore the planets. This is one

A radar map of equatorial latitudes on
Venus. Bright regions reflect radio waves
back to space efficiently. Circles show re¬
gions studied in greater detail, one of
which is shown below. For a detailed glo¬
bal map of Venus see page 340. Goldstone
Tracking Station, Jet Propulsion Labora¬
tory.

Close-up of an equatorial region on Venus
as seen by radar astronomy from Earth.
The diagonal bar is a region from which
no useful data were returned. Several
craters are seen, the largest almost 200 ki¬
lometers across. Craters on Venus are very
shallow compared with crater of similar
diameters on other worlds, hinting at
some special erosion mechanism. Gold-
stone Tracking Station, Jet Propulsion
Laboratory.

96 — Cosmos

Callisto, the outermost large moon of Ju¬
piter. Each circular bright spot is a large
impact crater. Voyager 2 photo taken at a
range of one million kilometers. Courtesy
NASA.

A region of Ganymede, largest moon of
Jupiter. Bright ray craters and other im-
pact scars are seen. Io and Europa, the
other two large Jovian satellites, like the
Earth, show few if any impact craters;
erosion must he much more efficient there
than on Ganymede and Callisto. Voyager
2 photo. Courtesy NASA.

Venera series have taken pictures down there. Let us follow in
the footsteps of these pioneering missions, and visit another
world.

In ordinary visible light, the faintly yellowish clouds of Venus
can be made out, but they show, as Galileo first noted, virtually
no features at all. If the cameras look in the ultraviolet, however,
we see a graceful, complex swirling weather system in the high
atmosphere, where the winds are around 100 meters per second,
some 220 miles per hour. The atmosphere of Venus is composed
of 96 percent carbon dioxide. There are small traces of nitrogen,
water vapor, argon, carbon monoxide and other gases, but the
only hydrocarbons or carbohydrates present are there in less than
0.1 parts per million. The clouds of Venus turn out to be chiefly
a concentrated solution of sulfuric acid. Small quantities of hy-
drochloric acid and hydrofluoric acid are also present. Even at its
high, cool clouds, Venus turns out to be a thoroughly nasty
place.

High above the visible cloud deck, at about 70 kilometers
altitude, there is a continuous haze of small particles. At 60
kilometers, we plunge into the clouds, and find ourselves sur¬
rounded by droplets of concentrated sulfuric acid. As we go
deeper, the cloud particles tend to get bigger. The pungent gas,
sulfur dioxide, S0 2 , is present in trace amounts in the lower
atmosphere. It is circulated up above the clouds, broken down by
ultraviolet light from the Sun and recombined with water there
to form sulfuric acid—which condenses into droplets, settles, and
at lower altitudes is broken down by heat into S0 2 and water
again, completing the cycle. It is always raining sulfuric acid on
Venus, all over the planet, and not a drop ever reaches the
surface.

The sulfur-colored mist extends downwards to some 45 kilo¬
meters above the surface of Venus, where we emerge into a
dense but crystal-clear atmosphere. The atmospheric pressure is
so high, however, that we cannot see the surface. Sunlight is
bounced about by atmospheric molecules until we lose all images
from the surface. There is no dust here, no clouds, just an
atmosphere getting palpably denser. Plenty of sunlight is trans¬
mitted by the overlying clouds, about as much as on an overcast
day on the Earth.

With searing heat, crushing pressures, noxious gases and

of them: Among the instruments aboard one of the Pioneer Venus entry
probes was a net flux radiometer, designed to measure simultaneously
the amount of infrared energy flowing upwards and downwards at each
position in the Venus atmosphere. The instrument required a sturdy
window that was also transparent to infrared radiation. A 13.5-karat
diamond was imported and milled into the desired window. However,
the contractor was required to pay a $12,000 import duty. Eventually,
the U.S. Customs service decided that after the diamond was launched
to Venus it was unavailable for trade on Earth and refunded the money
to the manufacturer.

Heaven and Hell — 97

everything suffused in an eerie, reddish glow, Venus seems less the
goddess of love than the incarnation of hell As nearly as we can
make out, at least some places on the surface are strewn fields of
jumbled, softened irregular rocks, a hostile, barren landscape
relieved only here and there by the eroded remnants of a derelict
spacecraft from a distant planet, utterly invisible through the
thick, cloudy, poisonous atmosphere.*

Venus is a kind of planet-wide catastrophe. It now seems
reasonably clear that the high surface temperature comes about
through a massive greenhouse effect. Sunlight passes through the
atmosphere and clouds of Venus, which are semi-transparent to
visible light, and reaches the surface. The surface being heated
endeavors to radiate back into space. But because Venus is much
cooler than the Sun, it emits radiation chiefly in the infrared
rather than the visible region of the spectrum. However, the
carbon dioxide and water vapoV in the Venus atmosphere are
almost perfectly opaque to infrared radiation, the heat of the Sun
is efficiently trapped, and the surface temperature rises—until the
little amount of infrared radiation that trickles out of this massive
atmosphere just balances the sunlight absorbed in the lower
atmosphere and surface.

* In this stifling landscape, there is not likely to be anything alive, even
creatures very different from us. Organic and other conceivable biologi¬
cal molecules would simply fall to pieces. But, as an indulgence, let us
imagine that intelligent life once evolved on such a planet. Would it
then invent science? The development of science on Earth was spurred
fundamentally by observations of the regularities of the stars and planets.
But Venus is completely cloud-covered. The night is pleasingly long—
about 59 Earth days long—but nothing of the astronomical universe
would be visible if you looked up into the night sky of Venus. Even the
Sun would be invisible in the daytime; its light would he scattered and
diffused over the whole sky—just as scuba divers see only a uniform
enveloping radiance beneath the sea. If a radio telescope were built on
Venus, it could detect the Sun, the Earth and other distant objects. If
astrophysics developed, the existence of stars could eventually he de¬
duced from the principles of physics, but they would be theoretical
constructs only. I sometimes wonder what their reaction would be if
intelligent beings on Venus one day learned to fly, to sail in the dense air,
to penetrate the mysterious cloud veil 45 kilometers above them and
eventually to emerge out the top of the clouds, to look up and for the
first time witness that glorious universe of Sun and planets and stars.

+ At the present time there is still a little uncertainty about the abun¬
dance of water vapor on Venus. The gas chromatograph on the Pioneer
Venus entry probes gave an abundance of water in the lower atmosphere
of a few tenths of a percent. On the other hand, infrared measurements
by the Soviet entry vehicles, Veneras 11 and 12, gave an abundance of
about a hundredth of a percent. If the former value applies, then carbon
dioxide and water vapor alone are adequate to seal in almost all the heat
radiation from the surface and keep the Venus ground temperature at
about 480°C. If the latter number applies—and my guess is that it is the
more reliable estimate—then carbon dioxide and water vapor alone are
adequate to keep the surface temperature only at about 380°C, and

Plastic construction helmet before (top)
and after ( bottom) brief exposure to Venus
surface temperatures. Photographed at
Southwest Research Institute, San An¬
tonio, Texas.

98 — Cosmos

Venera 9 and 10 panoramic images of two
different sites on the surface of the planet
Venus. In both pictures the horizon is
toward top right. Note the eroded form of
the surface rocks. Courtesy Institute for
Cosmic Research, Soviet Academy of
Sciences, Moscow.

Our neighboring world turns out to be a dismally unpleasant
place. But we will go back to Venus. It is fascinating in its own
right. Many mythic heroes in Greek and Norse mythology, after
all, made celebrated efforts to visit Hell. There is also much to be
learned about our planet, a comparative Heaven, by comparing it
with Hell.

The Sphinx, half human, half lion, was constructed more than
5,500 years ago. Its face was once crisp and cleanly rendered. It is
now softened and blurred by thousands of years of Egyptian
desert sandblasting and by occasional rains. In New York City
there is an obelisk called Cleopatra’s Needle, which came from
Egypt. In only about a hundred years in that city’s Central Park,
its inscriptions have been almost totally obliterated, because of
smog and industrial pollution—chemical erosion like that in the
atmosphere of Venus. Erosion on Earth slowly wipes out infon
mation, but because they are gradual—the patter of a raindrop,
the sting of a sand grain—those processes can be missed. Big
structures, such as mountain ranges, survive tens of millions of
years; smaller impact craters, perhaps a hundred thousand*; and

some other atmospheric constituent is necessary to close the remaining
infrared frequency windows in the atmospheric greenhouse. However,
the small quantities of S0 2 , CO and HC1, all of which have been
detected in the Venus atmosphere, seem adequate for this purpose.
Thus recent American and Soviet missions to Venus seem to have
provided verification that the greenhouse effect is indeed the reason for
the high surface temperature.

* More precisely, an impact crater 10 kilometers in diameter is produced
on the Earth about once every 500,000 years; it would survive erosion
for about 300 million years in areas that are geologically stable, such as
Europe and North America. Smaller craters are produced more fre-
quently and destroyed more rapidly, especially in geologically active
regions.

Heaven and Hell - 99

Full-disk view of Venus in ultraviolet light,
printed in the hues of the visible spectrum.
The patterns are due to clouds, rotating right
to left, high in the Venus atmosphere. Pio¬
neer Venus Orbiter photo. Courtesy NASA.

Two model reconstructions of the surface of Venus, the bottom image
displaying a Venera spacecraft, its electronics long since fried, slowly
eroding in the hostile environment of our sister planet.

Crescent Venus in visible light. We see only
the unbroken clouds of sulfuric acid solution.
The yellow color may be due to small quan¬
tities of elemental sulfur. Pioneer Venus Or¬
biter photo. Courtesy NASA.

large-scale human artifacts only some thousands. In addition to
such slow and uniform erosion, destruction also occurs through
catastrophes large and small. The Sphinx is missing a nose.
Someone shot it off in a moment of idle desecration—some say it
was Mameluke Turks, others, Napoleonic soldiers.

On Venus, on Earth and elsewhere in the solar system, there is
evidence for catastrophic destruction, tempered or overwhelmed
by slower, more uniform processes: on the Earth, for example,
rainfall, coursing into rivulets, streams and rivers of running
water, creating huge alluvial basins; on Mars, the remnants of

100 - Cosmos

\\

Heaven and Hell - 101

Natural processes altering the landscape on a small habit'
able world: The Earth from space, as seen by Apollo and
Landsat spacecraft at an altitude of a few hundred kilome'
ters. (a) The Near East, Africa and, visible through the
clouds, the Antarctic polar cap. (b and c): Tropical storm
systems over Florida and the Gulf of Mexico: weather on a
planet with a modest atmosphere, (d) The Rocky Mourn
tains, partly snow covered, just west of Denver, (e) A vob
canic mountain on Earth: the island of Hawaii, (f)
Geological fault systems in southern Swaziland, (g) The
delta of the river Nile, (h) Frozen water is less dense than
liquid water: pack ice in the St. Lawrence Seaway, (i) Ice
glaciers among rivers in the Brooks Range of Alaska, (j)
The patterns made by liquid water, flowing downhill over
topography: the Jurua, Embira and Tarauca tributaries of
the Amazon River, (k) The patterns of windblown sand:
seif dunes in the southern Arabian peninsula. (I) The delta
of the Chu Chiang. Essentially undetected in this image are
Canton (center) and Hong Kong (lower right), (m) The
Caribbean coast of Venezuela, showing silt being carried
out to sea. Courtesy NASA.

m

102 — Cosmos

ancient rivers, perhaps arising from beneath the ground; on Io, a
moon of Jupiter, what seem to be broad channels made by flow-
ing liquid sulfur. There are mighty weather systems on the
Earth—and in the high atmosphere of Venus and on Jupiter.
There are sandstorms on the Earth and on Mars; lightning on
Jupiter and Venus and Earth. Volcanoes inject debris into the
atmospheres of the Earth and Io. Internal geological processes
slowly deform the surfaces of Venus, Mars, Ganymede and
Europa, as well as Earth. Glaciers, proverbial for their slowness,
produce major reworkings of landscapes on the Earth and prot>
ably also on Mars. These processes need not be constant in time.
Most of Europe was once covered with ice. A few million years
ago, the present site of the city of Chicago was buried under
three kilometers of frost. On Mars, and elsewhere in the solar
system, we see features that could not be produced today, land'
scapes carved hundreds of millions or billions of years ago when
the planetary climate was probably very different.

There is an additional factor that can alter the landscape and
the climate of Earth: intelligent life, able to make major environ-
mental changes. Like Venus, the Earth also has a greenhouse
effect due to its carbon dioxide and water vapor. The global
temperature of the Earth would be below the freezing point of
water if not for the greenhouse effect. It keeps the oceans liquid
and life possible. A little greenhouse is a good thing. Like Venus,
the Earth also has about 90 atmospheres of carbon dioxide; but it
resides in the crust as limestone and other carbonates, not in the
atmosphere. If the Earth were moved only a little closer to the
Sun, the temperature would increase slightly. This would drive
some of the C0 2 out of the surface rocks, generating a stronger
greenhouse effect, which would in turn incrementally heat the
surface further. A hotter surface would vaporize still more can
bonates into C0 2 , and there would be the possibility of a rum
away greenhouse effect to very high temperatures. This is just
what we think happened in the early history of Venus, because
of Venus’ proximity to the Sun. The surface environment of
Venus is a warning: something disastrous can happen to a planet
rather like our own.

The principal energy sources of our present industrial civiliza¬
tion are the so-called fossil fuels. We burn wood and oil, coal and
natural gas, and, in the process, release waste gases, principally
C0 2 , into the air. Consequently, the carbon dioxide content of
the Earth’s atmosphere is increasing dramatically. The possibility
of a runaway greenhouse effect suggests that we have to be
careful: Even a one- or two-degree rise in the global temperature
can have catastrophic consequences. In the burning of coal and oil
and gasoline, we are also putting sulfuric acid into the atmos¬
phere. Like Venus, our stratosphere even now has a substantial
mist of tiny sulfuric acid droplets. Our major cities are polluted
with noxious molecules. We do not understand the long-term

Heaven and Hell - 103

effects of our course of action.

But we have also been perturbing the climate in the opposite
sense. For hundreds of thousands of years human beings have
been burning and cutting down forests and encouraging domestic
animals to graze on and destroy grasslands. Slash-and-burn agri¬
culture, industrial tropical deforestation and overgrazing are
rampant today. But forests are darker than grasslands, and grass¬
lands are darker than deserts. As a consequence, the amount of
sunlight that is absorbed by the ground has been declining, and
by changes in the land use we are lowering the surface tempera¬
ture of our planet. Might this cooling increase the size of the
polar ice cap, which, because it is bright, will reflect still more
sunlight from the Earth, further cooling the planet, driving a
runaway albedo* effect?

Our lovely blue planet, the Earth, is the only home we know.
Venus is too hot. Mars is too cold. But the Earth is just right, a
heaven for humans. After all, we evolved here. But our conge¬
nial climate may be unstable. We are perturbing our poor planet
in serious and contradictory ways. Is there any danger of driving
the environment of the Earth toward the planetary Hell of Venus
or the global ice age of Mars? The simple answer is that nobody
knows. The study of the global climate, the comparison of the
Earth with other worlds, are subjects in their earliest stages of
development. They are fields that are poorly and grudgingly
funded. In our ignorance, we continue to push and pull, to
pollute the atmosphere and brighten the land, oblivious of the
fact that the long-term consequences are largely unknown.

A few million years ago, when human beings first evolved on
Earth, it was already a middle-aged world, 4.6 billion years along
from the catastrophes and impetuosities of its youth. But we
humans now represent a new and perhaps decisive factor. Our
intelligence and our technology have given us the power to affect
the climate. How will we use this power? Are we willing to
tolerate ignorance and complacency in matters that affect the
entire human family? Do we value short-term advantages above
the welfare of the Earth? Or will we think on longer time scales,
with concern for our children and our grandchildren, to under¬
stand and protect the complex life-support systems of our planet?
The Earth is a tiny and fragile world. It needs to be cherished.

The head of the Sphinx, from the De¬
scription de L’Egypt , published in 1809.
The paws of the Sphinx were then en¬
tirely buried in the sand and protected
from erosion. Excavated in more recent
times, they are much better preserved
than the face.

* The albedo is the fraction of the sunlight striking a planet that is
reflected back to space. The albedo of the Earth is some 30 to 35
percent. The rest of the sunlight is absorbed by the ground and is
responsible for the average surface temperature.

Frost in Utopia. A thin layer of water frost
covers the ground at 44° North latitude on
Mars, in October 1977, at the beginning of
northern winter. The vertical structure supports
the high-gain antenna for direct communication
of Viking 2 with Earth. Colored squares and
black strips are calibration targets for the cam-
eras. The black square with white border, bot¬
tom left, is a microdot on which are
written—very small—the signatures of ten thou¬
sand human beings responsible for the design,
fabrication, testing, launch and mission opera¬
tions of the Viking spacecraft. Humans are be¬
coming, almost without noticing it, a
multi-planet species. Courtesy NASA.

Chapter V

BLUBS FOR
A BED PLANET

In the orchards of the gods, he watches the canals . . .

—Enuma Elish , Sumer, c. 2500 B.C.

A man that is of Copernicus’ Opinion, that this Earth of ours is a Planet,
carry’d round and enlightn’d by the Sun, like the rest of them, cannot but
sometimes have a fancy . . . that the rest of the Planets have their Dress and
Furniture, nay and their Inhabitants too as well as this Earth of ours. . . . But
we were always apt to conclude, that ’twas in vain to enquire after what
Nature had been pleased to do there, seeing there was no likelihood of ever
coming to an end of the Enquiry . . . but a while ago, thinking somewhat
seriously on this matter (not that I count my self quicker sighted than those
great Men [of the past], but that I had the happiness to live after most of
them) me thoughts the Enquiry was not so impracticable nor the way so
stopt up with Difficulties, but that there was very good room left for
probable Conjectures.

—Christiaan Huygens, New Conjectures Concerning the Planetary Worlds,

Their Inhabitants and Productions , c. 1690

A time would come when Men should be able to stretch out their Eyes . . .
they should see the Planets like our Earth.

—Christopher Wren, Inauguration Speech, Gresham College, 1657

106 - Cosmos

£ <£ #

Three photographs of the same face of
Mars, showing a polar cap and bright and
dark markings, but no classical canals. At
left, in local winter, the cap is prominent
and the contrast between light and dark
features subdued. At center, in local
spring, the cap has retreated, and the com
trast between bright and dark features is
marked. These seasonal changes were at-
tributed by Percival Lowell to the prolif¬
eration and decay of Martian vegetation.
At right, in early summer, a great yellow-
white dust cloud obscures surface fea¬
tures, and provides a hint of the answer to
the mystery of seasonal changes on Mars.
Courtesy New Mexico State University
Observatory.

MANY YEARS AGO, so the story goes, a celebrated newspaper
publisher sent a telegram to a noted astronomer: WIRE COLLECT
IMMEDIATELY FIVE HUNDRED WORDS ON WHETHER THERE IS LIFE
ON MARS. The astronomer dutifully replied: NOBODY KNOWS,
NOBODY KNOWS, NOBODY KNOWS ... 250 times. But despite this
confession of ignorance, asserted with dogged persistence by an
expert, no one paid any heed, and from that time to this, we hear
authoritative pronouncements by those who think they have de¬
duced life on Mars, and by those who think they have excluded
it. Some people very much want there to be life on Mars; others
very much want there to be no life on Mars. There have been
excesses in both camps. These strong passions have somewhat
frayed the tolerance for ambiguity that is essential to science.
There seem to be many people who simply wish to be told an
answer, any answer, and thereby avoid the burden of keeping
two mutually exclusive possibilities in their heads at the same
time. Some scientists have believed that Mars is inhabited on
what has later proved to be the flimsiest evidence. Others have
concluded the planet is lifeless because a preliminary search for a
particular manifestation of life has been unsuccessful or
ambiguous. The blues have been played more than once for
the red planet.

Why Martians? Why so many eager speculations and ardent
fantasies about Martians, rather than, say, Saturnians or Pluton-
ians? Because Mars seems, at first glance, very Earthlike. It is the
nearest planet whose surface we can see. There are polar ice caps,
drifting white clouds, raging dust storms, seasonally changing
patterns on its red surface, even a twenty-four-hour day. It is
tempting to think of it as an inhabited world. Mars has become a
kind of mythic arena onto which we have projected our earthly
hopes and fears. But our psychological predispositions pro or con
must not mislead us. All that matters is the evidence, and the
evidence is not yet in. The real Mars is a world of wonders. Its
future prospects are far more intriguing than our past apprehen¬
sions about it. In our time we have sifted the sands of Mars, we
have established a presence there, we have fulfilled a century of
dreams!

No one would have believed in the last years of the nine¬
teenth century that this world was being watched keenly
and closely by intelligences greater than man’s and yet as
mortal as his own; that as men busied themselves about
their various concerns, they were scrutinised and studied,
perhaps almost as narrowly as a man with a microscope
might scrutinise the transient creatures that swarm and
multiply in a drop of water. With infinite complacency,
men went to and fro over this globe about their little affairs,
serene in their assurances of their empire over matter. It is
possible that the infusoria under the microscope do the

Blues for a Red Planet - 107

same. No one gave a thought to the older worlds of space as
sources of human danger, or thought of them only to dis¬
miss the idea of life upon them as impossible or improbable.

It is curious to recall some of the mental habits of those
departed days. At most, terrestrial men fancied there might
be other men upon Mars, perhaps inferior to themselves
and ready to welcome a missionary enterprise. Yet across
the gulf of space, minds that are to our minds as ours are to
those of the beasts that perish, intellects vast and cool and
unsympathetic, regarded this Earth with envious eyes, and
slowly and surely drew their plans against us.

These opening lines of H. G. Wells’ 1897 science fiction classic
The War of the Worlds maintain their haunting power to this
day.* For all of our history, there has been the fear, or hope, that
there might be life beyond the Earth. In the last hundred years,
that premonition has focused on a bright red point of light in the
night sky. Three years before The War of the Worlds was pub¬
lished, a Bostonian named Percival Lowell founded a major ob¬
servatory where the most elaborate claims in support of life on
Mars were developed. Lowell dabbled in astronomy as a young
man, went to Harvard, secured a semi-official diplomatic ap¬
pointment to Korea, and otherwise engaged in the usual pursuits
of the wealthy. Before he died in 1916, he had made major
contributions to our knowledge of the nature and evolution of
the planets, to the deduction of the expanding universe and, in a
decisive way, to the discovery of the planet Pluto, which is
named after him. The first two letters of the name Pluto are the

Percival Lowell, aged fifty-nine, in Flag¬
staff. Lowell Observatory photograph.

initials of Percival Lowell. Its symbol is EL , a planetary mono¬
gram.

But Lowell’s lifelong love was the planet Mars. He was elec¬
trified by the announcement in 1877 by an Italian astronomer,
Giovanni Schiaparelli, of canali on Mars. Schiaparelli had re¬
ported during a close approach of Mars to Earth an intricate
network of single and double straight lines crisscrossing the
bright areas of the planet. Canali in Italian means channels or
grooves, but was promptly translated into English as canals , a
word that implies intelligent design. A Mars mania coursed
through Europe and America, and Lowell found himself swept
up with it.

In 1892, his eyesight failing, Schiaparelli announced he was
giving up observing Mars. Lowell resolved to continue the work.
He wanted a first-rate observing site, undisturbed by clouds or
city lights and marked by good “seeing,” the astronomer’s term for
a steady atmosphere through which the shimmering of an

A map of Mars, after that of Schiaparelli.
The straight and curved lines are the
“canals.” Schiaparelli named many features
and locales after classical and mythical
places, and laid the basis for modern Mar¬
tian nomenclature, including Chryse and
Utopia, landing sites of Vikings 1 and 2.

* In 1938, a radio version, produced by Orson Welles, transposed the
Martian invasion from England to the eastern United States, and fright¬
ened millions in war-jittery America into believing that the Martians
were in fact attacking.

108 — Cosmos

Lowell seated at his observatory’s 24'inch
refracting telescope in 1900. Lowell Ob'
servatory photograph.

astronomical image in the telescope is minimized. Bad seeing is pn>
duced by smalLscale turbulence in the atmosphere above the
telescope and is the reason the stars twinkle. Lowell built his
observatory far away from home, on Mars Hill in Flagstaff, ArL
zona.* He sketched the surface features of Mars, particularly the
canals, which mesmerized him. Observations of this sort are not
easy. You put in long hours at the telescope in the chill of the
early morning. Often the seeing is poor and the image of Mars
blurs and distorts. Then you must ignore what you have seen.
Occasionally the image steadies and the features of the planet
flash out momentarily, marvelously. You must then remember
what has been vouchsafed to you and accurately commit it to
paper. You must put your preconceptions aside and with an open
mind set down the wonders of Mars.

Percival Lowell’s notebooks are full of what he thought he
saw: bright and dark areas, a hint of polar cap, and canals, a
planet festooned with canals. Lowell believed he was seeing a
globe'girdling network of great irrigation ditches, carrying water
from the melting polar caps to the thirsty inhabitants of the
equatorial cities. He believed the planet to be inhabited by an
older and wiser race, perhaps very different from us. He believed
that the seasonal changes in the dark areas were due to the
growth and decay of vegetation. He believed that Mars was, very
closely, Earthdike. All in all, he believed too much.

Lowell conjured up a Mars that was ancient, arid, withered, a
desert world. Still, it was an Earthdike desert. Lowell’s Mars had
many features in common with the American Southwest, where
the Lowell Observatory was located. He imagined the Martian
temperatures a little on the chilly side but still as comfortable as
“the South of England.” The air was thin, but there was enough
oxygen to be breathable. Water was rare, but the elegant net'
work of canals carried the life'giving fluid all over the planet.

What was in retrospect the most serious contemporary chaL
lenge to Lowell’s ideas came from an unlikely source. In 1907,
Alfred Russel Wallace, co'discoverer of evolution by natural
selection, was asked to review one of Lowell’s books. He had
been an engineer in his youth and, while somewhat credulous on
such issues as extrasensory perception, was admirably skeptical
on the habitability of Mars. Wallace showed that Lowell had
erred in his calculation of the average temperatures on Mars;
instead of being as temperate as the South of England, they were,
with few exceptions, everywhere below the freezing point of
water. There should be permafrost, a perpetually frozen subsurface.

* Isaac Newton had written “If the Theory of making Telescopes could
at length he fully brought into practice, yet there would be certain
Bounds beyond which Telescopes could not perform. For the Air
through which we look upon the Stars, is in perpetual tremor. . . . The
only remedy is the most serene and quiet Air, such as may perhaps be
found on the tops of the highest mountains above the grosser Clouds.”

Blues for a Red Planet - 109

The air was much thinner than Lowell had calculated.
Craters should be as abundant as on the Moon. And as for the
water in the canals:

Any attempt to make that scanty surplus [of water], by
means of overflowing canals, travel across the equator into
the opposite hemisphere, through such terrible desert re-
gions and exposed to such a cloudless sky as Mr. Lowell
describes, would be the work of a body of madmen rather
than of intelligent beings. It may be safely asserted that not
one drop of water would escape evaporation or insoak at
even a hundred miles from its source.

This devastating and largely correct physical analysis was written
in Wallace’s eighty-fourth year. His conclusion was that life on
Mars—by this he meant civil engineers with an interest in hy¬
draulics—was impossible. He offered no opinion on microorgan¬
isms.

Despite Wallace’s critique, despite the fact that other astron¬
omers with telescopes and observing sites as good as Lowell’s
could find no sign of the fabled canals, Lowell’s vision of Mars
gained popular acceptance. It had a mythic quality as old as
Genesis. Part of its appeal was the fact that the nineteenth cen¬
tury was an age of engineering marvels, including the construc¬
tion of enormous canals: the Suez Canal, completed in 1869; the
Corinth Canal, in 1893; the Panama Canal, in 1914; and, closer
to home, the Great Lake locks, the barge canals of upper New
York State, and the irrigation canals of the American Southwest.
If Europeans and Americans could perform such feats, why not
Martians? Might there not be an even more elaborate effort by an
older and wiser species, courageously battling the advance of
desiccation on the red planet?

We have now sent reconnaissance satellites into orbit around
Mars. The entire planet has been mapped. We have landed two
automated laboratories on its surface. The mysteries of Mars
have, if anything, deepened since Lowell’s day. However, with
pictures far more detailed than any view of Mars that Lowell
could have glimpsed, we have found not a tributary of the
vaunted canal network, not one lock. Lowell and Schiaparelli
and others, doing visual observations under difficult seeing con¬
ditions, were misled—in part perhaps because of a predisposition
to believe in life on Mars.

The observing notebooks of Percival Lowell reflect a sustained
effort at the telescope over many years. They show Lowell to
have been well aware of the skepticism expressed by other as¬
tronomers about the reality of the canals. They reveal a man
convinced that he has made an important discovery and dis¬
tressed that others have not yet understood its significance. In his
notebook for 1905, for example, there is an entry on January 21:
“Double canals came out by flashes, convincing of reality.” In
reading LowelPs notebooks I have the distinct but uncomfortable

One of the globes of Mars, showing
prominent named canals, prepared by
Lowell. Courtesy Lowell Observatory.

Drawing of Mars made in 1909 by E.-M.
Antoniadi in France. The polar cap and
limb haze are apparent, but under excel¬
lent “seeing” conditions virtually no canals
could be discerned.

110 — Cosmos

A modern illustration of the Mars in the
John Carter novels of Edgar Rice Bun
roughs. Courtesy Ballantine Books.

Konstantin Eduardovich Tsiolkovsky
(18574935), Russian rocket and space
pioneer. A deaf, largely self-educated
provincial schoolteacher, he made funda¬
mental contributions to astronautics. He
envisioned a time when humans would be
able to re-engineer the environments of
other worlds, and in 1896 wrote on com¬
munication with extraterrestrial intelli¬
gence. In 1903 he described in detail how
a multi-stage liquid-fuel rocket could
transport humans beyond the atmosphere
of the Earth. Courtesy Sovfoto.

feeling that he was really seeing something. But what?

When Paul Fox of Cornell and I compared Lowell’s maps of
Mars with the Mariner 9 orbital imagery—sometimes with a res¬
olution a thousand times superior to that of Lowell’s Earth-
bound twenty-four-inch refracting telescope—we found virtually
no correlation at all. It was not that Lowell’s eye had strung up
disconnected fine detail on the Martian surface into illusory
straight lines. There was no dark mottling or crater chains in the
position of most of his canals. There were no features there at all.
Then how could he have drawn the same canals year after year?
How could other astronomers—some of whom said they had not
examined Lowell’s maps closely until after their own observa¬
tions—have drawn the same canals? One of the great findings of
the Mariner 9 mission to Mars was that there are time-variable
streaks and splotches on the Martian surface—many connected
with the ramparts of impact craters—which change with the sea¬
sons. They are due to windblown dust, the patterns varying with
the seasonal winds. But the streaks do not have the character of
the canals, they are not in the position of the canals, and none of
them is large enough individually to be seen from the Earth in
the first place. It is unlikely that there were real features on Mars
even slightly resembling Lowell’s canals in the first few decades of
this century that have disappeared without a trace as soon as
close-up spacecraft investigations became possible.

The canals of Mars seem to be some malfunction, under diffi¬
cult seeing conditions, of the human hand/eye/brain combina¬
tion (or at least for some humans; many other astronomers,
observing with equally good instruments in Lowell’s time and
after, claimed there were no canals whatever). But this is hardly a
comprehensive explanation, and I have the nagging suspicion
that some essential feature of the Martian canal problem still
remains undiscovered. Lowell always said that the regularity of
the canals was an unmistakable sign that they were of intelligent
origin. This is certainly true. The only unresolved question was
which side of the telescope the intelligence was on.

Lowell’s Martians were benign and hopeful, even a little god¬
like, very different from the malevolent menace posed by Wells
and Welles in The War of the Worlds . Both sets of ideas passed
into the public imagination through Sunday supplements and
science fiction. I can remember as a child reading with breathless
fascination the Mars novels of Edgar Rice Burroughs. I journeyed
with John Carter, gentleman adventurer from Virginia, to “Bar-
soom,” as Mars was known to its inhabitants. I followed herds of
eight-legged beasts of burden, the thoats. I won the hand of the
lovely Dejah Thoris, Princess of Helium. I befriended a four-
meter-high green fighting man named Tars Tarkas. I wandered
within the spired cities and domed pumping stations of Barsoom,
and along the verdant banks of the Nilosyrtis and Nepenthes
canals.

Blues for a Red Planet —111

Might it really be possible—in fact and not in fancy—to venture
with John Carter to the Kingdom of Helium on the planet Mars?
Could we venture out on a summer evening, our way illuminated
by the two hurtling moons of Barsoom, for a journey of high
scientific adventure? Even if all Lowell’s conclusions about Mars,
including the existence of the fabled canals, turned out to be
bankrupt, his depiction of the planet had at least this virtue: it
aroused generations of eight-year-olds, myself among them, to
consider the exploration of the planets as a real possibility, to
wonder if we ourselves might one day voyage to Mars. John
Carter got there by standing in an open field, spreading his hands
and wishing. I can remember spending many an hour in my
boyhood, arms resolutely outstretched in an empty field, implor-
ing what I believed to be Mars to transport me there. It never
worked. There had to be some other way.

Like organisms, machines also have their evolutions. The
rocket began, like the gunpowder that first powered it, in China
where it was used for ceremonial and aesthetic purposes. Im-
ported to Europe around the fourteenth century, it was applied
to warfare, discussed in the late nineteenth century as a means of
transportation to the planets by the Russian schoolteacher Kon-
stantin Tsiolkovsky, and first developed seriously for high alti¬
tude flight by the American scientist Robert Goddard. The
German V-2 military rocket of World War II employed virtually
all of Goddard’s innovations and culminated in 1948 in the two-
stage launching of the V-2/WAC Corporal combination to the
then-unprecedented altitude of 400 kilometers. In the 1950’s,
engineering advances organized by Sergei Korolov in the Soviet
Union and Wernher von Braun in the United States, funded as
delivery systems for weapons of mass destruction, led to the first
artificial satellites. The pace of progress has continued to be brisk:
manned orbital flight; humans orbiting, then landing on the
moon; and unmanned spacecraft outward bound throughout the
solar system. Many other nations have now launched spacecraft,
including Britain, Erance, Canada, Japan and China, the society
that invented the rocket in the first place.

Among the early applications of the space rocket, as Tsiol¬
kovsky and Goddard (who as a young man had read Wells and
had been stimulated by the lectures of Percival Lowell) delighted
in imagining, were an orbiting scientific station to monitor the
Earth from a great height and a probe to search for life on Mars.
Both these dreams have now been fulfilled.

Imagine yourself a visitor from some other and quite alien
planet, approaching Earth with no preconceptions. Your view of
the planet improves as you come closer and more and more fine
detail stands out. Is the planet inhabited? At what point can you
decide? If there are intelligent beings, perhaps they have created
engineering structures that have high-contrast components on a
scale of a few kilometers, structures detectable when our optical

Robert Hutchings Goddard (1882-1945)
at age eleven. Five years later his imagina¬
tion was fired by reading a serialization of
Wells’ War of the Worlds . The following
year, before anyone had ever flown in an
airplane or listened to a radio set, while in
a cherry tree, he envisioned a device that
would travel to Mars. He dedicated the
rest of his life to building it. Courtesy
Goddard Library, Clark University.

Goddard at age thirty-three, fitting a steel
combustion chamber for a small solid-fuel
rocket to a test bed. Courtesy Goddard
Library, Clark University.

112 — Cosmos

The first liquichpropellant rocket ever to
fly. Launched by Robert Goddard on
March 16, 1926, from the farm of his
Aunt Effie in Auburn, Massachusetts, its
flight lasted 2Vi seconds. Courtesy God'
dard Library, Clark University.

systems and distance from the Earth provide kilometer resolm
tion. Yet at this level of detail, the Earth seems utterly barren.
There is no sign of life, intelligent or otherwise, in places we call
Washington, New York, Boston, Moscow, London, Paris, Berlin,
Tokyo and Peking. If there are intelligent beings on Earth, they
have not much modified the landscape into regular geometrical
patterns at kilometer resolution.

But when we improve the resolution tenfold, when we begin
to see detail as small as a hundred meters across, the situation
changes. Many places on Earth seem suddenly to crystallize out,
revealing an intricate pattern of squares and rectangles, straight
lines and circles. These are, in fact, the engineering artifacts of
intelligent beings: roads, highways, canals, farmland, city
streets—a pattern disclosing the twin human passions for Euclid'
ean geometry and territoriality. On this scale, intelligent life can
be discerned in Boston and Washington and New York. And at
temmeter resolution, the degree to which the landscape has been
reworked first really becomes evident. Humans have been very
busy. These photos have been taken in daylight. But at twilight
or during the night, other things are visible: oiLwell fires in Libya
and the Persian Gulf; deepwater illumination by the Japanese
squid fishing fleet; the bright lights of large cities. And if, in
daylight, we improve our resolution so we can make out things
that are a meter across, then we begin to detect for the first time
individual organisms—whales, cows, flamingos, people.

Intelligent life on Earth first reveals itself through the geomet'
ric regularity of its constructions. If Lowell’s canal network really
existed, the conclusion that intelligent beings inhabit Mars might
be similarly compelling. For life to be detected on Mars photo'
graphically, even from Mars orbit, it must likewise have accont'
plished a major reworking of the surface. Technical civilizations,
canal builders, might be easy to detect. But except for one or two
enigmatic features, nothing of the sort is apparent in the exquisite
profusion of Martian surface detail uncovered by unmanned
spacecraft. However, there are many other possibilities, ranging
from large plants and animals to microorganisms, to extinct
forms, to a planet that is now and was always lifeless. Because
Mars is farther from the Sun than is the Earth, its temperatures
are considerably lower. Its air is thin, containing mostly carbon
dioxide but also some molecular nitrogen and argon and very
small quantities of water vapor, oxygen and ozone. Open bodies
of liquid water are impossible today because the atmospheric
pressure on Mars is too low to keep even cold water from rapidly
boiling. There may be minute quantities of liquid water in pores
and capillaries in the soil. The amount of oxygen is far too little
for a human being to breathe. The ozone abundance is so small
that germicidal ultraviolet radiation from the Sun strikes the
Martian surface unimpeded. Could any organism survive in such
an environment?

Blues for a Red Planet - 113

To test this question, many years ago my colleagues and I
prepared chambers that simulated the Martian environment as it
was then known, inoculated them with terrestrial microorgan-
isms and waited to see if anybody survived. Such chambers are
called, of course, Mars Jars. The Mars Jars cycled the tempera-
tures within a typical Martian range from a little above the
freezing point around noon to about —80°C just before dawn,
in an anoxic atmosphere composed chiefly of C0 2 and N 2 . Ul¬
traviolet lamps reproduced the fierce solar flux. No liquid water
was present except for very thin films wetting individual sand
grains. Some microbes froze to death after the first night and
were never heard from again. Others gasped and perished from
lack of oxygen. Some died of thirst, and some were fried by the
ultraviolet light. But there were always a fair number of varieties
of terrestrial microbes that did not need oxygen; that temporarily
closed up shop when the temperatures dropped too low; that hid
from the ultraviolet light under pebbles or thin layers of sand. In
other experiments, when small quantities of liquid water were
present, the microbes actually grew. If terrestrial microbes can
survive the Martian environment, how much better Martian
microbes, if they exist, must do on Mars. But first we must get
there.

The Soviet Union maintains an active program of unmanned
planetary exploration. Every year or two the relative positions of
the planets and the physics of Kepler and Newton permit the
launch of a spacecraft to Mars or Venus with a minimum ex¬
penditure of energy. Since the early 1960’s the U.S.S.R. has
missed few such opportunities. Soviet persistence and engineer¬
ing skills have eventually paid off handsomely. Five Soviet
spacecraft—Veneras 8 through 12—have landed on Venus and
successfully returned data from the surface, no insignificant feat
in so hot, dense and corrosive a planetary atmosphere. Yet de¬
spite many attempts, the Soviet Union has never landed success¬
fully on Mars—a place that, at least at first sight, seems more
hospitable, with chilly temperatures, a much thinner atmosphere
and more benign gases; with polar ice caps, clear pink skies, great
sand dunes, ancient river beds, a vast rift valley, the largest
volcanic construct, so far as we know, in the solar system, and
balmy equatorial summer afternoons. It is a far more Earth-like
world than Venus.

In 1971, the Soviet Mars 3 spacecraft entered the Martian
atmosphere. According to the information automatically radioed
back, it successfully deployed its landing systems during entry,
correctly oriented its ablation shield downward, properly un¬
furled its great parachute and fired its retro-rockets near the end
of its descent path. According to the data returned by Mars 3, it
should have landed successfully on the red planet. But after
landing, the spacecraft returned a twenty-second fragment of a
featureless television picture to Earth and then mysteriously

A later multi-stage liquid-fuel rocket, the
lineal descendant of Goddard’s early ef¬
forts. Apollo 11, commanded by Neil
Armstrong, lifts off on July 16, 1969, from
Cape Canaveral, Florida, on a three-day
flight to the Moon. Courtesy NASA.

114- Cosmos

Blues for a Red Planet - 115

f

g

The search for life on Earth in reflected sun-
light; the views that Goddard dreamed of:
Crescent Earth (a) at hundreds of kilometers
resolution shows West Africa through
clouds, but not a trace of life. Oblique view
depicts the Near East in the vicinity of the
Red Sea (b) as apparently lifeless at tens of
kilometers resolution. The Eastern Seaboard
of the United States (c), in infrared false
color, shows no hint of life in New York or
Washington at about ten kilometers resolu-
tion. Berry Island (d) in the Bahamas: Coral
reefs are made by colonial animals, but this is
not apparent from aloft. At tens of meters
resolution, intelligent life on Earth becomes
evident. The red squares (e) are farmland
serviced by irrigation projects around Yuma,
Arizona, near the Colorado River delta. The
Coachella Sand Hills, top center, are tra-
versed by the AlbAmerican Canal. The Co-
lumbia River (f,g), separating the states of
Washington and Oregon, at two different
resolutions. The circles are wheat fields, in
rigated by rotating sprinkler booms. At reso¬
lutions of tens of meters, the presence of
urban intelligence is revealed, as in Baton
Rouge, Louisiana (h), and Washington, D.C.
(i). Apollo, Landsat and RB-57 photos.
Courtesy NASA.

1

116 - Cosmos

Metropolitan New York City. Vertical view from Landsat in near infrared light at top has an effective resolution of
about 100 meters. The horizontal geometry of streets, bridges and highways is striking. Kennedy International Airport
is visible at lower right. In this false color image, parks and wooded areas appear red. In the blue-black bodies of water,
the wakes of ships can be seen. At lower left is an oblique view of New York in visible light from an RB'57
reconnaissance aircraft with a best effective resolution in Brooklyn ( foreground ) of some tens of meters. Here the
vertical geometry of skyscrapers in midtown and lower Manhattan is apparent, especially the twin buildings, casting
long shadows, of the World Trade Center. The Statue of Liberty can be made out at center left. New Jersey lies in the
distance. Courtesy NASA. When the resolution improves to a meter or better, and the contrast is high, the dominant
lifeform on the planet becomes detectable. Here, several dozen dominant lifeforms can be seen, skiing downhill.
Courtesy Photo Researchers. Photograph by Georg Gerster.

Blues for a Red Planet — 117

failed. In 1973, a quite similar sequence of events occurred with
the Mars 6 lander, in that case the failure occurring within one
second of touchdown. What went wrong?

The first illustration I ever saw of Mars 3 was on a Soviet
postage stamp (denomination, 16 kopecks), which depicted the
spacecraft descending through a kind of purple muck. The artist
was trying, I think, to illustrate dust and high winds: Mars 3 had
entered the Martian atmosphere during an enormous global dust
storm. We have evidence from the U.S. Mariner 9 mission that
near-surface winds of more than 140 meters per second—faster
than half the speed of sound on Mars—arose in that storm. Both
our Soviet colleagues and we think it likely that these high winds
caught the Mars 3 spacecraft with parachute unfurled, so that it
landed gently in the vertical direction but with breakneck speed
in the horizontal direction. A spacecraft descending on the
shrouds of a large parachute is particularly vulnerable to horn
zontal winds. After landing, Mars 3 may have made a few
bounces, hit a boulder or other example of Martian relief, tipped
over, lost the radio link with its carrier “bus” and failed.

But why did Mars 3 enter in the midst of a great dust storm?
The Mars 3 mission was rigidly organized before launch. Every
step it was to perform was loaded into the on-board computer
before it left Earth. There was no opportunity to change the
computer program, even as the extent of the great 1971 dust
storm became clear. In the jargon of space exploration, the Mars
3 mission was preprogrammed, not adaptive. The failure of Mars
6 is more mysterious. There was no planet-wide storm when this
spacecraft entered the Martian atmosphere, and no reason to
suspect a local storm, as sometimes happens, at the landing site.
Perhaps there was an engineering failure just at the moment of
touchdown. Or perhaps there is something particularly danger¬
ous about the Martian surface.

The combination of Soviet successes in landing on Venus and
Soviet failures in landing on Mars naturally caused us some con¬
cern about the U.S. Viking mission, which had been informally
scheduled to set one of its two descent craft gently down on the
Martian surface on the Bicentennial of the United States, July 4,
1976. Like its Soviet predecessors, the Viking landing maneuver
involved an ablation shield, a parachute and retro-rockets. Be¬
cause the Martian atmosphere is only 1 percent as dense as the
Earth’s, a very large parachute, eighteen meters in diameter, was
deployed to slow the spacecraft as it entered the thin air of Mars.
The atmosphere is so thin that if Viking had landed at a high
elevation there would not have been enough atmosphere to
brake the descent adequately: it would have crashed. One re¬
quirement, therefore, was for a landing site in a low-lying region.
From Mariner 9 results and ground-based radar studies, we knew
many such areas.

North America at night, its configuration
outlined by the lights of large cities. Even
the shape of Lake Michigan is discernible
through the lights of Greater Chicago.
This image is presumptive evidence for
life on Earth. But the brightest lights, the
crescent over Canada, are not due to biol¬
ogy, but rather to the Aurora Borealis.
Courtesy Defense Meteorological Satellite
Program.

The Western Mediterranean at night.
Italy and Sicily are clearly outlined by city
lights at right center. The brightest lights
are caused by the burning of natural gas in
Algerian oil fields, which clearly would be
adequate to illuminate much of urban
Europe. Courtesy Defense Meteorological
Satellite Program.

118 - Cosmos

Nocturnal image of the Sea of Japan. The
brightest lights are from some 1,300 ves¬
sels of the Japanese and Korean squid
fishing fleets, used to attract the squid.
Courtesy Defense Meteorological Satellite
Program.

ammm

WMKAX UOCAMM
HA rijlAHCTy
2 - 12*71 mx

IIOHTA CCCP

A Soviet postage stamp illustrating the
descent of the Mars 3 spacecraft, still in its
ablation shield, through a raging dust
storm on December 2, 1971.

To avoid the probable fate of Mars 3, we wanted Viking to
land in a place and time at which the winds were low. Winds
that would make the lander crash were probably strong enough
to lift dust off the surface. If we could check that the candidate
landing site was not covered with shifting, drifting dust, we
would have at least a fair chance of guaranteeing that the winds
were not intolerably high. This was one reason that each Viking
lander was carried into Mars orbit with its Orbiter, and descent
delayed until the Orbiter surveyed the landing site. We had
discovered with Mariner 9 that characteristic changes in the
bright and dark patterns on the Martian surface occur during
times of high winds. We certainly would not have certified a
Viking landing site as safe if orbital photographs had shown such
shifting patterns. But our guarantees could not be 100 percent
reliable. For example, we could imagine a landing site at which
the winds were so strong that all mobile dust had already been
blown away. We would then have had no indication of the high
winds that might have been there. Detailed weather predictions
for Mars were, of course, much less reliable than for Earth.
(Indeed one of the many objectives of the Viking mission was to
improve our understanding of the weather on both planets.)

Because of communication and temperature constraints, Vi¬
king could not land at high Martian latitudes. Farther poleward
than about 45 or 50 degrees in both hemispheres, either the time
of useful communication of the spacecraft with the Earth or the
period during which the spacecraft would avoid dangerously low
temperatures would have been awkwardly short.

We did not wish to land in too rough a place. The spacecraft
might have tipped over and crashed, or at the least its mechanical
arm, intended to acquire Martian soil samples, might have be¬
come wedged or been left waving helplessly a meter too high
above the surface. Likewise, we did not want to land in places
that were too soft. If the spacecraft’s three landing pods had sunk
deeply into a loosely packed soil, various undesirable conse¬
quences would have followed, including immobilization of the
sample arm. But we did not want to land in a place that was too
hard either—had we landed in a vitreous lava field, for example,
with no powdery surface material, the mechanical arm would
have been unable to acquire the samples vital to the projected
chemistry and biology experiments.

The best photographs then available of Mars—from the Mari¬
ner 9 Orbiter—showed features no smaller than 90 meters (100
yards) across. The Viking Orbiter pictures improved this figure
only slightly. Boulders one meter (three feet) in size were entirely
invisible in such photographs, and could have had disastrous
consequences for the Viking lander. Likewise, a deep, soft
powder might have been undetectable photographically. Fortu¬
nately, there was a technique that enabled us to determine the
roughness or softness of a candidate landing site: radar. A very

Blues for a Red Planet - 119

rough place would scatter radar from Earth off to the sides of the
beam and therefore appear poorly reflective, or radar-dark. A
very soft place would also appear poorly reflective because of the
many interstices between individual sand grains. While we were
unable to distinguish between rough places and soft places, we
did not need to make such distinctions for landing-site selection.
Both, we knew, were dangerous. Preliminary radar surveys sug¬
gested that as much as a quarter to a third of the surface area of
Mars might be radar-dark, and therefore dangerous for Viking.
But not all of Mars can be viewed by Earth-based radar—only a
swath between about 25°N and about 25°S. The Viking Orbiter
carried no radar system of its own to map the surface.

There were many constraints—perhaps, we feared, too many.
Our landing sites had to be not too high, too windy, too hard,
too soft, too rough or too close to the pole. It was remarkable
that there were any places at all on Mars that simultaneously
satisfied all our safety criteria. But it was also clear that our search
for safe harbors had led us to landing sites that were, by and
large, dull.

When each of the two Viking orbiter-lander combinations
was inserted into Martian orbit, it was unalterably committed to
landing at a certain latitude on Mars. If the low point in the orbit
was at 21° Martian north latitude, the lander would touch down
at 21°N, although, by waiting for the planet to turn beneath it, it
could land at any longitude whatever. Thus the Viking science
teams selected candidate latitudes for which there was more than
one promising site. Viking 1 was targeted for 21°N. The prime
site was in a region called Chryse (Greek for “the land of gold”),
near the confluence of four sinuous channels thought to have
been carved in previous epochs of Martian history by running
water. The Chryse site seemed to satisfy all safety criteria. But
the radar observations had been made nearby, not in the Chryse
landing site itself. Radar observations of Chryse were made for
the first time—because of the geometry of Earth and Mars—only a
few weeks before the nominal landing date.

The candidate landing latitude for Viking 2 was 44°N; the
prime site, a locale called Cydonia, chosen because, according to
some theoretical arguments, there was a significant chance of
small quantities of liquid water there, at least at some time during
the Martian year. Since the Viking biology experiments were
strongly oriented toward organisms that are comfortable in liquid
water, some scientists held that the chance of Viking finding life
would be substantially improved in Cydonia. On the other hand,
it was argued that, on so windy a planet as Mars, microorganisms
should be everywhere if they are anywhere. There seemed to be
merit to both positions, and it was difficult to decide between
them. What was quite clear, however, was that 44°N was
completely inaccessible to radar site-certification; we had to ac¬
cept a significant risk of failure with Viking 2 if it was committed

Portions of the great Mariner Valley,
Vallis Marineris. Discovered in 1971-72
by Mariner 9, it is 5,000 kilometers long
and roughly 100 kilometers wide. In
model (top) are seen tributary valleys pos¬
sibly caused by running water and wind¬
blown streaks associated with impact
craters. Mariner 9 photos (middle and bot¬
tom) show avalanches that have collapsed
walls and widened the valley and a giant
dark sand dune field on the floor of Vallis
Marineris. Courtesy NASA. Model by
Don Davis.

120 - Cosmos

Top: Viking Orbiter color mosaic of three
of the four great volcanoes in Tharsis on
Mars and the western provinces of Vallis
Marineris. Mariner 9 image ( middle) and
model (bottom) of Olympus Mons, Mount
Olympus, the largest volcanic construct
definitively identified in the solar system
to date. Its area is about the size of Ari-
zona and it is almost three times the
height of Mount Everest. It was com
structed at a time of great geological ac¬
tivity on Mars about a billion years ago.
Courtesy NASA. Model by Don Davis.

to high northern latitudes. It was sometimes argued that if Viking
1 was down and working well we could afford to accept a greater
risk with Viking 2. I found myself making very conservative
recommendations on the fate of a billiomdollar mission. I could
imagine, for example, a key instrument failure in Chryse just after
an unfortunate crash landing in Cydonia. To improve the Viking
options, additional landing sites, geologically very different from
Chryse and Cydonia, were selected in the radar-certified region
near 4° S latitude. A decision on whether Viking 2 would set
down at high or at low latitude was not made until virtually the
last minute, when a place with the hopeful name of Utopia, at
the same latitude as Cydonia, was chosen.

For Viking 1, the original landing site seemed, after we exam¬
ined Orbiter photographs and late-breaking Earth-based radar
data, unacceptably risky. For a while I worried that Viking 1 had
been condemned, like the legendary Flying Dutchman, to wan¬
der the skies of Mars forever, never to find safe haven. Eventu¬
ally we found a suitable spot, still in Chryse but far from the
confluence of the four ancient channels. The delay prevented us
from setting down on July 4, 1976, but it was generally agreed
that a crash landing on that date would have been an unsatisfac¬
tory two hundredth birthday present for the United States. We
deboosted from orbit and entered the Martian atmosphere six¬
teen days later.

After an interplanetary voyage of a year and a half, covering a
hundred million kilometers the long way round the Sun, each
Orbiter/lander combination was inserted into its proper orbit
about Mars; the orbiters surveyed candidate landing sites; the
landers entered the Martian atmosphere on radio command and

Blues for a Red Planet - 121

correctly oriented ablation shields, deployed parachutes, divested
coverings, and fired retro-rockets. In Chryse and Utopia, for the
first time in human history, spacecraft had touched down, gently
and safely, on the red planet. These triumphant landings were
due in considerable part to the great skill invested in their design,
fabrication and testing, and to the abilities of the spacecraft com
trollers. But for so dangerous and mysterious a planet as Mars,
there was also at least an element of luck.

Immediately after landing, the first pictures were to be re¬
turned. We knew we had chosen dull places. But we could hope.
The first picture taken by the Viking 1 lander was of one of its
own footpads—in case it were to sink into Martian quicksand, we
wanted to know about it before the spacecraft disappeared. The
picture built up, line by line, until with enormous relief we saw
the footpad sitting high and dry above the Martian surface. Soon
other pictures came into being, each picture element radioed
individually back to Earth.

I remember being transfixed by the first lander image to show
the horizon of Mars. This was not an alien world, I thought. I
knew places like it in Colorado and Arizona and Nevada. There
were rocks and sand drifts and a distant eminence, as natural and
unselfconscious as any landscape on Earth. Mars was a place . I
would, of course, have been surprised to see a grizzled prospector
emerge from behind a dune leading his mule, but at the same
time the idea seemed appropriate. Nothing remotely like it ever
entered my mind in all the hours I spent examining the Venera 9
and 10 images of the Venus surface. One way or another, I knew,
this was a world to which we would return.

The landscape is stark and red and lovely: boulders thrown out
in the creation of a crater somewhere over the horizon, small
sand dunes, rocks that have been repeatedly covered and uncov¬
ered by drifting dust, plumes of fine-grained material blown
about by the winds. Where did the rocks come from? How much
sand has been blown by wind? What must the previous history
of the planet have been to create sheared rocks, buried boulders,
polygonal gouges in the ground? What are the rocks made of?
The same materials as the sand? Is the sand merely pulverized
rock or something else? Why is the sky pink? What is the air
made of? How fast does the wind blow? Are there marsquakes?
How does the atmospheric pressure and the appearance of the
landscape change with the seasons?

For every one of these questions Viking has provided defini¬
tive or at least plausible answers. The Mars revealed by the
Viking mission is of enormous interest—particularly when we
remember that the landing sites were chosen for their dullness.
But the cameras revealed no sign of canal builders, no Barsoo-
mian aircars or short swords, no princesses or fighting men, no
thoats, no footprints, not even a cactus or a kangaroo rat. For as

Morning haze and frost in the heavily
eroded terrain of Noctis Labyrinthus, the
Labyrinth of Night. Viking Orb iter
photo, courtesy NASA.

A portion of Kasei Vallis, an ancient river
valley on Mars. Kasei is Japanese for Mars.
The impact craters in the channel floor are
evidence of its great age. Abundant sur¬
face liquid water earlier in Martian history
suggests that conditions for life were once
more favorable. Viking Orbiter photo,
courtesy NASA.

Cratered terrain near the Chryse Basin,
flooded long ago with torrents of liquid
water. This is one reason that Chryse was
chosen as the Viking 1 landing site, but
safety considerations moved the landing
from the basin itself. Courtesy NASA.

122 - Cosmos

A Viking Lander, wrapped in its aeroshell
ablation shield (bottom), detaches from the
Orbiter and enters the thin Martian at'
mosphere. Both are in orbit about Mars,
thousands of kilometers below, its polar
cap prominent. Painting by Don Davis.

The Viking 1 Lander, still in its aeroshell,
as its parachute begins to deploy. This
painting by Don Davis, made before the
landing, shows a descent over the original
Chryse landing site. From data obtained
after landing, we now know that the
Martian sky is not blue, but rather a kind
of yellow'pink, due to suspended fine
rusty particles.

far as we could see, there was not a sign of life.*

Perhaps there are large lifeforms on Mars, but not in our two
landing sites. Perhaps there are smaller forms in every rock and
sand grain. For most of its history, those regions of the Earth not
covered by water looked rather like Mars today—with an atmo'
sphere rich in carbon dioxide, with ultraviolet light shining
fiercely down on the surface through an atmosphere devoid of
ozone. Large plants and animals did not colonize the land until
the last 10 percent of Earth history. And yet for three billion
years there were microorganisms everywhere on Earth. To look
for life on Mars, we must look for microbes.

The Viking lander extends human capabilities to other and
alien landscapes. By some standards, it is about as smart as a
grasshopper; by others, only as intelligent as a bacterium. There
is nothing demeaning in these comparisons. It took nature hum
dreds of millions of years to evolve a bacterium, and billions to
make a grasshopper. With only a little experience in this sort of
business, we are becoming fairly skillful at it. Viking has two eyes
as we do, but they also work in the infrared, as ours do not; a
sample arm that can push rocks, dig and acquire soil samples; a
kind of finger that it puts up to measure wind speed and direction;
a nose and taste buds, of a sort, with which it senses, to a much
higher precision than we can, the presence of trace molecules; an
interior ear with which it can detect the rumbling of marsquakes
and the gentler wind-driven jiggling of the spacecraft; and a
means of detecting microbes. The spacecraft has its own self-
contained radioactive power source. It radios all the scientific
information it acquires back to Earth. It receives instructions
from Earth, so human beings can ponder the significance of the
Viking results and tell the spacecraft to do something new.

Rut what is the optimum way, given severe constraints on size,
cost and power requirements, to search for microbes on Mars?
We cannot—at least as yet—send microbiologists there. I once
had a friend, an extraordinary microbiologist named Wolf Vish¬
niac, of the University of Rochester, in New York. In the late
1950’s, when we were just beginning to think seriously about
looking for life on Mars, he found himself at a scientific meeting
where an astronomer expressed amazement that the biologists
had no simple, reliable, automated instrument capable of looking
for microorganisms. Vishniac decided he would do something
about the matter.

Fie developed a small device to be sent to the planets. His

* There was a brief flurry when the uppercase letter B, a putative Martian
graffito, seemed to be visible on a small boulder in Chryse. But later
analysis showed it to be a trick of light and shadow and the human talent
for pattern recognition. It also seems remarkable that the Martians
should have tumbled independently to the Latin alphabet. But there was
just a moment when resounding in my head was the distant echo of a
word from my boyhood—Barsoom.

Blues for a Red Planet — 123

friends called it the Wolf Trap. It would carry a little vial of
nutrient organic matter to Mars, arrange for a sample of Martian
soil to be mixed in with it, and observe the changing turbidity or
cloudiness of the liquid as the Martian bugs (if there were any)
grew (if they would). The Wolf Trap was selected along with
three other microbiology experiments to go aboard the Viking
landers. Two of the other three experiments also chose to send
food to the Martians. The success of the Wolf Trap required
that Martian bugs like liquid water. There were those who
thought that Vishniac would only drown the little Martians. But
the advantage of the Wolf Trap was that it laid no requirements
on what the Martian microbes must do with their food. They
had only to grow. All the other experiments made specific as-
sumptions about gases that would be given off or taken in by
the microbes, assumptions that were little more than guesses.

The National Aeronautics and Space Administration, which
runs the United States planetary space program, is subject to
frequent and unpredictable budget cuts. Only rarely are there
unanticipated budget increases. NASA scientific activities have
very little effective support in the government, and so science is
most often the target when money needs to be taken away from
NASA. In 1971 it was decided that one of the four microbiology
experiments must be removed, and the Wolf Trap was off¬
loaded. It was a crushing disappointment for Vishniac, who had
invested twelve years in its development.

Many others in his place might have stalked off the Viking
Biology Team. But Vishniac was a gentle and dedicated man. He
decided instead that he could best serve the search for life on
Mars by voyaging to the most Mars-like environment on Earth—
the dry valleys of Antarctica. Some previous investigators had
examined Antarctic soil and decided that the few microbes they
were able to find were not really natives of the dry valleys, but
had been blown there from other, more clement environments.
Recalling the Mars Jars experiments, Vishniac believed that life
was tenacious and that Antarctica was perfectly consistent with
microbiology. If terrestrial bugs could live on Mars, he thought,
why not in Antarctica—which was by and large warmer, wetter,
and had more oxygen and much less ultraviolet light. Con¬
versely, finding life in Antarctic dry valleys would correspond¬
ingly improve, he thought, the chances of life on Mars. Vishniac
believed that the experimental techniques previously used to
deduce no indigenous microbes in Antarctica were flawed. The
nutrients, while suitable for the comfortable environment of a
university microbiology laboratory, were not designed for the
arid polar wasteland.

So on November 8, 1973, Vishniac, his new microbiology
equipment and a geologist companion were transported by heli¬
copter from McMurdo Station to an area near Mount Balder, a
dry valley in the Asgard range. His practice was to implant the

The bland terrain on Chryse Planitia on
which Viking 1 landed. Touchdown oc¬
curred within a few kilometers of the tar¬
get area, marked by the cross, after an
interplanetary voyage of some hundred
million kilometers. Courtesy NASA.

A simulated landing, in Death Valley,
California, of Viking on Mars. The termi¬
nal stages of descent are braked by the
firing of retrorockets.

124 - Cosmos

Wolf Vladimir Vishniac, microbiologist
(19224973). Photographed in Antarctica,
1973. Courtesy Zeddie Bowen.

The Viking 1 sample arm, on Mars, re-
trieves soil samples for the microbiology
experiments, leaving (right) a shallow
trench. Courtesy NASA.

little microbiology stations in the Antarctic soil and return about
a month later to retrieve them. On December 10, 1973, he left to
gather samples on Mount Balder; his departure was photo-
graphed from about three kilometers away. It was the last time
anyone saw him alive. Eighteen hours later, his body was dis¬
covered at the base of a cliff of ice. He had wandered into an area
not previously explored, had apparently slipped on the ice and
tumbled and bounced for a distance of 150 meters. Perhaps
something had caught his eye, a likely habitat for microbes, say,
or a patch of green where none should be. We will never know.
In the small brown notebook he was carrying that day, the last
entry reads, “Station 202 retrieved. 10 December, 1973. 2230
hours. Soil temperature, —10°. Air temperature —16°.” It had
been a typical summer temperature for Mars.

Many of Vishniac’s microbiology stations are still sitting in
Antarctica. But the samples that were returned were examined,
using his methods, by his professional colleagues and friends. A
wide variety of microbes, which would have been undetectable
with conventional scoring techniques, was found in essentially
every site examined. A new species of yeast, apparently unique to
Antarctica, was discovered in his samples by his widow, Helen
Simpson Vishniac. Large rocks returned from Antarctica in that
expedition, examined by Imre Friedmann, turn out to have a
fascinating microbiology—one or two millimeters inside the rock,
algae have colonized a tiny world in which small quantities of
water are trapped and made liquid. On Mars such a place would
be even more interesting, because while the visible light neces-
sary for photosynthesis would penetrate to that depth, the gen
micidal ultraviolet light would be at least partially attenuated.

Because the design of space missions is finalized many years
before launch, and because of Vishniac’s death, the results of his
Antarctic experiments did not influence the Viking design for
seeking Martian life. In general, the microbiology experiments
were not carried out at the low ambient Martian temperatures,
and most did not provide long incubation times. They all made
fairly strong assumptions about what Martian metabolism had to
be like. There was no way to look for life inside the rocks.

Each Viking lander was equipped with a sample arm to acquire
material from the surface and then slowly withdraw it into the
innards of the spacecraft, transporting the particles on little hop¬
pers like an electric train to five different experiments: one on the
inorganic chemistry of the soil, another to look for organic mol¬
ecules in the sand and dust, and three to look for microbial life.
When we look for life on a planet, we are making certain as¬
sumptions. We try, as well as we can, not to assume that life
elsewhere will be just like life here. But there are limits to what
we can do. We know in detail only about life here. While the
Viking biology experiments are a pioneering first effort, they
hardly represent a definitive search for life on Mars. The results

Blues for a Red Planet — 125

have been tantalizing, annoying, provocative, stimulating, and, at
least until recently, substantially inconclusive.

Each of the three microbiology experiments asked a different
kind of question, but in all cases a question about Martian me¬
tabolism. If there are microorganisms in the Martian soil, they
must take in food and give off waste gases; or they must take in
gases from the atmosphere and, perhaps with the aid of sunlight,
convert them into useful materials. So we bring food to Mars and
hope that the Martians, if there are any, will find it tasty. Then
we see if any interesting new gases come out of the soil. Or we
provide our own radioactively labeled gases and see if they are
converted into organic matter, in which case small Martians are
inferred.

By criteria established before launch, two of the three Viking
microbiology experiments seem to have yielded positive results.
First, when Martian soil was mixed with a sterile organic soup
from Earth, something in the soil chemically broke down the
soup—almost as if there were respiring microbes metabolizing a
food package from Earth. Second, when gases from Earth were
introduced into the Martian soil sample, the gases became chem¬
ically combined with the soil—almost as if there were photo-
synthesizing microbes, generating organic matter from
atmospheric gases. Positive results in Martian microbiology were
achieved in seven different samplings in two locales on Mars
separated by 5,000 kilometers.

But the situation is complex, and the criteria of experimental
success may have been inadequate. Enormous efforts were made
to build the Viking microbiology experiments and test them with
a variety of microbes. Very little effort was made to calibrate the
experiments with plausible inorganic Martian surface materials.
Mars is not the Earth. As the legacy of Percival Lowell reminds
us, we can be fooled. Perhaps there is an exotic inorganic chem¬
istry in the Martian soil that is able by itself, in the absence of
Martian microbes, to oxidize foodstuffs. Perhaps there is some
special inorganic, nonliving catalyst in the soil that is able to fix
atmospheric gases and convert them into organic molecules.

Recent experiments suggest that this may indeed be the case.
In the great Martian dust storm of 1971, spectral features of the
dust were obtained by the Mariner 9 infrared spectrometer. In
analyzing these spectra, O. B. Toon, J. B. Pollack and I found
that certain features seem best accounted for by montmorillonite
and other kinds of clay. Subsequent observations by the Viking
lander support the identification of windblown clays on Mars.
Now, A. Banin and J. Rishpon have found that they can repro¬
duce some of the key features—those resembling photosynthesis
as well as those resembling respiration—of the “successful” Viking
microbiology experiments if in laboratory experiments they sub¬
stitute such clays for the Martian soil. The clays have a complex
active surface, given to adsorbing and releasing gases and to

Windblown sand and dust in the lee of
impact craters in Sinus Meridiani. Cour¬
tesy NASA.

Windblown sand and dust in the lee of
small rocks in the Viking 1 landing site.
Courtesy NASA.

126 — Cosmos

The sand-topped boulder known as “Big
Joe” in Chryse. Had Viking 1 landed on it,
the spacecraft would have crashed. Coup
tesy NASA.

J

Minor movement of sand, perhaps by
wind, at the base of “Big Joe.” Courtesy
NASA.

catalyzing chemical reactions. It is too soon to say that all the
Viking microbiology results can be explained by inorganic
chemistry, but such a result would no longer be surprising. The
clay hypothesis hardly excludes life on Mars, but it certainly
carries us far enough to say that there is no compelling evidence
for microbiology on Mars.

Even so, the results of Banin and Rishpon are of great biologi-
cal importance because they show that in the absence of life
there can be a kind of soil chemistry that does some of the same
things life does. On the Earth before life, there may already have
been chemical processes resembling respiration and photosyn-
thesis cycling in the soil, perhaps to be incorporated by life once
it arose. In addition, we know that montmorillonite clays are a
potent catalyst for combining amino acids into longer chain moh
ecules resembling proteins. The clays of the primitive Earth may
have been the forge of life, and the chemistry of contemporary
Mars may provide essential clues to the origin and early history
of life on our planet.

The Martian surface exhibits many impact craters, each named
after a person, usually a scientist. Crater Vishniac lies appropri-
ately in the Antarctic region of Mars. Vishniac did not claim that
there had to be life on Mars, merely that it was possible, and that
it was extraordinarily important to know if it was there. If life on
Mars exists, we will have a unique opportunity to test the gener-
ality of our form of life. And if there is no life on Mars, a planet
rather like the Earth, we must understand why—because in that
case, as Vishniac stressed, we have the classic scientific confron-
tation of the experiment and the control.

The finding that the Viking microbiology results can be ex-
plained by clays, that they need not imply life, helps to resolve
another mystery: the Viking organic chemistry experiment
showed not a hint of organic matter in the Martian soil. If there is
life on Mars, where are the dead bodies? No organic molecules
could be found—no building blocks of proteins and nucleic acids,
no simple hydrocarbons, nothing of the stuff of life on Earth.
This is not necessarily a contradiction, because the Viking mi¬
crobiology experiments are a thousand times more sensitive (per
equivalent carbon atom) than the Viking chemistry experiments,
and seem to detect organic matter synthesized in the Martian soil.
But this does not leave much margin. Terrestrial soil is loaded
with the organic remains of once-living organisms; Martian soil
has less organic matter than the surface of the Moon. If we held
to the life hypothesis, we might suppose that the dead bodies
have been destroyed by the chemically reactive, oxidizing surface
of Mars—like a germ in a bottle of hydrogen peroxide; or that
there is life, but of a kind in which organic chemistry plays a less
central role than it does in life on Earth.

But this last alternative seems to me to be special pleading: I
am, reluctantly, a self-confessed carbon chauvinist. Carbon is

Blues for a Red Planet — 127

The Viking Lander, in simulation in
Death Valley, California. Between the
two turrets containing the television cam'
eras is the magazine holding the still-
unfurled sample arm.

<

oc

abundant in the Cosmos. It makes marvelously complex mole¬
cules, good for life. I am also a water chauvinist. Water makes an
ideal solvent system for organic chemistry to work in and stays
liquid over a wide range of temperatures. But sometimes I won¬
der. Could my fondness for these materials have something to do
with the fact that I am made chiefly of them? Are we carbon- and
water-based because those materials were abundant on the Earth
at the time of the origin of life? Could life elsewhere—on Mars,
say—be built of different stuff?

I am a collection of water, calcium and organic molecules
called Carl Sagan. You are a collection of almost identical mole¬
cules with a different collective label. But is that all? Is there
nothing in here but molecules? Some people find this idea some¬
how demeaning to human dignity. For myself, I find it elevating
that our universe permits the evolution of molecular machines as
intricate and subtle as we.

But the essence of life is not so much the atoms and simple
molecules that make us up as the way in which they are put
together. Every now and then we read that the chemicals which
constitute the human body cost ninety-seven cents or ten dollars
or some such figure; it is a little depressing to find our bodies
valued so little. However, these estimates are for human beings
reduced to our simplest possible components. We are made

128 — Cosmos

The North Polar Cap of Mars, sur-
rounded by dark sand dune fields. This
cap is made primarily of water ice; the
South Polar Cap, mainly of frozen carbon
dioxide. To darken the caps it would be
cheaper to move the circumjacent sand
than to carry material from Earth. But the
winds would still scour the caps. Mariner 9
photo. Courtesy NASA.

«

Great ice cliffs, a kilometer high in the
terraces, arranged like stacked plates, in
the Martian North Polar Cap. The regu¬
larly spaced dots are fiducial markers in
the Mariner 9 imaging system. Courtesy
NASA.

mostly of water, which costs almost nothing; the carbon is costed
in the form of coal; the calcium in our bones as chalk; the
nitrogen in our proteins as air (cheap also); the iron in our blood
as rusty nails. If we did not know better, we might be tempted to
take all the atoms that make us up, mix them together in a big
container and stir. We can do this as much as we want. But in the
end all we have is a tedious mixture of atoms. How could we
have expected anything else?

Harold Morowitz has calculated what it would cost to put
together the correct molecular constituents that make up a
human being by buying the molecules from chemical supply
houses. The answer turns out to be about ten million dollars,
which should make us all feel a little better. But even then we
could not mix those chemicals together and have a human being
emerge from the jar. That is far beyond our capability and will
probably be so for a very long period of time. Fortunately, there
are other less expensive but still highly reliable methods of mak¬
ing human beings.

I think the lifeforms on many worlds will consist, by and large,
of the same atoms we have here, perhaps even many of the same
basic molecules, such as proteins and nucleic acids—but put to¬
gether in unfamiliar ways. Perhaps organisms that float in dense
planetary atmospheres will be very much like us in their atomic
composition, except they might not have bones and therefore
not need much calcium. Perhaps elsewhere some solvent other
than water is used. Hydrofluoric acid might serve rather well,
although there is not a great deal of fluorine in the Cosmos;
hydrofluoric acid would do a great deal of damage to the kind of
molecules that make us up, but other organic molecules, paraffin
waxes, for example, are perfectly stable in its presence. Liquid
ammonia would make an even better solvent system, because
ammonia is very abundant in the Cosmos. But it is liquid only on
worlds much colder than the Earth or Mars. Ammonia is ordi¬
narily a gas on Earth, as water is on Venus. Or perhaps there are
living things that do not have a solvent system at all—solid-state
life, where there are electrical signals propagating rather than
molecules floating about.

But these ideas do not rescue the notion that the Viking lander
experiments indicate life on Mars. On that rather Earth-like
world, with abundant carbon and water, life, if it exists, should
be based on organic chemistry. The organic chemistry results,
like the imaging and microbiology results, are all consistent with
no life in the fine particles of Chryse and Utopia in the late
1970’s. Perhaps some millimeters beneath the rocks (as in the
Antarctic dry valleys), or elsewhere on the planet, or in some
earlier, more clement time. But not where and when we looked.

The Viking exploration of Mars is a mission of major historical
importance, the first serious search for what other kinds of life
may be, the first survival of a functioning spacecraft for more

Blues for a Red Planet - 129

than an hour or so on any other planet (Viking 1 has survived for
years), the source of a rich harvest of data on the geology,
seismology, mineralogy, meteorology and half a dozen other sci¬
ences of another world. How should we follow up on these
spectacular advances? Some scientists want to send an automatic
device that would land, acquire soil samples, and return them to
Earth, where they could be examined in great detail in the large
sophisticated laboratories of Earth rather than in the limited
microminiaturized laboratories that we are able to send to Mars.
In this way most of the ambiguities of the Viking microbiology
experiments could be resolved. The chemistry and mineralogy of
the soil could be determined; rocks could be broken open to
search for subsurface life; hundreds of tests for organic chemistry
and life could be performed, including direct microscopic exami¬
nation, under a wide range of conditions. We could even use
Vishniac’s scoring techniques. Although it would be fairly ex¬
pensive, such a mission is probably within our technological
capability.

However, it carries with it a novel danger: back-contamina¬
tion. If we wish on Earth to examine samples of Martian soil for
microbes, we must, of course, not sterilize the samples before¬
hand. The point of the expedition is to bring them back alive.
But what then? Might Martian microorganisms returned to Earth
pose a public health hazard? The Martians of H. G. Wells and
Orson Welles, preoccupied with the suppression of Bourne¬
mouth and Jersey City, never noticed until too late that their
immunological defenses were unavailing against the microbes of
Earth. Is the converse possible? This is a serious and difficult
issue. There may be no micromartians. If they exist, perhaps we
can eat a kilogram of them with no ill effects. But we are not sure,
and the stakes are high. If we wish to return unsterilized Martian
samples to Earth, we must have a containment procedure that is
stupefyingly reliable. There are nations that develop and stock¬
pile bacteriological weapons. They seem to have an occasional
accident, but they have not yet, so far as I know, produced global
pandemics. Perhaps Martian samples can be safely returned to
Earth. But I would want to be very sure before considering a
retumed-sample mission.

There is another way to investigate Mars and the full range of
delights and discoveries this heterogeneous planet holds for us.
My most persistent emotion in working with the Viking lander
pictures was frustration at our immobility. I found myself uncon¬
sciously urging the spacecraft at least to stand on its tiptoes, as if
this laboratory, designed for immobility, were perversely refusing
to manage even a little hop. How we longed to poke that dune
with the sample arm, look for life beneath that rock, see if that
distant ridge was a crater rampart. And not so very far to the
southeast, I knew, were the four sinuous channels of Chryse. For
all the tantalizing and provocative character of the Viking results,

Unexplained linear markings on the
Tharsis plateau. Mariner 9 photo, cour¬
tesy NASA.

The pyramids of Elysium. Mariner 9
photo. Courtesy NASA.

130 — Cosmos

A portrait of another world: strewn boul-
ders and gently rolling sand dunes at the
Viking 1 landing site in Chryse. Courtesy
NASA.

Viking far-encounter photograph of cres¬
cent Mars, showing crater in North Polar
Cap, and orogenic clouds in the lee of the
great Martian volcano, Olympus Mons.
Courtesy NASA.

I know a hundred places on Mars which are far more interesting
than our landing sites. The ideal tool is a roving vehicle carrying
on advanced experiments, particularly in imaging, chemistry and
biology. Prototypes of such rovers are under development by
NASA. They know on their own how to go over rocks, how not
to fall down ravines, how to get out of tight spots. It is within our
capability to land a rover on Mars that could scan its surround¬
ings, see the most interesting place in its field of view and, by the
same time tomorrow, be there. Every day a new place, a com¬
plex, winding traverse over the varied topography of this ap¬
pealing planet.

Such a mission would reap enormous scientific benefits, even if
there is no life on Mars. We could wander down the ancient
river valleys, up the slopes of one of the great volcanic moun¬
tains, along the strange stepped terrain of the icy polar terraces, or
muster a close approach to the beckoning pyramids of Mars.*
Public interest in such a mission would be sizable. Every day a
new set of vistas would arrive on our home television screens.
We could trace the route, ponder the findings, suggest new des¬
tinations. The journey would be long, the rover obedient to
radio commands from Earth. There would be plenty of time for
good new ideas to be incorporated into the mission plan. A
billion people could participate in the exploration of another
world.

The surface area of Mars is exactly as large as the land area of
the Earth. A thorough reconnaissance will clearly occupy us for
centuries. But there will be a time when Mars is all explored; a
time after robot aircraft have mapped it from aloft, a time after
rovers have combed the surface, a time after samples have been
returned safely to Earth, a time after human beings have walked
the sands of Mars. What then? What shall we do with Mars?

There are so many examples of human misuse of the Earth
that even phrasing this question chills me. If there is life on Mars,
I believe we should do nothing with Mars. Mars then belongs to
the Martians, even if the Martians are only microbes. The exis¬
tence of an independent biology on a nearby planet is a treasure
beyond assessing, and the preservation of that life must, I think,
supersede any other possible use of Mars. However, suppose
Mars is lifeless. It is not a plausible source of raw materials: the
freightage from Mars to Earth would be too expensive for many
centuries to come. But might we be able to live on Mars? Could
we in some sense make Mars habitable?

A lovely world, surely, but there is—from our parochial point
of view—much wrong with Mars, chiefly the low oxygen abun¬
dance, the absence of liquid water, and the high ultraviolet flux.

* The largest are 3 kilometers across at the base, and 1 kilometer high-
much larger than the pyramids of Sumer, Egypt or Mexico on Earth.
They seem eroded and ancient, and are, perhaps, only small mountains,
sandblasted for ages. But they warrant, I think, a careful look.

Blues for a Red Planet -131

(The low temperatures do not pose an insuperable obstacle, as
the yeanround scientific stations in Antarctica demonstrate.) All
of these problems could be solved if we could make more air.
With higher atmospheric pressures, liquid water would be possk
ble. With more oxygen we might breathe the atmosphere, and
ozone would form to shield the surface from solar ultraviolet
radiation. The sinuous channels, stacked polar plates and other
evidence suggest that Mars once had such a denser atmosphere.
Those gases are unlikely to have escaped from Mars. They are,

Top: The first picture ever returned from
the surface of Mars, radioed back to Earth
on July 20, 1976. At right is a portion of
landing pod 2, resting safely on the sun
face. Another landing pod was later found
to be buried in sand. The vesicular rock at
center is some ten centimeters across. Bot-
tom: The landscape of Utopia, as viewed
by Viking 2. The surface sampler arm is
extending at left. Its metal shroud is the
ejected canister on the ground at right.
Nothing resembling a living organism or
an artifact of intelligence was found at ek
ther Viking landing site.

132 — Cosmos

Three solar system locales: At left, in
Chryse, on Mars. At upper right, on the
slopes of Mauna Kea, Hawaii. At lower
right, in Utopia, on Mars, with frost cov¬
ering the ground. Mars and Earth are sim¬
ilar worlds. Courtesy NASA and Richard
Wells.

therefore, on the planet somewhere. Some are chemically com¬
bined with the surface rocks. Some are in subsurface ice. But
most may be in the present polar ice caps.

To vaporize the caps, we must heat them; perhaps we could
dust them with a dark powder, heating them by absorbing more
sunlight, the opposite of what we do to the Earth when we
destroy forests and grasslands. But the surface area of the caps is
very large. The necessary dust would require 1,200 Saturn 5
rocket boosters to be transported from Earth to Mars; even then,
the winds might blow the dust off the polar caps. A better way
would be to devise some dark material able to make copies of
itself, a little dusky machine which we deliver to Mars and which
then goes about reproducing itself from indigenous materials all
over the polar caps. There is a category of such machines. We
call them plants. Some are very hardy and resilient. We know
that at least some terrestrial microbes can survive on Mars. What
is necessary is a program of artificial selection and genetic engi¬
neering of dark plants—perhaps lichens—that could survive the
much more severe Martian environment. If such plants could be
bred, we might imagine them being seeded on the vast expanse
of the Martian polar ice caps, taking root, spreading, blackening
the ice caps, absorbing sunlight, heating the ice, and releasing the

Blues for a Red Planet - 133

ancient Martian atmosphere from its long captivity. We might
even imagine a kind of Martian Johnny Appleseed, robot or
human, roaming the frozen polar wastes in an endeavor that
benefits only the generations of humans to come.

This general concept is called terraforming: the changing of an
alien landscape into one more suitable for human beings. In
thousands of years humans have managed to perturb the global
temperature of the Earth by only about one degree through
greenhouse and albedo changes, although at the present rate of
burning fossil fuels and destroying forests and grasslands we can
now charge the global temperature by another degree in only a
century or two. These and other considerations suggest that a
time scale for a significant terraforming of Mars is probably hundreds

Trenches dug in Chryse in the search for
life on Mars (top). Close-up of a trench dug
across windblown sand ridges (bottom). On
a very small scale, we have begun to
rework the surface of another world.
Courtesy NASA.

134 - Cosmos

Sand and small stones deposited by the
Viking 2 surface sampler in the inlet to the
X-ray fluorescence spectrometer (out of
focus, bottom center), a device to determine
the inorganic chemistry of Martian soil
Inlets nearby lead to the organic chemistry
and microbiology experiments. Courtesy
NASA.

Two prototypes of future Mars rovers: a smart obstacle-avoiding ma¬
chine, constructed at the Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, and a Viking
Lander mounted on tractor treads. The actual Mars rovers of the
future are likely to include elements of both designs.

to thousands of years. In a future time of greatly advanced
technology we might wish not only to increase the total atmo¬
spheric pressure and make liquid water possible but also to carry
liquid water from the melting polar caps to the warmer equatorial
regions. There is, of course, a way to do it. We would build
canals.

The melting surface and subsurface ice would be transported
by a great canal network. But this is precisely what Percival
Lowell, not a hundred years ago, mistakenly proposed was in fact
happening on Mars. Lowell and Wallace both understood that
the comparative inhospitability of Mars was due to the scarcity of
water. If only a network of canals existed, the lack would be
remedied, the habitability of Mars would become plausible.
Lowell’s observations were made under extremely difficult seeing

BILL RAY

Blues for a Red Planet - 135

conditions. Others, like Schiaparelli, had already observed
something like the canals; they were called canali before Lowell
began his lifelong love affair with Mars. Human beings have a
demonstrated talent for selbdeception when their emotions are
stirred, and there are few notions more stirring than the idea of a
neighboring planet inhabited by intelligent beings.

The power of Lowell’s idea may, just possibly, make it a kind
of premonition. His canal network was built by Martians. Even
this may be an accurate prophecy: If the planet ever is terra^
formed, it will be done by human beings whose permanent resk
dence and planetary affiliation is Mars. The Martians will be us.

The Great Red Spot of Jupiter, a giant storm system 40,000 kilometers long and 11,000 kilometers wide rising above
the adjacent clouds. It was first observed in 1664 by Robert Hooke and later confirmed by Christiaan Huygens. The
material in the Red Spot rotates once every six Earth days; the white oval, lower right, rotates in the opposite sense. At
top left are clouds overtaking the Red Spot from right to left. The reason the spot is red is unknown, as is the reason
that there is only one Red Spot of this size. Voyager 2 image, courtesy NASA.

Chapter VI

TRAVELERS' TALES

Do there exist many worlds, or is there but a single world? This is one of the
most noble and exalted questions in the study of Nature.

—Albertus Magnus, thirteenth century

In the first ages of the world, the islanders either thought themselves to be
the only dwellers upon the earth, or else if there were any other, yet they
could not possibly conceive how they might have any commerce with them,
being severed by the deep and broad sea, but the aftertimes found out the
invention of ships . . . So, perhaps, there may be some other means invented
for a conveyance to the Moone . . . We have not now any Drake or
Columbus to undertake this voyage, or any Daedalus to invent a convey^
ance through the aire. However I doubt not but that time who is still the
father of new truths, and hath revealed unto us many things which our
ancestors were ignorant of, will also manifest to our posterity that which we
now desire but cannot know.

—John Wilkins, The Discovery of a World in the Moone, 1638

We may mount from this dull Earth, and viewing it from on high, consider
whether Nature has laid out all her cost and finery upon this small speck of
Dirt. So, like Travellers into other distant countries, we shall be better able
to judge of what’s done at home, know how to make a true estimate of, and
set its own value upon every thing. We shall be less apt to admire what this
World calls great, shall nobly despise those Trifles the generality of Men set
their Affections on, when we know that there are a multitude of such
Earths inhabited and adorn’d as well as our own.

—Christiaan Huygens, The Celestial Worlds Discovered , c. 1690

138 — Cosmos

The Voyager spacecraft on exhibit at the
Jet Propulsion Laboratory. On the boom
at left are the nuclear power generators.
Within the central, hexagonal electronics
bay are the on-board computers; the gold
disk on the exterior is the Voyager Inter-
stellar Record (Chapter II). On the boom
at right is the scan platform from which
various instruments can be pointed, in¬
cluding the high-resolution camera, lower
right. Courtesy NASA.

THIS IS THE TIME WHEN HUMANS have begun to sail the sea
of space. The modern ships that ply the Keplerian trajectories to
the planets are unmanned. They are beautifully constructed,
semi-intelligent robots exploring unknown worlds. Voyages to
the outer solar system are controlled from a single place on the
planet Earth, the Jet Propulsion Laboratory (JPL) of the National
Aeronautics and Space Administration in Pasadena, California.

On July 9, 1979, a spacecraft called Voyager 2 encountered the
Jupiter system. It had been almost two years sailing through
interplanetary space. The ship is made of millions of separate
parts assembled redundantly, so that if some component fails,
others will take over its responsibilities. The spacecraft weighs
0.9 tons and would fill a large living room. Its mission takes it so
far from the Sun that it cannot be powered by solar energy, as
other spacecraft are. Instead, Voyager relies on a small nuclear
power plant, drawing hundreds of watts from the radioactive
decay of a pellet of plutonium. Its three integrated computers and
most of its housekeeping functions—for example, its tempera¬
ture-control system—are localized in its middle. It receives com¬
mands from Earth and radios its findings back to Earth through a
large antenna, 3.7 meters in diameter. Most of its scientific in¬
struments are on a scan platform, which tracks Jupiter or one of
its moons as the spacecraft hurtles past. There are many scientific
instruments—ultraviolet and infrared spectrometers, devices to
measure charged particles and magnetic fields and the radio
emission from Jupiter—but the most productive have been the
two television cameras, designed to take tens of thousands of
pictures of the planetary islands in the outer solar system.

Jupiter is surrounded by a shell of invisible but extremely
dangerous high-energy charged particles. The spacecraft must
pass through the outer edge of this radiation belt to examine

Travelers’ Tales - 139

Jupiter and its moons close up, and to continue its mission to
Saturn and beyond. But the charged particles can damage the
delicate instruments and fry the electronics. Jupiter is also sun
rounded by a ring of solid debris, discovered four months earlier
by Voyager 1, which Voyager 2 had to traverse. A collision with
a small boulder could have sent the spacecraft tumbling wildly
out of control, its antenna unable to lock on the Earth, its data
lost forever. Just before Encounter, the mission controllers were
restive. There were some alarms and emergencies, but the com¬
bined intelligence of the humans on Earth and the robot in space
circumvented disaster.

Launched on August 20, 1977, it moved on an arcing trajec¬
tory past the orbit of Mars, through the asteroid belt, to approach
the Jupiter system and thread its way past the planet and among
its fourteen or so moons. Voyagers passage by Jupiter accelerated
it toward a close encounter with Saturn. Saturn’s gravity will
propel it on to Uranus. After Uranus it will plunge on past
Neptune, leaving the solar system, becoming an interstellar
spacecraft, fated to roam forever the great ocean between the
stars.

These voyages of exploration and discovery are the latest in a
long series that have characterized and distinguished human his¬
tory. In the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries you could travel
from Spain to the Azores in a few days, the same time it takes us
now to cross the channel from the Earth to the Moon. It took
then a few months to traverse the Atlantic Ocean and reach
what was called the New World, the Americas. Today it takes a
few months to cross the ocean of the inner solar system and make
planet-fall on Mars or Venus, which are truly and literally new
worlds awaiting us. In the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries
you could travel from Holland to China in a year or two, the
time it has taken Voyager to travel from Earth to Jupiter.* The
annual costs were, relatively, more then than now, but in both
cases less than 1 percent of the appropriate Gross National Prod¬
uct. Our present spaceships, with their robot crews, are the har¬
bingers, the vanguards of future human expeditions to the
planets. We have traveled this way before.

The fifteenth through seventeenth centuries represent a major
turning point in our history. It then became clear that we could
venture to all parts of our planet. Plucky sailing vessels from half
a dozen European nations dispersed to every ocean. There were
many motivations for these journeys: ambition, greed, national
pride, religious fanaticism, prison pardons, scientific curiosity, the

Mission Control at the Jet Propulsion
Laboratory, NASA.

* Or, to make a different comparison, a fertilized egg takes as long to
wander from the fallopian tubes and implant itself in the uterus as
Apollo 11 took to journey to the Moon; and as long to develop into a
full-term infant as Viking took on its trip to Mars. The normal human
lifetime is longer than Voyager will take to venture beyond the orbit of
Pluto.

BILL RAY

140 - Cosmos

The harbor at Middelburg, Holland, in
the early seventeenth century. Painting by
Adriaen van de Venne. Courtesy Rijks-
museum, Amsterdam.

Atlas, supporting the starry heavens. A
sculpture from the Amsterdam Town
Hall.

thirst for adventure and the unavailability of suitable employ-
ment in Estremadura. These voyages worked much evil as well as
much good. But the net result has been to bind the Earth to-
gether, to decrease provincialism, to unify the human species and
to advance powerfully our knowledge of our planet and our-
selves.

Emblematic of the epoch of sailing-ship exploration and dis¬
covery is the revolutionary Dutch Republic of the seventeenth
century. Having recently declared its independence from the
powerful Spanish Empire, it embraced more fully than any other
nation of its time the European Enlightenment. It was a rational,
orderly, creative society. But because Spanish ports and vessels
were closed to Dutch shipping, the economic survival of the tiny
republic depended on its ability to construct, man and deploy a
great fleet of commercial sailing vessels.

The Dutch East India Company, a joint governmental and
private enterprise, sent ships to the far corners of the world to
acquire rare commodities and resell them at a profit in Europe.
Such voyages were the life blood of the Republic. Navigational
charts and maps were classified as state secrets. Ships often em¬
barked with sealed orders. Suddenly the Dutch were present all
over the planet. The Barents Sea in the Arctic Ocean and Tas¬
mania in Australia are named after Dutch sea captains. These
expeditions were not merely commercial exploitations, although
there was plenty of that. There were powerful elements of scien¬
tific adventure and the zest for discovery of new lands, new
plants and animals, new people; the pursuit of knowledge for its
own sake.

The Amsterdam Town Hall reflects the confident and secular
self-image of seventeenth-century Holland. It took shiploads of
marble to build. Constantijn Huygens, a poet and diplomat of the
time, remarked that the Town Hall dispelled “the Gothic
squint and squalor.” In the Town Hall to this day, there is a

Travelers’ Tales — 141

statue of Atlas supporting the heavens, festooned with constella¬
tions. Beneath is Justice, brandishing a golden sword and scales,
standing between Death and Punishment, and treading unden
foot Avarice and Envy, the gods of the merchants. The Dutch,
whose economy was based on private profit, nevertheless unden
stood that the unrestrained pursuit of profit posed a threat to the
nation’s soul.

A less allegorical symbol may be found under Atlas and Jus¬
tice, on the floor of the Town Hall. It is a great inlaid map, dating
from the late seventeenth or early eighteenth centuries, reaching
from West Africa to the Pacific Ocean. The whole world was
Holland’s arena. And on this map, with disarming modesty the
Dutch omitted themselves, using only the old Latin name Bel¬
gium for their part of Europe.

In a typical year many ships set sail halfway around the world.
Down the west coast of Africa, through what they called the
Ethiopian Sea, around the south coast of Africa, within the
Straits of Madagascar, and on past the southern tip of India they
sailed, to one major focus of their interests, the Spice Islands,
present-day Indonesia. Some expeditions journeyed from there
to a land named New Holland, and today called Australia. A few
ventured through the Straits of Malacca, past the Philippines, to
China. We know from a mid-seventeenth-century account of an
“Embassy from the East India Company of the United Provinces
of the Netherlands, to the Grand Tartar, Cham, Emperor of
China.” The Dutch burgers, ambassadors and sea captains stood
wide-eyed in amazement, face to face with another civilization in
the Imperial City of Peking.*

Never before or since has Holland been the world power it
was then. A small country, forced to live by its wits, its foreign
policy contained a strong pacifist element. Because of its tolerance
for unorthodox opinions, it was a haven for intellectuals who
were refugees from censorship and thought control elsewhere in
Europe—much as the United States benefited enormously in the
1930’s by the exodus of intellectuals from Nazi-dominated
Europe. So seventeenth-century Holland was the home of the
great Jewish philosopher Spinoza, whom Einstein admired; of
Descartes, a pivotal figure in the history of mathematics and
philosophy; and of John Locke, a political scientist who in¬
fluenced a group of philosophically inclined revolutionaries
named Paine, Hamilton, Adams, Franklin and Jefferson. Never
before or since has Holland been graced by such a galaxy of
artists and scientists, philosophers and mathematicians. This was
the time of the master painters Rembrandt and Vermeer and
Frans Hals; of Leeuwenhoek, the inventor of the microscope; of

Galileo Galilei (1564T642). In this paint -
ing by Jean-Leon Huens, Galileo is at¬
tempting to convince skeptical
ecclesiastics that there are mountains on
the Moon and that the planet Jupiter pos¬
sesses several moons of its own. The
Catholic hierarchy remained uncon¬
vinced. In 1633 Galileo was compelled to
stand trial for “vehement suspicion of
heresy.” Convicted on the evidence of a
forged document, Galileo spent the last
eight years of his life under house arrest in
his small house outside Florence. Galileo
was the first person to apply the telescope
to a study of the skies. Painting by Jean-
Leon Huens, © National Geographic So¬
ciety.

* We even know what gifts they brought the Court. The Empress was
presented with “six little chests of divers pictures.” And the Emperor
received “two fardels of cinnamon.”

142 — Cosmos

Grotius, the founder of international law; of Willebrord Snellius,
who discovered the law of the refraction of light.

In the Dutch tradition of encouraging freedom of thought, the
University of Leiden offered a professorship to an Italian scientist
named Galileo, who had been forced by the Catholic Church
under threat of torture to recant his heretical view that the Earth
moved about the Sun and not vice versa.* Galileo had close ties
with Holland, and his first astronomical telescope was an inv
provement of a spyglass of Dutch design. With it he discovered
sunspots, the phases of Venus, the craters of the Moon, and the
four large moons of Jupiter now called, after him, the Galilean
satellites. Galileo’s own description of his ecclesiastical travails is
contained in a letter he wrote in the year 1615 to the Grand
Duchess Christina:

Some years ago as Your Serene Highness well knows, I
discovered in the heavens many things that had not been
seen before our own age. The novelty of these things, as
well as some consequences which followed from them in
contradiction to the physical notions commonly held
among academic philosophers, stirred up against me no
small number of professors [many of them ecclesiastics]—as
if I had placed these things in the sky with my own hands in
order to upset Nature and overturn the sciences. They
seemed to forget that the increase of known truths stimm
lates the investigation, establishment, and growth of the
arts. 1 "

The connection between Holland as an exploratory power and
Holland as an intellectual and cultural center was very strong.
The improvement of sailing ships encouraged technology of all
kinds. People enjoyed working with their hands. Inventions were
prized. Technological advance required the freest possible pursuit

* In 1979 Pope John Paul II cautiously proposed reversing the conderm
nation of Galileo done 346 years earlier by the “Holy Inquisition.”

t The courage of Galileo (and Kepler) in promoting the heliocentric
hypothesis was not evident in the actions of others, even those residing
in less fanatically doctrinal parts of Europe. For example, in a letter dated
April 1634, Rene Descartes, then living in Holland, wrote:

Doubtless you know that Galileo was recently censured by the
Inquisitors of the Faith, and that his views about the movement of
the Earth were condemned as heretical. I must tell you that all the
things I explained in my treatise, which included the doctrine of
the movement of the Earth, were so interdependent that it is
enough to discover that one of them is false to know that all the
arguments I was using are unsound. Though I thought they were
based on very certain and evident proofs, I would not wish, for
anything in the world, to maintain them against the authority of
the Church. ... I desire to live in peace and to continue the life I
have begun under the motto to live well you must live unseen .

Travelers’ Tales — 143

of knowledge, so Holland became the leading publisher and
bookseller in Europe, translating works written in other lam
guages and permitting the publication of works proscribed else-
where. Adventures into exotic lands and encounters with strange
societies shook complacency, challenged thinkers to reconsider
the prevailing wisdom and showed that ideas that had been
accepted for thousands of years—for example, on geography—
were fundamentally in error. In a time when kings and emperors
ruled much of the world, the Dutch Republic was governed,
more than any other nation, by the people. The openness of the
society and its encouragement of the life of the mind, its material
well-being and its commitment to the exploration and utilization
of new worlds generated a joyful confidence in the human enter¬
prise.*

In Italy, Galileo had announced other worlds, and Giordano
Bruno had speculated on other lifeforms. For this they had been
made to suffer brutally. But in Holland, the astronomer Chris¬
tiaan Huygens, who believed in both, was showered with
honors. His father was Constantijn Huygens, a master diplomat
of the age, a litterateur, poet, composer, musician, close friend
and translator of the English poet John Donne, and the head of
an archetypical great family. Constantijn admired the painter
Rubens, and “discovered” a young artist named Rembrandt van
Rijn, in several of whose works he subsequently appears. After
their first meeting, Descartes wrote of him: “I could not believe
that a single mind could occupy itself with so many things, and
equip itself so well in all of them.” The Huygens home was filled
with goods from all over the world. Distinguished thinkers from
other nations were frequent guests. Growing up in this environ¬
ment, the young Christiaan Huygens became simultaneously
adept in languages, drawing, law, science, engineering, mathe¬
matics and music. His interests and allegiances were broad. “The
world is my country,” he said, “science my religion.”

Light was a motif of the age: the symbolic enlightenment of
freedom of thought and religion, of geographical discovery; the
light that permeated the paintings of the time, particularly the
exquisite work of Vermeer; and light as an object of scientific
inquiry, as in Snell’s study of refraction, Leeuwenhoek’s inven¬
tion of the microscope and Huygens’ own wave theory of lightC

Portrait of Christiaan Huygens (1629—
1695) by Bernard Vaillant. Courtesy
Huygensmuseum “Hofwijck,” Voorburg,
Holland.

* This exploratory tradition may account for the fact that Holland has,
to this day, produced far more than its per capita share of distinguished
astronomers, among them Gerard Peter Kuiper, who in the 1940’s and
1950’s was the world’s only full-time planetary astrophysicist. The sub¬
ject was then considered by most professional astronomers to be at least
slightly disreputable, tainted with Lowellian excesses. I am grateful to
have been Kuiper’s student.

t Isaac Newton admired Christiaan Huygens and thought him “the most
elegant mathematician” of their time, and the truest follower of the

144 - Cosmos

Ult Cm. Huijccns Oruvrei CoaplMn. Tom XIII. F«*c II. (1916) BU 7M.

A detail from the notebooks of Christiaan
Huygens, recording his observations, with
one of Leeuwenhoeks microscopes, of
spermatazoa from the seminal fluids of a
dog (left) and a man.

These were all connected activities, and their practitioners min-
gled freely. Vermeer’s interiors are characteristically tilled with
nautical artifacts and wall maps. Microscopes were drawing-room
curiosities. Leeuwenhoek was the executor of Vermeer’s estate
and a frequent visitor at the Huygens home in Hofwijck.

Leeuwenhoek’s microscope evolved from the magnifying
glasses employed by drapers to examine the quality of cloth.
With it he discovered a universe in a drop of water: the mi¬
crobes, which he described as “animalcules” and thought “cute.”
Huygens had contributed to the design of the first microscopes
and himself made many discoveries with them. Leeuwenhoek
and Huygens were among the first people ever to see human
sperm cells, a prerequisite for understanding human reproduc¬
tion. To explain how microorganisms slowly develop in water
previously sterilized by boiling, Huygens proposed that they were
small enough to float through the air and reproduced on alight¬
ing in water. Thus he established an alternative to spontaneous
generation—the notion that life could arise, in fermenting grape
juice or rotting meat, entirely independent of preexisting life. It
was not until the time of Louis Pasteur, two centuries later, that
Huygens’ speculation was proved correct. The Viking search for
life on Mars can be traced in more ways than one back to
Leeuwenhoek and Huygens. They are also the grandfathers of
the germ theory of disease, and therefore of much of modern
medicine. But they had no practical motives in mind. They were
merely tinkering in a technological society.

The microscope and telescope, both developed in early seven¬
teenth-century Holland, represent an extension of human vi¬
sion to the realms of the very small and the very large. Our
observations of atoms and galaxies were launched in this time
and place. Christiaan Huygens loved to grind and polish lenses
for astronomical telescopes and constructed one five meters long.

mathematical tradition of the ancient Greeks—then, as now, a great
compliment. Newton believed, in part because shadows had sharp edges,
that light behaved as if it were a stream of tiny particles. He thought that
red light was composed of the largest particles and violet the smallest.
Huygens argued that instead light behaved as if it were a wave propa¬
gating in a vacuum, as an ocean wave does in the sea—which is why we
talk about the wavelength and frequency of light. Many properties of
light, including diffraction, are naturally explained by the wave theory,
and in subsequent years Huygens’ view carried the day. But in 1905,
Einstein showed that the particle theory of light could explain the pho¬
toelectric effect, the ejection of electrons from a metal upon exposure to
a beam of light. Modern quantum mechanics combines both ideas, and it
is customary today to think of light as behaving in some circumstances as
a beam of particles and in others as a wave. This wave-particle dualism
may not correspond readily to our common-sense notions, but it is in
excellent accord with what experiments have shown light really does.
There is something mysterious and stirring in this marriage of opposites,
and it is fitting that Newton and Huygens, bachelors both, were the
parents of our modern understanding of the nature of light.

Travelers’ Tales - 145

His discoveries with the telescope would by themselves have
ensured his place in the history of human accomplishment In the
footsteps of Eratosthenes, he was the first person to measure the
size of another planet. He was also the first to speculate that
Venus is completely covered with clouds; the first to draw a
surface feature on the planet Mars (a vast dark windswept slope
called Syrtis Major); and by observing the appearance and disap'
pearance of such features as the planet rotated, the first to deter-
mine that the Martian day was, like ours, roughly twenty-four
hours long. He was the first to recognize that Saturn was sur¬
rounded by a system of rings which nowhere touches the planet.*
And he was the discoverer of Titan, the largest moon of Saturn
and, as we now know, the second largest moon in the solar sys¬
tem—a world of extraordinary interest and promise. Most of these
discoveries he made in his twenties. He also thought astrology was
nonsense.

Huygens did much more. A key problem for marine naviga¬
tion in this age was the determination of longitude. Latitude
could easily be determined by the stars—the farther south you
were, the more southern constellations you could see. But longi¬
tude required precise timekeeping. An accurate shipboard clock
would tell the time in your home port; the rising and setting of
the Sun and stars would specify the local shipboard time; and the
difference between the two would yield your longitude. Huygens
invented the pendulum clock (its principle had been discovered
earlier by Galileo), which was then employed, although not fully
successfully, to calculate position in the midst of the great ocean.
His efforts introduced an unprecedented accuracy in astronomi¬
cal and other scientific observations and stimulated further ad¬
vances in nautical clocks. He invented the spiral balance spring
still used in some watches today; made fundamental contribu¬
tions to mechanics—e.g., the calculation of centrifugal force—
and, from a study of the game of dice, to the theory of
probability. He improved the air pump, which was later to revo¬
lutionize the mining industry, and the “magic lantern,” the ances¬
tor of the slide projector. He also invented something called the
“gunpowder engine,” which influenced the development of an¬
other machine, the steam engine.

Huygens was delighted that the Copemican view of the Earth
as a planet in motion around the Sun was widely accepted even
by the ordinary people in Holland. Indeed, he said, Copernicus
was acknowledged by all astronomers except those who “were a
bit slow-witted or under the superstitions imposed by merely
human authority.” In the Middle Ages, Christian philosophers
were fond of arguing that, since the heavens circle the Earth once

* Galileo discovered the rings, but had no idea what to make of them.
Through his early astronomical telescope, they seemed to be two pro¬
jections symmetrically attached to Saturn, resembling, he said in some
bafflement, ears.

O

O

I w

X,

-

o

9

- -

<

7 _

SL

-e-

B ^

©

A detail from Christiaan Huygens’ Sys-
tema Saturnium , published in 1659.
Shown is his (correct) explanation of the
changing appearance of the rings of Saturn

over the years as the relative geometry of
Earth and Saturn changes. In position B
the comparatively paper-thin rings disap¬
pear as they are seen edge-on. In position
A they display their maximum extent vis¬
ible from Earth, the configuration that
caused Galileo, with a significantly inferior
telescope, considerable consternation.

146 - Cosmos

every day, they can hardly be infinite in extent; and therefore an
infinite number of worlds, or even a large number of them (or
even one other of them), is impossible. The discovery that the
Earth is turning rather than the sky moving had important impli-
cations for the uniqueness of the Earth and the possibility of life
elsewhere. Copernicus held that not just the solar system but the
entire universe was heliocentric, and Kepler denied that the stars
have planetary systems. The first person to make explicit the idea
of a large—indeed, an infinite—number of other worlds in orbit
about other suns seems to have been Giordano Bruno. But
others thought that the plurality of worlds followed immediately
from the ideas of Copernicus and Kepler and found themselves
aghast. In the early seventeenth century, Robert Merton com
tended that the heliocentric hypothesis implied a multitude of
other planetary systems, and that this was an argument of the sort
called reductio ad absurdum (Appendix 1), demonstrating the
error of the initial assumption. He wrote, in an argument which
may once have seemed withering,

For if the firmament be of such an incomparable bigness, as
these Copemical giants will have it..., so vast and full of
innumerable stars, as being infinite in extent . . . why may
we not suppose . . . those infinite stars visible in the fir¬
mament to be so many suns, with particular fixed centers; to
have likewise their subordinate planets, as the sun hath his
dancing still around him?. . . And so, in consequence, there
are infinite habitable worlds; what hinders? . . . these and
suchlike insolent and bold attempts, prodigious paradoxes,
inferences must needs follow, if it once be granted which
. . . Kepler . . . and others maintain of the Earth’s motion.

But the Earth does move. Merton, if he lived today, would be
obliged to deduce “infinite, habitable worlds.” Huygens did not
shrink from this conclusion; he embraced it gladly: Across the sea
of space the stars are other suns. By analogy with our solar
system, Huygens reasoned that those stars should have their own
planetary systems and that many of these planets might be in¬
habited: “Should we allow the planets nothing but vast deserts
. . . and deprive them of all those creatures that more plainly
bespeak their divine architect, we should sink them below the
Earth in beauty and dignity, a thing very unreasonable.”*

These ideas were set forth in an extraordinary book bearing
the triumphant title The Celestial Worlds Discover'd: Conjectures
Concerning the Inhabitants , Plants and Productions of the Worlds
in the Planets . Composed shortly before Huygens died in 1690,
the work was admired by many, including Czar Peter the Great,

* A few others had held similar opinions. In his Harmonice Mundi
Kepler remarked “it was Tycho Brahe’s opinion concerning that bare
wilderness of globes that it does not exist fruitlessly but is filled with
inhabitants.”

Travelers’ Tales - 147

who made it the first product of Western science to be published
in Russia. The book is in large part about the nature or environ-
ments of the planets. Among the figures in the finely rendered
first edition is one in which we see, to scale, the Sun and the giant
planets Jupiter and Saturn. They are, comparatively, rather small.
There is also an etching of Saturn next to the Earth: Our planet is
a tiny circle.

By and large Huygens imagined the environments and inhabi-
tants of other planets to be rather like those of seventeenth^
century Earth. He conceived of “planetarians” whose “whole
Bodies, and every part of them, may be quite distinct and dif-
ferent from ours . . . ’tis a very ridiculous opinion . . . that it is
impossible a rational Soul should dwell in any other shape than
ours.” You could be smart, he was saying, even if you looked
peculiar. But he then went on to argue that they would not look
very peculiar—that they must have hands and feet and walk
upright, that they would have writing and geometry, and that
Jupiter has its four Galilean satellites to provide a navigational aid
for the sailors in the Jovian oceans. Huygens was, of course, a
citizen of his time. Who of us is not? He claimed science as his
religion and then argued that the planets must be inhabited
because otherwise God had made worlds for nothing. Because he
lived before Darwin, his speculations about extraterrestrial life
are innocent of the evolutionary perspective. But he was able to
develop on observational grounds something akin to the modern
cosmic perspective:

What a wonderful and Amazing scheme have we here of
the magnificant vastness of the universe ... So many Suns,
so many Earths . . . and every one of them stock’d with so
many Herbs, Trees, and Animals, adorn’d with so many
Seas and Mountains! . . . And how must our Wonder and
Admiration be increased when we consider the prodigious
Distance and Multitude of the Stars.

The Voyager spacecraft are the lineal descendants of those
sailing-ship voyages of exploration, and of the scientific and
speculative tradition of Christiaan Huygens. The Voyagers are
caravels bound for the stars, and on the way exploring those
worlds that Huygens knew and loved so well.

One of the main commodities returned on those voyages of
centuries ago were travelers’ tales,* stories of alien lands and
exotic creatures that evoked our sense of wonder and stimulated
future exploration. There had been accounts of mountains that

* Such tales are an ancient human tradition; many of them have had,
from the beginning of exploration, a cosmic motif. For example, the
fifteenth-century explorations of Indonesia, Sri Lanka, India, Arabia and
Africa by the Ming Dynasty Chinese were described by Fei Hsin, one of
the participants, in a picture book prepared for the Emperor, as “The
Triumphant Visions of the Starry Raft.” Unfortunately, the pictures—
although not the text—have been lost.

A giraffe, carried from Africa to China
around 1420 in the wake of the great
voyages of trade and discovery by the
Ming Dynasty admiral Cheng Ho. The
presence of this fabled animal in the Chi¬
nese Imperial Court was considered an
auspicious sign. Earlier travelers’ tales
about the giraffe may have been greeted
with considerable skepticism. The Ming
age of exploration, in fleets of oceangoing
junks—which almost certainly included a
rounding of the Cape of Good Hope, and
the appearance of a Chinese navy in the
Atlantic Ocean—ended just before the
Portuguese entered the Indian Ocean, re¬
versing the vector of discovery. Shen Tu:
The Tribute Giraffe with Attendant.
Courtesy the Philadelphia Museum of
Art. Gift of John T. Dorrance.

148 - Cosmos

Voyager 1 far encounter image (top) of Jupiter from a range of 28 million kilometers. Bottom: Voyager approaches
Jupiter with the moons Io and Callisto in foreground. Courtesy NASA.

Travelers’ Tales — 149

reached the sky; of dragons and sea monsters; of everyday eating
utensils made of gold; of a beast with an arm for a nose; of people
who thought the doctrinal disputes among Protestants, Catho¬
lics, Jews and Muslims to be silly; of a black stone that burned; of
headless humans with mouths in their chests; of sheep that grew
on trees. Some of these stories were true; some were lies. Others
had a kernel of truth, misunderstood or exaggerated by the ex¬
plorers or their informants. In the hands of Voltaire, say, or
Jonathan Swift, these accounts stimulated a new perspective on
European society, forcing a reconsideration of that insular world.

Modern Voyagers also return travelers’ tales, tales of a world
shattered like a crystal sphere; a globe where the ground is cov¬
ered, pole to pole, with what looks like a network of cobwebs;
tiny moons shaped like potatoes; a world with an underground
ocean; a land that smells of rotten eggs and looks like a pizza pie,
with lakes of molten sulfur and volcanic eruptions ejecting smoke
directly into space; a planet called Jupiter that dwarfs our own—so
large that 1,000 Earths would fit within it.

The Galilean satellites of Jupiter are each almost as big as the
planet Mercury. We can measure their sizes and masses and so
calculate their density, which tells us something about the com¬
position of their interiors. We find that the inner two, Io and
Europa, have a density as high as rock. The outer two, Gan¬
ymede and Callisto, have a much lower density, halfway be¬
tween rock and ice. But the mixture of ice and rocks within these
outer moons must contain, as do rocks on Earth, traces of radio¬
active minerals, which heat their surroundings. There is no ef¬
fective way for this heat, accumulated over billions of years, to
reach the surface and be lost to space, and the radioactivity inside
Ganymede and Callisto must therefore melt their icy interiors.
We anticipate underground oceans of slush and water in these
moons, a hint, before we have ever seen the surfaces of the
Galilean satellites close up, that they may be very different one
from another. When we do look closely, through the eyes of
Voyager, this prediction is confirmed. They do not resemble
each other. They are different from any worlds we have ever
seen before.

The Voyager 2 spacecraft will never return to Earth. But its
scientific findings, its epic discoveries, its travelers’ tales, do re¬
turn. Take July 9, 1979, for instance. At 8:04 Pacific Standard
Time on this morning, the first pictures of a new world, called
Europa after an old one, were received on Earth.

How does a picture from the outer solar system get to us?
Sunlight shines on Europa in its orbit around Jupiter and is
reflected back to space, where some of it strikes the phosphors of
the Voyager television cameras, generating an image. The image
is read by the Voyager computers, radioed back across the im¬
mense intervening distance of half a billion kilometers to a radio
telescope, a ground station on the Earth. There is one in Spain,

150 - Cosmos

Flight paths of Voyager 1 (crossing the
orbit of Uranus, top left) and Voyager 2
(encountering Uranus in January 1986).
Also shown is the alternative trajectory
were Voyager 2 to have made a close en-
counter with Titan, as Voyager 1 did.

The passage of Voyager 1 (top) and
Voyager 2 (bottom) past the Galilean sateb
lites of Jupiter on March 5 and July 9,
1979.

The Jovian moon Europa, as seen by
Voyager 2 during close encounter on July
9, 1979. Europa is about the size of our
moon but its topography is markedly dif¬
ferent. The lack of craters and mountains
strongly suggests that a thick ice crust,
perhaps 100 kilometers deep, jackets the
silicate interior. The complex pattern of
dark lines may be ice fractures which have
been filled in with material from beneath
the crust. The high brightness of Europa
is consistent with this hypothesis. Cour¬
tesy NASA.

Travelers’ Tales — 151

one in the Mojave Desert of Southern California and one in
Australia. (On that July morning in 1979 it was the one in
Australia that was pointed toward Jupiter and Europa.) It then
passes the information via a communications satellite in Earth
orbit to Southern California, where it is transmitted by a set of
microwave relay towers to a computer at the Jet Propulsion
Laboratory, where it is processed. The picture is fundamentally
like a newspaper wirephoto, made of perhaps a million individual
dots, each a different shade of gray, so fine and close together
that at a distance the constituent dots are invisible. We see only
their cumulative effect. The information from the spacecraft
specifies how bright or dark each dot is to be. After processing,
the dots are then stored on a magnetic disc, something like a
phonograph record. There are some eighteen thousand photo-
graphs taken in the Jupiter system by Voyager 1 that are stored
on such magnetic discs, and an equivalent number for Voyager 2.
Finally, the end product of this remarkable set of links and relays
is a thin piece of glossy paper, in this case showing the wonders of
Europa, recorded, processed and examined for the first time in
human history on July 9, 1979.

What we saw on such pictures was absolutely astonishing.
Voyager 1 obtained excellent imagery of the other three Galilean
satellites of Jupiter. But not Europa. It was left for Voyager 2 to
acquire the first close-up pictures of Europa, where we see things
that are only a few kilometers across. At first glance, the place
looks like nothing so much as the canal network that Percival
Lowell imagined to adorn Mars, and that, we now know from
space vehicle exploration, does not exist at all. We see on Europa
an amazing, intricate network of intersecting straight and curved
lines. Are they ridges—that is, raised? Are they troughs—that is,
depressed? How are they made? Are they part of a global tectonic
system, produced perhaps by fracturing of an expanding or con¬
tracting planet? Are they connected with plate tectonics on the
Earth? What light do they shed on the other satellites of the
Jovian system? At the moment of discovery, the vaunted tech¬
nology has produced something astonishing. But it remains for
another device, the human brain, to figure it out. Europa turns
out to be as smooth as a billiard ball despite the network of
lineations. The absence of impact craters may be due to the
heating and flow of surface ice upon impact. The lines are
grooves or cracks, their origin still being debated long after the
mission.

If the Voyager missions were manned, the captain would keep
a ship’s log, and the log, a combination of the events of Voyagers
1 and 2, might read something like this:

Day 1 After much concern about provisions and instru¬
ments, which seemed to be malfunctioning, we successfully

lifted off from Cape Canaveral on our long journey to the

planets and the stars.

Voyager 2 image taken July 6, 1979,
shows a region of the Jovian atmosphere
from approximately 25°N to the equator.
The north temperate “jet” of clouds is the
rusty band running diagonally across top-
mid frame. These clouds are moving at
about 540 kilometers per hour. The
bluish-white regions at bottom show
breaks in the upper ammonia clouds. We
are seeing approximately 60 kilometers
down. Courtesy NASA.

A break in the light-brown clouds of Ju¬
piter (with no white ammonia clouds
above them) permits us to see to a deeper
dark-brown cloud layer, possibly contain¬
ing complex organic matter. Infrared
measurements show the dark-brown
cloud to be warmer than its surroundings.
Voyager 1 image. Courtesy NASA.

152 — Cosmos

A “snakeskin,” or cylindrical projection of the Jovian cloud features as seen by Voyager L Longitudes are given at
bottom, latitudes at left. The symbols at right stand for, in order, the North Temperate Zone, North Tropical Zone,
North Equatorial Belt, Equatorial Zone, South Equatorial Belt, South Tropical Zone, and the South Temperate Zone.
Zones tend to be covered with high white ammonia clouds, unlike the colored belts. The Great Red Spot (GRS), at
about 75° longitude, lives near the boundary of the SEB and the STrZ. The deepest and hottest places we see are the
bluish patches at the heads of the regularly spaced white plumes in the NEB. Courtesy NASA.

False color image of the Great Red Spot, in which the computer has exaggerated reds and blues at the expense of
greens. High clouds temporarily overlie about a third of the GRS. Voyager 1 image. Courtesy NASA.

Travelers’ Tales — 153

Voyager 1 image of the surface of Io. Each of the dark, roughly circular features is a recently active volcano. The
volcano with a bright halo at the rough center of the disc was observed in eruption just fifteen hours before this image
was acquired; it has since been named Prometheus. The black, red, orange and yellow colors are thought to be frozen
sulfur, originally spewed from the volcanoes in a molten state, with the initial temperatures highest for black deposits
and lowest for yellow. White deposits, including those around Prometheus, may be frozen sulfur dioxide. Io is 3,640
kilometers in diameter. Courtesy NASA.

154 - Cosmos

Two erupting volcanoes at the limb or
edge of crescent Io. They had apparently
been erupting continuously for four
months. The lower plume is from the
Maui Patera volcano. Voyager 2 image.
Courtesy NASA.

Recent flows of molten sulfur from the Ra
Patera volcano on Io. We are viewing ah
most directly down the volcanic caldera.
Voyager 1 image. Courtesy NASA.

Day 2 A problem in the deployment of the boom that
supports the science scan platform. If the problem is not
solved, we will lose most of our pictures and other scientific
data.

Day 13 We have looked back and taken the first photo-
graph ever obtained of the Earth and Moon as worlds
together in space. A pretty pair.

Day 150 Engines fired nominally for a mid-course trajec-
tory correction.

Day 170 Routine housekeeping functions. An uneventful
few months.

Day 185 Successful calibration images taken of Jupiter.

Day 207 Boom problem solved, but failure of main radio
transmitter. We have moved to back-up transmitter. If it
fails, no one on Earth will ever hear from us again.

Day 215 We cross the orbit of Mars. The planet itself is
on the other side of the Sun.

Day 295 We enter the asteroid belt. There are many
large, tumbling boulders here, the shoals and reefs of space.
Most of them are uncharted. Lookouts posted. We hope to
avoid a collision.

Day 475 We safely emerge from the main asteroid belt,
happy to have survived.

Day 570 Jupiter is becoming prominent in the sky. We
can now make out finer detail on it than the largest tele-
scopes on Earth have ever obtained.

Day 615 The colossal weather systems and changing
clouds of Jupiter, spinning in space before us, have us hyp'
notized. The planet is immense. It is more than twice as
massive as all the other planets put together. There are no
mountains, valleys, volcanoes, rivers; no boundaries be-
tween land and air; just a vast ocean of dense gas and
floating clouds—a world without a surface. Everything we
can see on Jupiter is floating in its sky.

Day 630 The weather on Jupiter continues to be spectac-
ular. This ponderous world spins on its axis in less than ten
hours. Its atmospheric motions are driven by the rapid
rotation, by sunlight and by the heat bubbling and welling
up from its interior.

Day 640 The cloud patterns are distinctive and gorgeous.
They remind us a little of Van Gogh’s Starry Night , or
works by William Blake or Edvard Munch. But only a little.
No artist ever painted like this because none of them ever
left our planet. No painter trapped on Earth ever imagined a
world so strange and lovely.

We observe the multicolored belts and bands of Jupiter
close up. The white bands are thought to be high clouds,

Travelers’ Tales - 155

The volcanic plume of the Loki Patera volcano on Io. Ultraviolet light is here transcribed as blue. Surrounding the
plume seen in visible light is a vast cloud, bright in reflected ultraviolet sunlight and composed of very small particles.
The effect is similar to the blue cast of the light reflected by fine smoke particles. The top of the ultraviolet cloud is
more than 200 kilometers above the surface of Io and may eject extremely small particles and atoms directly into
space. The ejected matter would still be in orbit about Jupiter, as Io is, and supply the great tube of atoms which
surrounds Jupiter at Io’s distance. Voyager 1 image. Courtesy NASA.

156 - Cosmos

The irregularly shaped small moon of Ju-
piter, Amalthea, as seen by Voyager L
The bright spots are probably impact
craters. The reddish color may be a stain
from material lost by Io and swept up by
Amalthea, which orbits Jupiter at 181,000
kilometers, interior to the orbit of Io.
Amalthea is about 240 kilometers across,
its long axis pointing toward Jupiter.
Courtesy NASA.

Cutaway model of the interior of Jupiter.
On this scale, the visible clouds are thim
ner than the paint on the exterior of the
model’s surface. At the core is a sphere of
rock and metal a little like the Earth, sun
rounding which is a great ocean of liquid
metallic hydrogen.

probably ammonia crystals; the brownish-colored belts,
deeper and hotter places where the atmosphere is sinking.
The blue places are apparently deep holes in the overlying
clouds through which we see clear sky.

We do not know the reason for the reddish-brown color
of Jupiter. Perhaps it is due to the chemistry of phosphorus
or sulfur. Perhaps it is due to complex brightly colored
organic molecules produced when ultraviolet light from the
Sun breaks down the methane, ammonia, and water in the
Jovian atmosphere and the molecular fragments recombine.

In that case, the colors of Jupiter speak to us of chemical
events that four billion years ago back on Earth led to the
origin of life.

Day 647 The Great Red Spot. A great column of gas
reaching high above the adjacent clouds, so large that it
could hold half a dozen Earths. Perhaps it is red because it is
carrying up to view the complex molecules produced or
concentrated at greater depth. It may be a great storm sys¬
tem a million years old.

Day 650 Encounter. A day of wonders. We successfully
negotiate the treacherous radiation belts of Jupiter with
only one instrument, the photopolarimeter, damaged. We
accomplish the ring plane crossing and suffer no collisions
with the particles and boulders of the newly discovered
rings of Jupiter. And wonderful images of Amalthea, a tiny,
red, oblong world that lives in the heart of the radiation
belt; of multicolored Io; of the linear markings on Europa;
the cobwebby features of Ganymede; the great multi-ringed
basin on Callisto. We round Callisto and pass the orbit of
Jupiter 13, the outermost of the planets known moons. We
are outward bound.

Day 662 Our particle and field detectors indicate that we
have left the Jovian radiation belts. The planet’s gravity has
boosted our speed. We are free of Jupiter at last and sail
again the sea of space.

Day 874 A loss of the ship’s lock on the star Canopus—in
the lore of constellations the rudder of a sailing vessel. It is
our rudder too, essential for the ship’s orientation in the
dark of space, to find our way through this unexplored part
of the cosmic ocean. Canopus lock reacquired. The optical
sensors seem to have mistaken Alpha and Beta Centauri for
Canopus. Next port of call, two years hence: the Saturn
system.

Of all the travelers’ tales returned by Voyager, my favorites
concern the discoveries made on the innermost Galilean satellite,
Io.* Before Voyager, we were aware of something strange about

* Frequently pronounced “eyeoh” by Americans, because this is the pre¬
ferred enunciation in the Oxford English Dictionary. But the British have
no special wisdom here. The word is of Eastern Mediterranean origin
and is pronounced throughout the rest of Europe, correctly, as “ee-oh.”

Travelers’ Tales — 157

Io. We could resolve few features on its surface, but we knew it
was red—extremely red, redder than Mars, perhaps the reddest
object in the solar system. Over a period of years something
seemed to be changing on it, in infrared light and perhaps in its
radar reflection properties. We also know that partially sun
rounding Jupiter in the orbital position of Io was a great dough'
nut'shaped tube of atoms, sulfur and sodium and potassium,
material somehow lost from Io.

When Voyager approached this giant moon we found a
strange multicolored surface unlike any other in the solar system.
Io is near the asteroid belt. It must have been thoroughly puim
meled throughout its history by falling boulders. Impact craters
must have been made. Yet there were none to be seen. Accord'
ingly, there had to be some process on Io that was extremely
efficient in rubbing craters out or filling them in. The process
could not be atmospheric, since Io’s atmosphere has mostly
escaped to space because of its low gravity. It could not be
running water; Io’s surface is far too cold. There were a few
places that resembled the summits of volcanoes. But it was hard
to be sure.

Linda Morabito, a member of the Voyager Navigation Team
responsible for keeping Voyager precisely on its trajectory, was
routinely ordering a computer to enhance an image of the edge of
Io, to bring out the stars behind it. To her astonishment, she saw
a bright plume standing off in the darkness from the satellites
surface and soon determined that the plume was in exactly the
position of one of the suspected volcanoes. Voyager had discov'
ered the first active volcano beyond the Earth. We know now of
nine large volcanoes, spewing out gas and debris, and hum
dreds—perhaps thousands—of extinct volcanoes on Io. The
debris, rolling and flowing down the sides of the volcanic mourn
tains, arching in great jets over the polychrome landscape, is
more than enough to cover the impact craters. We are looking at
a fresh planetary landscape, a surface newly hatched. How Gaik
leo and Huygens would have marveled.

The volcanoes of Io were predicted, before they were discov'
ered, by Stanton Peale and his co'workers, who calculated the
tides that would be raised in the solid interior of Io by the
combined pulls of the nearby moon Europa and the giant planet
Jupiter. They found that the rocks inside Io should have been
melted, not by radioactivity but by tides; that much of the inte'
rior of Io should be liquid. It now seems likely that the volcanoes
of Io are tapping an underground ocean of liquid sulfur, melted
and concentrated near the surface. When solid sulfur is heated a
little past the normal boiling point of water, to about 115°C, it
melts and changes color. The higher the temperature, the deeper
the color. If the molten sulfur is quickly cooled, it retains its
color. The pattern of colors that we see on Io resembles closely
what we would expect if rivers and torrents and sheets of molten

158 - Cosmos

The Antarctic terrain of Io. A great pro¬
fusion of landscapes can be seen (top), in¬
cluding smooth plains, volcanic calderas,
sulfur flows, steep escarpments, and, at
bottom right, surrounded by a bright
halo, rugged and isolated mountains. The
picture is about 1,700 kilometers across.
At bottom is a close-up of a feature seen
in the top picture at left center, a volcanic
flow pattern 225 kilometers across, ema¬
nating from a caldera with an irregular is¬
land inside. Voyager 1 images. Courtesy
NASA.

sulfur were pouring out of the mouths of the volcanoes: black
sulfur, the hottest, near the top of the volcano; red and orange,
including the rivers, nearby; and great plains covered by yellow
sulfur at a greater remove. The surface of Io is changing on a
time scale of months. Maps will have to be issued regularly, like
weather reports on Earth. Those future explorers on Io will have
to keep their wits about them.

The very thin and tenuous atmosphere of Io was found by
Voyager to be composed mainly of sulfur dioxide. But this thin
atmosphere can serve a useful purpose, because it may be just
thick enough to protect the surface from the intense charged
particles in the Jupiter radiation belt in which Io is embedded. At
night the temperature drops so low that the sulfur dioxide should
condense out as a kind of white frost; the charged particles would
then immolate the surface, and it would probably be wise to
spend the nights just slightly underground.

The great volcanic plumes of Io reach so high that they are
close to injecting their atoms directly into the space around Ju¬
piter. The volcanoes are the probable source of the great dough-
nut-shaped ring of atoms that surrounds Jupiter in the position of
Io’s orbit. These atoms, gradually spiraling in toward Jupiter,
should coat the inner moon Amalthea and may be responsible
for its reddish coloration. It is even possible that the material
outgassed from Io contributes, after many collisions and conden¬
sations, to the ring system of Jupiter.

A substantial human presence on Jupiter itself is much more
difficult to imagine—although I suppose great balloon cities per¬
manently floating in its atmosphere are a technological possibility
for the remote future. As seen from the near sides of Io or
Europa, that immense and variable world fills much of the sky,
hanging aloft, never to rise or set, because almost every satellite
in the solar system keeps a constant face to its planet, as the
Moon does to the Earth. Jupiter will be a source of continuing
provocation and excitement for the future human explorers of
the Jovian moons.

As the solar system condensed out of interstellar gas and dust,
Jupiter acquired most of the matter that was not ejected into
interstellar space and did not fall inward to form the Sun. Had
Jupiter been several dozen times more massive, the matter in its
interior would have undergone thermonuclear reactions, and Ju¬
piter would have begun to shine by its own light. The largest
planet is a star that failed. Even so, its interior temperatures are
sufficiently high that it gives off about twice as much energy as it
receives from the Sun. In the infrared part of the spectrum, it
might even be correct to consider Jupiter a star. Had it become a
star in visible light, we would today inhabit a binary or double¬
star system, with two suns in our sky, and the nights would come
more rarely—a commonplace, I believe, in countless solar systems
throughout the Milky Way Galaxy. We would doubtless think

Travelers’ Tales - 159

the circumstances natural and lovely.

Deep below the clouds of Jupiter the weight of the overlying
layers of atmosphere produces pressures much higher than any
found on Earth, pressures so great that electrons are squeezed off
hydrogen atoms, producing a remarkable substance, liquid me^
tallic hydrogen—a physical state that has never been observed in
terrestrial laboratories, because the requisite pressures have never
been achieved on Earth. (There is some hope that metallic hy-
drogen is a superconductor at moderate temperatures. If it could
be manufactured on Earth, it would work a revolution in elec-
tronics.) In the interior of Jupiter, where the pressures are about
three million times the atmospheric pressure at the surface of the
Earth, there is almost nothing but a great dark sloshing ocean of
metallic hydrogen. But at the very core of Jupiter there may be a
lump of rock and iron, an Earthdike world in a pressure vise,
hidden forever at the center of the largest planet.

The electrical currents in the liquid metal interior of Jupiter
may be the source of the planet’s enormous magnetic field, the
largest in the solar system, and of its associated belt of trapped
electrons and protons. These charged particles are ejected from
the Sun in the solar wind and captured and accelerated by Ju-
piter’s magnetic field. Vast numbers of them are trapped far
above the clouds and are condemned to bounce from pole to
pole until by chance they encounter some high-altitude atmo¬
spheric molecule and are removed from the radiation belt. Io
moves in an orbit so close to Jupiter that it plows through the
midst of this intense radiation, creating cascades of charged part¬
icles, which in turn generate violent bursts of radio energy. (They
may also influence eruptive processes on the surface of Io.) It is
possible to predict radio bursts from Jupiter with better reliability
than weather forecasts on Earth, by computing the position of Io.

That Jupiter is a source of radio emission was discovered
accidentally in the 1950’s, the early days of radio astronomy.
Two young Americans, Bernard Burke and Kenneth Franklin,
were examining the sky with a newly constructed and for that
time very sensitive radio telescope. They were searching the
cosmic radio background—that is, radio sources far beyond our
solar system. To their surprise, they found an intense and pre¬
viously unreported source that seemed to correspond to no
prominent star, nebula or galaxy. What is more, it gradually
moved, with respect to the distant stars, much faster than any
remote object could.* After finding no likely explanation of all
this in their charts of the distant Cosmos, they one day stepped
outside the observatory and looked up at the sky with the naked
eye to see if anything interesting happened to be there. Bemu-
sedly they noted an exceptionally bright object in the right place,
which they soon identified as the planet Jupiter. This accidental

Ganymede, the largest moon of Jupiter.
The smallest features visible in this
Voyager 1 image are about three kilome¬
ters across. Numerous impact craters are
evident, many with bright rays. The
gently swerving and intersecting bands are
composed of parallel grooves of uncertain
origin. Courtesy NASA.

A Voyager 2 image of Ganymede on July
8, 1979. The parallel bright stripes ex¬
tending across the dark plain at right
might possibly have been caused, like rip¬
ples in a pond, by an ancient impact in this
icy surface. There is no crater at the pre¬
sumptive impact site, perhaps because of
slow viscous deformation over the aeons.
Courtesy NASA.

Because the speed of light is finite (see Chapter 8).

160 — Cosmos

Callisto, photographed by Voyager 1 on
March 6,1979 at a range of 350,000 kilo¬
meters. Callisto is about the size of the
planet Mercury. The numerous impact
craters on Callisto suggest that it has the
oldest surface of all the Galilean moons of
Jupiter, possibly dating back to the termi¬
nal accretion era some 4 to 4.5 billion
years ago. Callisto has about half the al¬
bedo of Ganymede, suggesting that its icy
crust is “dirty” (it is still twice as bright as
our Moon). The “bull’s-eye” at right was
formed by a large impact. The bright spot
at its center is about 600 kilometers across.
Courtesy NASA.

Twelve drawings of Titan by Audouin
Dollfus at the Pic du Midi Observatory in
the French Pyrenees. As seen from Earth,
the image of Titan is so small that even its
disk is barely discernible. The observa¬
tions suggest variable white clouds, per¬
haps methane cirrus, over a darker
layer—probably the clouds of organic
matter suggested on other evidence. The
need for close-up space vehicle photo¬
graphs, such as those programmed for
Voyager 1 in November 1980, is obvious.
Courtesy Audouin Dollfus.

discovery is, incidentally, entirely typical of the history of sci¬
ence.

Every evening before Voyager l’s encounter with Jupiter, I
could see that giant planet twinkling in the sky, a sight our
ancestors have enjoyed and wondered at for a million years. And
on the evening of Encounter, on my way to study the Voyager
data arriving at JPL, I thought that Jupiter would never be the
same, never again just a point of light in the night sky, but would
forever after be a place to be explored and known. Jupiter and its
moons are a kind of miniature solar system of diverse and exqui¬
site worlds with much to teach us.

In composition and in many other respects Saturn is similar to
Jupiter, although smaller. Rotating once every ten hours, it ex¬
hibits colorful equatorial banding, which is, however, not so
prominent as Jupiter’s. It has a weaker magnetic field and radia¬
tion belt than Jupiter and a more spectacular set of circumplane-
tary rings. And it also is surrounded by a dozen or more satellites.

The most interesting of the moons of Saturn seems to be
Titan, the largest moon in the solar system and the only one with
a substantial atmosphere. Prior to the encounter of Voyager 1
with Titan in November 1980, our information about Titan was
scanty and tantalizing. The only gas known unambiguously to be
present was methane, CH 4 , discovered by G. P. Kuiper. Ultravi¬
olet light from the sun converts methane to more complex hy¬
drocarbon molecules and hydrogen gas. The hydrocarbons
should remain on Titan, covering the surface with a brownish
tarry organic sludge, something like that produced in experiments
on the origin of life on Earth. The lightweight hydrogen gas
should, because of Titan’s low gravity, rapidly escape to space by
a violent process known as “blowoff,” which should carry the
methane and other atmospheric constituents with it. But Titan

Travelers’ Tales — 161

has an atmospheric pressure at least as great as that of the planet
Mars. Blowoff does not seem to be happening. Perhaps there is
some major and as yet undiscovered atmospheric constituent-
nitrogen, for example—which keeps the average molecular
weight of the atmosphere high and prevents blowoff. Or perhaps
blowoff is happening, but the gases lost to space are being re¬
plenished by others released from the satellite’s interior. The
bulk density of Titan is so low that there must be a vast supply of
water and other ices, probably including methane, which are at
unknown rates being released to the surface by internal heating.

When we examine Titan through the telescope we see a
barely perceptible reddish disc. Some observers have reported
variable white clouds above that disc—most likely, clouds of

False color image of Callisto. Every bright
spot is an impact crater. Voyager 1 pic¬
ture. Courtesy NASA.

162 - Cosmos

The rings of Jupiter, discovered by
Voyager 1 and here photographed by
Voyager 2. Jupiter is out of frame at lower
right. Composed of small particles, it
seems to extend all the way down to the
Jovian cloudtops, suggesting a steady state
between production, perhaps from mate-
rial escaping from Io, and destruction by
entry into the clouds of Jupiter. It is much
smaller and dimmer than the rings of Sat-
urn, accounting for the fact that it was
never reliably discovered from Earth be¬
fore Voyager. Courtesy NASA.

methane crystals. But what is responsible for the reddish color¬
ation? Most students of Titan agree that complex organic mole¬
cules are the most likely explanation. The surface temperature
and atmospheric thickness are still under debate. There have
been some hints of an enhanced surface temperature due to an
atmospheric greenhouse effect. With abundant organic mole¬
cules on its surface and in its atmosphere, Titan is a remarkable
and unique denizen of the solar system. The history of our past
voyages of discovery suggests that Voyager and other spacecraft
reconnaissance missions will revolutionize our knowledge of this
place.

Through a break in the clouds of Titan, you might glimpse
Saturn and its rings, their pale yellow color diffused by the inter¬
vening atmosphere. Because the Saturn system is ten times far¬
ther from the Sun than is the Earth, the sunshine on Titan is only
1 percent as intense as we are accustomed to, and the tempera¬
tures should be far below the freezing point of water even with a
sizable atmospheric greenhouse effect. But with abundant or¬
ganic matter, sunlight and perhaps volcanic hot spots, the possi¬
bility of life on Titan* cannot be readily dismissed. In that very
different environment, it would, of course, have to be very dif¬
ferent from life on Earth. There is no strong evidence either for
or against life on Titan. It is merely possible. We are unlikely to
determine the answer to this question without landing instru¬
mented space vehicles on the Titanian surface.

To examine the individual particles composing the rings of
Saturn, we must approach them closely, for the particles are
small—snowballs and ice chips and tiny tumbling bonsai glaciers,
a meter or so across. We know they are composed of water ice,
because the spectral properties of sunlight reflected off the rings
match those of ice in the laboratory measurements. To approach
the particles in a space vehicle, we must slow down, so that we
move along with them as they circle Saturn at some 45,000 miles
per hour; that is, we must be in orbit around Saturn ourselves,
moving at the same speed as the particles. Only then will we be
able to see them individually and not as smears or streaks.

* The view of Huygens, who discovered Titan in 1655, was: “Now can
any one look upon, and compare these Systems [of Jupiter and Saturn]
together, without being amazed at the vast Magnitude and noble At¬
tendants of these two Planets, in respect of this little pitiful Earth of ours?
Or can they force themselves to think, that the wise Creator has dis¬
posed of all his Animals and Plants here, has furnished and adorn’d this
Spot only, and has left all those Worlds bare and destitute of Inhabi¬
tants, who might adore and worship Him; or that all those prodigious
Bodies were made only to twinkle to, and be studied by some few
perhaps of us poor Fellows?” Since Saturn moves around the Sun once
every thirty years, the length of the seasons on Saturn and its moons is
much longer than on Earth. Of the presumed inhabitants of the moons
of Saturn, Huygens therefore wrote: “It is impossible but that their way
of living must be very different from ours, having such tedious Winters.”

Travelers’ Tales - 163

Pioneer 11 image of Saturn and its rings
obtained from a range of 2.5 million kilo¬
meters on August 29,1979, after a voyage
of more than five years. Courtesy NASA.

Computer graphics of Saturn in three dif¬
ferent orientations to our line of sight,
ranging from the rings almost edge-on (top)
to the rings almost face-on (bottom), a view
never obtained from Earth. The principal
break in the rings is the Cassini Division;
stars can be seen through it, but it is not
devoid of ring particles. For this reason, a
plan to thread Pioneer 11 through the
Cassini Division was abandoned. The
precise number, position and opacity of
other breaks in the rings is still under de¬
termination. Courtesy J. Blinn and C.
Kohlhase, Jet Propulsion Laboratory.

164 - Cosmos

The maps of new worlds. At top, U.S. Geological Survey cartography of Io, based on Voyager 1 and 2 data. Features
named Ra, Loki, Maui and Prometheus, shown in previous Voyager images in this chapter, are indicated. At bottom,
the first map to show the Americas, as compiled in the year 1500 by Juan de la Cosa, an officer who served under
Columbus. Courtesy American Geographical Society Collection of the University of Wisconsin—Milwaukee.

Travelers’ Tales — 165

Why is there not a single large satellite instead of a ring system
around Saturn? The closer a ring particle is to Saturn, the faster
its orbital speed (the faster it is “falling” around the planet—
Kepler’s third law); the inner particles are streaming past the outer
ones (the “passing lane” as we see it is always to the left). Ah
though the whole assemblage is tearing around the planet itself at
some 20 kilometers per second, the relative speed of two adjacent
particles is very low, only some few centimeters per minute.
Because of this relative motion, the particles can never stick
together by their mutual gravity. As soon as they try, their
slightly different orbital speeds pull them apart. If the rings were
not so close to Saturn, this effect would not be so strong, and the
particles could accrete, making small snowballs and eventually
growing into satellites. So it is probably no coincidence that
outside the rings of Saturn there is a system of satellites varying in
size from a few hundred kilometers across to Titan, a giant moon
nearly as large as the planet Mars. The matter in all the satellites
and the planets themselves may have been originally distributed
in the form of rings, which condensed and accumulated to form
the present moons and planets.

For Saturn as for Jupiter, the magnetic field captures and ac-
celerates the charged particles of the solar wind. When a charged
particle bounces from one magnetic pole to the other, it must
cross the equatorial plane of Saturn. If there is a ring particle in
the way, the proton or electron is absorbed by this small snow'
ball. As a result, for both planets, the rings clear out the radiation
belts, which exist only interior and exterior to the particle rings.
A close moon of Jupiter or Saturn will likewise gobble up radia-
tion belt particles, and in fact one of the new moons of Saturn
was discovered in just this way: Pioneer 11 found an unexpected
gap in the radiation belts, caused by the sweeping up of charged
particles by a previously unknown moon.

The solar wind trickles into the outer solar system far beyond
the orbit of Saturn. When Voyager reaches Uranus and the
orbits of Neptune and Pluto, if the instruments are still function^
ing, they will almost certainly sense its presence, the wind be-
tween the worlds, the top of the Sun’s atmosphere blown
outward toward the realm of the stars. Some two or three times
farther from the Sun than Pluto is, the pressure of the interstellar
protons and electrons becomes greater than the minuscule pres-
sure there exerted by the solar wind. That place, called the
heliopause, is one definition of the outer boundary of the Empire
of the Sun. But the Voyager spacecraft will plunge on, penetrat¬
ing the heliopause sometime in the middle of the twenty-first
century, skimming through the ocean of space, never to enter
another solar system, destined to wander through eternity far
from the stellar islands and to complete its first circumnavigation
of the massive center of the Milky Way a few hundred million
years from now. We have embarked on epic voyages.

The Backbone of Night. A painting by Jon Lomberg depicting a metaphor about the nature of the Milky Way told by
the !Kung people of the Republic of Botswana.

ChpterVn

THE IACKIONE OF

NIGHT

They came to a round hole in the sky . * . glowing like fire. This, the Raven
said, was a star.

—Eskimo creation myth

I would rather understand one cause than be King of Persia.

—Democritus of Abdera

But Aristarchus of Samos brought out a book consisting of some hypothec
ses, in which the premises lead to the result that the universe is many times
greater than that now so called. His hypotheses are that the fixed stars and
the Sun remain unmoved, that the Earth revolves about the Sun in the
circumference of a circle, the Sun lying in the middle of the orbit, and that
the sphere of the fixed stars, situated about the same center as the Sun, is so
great that the circle in which he supposes the Earth to revolve bears such a
proportion to the distance of the fixed stars as the center of the sphere bears
to its surface.

—Archimedes, The Sand Reckoner

If a faithful account was rendered of Man’s ideas upon Divinity, he would
be obliged to acknowledge, that for the most part the word “gods” has been
used to express the concealed, remote, unknown causes of the effects he
witnessed; that he applies this term when the spring of the natural, the
source of known causes, ceases to be visible: as soon as he loses the thread of
these causes, or as soon as his mind can no longer follow the chain, he
solves the difficulty, terminates his research, by ascribing it to his gods . . .
When, therefore, he ascribes to his gods the production of some phenome¬
non . . . does he, in fact, do any thing more than substitute for the darkness
of his own mind, a sound to which he has been accustomed to listen with
reverential awe?

—Paul Heinrich Dietrich, Baron von Holbach, Systeme de la Nature ,

London, 1770

168 - Cosmos

WHEN I WAS LITTLE, I lived in the Bensonhurst section of
Brooklyn in the City of New York. I knew my immediate neigh-
borhood intimately, every apartment building, pigeon coop,
backyard, front stoop, empty lot, elm tree, ornamental railing,
coal chute and wall for playing Chinese handball, among which
the brick exterior of a theater called the Loew’s Stillwell was of
superior quality. 1 knew where many people lived: Bruno and
Dino, Ronald and Harvey, Sandy, Bernie, Danny, Jackie and
Myra. But more than a few blocks away, north of the raucous
automobile traffic and elevated railway on 86th Street, was a
strange unknown territory, offdimits to my wanderings. It could
have been Mars for all I knew.

Even with an early bedtime, in winter you could sometimes
see the stars. I would look at them, twinkling and remote, and
wonder what they were. I would ask older children and adults,
who would only reply, “They’re lights in the sky, kid.” I could see
they were lights in the sky. But what were they? Just small how
ering lamps? Whatever for? I felt a kind of sorrow for them: a
commonplace whose strangeness remained somehow hidden
from my incurious fellows. There had to be some deeper answer.

As soon as I was old enough, my parents gave me my first
library card. I think the library was on 85th Street, an alien land.
Immediately, I asked the librarian for something on stars. She
returned with a picture book displaying portraits of men and
women with names like Clark Gable and Jean Harlow. I com¬
plained, and for some reason then obscure to me, she smiled and
found another book—the right kind of book. I opened it breath¬
lessly and read until I found it. The book said something aston¬
ishing, a very big thought. It said that the stars were suns, only
very far away. The Sun was a star, but close up.

Imagine that you took the Sun and moved it so far away that it
was just a tiny twinkling point of light. How far away would you
have to move it? I was innocent of the notion of angular size. I
was ignorant of the inverse square law for light propagation. I
had not a ghost of a chance of calculating the distance to the
stars. But I could tell that if the stars were suns, they had to be
very far away—farther away than 85th Street, farther away than
Manhattan, farther away, probably, than New Jersey. The
Cosmos was much bigger than I had guessed.

Later I read another astonishing fact. The Earth, which in¬
cludes Brooklyn, is a planet, and it goes around the Sun. There
are other planets. They also go around the Sun; some are closer
to it and some are farther away. But the planets do not shine by
their own light, as the Sun does. They merely reflect light from
the Sun. If you were a great distance away, you would not see the
Earth and the other planets at all; they would be only faint
luminous points, lost in the glare of the Sun. Well, then, I
thought, it stood to reason that the other stars must have planets
too, ones we have not yet detected, and some of those other

The Backbone of Night - 169

planets should have life (why not?), a kind of life probably dif¬
ferent from life as we know it, life in Brooklyn. So I decided I
would be an astronomer, learn about the stars and planets and, if
I could, go and visit them.

It has been my immense good fortune to have parents and
some teachers who encouraged this odd ambition and to live in
this time, the first moment in human history when we are, in fact,
visiting other worlds and engaging in a deep reconnaissance of
the Cosmos. If I had been born in a much earlier age, no matter
how great my dedication, I would not have understood what the
stars and planets are. I would not have known that there were
other suns and other worlds. This is one of the great secrets,
wrested from Nature through a million years of patient observa¬
tion and courageous thinking by our ancestors.

What are the stars? Such questions are as natural as an infant’s
smile. We have always asked them. What is different about our
time is that at last we know some of the answers. Books and
libraries provide a ready means for finding out what those an¬
swers are. In biology there is a principle of powerful if imperfect
applicability called recapitulation: in our individual embryonic
development we retrace the evolutionary history of the species.
There is, I think, a kind of recapitulation that occurs in our
individual intellectual developments as well. We unconsciously
retrace the thoughts of our remote ancestors. Imagine a time
before science, a time before libraries. Imagine a time hundreds
of thousands of years ago. We were then just about as smart, just
as curious, just as involved in things social and sexual. But the
experiments had not yet been done, the inventions had not yet
been made. It was the childhood of genus Homo. Imagine the
time when fire was first discovered. What were human lives like
then? What did our ancestors believe the stars were? Sometimes,
in my fantasies, I imagine there was someone who thought like
this:

We eat berries and roots. Nuts and leaves. And dead animals.
Some animals <we find. Some we kill. We know which foods are

good and which are dangerous. If we taste some foods we are struck
down, in punishment for eating them. We did not mean to do

something bad. But foxglove or hemlock can kill you. We love our

children and our friends. We warn them of such foods.

When we hunt animals, then also can we be killed. We can be
gored. Or trampled. Or eaten. What animals do means life and
death for us: how they behave, what tracks they leave, their times for
mating and giving birth, their times for wandering. We must know
these things. We tell our children. They will tell their children.

We depend on animals. We follow them-especially in winter
when there are few plants to eat. We are wandering hunters and

gatherers. We call ourselves the hunterfolk.

Most of us fall asleep under the sky or under a tree or in its
branches. We use animal skins for clothing: to keep us warm, to

170 - Cosmos

cover our nakedness and sometimes as a hammock. When we wear
the animal skins we feel the animal’s power. We leap with the
gazelle. We hunt with the bear. There is a bond between us and the
animals. We hunt and eat the animals. They hunt and eat us. We
are part of one another.

We make tools and stay alive. Some of us are experts at splitting;
flaking, sharpening and polishing, as well as finding, rocks. Some
rocks we tie with animal sinew to a wooden handle and make an ax.
With the ax we strike plants and animals. Other rocks are tied to
long sticks. If we are quiet and watchful, we can sometimes come
close to an animal and stick it with the spear.

Meat spoils. Sometimes we are hungry and try not to notice.

Sometimes we mix herbs with the bad meat to hide the taste. We
fold foods that will not spoil into pieces of animal skin. Or big
leaves. Or the shell of a large nut. It is wise to put food aside and
carry it. If we eat this food too early, some of us will starve later. So
we must help one another. For this and many other reasons we have
rides. Everyone must obey the rules. We have always had rules.

Rules are sacred.

One day there was a storm, with much lightning and thunder and
rain. The little ones are afraid of storms. And sometimes so am I.

The secret of the storm is hidden. The thunder is deep and loud; the
lightning is brief and bright. Maybe someone very powerful is very
angry. It must be someone in the sky, I think.

After the storm there was a flickering and crackling in the forest
nearby. We went to see. There was a bright, hot, leaping thing,
yellow and red. We had never seen such a thing before. We now call
it “flame.” It has a special smell. In a way it is alive. It eats food. It
eats plants and tree limbs and even whole trees, if you let it. It is
strong. But it is not very smart. If all the food is gone, it dies. It will
not walk a spear’s throw from one tree to another if there is no food
along the way. It cannot walk without eating. But where there is

much food, it grows and makes many flame children.

One of us had a brave and fearful thought: to capture the flame,
feed it a little, and make it our friend. We found some long branches
of hard wood. The flame was eating them, but slowly. We could
pick them up by the end that had no flame. If you run fast with a
small flame, it dies. Their children are weak. We did not run. We
walked, shouting good wishes. “Do not die,” we said to the flame.
The other hunterfolk looked with wide eyes.

Ever after, we have carried it with us. We have a flame mother
to feed the flame slowly so it does not die of hunger.* Flame is a

* This sense of fire as a living thing, to be protected and cared for, should
not be dismissed as a “primitive” notion. It is to be found near the root of
many modern civilizations. Every home in ancient Greece and Rome
and among the Brahmans of ancient India had a hearth and a set of
prescribed rules for caring for the flame. At night the coals were covered
with ashes for insulation; in the morning twigs were added to revive the
flame. The death of the flame in the hearth was considered synonymous

The Backbone of Night -171

wonder, and useful too; surely a gift from powerful beings. Are they
the same as the angry beings in the storm?

The flame keeps us warm on cold nights. It gives us light. It makes
holes in the darkness when the Moon is new. We can fix spears at
night for tomorrow’s hunt. And if we are not tired, even in the
darkness we can see each other and talk. Also-a good thingl-fire

keeps animals away. We can be hurt at night. Sometimes we have
been eaten, even by small animals, hyenas and wolves. Now it is
different. Now the flame keeps the animals back. We see them
baying softly in the dark, prowling, their eyes glowing in the light of
the flame. They are frightened of the flame. But we are not fright-

ened. The flame is ours. We take care of the flame. The flame takes

care of us.

The sky is important. It covers us. It speaks to us. Before the time
we found the flame, we would lie back in the dark and look up at all
the points of light. Some points would come together to make a
picture in the sky. One of us could see the pictures better than the
rest. She taught us the star pictures and what names to call them.
We would sit around late at night and make up stories about the
pictures in the sky: lions, dogs, bears, hunterfolk. Other, stranger

things. Could they be the pictures of the powerful beings in the sky,
the ones who make the storms when angry?

Mostly, the sky does not change. The same star pictures are there
year after year. The Moon grows from nothing to a thin sliver to a

round ball, and then back again to nothing. When the Moon
changes, the women bleed. Some tribes have rules against sex at

certain times in the growing and shrinking of the Moon. Some tribes

scratch the days of the Moon or the days that the women bleed on

antler bones. Then they can plan ahead and obey their rules. Rules
are sacred.

The stars are very far away. When we climb a hill or a tree they
are no closer. And clouds come between us and the stars: the stars
must be behind the clouds. The Moon, as it slowly moves, passes in
front of stars. Later you can see that the stars are not harmed. The
Moon does not eat stars. The stars must be behind the Moon. They
flicker. A strange, cold, white, faraway light. Many of them. All
over the sky. But only at night. I wonder what they are.

After we found the flame, 1 was sitting near the campfire won¬
dering about the stars. Slowly a thought came: The stars are flame, I
thought. Then I had another thought: The stars are campfires that
other hunterfolk light at night. The stars give a smaller light than
campfires. So the stars must be campfires very far away. “But,” they
ask me, “how can there be campfires in the sky? Why do the camp¬
fires and the hunter people around those flames not fall down at our

with the death of the family. In all three cultures, the hearth ritual was
connected with the worship of ancestors. This is the origin of the eternal
flame, a symbol still widely employed in religious, memorial, political and
athletic ceremonials throughout the world.

172 - Cosmos

feet ? Why don’t strange tribes drop from the sky?”

Those are good questions. They trouble me. Sometimes I think the

sky is half of a big eggshell or a big nutshell. I think the people
around those faraway campfires look down at us-except for them it
seems up-and say that we are in their sky, and wonder why we do
not fall up to them, if you see what I mean. But hunterfolk say,
“Down is down and up is up. ” That is a good answer, too.

There is another thought that one of us had. His thought is that
night is a great black animal skin, thrown up over the sky. There are
holes in the skin. We look through the holes. And we see flame. His
thought is not just that there is flame in a few places where we see
stars. He thinks there is flame everywhere. He thinks flame covers
the whole sky. But the skin hides the flame. Except where there are

holes.

Some stars wander. Like the animals we hunt. Like us. If you

watch with care over many months, you find they move. There are

only five of them, like the fingers on a hand. They wander slowly
among the stars. If the campfire thought is true, those stars must be
tribes of wandering hunterfolk, carrying big fires. But I don’t see how
wandering stars can be holes in a skin. When you make a hole, there
it is. A hole is a hole. Holes do not wander. Also, I don’t want to be
surrounded by a sky of flame. If the skin fell, the night sky would be
bright-too bright-like seeing flame everywhere. I think a sky of
flame would eat us all. Maybe there are two kinds of powerful
beings in the sky. Bad ones, who wish the flame to eat us. And good
ones who put up the skin to keep the flame away. We must find
some way to thank the good ones.

I don’t know if the stars are campfires in the sky. Or holes in a
skin through which the flame of power looks down on us. Sometimes
I think one way. Sometimes I think a different way. Once I thought
there are no campfires and no holes but something else, too hard for
me to understand.

Rest your neck on a log. Your head goes back. Then you can see
only the sky. No hills, no trees, no hunterfolk, no campfire. Just sky.
Sometimes I feel I may fall up into the sky. If the stars are campfires,

I would like to visit those other hunterfolk-the ones who wander.
Then I feel good about falling up. But if the stars are holes in a skin,

I become afraid. I don’t want to fall up through a hole and into the
flame of power.

1 wish I knew which was true. I don’t like not knowing.

I do not imagine that many members of a hunter/gatherer
group had thoughts like these about the stars. Perhaps, over the
ages, a few did, but never all these thoughts in the same person.
Yet, sophisticated ideas are common in such communities. For
example, the !Kung* Bushmen of the Kalahari Desert in Bots^
wana have an explanation for the Milky Way, which at their

* The exclamation point is a click, made by touching the tongue against
the inside of the incisors, and simultaneously pronouncing the K.

The Backbone of Night - 173

A reconstruction of the Temple of Hera
on the Greek island of Samos. The largest
temple of its time, it was 120 meters long.
Construction began in 530 B.C. and com
tinued until the third century B.C. From
Der Heratempel von Samos by Oscar
Reuther (1957).

latitude is often overhead. They call it “the backbone of night,”
as if the sky were some great beast inside which we live. Their
explanation makes the Milky Way useful as well as understand¬
able. The !Kung believe the Milky Way holds up the night; that
if it were not for the Milky Way, fragments of darkness would
come crashing down at our feet. It is an elegant idea.

Metaphors like those about celestial campfires or galactic
backbones were eventually replaced in most human cultures by
another idea: The powerful beings in the sky were promoted to
gods. They were given names and relatives, and special respon¬
sibilities for the cosmic services they were expected to perform.
There was a god or goddess for every human concern. Gods ran
Nature. Nothing could happen without their direct intervention.
If they were happy, there was plenty of food, and humans were
happy. But if something displeased the gods—and sometimes it
took very little—the consequences were awesome: droughts,
storms, wars, earthquakes, volcanoes, epidemics. The gods had
to be propitiated, and a vast industry of priests and oracles arose
to make the gods less angry. But because the gods were capri¬
cious, you could not be sure what they would do. Nature was a
mystery. It was hard to understand the world.

Little remains of the Heraion on the Aegean isle of Samos, one
of the wonders of the ancient world, a great temple dedicated to
Hera, who began her career as goddess of the sky. She was the
patron deity of Samos, playing the same role there as Athena did
in Athens. Much later she married Zeus, the chief of the Olym¬
pian gods. They honeymooned on Samos, the old stories tell us.
The Greek religion explained that diffuse band of light in the
night sky as the milk of Hera, squirted from her breast across the
heavens, a legend that is the origin of the phrase Westerners still
use—the Milky Way. Perhaps it originally represented the im¬
portant insight that the sky nurtures the Earth; if so, that meaning
seems to have been forgotten millennia ago.

We are, almost all of us, descended from people who re¬
sponded to the dangers of existence by inventing stories about
unpredictable or disgruntled deities. For a long time the human

The only surviving column from the
Temple of Hera on Samos.

BILL RAY

174 - Cosmos

Black Sea

ITALY

ASIA MINOR

Croton

(Pythagoras, late)* Cl hcb<

SICILY

Agrigentun

(Empedocles)

^7

CYPRUS JC

•) Syracuse
( Archimedes)

Mediterranean Sea

Alexandria^"

AFRICA

EGYPT

A map of the eastern Mediterranean in instinct to understand was thwarted by facile religious explana-
classical times, showing the cities associ- nons> as in ancient Greece in the time of Homer, where there

ated with the great ancient scientists. 1 . t 1

were gods or the sky and the Earth, the thunderstorm, the oceans

and the underworld, fire and time and love and war; where every

tree and meadow had its dryad and maenad.

For thousands of years humans were oppressed—as some of us
still are—by the notion that the universe is a marionette whose
strings are pulled by a god or gods, unseen and inscrutable. Then,
2,500 years ago, there was a glorious awakening in Ionia: on
Samos and the other nearby Greek colonies that grew up among
the islands and inlets of the busy eastern Aegean Sea.* Suddenly
there were people who believed that everything was made of
atoms; that human beings and other animals had sprung from
simpler forms; that diseases were not caused by demons or the
gods; that the Earth was only a planet going around the Sun. And

that the stars were very far away.

* As an aid to confusion, Ionia is not in the Ionian Sea; it was named by
colonists from the coast of the Ionian Sea.

The Backbone of Night — 175

This revolution made Cosmos out of Chaos. The early Greeks
had believed that the first being was Chaos, corresponding to the
phrase in Genesis in the same context, “without form.” Chaos
created and then mated with a goddess called Night, and their
offspring eventually produced all the gods and men. A universe
created from Chaos was in perfect keeping with the Greek belief
in an unpredictable Nature run by capricious gods. But in the
sixth century B.C., in Ionia, a new concept developed, one of the
great ideas of the human species. The universe is knowable, the
ancient Ionians argued, because it exhibits an internal order:
there are regularities in Nature that permit its secrets to be un-
covered. Nature is not entirely unpredictable; there are rules
even she must obey. This ordered and admirable character of the
universe was called Cosmos.

But why Ionia, why in these unassuming and pastoral land¬
scapes, these remote islands and inlets of the Eastern Mediterra¬
nean? Why not in the great cities of India or Egypt, Babylonia,
China or Mesoamerica? China had an astronomical tradition
millennia old; it invented paper and printing, rockets, clocks, silk,
porcelain, and ocean-going navies. Some historians argue it was
nevertheless too traditionalist a society, too unwilling to adopt
innovations. Why not India, an extremely rich, mathematically
gifted culture? Because, some historians maintain, of a rigid fasci¬
nation with the idea of an infinitely old universe condemned to
an endless cycle of deaths and rebirths, of souls and universes, in
which nothing fundamentally new could ever happen. Why not
Mayan and Aztec societies, which were accomplished in astron¬
omy and captivated, as the Indians were, by large numbers?
Because, some historians declare, they lacked the aptitude or
impetus for mechanical invention. The Mayans and the Aztecs
did not even—except for children’s toys—invent the wheel.

The Ionians had several advantages. Ionia is an island realm.
Isolation, even if incomplete, breeds diversity. With many dif¬
ferent islands, there was a variety of political systems. No single
concentration of power could enforce social and intellectual con¬
formity in all the islands. Free inquiry became possible. The
promotion of superstition was not considered a political neces¬
sity. Unlike many other cultures, the Ionians were at the
crossroads of civilizations, not at one of the centers. In Ionia, the
Phoenician alphabet was first adapted to Greek usage and wide¬
spread literacy became possible. Writing was no longer a mo¬
nopoly of the priests and scribes. The thoughts of many were
available for consideration and debate. Political power was in the
hands of the merchants, who actively promoted the technology
on which their prosperity depended. It was in the Eastern Medi¬
terranean that African, Asian, and European civilizations, in¬
cluding the great cultures of Egypt and Mesopotamia, met and
cross-fertilized in a vigorous and heady confrontation of preju¬
dices, languages, ideas and gods. What do you do when you are

176 — Cosmos

A doorknob in the shape of a hand in the
square of the town of Mili, on contempo¬
rary Samos. Respect for manual labor was
one of the keys to the Ionian Awakening,
centered around Samos, in the sixth
through fourth centuries B.C. Photo by
Ann Druyan.

faced with several different gods each claiming the same terri¬
tory? The Babylonian Marduk and the Greek Zeus was each
considered master of the sky and king of the gods. You might
decide that Marduk and Zeus were really the same. You might
also decide, since they had quite different attributes, that one of
them was merely invented by the priests. But if one, why not
both?

And so it was that the great idea arose, the realization that
there might be a way to know the world without the god hy¬
pothesis; that there might be principles, forces, laws of nature,
through which the world could be understood without attribut¬
ing the fall of every sparrow to the direct intervention of Zeus.

China and India and Mesoamerica would, I think, have tum¬
bled to science too, if only they had been given a little more time.
Cultures do not develop with identical rhythms or evolve in
lockstep. They arise at different times and progress at different
rates. The scientific world view works so well, explains so much
and resonates so harmoniously with the most advanced parts of
our brains that in time, I think, virtually every culture on the
Earth, left to its own devices, would have discovered science.
Some culture had to be first. As it turned out, Ionia was the place
where science was born.

Between 600 and 400 B.C., this great revolution in human
thought began. The key to the revolution was the hand. Some of
the brilliant Ionian thinkers were the sons of sailors and farmers
and weavers. They were accustomed to poking and fixing, unlike
the priests and scribes of other nations, who, raised in luxury,
were reluctant to dirty their hands. They rejected superstition,
and they worked wonders. In many cases we have only fragmen¬
tary or secondhand accounts of what happened. The metaphors
used then may be obscure to us now. There was almost certainly
a conscious effort a few centuries later to suppress the new in¬
sights. The leading figures in this revolution were men with
Greek names, largely unfamiliar to us today, but the truest pio¬
neers in the development of our civilization and our humanity.

The first Ionian scientist was Thales of Miletus, a city in Asia
across a narrow channel of water from the island of Samos. He
had traveled in Egypt and was conversant with the knowledge of
Babylon. It is said that he predicted a solar eclipse. He learned
how to measure the height of a pyramid from the length of its
shadow and the angle of the Sun above the horizon, a method
employed today to determine the heights of the mountains of the
Moon. He was the first to prove geometric theorems of the sort
codified by Euclid three centuries later—for example, the propo¬
sition that the angles at the base of an isosceles triangle are equal.
There is a clear continuity of intellectual effort from Thales to
Euclid to Isaac Newton’s purchase of the Elements of Geometry at
Stourbridge Fair in 1663 (p. 68), the event that precipitated
modern science and technology.

The Backbone of Night - 177

Thales attempted to understand the world without invoking
the intervention of the gods. Like the Babylonians, he believed
the world to have once been water. To explain the dry land, the
Babylonians added that Marduk had placed a mat on the face of
the waters and piled dirt upon it.* Thales held a similar view,
but, as Benjamin Farrington said, “left Marduk out.” Yes, every-
thing was once water, but the Earth formed out of the oceans by
a natural process—similar, he thought, to the silting he had ot>
served at the delta of the Nile. Indeed, he thought that water was
a common principle underlying all of matter, just as today we
might say the same of electrons, protons and neutrons, or of
quarks. Whether Thales’ conclusion was correct is not as impor-
tant as his approach: The world was not made by the gods, but
instead was the work of material forces interacting in Nature.
Thales brought back from Babylon and Egypt the seeds of the
new sciences of astronomy and geometry, sciences that would
sprout and grow in the fertile soil of Ionia.

Very little is known about the personal life of Thales, but one
revealing anecdote is told by Aristotle in his Politics :

[Thales] was reproached for his poverty, which was sup¬
posed to show that philosophy is of no use. According to
the story, he knew by his skill [in interpreting the heavens]
while it was yet winter that there would be a great harvest
of olives in the coming year; so, having a little money, he
gave deposits for the use of all the olive-presses in Chios
and Miletus, which he hired at a low price because no one
bid against him. When the harvest time came, and many
were wanted all at once, he let them out at any rate which
he pleased and made a quantity of money. Thus he showed
the world philosophers can easily be rich if they like, but
that their ambition is of another sort.

He was also famous as a political sage, successfully urging the
Milesians to resist assimilation by Croesus, King of Lydia, and
unsuccessfully urging a federation of all the island states of Ionia
to oppose the Lydians.

Anaximander of Miletus was a friend and colleague of Thales,
one of the first people we know of to do an experiment. By
examining the moving shadow cast by a vertical stick he deter¬
mined accurately the length of the year and the seasons. For ages

* There is some evidence that the antecedent, early Sumerian creation
myths were largely naturalistic explanations, later codified around 1000
B.C. in the Enuma elish (“When on high,” the first words of the poem);
but by then the gods had replaced Nature, and the myth offers a theog-
ony, not a cosmogony. The Enuma elish is reminiscent of the Japanese
and Ainu myths in which an originally muddy cosmos is beaten by the
wings of a bird, separating the land from the water. A Fijian creation
myth says: “Rokomautu created the land. He scooped it up out of the
bottom of the ocean in great handfuls and accumulated it in piles here
and there. These are the Fiji Islands.” The distillation of land from water
is a natural enough idea for island and seafaring peoples.

178 - Cosmos

The tunnel of Eupalinos, piercing Mount
Ampelus on Samos. It is mentioned by
Herodotus as one of the three great
achievements of Greek engineering (the
other two, the Temple of Hera and the
mole at what is now the harbor of Pytha-
gorion, were also constructed on the is'
land of Samos). Completed by the slaves
of Poly crates, around 525 B.C.

men had used sticks to club and spear one another. Anaximander
used one to measure time. He was the first person in Greece to
make a sundial, a map of the known world and a celestial globe
that showed the patterns of the constellations. He believed the
Sun, the Moon and the stars to be made of fire seen through
moving holes in the dome of the sky, probably a much older
idea. He held the remarkable view that the Earth is not sus^
pended or supported from the heavens, but that it remains by
itself at the center of the universe; since it was equidistant from
all places on the “celestial sphere,” there was no force that could
move it.

He argued that we are so helpless at birth that, if the first
human infants had been put into the world on their own, they
would immediately have died. From this Anaximander com
eluded that human beings arose from other animals with more
selbreliant newborns: He proposed the spontaneous origin of life
in mud, the first animals being fish covered with spines. Some
descendants of these fishes eventually abandoned the water and
moved to dry land, where they evolved into other animals by the
transmutation of one form into another. He believed in an infk
nite number of worlds, all inhabited, and all subject to cycles of
dissolution and regeneration. “Nor,” as Saint Augustine ruefully
complained, “did he, any more than Thales, attribute the cause
of all this ceaseless activity to a divine mind.”

In the year 540 B.C. or thereabouts, on the island of Samos,
there came to power a tyrant named Poly crates. He seems to
have started as a caterer and then gone on to international piracy.
Polycrates was a generous patron of the arts, sciences and engk
neering. But he oppressed his own people; he made war on his
neighbors; he quite rightly feared invasion. So he surrounded his
capital city with a massive wall, about six kilometers long, whose
remains stand to this day. To carry water from a distant spring
through the fortifications, he ordered a great tunnel built. A
kilometer long, it pierces a mountain. Two cuttings were dug
from either end which met almost perfectly in the middle. The
project took about fifteen years to complete, a testament to the
civil engineering of the day and an indication of the extraordb
nary practical capability of the Ionians. But there is another and
more ominous side to the enterprise: it was built in part by slaves
in chains, many captured by the pirate ships of Poly crates.

This was the time of Theodorus, the master engineer of the
age, credited among the Greeks with the invention of the key,
the ruler, the carpenter’s square, the level, the lathe, bronze
casting and central heating. Why are there no monuments to this
man? Those who dreamed and speculated about the laws of
Nature talked with the technologists and the engineers. They
were often the same people. The theoretical and the practical
were one.

About the same time, on the nearby island of Cos, Hippocrates

The Backbone of Night - 179

was establishing his famous medical tradition, now barely
remembered because of the Hippocratic oath. It was a practical
and effective school of medicine, which Hippocrates insisted had
to be based on the contemporary equivalent of physics and
chemistry.* But it also had its theoretical side. In his book On
Ancient Medicine, Hippocrates wrote: “Men think epilepsy divine,
merely because they do not understand it. But if they called
everything divine which they do not understand, why, there
would be no end of divine things.”

In time, the Ionian influence and the experimental method
spread to the mainland of Greece, to Italy, to Sicily. There was
once a time when hardly anyone believed in air. They knew
about breathing, of course, and they thought the wind was the
breath of the gods. But the idea of air as a static, material but
invisible substance was unimagined. The first recorded experiment
on air was performed by a physician' 1 ' named Empedocles, who
flourished around 450 B.C. Some accounts claim he identified
himself as a god. But perhaps it was only that he was so clever
that others thought him a god. He believed that light travels
very fast, but not infinitely fast. He taught that there was once
a much greater variety of living things on the Earth, but that
many races of beings “must have been unable to beget and
continue their kind. For in the case of every species that exists,
either craft or courage or speed has from the beginning of its
existence protected and preserved it.” In this attempt to explain
the lovely adaptation of organisms to their environments, Em-
pedocles, like Anaximander and Democritus (see below), clearly
anticipated some aspects of Darwin’s great idea of evolution by
natural selection.

Empedocles performed his experiment with a household inv
plement people had used for centuries, the so-called clepsydra or
“water thief,” which was used as a kitchen ladle. A brazen sphere
with an open neck and small holes in the bottom, it is filled by
immersing it in water. If you pull it out with the neck uncovered,
the water pours out of the holes, making a little shower. But it
you pull it out properly, with your thumb covering the neck, the
water is retained within the sphere until you lift your thumb. If
you try to fill it with the neck covered, nothing happens. Some
material substance must be in the way of the water. We cannot
see such a substance. What could it be? Empedocles argued that it
could only be air. A thing we cannot see can exert pressure, can

A modern reconstruction of the clepsydra,
or “water thief,” with which Empedocles
deduced that air was composed of innu-
merable fine particles.

* And astrology, which was then widely regarded as a science. In a typical
passage, Hippocrates writes: “One must also guard against the risings of
the stars, especially of the Dog Star [Sirius], then of Arcturus, and also of
the setting of the Pleiades.”

t The experiment was performed in support of a totally erroneous the¬
ory of the circulation of the blood, but the idea of performing any
experiment to probe Nature is the important innovation.

180 - Cosmos

frustrate my wish to fill a vessel with water if I were dumb
enough to leave my finger on the neck. Empedocles had discow
ered the invisible. Air, he thought, must be matter in a form so
finely divided that it could not be seen.

Empedocles is said to have died in an apotheotic fit by leaping
into the hot lava at the summit caldera of the great volcano of
Aetna. But I sometimes imagine that he merely slipped during a
courageous and pioneering venture in observational geophysics.

This hint, this whiff, of the existence of atoms was carried
much further by a man named Democritus, who came from the
Ionian colony of Abdera in northern Greece. Abdera was a kind
of joke town. If in 430 B.C. you told a story about someone from
Abdera, you were guaranteed a laugh. It was in a way the
Brooklyn of its time. For Democritus all of life was to be enjoyed
and understood; understanding and enjoyment were the same
thing. He said that “a life without festivity is a long road without
an inn.” Democritus may have come from Abdera, but he was no
dummy. He believed that a large number of worlds had formed
spontaneously out of diffuse matter in space, evolved and then
decayed. At a time when no one knew about impact craters,
Democritus thought that worlds on occasion collide; he believed
that some worlds wandered alone through the darkness of space,
while others were accompanied by several suns and moons; that
some worlds were inhabited, while others had no plants or am
imals or even water; that the simplest forms of life arose from a
kind of primeval ooze. He taught that perception—the reason,
say, I think there is a pen in my hand—was a purely physical and
mechanistic process; that thinking and feeling were attributes of
matter put together in a sufficiently fine and complex way and not
due to some spirit infused into matter by the gods.

Democritus invented the word atom , Greek for “unable to be
cut.” Atoms were the ultimate particles, forever frustrating our
attempts to break them into smaller pieces. Everything, he said, is
a collection of atoms, intricately assembled. Even we. “Nothing
exists,” he said, “but atoms and the void.”

When we cut an apple, the knife must pass through empty
spaces between the atoms, Democritus argued. If there were no
such empty spaces, no void, the knife would encounter the iim
penetrable atoms, and the apple could not be cut. Having cut a
slice from a cone, say, let us compare the cross sections of the two
pieces. Are the exposed areas equal? No, said Democritus. The
slope of the cone forces one side of the slice to have a slightly
smaller cross section than the other. If the two areas were exactly
equal, we would have a cylinder, not a cone. No matter how
sharp the knife, the two pieces have unequal cross sections.
Why? Because, on the scale of the very small, matter exhibits
some irreducible roughness. This fine scale of roughness Demo'
critus identified with the world of the atoms. His arguments were
not those we use today, but they were subtle and elegant, derived

The Backbone of Night — 181

from everyday life. And his conclusions were fundamentally
correct.

In a related exercise, Democritus imagined calculating the voh
ume of a cone or a pyramid by a very large number of extremely
small stacked plates tapering in size from the base to the apex. He
had stated the problem that, in mathematics, is called the theory
of limits. He was knocking at the door of the differential and
integral calculus, that fundamental tool for understanding the
world that was not, so far as we know from written records, in
fact discovered until the time of Isaac Newton. Perhaps if De¬
mocritus ’ work had not been almost completely destroyed, there
would have been calculus by the time of Christ.*

Thomas Wright marveled in 1750 that Democritus had be¬
lieved the Milky Way to be composed mainly of unresolved
stars: “long before astonomy reaped any benefit from the im¬
proved sciences of optics; [he] saw, as we may say, through the
eye of reason, full as far into infinity as the most able astronomers
in more advantageous times have done since.” Beyond the Milk
of Hera, past the Backbone of Night, the mind of Democritus
soared.

As a person, Democritus seems to have been somewhat un¬
usual. Women, children and sex discomfited him, in part because
they took time away from thinking. But he valued friendship,
held cheerfulness to be the goal of life and devoted a major
philosophical inquiry to the origin and nature of enthusiasm. He
journeyed to Athens to visit Socrates and then found himself too
shy to introduce himself. He was a close friend of Hippocrates.
He was awed by the beauty and elegance of the physical world.
He felt that poverty in a democracy was preferable to wealth in a
tyranny. He believed that the prevailing religions of his time
were evil and that neither immortal souls nor immortal gods
exist: “Nothing exists, but atoms and the void.”

There is no record of Democritus having been persecuted for
his opinions—but then, he came from Abdera. However, in his
time the brief tradition of tolerance for unconventional views
began to erode and then to shatter. People came to be punished
for having unusual ideas. A portrait of Democritus is now on the
Greek hundred-drachma bill. But his insights were suppressed,
his influence on history made minor. The mystics were beginning
to win.

Anaxagoras was an Ionian experimentalist who flourished
around 450 B.C. and lived in Athens. He was a rich man, indif¬
ferent to his wealth but passionate about science. Asked what
was the purpose of life, he replied, “the investigation of the Sun,
the Moon, and the heavens,” the reply of a true astronomer. He
performed a clever experiment in which a single drop of white
liquid, like cream, was shown not to lighten perceptibly the

* The frontiers of the calculus were also later breached by Eudoxus and
Archimedes.

182 - Cosmos

A recent 100-drachma note from Greece,
bearing a symbolic atom (lithium), a like¬
ness of Democritus, and a modern Greek
nuclear research institute named after De¬
mocritus .

contents of a great pitcher of dark liquid, like wine. There must,
he concluded, be changes deductible by experiment that are too
subtle to be perceived directly by the senses.

Anaxagoras was not nearly so radical as Democritus. Both
were thoroughgoing materialists, not in prizing possessions but in
holding that matter alone provided the underpinnings of the
world. Anaxagoras believed in a special mind substance and
disbelieved in the existence of atoms. He thought humans were
more intelligent than other animals because of our hands, a very
Ionian idea.

He was the first person to state clearly that the Moon shines by
reflected light, and he accordingly devised a theory of the phases
of the Moon. This doctrine was so dangerous that the manu¬
script describing it had to be circulated in secret, an Athenian
samizdat It was not in keeping with the prejudices of the time to
explain the phases or eclipses of the Moon by the relative geom¬
etry of the Earth, the Moon and the self-luminous Sun. Aristotle,
two generations later, was content to argue that those things
happened because it was the nature of the Moon to have phases
and eclipses—mere verbal juggling, an explanation that explains
nothing.

The prevailing belief was that the Sun and Moon were gods.
Anaxagoras held that the Sun and stars are fiery stones. We do
not feel the heat of the stars because they are too far away. He
also thought that the Moon has mountains (right) and inhabi¬
tants (wrong). He held that the Sun was so huge that it was
probably larger than the Peloponnesus, roughly the southern
third of Greece. His critics thought this estimate excessive and
absurd.

Anaxagoras was brought to Athens by Pericles, its leader in its
time of greatest glory, but also the man whose actions led to the
Peloponnesian War, which destroyed Athenian democracy.
Pericles delighted in philosophy and science, and Anaxagoras
was one of his principal confidants. There are those who think
that in this role Anaxagoras contributed significantly to the
greatness of Athens. But Pericles had political problems. He was
too powerful to be attacked directly, so his enemies attacked
those close to him. Anaxagoras was convicted and imprisoned
for the religious crime of impiety—because he had taught that the
Moon was made of ordinary matter, that it was a place, and that
the Sun was a red-hot stone in the sky. Bishop John Wilkins
commented in 1638 on these Athenians: “Those zealous idola¬
ters [counted] it a great blasphemy to make their God a stone,
whereas notwithstanding they were so senseless in their adora¬
tion of idols as to make a stone their God.” Pericles seems to have
engineered Anaxagoras’ release from prison, but it was too late.
In Greece the tide was turning, although the Ionian tradition
continued in Alexandrian Egypt two hundred years later.

The great scientists from Thales to Democritus and Anaxagoras

The Backbone of Night - 183

have usually been described in history or philosophy books
as “Presocratics,” as if their main function was to hold the philo-
sophical fort until the advent of Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle
and perhaps influence them a little. Instead, the old Ionians rep-
resent a different and largely contradictory tradition, one in much
better accord with modern science. That their influence was felt
powerfully for only two or three centuries is an irreparable loss
for all those human beings who lived between the Ionian
Awakening and the Italian Renaissance.

Perhaps the most influential person ever associated with Samos
was Pythagoras,* a contemporary of Poly crates in the sixth cen¬
tury B.C. According to local tradition, he lived for a time in
a cave on the Samian Mount Kerkis, and was the first person in the
history of the world to deduce that the Earth is a sphere. Perhaps
he argued by analogy with the Moon and the Sun, or noticed the
curved shadow of the Earth on the Moon during a lunar eclipse,
or recognized that when ships leave Samos and recede over the
horizon, their masts disappear last.

He or his disciples discovered the Pythagorean theorem: the
sum of the squares of the shorter sides of a right triangle equals
the square of the longer side. Pythagoras did not simply enumerate
examples of this theorem; he developed a method of mathe¬
matical deduction to prove the thing generally. The modern
tradition of mathematical argument, essential to all of science,
owes much to Pythagoras. It was he who first used the word
Cosmos to denote a well-ordered and harmonious universe, a
world amenable to human understanding.

Many Ionians believed the underlying harmony of the uni¬
verse to be accessible through observation and experiment, the
method that dominates science today. However, Pythagoras em¬
ployed a very different method. He taught that the laws of
Nature could be deduced by pure thought. He and his followers
were not fundamentally experimentalistsd They were mathema¬
ticians. And they were thoroughgoing mystics. According to
Bertrand Russell, in a perhaps uncharitable passage, Pythagoras

An ancient Samian coin from the third
century A.D. with a representation of Py¬
thagoras and the Greek legend, “Pythag¬
oras of Samos.” Reproduced by courtesy
of the Trustees of the British Museum.

* The sixth century B.C. was a time of remarkable intellectual and spiri¬
tual ferment across the planet. Not only was it the time of Thales,
Anaximander, Pythagoras and others in Ionia, hut also the time of the
Egyptian Pharaoh Necho who caused Africa to be circumnavigated, of
Zoroaster in Persia, Confucius and Lao-tse in China, the Jewish prophets
in Israel, Egypt and Babylon, and Gautama Buddha in India. It is hard to
think these activities altogether unrelated.

t Although there were a few welcome exceptions. The Pythagorean
fascination with whole-number ratios in musical harmonies seems clearly
to be based on observation, or even experiment on the sounds issued
from plucked strings. Empedocles was, at least in part, a Pythagorean.
One of Pythagoras’ students, Alcmaeon, is the first person known to
have dissected a human body; he distinguished between arteries and
veins, was the first to discover the optic nerve and the eustachian tubes,
and identified the brain as the seat of the intellect (a contention later

BILL RAY

184 - Cosmos

The five perfect solids of Pythagoras and
Plato, on a ledge outside the cave atop
Mount Kerkis, on Samos, in which ac-
cording to local tradition Pythagoras lived.
The solids resting on the ledge are (left to
right) the tetrahedron, the cube, the octa-
hedron and the icosahedron. Atop the
cube, representing earth, is the dodecahe¬
dron, mystically associated by the Py¬
thagoreans with the heavens.

“founded a religion, of which the main tenets were the transmi¬
gration of souls and the sinfulness of eating beans. His religion
was embodied in a religious order, which, here and there, ac¬
quired control of the State and established a rule of the saints.
But the unregenerate hankered after beans, and sooner or later
rebelled.”

The Pythagoreans delighted in the certainty of mathematical
demonstration, the sense of a pure and unsullied world accessible
to the human intellect, a Cosmos in which the sides of right
triangles perfectly obey simple mathematical relationships. It was
in striking contrast to the messy reality of the workaday world.
They believed that in their mathematics they had glimpsed a
perfect reality, a realm of the gods, of which our familiar world is
but an imperfect reflection. In Plato’s famous parable of the cave,
prisoners were imagined tied in such a way that they saw only the
shadows of passersby and believed the shadows to be real—never
guessing the complex reality that was accessible if they would but
turn their heads. The Pythagoreans would powerfully influence
Plato and, later, Christianity.

They did not advocate the free confrontation of conflicting
points of view. Instead, like all orthodox religions, they practiced
a rigidity that prevented them from correcting their errors.
Cicero wrote:

In discussion it is not so much weight of authority as force
of argument that should be demanded. Indeed, the author¬
ity of those who profess to teach is often a positive hin¬
drance to those who desire to learn; they cease to employ
their own judgment, and take what they perceive to be the
verdict of their chosen master as settling the question. In
fact I am not disposed to approve the practice traditionally
ascribed to the Pythagoreans, who, when questioned as to
the grounds of any assertion that they advanced in debate,
are said to have been accustomed to reply “The Master said
so,” “the Master” being Pythagoras. So potent was an opin¬
ion already decided, making authority prevail unsupported
by reason.

The Pythagoreans were fascinated by the regular solids, sym¬
metrical three-dimensional objects all of whose sides are the same
regular polygon. The cube is the simplest example, having six
squares as sides. There are an infinite number of regular poly¬
gons, but only five regular solids. (The proof of this statement, a
famous example of mathematical reasoning, is given in Appendix
2.) For some reason, knowledge of a solid called the dodecahe¬
dron having twelve pentagons as sides seemed to them danger¬
ous. It was mystically associated with the Cosmos. The other

denied by Aristotle, who placed intelligence in the heart, and then
revived by Herophilus of Chalcedon). He also founded the science of
embryology. But Alcmaeon’s zest for the impure was not shared by most
of his Pythagorean colleagues in later times.

The Backbone of Night - 185

four regular solids were identified, somehow, with the four “ele¬
ments” then imagined to constitute the world: earth, fire, air and
water. The fifth regular solid must then, they thought, corre¬
spond to some fifth element that could only be the substance of
the heavenly bodies. (This notion of a fifth essence is the origin
of our word quintessence.) Ordinary people were to be kept igno¬
rant of the dodecahedron.

In love with whole numbers, the Pythagoreans believed all
things could be derived from them, certainly all other numbers.
A crisis in doctrine arose when they discovered that the square
root of two (the ratio of the diagonal to the side of a square) was
irrational, that if2 cannot be expressed accurately as the ratio of
any two whole numbers, no matter how big these numbers are.
Ironically this discovery (reproduced in Appendix 1) was
made with the Pythagorean theorem as a tool. “Irrational” origi¬
nally meant only that a number could not be expressed as a ratio.
But for the Pythagoreans it came to mean something threatening,
a hint that their world view might not make sense, which is
today the other meaning of “irrational.” Instead of sharing these
important mathematical discoveries, the Pythagoreans sup¬
pressed knowledge of V~2 and the dodecahedron. The outside
world was not to know.* Even today there are scientists opposed
to the popularization of science: the sacred knowledge is to be
kept within the cult, unsullied by public understanding.

The Pythagoreans believed the sphere to be “perfect,” all
points on its surface being at the same distance from its center.
Circles were also perfect. And the Pythagoreans insisted that
planets moved in circular paths at constant speeds. They seemed
to believe that moving slower or faster at different places in the
orbit would be unseemly; noncircular motion was somehow
flawed, unsuitable for the planets, which, being free of the Earth,
were also deemed “perfect.”

The pros and cons of the Pythagorean tradition can be seen
clearly in the life’s work of Johannes Kepler (Chapter 3). The
Pythagorean idea of a perfect and mystical world, unseen by the
senses, was readily accepted by the early Christians and was an
integral component of Kepler’s early training. On the one hand,
Kepler was convinced that mathematical harmonies exist in na¬
ture (he wrote that “the universe was stamped with the adorn¬
ment of harmonic proportions”); that simple numerical
relationships must determine the motion of the planets. On the
other hand, again following the Pythagoreans, he long believed
that only uniform circular motion was admissible. He repeatedly
found that the observed planetary motions could not be ex¬
plained in this way, and repeatedly tried again. But unlike many

* A Pythagorean named Hippasus published the secret of the “sphere
with twelve pentagons,” the dodecahedron. When he later died in a
shipwreck, we are told, his fellow Pythagoreans remarked on the justice
of the punishment. His book has not survived.

186 - Cosmos

Pythagoreans, he believed in observations and experiment in the
real world. Eventually the detailed observations of the apparent
motion of the planets forced him to abandon the idea of circular
paths and to realize that planets travel in ellipses. Kepler was both
inspired in his search for the harmony of planetary motion and
delayed for more than a decade by the attractions of Pythagorean
doctrine.

A disdain for the practical swept the ancient world. Plato
urged astronomers to think about the heavens, but not to waste
their time observing them. Aristotle believed that: “The lower
son are by nature slaves, and it is better for them as for all
inferiors that they should be under the rule of a master. . . . The
slave shares in his master’s life; the artisan is less closely com
nected with him, and only attains excellence in proportion as he
becomes a slave. The meaner sort of mechanic has a special and
separate slavery.” Plutarch wrote: “It does not of necessity follow
that, if the work delight you with its grace, the one who wrought
it is worthy of esteem.” Xenophon’s opinion was: “What are
called the mechanical arts carry a social stigma and are rightly
dishonoured in our cities.” As a result of such attitudes, the
brilliant and promising Ionian experimental method was largely
abandoned for two thousand years. Without experiment, there is
no way to choose among contending hypotheses, no way for
science to advance. The antiempirical taint of the Pythagoreans
survives to this day. But why? Where did this distaste for ex^
periment come from?

An explanation for the decline of ancient science has been put
forward by the historian of science, Benjamin Farrington: The
mercantile tradition, which led to Ionian science, also led to a
slave economy. The owning of slaves was the road to wealth and
power. Polycrates’ fortifications were built by slaves. Athens in the
time of Pericles, Plato and Aristotle had a vast slave population.
All the brave Athenian talk about democracy applied only to a
privileged few. What slaves characteristically perform is
manual labor. But scientific experimentation is manual labor,
from which the slaveholders are preferentially distanced; while it
is only the slaveholders—politely called “gentleunen” in some
societies—who have the leisure to do science. Accordingly, ah
most no one did science. The Ionians were perfectly able to make
machines of some elegance. But the availability of slaves unden
mined the economic motive for the development of technology.
Thus the mercantile tradition contributed to the great Ionian
awakening around 600 B.C., and, through slavery, may have been
the cause of its decline some two centuries later. There are great
ironies here.

Similar trends are apparent throughout the world. The high
point in indigenous Chinese astronomy occurred around 1280,
with the work of Kuo Shomching, who used an observational
baseline of 1,500 years and improved both astronomical instruments

The Backbone of Night - 187

ally thought that Chinese astronomy thereafter underwent a other Greek scientists between the sew-

steep decline. Nathan Sivin believes that the reason lies at least ent ^ century B.C. and the fifth century.

partly “in increasing rigidity of elite attitudes, so that the educated The decline of Greek science is indicated

i . i. i i . i . 11 . by the relatively few individuals shown

were less inclined to be curious about techniques and less willing g i r- ^ ^ ^

n after the first century B.C.

to value science as an appropriate pursuit for a gentleman.” The
occupation of astronomer became a hereditary office, a practice
inconsistent with the advance of the subject. Additionally, “the
responsibility for the evolution of astronomy remained centered
in the Imperial Court and was largely abandoned to foreign
technicians,” chiefly the Jesuits, who had introduced Euclid and
Copernicus to the astonished Chinese, but who, after the cem
sorship of the latter’s book, had a vested interest in disguising and
suppressing heliocentric cosmology. Perhaps science was stillborn
in Indian, Mayan and Aztec civilizations for the same reason it
declined in Ionia, the pervasiveness of the slave economy. A
major problem in the contemporary (political) Third World is
that the educated classes tend to be the children of the wealthy,
with a vested interest in the status quo, and are unaccustomed
either to working with their hands or to challenging convem
tional wisdom. Science has been very slow to take root.

Plato and Aristotle were comfortable in a slave society. They
offered justifications for oppression. They served tyrants. They
taught the alienation of the body from the mind (a natural

188 - Cosmos

enough ideal in a slave society); they separated matter from
thought; they divorced the Earth from the heavens—divisions
that were to dominate Western thinking for more than twenty
centuries. Plato, who believed that “all things are full of gods,”
actually used the metaphor of slavery to connect his politics with
his cosmology. He is said to have urged the burning of all the
books of Democritus (he had a similar recommendation for the
books of Homer), perhaps because Democritus did not acknowh
edge immortal souls or immortal gods or Pythagorean mysticism,
or because he believed in an infinite number of worlds. Of the
seventy-three books Democritus is said to have written, covering
all of human knowledge, not a single work survives. All we know
is from fragments, chiefly on ethics, and secondhand accounts.
The same is true of almost all the other ancient Ionian scientists.

In the recognition by Pythagoras and Plato that the Cosmos is
knowable, that there is a mathematical underpinning to nature,
they greatly advanced the cause of science. But in the suppression
of disquieting facts, the sense that science should be kept for a
small elite, the distaste for experiment, the embrace of mysticism
and the easy acceptance of slave societies, they set back the
human enterprise. After a long mystical sleep in which the tools
of scientific inquiry lay moldering, the Ionian approach, in some
cases transmitted through scholars at the Alexandrian Library,
was finally rediscovered. The Western world reawakened. Ex-
periment and open inquiry became once more respectable. For¬
gotten books and fragments were again read. Leonardo and
Columbus and Copernicus were inspired by or independently
retraced parts of this ancient Greek tradition. There is in our time
much Ionian science, although not in politics and religion, and a
fair amount of courageous free inquiry. But there are also appall¬
ing superstitions and deadly ethical ambiguities. We are flawed
by ancient contradictions.

The Platonists and their Christian successors held the peculiar
notion that the Earth was tainted and somehow nasty, while the
heavens were perfect and divine. The fundamental idea that the
Earth is a planet, that we are citizens of the Universe, was re¬
jected and forgotten. This idea was first argued by Aristarchus,
born on Samos three centuries after Pythagoras. Aristarchus was
one of the last of the Ionian scientists. By this time, the center of
intellectual enlightenment had moved to the great Library of
Alexandria. Aristarchus was the first person to hold that the Sun
rather than the Earth is at the center of the planetary system, that
all the planets go around the Sun rather than the Earth. Typi¬
cally, his writings on this matter are lost. From the size of the
Earth’s shadow on the Moon during a lunar eclipse, he deduced
that the Sun had to be much larger than the Earth, as well as very
far away. He may then have reasoned that it is absurd for so large
a body as the Sun to revolve around so small a body as the Earth.
He put the Sun at the center, made the Earth rotate on its axis

The Backbone of Night - 189

once a day and orbit the Sun once a year.

It is the same idea we associate with the name of Copernicus,
whom Galileo described as the “restorer and confirmer,” not the
inventor, of the heliocentric hypothesis.* For most of the 1,800
years between Aristarchus and Copernicus nobody knew the
correct disposition of the planets, even though it had been laid
out perfectly clearly around 280 B.C. The idea outraged some of
Aristarchus’ contemporaries. There were cries, like those voiced
about Anaxagoras and Bruno and Galileo, that he be condemned
for impiety. The resistance to Aristarchus and Copernicus, a kind
of geocentrism in everyday life, remains with us: we still talk
about the Sun “rising” and the Sun “setting.” It is 2,200 years since
Aristarchus, and our language still pretends that the Earth does
not turn.

The separation of the planets from one another—forty million
kilometers from Earth to Venus at closest approach, six billion
kilometers to Pluto—would have stunned those Greeks who were
outraged by the contention that the Sun might be as large as the
Peloponnesus. It was natural to think of the solar system as much
more compact and local. If I hold my finger before my eyes and
examine it first with my left and then with my right eye, it seems
to move against the distant background. The closer my finger is,
the more it seems to move. I can estimate the distance to my
finger from the amount of this apparent motion, or parallax. If
my eyes were farther apart, my finger would seem to move
substantially more. The longer the baseline from which we make
our two observations, the greater the parallax and the better we
can measure the distance to remote objects. But we live on a
moving platform, the Earth, which every six months has pro-
gressed from one end of its orbit to the other, a distance of
300,000,000 kilometers. If we look at the same unmoving celes-
tial object six months apart, we should be able to measure very
great distances. Aristarchus suspected the stars to be distant suns.
He placed the Sun “among” the fixed stars. The absence of de¬
tectable stellar parallax as the Earth moved suggested that the
stars were much farther away than the Sun. Before the invention
of the telescope, the parallax of even the nearest stars was too
small to detect. Not until the nineteenth century was the parallax
of a star first measured. It then became clear, from straightfor¬
ward Greek geometry, that the stars were light-years away.

* Copernicus may have gotten the idea from reading about Aristarchus.
Recently discovered classical texts were a source of great excitement in
Italian universities when Copernicus went to medical school there. In
the manuscript of his book, Copernicus mentioned Aristarchus’ priority,
but he omitted the citation before the book saw print. Copernicus wrote
in a letter to Pope Paul III: “According to Cicero, Nicetas had thought
the Earth was moved . . . According to Plutarch [who discusses Aris¬
tarchus] . . . certain others had held the same opinion. When from this,
therefore, I had conceived its possibility, I myself also began to meditate
upon the mobility of the Earth.”

BILL RAY

190 - Cosmos

A simple reconstruction of the perforated
brass plate used by Christiaan Huygens in
the seventeenth century to determine the
distance to the stars.

There is another way to measure the distance to the stars
which the Ionians were fully capable of discovering, although, so
far as we know, they did not employ it. Everyone knows that the
farther away an object is, the smaller it seems. This inverse
proportionality between apparent size and distance is the basis of
perspective in art and photography. So the farther away we are
from the Sun, the smaller and dimmer it appears. How far would
we have to be from the Sun for it to appear as small and as dim as
a star? Or, equivalently, how small a piece of the Sun would be as
bright as a star?

An early experiment to answer this question was performed by
Christiaan Huygens, very much in the Ionian tradition. Huygens
drilled small holes in a brass plate, held the plate up to the Sun
and asked himself which hole seemed as bright as he remem'
bered the bright star Sirius to have been the night before. The
hole was effectively* 1/28,000 the apparent size of the Sun. So
Sirius, he reasoned, must be 28,000 times farther from us than
the Sun, or about half a light-year away. It is hard to remember
just how bright a star is many hours after you look at it, but
Huygens remembered very well. If he had known that Sirius was
intrinsically brighter than the Sun, he would have come up with
almost exactly the right answer: Sirius is 8.8 light-years away.
The fact that Aristarchus and Huygens used imprecise data and
derived imperfect answers hardly matters. They explained their
methods so clearly that, when better observations were available,
more accurate answers could be derived.

Between the times of Aristarchus and Huygens, humans an¬
swered the question that had so excited me as a boy growing up
in Brooklyn: What are the stars? The answer is that the stars are
mighty suns, light-years away in the vastness of interstellar space.

The great legacy of Aristarchus is this: neither we nor our
planet enjoys a privileged position in Nature. This insight has
since been applied upward to the stars, and sideways to many
subsets of the human family, with great success and invariable
opposition. It has been responsible for major advances in astron¬
omy, physics, biology, anthropology, economics and politics. I
wonder if its social extrapolation is a major reason for attempts at
its suppression.

The legacy of Aristarchus has been extended far beyond the
realm of the stars. At the end of the eighteenth century, William
Herschel, musician and astronomer to George III of England,
completed a project to map the starry skies and found apparently
equal numbers of stars in all directions in the plane or band of the
Milky Way; from this, reasonably enough, he deduced that we
were at the center of the Galaxy/ Just before World War I,

* Huygens actually used a glass bead to reduce the amount of light passed
by the hole.

t This supposed privileged position of the Earth, at the center of what

The Backbone of Night — 191

Harlow Shapley of Missouri devised a technique for measuring
the distances to the globular clusters, those lovely spherical ar¬
rays of stars which resemble a swarm of bees. Shapley had found
a stellar standard candle, a star noticeable because of its variabil¬
ity, but which had always the same average intrinsic brightness.
By comparing the faintness of such stars when found in globular
clusters with their real brightness, as determined from nearby
representatives, Shapley could calculate how far away they are-
just as, in a field, we can estimate the distance of a lantern of
known intrinsic brightness from the feeble light that reaches
us—essentially, the method of Huygens. Shapley discovered that
the globular clusters were not centered around the solar neigh¬
borhood but rather about a distant region of the Milky Way, in
the direction of the constellation Sagittarius, the Archer. It
seemed to him very likely that the globular clusters used in this
investigation, nearly a hundred of them, would be orbiting
about, paying homage to, the massive center of the Milky Way.

Shapley had in 1915 the courage to propose that the solar
system was in the outskirts and not near the core of our galaxy.
Herschel had been misled because of the copious amount of
obscuring dust in the direction of Sagittarius; he had no way to
know of the enormous numbers of stars beyond. It is now very
clear that we live some 30,000 light-years from the galactic core,
on the fringes of a spiral arm, where the local density of stars is
relatively sparse. There may be those who live on a planet that
orbits a central star in one of Shapley’s globular clusters, or one
located in the core. Such beings may pity us for our handful of
naked-eye stars, because their skies will be ablaze with them.
Near the center of the Milky Way, millions of brilliant stars
would be visible to the naked eye, compared to our paltry few
thousand. Our Sun or suns might set, but the night would never
come.

Well into the twentieth century, astronomers believed that
there was only one galaxy in the Cosmos, the Milky Way—al¬
though in the eighteenth century Thomas Wright of Durban
and Immanuel Kant of Konigsberg each had a premonition that
the exquisite luminous spiral forms, viewed through the tele¬
scope, were other galaxies. Kant suggested explicitly that M31 in
the constellation Andromeda was another Milky Way, com¬
posed of enormous numbers of stars, and proposed calling such
objects by the evocative and haunting phrase “island universes.”
Some scientists toyed with the idea that the spiral nebulae were
not distant island universes but rather nearby condensing clouds
of interstellar gas, perhaps on their way to make solar systems.
To test the distance of the spiral nebulae, a class of intrinsically
much brighter variable stars was needed to furnish a new standard

was then considered the known universe, led A. R. Wallace to the
anti-Aristarchian position, in his book Mans Place in the Universe
(1903), that ours may be the only inhabited planet.

Schematic representation of the Milky
Way viewed edge-on, surrounded by a
swarm of globular star clusters, each con¬
taining between one hundred thousand
and ten million stars. On this scale the Sun
and Earth lie close to the outer edge of the
spiral arms, jutting out from the galactic
core. Painting by Jon Lomberg.

192 - Cosmos

Globular star clusters gravitate about and demark the massive center of the Milky Way Galaxy. Many are located in a
great spherical halo of stars and star clusters that encloses our spiral galaxy. A relative few, like these, are concentrated
toward the galactic nucleus. From the planets of any one of these suns, the sky would be ablaze with stars. These
globular clusters are designated NGC 6522 and NGC 6528, NGC being an abbreviation for “New General Catalog,” a
compilation of clusters and galaxies. It was new when first compiled in 1888. Courtesy Kitt Peak National Observa-
tory. © Association of Universities for Research in Astronomy, Inc., the Kitt Peak National Observatory.

The Backbone of Night - 193

candle. Such stars, identified in M31 by Edwin Hubble in
1924, were discovered to be alarmingly dim, and it became ap¬
parent that M31 was a prodigious distance away, a number now
estimated at a little more than two million light-years. But if M31
were at such a distance, it could not be a cloud of mere inter¬
stellar dimensions; it had to be much larger—an immense galaxy
in its own right. And the other, fainter galaxies must be more
distant still, a hundred billion of them, sprinkled through the
dark to the frontiers of the known Cosmos.

As long as there have been humans, we have searched for our
place in the Cosmos. In the childhood of our species (when our
ancestors gazed a little idly at the stars), among the Ionian scien¬
tists of ancient Greece, and in our own age, we have been trans¬
fixed by this question: Where are we? Who are we? We find that
we live on an insignificant planet of a humdrum star lost between
two spiral arms in the outskirts of a galaxy which is a member of
a sparse cluster of galaxies, tucked away in some forgotten corner
of a universe in which there are far more galaxies than people.
This perspective is a courageous continuation of our penchant
for constructing and testing mental models of the skies; the Sun as
a red-hot stone, the stars as celestial flame, the Galaxy as the
backbone of night.

Since Aristarchus, every step in our quest has moved us farther
from center stage in the cosmic drama. There has not been much
time to assimilate these new findings. The discoveries of Shapley
and Hubble were made within the lifetimes of many people still
alive today. There are those who secretly deplore these great
discoveries, who consider every step a demotion, who in their
heart of hearts still pine for a universe whose center, focus and
fulcrum is the Earth. But if we are to deal with the Cosmos we
must first understand it, even if our hopes for some unearned
preferential status are, in the process, contravened. Understand¬
ing where we live is an essential precondition for improving the
neighborhood. Knowing what other neighborhoods are like also
helps. If we long for our planet to be important, there is some¬
thing we can do about it. We make our world significant by the
courage of our questions and by the depth of our answers.

We embarked on our cosmic voyage with a question first
framed in the childhood of our species and in each generation
asked anew with undiminished wonder: What are the stars? Ex¬
ploration is in our nature. We began as wanderers, and we are
wanderers still. We have lingered long enough on the shores of
the cosmic ocean. We are ready at last to set sail for the stars.

A hypothetical ice planet in the system of the Ring Nebula in Lyra. The central star has shed its outer atmosphere,
producing a multicolored slowly expanding shell of glowing gas. This system is 1,500 light-years distant, an objective
for human exploration in the far future. Painting by David Egge, 1979.

Chapter VIII

TRAVELS IN
SPACE AND TIME

No one has lived longer than a dead child, and Methusula* died young.
Heaven and Earth are as old as I, and the ten thousand things are one,

—Chuang Tzu, about 300 B.C., China

We have loved the stars too fondly to be fearful of the night,

—Tombstone epitaph of
two amateur astronomers

Stars scribble in our eyes the frosty sagas,

The gleaming cantos of unvanquished space,

—Hart Crane, The Bridge

Actually, P’eng Tsu, the Chinese equivalent.

196 - Cosmos

Big Dipper as seen from Earth

The Big Dipper, as seen from the Earth
(top), from the side ( middle) and from the
back (bottom). The last two views would
be seen if we were able to travel to the
proper vantage points, about 150 light-
years away.

THE RISING AND FALLING of the surf is produced in part by
tides. The Moon and the Sun are far away. But their
gravitational influence is very real and noticeable back here on
Earth. The beach reminds us of space. Fine sand grains, all more
or less uniform in size, have been produced from larger rocks
through ages of jostling and rubbing, abrasion and erosion,
again driven through waves and weather by the distant Moon
and Sun. The beach also reminds us of time. The world is much
older than the human species.

A handful of sand contains about 10,000 grains, more than the
number of stars we can see with the naked eye on a clear night.
But the number of stars we can see is only the tiniest fraction of
the number of stars that are . What we see at night is the merest
smattering of the nearest stars. Meanwhile the Cosmos is rich
beyond measure: the total number of stars in the universe is
greater than all the grains of sand on all the beaches of the planet
Earth.

Despite the efforts of ancient astronomers and astrologers to
put pictures in the skies, a constellation is nothing more than an
arbitrary grouping of stars, composed of intrinsically dim stars
that seem to us bright because they are nearby, and intrinsically
brighter stars that are somewhat more distant. All places on

Earth are, to high precision, the same distance from any star.

This is why the star patterns in a given constellation do not
change as we go from, say, Soviet Central Asia to the American
Midwest. Astronomically, the U.S.S.R. and the United States are
the same place. The stars in any constellation are all so far away that
we cannot recognize them as a three-dimensional configuration
as long as we are tied to Earth. The average distance between

the stars is a few light-years, a light-year being, we

remember, about ten trillion kilometers. For the patterns of the
constellations to change, we must travel over distances comparable
to those that separate the stars; we must venture across the
light-years. Then some nearby stars will seem to move out of the
constellation, others will enter it, and its configuration will alter
dramatically.

Our technology is, so far, utterly incapable of such grand
interstellar voyages, at least in reasonable transit times. But our
computers can be taught the three-dimensional positions of all
the nearby stars, and we can ask to be taken on a little trip—a
circumnavigation of the collection of bright stars that constitute
the Big Dipper, say—and watch the constellations change. We
connect the stars in typical constellations, in the usual celestial
follow-the-dots drawings. As we change our perspective, we see
their apparent shapes distort severely. The inhabitants of the
planets of distant stars witness quite different constellations in
their night skies than we do in ours—other Rorschach tests for
other minds. Perhaps sometime in the next few centuries a
spaceship from Earth will actually travel such distances at some

Travels in Space and Time — 197

remarkable speed and see new constellations that no human has
ever viewed before—except with such a computer.

The appearance of the constellations changes not only in space
but also in time; not only if we alter our position but also if we
merely wait sufficiently long. Sometimes stars move together in a
group or cluster; other times a single star may move very rapidly
with respect to its fellows. Eventually such stars leave an old
constellation and enter a new one. Occasionally, one member of
a double-star system explodes, breaking the gravitational
shackles that bound its companion, which then leaps into space
at its former orbital velocity, a slingshot in the sky. In addition,
stars are born, stars evolve, and stars die. If we wait long enough,
new stars appear and old stars vanish. The patterns in the sky
slowly melt and alter.

Even over the lifetime of the human species—a few million
years—constellations have been changing. Consider the present
configuration of the Big Dipper, or Great Bear. Our computer can
carry us in time as well as in space. As we run the Big Dipper
backwards into the past, allowing for the motion of its stars, we
find quite a different appearance a million years ago. The Big
Dipper then looked quite a bit like a spear. If a time machine
dropped you precipitously in some unknown age in the distant
past, you could in principle determine the epoch by the configu-
ration of the stars: If the Big Dipper is a spear, this must be the
Middle Pleistocene.

We can also ask the computer to run a constellation forward
into time. Consider Leo the Lion. The zodiac is a band of twelve
constellations seemingly wrapped around the sky in the apparent
annual path of the Sun through the heavens. The root of the
word is that for zoo , because the zodiacal constellations, like Leo,
are mainly fancied to be animals. A million years from now, Leo
will look still less like a lion than it does today. Perhaps our
remote descendants will call it the constellation of the radio
telescope—although I suspect a million years from now the radio
telescope will have become more obsolete than the stone spear is
now.

The (nonzodiacal) constellation of Orion, the hunter, is out-
lined by four bright stars and bisected by a diagonal line of three
stars, which represent the belt of the hunter. Three dimmer stars
hanging from the belt are, according to the conventional astro-
nomical projective test, Orion’s sword. The middle star in the
sword is not actually a star but a great cloud of gas called the
Orion Nebula, in which stars are being born. Many of the stars in
Orion are hot and young, evolving rapidly and ending their lives
in colossal cosmic explosions called supernovae. They are born
and die in periods of tens of millions of years. If, on our conn
puter, we were to run Orion rapidly into the far future, we would
see a startling effect, the births and spectacular deaths of many of
its stars, flashing on and winking off like fireflies in the night.

Computer-generated images of the Big
Dipper as it would have been seen on
Earth one million years ago and half a
million years ago. Its present appearance is
shown at bottom.

198 - Cosmos

The Lion at present

Computer-generated appearance of the
constellation Leo, as it appears today (top),
and as it will appear from our planet one
million years in the future.

The solar neighborhood, the immediate environs of the Sun
in space, includes the nearest star system, Alpha Centauri. It is
really a triple system, two stars revolving around each other, and
a third, Proxima Centauri, orbiting the pair at a discreet distance.
At some positions in its orbit, Proxima is the closest known star
to the Sun—hence its name. Most stars in the sky are members of
double or multiple star systems. Our solitary Sun is something of
an anomaly.

The second brightest star in the constellation Andromeda,
called Beta Andromedae, is seventyTive light-years away. The
light by which we see it now has spent seventy-five years tra¬
versing the dark of interstellar space on its long journey to Earth.
In the unlikely event that Beta Andromedae blew itself up last
Tuesday, we would not know it for another seventy-five years, as
this interesting information, traveling at the speed of light, would
require seventy-five years to cross the enormous interstellar dis¬
tances. When the light by which we now see this star set out on
its long voyage, the young Albert Einstein, working as a Swiss
patent clerk, had just published his epochal special theory of
relativity here on Earth.

Space and time are interwoven. We cannot look out into space
without looking back into time. Light travels very fast. But space
is very empty, and the stars are far apart. Distances of seventy-
five light-years or less are very small compared to other distances
in astronomy. From the Sun to the center of the Milky Way
Galaxy is 30,000 light-years. From our galaxy to the nearest spiral
galaxy, M31, also in the constellation Andromeda, is 2,000,000
light-years. When the light we see today from M31 left for Earth,
there were no humans on our planet, although our ancestors
were evolving rapidly to our present form. The distance from the
Earth to the most remote quasars is eight or ten billion light-
years. We see them today as they were before the Earth accu¬
mulated, before the Milky Way was formed.

This is not a situation restricted to astronomical objects, but
only astronomical objects are so far away that the finite speed of
light becomes important. If you are looking at a friend three
meters (ten feet) away, at the other end of the room, you are not
seeing her as she is “now”; but rather as she “was” a hundred
millionth of a second ago. [(3 m) / (3 X 10 8 m/sec) = 1/(10 8 /
sec) = 10' 8 sec, or a hundredth of a microsecond. In this cal¬
culation we have merely divided the distance by the speed to get
the travel time.] But the difference between your friend “now”
and now minus a hundred-millionth of a second is too small to
notice. On the other hand, when we look at a quasar eight billion
light-years away, the fact that we are seeing it as it was eight
billion years ago may be very important. (For example, there are
those who think that quasars are explosive events likely to hap¬
pen only in the early history of galaxies. In that case, the more
distant the galaxy, the earlier in its history we are observing it,

Travels in Space and Time - 199

and the more likely it is that we should see it as a quasar. Indeed,
the number of quasars increases as we look to distances of more
than about five billion light-years).

The two Voyager interstellar spacecraft, the fastest machines
ever launched from Earth, are now traveling at one ten-thou¬
sandth the speed of light. They would need 40,000 years to go
the distance to the nearest star. Do we have any hope of leaving
Earth and traversing the immense distances even to Proxima
Centauri in convenient periods of time? Can we do something to
approach the speed of light? What is magic about the speed of
light? Might we someday be able to go faster than that?

If you had walked through the pleasant Tuscan countryside in
the 1890’s, you might have come upon a somewhat long-haired
teenage high school dropout on the road to Pavia. His teachers in
Germany had told him that he would never amount to anything,
that his questions destroyed classroom discipline, that he would
be better off out of school. So he left and wandered, delighting in
the freedom of Northern Italy, where he could ruminate on
matters remote from the subjects he had been force-fed in his
highly disciplined Prussian schoolroom. His name was Albert
Einstein, and his ruminations changed the world.

Einstein had been fascinated by Bernstein’s People's Book of
Natural Science , a popularization of science that described on its
very first page the astonishing speed of electricity through wires
and light through space. He wondered what the world would
look like if you could travel on a wave of light. To travel at the
speed of light! What an engaging and magical thought for a boy
on the road in a countryside dappled and rippling in sunlight.
You could not tell you were on a light wave if you traveled with
it. If you started on a wave crest, you would stay on the crest and
lose all notion of it being a wave. Something strange happens at
the speed of light. The more Einstein thought about such ques¬
tions, the more troubling they became. Paradoxes seemed to
emerge everywhere if you could travel at the speed of light.
Certain ideas had been accepted as true without sufficiently care¬
ful thought. Einstein posed simple questions that could have
been asked centuries earlier. For example, what do we mean
when we say that two events are simultaneous?

Imagine that I am riding a bicycle toward you. As I approach
an intersection I nearly collide, so it seems to me, with a horse-
drawn cart. I swerve and barely avoid being run over. Now think
of the event again, and imagine that the cart and the bicycle are
both traveling close to the speed of light. If you are standing
down the road, the cart is traveling at right angles to your line of
sight. You see me, by reflected sunlight, traveling toward you.
Would not my speed be added to the speed of light, so that my
image would get to you considerably before the image of the
cart? Should you not see me swerve before you see the cart
arrive? Can the cart and I approach the intersection simultaneously

Albert Einstein (1879-1955). Portrait by
Jean-Leon Huens, © National Geographic
Society. His latent interest in science was
awakened at age twelve by a book of
popular science given him by an impover¬
ished student named Max Talmey, who
had been invited to dinner, in an act of
charity and compassion, by Einstein’s
parents.

200 — Cosmos

w<-

->E

t

The simultaneity paradox in special rela¬
tivity. The observer is standing in the
south leg of a crossroads. A bicyclist is
approaching from the north at a velocity
given by the solid arrow. Light reflected
from the bicyclist is approaching the ob¬
server at a higher velocity, given by the
dashed arrow. A cart is approaching the
intersection from the west at a velocity
given by its solid arrow, and light is re¬
flected off it to the south at a velocity
given by the corresponding dashed arrow.
If it were proper to add the bicyclist’s ve¬
locity to the velocity of light (since he is
approaching the observer), the light from
the bicyclist would arrive before the light
from the cart, and what is perceived as a
near-collision by the bicyclist and cart
driver is witnessed very differently by the
observer. Careful experiments show that
this is not what happens. The paradox is
noticeable only if the bicycle is moving
very close to the speed of light. The reso¬
lution of the paradox is that the velocity
of light must be independent of the ve¬
locity of the moving object.

from my point of view, but not from yours? Could I
experience a near collision with the cart while you perhaps see
me swerve around nothing and pedal cheerfully on toward the
town of Vinci? These are curious and subtle questions. They
challenge the obvious. There is a reason that no one thought of
them before Einstein. From such elementary questions, Einstein
produced a fundamental rethinking of the world, a revolution in
physics.

If the world is to be understood, if we are to avoid such logical
paradoxes when traveling at high speeds, there are some rules,
commandments of Nature, that must be obeyed. Einstein codi¬
fied these rules in the special theory of relativity. Light (reflected
or emitted) from an object travels at the same velocity whether
the object is moving or stationary: Thou shalt not add thy speed to
the speed of light . Also, no material object may move faster than
light: Thou shalt not travel at or beyond the speed of light . Nothing
in physics prevents you from traveling as close to the speed of
light as you like; 99.9 percent of the speed of light would be just
fine. But no matter how hard you try, you can never gain that last
decimal point. For the world to be logically consistent, there
must be a cosmic speed limit. Otherwise, you could get to any
speed you wanted by adding velocities on a moving platform.

Europeans around the turn of the century generally believed in
privileged frames of reference: that German, or French, or British
culture and political organization were better than those of other
countries; that Europeans were superior to other peoples who
were fortunate enough to be colonized. The social and political
application of the ideas of Aristarchus and Copernicus was re¬
jected or ignored. The young Einstein rebelled against the notion
of privileged frames of reference in physics as much as he did in
politics. In a universe filled with stars rushing helter-skelter in all
directions, there was no place that was “at rest,” no framework
from which to view the universe that was superior to any other
framework. This is what the word relativity means. The idea is
very simple, despite its magical trappings: in viewing the universe,
every place is as good as every other place. The laws of Nature
must be identical no matter who is describing them. If this is to
be true—and it would be stunning if there were something special
about our insignificant location in the Cosmos—then it follows
that no one may travel faster than light.

We hear the crack of a bullwhip because its tip is moving
faster than the speed of sound, creating a shock wave, a small
sonic boom. A thunderclap has a similar origin. It was once
thought that airplanes could not travel faster than sound. Today
supersonic flight is commonplace. But the light barrier is different
from the sound barrier. It is not merely an engineering problem
like the one the supersonic airplane solves. It is a fundamental
law of Nature, as basic as gravity. And there are no phenomena

Travels in Space and Time — 201

thunder for sound—to suggest the possibility of traveling in a
vacuum faster than light. On the contrary, there is an extremely
wide range of experience—with nuclear accelerators and atomic
clocks, for example—in precise quantitative agreement with spe-
cial relativity.

The problems of simultaneity do not apply to sound as they do
to light because sound is propagated through some material me¬
dium, usually air. The sound wave that reaches you when a
friend is talking is the motion of molecules in the air. Light,
however, travels in a vacuum. There are restrictions on how
molecules of air can move which do not apply to a vacuum. Light
from the Sun reaches us across the intervening empty space, but
no matter how carefully we listen, we do not hear the crackle of
sunspots or the thunder of the solar flares. It was once thought, in
the days before relativity, that light did propagate through a
special medium that permeated all of space, called “the lumin¬
iferous aether.” But the famous Michelson-Morley experiment
demonstrated that such an aether does not exist.

We sometimes hear of things that can travel faster than light.
Something called “the speed of thought” is occasionally proffered.
This is an exceptionally silly notion—especially since the speed of
impulses through the neurons in our brains is about the same as
the speed of a donkey cart. That human beings have been clever
enough to devise relativity shows that we think well, but I do not
think we can boast about thinking fast. The electrical impulses in
modern computers do, however, travel nearly at the speed of
light.

Special relativity, fully worked out by Einstein in his middle
twenties, is supported by every experiment performed to check it.
Perhaps tomorrow someone will invent a theory consistent with
everything else we know that circumvents paradoxes on such
matters as simultaneity, avoids privileged reference frames and
still permits travel faster than light. But I doubt it very much.
Einstein’s prohibition against traveling faster than light may clash
with our common sense. But on this question, why should we
trust common sense? Why should our experience at 10 kilome¬
ters an hour constrain the laws of nature at 300,000 kilometers
per second? Relativity does set limits on what humans can ulti¬
mately do. But the universe is not required to be in perfect
harmony with human ambition. Special relativity removes from
our grasp one way of reaching the stars, the ship that can go
faster than light. Tantalizingly, it suggests another and quite
unexpected method.

Following George Gamow, let us imagine a place where the
speed of light is not its true value of 300,000 kilometers per
second, but something very modest: 40 kilometers per hour,
say—and strictly enforced. (There are no penalties for breaking
laws of Nature, because there are no crimes: Nature is self¬
regulating and merely arranges things so that its prohibitions

A traffic signal briefly erected in the Italian
town of Vinci. It reads: “Welcome to
Vinci. Limit to the velocity of light, 40
kilometers [per hour].” Photo by Ann
Druyan.

are

202 - Cosmos

Bust of Leonardo da Vinci (14524519) in
the Leonardo Museum, Vinci. Photo by
the author.

impossible to transgress.) Imagine that you are approaching the
speed of light on a motor scooter. (Relativity is rich in sentences
beginning “Imagine ...” Einstein called such an exercise a Ge -
dankenexperiment , a thought experiment.) As your speed in¬
creases, you begin to see around the corners of passing objects.
While you are rigidly facing forward, things that are behind you
appear within your forward field of vision. Close to the speed of
light, from your point of view, the world looks very odd—ulti¬
mately everything is squeezed into a tiny circular window, which
stays just ahead of you. From the standpoint of a stationary
observer, light reflected off you is reddened as you depart and
blued as you return. If you travel toward the observer at almost
the speed of light, you will become enveloped in an eerie chro¬
matic radiance: your usually invisible infrared emission will be
shifted to the shorter visible wavelengths. You become com¬
pressed in the direction of motion, your mass increases, and time,
as you experience it, slows down, a breathtaking consequence of
traveling close to the speed of light called time dilation. But from
the standpoint of an observer moving with you—perhaps the
scooter has a second seat—none of these effects occur.

These peculiar and at first perplexing predictions of special
relativity are true in the deepest sense that anything in science is
true. They depend on your relative motion. But they are real,
not optical illusions. They can be demonstrated by simple math¬
ematics, mainly first-year algebra and therefore understandable
to any educated person. They are also consistent with many
experiments. Very accurate clocks carried in airplanes slow down
a little compared to stationary clocks. Nuclear accelerators are
designed to allow for the increase of mass with increasing speed;
if they were not designed in this way, accelerated particles would
all smash into the walls of the apparatus, and there would be
little to do in experimental nuclear physics. A speed is a distance
divided by a time. Since near the velocity of light we cannot
simply add speeds, as we are used to doing in the workaday
world, the familiar notions of absolute space and absolute time-
independent of your relative motion—must give way. That is
why you shrink. That is the reason for time dilation.

Traveling close to the speed of light you would hardly age at
all, but your friends and your relatives back home would be
aging at the usual rate. When you returned from your relativistic
journey, what a difference there would be between your friends
and you, they having aged decades, say, and you having aged
hardly at all! Traveling close to the speed of light is a kind of
elixir of life. Because time slows down close to the speed of light,
special relativity provides us with a means of going to the stars.
But is it possible, in terms of practical engineering, to travel close
to the speed of light? Is a starship feasible?

Tuscany was not only the caldron of some of the thinking of
the young Albert Einstein; it was also the home of another great

Travels in Space and Time — 203

genius who lived 400 years earlier, Leonardo da Vinci, who
delighted in climbing the Tuscan hills and viewing the ground
from a great height, as if he were soaring like a bird. He drew the
first aerial perspectives of landscapes, towns and fortifications.
Among Leonardo’s many interests and accomplishments—in
painting, sculpture, anatomy, geology, natural history, military
and civil engineering—he had a great passion: to devise and fal>
ricate a machine that could fly. He drew pictures, constructed
models, built fulLsize prototypes—and not one of them worked.
No sufficiently powerful and lightweight engine then existed.
The designs, however, were brilliant and encouraged the engi-
neers of future times. Leonardo himself was depressed by these
failures. But it was hardly his fault. He was trapped in the fif¬
teenth century.

A similar case occurred in 1939 when a group of engineers
calling themselves the British Interplanetary Society designed a
ship to take people to the Moon—using 1939 technology. It was
by no means identical to the design of the Apollo spacecraft,
which accomplished exactly this mission three decades later, but
it suggested that a mission to the moon might one day be a
practical engineering possibility.

Today we have preliminary designs for ships to take people to
the stars. None of these spacecraft is imagined to leave the Earth
directly. Rather, they are constructed in Earth orbit from where
they are launched on their long interstellar journeys. One of
them was called Project Orion after the constellation, a reminder
that the ship’s ultimate objective was the stars. Orion was de¬
signed to utilize explosions of hydrogen bombs, nuclear weapons,
against an inertial plate, each explosion providing a kind of
“putt-putt,” a vast nuclear motorboat in space. Orion seems en¬
tirely practical from an engineering point of view. By its very
nature it would have produced vast quantities of radioactive
debris, but for conscientious mission profiles only in the empti¬
ness of interplanetary or interstellar space. Orion was under seri¬
ous development in the United States until the signing of the
international treaty that forbids the detonation of nuclear weap¬
ons in space. This seems to me a great pity. The Orion starship is
the best use of nuclear weapons I can think of.

Project Daedalus is a recent design of the British Interplanetary
Society. It assumes the existence of a nuclear fusion reactor-
something much safer as well as more efficient than existing
fission power plants. We do not have fusion reactors yet, but
they are confidently expected in the next few decades. Orion and
Daedalus might travel at 10 percent the speed of light. A trip to
Alpha Centauri, 43 light-years away, would then take forty-
three years, less than a human lifetime. Such ships could not
travel close enough to the speed of light for special relativistic
time dilation to become important. Even with optimistic projec¬
tions on the development of our technology, it does not seem

Two of Leonardo’s designs for flying ma¬
chines. Top: a model of a helical-screw
helicopter from the Leonardo Museum,
Vinci. This design inspired Igor Sikorsky
to develop the modern helicopter. Bottom:
A page from Leonardo’s notebooks, the
inscription in his “mirror writing,” showing
a design for a semi-ornithopter in which
the fixed inner wing is an aerodynamic
lifting body and the wing tip flapped. It
was a significant move away from Leo¬
nardo’s initial notion that heavier-than-air
craft needed wings that flapped like a
bird’s. This design influenced Otto Li-
lienthal’s hang gliders of 1891-96, which
immediately preceded the inventions of
Wilbur and Orville Wright. The note¬
book was written between 1497 and
1500.

Starships: Very schematic blueprints for three designs that have been seriously proposed for interstellar s\
three use one form or another of nuclear fusion. Orion is shown above, Daedalus below and the Bu
opposite. Only the Ramjet could, in principle, travel close enough to the speed of light for special rel
dilation to apply. Its effective collecting area, at right, for interstellar matter would have to be much largei
Bluenrints from existing designs bv Rick Sternbach.

Travels in Space and Time — 205

Three starship designs: Orion (Theodore Taylor, Free¬
man Dyson and others), top left; Daedalus (British Inter¬
planetary Society), top right; Interstellar Ramjet (R. W.
Bussard and others), bottom. Paintings by Rick Stern-
bach.

206 - Cosmos

likely that Orion, Daedalus or their ilk will be built before the
middle of the twentyTirst century, although if we wished we
could build Orion now.

For voyages beyond the nearest stars, something else must be
done. Perhaps Orion and Daedalus could be used as multigem
eration ships, so those arriving at a planet of another star would
be the remote descendants of those who had set out some cem
turies before. Or perhaps a safe means of hibernation for humans
will be found, so that the space travelers could be frozen and
then reawakened centuries later. These nonrelativistic starships,
enormously expensive as they would be, look relatively easy to
design and build and use compared to starships that travel close
to the speed of light. Other star systems are accessible to the
human species, but only after great effort.

Fast interstellar spaceflight—with the ship velocity approaching
the speed of light—is an objective not for a hundred years but for
a thousand or ten thousand. But it is in principle possible. A kind
of interstellar ramjet has been proposed by R. W. Bussard which
scoops up the diffuse matter, mostly hydrogen atoms, that floats
between the stars, accelerates it into a fusion engine and ejects it
out the back. The hydrogen would be used both as fuel and as
reaction mass. But in deep space there is only about one atom in
every ten cubic centimeters, a volume the size of a grape. For the
ramjet to work, it needs a frontal scoop hundreds of kilometers
across. When the ship reaches relativistic velocities, the hydn>
gen atoms will be moving with respect to the spaceship at close to
the speed of light. If adequate precautions are not taken, the
spaceship and its passengers will be fried by these induced cosmic
rays. One proposed solution uses a laser to strip the electrons off
the interstellar atoms and make them electrically charged while
they are still some distance away, and an extremely strong mag'
netic field to deflect the charged atoms into the scoop and away
from the rest of the spacecraft. This is engineering on a scale so
far unprecedented on Earth. We are talking of engines the size of
small worlds.

But let us spend a moment thinking about such a ship. The
Earth gravitationally attracts us with a certain force, which if we
are falling we experience as an acceleration. Were we to fall out
of a tree—and many of our protodiuman ancestors must have
done so—we would plummet faster and faster, increasing our fall
speed by ten meters (or thirty^two feet) per second, every second.
This acceleration, which characterizes the force of gravity hold'
ing us to the Earths surface, is called 1 g, g for Earth gravity. We
are comfortable with accelerations of 1 g; we have grown up with
1 g. If we lived in an interstellar spacecraft that could accelerate at
1 g, we would find ourselves in a perfectly natural environment.
In fact, the equivalence between gravitational forces and the
forces we would feel in an accelerating spaceship is a major
feature of Einstein’s later general theory of relativity. With a

Travels in Space and Time - 207

continuous 1 g acceleration, after one year in space we would be
traveling very close to the speed of light [(0*01 km/sec 2 ) x (3 x
10 7 sec) = 3 x 10 5 km/sec].

Suppose that such a spacecraft accelerates at 1 g, approaching
more and more closely to the speed of light until the midpoint of
the journey; and then is turned around and decelerates at 1 g until
arriving at its destination. For most of the trip the velocity would
be very close to the speed of light and time would slow down
enormously. A nearby mission objective, a sun that may have
planets, is Barnard’s Star, about six light-years away. It could be
reached in about eight years as measured by clocks aboard the
ship; the center of the Milky Way, in twenty-one years; M31, the
Andromeda galaxy, in twenty-eight years. Of course, people left
behind on Earth would see things differently. Instead of twenty-
one years to the center of the Galaxy, they would measure an
elapsed time of 30,000 years. When we got home, few of our
friends would be left to greet us. In principle, such a journey,
mounting the decimal points ever closer to the speed of light,
would even permit us to circumnavigate the known universe in
some fifty-six years ship time. We would return tens of billions of
years in our future—to find the Earth a charred cinder and the
Sun dead. Relativistic spaceflight makes the universe accessible to
advanced civilizations, but only to those who go on the journey.
There seems to be no way for information to travel back to those
left behind any faster than the speed of light.

The designs for Orion, Daedalus and the Bussard Ramjet are
probably farther from the actual interstellar spacecraft we will
one day build than Leonardo’s models are from today’s super¬
sonic transports. But if we do not destroy ourselves, I believe that
we will one day venture to the stars. When our solar system is all
explored, the planets of other stars will beckon.

Space travel and time travel are connected. We can travel fast
into space only by traveling fast into the future. But what of the
past? Could we return to the past and change it? Could we make
events turn out differently from what the history books assert?
We travel slowly into the future all the time, at the rate of one
day every day. With relativistic spaceflight we could travel fast
into the future. But many physicists believe that a voyage into
the past is impossible. Even if you had a device that could travel
backwards in time, they say, you would be unable to do anything
that would make any difference. If you journeyed into the past
and prevented your parents from meeting, then you would never
have been born—which is something of a contradiction, since
you clearly exist. Like the proof of the irrationality of V 2, like
the discussion of simultaneity in special relativity, this is an ar¬
gument in which the premise is challenged because the conclu¬
sion seems absurd.

But other physicists propose that two alternative histories, two
equally valid realities, could exist side by side—the one you know

208 - Cosmos

A symbolic representation of time travel
The Time Machine is that built for the
George Pal motion picture based on the
H. G. Wells story. Photograph by Ed-
wardo Castaneda.

A postage stamp issued in conjunction
with the Columbian Exposition of 1892,
depicting Christopher Columbus present¬
ing his geographical and economic argu¬
ments to Queen Isabella. What great
voyages of discovery will be underway in
1992, the five hundredth anniversary of
Columbus’ discovery of America?

and the one in which you were never born. Perhaps time itself
has many potential dimensions, despite the fact that we are con¬
demned to experience only one of them. Suppose you could go
back into the past and change it—by persuading Queen Isabella
not to support Christopher Columbus, for example. Then, it is
argued, you would have set into motion a different sequence of
historical events, which those you left behind in our time line
would never know about. If that kind of time travel were possi¬
ble, then every imaginable alternative history might in some
sense really exist.

History consists for the most part of a complex bundle of
deeply interwoven threads, social, cultural and economic forces
that are not easily unraveled. The countless small, unpredictable
and random events that flow on continually often have no long-
range consequences. But some, those occurring at critical junc¬
tures or branch points, may change the pattern of history. There
may be cases where profound changes can be made by relatively
trivial adjustments. The farther in the past such an event is, the
more powerful may be its influence—because the longer the lever
arm of time becomes.

A polio virus is a tiny microorganism. We encounter many of
them every day. But only rarely, fortunately, does one of them
infect one of us and cause this dread disease. Franklin D. Roo¬
sevelt, the thirty-second President of the United States, had
polio. Because the disease was crippling, it may have provided
Roosevelt with a greater compassion for the underdog; or per¬
haps it improved his striving for success. If Roosevelt’s personal¬
ity had been different, or if he had never had the ambition to be
President of the United States, the great depression of the 1930’s,
World War II and the development of nuclear weapons might
just possibly have turned out differently. The future of the world
might have been altered. But a virus is an insignificant thing, only
a millionth of a centimeter across. It is hardly anything at all.

On the other hand, suppose our time traveler had persuaded
Queen Isabella that Columbus’ geography was faulty, that from
Eratosthenes’ estimate of the circumference of the Earth, Co¬
lumbus could never reach Asia. Almost certainly some other
European would have come along within a few decades and
sailed west to the New World. Improvements in navigation, the
lure of the spice trade and competition among rival European
powers made the discovery of America around 1500 more or less
inevitable. Of course, there would today be no nation of Co¬
lombia, or District of Columbia or Columbus, Ohio, or Colum¬
bia University in the Americas. But the overall course of history
might have turned out more or less the same. In order to affect
the future profoundly, a time traveler would probably have to
intervene in a number of carefully chosen events, to change the
weave of history.

It is a lovely fantasy, to explore those worlds that never were.

Travels in Space and Time - 209

By visiting them we could truly understand how history works;
history could become an experimental science. If an apparently
pivotal person had never lived—Plato, say, or Paul, or Peter the
Great—how different would the world be? What if the scientific
tradition of the ancient Ionian Greeks had survived and
flourished? That would have required many of the social forces
of the time to have been different—including the prevailing belief
that slavery was natural and right. But what if that light that
dawned in the eastern Mediterranean 2,500 years ago had not
flickered out? What if science and the experimental method and
the dignity of crafts and mechanical arts had been vigorously
pursued 2,000 years before the Industrial Revolution? What if
the power of this new mode of thought had been more generally
appreciated? I sometimes think we might then have saved ten or
twenty centuries. Perhaps the contributions of Leonardo would
have been made a thousand years ago and those of Albert Ein¬
stein five hundred years ago. In such an alternate Earth, Leon¬
ardo and Einstein would, of course, never have been born. Too
many things would have been different. In every ejaculation
there are hundreds of millions of sperm cells, only one of which
can fertilize an egg and produce a member of the next generation
of human beings. But which sperm succeeds in fertilizing an egg
must depend on the most minor and insignificant of factors, both
internal and external. If even a little thing had gone differently

Seven solar systems generated by com¬
puter program ACCRETE, and one real
system, our own (B). The distances of
planets from their star are shown along
the horizontal axis (1 astronomical unit =
150,000,000 kilometers). The masses of
the planets are shown in units of the
Earth’s mass. Terrestrial planets are por¬
trayed as filled circles, jovian planets as
empty circles. Systems A and C are very
similar to our own, with terrestrial planets
close to the star, and jovian planets farther
away. System D has the opposite arrange¬
ment. Terrestrial and jovian planets are
interspersed in E and F. Very massive jo¬
vian planets are produced in G, and in H
the fifth planet is so massive that it has
become a star, and the configuration has
become a double star system. After cal¬
culations by Stephen Dole, Richard Isaac -
man and the author.

ALL PHOTOS BY BILL RAY

210 — Cosmos

An electric light hulb, representing a dis¬
tant star, and a small sphere representing a
non-self-luminous planetary companion*
Stars are so bright that their planets would
ordinarily be totally lost in their glare*

As the starlight is artificially eclipsed by a
foreground occulting disk (or the lunar
surface), the planet, shining by reflected
light, becomes more easily seen.

As the star is totally occulted, the planet
emerges from the glare* Repeated such
observations could determine the posi¬
tion, motion and perhaps other properties
of the previously undiscovered planet*

2,500 years ago, none of us would be here today* There would
be billions of others living in our place*

If the Ionian spirit had won, I think we—a different “we,” of
course—might by now be venturing to the stars* Our first survey
ships to Alpha Centauri and Barnard’s Star, Sirius and Tau Ceti
would have returned long ago* Great fleets of interstellar trans¬
ports would be under construction in Earth orbit—unmanned
survey ships, liners for immigrants, immense trading ships to
plow the seas of space* On all these ships there would be symbols
and writing* If we looked closely, we might see that the language
was Greek* And perhaps the symbol on the bow of one of the
first starships would be a dodecahedron, with the inscription
“Starship Theodorus of the Planet Earth*”

In the time line of our world, things have gone somewhat
more slowly* We are not yet ready for the stars* But perhaps in
another century or two, when the solar system is all explored, we
will also have put our planet in order* We will have the will and
the resources and the technical knowledge to go to the stars* We
will have examined from great distances the diversity of other
planetary systems, some very much like our own and some ex¬
tremely different* We will know which stars to visit* Our ma¬
chines and our descendants will then skim the light years, the
children of Thales and Aristarchus, Leonardo and Einstein*

We are not yet certain how many planetary systems there are,
but there seem to be a great abundance* In our immediate
vicinity, there is not just one, but in a sense four: Jupiter, Saturn
and Uranus each has a satellite system that, in the relative sizes
and spacings of the moons, resembles closely the planets about
the Sun* Extrapolation of the statistics of double stars which
are greatly disparate in mass suggests that almost all single stars
like the Sun should have planetary companions*

We cannot yet directly see the planets of other stars, tiny

points of light swamped in the brilliance of their local suns* But

we are becoming able to detect the gravitational influence of an
unseen planet on an observed star* Imagine such a star with a
large “proper motion,” moving over decades against the backdrop
of more distant constellations; and with a large planet, the mass
of Jupiter, say, whose orbital plane is by chance aligned at right
angles to our line of sight* When the dark planet is, from our

perspective, to the right of the star, the star will be pulled a little

to the right, and conversely when the planet is to the left* Con¬
sequently, the path of the star will be altered, or perturbed, from
a straight line to a wavy one* The nearest star for which this
gravitational perturbation method can be applied is Barnard’s
Star, the nearest single star* The complex interactions of the
three stars in the Alpha Centauri system would make the search
for a low-mass companion there very difficult* Even for Barnard’s
Star, the investigation must be painstaking, a search for micro¬
scopic displacements of position on photographic plates exposed

Travels in Space and Time — 211

at the telescope over a period of decades. Two such quests have
been performed for planets around Barnard’s Star, and both have
been by some criteria successful, implying the presence of two or
more planets of Jovian mass moving in an orbit (calculated by
Kepler’s third law) somewhat closer to their star than Jupiter and
Saturn are to the Sun. But unfortunately the two sets of obser¬
vations seem mutually incompatible. A planetary system around
Barnard’s Star may well have been discovered, but an unambig¬
uous demonstration awaits further study.

Other methods of detecting planets around the stars are under
development, including one where the obscuring light from the
star is artificially occulted—with a disk in front of a space tele¬
scope, or by using the dark edge of the Moon as such a disk—and
the reflected light from the planet, no longer hidden by the
brightness of the nearby star, emerges. In the next few decades
we should have definitive answers to which of the hundred
nearest stars have large planetary companions.

In recent years, infrared observations have revealed a number
of likely preplanetary disk-shaped clouds of gas and dust around
some of the nearby stars. Meanwhile, some provocative theoret¬
ical studies have suggested that planetary systems are a galactic
commonplace. A set of computer investigations has examined
the evolution of a flat, condensing disk of gas and dust of the sort
that is thought to lead to stars and planets. Small lumps of
matter—the first condensations in the disk—are injected at ran¬
dom times into the cloud. The lumps accrete dust particles as
they move. When they become sizable, they also gravitationally
attract gas, mainly hydrogen, in the cloud. When two moving

A moon-like world and a planet more
promising for life around a star near the
Horsehead Nebula, 1,500 light-years from
Earth. Exploration of such a system is a
feasible objective for humanity only if
spaceships capable of traveling close to the
speed of light could be developed. Paint¬
ing by David Egge, 1978.

212 - Cosmos

lumps collide, the computer program makes them stick. The
process continues until all the gas and dust has been in this way
used up. The results depend on the initial conditions, particularly
on the distribution of gas and dust density with distance from the
center of the cloud. But for a range of plausible initial conditions,
planetary systems—about ten planets, terrestrials close to the star,
Jovians on the exterior—recognizably like ours are generated.
Under other circumstances, there are no planets—just a smatten
ing of asteroids; or there may be Jovian planets near the star; or a
Jovian planet may accrete so much gas and dust as to become a
star, the origin of a binary star system. It is still too early to be
sure, but it seems that a splendid variety of planetary systems is to
be found throughout the Galaxy, and with high frequency—all
stars must come, we think, from such clouds of gas and dust.
There may be a hundred billion planetary systems in the Galaxy
awaiting exploration.

Not one of those worlds will be identical to Earth. A few will
be hospitable; most will appear hostile. Many will be achingly
beautiful. In some worlds there will be many suns in the daytime
sky, many moons in the heavens at night, or great particle ring
systems soaring from horizon to horizon. Some moons will be so
close that their planet will loom high in the heavens, covering
half the sky. And some worlds will look out onto a vast gaseous
nebula, the remains of an ordinary star that once was and is no
longer. In all those skies, rich in distant and exotic constellations,
there will be a faint yellow star—perhaps barely seen by the
naked eye, perhaps visible only through the telescope—the home
star of the fleet of interstellar transports exploring this tiny region
of the great Milky Way Galaxy.

The themes of space and time are, as we have seen, inten
twined. Worlds and stars, like people, are born, live and die. The
lifetime of a human being is measured in decades; the lifetime of
the Sun is a hundred million times longer. Compared to a star,
we are like mayflies, fleeting ephemeral creatures who live out
their whole lives in the course of a single day. From the point of
view of a mayfly, human beings are stolid, boring, almost entirely
immovable, offering hardly a hint that they ever do anything.
From the point of view of a star, a human being is a tiny flash,
one of billions of brief lives flickering tenuously on the suface of
a strangely cold, anomalously solid, exotically remote sphere of
silicate and iron.

In all those other worlds in space there are events in progress,
occurrences that will determine their futures. And on our small
planet, this moment in history is a historical branch point as
profound as the confrontation of the Ionian scientists with the
mystics 2,500 years ago. What we do with our world in this time
will propagate down through the centuries and powerfully de^
termine the destiny of our descendants and their fate, if any,
among the stars.

Travels in Space and Time — 213

An airless planet in a binary star system. Every object casts two shadows, antbred and antbblue. Painting by David
Hardy. ©David A. Hardy, from Challenge of the Stars (Rand McNally).

214 “ Cosmos

A hypothetical planet in the Pleione system. A member
of the Pleiades star cluster, Pleione is rotating so rapidly
that it has distorted to an oblate shape, and starstuff is
pouring off into space along the stellar equator. Painting
by Don Dixon. © Don Dixon 1974-

A contact binary, a red giant and a blue dwarf, the latter
undergoing a nova explosion. The event has withered
the planetary landscape. Painting by David Hardy.
© David A. Hardy, from Challenge of the Stars (Rand
McNally).

A planet in orbit about a distant member of a globular star cluster. Painting by Don Dixon. © Don Dixon 1978.

Travels in Space and Time - 215

A hypothetical planet about a contact binary from which the stellar atmospheres are being lost to space in a great spiral
pattern orbiting the two stars. Painting by Don Dixon. © Don Dixon.

The Pleiades at night, from an ice-cave on a hypothetical nearby planet. Because the Pleiades star cluster formed only
recently, this world is very young. Painting by David Egge.

The nearest star: the Sun seen in the light of ionized helium in the far ultraviolet. The solar prominence surging at top
nght extends momentarily some 300,000 kilometers into space until it falls back on the glowing gas that is the Sun’s
visible surface. The smallest patches of hot gas visible on this image of the solar surface are about the size of the Earth.
Skylab 4 photo, courtesy NASA.

Chapter IX

THE LIVES OF
THE STARS

Opening his two eyes, [Ra, the Sun god] cast light on Egypt, he separated
night from day. The gods came forth from his mouth and mankind from his
eyes. All things took their birth from him, the child who shines in the lotus
and whose rays cause all beings to live.

—An incantation from Ptolemaic Egypt

God is able to create particles of matter of several sizes and figures . . . and
perhaps of different densities and forces, and thereby to vary the laws of
Nature, and make worlds of several sorts in several parts of the Universe. At
least, 1 see nothing of contradiction in all this.

—Isaac Newton, Optics

We had the sky, up there, all speckled with stars, and we used to lay on our
backs and look up at them, and discuss about whether they was made, or
only just happened.

—Mark Twain, Huckleberry Finn

I have ... a terrible need . . . shall I say the word? ... of religion. Then I go
out at night and paint the stars.

—Vincent van Gogh

218 - Cosmos

Atoms in motion: a motion picture film
of disturbances in a carbon background
(shown as blue-black) by the random mo-
tions of uranium atoms (shown as red).
Democritus would have enjoyed this
movie. Courtesy Albert Crewe, Univer-
sity of Chicago.

TO MAKE AN APPLE PIE, you need wheat, apples, a pinch of
this and that, and the heat of the oven. The ingredients are made
of molecules—sugar, say, or water. The molecules, in turn, are
made of atoms—carbon, oxygen, hydrogen and a few others.
Where do these atoms come from? Except for hydrogen, they are
all made in stars. A star is a kind of cosmic kitchen inside which
atoms of hydrogen are cooked into heavier atoms. Stars con¬
dense from interstellar gas and dust, which are composed mostly
of hydrogen. But the hydrogen was made in the Big Bang, the
explosion that began the Cosmos. If you wish to make an apple
pie from scratch, you must first invent the universe.

Suppose you take an apple pie and cut it in half; take one of the
two pieces, cut it in half; and, in the spirit of Democritus, con¬
tinue. How many cuts before you are down to a single atom? The
answer is about ninety successive cuts. Of course, no knife could
be sharp enough, the pie is too crumbly, and the atom would in
any case be too small to see unaided. But there is a way to do it.

At Cambridge University in England, in the forty-five years
centered on 1910, the nature of the atom was first understood—
partly by shooting pieces of atoms at atoms and watching how
they bounce off. A typical atom has a kind of cloud of electrons
on the outside. Electrons are electrically charged, as their name
suggests. The charge is arbitrarily called negative. Electrons de¬
termine the chemical properties of the atom—the glitter of gold,
the cold feel of iron, the crystal structure of the carbon diamond.
Deep inside the atom, hidden far beneath the electron cloud, is
the nucleus, generally composed of positively charged protons
and electrically neutral neutrons. Atoms are very small—one
hundred million of them end to end would be as large as the tip
of your little finger. But the nucleus is a hundred thousand times
smaller still, which is part of the reason it took so long to be
discovered.* Nevertheless, most of the mass of an atom is in its
nucleus; the electrons are by comparison just clouds of moving
fluff. Atoms are mainly empty space. Matter is composed chiefly
of nothing.

I am made of atoms. My elbow, which is resting on the table
before me, is made of atoms. The table is made of atoms. But if
atoms are so small and empty and the nuclei smaller still, why
does the table hold me up? Why, as Arthur Eddington liked to
ask, do the nuclei that comprise my elbow not slide effortlessly

*It had previously been thought that the protons were uniformly dis¬
tributed throughout the electron cloud, rather than being concentrated
in a nucleus of positive charge at the center. The nucleus was discovered
by Ernest Rutherford at Cambridge when some of the bombarding
particles were bounced back in the direction from which they had come.
Rutherford commented: “It was quite the most incredible event that has
ever happened to me in my life. It was almost as incredible as if you fired
a 15-inch [cannon] shell at a piece of tissue paper and it came back and
hit you.”

The Lives of the Stars — 219

through the nuclei that comprise the table? Why don’t I wind up
on the floor? Or fall straight through the Earth?

The answer is the electron cloud. The outside of an atom in
my elbow has a negative electrical charge. So does every atom in
the table. But negative charges repel each other. My elbow does
not slither through the table because atoms have electrons
around their nuclei and because electrical forces are strong. Ev¬
eryday life depends on the structure of the atom. Turn off the
electrical charges and everything crumbles to an invisible fine
dust. Without electrical forces, there would no longer be things
in the universe—merely diffuse clouds of electrons, protons and
neutrons, and gravitating spheres of elementary particles, the
featureless remnants of worlds.

When we consider cutting an apple pie, continuing down
beyond a single atom, we confront an infinity of the very small.
And when we look up at the night sky, we confront an infinity of
the very large. These infinities represent an unending regress that
goes on not just very far, but forever. If you stand between two
mirrors—in a barber shop, say—you see a large number of images
of yourself, each the reflection of another. You cannot see an
infinity of images because the mirrors are not perfectly flat and
aligned, because light does not travel infinitely fast, and because
you are in the way. When we talk about infinity we are talking
about a quantity greater than any number, no matter how large.

The American mathematician Edward Kasner once asked his
nine-year-old nephew to invent a name for an extremely large
number—ten to the power one hundred (10 100 ), a one followed
by a hundred zeroes. The boy called it a googol. Here it is:
10, 000, 000, 000, 000, 000, 000, 000, 000, 000, 000, 000, 000, 000,
000 , 000 , 000 , 000 , 000 , 000 , 000 , 000 , 000 , 000 , 000 , 000 , 000 , 000 ,
000, 000, 000, 000, 000, 000. You, too, can make up your own
very large numbers and give them strange names. Try it. It has a
certain charm, especially if you happen to be nine.

If a googol seems large, consider a googolplex. It is ten to the
power of a googol—that is, a one followed by a googol zeros. By
comparison, the total number of atoms in your body is about
10 28 , and the total number of elementary particles—protons and
neutrons and electrons—in the observable universe is about 10 80 .
If the universe were packed solid* with neutrons, say, so there

* The spirit of this calculation is very old. The opening sentences of
Archimedes’ The Sand Reckoner are: “There are some, King Gelon, who
think that the number of the sand is infinite in multitude: and I mean by
the sand not only that which exists about Syracuse and the rest of Sicily,
but also that which is found in every region, whether inhabited or
uninhabited. And again, there are some who, without regarding it as
infinite, yet think that no number has been named which is great enough
to exceed its multitude.” Archimedes then went on not only to name the
number but to calculate it. Later he asked how many grains of sand
would fit, side by side, into the universe that he knew. His estimate: 10 63 ,
which corresponds, by a curious coincidence, to 10 83 or so atoms.

220 - Cosmos

Atoms of the mineral marcasite, magni-
fied 4"5 million times with a microscope
employing both visible light and X-rays.
Marcasite is a crystal in which the unit
FeS 2 is repeated, Fe standing for iron and
represented by the large spots, S standing
for sulfur and represented by the pair of
small spots flanking each iron atom.
Courtesy Institute Professor Martin J.
Buerger, Massachusetts Institute of Tech¬
nology.

was no empty space anywhere, there would still be only about
10 128 particles in it, quite a bit more than a googol but trivially
small compared to a googolplex. And yet these numbers, the
googol and the googolplex, do not approach, they come nowhere
near, the idea of infinity. A googolplex is precisely as far from
infinity as is the number one. We could try to write out a
googolplex, but it is a forlorn ambition. A piece of paper large
enough to have all the zeroes in a googolplex written out expli¬
citly could not be stuffed into the known universe. Happily, there
is a simpler and very concise way of writing a googolplex: 10 10100 ;
and even infinity: 00 (pronounced “infinity”).

In a burnt apple pie, the char is mostly carbon. Ninety cuts and
you come to a carbon atom, with six protons and six neutrons in
its nucleus and six electrons in the exterior cloud. If we were to
pull a chunk out of the nucleus—say, one with two protons and
two neutrons—it would be not the nucleus of a carbon atom, but
the nucleus of a helium atom. Such a cutting or fission of atomic
nuclei occurs in nuclear weapons and conventional nuclear
power plants, although it is not carbon that is split. If you make
the ninety-first cut of the apple pie, if you slice a carbon nucleus,
you make not a smaller piece of carbon, but something else—an
atom with completely different chemical properties. If you cut an
atom, you transmute the elements.

But suppose we go farther. Atoms are made of protons, neu¬
trons and electrons. Can we cut a proton? If we bombard protons
at high energies with other elementary particles—other protons,
say—we begin to glimpse more fundamental units hiding inside
the proton. Physicists now propose that so-called elementary
particles such as protons and neutrons are in fact made of still
more elementary particles called quarks, which come in a variety
of “colors” and “flavors,” as their properties have been termed in a
poignant attempt to make the subnuclear world a little more like
home. Are quarks the ultimate constituents of matter, or are they
too composed of still smaller and more elementary particles? Will
we ever come to an end in our understanding of the nature of
matter, or is there an infinite regression into more and more
fundamental particles? This is one of the great unsolved prob¬
lems in science.

The transmutation of the elements was pursued in medieval
laboratories in a quest called alchemy. Many alchemists believed
that all matter was a mixture of four elementary substances:
water, air, earth and fire, an ancient Ionian speculation. By alter¬
ing the relative proportions of earth and fire, say, you would be
able, they thought, to change copper into gold. The field
swarmed with charming frauds and con men, such as Cagliostro
and the Count of Saint-Germain, who pretended not only to
transmute the elements but also to hold the secret of immortality.
Sometimes gold was hidden in a wand with a false bottom, to
appear miraculously in a crucible at the end of some arduous

The Lives of the Stars — 221

experimental demonstration. With wealth and immortality the
bait, the European nobility found itself transferring large sums to
the practitioners of this dubious art. But there were more serious
alchemists such as Paracelsus and even Isaac Newton. The
money was not altogether wasted—new chemical elements, such
as phosphorus, antimony and mercury, were discovered. In fact,
the origin of modern chemistry can be traced directly to these
experiments.

There are ninety-two chemically distinct kinds of naturally
occurring atoms. They are called the chemical elements and until
recently constituted everything on our planet, although they are
mainly found combined into molecules. Water is a molecule
made of hydrogen and oxygen atoms. Air is made mostly of the
atoms nitrogen (N), oxygen (O), carbon (C), hydrogen (H) and
argon (Ar), in the molecular forms N 2 , 0 2 , C0 2 , H 2 0 and Ar.
The Earth itself is a very rich mixture of atoms, mostly silicon,*
oxygen, aluminum, magnesium and iron. Fire is not made of
chemical elements at all. It is a radiating plasma in which the high
temperature has stripped some of the electrons from their nuclei.
Not one of the four ancient Ionian and alchemical “elements” is
in the modern sense an element at all: one is a molecule, two are
mixtures of molecules, and the last is a plasma.

Since the time of the alchemists, more and more elements
have been discovered, the latest to be found tending to be the
rarest. Many are familiar—those that primarily make up the
Earth; or those fundamental to life. Some are solids, some gases,
and two (bromine and mercury) are liquids at room temperature.
Scientists conventionally arrange them in order of complexity.
The simplest, hydrogen, is element 1; the most complex, ura¬
nium, is element 92. Other elements are less familiar—hafnium,
erbium, dyprosium and praseodymium, say, which we do not
much bump into in everyday life. By and large, the more familiar
an element is, the more abundant it is. The Earth contains a great
deal of iron and rather little yttrium. There are, of course, ex¬
ceptions to this rule, such as gold or uranium, elements prized
because of arbitrary economic conventions or aesthetic judg¬
ments, or because they have remarkable practical applications.

The fact that atoms are composed of three kinds of elementary
particles—protons, neutrons and electrons—is a comparatively re¬
cent finding. The neutron was not discovered until 1932. Mod¬
ern physics and chemistry have reduced the complexity of the
sensible world to an astonishing simplicity: three units put to¬
gether in various patterns make, essentially, everything.

The neutrons, as we have said and as their name suggests,
carry no electrical charge. The protons have a positive charge
and the electrons an eaual negative charge. The attraction between

* Silicon is an atom. Silicone is a molecule, one of billions of different
varieties containing silicon. Silicon and silicone have different properties
and applications.

A representation of some of the 92 natu¬
rally occurring chemical elements. The
atomic number (equal to the number of
protons—or electrons) is shown for each
element in red. The number of neutrons
for each element is shown in black. The
atomic weight is equal to the number of
protons plus neutrons in the atomic nu¬
cleus. Under typical terrestrial pressures
and temperatures, some elements are
solids (e.g., selenium, atomic number 34),
some are liquids (e.g., bromine, 35), and
some are gases (e.g., krypton, 36).

BILL RAY

The turbulent surface of the Sun. Shown is the granulation, the solar provinces in which hot gas rises and sinks. Each
turbulent cell is about 2,000 kilometers across, about the distance from Paris to Kiev. Photograph in ordinary yellow
light from Pic du Midi Observatory, France.

The Lives of the Stars — 223

the unlike charges of electrons and protons is what holds the
atom together. Since each atom is electrically neutral, the
number of protons in the nucleus must exactly equal the number
of electrons in the electron cloud. The chemistry of an atom
depends only on the number of electrons, which equals the
number of protons, and which is called the atomic number.
Chemistry is simply numbers, an idea Pythagoras would have
liked. If you are an atom with one proton, you are hydrogen;
two, helium; three, lithium; four, beryllium; five, boron; six, can
bon; seven, nitrogen; eight, oxygen; and so on, up to 92 protons,
in which case your name is uranium.

Like charges, charges of the same sign, strongly repel one
another. We can think of it as a dedicated mutual aversion to
their own kind, a little as if the world were densely populated by
anchorites and misanthropes. Electrons repel electrons. Protons
repel protons. So how can a nucleus stick together? Why does it
not instantly fly apart? Because there is another force of nature:
not gravity, not electricity, but the short-range nuclear force,
which, like a set of hooks that engage only when protons and
neutrons come very close together, thereby overcomes the elec¬
trical repulsion among the protons. The neutrons, which con¬
tribute nuclear forces of attraction and no electrical forces of
repulsion, provide a kind of glue that helps to hold the nucleus
together. Longing for solitude, the hermits have been chained to
their grumpy fellows and set among others given to indiscrimi¬
nate and voluble amiability.

Close-up of a sunspot group in red hy¬
drogen light. Sunspots are comparatively
cooler regions with strong magnetic fields.
The adjacent dark “spicules” are ordered
by local magnetism, somewhat as iron fil¬
ings are by a bar magnet. The adjacent
bright “plages” are associated with the ap¬
pearance of the great storms called solar
flares. Courtesy Big Bear Solar Observa¬
tory.

The photosphere of the Sun, the region in
the solar atmosphere from which ordinary
visible light is radiated to space. This
photograph was taken near a maximum in
sunspot activity, which recurs every 11.2
years. At such times there may be 100
separate sunspots visible. They are darker
than their surroundings because they are
about 2000°C cooler. Sunspots were first
discovered by Galileo, although under fa¬
vorable conditions—at sunset, for exam¬
ple—they can be seen with the naked eye.
Courtesy Gary Chapman, San Fernando
Observatory, California State University,
North ridge.

224 - Cosmos

A lifeform and its star. Through a solar
telescope equipped with a filter admitting
only the red light emitted by hot hydro-
gen gas, the sunspots appear dark. In fore¬
ground, on a mountain, is an exultant
human being. Courtesy National Oceanic
and Atmospheric Administration. Photo¬
graph by Joseph Sutorick.

Two protons and two neutrons are the nucleus of a helium
atom, which turns out to be very stable. Three helium nuclei
make a carbon nucleus; four, oxygen; five, neon; six, magnesium;
seven, silicon; eight, sulfur; and so on. Every time we add one or
more protons and enough neutrons to keep the nucleus together,
we make a new chemical element. If we subtract one proton and
three neutrons from mercury, we make gold, the dream of the
ancient alchemists. Beyond uranium there are other elements
that do not naturally occur on Earth. They are synthesized by
human beings and in most cases promptly fall to pieces. One of
them, Element 94, is called plutonium and is one of the most
toxic substances known. Unfortunately, it falls to pieces rather
slowly.

Where do the naturally occurring elements come from? We
might contemplate a separate creation of each atomic species. But
the universe, all of it, almost everywhere, is 99 percent hydrogen
and helium,* the two simplest elements. Helium, in fact, was

*The Earth is an exception, because our primordial hydrogen, only
weakly bound by our planet’s comparatively feeble gravitational attrac¬
tion, has by now largely escaped to space. Jupiter, with its more massive
gravity, has retained at least much of its original complement of the
lightest element.

The Lives of the Stars — 225

detected on the Sun before it was found on the Earth—hence its
name (from Helios, one of the Greek sun gods.) Might the other
chemical elements have somehow evolved from hydrogen and
helium? To balance the electrical repulsion, pieces of nuclear
matter would have to be brought very close together so that the
short-range nuclear forces are engaged. This can happen only at
very high temperatures where the particles are moving so fast
that the repulsive force does not have time to act—temperatures
of tens of millions of degrees. In nature, such high temperatures
and attendant high pressures are common only in the insides of
the stars.

We have examined our Sun, the nearest star, in various
wavelengths from radio waves to ordinary visible light to X-rays,
all of which arise only from its outermost layers. It is not exactly a
red-hot stone, as Anaxagoras thought, but rather a great ball of
hydrogen and helium gas, glowing because of its high tempera¬
tures, in the same way that a poker glows when it is brought to
red heat. Anaxagoras was at least partly right. Violent solar
storms produce brilliant flares that disrupt radio communications
on Earth; and immense arching plumes of hot gas, guided by the
Sun’s magnetic field, the solar prominences, which dwarf the
Earth. The sunspots, sometimes visible to the naked eye at sun¬
set, are cooler regions of enhanced magnetic field strength. All
this incessant, roiling, turbulent activity is in the comparatively
cool visible surface. We see only to temperatures of about 6,000
degrees. But the hidden interior of the Sun, where sunlight is
being generated, is at 40 million degrees.

Stars and their accompanying planets are born in the gravita¬
tional collapse of a cloud of interstellar gas and dust. The colli¬
sion of the gas molecules in the interior of the cloud heats it,
eventually to the point where hydrogen begins to fuse into he¬
lium: four hydrogen nuclei combine to form a helium nucleus,
with an attendant release of a gamma-ray photon. Suffering al¬
ternate absorption and emission by the overlying matter, gradu¬
ally working its way toward the surface of the star, losing energy
at every step, the photon’s epic journey takes a million years
until, as visible light, it reaches the surface and is radiated to
space. The star has turned on. The gravitational collapse of the
prestellar cloud has been halted. The weight of the outer layers
of the star is now supported by the high temperatures and pres¬
sures generated in the interior nuclear reactions. The Sun has
been in such a stable situation for the past five billion years.
Thermonuclear reactions like those in a hydrogen bomb are
powering the Sun in a contained and continuous explosion, con¬
verting some four hundred million tons (4 x 10 14 grams) of
hydrogen into helium every second. When we look up at night
and view the stars, everything we see is shining because of distant
nuclear fusion.

In the direction of the star Deneb, in the constellation of

226 - Cosmos

Loops of hot ionized gas above an active
solar region are constrained to follow the
local magnetic lines of force, like iron fil¬
ings in the held of a bar magnet. This
Skylab photo was taken in far ultraviolet
light. Such light is readily absorbed by the
Earth’s atmosphere, so such pictures can
be obtained only from Earth satellites or
interplanetary probes. Courtesy NASA.

Cygnus the Swan, is an enormous glowing superbubble of ex¬
tremely hot gas, probably produced by supernova explosions, the
deaths of stars, near the center of the bubble. At the periphery,
interstellar matter is compressed by the supernova shock wave,
triggering new generations of cloud collapse and star formation.
In this sense, stars have parents; and, as is sometimes also true for
humans, a parent may die in the birth of the child.

Stars like the Sun are born in batches, in great compressed
cloud complexes such as the Orion Nebula. Seen from the out¬
side, such clouds seem dark and gloomy. But inside, they are
brilliantly illuminated by the hot newborn stars (p. 230). Later,
the stars wander out of their nursery to seek their fortunes in the
Milky Way, stellar adolescents still surrounded by tufts of glow¬
ing nebulosity, residues still gravitationally attached of their am-
niotic gas. The Pleiades (p. 231) are a nearby example. As in the
families of humans, the maturing stars journey far from home,
and the siblings see little of each other. Somewhere in the Galaxy
there are stars—perhaps dozens of them—that are the brothers
and sisters of the Sun, formed from the same cloud complex,
some 5 billion years ago. But we do not know which stars they
are. They may, for all we know, be on the other side of the
Milky Way.

The conversion of hydrogen into helium in the center of the
Sun not only accounts for the Sun’s brightness in photons of

The Lives of the Stars — 227

A hole in the corona of the Sun. Surrounding the solar photosphere is the thin outer atmosphere of the Sun, at a
temperature of a million degrees, which changes its shape with the 11.2-year solar cycle. The corona is seen here in
soft X-rays as a red halo about the Sun. The coronal hole is boot-shaped at center. Through such holes stream the
protons and electrons of the solar wind, on their way past the planets to interstellar space. Skylab photo, courtesy

NASA.

228 - Cosmos

The death of the Earth and Sun* Several billion years from now, there will be a last perfect day (top left).
Then, over a period of millions of years, the Sun will swell, the Earth will heat, many lifeforms will be
extinguished, and the shoreline will retreat (top right). The oceans will rapidly evaporate (bottom left),

The Lives of the Stars — 229

and the atmosphere will escape to space. As the Sun evolves toward a red giant (bottom right), the Earth
will become dry, barren and airless. Eventually the Sun will fill most of the sky, and may engulf the
Earth. Paintings by Adolf Schaller.

230 - Cosmos

The Triffid Nebula in the constellation
Sagittarius, several thousand light-years
away. Stars embedded in the nebula in¬
duce the gas to shine. Most of the stars we
see here are not associated with the neb¬
ula, but lie between it and us. The dark
lanes in the nebula are composed of inter¬
stellar dust. Courtesy Hale Observatories.

The Orion Nebula, the largest complex of
gas and dust known in the Milky Way
Galaxy. The first person to resolve indi¬
vidual stars in the inner region of this
nebula was Christiaan Huygens in 1656.
The gas is excited by the light of hot,
young stars, recently formed, perhaps only
25,000 years old. The Nebula is today
visible with the naked eye. Did our ances¬
tors know it 100,000 years ago? Courtesy
Hale Observatories.

visible light; it also produces a radiance of a more mysterious and
ghostly kind: The Sun glows faintly in neutrinos, which, like
photons, weigh nothing and travel at the speed of light. But
neutrinos are not photons. They are not a kind of light. Neu¬
trinos have the same intrinsic angular momentum, or spin, as pro¬
tons, electrons and neutrons; while photons have twice as much
spin. Matter is transparent to neutrinos, which pass almost effort¬
lessly through the Earth and through the Sun. Only a tiny fraction
of them is stopped by the intervening matter. As I look up at the
Sun for a second, a billion neutrinos pass through my eyeball. Of
course, they are not stopped at the retina as ordinary photons are
but continue unmolested through the back of my head. The
curious part is that if at night I look down at the ground, toward
the place where the Sun would be (if the Earth were not in the
way), almost exactly the same number of solar neutrinos
pass through my eyeball, pouring through an interposed Earth
which is as transparent to neutrinos as a pane of clear glass is to
visible light.

If our knowledge of the solar interior is as complete as we
think, and if we also understand the nuclear physics that makes
neutrinos, then we should be able to calculate with fair accuracy
how many solar neutrinos we should receive in a given area-
such as my eyeball—in a given unit of time, such as a second.
Experimental confirmation of the calculation is much more diffi¬
cult. Since neutrinos pass directly through the Earth, we cannot
catch a given one. But for a vast number of neutrinos, a small
fraction will interact with matter and in the appropriate circum¬
stances might be detected. Neutrinos can on rare occasion con¬
vert chlorine atoms into argon atoms, with the same total
number of protons and neutrons. To detect the predicted solar
neutrino flux, you need an immense amount of chlorine, so
American physicists have poured a huge quantity of cleaning
fluid into the Homestake Mine in Lead, South Dakota. The
chlorine is microchemically swept for the newly produced argon.
The more argon found, the more neutrinos inferred. These ex¬
periments imply that the Sun is dimmer in neutrinos than the
calculations predict.

There is a real and unsolved mystery here. The low solar
neutrino flux probably does not put our view of stellar nucleo¬
synthesis in jeopardy, but it surely means something important.
Proposed explanations range from the hypothesis that neutrinos
fall to pieces during their passage between the Sun and the Earth
to the idea that the nuclear fires in the solar interior are tempo¬
rarily banked, sunlight being generated in our time partly by slow
gravitational contraction. But neutrino astronomy is very new.
For the moment we stand amazed at having created a tool that
can peer directly into the blazing heart of the Sun. As the sensi¬
tivity of the neutrino telescope improves, it may become possible
to probe nuclear fusion in the deep interiors of the nearby stars.

The Lives of the Stars — 231

But hydrogen fusion cannot continue forever: in the Sun or
any other star, there is only so much hydrogen fuel in its hot
interior. The fate of a star, the end of its life cycle, depends very
much on its initial mass. If, after whatever matter it has lost to
space, a star retains two or three times the mass of the Sun, it
ends its life cycle in a startlingly different mode than the Sun. But
the Sun’s fate is spectacular enough. When the central hydrogen
has all reacted to form helium, five or six billion years from now,
the zone of hydrogen fusion will slowly migrate outward, an
expanding shell of thermonuclear reactions, until it reaches the
place where the temperatures are less than about ten million
degrees. Then hydrogen fusion will shut itself off. Meanwhile
the self-gravity of the Sun will force a renewed contraction of its
helium-rich core and a further increase in its interior tempera¬
tures and pressures. The helium nuclei will be jammed together
still more tightly, so much so that they begin to stick together, the
hooks of their short-range nuclear forces becoming engaged de¬
spite the mutual electrical repulsion. The ash will become fuel,
and the Sun will be triggered into a second round of fusion
reactions.

This process will generate the elements carbon and oxygen
and provide additional energy for the Sun to continue shining for
a limited time. A star is a phoenix, destined to rise for a time
from its own ashes.* Under the combined influence of hydrogen
fusion in a thin shell far from the solar interior and the high
temperature helium fusion in the core, the Sun will undergo a
major change: its exterior will expand and cool. The Sun will
become a red giant star, its visible surface so tar from its interior
that the gravity at its surface grows feeble, its atmosphere ex¬
panding into space in a kind of stellar gale. When the Sun, ruddy
and bloated, becomes a red giant, it will envelop and devour the
planets Mercury and Venus—and probably the Earth as well.
The inner solar system will then reside within the Sun.

Billions of years from now, there will be a last perfect day on
Earth. Thereafter the Sun will slowly become red and distended,
presiding over an Earth sweltering even at the poles. The Arctic
and Antarctic icecaps will melt, flooding the coasts of the. world.
The high oceanic temperatures will release more water vapor
into the air, increasing cloudiness, shielding the Earth from sun¬
light and delaying the end a little. But solar evolution is inexora¬
ble. Eventually the oceans will boil, the atmosphere will
evaporate away to space and a catastrophe of the most immense
proportions imaginable will overtake our planetfl In the meantime,

* Stars more massive than the Sun achieve higher central temperatures
and pressures in their late evolutionary stages. They are able to rise more
than once from their ashes, using carbon and oxygen as fuel for synthe¬
sizing still heavier elements.

t The Aztecs foretold a time “when the Earth has become tired . . . ,
when the seed of Earth has ended.” On that day, they believed, the Sun
will fall from the sky and the stars will be shaken from the heavens.

The Pleiades in the constellation Taurus,
first examined through the telescope by
Galileo. The spectra of the blue nebulo¬
sity is the same as that of the nearby stars,
showing the nebulosity to be dust, re¬
flecting the light of the newly-formed
stars. About 400 light-years away, the
brighter stars were named by the ancient
Greeks after the daughters of Atlas, the
Titan who held the heavens up. Courtesy
Hale Observatories.

The Rosette Nebula resembles a planetary
nebula, but is associated with many stars,
not just one; and these stars are hot and
young (less than a million years old), while
the central star in a planetary nebula is
usually hot and billions of years old. Ra¬
diation pressure from the central stars is
driving the red hydrogen gas out into
space. Courtesy Hale Observatories.

BILL RAY

232 - Cosmos

A true planetary nebula in the constella^
tion Aquarius, composed of a thin out'
ward'moving shell of hot hydrogen. Such
nebulae are typically a few lighnyears
across and expanding at about 50 kilome'
ters per second from a central star which
has a surface temperature in excess of
100,000 degrees. Five billion years from
now, at the end of the red giant stage in
the evolution of our Sun, the solar system
from afar may look like this. Courtesy
Hale Observatories.

A photograph of an Anasazi rock painting
from the lower face of an overhanging
ledge in the canyonlands of New Mexico.
Painted in the middle of the eleventh
century, it probably depicts the supernova
of 1054 in its proper relationship to the
crescent moon on the days of its discow
ery.

human beings will almost certainly have evolved into
something quite different. Perhaps our descendants will be able
to control or moderate stellar evolution. Or perhaps they will
merely pick up and leave for Mars or Europa or Titan or, at last,
as Robert Goddard envisioned, seek out an uninhabited planet in
some young and promising planetary system.

The Sun’s stellar ash can be reused for fuel only up to a point.
Eventually the time will come when the solar interior is all
carbon and oxygen, when at the prevailing temperatures and
pressures no further nuclear reactions can occur. After the central
helium is almost all used up, the interior of the Sun will continue
its postponed collapse, the temperatures will rise again, triggering
a last round of nuclear reactions and expanding the solar atmo'
sphere a little. In its death throes, the Sun will slowly pulsate,
expanding and contracting once every few millennia, eventually
spewing its atmosphere into space in one or more concentric
shells of gas. The hot exposed solar interior will flood the shell
with ultraviolet light, inducing a lovely red and blue fluorescence
extending beyond the orbit of Pluto. Perhaps half the mass of the
Sun will be lost in this way. The solar system will then be filled
with an eerie radiance, the ghost of the Sun, outward bound.

When we look around us in our little corner of the Milky'
Way, we see many stars surrounded by spherical shells of glow'
ing gas, the planetary nebulae. (They have nothing to do with
planets, but some of them seemed reminiscent in inferior tele'
scopes of the blue'green discs of Uranus and Neptune.) They
appear as rings, but only because, as with soap bubbles, we see
more of them at the periphery than at the center. Every planetary
nebula is a token of a star in extremis. Near the central star there
may be a retinue of dead worlds, the remnants of planets once
full of life and now airless and oceamfree, bathed in a wraithlike
luminance. The remains of the Sun, the exposed solar core at
first enveloped in its planetary nebula, will be a small hot star,
cooling to space, collapsed to a density unheard of on Earth,
more than a ton per teaspoonful. Billions of years hence, the Sun
will become a degenerate white dwarf, cooling like all those
points of light we see at the centers of planetary nebulae from
high surface temperatures to its ultimate state, a dark and dead
black dwarf.

Two stars of roughly the same mass will evolve roughly in
parallel. But a more massive star will spend its nuclear fuel faster,
become a red giant sooner, and be first to enter the final white
dwarf decline. There should therefore be, as there are, many
cases of binary stars, one component a red giant, the other a
white dwarf. Some such pairs are so close together that they
touch, and the glowing stellar atmosphere flows from the dis'
tended red giant to the compact white dwarf, tending to fall on a
particular province of the surface of the white dwarf. The hydrogen

The Lives of the Stars - 233

accumulates, compressed to higher and higher pressures
and temperatures by the intense gravity of the white dwarf, until
the stolen atmosphere of the red giant undergoes thermonuclear
reactions, and the white dwarf briefly flares into brilliance. Such a
binary is called a nova and has quite a different origin from a
supernova. Novae occur only in binary systems and are powered
by hydrogen fusion; supernovae occur in single stars and are
powered by silicon fusion.

Atoms synthesized in the interiors of stars are commonly re-
turned to the interstellar gas. Red giants find their outer atmo¬
spheres blowing away into space; planetary nebulae are the final
stages of Sunlike stars blowing their tops. Supernovae violently
eject much of their stellar mass into space. The atoms returned
are, naturally, those most readily made in the thermonuclear
reactions in stellar interiors: Hydrogen fuses into helium, helium
into carbon, carbon into oxygen and thereafter, in massive stars,
by the successive addition of further helium nuclei, neon, mag¬
nesium, silicon, sulfur, and so on are built—additions by stages,
two protons and two neutrons per stage, all the way to iron.
Direct fusion of silicon also generates iron, a pair of silicon atoms,
each with twenty-eight protons and neutrons, joining, at a tem¬
perature of billions of degrees, to make an atom of iron with
fifty-six protons and neutrons.

These are all familiar chemical elements. We recognize their
names. Such stellar nuclear reactions do not readily generate
erbium, hafnium, dyprosium, praseodymium or yttrium, but
rather the elements we know in everyday life, elements returned
to the interstellar gas, where they are swept up in a subsequent
generation of cloud collapse and star and planet formation. All
the elements of the Earth except hydrogen and some helium
have been cooked by a kind of stellar alchemy billions of years
ago in stars, some of which are today inconspicuous white dwarfs
on the other side of the Milky Way Galaxy. The nitrogen in our
DNA, the calcium in our teeth, the iron in our blood, the carbon
in our apple pies were made in the interiors of collapsing stars.
We are made of stars tuff.

Some of the rarer elements are generated in the supernova
explosion itself. We have relatively abundant gold and uranium
on Earth only because many supernova explosions had occurred
just before the solar system formed. Other planetary systems may
have somewhat different amounts of our rare elements. Are
there planets where the inhabitants proudly display pendants of
niobium and bracelets of protactinium, while gold is a laboratory
curiosity? Would our lives be improved if gold and uranium were
as obscure and unimportant on Earth as praseodymium?

The origin and evolution of life are connected in the most
intimate way with the origin and evolution of the stars. First: The
very matter of which we are composed, the atoms that make life
possible, were generated long ago and far away in giant red stars.

The Crab Nebula in Taurus, 6,000 light-
years distant; it is the remains of the su¬
pernova explosion witnessed in the year
1054 on Earth. Its filaments are unraveling
at about 1,100 kilometers per second.
After almost a millennium of expansion it
is still losing about 100,000 times more
energy to space every second than the Sun
does. At its core is a condensed neutron
star, a pulsar, flashing about 30 times a
second. The period is known very pre¬
cisely. On June 28, 1969, the period was
0.033099324 seconds, and was slowing
down at a rate of roughly 0.0012 seconds
per century. The corresponding loss of
rotational energy is just enough to account
for the brightness of the Nebula. The
Crab is rich in heavy elements being re¬
turned to interstellar space for future
generations of star formation. Courtesy
Hale Observatories.

The Veil Nebula, part of an old spherical
supernova remnant called the Cygnus
Loop. The supernova explosion that
formed it occurred about 50,000 years
ago. It is still expanding at about 100 kilo¬
meters per second, and is glowing from
collisions with interstellar gas and dust.
The atoms in the Veil are slowed by col¬
lision and eventually become part of the
interstellar medium. Courtesy Hale Ob¬
servatories.

234 - Cosmos

The Milky Way Galaxy seen edge-on and
face-on with the position of the Sun and
the historical supernovae indicated. Be¬
cause massive stars tend to lie in the plane
of the Galaxy, their end products, the su-
pemovae, do so as well. But obscuring
dust also is concentrated in the galactic
plane, and supernovae tend to be visible
only when relatively nearby: no such ex¬
plosion has ever been recorded on the
other side of the Galaxy, although they
undoubtedly occur there. The explosion
that made the Crab Nebula, and Tycho’s
supernova of 1572 both occurred in ga¬
lactic spiral arms exterior to the position
of the Sun. Kepler’s supernova of 1604
occurred near the center of the Galaxy,
but was visible from Earth because it was
above the galactic plane and relatively free
of obscuring dust. The diameter of the
Galaxy is about 100,000 light-years.
Courtesy Scientific American . From His¬
torical Supernovas by F. Richard Stephen¬
son and David H. Clark. Copyright ©
1976 by Scientific American, Inc. All
rights reserved.

The Large Magellanic Cloud, a small, ir¬
regular satellite galaxy of the Milky Way.
As in all galaxies, supernova explosions
happen here. An unprecedented burst of
X-rays and gamma rays was detected from
a small region of the sky corresponding to
supernova remnant N49 in the Large Ma¬
gellanic Cloud on March 5, 1979—by

accident the date that Voyager 1
encountered the Jupiter system. Courtesy
Yerkes Observatory, University of Chi¬
cago.

The relative abundance of the chemical elements found in the
Cosmos matches the relative abundance of atoms generated in
stars so well as to leave little doubt that red giants and super¬
novae are the ovens and crucibles in which matter has been
forged. The Sun is a second- or third-generation star. All the
matter in it, all the matter you see around you, has been through
one or two previous cycles of stellar alchemy. Second: The exis¬
tence of certain varieties of heavy atoms on the Earth suggests
that there was a nearby supernova explosion shortly before the
solar system was formed. But this is unlikely to be a mere coinci¬
dence; more likely, the shock wave produced by the supernova
compressed interstellar gas and dust and triggered the condensa¬
tion of the solar system. Third: When the Sun turned on, its
ultraviolet radiation poured into the atmosphere of the Earth; its
warmth generated lightning; and these energy sources sparked
the complex organic molecules that led to the origin of life.
Fourth: Life on Earth runs almost exclusively on sunlight. Plants
gather the photons and convert solar to chemical energy. An¬
imals parasitize the plants. Farming is simply the methodical har¬
vesting of sunlight, using plants as grudging intermediaries. We

The Lives of the Stars - 235

are, almost all of us, solar-powered* Finally, the hereditary
changes called mutations provide the raw material for evolution*
Mutations, from which nature selects its new inventory of life
forms, are produced in part by cosmic rays—high-energy particles
ejected almost at the speed of light in supernova explosions* The
evolution of life on Earth is driven in part by the spectacular
deaths of distant, massive suns*

Imagine carrying a Geiger counter and a piece of uranium ore
to some place deep beneath the Earth—a gold mine, say, or a lava
tube, a cave carved through the Earth by a river of molten rock*
The sensitive counter clicks when exposed to gamma rays or to
such high-energy charged panicles as protons and helium nuclei*
If we bring it close to the uranium ore, which is emitting helium
nuclei in a spontaneous nuclear decay, the count rate, the
number of clicks per minute, increases dramatically* If we drop
the uranium ore into a heavy lead canister, the count rate de¬
clines substantially; the lead has absorbed the uranium radiation*
But some clicks can still be heard* Of the remaining counts, a
traction come from natural radioactivity in the walls of the cave*
But there are more clicks than can be accounted for by radioac¬
tivity* Some of them are caused by high-energy charged particles
penetrating the roof* We are listening to cosmic rays, produced in
another age in the depths of space* Cosmic rays, mainly electrons
and protons, have bombarded the Earth for the entire history of
life on our planet* A star destroys itself thousands of light-years
away and produces cosmic rays that spiral through the Milky
Way Galaxy for millions of years until, quite by accident, some
of them strike the Earth, and our hereditary material* Perhaps
some key steps in the development of the genetic code, or the
Cambrian explosion, or bipedal stature among our ancestors
were initiated by cosmic rays*

On July 4, in the year 1054, Chinese astronomers recorded
what they called a “guest star” in the constellation of Taurus, the
Bull* A star never before seen became brighter than any star in

Late stages of stellar evolution* In a con¬
tact binary, the luminous stellar atmo¬
sphere flows from a red giant star (left) to
the accretion disk around a pulsar neutron
star (right). The disk glows in X-rays and
other radiation at the point of contact*
Painting by Don Davis.

The death of a solar system. Schematic
views of the loss of planetary atmospheres
and the vaporization of worlds when the
local sun becomes a supernova. The
shock waves we see propagate beyond the
local system, compress the interstellar gas
and dust, and lead to the formation of
new planetary systems. Paintings by Adolf
Schaller, Rick Sternbach and John Alli¬
son.

236 - Cosmos

The influence of gravity on matter and light. Alice, the
March Hare, the Mad Hatter and the Cheshire Cat from
Lewis Carroll’s Alice in Wonderland enjoy a tea party
under ordinary Earth gravity (a) of 1 g. The light beam
from the lantern at right is undetected by the Earth’s
gravity. As we approach 0 g, the slightest motion sends
our friends pirouetting off into space (b, c); the tea forms
itself into floating spherical blobs. As we return to 1 g,
Alice and companions are brought back to Earth, and,
briefly, it is raining tea (d)* At several g’s, they are unable
even to move themselves a little (e, f), but the beam of
light is unaffected. By the time we reach 100,000 g’s, the
entire landscape is crushed flat. At a billion g’s, gravity
perceptibly bends light, and at billions of g’s, light falls
back to the ground. At that point, the intense gravity has
converted Wonderland into a black hole. Drawings after
Tenniel by Brown.

The Lives of the Stars — 237

the sky. Halfway around the world, in the American Southwest,
there was then a high culture, rich in astronomical tradition, that
also witnessed this brilliant new star.* From carbon 14 dating of
the remains of a charcoal fire, we know that in the middle
eleventh century some Anasazi, the antecedents of the Hopi of
today, were living under an overhanging ledge in what is today
New Mexico. One of them seems to have drawn on the cliff
overhang, protected from the weather, a picture of the new star.
Its position relative to the crescent moon would have been just as
was depicted. There is also a handprint, perhaps the artist’s sig¬
nature.

This remarkable star, 5,000 light-years distant, is now called
the Crab Supernova, because an astronomer centuries later was
unaccountably reminded of a crab when looking at the explosion
remnant through his telescope. The Crab Nebula is the remains
of a massive star that blew itself up. The explosion was seen on
Earth with the naked eye for three months. Easily visible in
broad daylight, you could read by it at night. On the average, a
supernova occurs in a given galaxy about once every century.
During the lifetime of a typical galaxy, about ten billion years, a
hundred million stars will have exploded—a great many, but still
only about one star in a thousand. In the Milky Way, after the
event of 1054, there was a supernova observed in 1572, and
described by Tycho Brahe, and another, just after, in 1604,
described by Johannes Keplerd Unhappily, no supernova explo¬
sions have been observed in our Galaxy since the invention of
the telescope, and astronomers have been chafing at the bit for
some centuries.

Supernovae are now routinely observed in other galaxies.
Among my candidates for the sentence that would most
thoroughly astonish an astronomer of the early 1900’s is the
following, from a paper by David Helfand and Knox Long in the
December 6, 1979, issue of the British journal Nature: “On 5
March, 1979, an extremely intense burst of hard x-rays and
gamma rays was recorded by the nine interplanetary spacecraft of
the burst sensor network, and localized by time-of-flight determi¬
nations to a position coincident with the supernova remnant N49
in the Large Magellanic Cloud.” (The Large Magellanic Cloud,

The dial of a magic gravity machine with
which we could specify the local accelera¬
tion due to gravity. The standard value
for the surface of the Earth is 1 g. At the
high end of the dial we begin to approach
the gravitational forces that make neutron
stars and black holes.

* Moslem observers noted it as well. But there is not a word about it in all
the chronicles of Europe.

t Kepler published in 1606 a book called De Stella Nova, “On the New
Star,” in which he wonders if a supernova is the result of some random
concatenation of atoms in the heavens. He presents what he says is “. . .
not my own opinion, but my wife’s: Yesterday, when weary with writing,
I was called to supper, and a salad I had asked for was set before me. ‘It
seems then,’ 1 said, ‘if pewter dishes, leaves of lettuce, grains of salt, drops
of water, vinegar, oil and slices of eggs had been flying about in the air for
all eternity, it might at last happen by chance that there would come a
salad.’ ‘Yes,’ responded my lovely, ‘but not so nice as this one of mine.’ ”

238 - Cosmos

A photograph of the X-ray sky, showing
the bright source Cygnus X-l (center), a
probable black hole. An image from High
Energy Astrophysical Observatory 2, in
Earth orbit. Courtesy Ricardo Giacconi
and NASA.

Schematic representation of the distortion
of flat space by a massive object, useful in
thinking about gravitation and black
holes.

so-called because the first inhabitant of the Northern Hemisphere
to notice it was Magellan, is a small satellite galaxy of the Milky
Way, 180,000 light-years distant. There is also, as you might
expect, a Small Magellanic Cloud.) However, in the same issue of
Nature , E. P. Mazets and colleagues of the Ioffe Institute, Lenin¬
grad—who observed this source with the gamma-ray burst detec¬
tor aboard the Venera 11 and 12 spacecraft on their way to land
on Venus—argue that what is being seen is a flaring pulsar only a
few hundred light-years away. But despite the close agreement in
position Helfand and Long do not insist that the gamma-ray
outburst is associated with the supernova remnant. They chari¬
tably consider many alternatives, including the surprising possi¬
bility that the source lies within the solar system. Perhaps it is the
exhaust of an alien starship on its long voyage home. But a
rousing of the stellar fires in N49 is a simpler hypothesis: we are
sure there are such things as supernovae.

The fate of the inner solar system as the Sun becomes a red
giant is grim enough. But at least the planets will never be melted
and frizzled by an erupting supernova. That is a fate reserved for
planets near stars more massive than the Sun. Since such stars
with higher temperatures and pressures run rapidly through their
store of nuclear fuel, their lifetimes are much shorter than the
Sun’s. A star tens of times more massive than the Sun can stably
convert hydrogen to helium for only a few million years before
moving briefly on to more exotic nuclear reactions. Thus there is
almost certainly not enough time for the evolution of advanced
forms of life on any accompanying planets; and it will be rare that
beings elsewhere can ever know that their star will become a
supernova: if they live long enough to understand supernovae,
their star is unlikely to become one.

The essential preliminary to a supernova explosion is the gen¬
eration by silicon fusion of a massive iron core. Under enormous
pressure, the free electrons in the stellar interior are forcibly
melded with the protons of the iron nuclei, the equal and oppo¬
site electrical charges canceling each other out; the inside of the
star is turned into a single giant atomic nucleus, occupying a
much smaller volume than the precursor electrons and iron nu¬
clei. The core implodes violently, the exterior rebounds and a
supernova explosion results. A supernova can be brighter than
the combined radiance of all the other stars in the galaxy within
which it is embedded. All those recently hatched massive blue-
white supergiant stars in Orion are destined in the next few
million years to become supernovae, a continuing cosmic
fireworks in the constellation of the hunter.

The awesome supernova explosion ejects into space most of
the matter of the precursor star—a little residual hydrogen and
helium and significant amounts of other atoms, carbon and sili¬
con, iron and uranium. Remaining is a core of hot neutrons,
bound together by nuclear forces, a single, massive atomic nucleus

The Lives of the Stars — 239

with an atomic weight about 10 56 , a sun thirty kilometers
across; a tiny, shrunken, dense, withered stellar fragment, a rap¬
idly rotating neutron star. As the core of a massive red giant
collapses to form such a neutron star, it spins faster. The neutron
star at the center of the Crab Nebula is an immense atomic
nucleus, about the size of Manhattan, spinning thirty times a
second. Its powerful magnetic field, amplified during the collapse,
traps charged particles rather as the much tinier magnetic field of
Jupiter does. Electrons in the rotating magnetic field emit beamed
radiation not only at radio frequencies but in visible light as well.
If the Earth happens to lie in the beam of this cosmic lighthouse,
we see it flash once each rotation. This is the reason it is called a
pulsar. Blinking and ticking like a cosmic metronome, pulsars
keep far better time than the most accurate ordinary clock.
Long-term timing of the radio pulse rate of some pulsars, for
instance, one called PSR 0329+54, suggests that these objects
may have one or more small planetary companions. It is perhaps
conceivable that a planet could survive the evolution of a star
into a pulsar; or a planet could be captured at a later time. I
wonder how the sky would look from the surface of such a
planet.

Neutron star matter weighs about the same as an ordinary
mountain per teaspoonful—so much that if you had a piece of it
and let it go (you could hardly do otherwise), it might pass
effortlessly through the Earth like a falling stone through air,
carving a hole for itself completely through our planet and
emerging out the other side—perhaps in China. People there
might be out for a stroll, minding their own business, when a tiny
lump of neutron star plummets out of the ground, hovers for a
moment, and then returns beneath the Earth, providing at least a
diversion from the routine of the day. If a piece of neutron star
matter were dropped from nearby space, with the Earth rotating
beneath it as it fell, it would plunge repeatedly through the
rotating Earth, punching hundreds of thousands of holes before
friction with the interior of our planet stopped the motion. Be¬
fore it comes to rest at the center of the Earth, the inside of our
planet might look briefly like a Swiss cheese until the subterra¬
nean flow of rock and metal healed the wounds. It is just as well
that large lumps of neutron star matter are unknown on Earth.
But small lumps are everywhere. The awesome power of the
neutron star is lurking in the nucleus of every atom, hidden in
every teacup and dormouse, every breath of air, every apple pie.
The neutron star teaches us respect for the commonplace.

A star like the Sun will end its days, as we have seen, as a red
giant and then a white dwarf. A collapsing star twice as massive
as the Sun will become a supernova and then a neutron star. But
a more massive star, left, after its supernova phase, with, say, five
times the Sun’s mass, has an even more remarkable fate reserved
for it—its gravity will turn it into a black hole. Suppose we had a

A bas-relief of five-pointed stars from
pharaonic temple ruins in Dendera, Egypt.
Photo by Ann Druyan.

240 - Cosmos

Motifs of the Sun and stars from the royal
tombs in the Valley of the Kings on the
west bank of the Nile, near Luxor, Egypt.
Upper: The Sun’s rays fall through space
on what seems to be a representation of a
spherical Earth. Middle: The scarab or
dung beetle, whose life cycle represented
to the ancient Egyptians a metaphor of
cyclical processes in nature and, particu-
larly, the daily return of the Sun. Lower:
The gods of the stars, in some tombs an
rayed by the hundreds. Photographs by
the author.

magic gravity machine—a device with which we could control
the Earth’s gravity, perhaps by turning a dial. Initially the dial is
set at 1 g* and everything behaves as we have grown up to
expect. The animals and plants on Earth and the structures of our
buildings are all evolved or designed for 1 g. If the gravity were
much less, there might be tall, spindly shapes that would not be
tumbled or crushed by their own weight. If the gravity were
much more, plants and animals and architecture would have to
be short and squat and sturdy in order not to collapse. But even
in a fairly strong gravity field, light would travel in a straight line,
as it does, of course, in everyday life.

Consider (page 236) a possibly typical group of Earth beings.
As we lower the gravity, things weigh less. Near 0 g the slightest
motion sends our friends floating and tumbling up in the air.
Spilled tea—or any other liquid—forms throbbing spherical globs
in the air: the surface tension of the liquid overwhelms gravity.
Balls of tea are everywhere. If now we dial 1 g again, we make a
rain of tea. When we increase the gravity a little—from 1 g to,
say, 3 or 4 g’s—everyone becomes immobilized: even moving a
paw requires enormous effort. As a kindness we remove our
friends from the domain of the gravity machine before we dial
higher gravities still. The beam from a lantern travels in a per¬
fectly straight line (as nearly as we can see) at a few g’s, as it does
at 0 g. At 1000 g’s, the beam is still straight, but trees have
become squashed and flattened; at 100,000 g’s, rocks are crushed
by their own weight. Eventually, nothing at all survives except,
through a special dispensation, the Cheshire cat. When the
gravity approaches a billion g’s, something still more strange
happens. The beam of light, which has until now been heading
straight up into the sky, is beginning to bend. Under extremely
strong gravitational accelerations, even light is affected. If we
increase the gravity still more, the light is pulled back to the
ground near us. Now the cosmic Cheshire cat has vanished; only
its gravitational grin remains.

* 1 g is the acceleration experienced by falling objects on the Earth,
almost 10 meters per second every second. A falling rock will reach a
speed of 10 meters per second after one second of fall, 20 meters per
second after two seconds, and so on until it strikes the ground or is
slowed by friction with the air. On a world where the gravitational
acceleration was much greater, falling bodies would increase their speed
by correspondingly greater amounts. On a world with 10 g acceleration,
a rock would travel 10 x lOm/sec or almost 100 m/sec after the first
second, 200 m/sec after the next second, and so on. A slight stumble
could be fatal. The acceleration due to gravity should always be written
with a lowercase g, to distinguish it from the Newtonian gravitational
constant, G, which is a measure of the strength of gravity everywhere in
the universe, not merely on whatever world or sun we are discussing.
(The Newtonian relationship of the two quantities is F = mg =
GMm/r 2 ; g = GM/r 2 , where F is the gravitational force, M is the mass
of the planet or star, m is the mass of the falling object, and r is the
distance from the falling object to the center of the planet or star.)

The Lives of the Stars — 241

When the gravity is sufficiently high, nothing, not even light,
can get out. Such a place is called a black hole. Enigmatically
indifferent to its surroundings, it is a kind of cosmic Cheshire cat.
When the density and gravity become sufficiently high, the black
hole winks out and disappears from our universe. That is why it
is called black: no light can escape from it. On the inside, because
the light is trapped down there, things may be attractively welh
lit. Even if a black hole is invisible from the outside, its gravita-
tional presence can be palpable. If, on an interstellar voyage, you
are not paying attention, you can find yourself drawn into it
irrevocably, your body stretched unpleasantly into a long, thin
thread. But the matter accreting into a disk surrounding the black
hole would be a sight worth remembering, in the unlikely case
that you survived the trip.

Thermonuclear reactions in the solar interior support the
outer layers of the Sun and postpone for billions of years a
catastrophic gravitational collapse. For white dwarfs, the pressure
of the electrons, stripped from their nuclei, holds the star up. For
neutron stars, the pressure of the neutrons staves off gravity. But
for an elderly star left after supernova explosions and other im¬
petuosities with more than several times the Sun’s mass, there are
no forces known that can prevent collapse. The star shrinks
incredibly, spins, reddens and disappears. A star twenty times the
mass of the Sun will shrink until it is the size of Greater Los
Angeles; the crushing gravity becomes 10 10 g’s, and the star slips
through a self-generated crack in the space-time continuum and
vanishes from our universe.

Black holes were first thought of by the English astronomer
John Michell in 1783. But the idea seemed so bizarre that it was
generally ignored until quite recently. Then, to the astonishment
of many, including many astronomers, evidence was actually
found for the existence of black holes in space. The Earth’s
atmosphere is opaque to X-rays. To determine whether astro¬
nomical objects emit such short wavelengths of light, an X-ray
telescope must be carried aloft. The first X-ray observatory was
an admirably international effort, orbited by the United States
from an Italian launch platform in the Indian Ocean off the coast
of Kenya and named Uhuru, the Swahili word for “freedom.” In
1971, Uhuru discovered a remarkably bright X-ray source in the
constellation of Cygnus, the Swan, flickering on and off a thou¬
sand times a second. The source, called Cygnus X-l, must there¬
fore be very small. Whatever the reason for the flicker,
information on when to turn on and off can cross Cyg X-l no
faster than the speed of light, 300,000 km/sec. Thus Cyg X-l
can be no larger than [300,000 km/sec] * [(1/1000) sec] = 300
kilometers across. Something the size of an asteroid is a brilliant,
blinking source of X-rays, visible over interstellar distances.
What could it possibly be? Cyg X-l is in precisely the same place
in the sky as a hot blue supergiant star, which reveals itself in
visible light to have a massive close but unseen companion that

242 - Cosmos

gravitationally tugs it first in one direction and then in another.
The companion’s mass is about ten times that of the Sun. The
supergiant is an unlikely source of X-rays, and it is tempting to
identify the companion inferred in visible light with the source
detected in X-ray light. But an invisible object weighing ten times
more than the Sun and collapsed into a volume the size of an
asteroid can only be a black hole. The X-rays are plausibly
generated by friction in the disk of gas and dust accreted around
Cyg X4 from its supergiant companion. Other stars called V861
Scorpii, GX339-4, SS433, and Circinus X-2 are also candidate
black holes. Cassiopeia A is the remnant of a supernova whose
light should have reached the Earth in the seventeenth century,
when there were a fair number of astronomers. Yet no one
reported the explosion. Perhaps, as I. S. Shklovskii has suggested,
there is a black hole hiding there, which ate the exploding stellar
core and damped the fires of the supernova. Telescopes in space
are the means for checking these shards and fragments of data
that may be the spoor, the trail, of the legendary black hole.

A helpful way to understand black holes is to think about the
curvature of space. Consider a flat, flexible, lined two-dimen-
sional surface, like a piece of graph paper made of rubber. If we
drop a small mass, the surface is deformed or puckered. A marble
rolls around the pucker in an orbit like that of a planet around
the Sun. In this interpretation, which we owe to Einstein, gravity
is a distortion in the fabric of space. In our example, we see
two-dimensional space warped by mass into a third physical di¬
mension. Imagine we live in a three-dimensional universe, locally
distorted by matter into a fourth physical dimension that we
cannot perceive directly. The greater the local mass, the more
intense the local gravity, and the more severe the pucker, distor¬
tion or warp of space. In this analogy, a black hole is a kind of
bottomless pit. What happens if you fall in? As seen from the
outside, you would take an infinite amount of time to fall in,
because all your clocks—mechanical and biological—would be
perceived as having stopped. But from your point of view, all
your clocks would be ticking away normally. If you could some¬
how survive the gravitational tides and radiation flux, and (a
likely assumption) if the black hole were rotating, it is just possi¬
ble that you might emerge in another part of space-time—some¬
where else in space, somewhen else in time. Such worm holes in
space, a little like those in an apple, have been seriously sug¬
gested, although they have by no means been proved to exist.
Might gravity tunnels provide a kind of interstellar or intergalac-
tic subway, permitting us to travel to inaccessible places much
more rapidly than we could in the ordinary way? Can black holes
serve as time machines, carrying us to the remote past or the
distant future? The fact that such ideas are being discussed even
semi-seriously shows how surreal the universe may be.

We are, in the most profound sense, children of the Cosmos.
Think of the Sun’s heat on your upturned face on a cloudless

The Lives of the Stars - 243

summer’s day; think how dangerous it is to gaze at the Sun
directly. From 150 million kilometers away, we recognize its
power. What would we feel on its seething self-luminous surface,
or immersed in its heart of nuclear fire? The Sun warms us and
feeds us and permits us to see. It fecundated the Earth. It is
powerful beyond human experience. Birds greet the sunrise with
an audible ecstasy. Even some one-celled organisms know to
swim to the light. Our ancestors worshiped the Sun,* and they
were far from foolish. And yet the Sun is an ordinary, even a
mediocre star. If we must worship a power greater than ourselves,
does it not make sense to revere the Sun and stars? Hidden within
every astronomical investigation, sometimes so deeply buried
that the researcher himself is unaware of its presence, lies a kernel
of awe.

The Galaxy is an unexplored continent filled with exotic
beings of stellar dimensions. We have made a preliminary recon¬
naissance and have encountered some of the inhabitants. A few
of them resemble beings we know. Others are bizarre beyond our
most unconstrained fantasies. But we are at the very beginning of
our exploration. Past voyages of discovery suggest that many of
the most interesting inhabitants of the galactic continent remain
as yet unknown and unanticipated. Not far outside the Galaxy
there are almost certainly planets, orbiting stars in the Magellanic
Clouds and in the globular clusters that surround the Milky
Way. Such worlds would offer a breathtaking view of the Galaxy
rising—an enormous spiral form comprising 400 billion stellar
inhabitants, with collapsing gas clouds, condensing planetary sys¬
tems, luminous supergiants, stable middle-aged stars, red giants,
white dwarfs, planetary nebulae, novae, supernovae, neutron
stars and black holes. It would be clear from such a world, as it is
beginning to be clear from ours, how our matter, our form and
much of our character is determined by the deep connection
between life and the Cosmos.

The Milky Way Galaxy rising over an
ocean of another world, high above the
galactic plane. Painting by Adolf Schaller.

* The early Sumerian pictograph for god was an asterisk, the symbol of
the stars. Trie Aztec word for god was Teotl , and its glyph was a rep¬
resentation of the Sun. The heavens were called the Teoatl, the godsea,
the cosmic ocean.

The Dance of Creation. In his manifestation as Lord of the Dance, the Hindu god Shiva dances the dance of Creation.
In this tenth-century Chola bronze, Shiva’s aureole of fire (the prabhamandala) represents the rhythm of the Universe
and emanates from a lotus pedestal, the Hindu symbol of enlightenment. Shiva dances on the prostrate form of the
Apasma-rapurusa, a symbol of human ignorance. The back right hand carries the damaru, a small drum symbolizing
creation. The back left hand holds agni, the fire of destruction. The front left hand is in the gajahasta (“elephant
trunk”) position. The front right hand is held in the abhaya-mundra pose (literally, “do not be afraid”). Courtesy
Norton Simon Museum, Pasadena, California. The bronze is to be returned to India.

Chapter X

THE EDGE
OF FOREVER

There is a thing confusedly formed,

Born before Heaven and Earth.

Silent and void

It stands alone and does not change,

Goes round and does not weary.

It is capable of being the mother of the world.

I know not its name
So I style it ‘The Way.’

I give it the makeshift name of ‘The Great.’

Being great, it is further described as receding,

Receding, it is described as far away,

Being far away, it is described as turning back.

—Lao-tse, Tao Te Ching (China, about 600 B.C.)

There is a way on high, conspicuous in the clear heavens, called the Milky
Way, brilliant with its own brightness. By it the gods go to the dwelling of
the great Thunderer and his royal abode . . . Here the famous and mighty
inhabitants of heaven have their homes. This is the region which I might
make bold to call the Palatine [Way] of the Great Sky.

—Ovid, Metamorphoses (Rome, first century)

Some foolish men declare that a Creator made the world. The doctrine that
the world was created is ill-advised, and should be rejected.

If God created the world, where was He before creation?. . .

How could God have made the world without any raw material? If you say
He made this first, and then the world, you are faced with an endless
regression . . .

Know that the world is uncreated, as time itself is, without beginning and
end.

And it is based on the principles . . .

—The Mahapurana (The Great Legend), Jinasena (India, ninth century)

246 - Cosmos

The Whirlpool Galaxy, M51 (the 51st
object in the catalogue of Charles Mes¬
sier), also known as NGC 5194' In 1845,
William Parsons, third Earl of Rosse, dis¬
covered the spiral structure of this “neb¬
ula,” the first galaxy to have such structure
observed. Thirteen million light-years
distant, it is being gravitationally distorted
by its small irregular galactic companion,
NGC 5195 (below). Courtesy Hale Ob¬
servatories.

The Great Galaxy in Andromeda, M31, is
the most distant object in the Cosmos
visible from Earth to the unaided eye.
With at least seven spiral arms, it resem¬
bles our own Milky Way. A member of
the Local Group of galaxies, it is some 2.3
million light-years away. M31 is orbited
by two dwarf elliptical galaxies, NGC 205
and, just above the spiral, M32. Courtesy
Hale Observatories.

TEN OR TWENTY BILLION YEARS AGO, something hap¬
pened—the Big Bang, the event that began our universe. Why it
happened is the greatest mystery we know. That it happened is
reasonably clear. All the matter and energy now in the universe
was concentrated at extremely high density—a kind of cosmic
egg, reminiscent of the creation myths of many cultures—perhaps
into a mathematical point with no dimensions at all. It was not
that all the matter and energy were squeezed into a minor corner
of the present universe; rather, the entire universe, matter and
energy and the space they fill, occupied a very small volume.
There was not much room for events to happen in.

In that titanic cosmic explosion, the universe began an expan¬
sion which has never ceased. It is misleading to describe the
expansion of the universe as a sort of distending bubble viewed
from the outside. By definition, nothing we can ever know about
was outside. It is better to think of it from the inside, perhaps
with grid lines—imagined to adhere to the moving fabric of
space—expanding uniformly in all directions. As space stretched,
the matter and energy in the universe expanded with it and
rapidly cooled. The radiation of the cosmic fireball, which, then
as now, filled the universe, moved through the spectrum—from
gamma rays to X-rays to ultraviolet light; through the rainbow
colors of the visible spectrum; into the infrared and radio regions.
The remnants of that fireball, the cosmic background radiation,
emanating from all parts of the sky can be detected by radio
telescopes today. In the early universe, space was brilliantly illu¬
minated. As time passed, the fabric of space continued to ex¬
pand, the radiation cooled and, in ordinary visible light, for the
first time space became dark, as it is today.

The early universe was filled with radiation and a plenum of
matter, originally hydrogen and helium, formed from elementary
particles in the dense primeval fireball. There was very little to
see, if there had been anyone around to do the seeing. Then little
pockets of gas, small nonuniformities, began to grow. Tendrils of
vast gossamer gas clouds formed, colonies of great lumbering,
slowly spinning things, steadily brightening, each a kind of beast
eventually to contain a hundred billion shining points. The
largest recognizable structures in the universe had formed. We
see them today. We ourselves inhabit some lost corner of one.
We call them galaxies.

About a billion years after the Big Bang, the distribution of
matter in the universe had become a little lumpy, perhaps be¬
cause the Big Bang itself had not been perfectly uniform. Matter
was more densely compacted in these lumps than elsewhere.
Their gravity drew to them substantial quantities of nearby gas,
growing clouds of hydrogen and helium that were destined to
become clusters of galaxies. A very small initial nonuniformity
suffices to produce substantial condensations of matter later on.

As the gravitational collapse continued, the primordial galaxies

The Edge of Forever - 247

spun increasingly faster, because of the conservation of angu-
lar momentum. Some flattened, squashing themselves along the
axis of rotation where gravity is not balanced by centrifugal
force. These became the first spiral galaxies, great rotating pirn
wheels of matter in open space. Other protogalaxies with weaker
gravity or less initial rotation flattened very little and became the
first elliptical galaxies. There are similar galaxies, as if stamped
from the same mold, all over the Cosmos because these simple
laws of nature—gravity and the conservation of angular momen-
turn—are the same all over the universe. The physics that works
for falling bodies and pirouetting ice skaters down here in the
microcosm of the Earth makes galaxies up there in the macn>
cosm of the universe.

Within the nascent galaxies, much smaller clouds were also
experiencing gravitational collapse; interior temperatures became
very high, thermonuclear reactions were initiated, and the first
stars turned on. The hot, massive young stars evolved rapidly,
profligates carelessly spending their capital of hydrogen fuel, soon
ending their lives in brilliant supernova explosions, returning
thermonuclear ash—helium, carbon, oxygen and heavier ele-
ments—to the interstellar gas for subsequent generations of star
formation. Supernova explosions of massive early stars produced
successive overlapping shock waves in the adjacent gas, conn
pressing the intergalactic medium and accelerating the generation
of clusters of galaxies. Gravity is opportunistic, amplifying even
small condensations of matter. Supernova shock waves may have
contributed to accretions of matter at every scale. The epic of
cosmic evolution had begun, a hierarchy in the condensation of
matter from the gas of the Big Bang—clusters of galaxies, galaxies,
stars, planets, and, eventually, life and an intelligence able to
understand a little of the elegant process responsible for its origin.

Clusters of galaxies fill the universe today. Some are insignifi-
cant, paltry collections of a few dozen galaxies. The affection-
ately titled “Local Group” contains only two large galaxies of any
size, both spirals: the Milky Way and M31. Other clusters run to
immense hordes of thousands of galaxies in mutual gravitational
embrace. There is some hint that the Virgo cluster contains tens
of thousands of galaxies.

On the largest scale, we inhabit a universe of galaxies, perhaps
a hundred billion exquisite examples of cosmic architecture and
decay, with order and disorder equally evident: normal spirals,
turned at various angles to our earthly line of sight (face-on we
see the spiral arms, edge-on, the central lanes of gas and dust in
which the arms are formed); barred spirals with a river of gas and
dust and stars running through the center, connecting the spiral
arms on opposite sides; stately giant elliptical galaxies containing
more than a trillion stars which have grown so large because they
have swallowed and merged with other galaxies; a plethora of
dwarf ellipticals, the galactic midges, each containing some paltry

NGC 147, a small elliptical galaxy that
accompanies M31. It contains perhaps a
billion suns. From the planets of some of
those stars, there is a glorious view of
M31. Courtesy Hale Observatories.

The Sombrero Galaxy, M104 (also called
NGC 4594). The spiral arms, marked by
lanes of dust, are tightly wound about its
nucleus of stars. It is some 40 million
light-years away, beyond the stars in the
constellation Virgo, and may contain a
trillion suns. Seen edge-on from some
comparable distance, our spiral galaxy, the
Milky Way, would resemble M104'
Courtesy Hale Observatories.

248 - Cosmos

M81, another nearby spiral galaxy like the
Milky Way; seven million light-years dis¬
tant, it is not a member of the Local
Group. We view M81 neither edge-on
nor face-on, but rather at an oblique
angle. Galaxies are oriented at random to
our earthly line of sight. Courtesy Hale
Observatories.

A spiral galaxy seen edge-on. NGC 891
has a much less prominent nucleus than
Ml04 (p. 247), and, relatively, much more
prominent dust lanes in the spiral arms.
The surrounding stars are in the fore¬
ground, within our own galaxy. Courtesy
Hale Observatories.

millions of suns; an immense variety of mysterious irregulars,
indications that in the world of galaxies there are places where
something has gone ominously wrong; and galaxies orbiting each
other so closely that their edges are bent by the gravity of their
companions and in some cases streamers of gas and stars are
drawn out gravitationally, a bridge between the galaxies.

Some clusters have their galaxies arranged in an unambi¬
guously spherical geometry; they are composed chiefly of ellipti¬
cals, often dominated by one giant elliptical, the presumptive
galactic cannibal. Other clusters with a far more disordered ge¬
ometry have, comparatively, many more spirals and irregulars.
Galactic collisions distort the shape of an originally spherical
cluster and may also contribute to the genesis of spirals and
irregulars from ellipticals. The form and abundance of the galax¬
ies have a story to tell us of ancient events on the largest possible
scale, a story we are just beginning to read.

The development of high-speed computers make possible nu¬
merical experiments on the collective motion of thousands or
tens of thousands of points, each representing a star, each under
the gravitational influence of all the other points. In some cases,
spiral arms form all by themselves in a galaxy that has already
flattened to a disk. Occasionally a spiral arm may be produced by
the close gravitational encounter of two galaxies, each of course
composed of billions of stars. The gas and dust diffusely spread
through such galaxies will collide and become warmed. But
when two galaxies collide, the stars pass effortlessly by one an¬
other, like bullets through a swarm of bees, because a galaxy is
made mostly of nothing and the spaces between the stars are
vast. Nevertheless, the configuration of the galaxies can be dis¬
torted severely. A direct impact on one galaxy by another can
send the constituent stars pouring and careening through inter-
galactic space, a galaxy wasted. When a small galaxy runs into a
larger one face-on it can produce one of the loveliest of the rare
irregulars, a ring galaxy thousands of light-years across, set
against the velvet of intergalactic space. It is a splash in the
galactic pond, a temporary configuration of disrupted stars, a
galaxy with a central piece torn out.

The unstructured blobs of irregular galaxies, the arms of spiral
galaxies and the torus of ring galaxies exist for only a few frames
in the cosmic motion picture, then dissipate, often to be re¬
formed again. Our sense of galaxies as ponderous rigid bodies is
mistaken. They are fluid structures with 100 billion stellar com¬
ponents. Just as a human being, a collection of 100 trillion cells, is
typically in a steady state between synthesis and decay and is
more than the sum of its parts, so also is a galaxy.

The suicide rate among galaxies is high. Some nearby exam¬
ples, tens or hundreds of millions of light-years away, are power¬
ful sources of X-rays, infrared radiation and radio waves, have
extremely luminous cores and fluctuate in brightness on time

The Edge of Forever — 249

scales of weeks. Some display jets of radiation, thousand-light-
yearlong plumes, and disks of dust in substantial disarray. These
galaxies are blowing themselves up. Black holes ranging from
millions to billions of times more massive than the Sun are
suspected in the cores of giant elliptical galaxies such as NGC
6251 and M87. There is something very massive, very dense, and
very small ticking and purring inside M87—from a region smaller
than the solar system. A black hole is implicated. Billions of
light-years away are still more tumultuous objects, the quasars,
which may be the colossal explosions of young galaxies, the
mightiest events in the history of the universe since the Big Bang
itself.

The word “quasar” is an acronym for “quasi-stellar radio
source.” After it became clear that not all of them were powerful
radio sources, they were called QSO’s (“quasi-stellar objects”).
Because they are starlike in appearance, they were naturally
thought to be stars within our own galaxy. But spectroscopic
observations of their red shift (see below) show them likely to be

NGC 7217 in the constellation Pegasus.
The spiral arms are tightly wound about
the galactic nucleus. From a much greater
distance, this galaxy might appear as a
star-like point of light. Very distant galax¬
ies are not easily recognizable by their
form. Courtesy Hale Observatories.

NGC 1300, a barred spiral. About a third
of spiral galaxies have a discernible “bar”
of gas, dust and stars, an extension to the
core of the spiral arms. The bar seems to
be rotating as a solid body, as the core
does. All known spirals rotate with the
arms trailing, not leading. Courtesy Hale
Observatories.

Two schematic representations of quasars
at the centers of massive galaxies. At top,
a disk of accreting gas and dust surrounds
an invisible rotating black hole. Material is
ejected along the jets at close to the speed
of light. At bottom, a condensing mass of
billions of suns increases its rotation and
strengthens its magnetic field. Paintings by
Adolf Schaller.

250 - Cosmos

The most massive galaxy known. M87 is a
giant elliptical galaxy near the center of
the great Virgo cluster of galaxies, some
40 million light-years away. There is al¬
most no gas and dust in its central regions,
it all having been turned into stars or dis¬
sipated away to space. This seemingly
bland object is the third brightest source
of radio waves in the sky, after the Sun
and Moon, and one of the brightest X-ray
sources. Estimates of its mass range from
trillions to a hundred trillion suns. A jet of
gas 100,000 light-years long is being
ejected from the nucleus, which may con¬
tain a massive black hole. M87 is sur¬
rounded by thousands of globular star
clusters, a few of which can be seen here.
Courtesy Hale Observatories.

immense distances away. They seem to partake vigorously in the
expansion of the universe, some receding from us at more than
90 percent the speed of light. If they are very far, they must be
intrinsically extremely bright to be visible over such distances;
some are as bright as a thousand supernovae exploding at once.
Just as for Cyg X-l, their rapid fluctuations show their enormous
brightness to be confined to a very small volume, in this case less
than the size of the solar system. Some remarkable process must
be responsible for the vast outpouring of energy in a quasar.
Among the proposed explanations are: (1) quasars are monster
versions of pulsars, with a rapidly rotating supermassive core
connected to a strong magnetic field; (2) quasars are due to mul¬
tiple collisions of millions of stars densely packed into the galactic
core, tearing away the outer layers and exposing to full view the
billion-degree temperatures of the interiors of massive stars; (3), a
related idea, quasars are galaxies in which the stars are so densely
packed that a supernova explosion in one will rip away the outer
layers of another and make it a supernova, producing a stellar
chain reaction; (4) quasars are powered by the violent mutual
annihilation of matter and antimatter, somehow preserved in the
quasar until now; (5) a quasar is the energy released when gas and
dust and stars fall into an immense black hole in the core of such
a galaxy, perhaps itself the product of ages of collision and co¬
alescence of smaller black holes; and (6) quasars are “white holes,”
the other side of black holes, a funneling and eventual emergence
into view of matter pouring into a multitude of black holes in
other parts of the universe, or even in other universes.

In considering the quasars, we confront profound mysteries.
Whatever the cause of a quasar explosion, one thing seems clear:
such a violent event must produce untold havoc. In every quasar
explosion millions of worlds—some with life and the intelligence
to understand what is happening—may be utterly destroyed. The
study of the galaxies reveals a universal order and beauty. It also
shows us chaotic violence on a scale hitherto undreamed of.
That we live in a universe which permits life is remarkable. That
we live in one which destroys galaxies and stars and worlds is also
remarkable. The universe seems neither benign nor hostile,
merely indifferent to the concerns of such puny creatures as we.

Even a galaxy so seemingly well-mannered as the Milky Way
has its stirrings and its dances. Radio observations show two
enormous clouds of hydrogen gas, enough to make millions of
suns, plummeting out from the galactic core, as if a mild explo¬
sion happened there every now and then. A high-energy astro¬
nomical observatory in Earth orbit has found the galactic core to
be a strong source of a particular gamma ray spectral line, consis¬
tent with the idea that a massive black hole is hidden there.
Galaxies like the Milky Way may represent the staid middle age
in a continuous evolutionary sequence, which encompasses, in
their violent adolescence, quasars and exploding galaxies: because

The Edge of Forever - 251

Centaurus A (NGC 5128), perhaps the
collision of a giant elliptical and a spiral
galaxy whose shattered arms we see edge-
on. Today, it is more customary to think
of it as a giant elliptical, with a sparse
complement of gas and dust, completely
encircled by a disk of gas and dust and,
perhaps, some stars. It is an intense source
of radio waves, which pour out of two
great lobes oriented at right angles to the
disk of dust; and X-rays and gamma rays as
well. Rapid fluctuations in the X-ray
emission may be due to the engulfing of
entire clusters of stars by a giant black hole
hidden at its center. Centaurus A is 14
million light-years away; its radio lobes
are 3 million light-years long. Courtesy
Hale Observatories.

the quasars are so distant, we see them in their youth, as they
were billions of years ago.

The stars of the Milky Way move with systematic grace.
Globular clusters plunge through the galactic plane and out the
other side, where they slow, reverse and hurtle back again. If we
could follow the motion of individual stars bobbing about the
galactic plane, they would resemble a froth of popcorn. We have
never seen a galaxy change its form significantly only because it
takes so long to move. The Milky Way rotates once every quar¬
ter billion years. If we were to speed the rotation, we would see
that the Galaxy is a dynamic, almost organic entity, in some ways
resembling a multi-cellular organism. Any astronomical photo¬
graph of a galaxy is merely a snapshot of one stage in its ponder¬
ous motion and evolution.* The inner region of a galaxy rotates
as a solid body. But, beyond that, like the planets around the Sun
following Kepler’s third law, the outer provinces rotate progres¬
sively more slowly. The arms have a tendency to wind up
around the core in an ever-tightening spiral, and gas and dust
accumulate in spiral patterns of greater density, which are in turn
the locales for the formation of young, hot, bright stars, the stars
that outline the spiral arms. These stars shine for ten million
years or so, a period corresponding to only 5 percent of a galactic
rotation. But as the stars that outline a spiral arm burn out, new
stars and their associated nebulae are formed just behind them,
and the spiral pattern persists. The stars that outline the arms do
not survive even a single galactic rotation; only the spiral pattern
remains.

* This is not quite true. The near side of a galaxy is tens of thousands of
light-years closer to us than the far side; thus we see the front as it was
tens of thousands of years before the back. But typical events in galactic
dynamics occupy tens of millions of years, so the error in thinking of an
image of a galaxy as frozen in one moment of time is small.

252 - Cosmos

The Doppler effect. A stationary source
of sound or light emits a set of spherical
waves. If the source is in motion from
right to left, it emits spherical waves pro¬
gressively centered on points 1 through 6,
as shown. But an observer at B sees the
waves as stretched out, while an observer
at A sees them as compressed. A receding
source is seen as red-shifted (the wave¬
lengths made longer); an approaching
source is seen as blue-shifted (the wave¬
lengths made shorter). The Doppler effect
is the key to cosmology.

The speed of any given star around the center of the Galaxy is
generally not the same as that of the spiral pattern. The Sun has
been in and out of spiral arms often in the twenty times it has
gone around the Milky Way at 200 kilometers per second
(roughly half a million miles per hour). On the average, the Sun
and the planets spend forty million years in a spiral arm, eighty
million outside, another forty million in, and so on. Spiral arms
outline the region where the latest crop of newly hatched stars is
being formed, but not necessarily where such middle-aged stars
as the Sun happen to be. In this epoch, we live between spiral
arms.

The periodic passage of the solar system through spiral arms
may conceivably have had important consequences for us.
About ten million years ago, the Sun emerged from the Gould
Belt complex of the Orion Spiral Arm, which is now a little less
than a thousand light-years away. (Interior to the Orion arm is
the Sagittarius arm; beyond the Orion arm is the Perseus arm.)
When the Sun passes through a spiral arm it is more likely than it
is at present to enter into gaseous nebulae and interstellar dust
clouds and to encounter objects of substellar mass. It has been
suggested that the major ice ages on our planet, which recur
every hundred million years or so, may be due to the interposi¬
tion of interstellar matter between the Sun and the Earth. W.
Napier and S. Clube have proposed that a number of the moons,
asteroids, comets and circumplanetary rings in the solar system
once freely wandered in interstellar space until they were cap¬
tured as the Sun plunged through the Orion spiral arm. This is an
intriguing idea, although perhaps not very likely. But it is test¬
able. All we need do is procure a sample of, say, Phobos or a
comet and examine its magnesium isotopes. The relative abun¬
dance of magnesium isotopes (all sharing the same number of
protons, but having differing numbers of neutrons) depends on
the precise sequence of stellar nucleosynthetic events, including
the timing of nearby supernova explosions, that produced any
particular sample of magnesium. In a different corner of the
Galaxy, a different sequence of events should have occurred and
a different ratio of magnesium isotopes should prevail.

The discovery of the Big Bang and the recession of the galax¬
ies came from a commonplace of nature called the Doppler ef¬
fect. We are used to it in the physics of sound. An automobile
driver speeding by us blows his horn. Inside the car, the driver
hears a steady blare at a fixed pitch. But outside the car, we hear a
characteristic change in pitch. To us, the sound of the horn slides
from high frequencies to low. A racing car traveling at 200
kilometers per hour (120 miles per hour) is going almost one-
fifth the speed of sound. Sound is a succession of waves in air, a
crest and a trough, a crest and a trough. The closer together the
waves are, the higher the frequency or pitch; the farther apart the
waves are, the lower the pitch. If the car is racing away from us, it

The Edge of Forever - 253

stretches out the sound waves, moving them, from our point of
view, to a lower pitch and producing the characteristic sound
with which we are all familiar. If the car were racing toward us,
the sound waves would be squashed together, the frequency
would be increased, and we would hear a high-pitched wail If
we knew what the ordinary pitch of the horn was when the car
was at rest, we could deduce its speed blindfolded, from the
change in pitch.

Light is also a wave. Unlike sound, it travels perfectly well
through a vacuum. The Doppler effect works here as well. If
instead of sound the automobile were for some reason emitting,
front and back, a beam of pure yellow light, the frequency of the
light would increase slightly as the car approached and decrease
slightly as the car receded. At ordinary speeds the effect would
be imperceptible. If, however, the car were somehow traveling at
a good fraction of the speed of light, we would be able to observe
the color of the light changing toward higher frequency, that is,
toward blue, as the car approached us; and toward lower fre¬
quencies, that is, toward red, as the car receded from us. An
object approaching us at very high velocities is perceived to have
the color of its spectral lines blue-shifted. An object receding
from us at very high velocities has its spectral lines red-shifted.*
This red shift, observed in the spectral lines of distant galaxies
and interpreted as a Doppler effect, is the key to cosmology.

During the early years of this century, the world’s largest tele¬
scope, destined to discover the red shift of remote galaxies, was
being built on Mount Wilson, overlooking what were then the
clear skies of Los Angeles. Large pieces of the telescope had to be
hauled to the top of the mountain, a job for mule teams. A
young mule skinner named Milton Humason helped to transport
mechanical and optical equipment, scientists, engineers and dig¬
nitaries up the mountain. Humason would lead the column of
mules on horseback, his white terrier standing just behind the
saddle, its front paws on Humason’s shoulders. He was a to¬
bacco-chewing roustabout, a superb gambler and pool player and
what was then called a ladies’ man. In his formal education, he
had never gone beyond the eighth grade. But he was bright and
curious and naturally inquisitive about the equipment he had
laboriously carted to the heights. Humason was keeping com¬
pany with the daughter of one of the observatory engineers, a
man who harbored reservations about his daughter seeing a
young man who had no higher ambition than to be a mule
skinner. So Humason took odd jobs at the observatory—electri¬
cian’s assistant, janitor, swabbing the floors of the telescope he

* The object itself might be any color, even blue. The red shift means
only that each spectral line appears at longer wavelengths than when the
object is at rest; the amount of the red shift is proportional both to the
velocity and to the wavelength of the spectral line when the object is at
rest.

*

#

Colliding galaxies about 50 million light-
years away. NGC 4038 and NGC 4039
are probably once-ordinary galaxies now
emerging from a close gravitational en¬
counter. Their interiors have clearly been
disrupted. When these galaxies are pho¬
tographed with longer time exposures the
interior detail vanishes, and long curved
tendrils of light, faintly visible in this
image, become prominent. The tendrils
are composed of a billion stars spilled out
into intergalactic space and account for
the name given to these two objects, “The
Antennae.” From beginning to end this
collision occupied more than a hundred
million years. Courtesy Hale Observa¬
tories.

NGC 2623, another example of colliding
galaxies in which vast streamers of stars
are strewn through intergalactic space.
Courtesy Hale Observatories.

254 - Cosmos

Stephan’s Quintet. A group of five ap'
parently interacting galaxies discovered in
1877, the year Schiaparelli “discovered”
canals on Mars, and posing a somewhat
similar puzzle. Four of them are thought
to be roughly a quarter of a billion light'
years away. They have identical velocities
of recession (6,000 kilometers per second)
as determined by the red shift of their
spectral lines, except for NGC 7320, at
lower left (which has a Doppler velocity
of 800 kilometers per second). If NGC
7320 is really connected by a bridge of
stars with the other galaxies, the observa'
tional argument for an expanding universe
is in some jeopardy. But recent indepem
dent evidence suggests that NGC 7320 is
in fact much closer to us and that the
connection with the other galaxies is only
apparent. © Association of Universities
for Research in Astronomy, Inc. The Kitt
Peak Observatory.

A cluster of galaxies sometimes called
Seyfert’s Sextet. Here, all members have
the same red shift, except for the galaxy
resembling a face'On spiral, which has a
red shift four times higher than the
others. Stephan’s Quintet and Seyfert’s
Sextet are perhaps the largest regions of
the Cosmos named by humans after indi¬
vidual humans. Courtesy Hale Observa'
tories.

had helped to build. One evening, so the story goes, the night
telescope assistant fell ill and Humason was asked if he might fill
in. He displayed such skill and care with the instruments that he
soon became a permanent telescope operator and observing aide.

After World War I, there came to Mount Wilson the soom
to'be famous Edwin Hubble—brilliant, polished, gregarious out'
side the astronomical community, with an English accent
acquired during a single year as Rhodes scholar at Oxford. It was
Hubble who provided the final demonstration that the spiral
nebulae were in fact “island universes,” distant aggregations of
enormous numbers of stars, like our own Milky Way Galaxy; he
had figured out the stellar standard candle required to measure
the distances to the galaxies. Hubble and Humason hit it off
splendidly, a perhaps unlikely pair who worked together at the
telescope harmoniously. Following a lead by the astronomer
V. M. Slipher at Lowell Observatory, they began measuring the
spectra of distant galaxies. It soon became clear that Humason
was better able to obtain high'quality spectra of distant galaxies
than any professional astronomer in the world. He became a full
staff member of the Mount Wilson Observatory, learned many
of the scientific underpinnings of his work and died rich in the
respect of the astronomical community.

The light from a galaxy is the sum of the light emitted by the
billions of stars within it. As the light leaves these stars, certain
frequencies or colors are absorbed by the atoms in the stars’
outermost layers. The resulting lines permit us to tell that stars
millions of light-years away contain the same chemical elements
as our Sun and the nearby stars. Humason and Hubble found, to
their amazement, that the spectra of all the distant galaxies are
red'shifted and, still more startling, that the more distant the
galaxy was, the more red'shifted were its spectral lines.

The most obvious explanation of the red shift was in terms of
the Doppler effect: the galaxies were receding from us; the more
distant the galaxy the greater its speed of recession. But why
should the galaxies be fleeing us? Could there be something
special about our location in the universe, as if the Milky Way
had performed some inadvertent but offensive act in the social
life of galaxies? It seemed much more likely that the universe
itself was expanding, carrying the galaxies with it. Humason and
Hubble, it gradually became clear, had discovered the Big
Bang—if not the origin of the universe then at least its most
recent incarnation.

Almost all of modern cosmology—and especially the idea of an
expanding universe and a Big Bang—is based on the idea that the
red shift of distant galaxies is a Doppler effect and arises from
their speed of recession. But there are other kinds of red shifts in
nature. There is, for example, the gravitational red shift, in
which the light leaving an intense gravitational field has to do so
much work to escape that it loses energy during the journey, the

The Edge of Forever — 255

process perceived by a distant observer as a shift of the escaping
light to longer wavelengths and redder colors. Since we think
there may be massive black holes at the centers of some galaxies,
this is a conceivable explanation of their red shifts. However, the
particular spectral lines observed are often characteristic of very
thin, diffuse gas, and not the astonishingly high density that must
prevail near black holes. Or the red shift might be a Doppler
effect due not to the general expansion of the universe but rather
to a more modest and local galactic explosion. But then we
should expect as many explosion fragments traveling toward us
as away from us, as many blue shifts as red shifts. What we
actually see, however, is almost exclusively red shifts no matter
what distant objects beyond the Local Group we point our tele-
scopes to.

There is nevertheless a nagging suspicion among some astron-
omers that all may not be right with the deduction, from the red
shifts of galaxies via the Doppler effect, that the universe is
expanding. The astronomer Halton Arp has found enigmatic and
disturbing cases where a galaxy and a quasar, or a pair of galaxies,
that are in apparent physical association have very different red
shifts. Occasionally there seems to be a bridge of gas and dust
and stars connecting them. If the red shift is due to the expansion
of the universe, very different red shifts imply very different
distances. But two galaxies that are physically connected can
hardly also be greatly separated from each other—in some cases
by a billion light-years. Skeptics say that the association is purely
statistical: that, for example, a nearby bright galaxy and a much

A portion of the Hercules cluster of gal¬
axies, with about 300 known members,
retreating from our region of the Cosmos
at some 10,000 kilometers per second. In
this photograph there are more galaxies
(in excess of 300 million light-years dis¬
tant) than there are foreground stars in our
Milky Way Galaxy. If the Hercules Clus¬
ter is not flying apart, there must be five
times more mass there, gravitationally
gluing the cluster together, than we see in
its galaxies. Such “missing mass,” if com¬
mon in intergalactic space, would make a
major contribution to closing the uni¬
verse. Courtesy Hale Observatories.

256 - Cosmos

New stars are being born in the “bridge”
connecting two galaxies (ESO B138-
IG29,30). False color, computer-enhanced
image. Courtesy of Arthur Hoag and Kitt
Peak National Observatory.

Milton Humason, astronomer (1891—
1957). Courtesy Hale Observatories.

more distant quasar, each having very different red shifts and
very different speeds of recession, are merely accidentally aligned
along the line of sight; that they have no real physical association.
Such statistical alignments must happen by chance every now
and then. The debate centers on whether the number of coinci¬
dences is more than would be expected by chance. Arp points to
other cases in which a galaxy with a small red shift is flanked by
two quasars of large and almost identical red shift. He believes
the quasars are not at cosmological distances but instead are
being ejected, left and right, by the “foreground” galaxy; and that
the red shifts are the result of some as-yet-unfathomed mecha¬
nism. Skeptics argue coincidental alignment and the conventional
Hubble-Humason interpretation of the red shift. If Arp is right,
the exotic mechanisms proposed to explain the energy source of
distant quasars—supernova chain reactions, supermassive black
holes and the like—would prove unnecessary. Quasars need not
then be very distant. But some other exotic mechanism will be
required to explain the red shift. In either case, something very
strange is going on in the depths of space.

The apparent recession of the galaxies, with the red shift
interpreted through the Doppler effect, is not the only evidence
for the Big Bang. Independent and quite persuasive evidence
derives from the cosmic black body background radiation, the
faint static of radio waves coming quite uniformly from all direc¬
tions in the Cosmos at just the intensity expected in our epoch
from the now substantially cooled radiation of the Big Bang. But
here also there is something puzzling. Observations with a sensi¬
tive radio antenna carried near the top of the Earth’s atmosphere
in a U-2 aircraft have shown that the background radiation is, to
first approximation, just as intense in all directions—as if the
fireball of the Big Bang expanded quite uniformly, an origin of
the universe with a very precise symmetry. But the background
radiation, when examined to finer precision, proves to be imper¬
fectly symmetrical. There is a small systematic effect that could
be understood if the entire Milky Way Galaxy (and presumably
other members of the Local Group) were streaking toward the
Virgo cluster of galaxies at more than a million miles an hour
(600 kilometers per second). At such a rate, we will reach it in ten
billion years, and extragalactic astronomy will then be a great
deal easier. The Virgo cluster is already the richest collection of
galaxies known, replete with spirals and ellipticals and irregulars,
a jewel box in the sky. But why should we be rushing toward it?
George Smoot and his colleagues, who made these high-altitude
observations, suggest that the Milky Way is being gravitationally
dragged toward the center of the Virgo cluster; that the cluster
has many more galaxies than have been detected heretofore; and,
most startling, that the cluster is of immense proportions,
stretching across one or two billion light-years of space.

The observable universe itself is only a few tens of billions of

The Edge of Forever - 257

light-years across and, if there is a vast super cluster in the Virgo
group, perhaps there are other such superclusters at much greater
distances, which are correspondingly more difficult to detect. In
the lifetime of the universe there has apparently not been enough
time for an initial gravitational nonuniformity to collect the
amount of mass that seems to reside in the Virgo supercluster.
Thus Smoot is tempted to conclude that the Big Bang was much
less uniform than his other observations suggest, that the original
distribution of matter in the universe was very lumpy. (Some
little lumpiness is to be expected, and indeed even needed to
understand the condensation of galaxies; but a lumpiness on this
scale is a surprise.) Perhaps the paradox can be resolved by imag¬
ining two or more nearly simultaneous Big Bangs.

If the general picture of an expanding universe and a Big Bang
is correct, we must then confront still more difficult questions.
What were conditions like at the time of the Big Bang? What
happened before that? Was there a tiny universe, devoid of all
matter, and then the matter suddenly created from nothing? How
does that happen? In many cultures it is customary to answer that
God created the universe out of nothing. But this is mere tem¬
porizing. If we wish courageously to pursue the question, we
must, of course ask next where God comes from. And if we
decide this to be unanswerable, why not save a step and decide
that the origin of the universe is an unanswerable question? Or, if
we say that God has always existed, why not save a step and
conclude that the universe has always existed?

Every culture has a myth of the world before creation, and of
the creation of the world, often by the mating of the gods or the
hatching of a cosmic egg. Commonly, the universe is naively
imagined to follow human or animal precedent. Here, for exam¬
ple, are five small extracts from such myths, at different levels of
sophistication, from the Pacific Basin:

In the very beginning everything was resting in perpetual
darkness: night oppressed everything like an impenetrable
thicket.

—The Great Father myth of
the Aranda people of
Central Australia

All was in suspense, all calm, all in silence; all motionless
and still; and the expanse of the sky was empty.

—The Popol Vuh of the
Quiche Maya

Na Arean sat alone in space as a cloud that floats in noth¬
ingness. He slept not, for there was no sleep; he hungered
not, for as yet there was no hunger. So he remained for a
great while, until a thought came to his mind. He said to
himself, “I will make a thing.”

—A myth from Maiana,

Gilbert Islands

An ancient Chinese creation image show¬
ing the intertwined double helix, repre¬
senting an interaction of opposites,
resulting in the Creation. Constellation
images are behind the creator gods. Cour¬
tesy Museum of Fine Arts, Boston.

The Tantric Buddhist conception of “pure
Being” in the form of a “world egg.” At
fertilization, the egg differentiates into the
female “life force” at center and the male
activating energy (the dividing lines).
Conscious life emerges. Photograph by
Ajit Mookerjee from Tantra: The Indian
Cult of Ecstasy by Philip Rawson. Copy¬
right © 1973 by Thames & Hudson Ltd.
Reproduced by permission of Thames &l.
Hudson, London and New York.

258 - Cosmos

A Huichol beeswax-and-yam painting
from Mexico depicting the Creation. In
this image, we see the first beings. The
five serpents are the Mothers of Water
and represent terrestrial waters. At right
the first plant appears, bearing both male
and female flowers. At left the Sun Father
is flanked by the Morning Star. Courtesy
Peter Furst, Delmar, New York.

First there was the great cosmic egg. Inside the egg was
chaos, and floating in chaos was Pan Ku, the Undeveloped,
the divine Embryo. And P’an Ku burst out of the egg, four
times larger than any man today, with a hammer and chisel
in his hand with which he fashioned the world.

—The P’an Ku myths, China
(around third century)

Before heaven and earth had taken form all was vague and
amorphous . . . That which was clear and light drifted up to
become heaven, while that which was heavy and turbid
solidified to become earth. It was very easy for the pure,
fine material to come together, but extremely difficult for
the heavy, turbid material to solidify. Therefore heaven
was completed first and earth assumed shape after. When
heaven and earth were joined in emptiness and all was
unwrought simplicity, then without having been created
things came into being. This was the Great Oneness. All
things issued from this Oneness but all became different. . .

—Huai-nan Tzu, China
(around first century B.C.)

The traditional Judeo-Christian view of
the Creation of the Cosmos. God (top)
makes the Earth and its inhabitants (the
first humans, Adam and Eve, at center).
Surrounding the Earth are birds, clouds,
the Sun, the Moon and the stars, above
which are “the waters of the firmament.”
From Martin Luther’s Biblia, published by
Hans Lufft, Wittenberg, 153A

These myths are tributes to human audacity. The chief differ-
ence between them and our modern scientific myth of the Big
Bang is that science is self-questioning, and that we can perform
experiments and observations to test our ideas. But those other
creation stories are worthy of our deep respect.

Every human culture rejoices in the fact that there are cycles in
nature. But how, it was thought, could such cycles come about
unless the gods willed them? And if there are cycles in the years
of humans, might there not be cycles in the aeons of the gods?
The Hindu religion is the only one of the world’s great faiths
dedicated to the idea that the Cosmos itself undergoes an im¬
mense, indeed an infinite, number of deaths and rebirths. It is the
only religion in which the time scales correspond, no doubt by
accident, to those of modern scientific cosmology. Its cycles run
from our ordinary day and night to a day and night of Brahma,
8.64 billion years long, longer than the age of the Earth or the
Sun and about half the time since the Big Bang. And there are
much longer time scales still.

There is the deep and appealing notion that the universe is but
the dream of the god who, after a hundred Brahma years, dis¬
solves himself into a dreamless sleep. The universe dissolves with
him—until, after another Brahma century, he stirs, recomposes
himself and begins again to dream the great cosmic dream.
Meanwhile, elsewhere, there are an infinite number of other
universes, each with its own god dreaming the cosmic dream.
These great ideas are tempered by another, perhaps still greater.
It is said that men may not be the dreams of the gods, but rather
that the gods are the dreams of men.

In India there are many gods, and each god has many

The Edge of Forever — 259

manifestations. The Chola bronzes, cast in the eleventh century, in¬
clude several different incarnations of the god Shiva. The most
elegant and sublime of these is a representation of the creation of
the universe at the beginning of each cosmic cycle, a motif
known as the cosmic dance of Shiva. The god, called in this
manifestation Nataraja, the Dance King, has four hands. In the
upper right hand is a drum whose sound is the sound of creation.
In the upper left hand is a tongue of flame, a reminder that the
universe, now newly created, will billions of years from now be
utterly destroyed.

These profound and lovely images are, I like to imagine, a
kind of premonition of modern astronomical ideas.* Very likely,
the universe has been expanding since the Big Bang, but it is by
no means clear that it will continue to expand forever. The
expansion may gradually slow, stop and reverse itself. If there is
less than a certain critical amount of matter in the universe, the
gravitation of the receding galaxies will be insufficient to stop the
expansion, and the universe will run away forever. But if there is
more matter than we can see—hidden away in black holes, say, or
in hot but invisible gas between the galaxies—then the universe
will hold together gravitationally and partake of a very Indian
succession of cycles, expansion followed by contraction, universe
upon universe, Cosmos without end. If we live in such an oscil¬
lating universe, then the Big Bang is not the creation of the
Cosmos but merely the end of the previous cycle, the destruction
of the last incarnation of the Cosmos.

Neither of these modern cosmologies may be altogether to our
liking. In one, the universe is created, somehow, ten or twenty
billion years ago and expands forever, the galaxies mutually re¬
ceding until the last one disappears over our cosmic horizon.
Then the galactic astronomers are out of business, the stars cool
and die, matter itself decays and the universe becomes a thin cold
haze of elementary particles. In the other, the oscillating uni¬
verse, the Cosmos has no beginning and no end, and we are in
the midst of an infinite cycle of cosmic deaths and rebirths with
no information trickling through the cusps of the oscillation.
Nothing of the galaxies, stars, planets, life forms or civilizations
evolved in the previous incarnation of the universe oozes into
the cusp, flutters past the Big Bang, to be known in our present
universe. The fate of the universe in either cosmology may seem
a little depressing, but we may take solace in the time scales

*The dates on Mayan inscriptions also range deep into the past and
occasionally far into the future. One inscription refers to a time more
than a million years ago and another perhaps refers to events of 400
million years ago, although this is in some dispute among Mayan schol¬
ars. The events memorialized may be mythical, but the time scales are
prodigious. A millennium before Europeans were willing to divest
themselves of the Biblical idea that the world was a few thousand years
old, the Mayans were thinking of millions, and the Indians of billions.

Navajo sand painting, “Father Sky and
Mother Earth.” Within the black image of
Father Sky at left are the various constel¬
lations, including, middle, the Big Dipper.
Mother Earth, at right, contains within
her the Navajos’ four sacred plants: beans,
com, tobacco and squash. At upper right
is a bat with a medicine pouch (the small
yellow diamond) and representing “good.”
Courtesy Denver Museum of Art,
Denver, Colorado.

A Huichol painting showing the origin of
the Sun. At upper left the as-yet-unborn
Sun is hailed by the Earth Goddess while
her son shoots arrows at a solar wheel just
before his sacrifice and transmogrification
into the solar deity. The rayed shape
lower left is the western lagoon into which
the boy descends on his subterranean
journey to the east and the first sunrise.
Courtesy Peter Furst, Delmar, New York.

260 - Cosmos

A modern rendering of a common ancient
Egyptian motif of creation. In this depic-
tion, Shu, god of light and air (arms
raised), separates Nut, goddess of the sky,
from Geb, god of the Earth, reclining
below. Minor deities assist. The falcon
figure at left is Horus, god of Lower Egypt
and later identified with the reigning
pharaoh. Painting by Brown.

A Dogon creation image from the Re-
public of Mali, showing Nommo, a phallic
creation god, caught at the instant of his
metamorphosis into a crocodile. Courtesy
Lester Wunderman, New York, New
York.

involved. These events will occupy tens of billions of years, or
more. Human beings and our descendants, whoever they might
be, can accomplish a great deal in tens of billions of years, before
the Cosmos dies.

If the universe truly oscillates, still stranger questions arise.
Some scientists think that when expansion is followed by com
traction, when the spectra of distant galaxies are all blue-shifted,
causality will be inverted and effects will precede causes. First the
ripples spread from a point on the water’s surface, then I throw a
stone into the pond. First the torch bursts into flame and then I
light it. We cannot pretend to understand what such causality
inversion means. Will people at such a time be born in the grave
and die in the womb? Will time flow backwards? Do these ques¬
tions have any meaning?

Scientists wonder about what happens in an oscillating uni¬
verse at the cusps, at the transition from contraction to expan¬
sion. Some think that the laws of nature are then randomly
reshuffled, that the kind of physics and chemistry that orders this
universe represent only one of an infinite range of possible natu¬
ral laws. It is easy to see that only a very restricted range of laws
of nature are consistent with galaxies and stars, planets, life and
intelligence. If the laws of nature are unpredictably reassorted at
the cusps, then it is only by the most extraordinary coincidence
that the cosmic slot machine has this time come up with a
universe consistent with us.*

Do we live in a universe that expands forever or in one in
which there is an infinite set of cycles? There are ways to find out:
by making an accurate census of the total amount of matter in the
universe, or by seeing to the edge of the Cosmos.

Radio telescopes can detect very faint, very distant objects. As
we look deep into space we also look far back into time. The
nearest quasar is perhaps half a billion light-years away. The
farthest may be ten or twelve or more billions. But if we see an
object twelve billion light-years away, we are seeing it as it was
twelve billion years ago in time. By looking far out into space we

* The laws of nature cannot be randomly reshuffled at the cusps. If the
universe has already gone through many oscillations, many possible laws
of gravity would have been so weak that, for any given initial expansion,
the universe would not have held together. Once the universe stumbles
upon such a gravitational law, it flies apart and has no further opportu¬
nity to experience another oscillation and another cusp and another set
of laws of nature. Thus we can deduce from the fact that the universe
exists either a finite age, or a severe restriction on the kinds of laws of
nature permitted in each oscillation. If the laws of physics are not ran¬
domly reshuffled at the cusps, there must be a regularity, a set of rules,
that determines which laws are permissible and which are not. Such a set
of rules would comprise a new physics standing over the existing physics.
Our language is impoverished; there seems to be no suitable name for
such a new physics. Both “paraphysics” and “metaphysics” have been
preempted by other rather different and, quite possibly, wholly irrele¬
vant activities. Perhaps “transphysics” would do.

The Edge of Forever - 261

A few of the radio telescopes of the Very
Large Array, Socorro, New Mexico,
operated by the National Radio Astron-
omy Observatory. The telescopes move
on railway tracks; their separation deter-
mines the resolution of the resulting radio
image.

are also looking far back into time, back toward the horizon of
the universe, back toward the epoch of the Big Bang.

The Very Large Array (VLA) is a collection of twenty-seven
separate radio telescopes in a remote region of New Mexico. It is
a phased array, the individual telescopes electronically con¬
nected, as if it were a single telescope of the same size as its
remotest elements, as if it were a radio telescope tens of kilome¬
ters across. The VLA is able to resolve or discriminate fine detail
in the radio regions of the spectrum comparable to what the
largest ground-based telescopes can do in the optical region of
the spectrum.

Sometimes such radio telescopes are connected with telescopes
on the other side of the Earth, forming a baseline comparable to
the Earth’s diameter—in a certain sense, a telescope as large as the
planet. In the future we may have telescopes in the Earth’s orbit,
around toward the other side of the Sun, in effect a radio tele¬
scope as large as the inner solar system. Such telescopes may
reveal the internal structure and nature of quasars. Perhaps a
quasar standard candle will be found, and the distances to the
quasars determined independent of their red shifts. By under¬
standing the structure and the red shift of the most distant qua¬
sars it may be possible to see whether the expansion of the
universe was faster billions of years ago, whether the expansion is
slowing down, whether the universe will one day collapse.

Modern radio telescopes are exquisitely sensitive; a distant
quasar is so faint that its detected radiation amounts perhaps to a
quadrillionth of a watt. The total amount of energy from outside
the solar system ever received by all the radio telescopes on the
planet Earth is less than the energy of a single snowflake striking
the ground. In detecting the cosmic background radiation, in
counting quasars, in searching for intelligent signals from space,
radio astronomers are dealing with amounts of energy that are
barely there at all.

Some matter, particularly the matter in the stars, glows in

262 - Cosmos

Conventional two-dimensional represen¬
tation of a cube.

Conventional three-dimensional rep¬
resentation of a tesseract or hypercube
(the three-dimensional model reduced one
further dimension on this page).

Radio image of elliptical galaxy NGC
3266. Imaged in false color by the Very
Large Array.

visible light and is easy to see. Other matter, gas and dust in the
outskirts of galaxies, for example, is not so readily detected. It
does not give off visible light, although it seems to give off radio
waves. This is one reason that the unlocking of the cosmological
mysteries requires us to use exotic instruments and frequencies
different from the visible light to which our eyes are sensitive.
Observatories in Earth orbit have found an intense X-ray glow
between the galaxies. It was first thought to be hot intergalactic
hydrogen, an immense amount of it never before seen, perhaps
enough to close the Cosmos and to guarantee that we are trapped
in an oscillating universe. But more recent observations by Ri¬
cardo Giacconi may have resolved the X-ray glow into individ¬
ual points, perhaps an immense horde of distant quasars. They
contribute previously unknown mass to the universe as well.
When the cosmic inventory is completed, and the mass of all the
galaxies, quasars, black holes, intergalactic hydrogen, gravita¬
tional waves and still more exotic denizens of space is summed
up, we will know what kind of universe we inhabit.

In discussing the large-scale structure of the Cosmos, astron¬
omers are fond of saying that space is curved, or that there is no
center to the Cosmos, or that the universe is finite but un¬
bounded. Whatever are they talking about? Let us imagine we
inhabit a strange country where everyone is perfectly flat. Fol¬
lowing Edwin Abbott, a Shakespearean scholar who lived in
Victorian England, we call it Flatland. Some of us are squares;
some are triangles; some have more complex shapes. We scurry
about, in and out of our flat buildings, occupied with our flat
businesses and dalliances. Everyone in Flatland has width and
length, but no height whatever. We know about left-right and
forward-back, but have no hint, not a trace of comprehension,
about up-down—except for flat mathematicians. They say, “Lis¬
ten, it’s really very easy. Imagine left-right. Imagine forward-
back. Okay, so far? Now imagine another dimension, at right
angles to the other two.” And we say, “What are you talking
about? ‘At right angles to the other two’! There are only two
dimensions. Point to that third dimension. Where is it?” So the
mathematicians, disheartened, amble off. Nobody listens to
mathematicians.

Every square creature in Flatland sees another square as merely
a short line segment, the side of the square nearest to him. He can
see the other side of the square only by taking a short walk. But
the inside of a square is forever mysterious, unless some terrible
accident or autopsy breaches the sides and exposes the interior
parts.

One day a three-dimensional creature—shaped like an apple,
say—comes upon Flatland, hovering above it. Observing a par¬
ticularly attractive and congenial-looking square entering its flat
house, the apple decides, in a gesture of interdimensional amity,
to say hello. “How are you?” asks the visitor from the third

The Edge of Forever — 263

dimension. “I am a visitor from the third dimension.” The
wretched square looks about his closed house and sees no one.
What is worse, to him it appears that the greeting, entering from
above, is emanating from his own flat body, a voice from within.
A little insanity, he perhaps reminds himself gamely, runs in the
family.

Exasperated at being judged a psychological aberration, the
apple descends into Flatland. Now a three-dimensional creature
can exist, in Flatland, only partially; only a cross section can be
seen, only the points of contact with the plane surface of Flat-
land. An apple slithering through Flatland would appear first as a
point and then as progressively larger, roughly circular slices. The
square sees a point appearing in a closed room in his two-dimen¬
sional world and slowly growing into a near circle. A creature of
strange and changing shape has appeared from nowhere.

Rebuffed, unhappy at the obtuseness of the very flat, the apple
bumps the square and sends him aloft, fluttering and spinning
into that mysterious third dimension. At first the square can
make no sense of what is happening; it is utterly outside his
experience. But eventually he realizes that he is viewing Flatland
from a peculiar vantage point: “above.” He can see into closed
rooms. He can see into his flat fellows. He is viewing his universe
from a unique and devastating perspective. Traveling through
another dimension provides, as an incidental benefit, a kind of
X-ray vision. Eventually, like a falling leaf, our square slowly
descends to the surface. From the point of view of his fellow
Flatlanders, he has unaccountably disappeared from a closed
room and then distressingly materialized from nowhere. “For
heaven’s sake,” they say, “what’s happened to you?” “I think,” he
finds himself replying, “I was ‘up.’ ” They pat him on his sides and
comfort him. Delusions always ran in his family.

In such interdimensional contemplations, we need not be re¬
stricted to two dimensions. We can, following Abbott, imagine a
world of one dimension, where everyone is a line segment, or
even the magical world of zero-dimensional beasts, the points.
But perhaps more interesting is the question of higher dimen¬
sions. Could there be a fourth physical dimension?*

We can imagine generating a cube in the following way: Take
a line segment of a certain length and move it an equal length at
right angles to itself. That makes a square. Move the square an
equal length at right angles to itself, and we have a cube. We

* . •*

A deep sky survey in X-rays (top) within
the constellation Eridanus, performed by
the Einstein High-Energy Astrophysical
Observatory in Earth orbit. The same re¬
gion in ordinary visible light is shown at
bottom, with three quasars indicated.
Courtesy Ricardo Giacconi and NASA.

* If a fourth-dimensional creature existed it could, in our three-dimen¬
sional universe, appear and dematerialize at will, change shape remark¬
ably, pluck us out of locked rooms and make us appear from nowhere. It
could also turn us inside out. There are several ways in which we can be
turned inside out: the least pleasant would result in our viscera and
internal organs being on the outside and the entire Cosmos—glowing
intergalactic gas, galaxies, planets, everything—on the inside. I am not
sure I like the idea.

264 - Cosmos

understand this cube to cast a shadow, which we usually draw as
two squares with their vertices connected. If we examine the
shadow of a cube in two dimensions, we notice that not all the
lines appear equal, and not all the angles are right angles. The
three-dimensional object has not been perfectly represented in its
transfiguration into two dimensions. This is the cost of losing a
dimension in the geometrical projection. Now let us take our
three-dimensional cube and carry it, at right angles to itself,
through a fourth physical dimension: not left-right, not forward-
back, not up-down, but simultaneously at right angles to all those
directions. I cannot show you what direction that is, but I can
imagine it to exist. In such a case, we would have generated a
four-dimensional hypercube, also called a tesseract. I cannot
show you a tesseract, because we are trapped in three dimen¬
sions. But what I can show you is the shadow in three dimensions
of a tesseract. It resembles two nested cubes, all the vertices
connected by lines. But for a real tesseract, in four dimensions, all
the lines would be of equal length and all the angles would be
right angles.

Imagine a universe just like Flatland, except that unbeknownst
to the inhabitants, their two-dimensional universe is curved
through a third physical dimension. When the Flatlanders take
short excursions, their universe looks flat enough. But if one of
them takes a long enough walk along what seems to be a per¬
fectly straight line, he uncovers a great mystery: although he has
not reached a barrier and has never turned around, he has some¬
how come back to the place from which he started. His two-
dimensional universe must have been warped, bent or curved
through a mysterious third dimension. He cannot imagine that
third dimension, but he can deduce it. Increase all dimensions in
this story by one, and you have a situation that may apply to us.

Where is the center of the Cosmos? Is there an edge to the
universe? What lies beyond that? In a two-dimensional universe,
curved through a third dimension, there is no center—at least not
on the surface of the sphere. The center of such a universe is not
in that universe; it lies, inaccessible, in the third dimension, inside
the sphere. While there is only so much area on the surface of
the sphere, there is no edge to this universe—it is finite but
unbounded. And the question of what lies beyond is meaning¬
less. Flat creatures cannot, on their own, escape their two di¬
mensions.

Increase all dimensions by one, and you have the situation that
may apply to us: the universe as a four-dimensional hypersphere
with no center and no edge, and nothing beyond. Why do all the
galaxies seem to be running away from us? The hypersphere is
expanding from a point, like a four-dimensional balloon being
inflated, creating in every instant more space in the universe.
Sometime after the expansion begins, galaxies condense and are
carried outward on the surface of the hypersphere. There are

The Edge of Forever — 2 65

astronomers in each galaxy, and the light they see is also trapped
on the curved surface of the hypersphere. As the sphere expands,
an astronomer in any galaxy will think all the other galaxies are
running away from him. There are no privileged reference
frames.* The farther away the galaxy, the faster its recession. The
galaxies are embedded in, attached to space, and the fabric of
space is expanding. And to the question, Where in the present
universe did the Big Bang occur? the answer is clearly, every-
where.

If there is insufficient matter to prevent the universe from
expanding forever, it must have an open shape, curved like a
saddle with a surface extending to infinity in our three-dimen-
sional analogy. If there is enough matter, then it has a closed
shape, curved like a sphere in our three-dimensional analogy. If
the universe is closed, light is trapped within it. In the 1920’s, in a
direction opposite to M31, observers found a distant pair of spiral
galaxies. Was it possible, they wondered, that they were seeing
the Milky Way and M31 from the other direction—like seeing
the back of your head with light that has circumnavigated the
universe? We now know that the universe is much larger than
they imagined in the 1920’s. It would take more than the age of
the universe for light to circumnavigate it. And the galaxies are
younger than the universe. But if the Cosmos is closed and light
cannot escape from it, then it may be perfectly correct to describe
the universe as a black hole. If you wish to know what it is like
inside a black hole, look around you.

We have previously mentioned the possibility of wormholes
to get from one place in the universe to another without covering
the intervening distance—through a black hole. We can imagine
these wormholes as tubes running through a fourth physical
dimension. We do not know that such wormholes exist. But if
they do, must they always hook up with another place in our
universe? Or is it just possible that wormholes connect with other
universes, places that would otherwise be forever inaccessible to
us? For all we know, there may be many other universes. Perhaps
they are, in some sense, nested within one another.

There is an idea—strange, haunting, evocative—one of the
most exquisite conjectures in science or religion. It is entirely
undemonstrated; it may never be proved. But it stirs the blood.
There is, we are told, an infinite hierarchy of universes, so that
an elementary particle, such as an electron, in our universe
would, if penetrated, reveal itself to be an entire closed universe.
Within it, organized into the local equivalent of galaxies and
smaller structures, are an immense number of other, much tinier
elementary particles, which are themselves universe at the next

* The view that the universe looks by and large the same no matter from
where we happen to view it was first proposed, so far as we know, by
Giordano Bruno.

266 - Cosmos

Hi

The Edge of Forever - 261

level, and so on forever—an infinite downward regression, unf
verses within universes, endlessly. And upward as well Our
familiar universe of galaxies and stars, planets and people, would
be a single elementary particle in the next universe up, the first
step of another infinite regress.

This is the only religious idea I know that surpasses the endless
number of infinitely old cycling universes in Hindu cosmology.
What would those other universes be like? Would they be built
on different laws of physics? Would they have stars and galaxies
and worlds, or something quite different? Might they be compan
ible with some unimaginably different form of life? To enter
them, we would somehow have to penetrate a fourth physical
dimension—not an easy undertaking, surely, but perhaps a black
hole would provide a way. There may be small black holes in the
solar neighborhood. Poised at the edge of forever, we would
jump off. . .

Infinite regression. A representation of the passage from one universe to
the next larger universe in a Cosmos with an infinite regression of nested
universes. Neither universe is ours. Painting by Jon Lomberg.

An intelligent being: A humpback whale breaches the surface of the waters, Frederick Sound, Alaska, summer 1979.
Humpbacks are known for their remarkable leaps and their extraordinary communications. An average humpback
weighs 50 tons, and is 15 meters long. Their brains are much larger than the brains of humans. Courtesy Dan
McSweeny.

Chapter XI

THE PERSISTENCE
OF MEMOIY

Now that the destinies of Heaven and Earth have been fixed;
Trench and canal have been given their proper course;

The banks of the Tigris and the Euphrates have been established;
What else shall we do?

What else shall we create?

Oh Anunaki, you great gods of the sky, what else shall we do?
—The Assyrian account of the creation of Man, 800 B.C.

When he, whoever of the gods it was, had thus arranged in order and
resolved that chaotic mass, and reduced it, thus resolved, to cosmic parts, he
first moulded the Earth into the form of a mighty ball so that it might be of
like form on every side . . . And, that no region might be without its own
forms of animate life, the stars and divine forms occupied the floor of
heaven, the sea fell to the shining fishes for their home, Earth received the
beasts, and the mobile air the birds . . . Then Man was born: . . . though all
other animals are prone, and fix their gaze upon the earth, he gave to Man
an uplifted face and bade him stand erect and turn his eyes to heaven.

—Ovid, Metamorphoses , first century

270 - Cosmos

In THE GREAT COSMIC DARK THERE ARE countless stars and
planets both younger and older than our solar system. Although
we cannot yet be certain, the same processes that led on Earth to
the evolution of life and intelligence should have been operating
throughout the Cosmos. There may be a million worlds in the
Milky Way Galaxy alone that at this moment are inhabited by
beings who are very different from us, and far more advanced.
Knowing a great deal is not the same as being smart; intelligence
is not information alone but also judgment, the manner in which
information is coordinated and used. Still, the amount of infor¬
mation to which we have access is one index of our intelligence.
The measuring rod, the unit of information, is something called
a bit (for binary digit). It is an answer—either yes or no—to an
unambiguous question. To specify whether a lamp is on or off
requires a single bit of information. To designate one letter out of
the twenty-six in the Latin alphabet takes five bits (2 5 =
2x2x2x2x2 = 32, which is more than 26). The verbal infor¬
mation content of this book is a little less than ten million bits,
10 7 . The total number of bits that characterizes an hour-long
television program is about 10 12 . The information in the words
and pictures of different books in all the libraries on the Earth is
something like 10 16 or 10 17 bits.* Of course much of it is redun¬
dant. Such a number calibrates crudely what humans know. But
elsewhere, on older worlds, where life has evolved billions of
years earlier than on Earth, perhaps they know 10 20 bits or 10 30 —
not just more information but significantly different information.

Of those million worlds inhabited by advanced intelligences,
consider a rare planet, the only one in its system with a surface
ocean of liquid water. In this rich aquatic environment, many
relatively intelligent creatures live—some with eight appendages
for grasping; others that communicate among themselves by
changing an intricate pattern of bright and dark mottling on their
bodies; even clever little creatures from the land who make brief
forays into the ocean in vessels of wood or metal. But we seek
the dominant intelligences, the grandest creatures on the planet,
the sentient and graceful masters of the deep ocean, the great
whales.

They are the largest animals' 1 ' ever to evolve on the planet
Earth, larger by far than the dinosaurs. An adult blue whale can
be thirty meters long and weigh 150 tons. Many, especially the
baleen whales, are placid browsers, straining through vast vol¬
umes of ocean for the small animals on which they graze; others
eat fish and krill. The whales are recent arrivals in the ocean.
Only seventy million years ago their ancestors were carnivorous

* Thus all of the books in the world contain no more information than is
broadcast as video in a single large American city in a single year. Not all
bits have equal value.

t Some sequoia trees are both larger and more massive than any whale.

The Persistence of Memory - 271

m

sr-

r r r t~t r~“ .r

1 i I j i

mammals who migrated in slow steps from the land into the

ocean. Among the whales, mothers suckle and care tenderly for
their offspring. There is a long childhood in which the adults

teach the young. Play is a typical pastime. These are all mam-

malian characteristics, all important for the development of in¬
telligent beings.

The sea is murky. Sight and smell, which work well for mam¬
mals on the land, are not of much use in the depths of the ocean.
Those ancestors of the whales who relied on these senses to
locate a mate or a baby or a predator did not leave many off¬
spring. So another method was perfected by evolution; it works
superbly well and is central to any understanding of the whales:
the sense of sound. Some whale sounds are called songs, but we
are still ignorant of their true nature and meaning. They range
over a broad band of frequencies, down to well below the lowest
sound the human ear can detect. A typical whale song lasts for
perhaps fifteen minutes; the longest, about an hour. Often it is
repeated, identically, beat for beat, measure for measure, note for
note. Occasionally a group of whales will leave their winter
waters in the midst of a song and six months later return to
continue at precisely the right note, as if there had been no
interruption. Whales are very good at remembering. More often,
on their return, the vocalizations have changed. New songs ap¬
pear on the cetacean hit parade.

Very often the members of the group will sing the same song
together. By some mutual consensus, some collaborative
song writing, the piece changes month by month, slowly and
predictably. These vocalizations are complex. If the songs of the
humpback whale are enunciated as a tonal language, the total
information content, the number of bits of information in such
songs, is some 10 6 bits, about the same as the information content
of the Iliad or the Odyssey . We do not know what whales or
their cousins the dolphins have to talk or sing about. They have
no manipulative organs, they make no engineering constructs,
but they are social creatures. They hunt, swim, fish, browse,
frolic, mate, play, run from predators. There may be a great deal
to talk about.

J ~ -N j

The “songs” of the humpback whale as
recorded on a machine spectrograph. On
each line time runs horizontally and the
sound frequency, from low notes to high
notes, runs vertically. The almost vertical
lines represent glissandos, up the musical
scale, over several octaves. These hydro-
phonic recordings were made under water
by F. Watlington at the Palisades Sofar
Station, Bermuda, on April 28, 1964-
Roger Payne comments: “The songs we
taped in 1964 and 1969 are as different as
Beethoven [is] from the Beatles.” He
found the (whale) music of the 1960’s
more beautiful than that for the 1970’s.
Courtesy American Association for the
Advancement of Science.

272 - Cosmos

Transcription:
4-8 min

T

T

6-15 min

II

*

7 min-lysis

III

FUNCTION

Abolish host restriction
Nonessential

Protein kinase

RNA polymerase

Start of replication ]

DNA ligase

Nonessential

Inactivate host RNA pol

Endonuclease

Lysozyme

Helicase. primase

DNA polymerase

5' exonuclease
Virion protein
Head protein

Head assembly

Tail protein

Virion protein

Head protein

Tail protein

DNA maturation

Right end

The gene library of the virus T7. This
single short strand of DNA, containing
some twenty genes, includes everything
this organism must know in order to in¬
vade a bacterium and entirely take over
the host cell The information, written in
the DNA language through the sequence
of nucleotides, includes instructions for
duplicating its DNA instructions and its
protein head and tail, and for using the
chemical machinery of the host bac¬
terium. The bacterial cell is converted
from a factory for making more bacteria
into a factory for making more T7. From
DNA Replication by Arthur Komberg,
W. H. Freeman and Company, 1980.
Copyright © 1980.

The primary danger to the whales is a newcomer, an upstart
animal, only recently, through technology, become competent in
the oceans, a creature that calls itself human. For 99.99 percent of
the history of the whales, there were no humans in or on the
deep oceans. During this period the whales evolved their ex¬
traordinary audio communication system. The finbacks, for ex¬
ample, emit extremely loud sounds at a frequency of twenty
Hertz, down near the lowest octave on the piano keyboard. (A
Hertz is a unit of sound frequency that represents one sound
wave, one crest and one trough, entering your ear every second.)
Such low-frequency sounds are scarcely absorbed in the ocean.
The American biologist Roger Payne has calculated that using
the deep ocean sound channel, two whales could communicate
with each other at twenty Hertz essentially anywhere in the
world. One might be off the Ross Ice Shelf in Antarctica and
communicate with another in the Aleutians. For most of their
history, the whales may have established a global communica¬
tions network. Perhaps when separated by 15,000 kilometers,
their vocalizations are love songs, cast hopefully into the vastness
of the deep.

For tens of millions of years these enormous, intelligent, com¬
municative creatures evolved with essentially no natural ene¬
mies. Then the development of the steamship in the nineteenth
century introduced an ominous source of noise pollution. As
commercial and military vessels became more abundant, the
noise background in the oceans, especially at a frequency of
twenty Hertz, became noticeable. Whales communicating across
the oceans must have experienced increasingly greater difficul¬
ties. The distance over which they could communicate must
have decreased steadily. Two hundred years ago, a typical dis¬
tance across which finbacks could communicate was perhaps
10,000 kilometers. Today, the corresponding number is perhaps
a few hundred kilometers. Do whales know each other’s names?
Can they recognize each other as individuals by sounds alone?
We have cut the whales off from themselves. Creatures that
communicated for tens of millions of years have now effectively
been silenced.*

* There is a curious counterpoint to this story. The preferred radio
channel for interstellar communication with other technical civilizations
is near a frequency of 1.42 billion Hertz, marked by a radio spectral line
of hydrogen, the most abundant atom in the Universe. We are just
beginning to listen here for signals of intelligent origin. But the frequency
band is being increasingly encroached upon by civilian and military
communications traffic on Earth, and not only by the major powers. We
are jamming the interstellar channel. Uncontrolled growth of terrestrial
radio technology may prevent us from ready communication with in¬
telligent beings on distant worlds. Their songs may go unanswered be¬
cause we have not the will to control our radio-frequency pollution and
listen.

The Persistence of Memory — 273

And we have done worse than that, because there persists to
this day a traffic in the dead bodies of whales. There are humans
who hunt and slaughter whales and market the products for
lipstick or industrial lubricant. Many nations understand that the
systematic murder of such intelligent creatures is monstrous, but
the traffic continues, promoted chiefly by Japan, Norway and the
Soviet Union. We humans, as a species, are interested in com¬
munication with extraterrestrial intelligence. Would not a good
beginning be improved communication with terrestrial intelli¬
gence, with other human beings of different cultures and lan¬
guages, with the great apes, with the dolphins, but particularly
with those intelligent masters of the deep, the great whales?

For a whale to live there are many things it must know how to
do. This knowledge is stored in its genes and in its brains. The
genetic information includes how to convert plankton into blub¬
ber; or how to hold your breath on a dive one kilometer below
the surface. The information in the brains, the learned informa¬
tion, includes such things as who your mother is, or the meaning
of the song you are hearing just now. The whale, like all the
other animals on the Earth, has a gene library and a brain library.

The genetic material of the whale, like the genetic material of
human beings, is made of nucleic acids, those extraordinary
molecules capable of reproducing themselves from the chemical
building blocks that surround them, and of turning hereditary
information into action. For example, one whale enzyme, identi¬
cal to one you have in every cell of your body, is called hexoki-
nase, the first of more than two dozen enzyme-mediated steps
required to convert a molecule of sugar obtained from the plank¬
ton in the whale’s diet into a little energy—perhaps a contribution
to a single low-frequency note in the music of the whale.

The information stored in the DNA double helix of a whale
or a human or any other beast or vegetable on Earth is written in
a language of four letters—the four different kinds of nucleotides,
the molecular components that make up DNA. How many bits
of information are contained in the hereditary material of various
life forms? How many yes/no answers to the various biological
questions are written in the language of life? A virus needs about
10,000 bits—roughly equivalent to the amount of information on
this page. But the viral information is simple, exceedingly com¬
pact, extraordinarily efficient. Reading it requires very close at¬
tention. These are the instructions it needs to infect some other
organism and to reproduce itself—the only things that viruses are
any good at. A bacterium uses roughly a million bits of informa¬
tion—which is about 100 printed pages. Bacteria have a lot more
to do than viruses. Unlike the viruses, they are not thoroughgo¬
ing parasites. Bacteria have to make a living. And a free-swim¬
ming one-celled amoeba is much more sophisticated; with about
four hundred million bits in its DNA, it would require some
eighty 500-page volumes to make another amoeba.

A small region of the Gene Library of a
human or a whale, if it were available as
ordinary books rather than encoded in the
nucleic acids. Each title corresponds to a
complex set of functions which organisms
perform expertly without any mediation
from their brains. The instructions in the
genes are “how to do it” books. Photo¬
graphed by Edwardo Castaneda.

274 - Cosmos

+ ATP

Hexokinase

Glucose 6-phosphate

+ ADP + H+

Phosphoglucose 0 3 P0H 2 C /Os
isomerase

ch 2 oh

H

HO H

Fructose 6-phosphate

OH

2 -o,poh 2 c ch 2 oh

^ 1

H HO

OH

OH H

Fructose 6-phosphate

Phosphofructokinase

+ ATP -»

2_ 0,P0H,C /Os. CH
H

OH

OH H

Fructose 1,6-diphosphate

ch 2 opo 3 2 ~

C=0
HO—C—H
H—C—OH
H—C—OH

CH 2 0P0 3 2 "

Fructose

1.6-diphosphate

Aldolase

CH 2 0P0 3 2 -

c=o

HO—C—H +

I

H

Dihydroxyacetone

phosphate

v°

H—C—OH

ch 2 opo 3 2 -

Glyceraldehyde

3-phosphate

0. H

Y

H—C—OH
CH 2 0P0 3 2 "

Glyceraldehyde 3-phosphate

Triose phosphate
isomerase

ch 2 oh

I

c=o

CH 2 0P0 3 2 -

Dihydroxyacetone phosphate

The Persistence of Memory - 275

°W H

c

I

H—C—OH -(- NAD + + Pi

ch 2 opo 3 2 -

Glyceraldehyde

3-phosphate

dehydrogenase

O /0 P0,-

c

I

H—C—OH

ch 2 opo 3 2 -

+ NADH + H +

Glyceraldehyde

3-phosphate

1,3-Diphosphoglycerate

(1,3-DPG)

0 X

C— 0P0 3 2 -

Phosphoglycerate

Vo-

H—C—OH

ch 2 opo 3 2 -

1,3-Diphosphoglycerate

kinase

+ ADP —

H—C—OH

ch 2 opo 3 2 -

3-Phosphoglycerate

+ ATP

o x o-

V

H—C—OH

I

H—C—OPO, 2

I 3

H

3 Phosphoglycerate

Phosphoglyceromutase

v°-

I

H—C—0P 0 3 2 ^

I

H—C—OH

I

H

2-Phosphoglycerate

V

H —C—0P0 3 2 '

I

H —C—OH

I

H

2 Phosphoglycerate

Enolase

Y

C—0P0 3 2 - + H 2 0

H—C

I

H

Phosphoenolpyruvate

V

I

C—OP0 3 2 -

II

ch 2

Phosphoenolpyruvate

-I- ADP

Pyruvate

kinase

0 0 ~

V

I

c=o

I

ch 3

Pyruvate

+ ATP

A tiny fraction of the information in the gene library: the first steps in the digestion of the sugar glucose. In the
hexagons representing glucose and the pentagon representing fructose, each apex is occupied by a carbon atom. The
six-carbon molecule fructose 1,6-diphosphate is broken down into two three-carbon fragments. Each chemical step is
carefully orchestrated and presided over by a particular enzyme, named above the arrows. Energy to drive this elaborate
chemistry is provided by the molecule ATP. Two molecules of ATP go in and (because there are two three-carbon
fragments) four come out; an energy profit is made. Organisms such as whales and humans that breathe air then
combine pyruvate (lower right ) with oxygen and extract still more energy. This elaborately evolved chemical pump
drives much of life on Earth.

276 - Cosmos

A whale or a human being needs something like five billion
bits. The 5 * 10 9 bits of information in our encyclopaedia of
life—in the nucleus of each of our cells—if written out in, say,
English, would fill a thousand volumes. Every one of your hun¬
dred trillion cells contains a complete library of instructions on
how to make every part of you. Every cell in your body arises by
successive cell divisions from a single cell, a fertilized egg gen¬
erated by your parents. Every time that cell divided, in the many
embryological steps that went into making you, the original set of
genetic instructions was duplicated with great fidelity. So your
liver cells have some unemployed knowledge about how to make
your bone cells, and vice versa. The genetic library contains
everything your body knows how to do on its own. The ancient
information is written in exhaustive, careful, redundant detail-
how to laugh, how to sneeze, how to walk, how to recognize
patterns, how to reproduce, how to digest an apple. If it was
expressed in the language of chemistry, the instructions for the
first steps in digesting the sugar in an apple would look like the
scheme on pages 274 and 275.

Eating an apple is an immensely complicated process. In fact, if
I had to synthesize my own enzymes, if I consciously had to
remember and direct all the chemical steps required to get energy
out of food, I would probably starve. But even bacteria do an¬
aerobic glycolysis, which is why apples rot: lunchtime for the
microbes. They and we and all creatures inbetween possess many
similar genetic instructions. Our separate gene libraries have
many pages in common, another reminder of our common evo¬
lutionary heritage. Our technology can duplicate only a tiny
fraction of the intricate biochemistry that our bodies effortlessly
perform: we have only just begun to study these processes. Evo¬
lution, however, has had billions of years of practice. DNA
knows.

But suppose what you had to do was so complicated that even
several billion bits was insufficient. Suppose the environment was
changing so fast that the precoded genetic encyclopaedia, which
served perfectly well before, was no longer entirely adequate.
Then even a gene library of 1,000 volumes would not be
enough. That is why we have brains.

Like all our organs, the brain has evolved, increasing in com¬
plexity and information content, over millions of years. Its struc¬
ture reflects all the stages through which it has passed. The brain
evolved from the inside out. Deep inside is the oldest part, the
brainstem, which conducts the basic biological functions, includ¬
ing the rhythms of life—heartbeat and respiration. According to a
provocative insight by Paul MacLean, the higher functions of the
brain evolved in three successive stages. Capping the brainstem is
the R-complex, the seat of aggression, ritual, territoriality and
social hierarchy, which evolved hundreds of millions of years
ago in our reptilian ancestors. Deep inside the skull of every one

The Persistence of Memory — 211

of us there is something like the brain of a crocodile. Surrounding
the R-complex is the limbic system or mammalian brain, which
evolved tens of millions of years ago in ancestors who were
mammals but not yet primates. It is a major source of our moods
and emotions, of our concern and care for the young.

And finally, on the outside, living in uneasy truce with the
more primitive brains beneath, is the cerebral cortex, which
evolved millions of years ago in our primate ancestors. The
cerebral cortex, where matter is transformed into consciousness,
is the point of embarkation for all our cosmic voyages. Comprise
ing more than two-thirds of the brain mass, it is the realm of both
intuition and critical analysis. It is here that we have ideas and
inspirations, here that we read and write, here that we do math¬
ematics and compose music. The cortex regulates our conscious
lives. It is the distinction of our species, the seat of our humanity.
Civilization is a product of the cerebral cortex.

The language of the brain is not the DNA language of the
genes. Rather, what we know is encoded in cells called
neurons—microscopic electrochemical switching elements, typi¬
cally a few hundredths of a millimeter across. Each of us has
perhaps a hundred billion neurons, comparable to the number of
stars in the Milky Way Galaxy. Many neurons have thousands of
connections with their neighbors. There are something like a
hundred trillion, 10 14 , such connections in the human cerebral
cortex.

Charles Sherrington imagined the activities in the cerebral
cortex upon awakening:

[The cortex] becomes now a sparkling field of rhythmic
flashing points with trains of traveling sparks hurrying
hither and thither. The brain is waking and with it the
mind is returning. It is as if the Milky Way entered upon
some cosmic dance. Swiftly the [cortex] becomes an en¬
chanted loom where millions of flashing shuttles weave a
dissolving pattern, always a meaningful pattern though
never an abiding one; a shifting harmony of sub-patterns.
Now as the waking body rouses, sub-patterns of this great
harmony of activity stretch down into the unlit tracks of the
[lower brain]. Strings of flashing and traveling sparks engage
the links of it. This means that the body is up and rises to
meet its waking day.

Even in sleep, the brain is pulsing, throbbing and flashing with
the complex business of human life—dreaming, remembering,
figuring things out. Our thoughts, visions and fantasies have a
physical reality. A thought is made of hundreds of electrochemi¬
cal impulses. If we were shrunk to the level of the neurons, we
might witness elaborate, intricate, evanescent patterns. One
might be the spark of a memory of the smell of lilacs on a country
road in childhood. Another might be part of an anxious all-
points bulletin: “Where did I leave the keys?”

The brain library: three views of the
human brain, in which perhaps a hundred
trillion bits of information are stored
within a mass of some 1,400 grams (about
3 pounds). The top photograph on the
opposite page shows the two hemispheres
of the cerebral cortex, connected by a
broad bundle of nerve fibers. The convo¬
lutions in the cerebral cortex serve to in¬
crease the brains surface area in a fixed
volume. Below that is a view of the base
of the human brain. The cerebral cortex is
such a major part of the brain that part of
it is visible even from this view—portions
of the frontal and temporal lobes in the
upper part of this picture. The brain com¬
ponents mainly visible here are the most
primitive—those that control heartbeat,
body temperature, touch, pain and the
like. On this page is an oblique view. Even
with this orientation, the R-complex—
surrounding the brainstem—and the lim¬
bic system are mainly hidden in the
interior of the brain. Photographs from
studies by Fried, Paul and Scheibel. Pho¬
tographed by Peter Duong. Courtesy Ar¬
nold Scheibel, Brain Research Institute,
UCLA.

278 - Cosmos

A cluster of neurons in the human brain-
stem. The magnification in this scanning
electron micrograph is 15,000 times. In
such neural connections the brain library
is stored, processed and accessed. Photo¬
graphs from studies by Fried, Paul and
Scheibel. Photographed by Peter Duong.
Courtesy Arnold Scheibel, Brain Re¬
search Institute, UCLA.

There are many valleys in the mountains of the mind, con¬
volutions that greatly increase the surface area available in the
cerebral cortex for information storage in a skull of limited size.
The neurochemistry of the brain is astonishingly busy, the cir¬
cuitry of a machine more wonderful than any devised by
humans. But there is no evidence that its functioning is due to
anything more than the 10 14 neural connections that build an
elegant architecture of consciousness. The world of thought is
divided roughly into two hemispheres. The right hemisphere of
the cerebral cortex is mainly responsible for pattern recognition,
intuition, sensitivity, creative insights. The left hemisphere pre¬
sides over rational, analytical and critical thinking. These are the
dual strengths, the essential opposites, that characterize human
thinking. Together, they provide the means both for generating
ideas and for testing their validity. A continuous dialogue is
going on between the two hemispheres, channeled through an
immense bundle of nerves, the corpus callosum, the bridge be¬
tween creativity and analysis, both of which are necessary to
understand the world.

The information content of the human brain expressed in bits
is probably comparable to the total number of connections
among the neurons—about a hundred trillion, 10 14 , bits. If writ¬
ten out in English, say, that information would fill some twenty
million volumes, as many as in the world’s largest libraries. The
equivalent of twenty million books is inside the heads of every
one of us. The brain is a very big place in a very small space.
Most of the books in the brain are in the cerebral cortex. Down
in the basement are the functions our remote ancestors mainly
depended on—aggression, child-rearing, fear, sex, the willingness
to follow leaders blindly. Of the higher brain functions, some-
reading, writing, speaking—seem to be localized in particular
places in the cerebral cortex. Memories, on the other hand, are
stored redundantly in many locales. If such a thing as telepathy
existed, one of its glories would be the opportunity for each of us
to read the books in the cerebral cortices of our loved ones. But
there is no compelling evidence for telepathy, and the communi¬
cation of such information remains the task of artists and writers.

The brain does much more than recollect. It compares, syn¬
thesizes, analyzes, generates abstractions. We must figure out
much more than our genes can know. That is why the brain
library is some ten thousand times larger than the gene library.
Our passion for learning, evident in the behavior of every
toddler, is the tool for our survival. Emotions and ritualized
behavior patterns are built deeply into us. They are part of our
humanity. But they are not characteristically human. Many other
animals have feelings. What distinguishes our species is thought.
The cerebral cortex is a liberation. We need no longer be
trapped in the genetically inherited behavior patterns of lizards
and baboons. We are, each of us, largely responsible for what

The Persistence of Memory - 279

gets put into our brains, for what, as adults, we wind up caring for
and knowing about. No longer at the mercy of the reptile brain,
we can change ourselves.

Most of the world’s great cities have grown haphazardly, little
by little, in response to the needs of the moment; very rarely is a
city planned for the remote future. The evolution of a city is like
the evolution of the brain: it develops from a small center and
slowly grows and changes, leaving many old parts still function¬
ing. There is no way for evolution to rip out the ancient interior
of the brain because of its imperfections and replace it with
something of more modern manufacture. The brain must func¬
tion during the renovation. That is why the brainstem is sur¬
rounded by the R-complex, then the limbic system and finally
the cerebral cortex. The old parts are in charge of too many
fundamental functions for them to be replaced altogether. So
they wheeze along, out-of-date and sometimes counterproduc¬
tive, but a necessary consequence of our evolution.

In New York City, the arrangement of many of the major
streets dates to the seventeenth century, the stock exchange to
the eighteenth century, the waterworks to the nineteenth, the
electrical power system to the twentieth. The arrangement might
be more efficient if all civic systems were constructed in parallel
and replaced periodically (which is why disastrous fires—the great
conflagrations of London and Chicago, for example—are some¬
times an aid in city planning). But the slow accretion of new
functions permits the city to work more or less continuously
through the centuries. In the seventeenth century you traveled
between Brooklyn and Manhattan across the East River by ferry.
In the nineteenth century, the technology became available to
construct a suspension bridge across the river. It was built pre¬
cisely at the site of the ferry terminal, both because the city
owned the land and because major thoroughfares were already
converging on the pre-existing ferry service. Later when it was
possible to construct a tunnel under the river, it too was built in
the same place for the same reasons, and also because small
abandoned precursors of tunnels, called caissons, had already
been emplaced during the construction of the bridge. This use
and restructuring of previous systems for new purposes is very
much like the pattern of biological evolution.

When our genes could not store all the information necessary
for survival, we slowly invented brains. But then the time came,
perhaps ten thousand years ago, when we needed to know more
than could conveniently be contained in brains. So we learned to
stockpile enormous quantities of information outside our bodies.
We are the only species on the planet, so far as we know, to have
invented a communal memory stored neither in our genes nor in
our brains. The warehouse of that memory is called the library.

A book is made from a tree. It is an assemblage of flat, flexible
parts (still called “leaves”) imprinted with dark pigmented squiggles.

The constellation of the camel. From the
Abd alRahman al Sufi al Kitab al-Kawa -
kib Wa’s Suwar Razi (“Book of Stars and
Constellations”), Persia, 1632. Courtesy
Spencer Collection, The New York Pub¬
lic Library, Astor, Lenox and Tilden
Foundations.

280 - Cosmos

diogonalis quadranguli cui* latcra (St diucrfitatcs aTpectus
longitudinc&laticuoine. Diuerfiras afpcctus luncadfol'
cxccfTus diucrfiratis alpccf Lun^ flip diucrfiratc afpcctus for
Si ucra coiuncrio luminariflf fucrit inter gradum cdipticc
denre & nonagdimu cius ab afccndcnrc: uilibilis coru coiu C *
crio preedit ucra.Si autc inter cunde nonagefimQ & eradu °
cidente fuerir.uiGbilis ucra fcqud. Sed G in code grad u tion*
gcfimo accidcric rOc (Imul uifibilis coiuctio cG uera fiet nullacs
diucrfitas afpccTin longirudinc cotingct. NonageGm* nan»
gradus cclipricp ab afcendctc femp e in circulo g zenith &rpo!
Jos xodiadpccdctc. Latitudo lune uifa e arcus circuli maoni

THEOR1CA ECL1PSIS LVNARIS. ^

jodiaci & locd lun£ uerfl aut uifi! tranfeilris inter edi/

P"|i;namccl.'pf3tf. Minutaafusiedipfilu... „

^ -adiaci quf 1 ana pambulat lolc fugando a pnncipio cdy
r “. ;rJ ~ a j jucdui ciusdi particularis fucrit*. aut uniuerfalis G/
P tfU * uc j 3 pnncipio ufqj ad initifl totalis obfeurauonis G
flC mcrfaii5 cu mora fucrit. Minuta mor$ dimidif (St minuta
f, ja qu? i U na foie fupando a prindpio totalis obfcuiatiois
^ ad media cius pambulat. Minuta afus in cdypG folari
H minuta que luna a prindpio edipGs ufc* ad mediu fugatioc
utminu H feQmZ A ECL1PS1S SOLARIS

Four early accessions to the human book library. Top, two pages from Sphaera Mundi by Joannes de Sacro Bosco.
Published by Erhard Ratdult, Venice, 1485. The origin of lunar and solar eclipses is being discussed. Top opposite, the
ascent of Mohammed on Buraq. From the sixteenth-century Turkish manuscript Davor Siyar-e Nabi (“Life of the
Prophet”) by Mustapha ibn Yusuf. Bottom, an illustration of Jain cosmology and cosmography on cloth. Published in
Gujarat, India, sixteenth century. Bottom opposite, the constellation of Aquarius, the water carrier. From De Sideribus
Tractatus by Caius Hygnius, Italy, around 1450. All books courtesy Spencer Collection, the New York Public Library,
Astor, Lenox and Tilden Foundations.

BOTH PHOTOS BY BILL RAY

The Persistence of Memory - 281

One glance at it and you hear the voice of another person—
perhaps someone dead for thousands of years. Across the
millennia, the author is speaking, clearly and silently, inside your
head, directly to you. Writing is perhaps the greatest of human
inventions, binding together people, citizens of distant epochs,
who never knew one another. Books break the shackles of time,
proof that humans can work magic.

Some of the earliest authors wrote on clay. Cuneiform writing,
the remote ancestor of the Western alphabet, was invented in
the Near East about 5,000 years ago. Its purpose was to keep
records: the purchase of grain, the sale of land, the triumphs of
the king, the statutes of the priests, the positions of the stars, the
prayers to the gods. For thousands of years, writing was chiseled
into clay and stone, scratched onto wax or bark or leather;
painted on bamboo or papyrus or silk—but always one copy at a
time and, except for the inscriptions on monuments, always for a
tiny readership. Then in China between the second and sixth
centuries, paper, ink and printing with carved wooden blocks
were all invented, permitting many copies of a work to be made
and distributed. It took a thousand years for the idea to catch on
in remote and backward Europe. Then, suddenly, books were
being printed all over the world. Just before the invention of
movable type, around 1450, there were no more than a few tens
of thousands of books in all of Europe, all handwritten; about as
many as in China in 100 B.C., and a tenth as many as in the Great
Library of Alexandria. Fifty years later, around 1500, there were
ten million printed books. Learning had become available to
anyone who could read. Magic was everywhere.

More recently, books, especially paperbacks, have been
printed in massive and inexpensive editions. For the price of a
modest meal you can ponder the decline and fall of the Roman
Empire, the origin of species, the interpretation of dreams, the
nature of things. Books are like seeds. They can lie dormant for
centuries and then flower in the most unpromising soil.

The great libraries of the world contain millions of volumes,
the equivalent of about 10 14 bits of information in words, and
perhaps 10 15 bits in pictures. This is ten thousand times more
information than in our genes, and about ten times more than in
our brains. If I finish a book a week, I will read only a few
thousand books in my lifetime, about a tenth of a percent of the
contents of the greatest libraries of our time. The trick is to know
which books to read. The information in books is not prepro-
grammed at birth but constantly changed, amended by events,
adapted to the world. It is now twenty-three centuries since the
founding of the Alexandrian Library. If there were no books, no
written records, think how prodigious a time twenty-three cen¬
turies would be. With four generations per century, twenty-three
centuries occupies almost a hundred generations of human
beings. If information could be passed on merely by word of

„^,ruVmc«Uf - OrnniTio efr fh-ILrunp
i-Uu'w u<ju«e-eum tf(okqu4V<o eft

arUjrum ' W <&'

Cjuf'f
♦ucvafci^ c

r.OUlj7* rr i&. C

P I jccf brum uitrr inohu/rfTrtT- kerfufajjpWU -
:deo y, unuf extrti-rn am bor?uj'4icitu&tntt*
^auinoctikltm £>ctfhuurri ctrculurn jot dnjtv

Alter <£eOx m ^clutco

BOTH PHOTOS BY BILL RAY

282 - Cosmos

• ©

© m

1

>-

CC

X

Two pages from a nineteenth-century
Thai manuscript on astrology and astron-
omy. Courtesy Spencer Collection, the
New York Public Library, As tor, Lenox
and Tilden Foundations.

mouth, how little we should know of our past, how slow would
be our progress! Everything would depend on what ancient find¬
ings we had accidentally been told about, and how accurate the
account was. Past information might be revered, but in successive
retellings it would become progressively more muddled and
eventually lost. Books permit us to voyage through time, to tap
the wisdom of our ancestors. The library connects us with the
insights and knowledge, painfully extracted from Nature, of the
greatest minds that ever were, with the best teachers, drawn from
the entire planet and from all of our history, to instruct us with¬
out tiring, and to inspire us to make our own contribution to the
collective knowledge of the human species. Public libraries de¬
pend on voluntary contributions. I think the health of our civili¬
zation, the depth of our awareness about the underpinnings of
our culture and our concern for the future can all be tested by
how well we support our libraries.

Were the Earth to be started over again with all its physical
features identical, it is extremely unlikely that anything closely
resembling a human being would ever again emerge. There is a
powerful random character to the evolutionary process. A cos¬
mic ray striking a different gene, producing a different mutation,
can have small consequences early but profound consequences
late. Happenstance may play a powerful role in biology, as it does
in history. The farther back the critical events occur, the more
powerfully can they influence the present.

For example, consider our hands. We have five fingers, in¬
cluding one opposable thumb. They serve us quite well. But I
think we would be served equally well with six fingers including a
thumb, or four fingers including a thumb, or maybe five fingers
and two thumbs. There is nothing intrinsically best about our
particular configuration of fingers, which we ordinarily think of
as so natural and inevitable. We have five fingers because we
have descended from a Devonian fish that had five phalanges or
bones in its fins. Had we descended from a fish with four or six
phalanges, we would have four or six fingers on each hand and
would think them perfectly natural. We use base ten arithmetic
only because we have ten fingers on our hands.* Had the ar¬
rangement been otherwise, we would use base eight or base
twelve arithmetic and relegate base ten to the New Math. The
same point applies, I believe, to many more essential aspects of
our being—our hereditary material, our internal biochemistry,
our form, stature, organ systems, loves and hates, passions and
despairs, tenderness and aggression, even our analytical pro¬
cesses—all of these are, at least in part, the result of apparently
minor accidents in our immensely long evolutionary history.

* The arithmetic based on the number 5 or 10 seems so obvious that the
ancient Greek equivalent of “to count” literally means “to five.”

The Persistence of Memory — 283

Perhaps if one less dragonfly had drowned in the Carboniferous
swamps, the intelligent organisms on our planet today would
have feathers and teach their young in rookeries. The pattern of
evolutionary causality is a web of astonishing complexity; the
incompleteness of our understanding humbles us.

Just sixty-five million years ago our ancestors were the most
unprepossessing of mammals—creatures with the size and intelli-
gence of moles or tree shrews. It would have taken a very auda-
cious biologist to guess that such animals would eventually
produce the line that dominates the Earth today. The Earth then
was full of awesome, nightmarish lizards—the dinosaurs, immense-
ly successful creatures, which filled virtually every ecological
niche. There were swimming reptiles, flying reptiles, and rep'
tiles—some as tall as a six-story building—thundering across the
face of the Earth. Some of them had rather large brains, an
upright posture and two little front legs very much like hands,
which they used to catch small, speedy mammals—probably in¬
cluding our distant ancestors—for dinner. If such dinosaurs had
survived, perhaps the dominant intelligent species on our planet
today would be four meters tall with green skin and sharp teeth,
and the human form would be considered a lurid fantasy of
saurian science fiction. But the dinosaurs did not survive. In one
catastrophic event all of them and many, perhaps most, of the
other species on the Earth, were destroyed.* But not the tree
shrews. Not the mammals. They survived.

No one knows what wiped out the dinosaurs. One evocative
idea is that it was a cosmic catastrophe, the explosion of a nearby
star—a supernova like the one that produced the Crab Nebula. If
there were by chance a supernova within ten or twenty light-
years of the solar system some sixty-five million years ago, it
would have sprayed an intense flux of cosmic rays into space, and
some of these, entering the Earth’s envelope of air, would have
burned the atmospheric nitrogen. The oxides of nitrogen thus
generated would have removed the protective layer of ozone
from the atmosphere, increasing the flux of solar ultraviolet radi¬
ation at the surface and frying and mutating the many organisms
imperfectly protected against intense ultraviolet light. Some of
those organisms may have been staples of the dinosaur diet.

The disaster, whatever it was, that cleared the dinosaurs from
the world stage removed the pressure on the mammals. Our
ancestors no longer had to live in the shadow of voracious
reptiles. We diversified exuberantly and flourished. Twenty mil¬
lion years ago, our immediate ancestors probably still lived in the
trees, later descending because the forests receded during a major

The constellation Cancer from Julius
Schillers C oelum Stillatum Christianum
Concauum (pages 72-73). This book,
published at the Augusta Vindelicorum
Monastery in Germany in 1627, was an
unsuccessful attempt to do away with
“pagan” mythology in the skies. Here the
author has replaced Cancer with Saint
John the Evangelist. Courtesy Spencer
Collection, the New York Public Library,
Astor, Lenox and Tilden Foundations.

* A recent analysis suggests that 96 percent of all the species in the oceans
may have died at this time. With such an enormous extinction rate, the
organisms of today can have evolved from only a small and unrepresen¬
tative sampling of the organisms that lived in late Mesozoic times.

284 - Cosmos

f M». WILL I AM

SHAKESPEARtS

CO MU DIES.

, MISTOIIII-S, &

TK AG EDI US.

ulcr. 4

' ' 1 |
tprinx* cut; 4
1 'lute 3
> 1 *Ik* life j m

' •liisvvii J

’ line -J

1 f licit ftlllifl

■ lo 4q|

(,|is| too|ie®

o.i,

ri.M»ll.cl nuoi.lmr; hill,.- 'I hkO ii^mallCopies.

£ r*UlK\ll,y lUU |4)^;ai I'M. Illdtlltt. , A i }

First folio title page of Shakespeare’s
Works , published in London, 1623.
Courtesy Rare Book Division, the New
York Public Library, Astor, Lenox and
Tilden Foundations.

Indonesian Palintangatan astrological cab
endar, printed on linen in Bali, nineteenth
century. Courtesy Spencer Collection, the
New York Public Library, Astor, Lenox
and Tilden Foundations.

ice age and were replaced by grassy savannahs. It is not much
good to be supremely adapted to life in the trees if there are very
few trees. Many arboreal primates must have vanished with the
forests. A few eked out a precarious existence on the ground and
survived. And one of those lines evolved to become us. No one
knows the cause of that climatic change. It may have been a small
variation in the intrinsic luminosity of the Sun or in the orbit of
the Earth; or massive volcanic eruptions injecting fine dust into
the stratosphere, reflecting more sunlight back into space and
cooling the Earth. It may have been due to changes in the general
circulation of the oceans. Or perhaps the passage of the Sun
through a galactic dust cloud. Whatever the cause, we see again
how tied our existence is to random astronomical and geological
events.

After we came down from the trees, we evolved an upright
posture; our hands were free; we possessed excellent binocular
vision—we had acquired many of the preconditions for making
tools. There was now a real advantage in possessing a large brain
and in communicating complex thoughts. Other things being
equal, it is better to be smart than to be stupid. Intelligent beings
can solve problems better, live longer and leave more offspring;
until the invention of nuclear weapons, intelligence powerfully
aided survival. In our history it was some horde of furry little
mammals who hid from the dinosaurs, colonized the treetops
and later scampered down to domesticate fire, invent writing,
construct observatories and launch space vehicles. If things had
been a little different, it might have been some other creature
whose intelligence and manipulative ability would have led to
comparable accomplishments. Perhaps the smart bipedal dino¬
saurs, or the raccoons, or the otters, or the squid. It would be nice
to know how different other intelligences can be; so we study the
whales and the great apes. To learn a little about what other
kinds of civilizations are possible, we can study history and cul¬
tural anthropology. But we are all of us—us whales, us apes, us
people—too closely related. As long as our inquiries are limited to
one or two evolutionary lines on a single planet, we will remain
forever ignorant of the possible range and brilliance of other
intelligences and other civilizations.

On another planet, with a different sequence of random pro¬
cesses to make hereditary diversity and a different environment
to select particular combinations of genes, the chances of finding
beings who are physically very similar to us is, I believe, near
zero. The chances of finding another form of intelligence is not.
Their brains may well have evolved from the inside out. They
may have switching elements analogous to our neurons. But the
neurons may be very different; perhaps superconductors that
work at very low temperatures rather than organic devices that
work at room temperature, in which case their speed of thought
will be 10 7 times faster than ours. Or perhaps the equivalent of

The Persistence of Memory — 285

neurons elsewhere would not be in direct physical contact but in
radio communication so that a single intelligent being could be
distributed among many different organisms, or even many dif¬
ferent planets, each with a part of the intelligence of the whole,
each contributing by radio to an intelligence much greater than
itself/ There may be planets where the intelligent beings have
about 10 14 neural connections, as we do. But there may be places
where the number is 10 24 or 10 34 . I wonder what they would
know. Because we inhabit the same universe as they, we and
they must share some substantial information in common. If we
could make contact, there is much in their brains that would be
of great interest to ours. But the opposite is also true. I think
extraterrestrial intelligence—even beings substantially further
evolved than we—will be interested in us, in what we know, how
we think, what our brains are like, the course of our evolution,
the prospects for our future.

If there are intelligent beings on the planets of fairly nearby
stars, could they know about us? Might they somehow have an
inkling of the long evolutionary progression from genes to brains
to libraries that has occurred on the obscure planet Earth? If the
extraterrestrials stay at home, there are at least two ways in
which they might find out about us. One way would be to listen
with large radio telescopes. For billions of years they would have
heard only weak and intermittent radio static caused by lightning
and the trapped electrons and protons whistling within the
Earths magnetic field. Then, less than a century ago, the radio
waves leaving the Earth would become stronger, louder, less like
noise and more like signals. The inhabitants of Earth had finally
stumbled upon radio communication. Today there is a vast in¬
ternational radio, television and radar communications traffic. At
some radio frequencies the Earth has become by far the brightest

The death of the dinosaurs. In one astro-
nomical hypothesis, it was due to a nearby
supernova explosion, seen in this painting
by Don Davis in the sky at top right. In
another hypothesis a large asteroid strikes
the Earth; the fine debris from the impact
persists in the stratosphere, reduces sun¬
light available for plants the dinosaurs eat,
and cools the Earth. Over hundreds of
millions of years, both events must have
happened at least once. The extinction of
bipedal intelligent reptiles cleared the
stage for the evolution of mammals and
humans.

* In some sense such a radio integration of separate individuals is already
beginning to happen on the planet Earth.

286 - Cosmos

object, the most powerful radio source, in the solar system-
brighter than Jupiter, brighter than the Sun. An extraterrestrial
civilization monitoring the radio emission from Earth and re-
ceiving such signals could not fail to conclude that something
interesting had been happening here lately.

As the Earth rotates, our more powerful radio transmitters
slowly sweep the sky. A radio astronomer on a planet of another
star would be able to calculate the length of the day on Earth
from the times of appearance and disappearance of our signals.
Some of our most powerful sources are radar transmitters; a few
are used for radar astronomy, to probe with radio fingers the
surfaces of the nearby planets. The size of the radar beam pro-
jected against the sky is much larger than the size of the planets,
and much of the signal wafts on, out of the solar system into the
depths of interstellar space to any sensitive receivers that may be
listening. Most radar transmissions are for military purposes; they
scan the skies in constant fear of a massive launch of missiles with
nuclear warheads, an augury fifteen minutes early of the end of
human civilization. The information content of these pulses is
negligible: a succession of simple numerical patterns coded into
beeps.

Overall, the most pervasive and noticeable source of radio
transmissions from the Earth is our television programming. Be-
cause the Earth is turning, some television stations will appear at
one horizon of the Earth while others disappear over the other.
There will be a confused jumble of programs. Even these might
be sorted out and pieced together by an advanced civilization on
a planet of a nearby star. The most frequently repeated messages
will be station call signals and appeals to purchase detergents,
deodorants, headache tablets, and automobile and petroleum
products. The most noticeable messages will be those broadcast
simultaneously by many transmitters in many time zones—for
example, speeches in times of international crisis by the President
of the United States or the Premier of the Soviet Union. The
mindless contents of commercial television and the integuments
of international crisis and internecine warfare within the human
family are the principal messages about life on Earth that we
choose to broadcast to the Cosmos. What must they think of us?

There is no calling those television programs back. There is no
way of sending a faster message to overtake them and revise the
previous transmission. Nothing can travel faster than light.
Large-scale television transmission on the planet Earth began
only in the late 1940’s. Thus, there is a spherical wave front
centered on the Earth expanding at the speed of light and con¬
taining Howdy Doody, the “Checkers” speech of then Vice-Pres¬
ident Richard M. Nixon and the televised inquisitions by Senator
Joseph McCarthy. Because these transmissions were broadcast a
few decades ago, they are only a few tens of light-years away
from the Earth. If the nearest civilization is farther away than

The Persistence of Memory — 287

that, then we can continue to breathe easy for a while. In any
case, we can hope that they will find these programs incompre¬
hensible.

The two Voyager spacecraft are bound for the stars. Affixed to
each is a gold-plated copper phonograph record with a cartridge
and stylus and, on the aluminum record jacket, instructions for
use. We sent something about our genes, something about our
brains, and something about our libraries to other beings who
might sail the sea of interstellar space. But we did not want to
send primarily scientific information. Any civilization able to
intercept Voyager in the depths of interstellar space, its transmit¬
ters long dead, would know far more science than we do. Instead,
we wanted to tell those other beings something about what
seems unique about ourselves. The interests of the cerebral cor¬
tex and limbic system are well represented; the R-complex less so.
Although the recipients may not know any languages of the
Earth, we included greetings in sixty human tongues, as well as
the hellos of the humpback whales. We sent photographs of
humans from all over the world caring for one another, learning,
fabricating tools and art and responding to challenges. There is
an hour and a half of exquisite music from many cultures, some
of it expressing our sense of cosmic loneliness, our wish to end
our isolation, our longing to make contact with other beings in
the Cosmos. And we have sent recordings of the sounds that
would have been heard on our planet from the earliest days
before the origin of life to the evolution of the human species
and our most recent burgeoning technology. It is, as much as the
sounds of any baleen whale, a love song cast upon the vastness of
the deep. Many, perhaps most, of our messages will be indeci¬
pherable. But we have sent them because it is important to try.

In this spirit we included on the Voyager spacecraft the
thoughts and feelings of one person, the electrical activity of her
brain, heart, eyes and muscles, which were recorded for an hour,
transcribed into sound, compressed in time and incorporated into
the record. In one sense we have launched into the Cosmos a
direct transcription of the thoughts and feelings of a single
human being in the month of June in the year 1977 on the planet
Earth. Perhaps the recipients will make nothing of it, or think it is
a recording of a pulsar, which in some superficial sense it resem¬
bles. Or perhaps a civilization unimaginably more advanced than
ours will be able to decipher such recorded thoughts and feelings
and appreciate our efforts to share ourselves with them.

The information in our genes is very old—most of it more than
millions of years old, some of it billions of years old. In contrast,
the information in our books is at most thousands of years old,
and that in our brains is only decades old. The long-lived infor¬
mation is not the characteristically human information. Because
of erosion on the Earth, our monuments and artifacts will not, in
the natural course of things, survive to the distant future. But the

288 - Cosmos

The Persistence of Memory - 289

Voyager record is on its way out of the solar system. The erosion
in interstellar space—chiefly cosmic rays and impacting dust
grains—is so slow that the information on the record will last a
billion years. Genes and brains and books encode information
differently and persist through time at different rates. But the
persistence of the memory of the human species will be far longer
in the impressed metal grooves on the Voyager interstellar re^
cord.

The Voyager message is traveling with agonizing slowness.
The fastest object ever launched by the human species, it will
still take tens of thousands of years to go the distance to the
nearest star. Any television program will traverse in hours the
distance that Voyager has covered in years. A television trans^
mission that has just finished being aired will, in only a few
hours, overtake the Voyager spacecraft in the region of Saturn
and beyond and speed outward to the stars. If it is headed that
way, the signal will reach Alpha Centauri in a little more than
four years. If, some decades or centuries hence, anyone out there
in space hears our television broadcasts, I hope they will think
well of us, a product of fifteen billion years of cosmic evolution,
the local transmogrification of matter into consciousness. Our
intelligence has recently provided us with awesome powers. It is
not yet clear that we have the wisdom to avoid our own self-de^
struction. But many of us are trying very hard. We hope that
very soon in the perspective of cosmic time we will have unified
our planet peacefully into an organization cherishing the life of
every living creature on it and will be ready to take that next
great step, to become part of a galactic society of communicating
civilizations.

The Voyager interstellar record. Since,
after its exploration of the giant planets,
the two Voyager spacecraft will leave the
solar system, they bear messages for any
interstellar civilization that may come
upon them. The record jacket (top) gives
in scientific notation instructions for play-
ing the record and something of the posb
tion and present epoch of the Earth.
Inside (below) is the record itself. It will last
for a billion years.

The Arecibo Interstellar Message. On
November 16, 1974, a radio signal was
transmitted from the Arecibo Observa-
tory to the globular cluster M13, about
25,000 light-years distant, far from the
plane of the Milky Way Galaxy. The sig¬
nal contained 1,679 bits of information.
But 1,679 = 73 x 23, the product of two
prime numbers, suggesting that the bits be
arranged in a 73 x 23 array, which yields
this picture. The top row establishes a bi¬
nary counting convention; the second
specifies the atomic numbers of the
chemical elements hydrogen, carbon, ni¬
trogen, oxygen and phosphorus, of which
we are made (Chapter 9). In these terms,
the green and blue blocks represent, re¬
spectively and numerically, the nucleo¬
tides and the sugar-phosphate backbone
of DNA (Chapter 2). The vertical white
block represents the number of nucleo¬
tides in the genes of the red creature, of
which the total population is the number
to its right; and which is as tall as the
number to its left (in units of the wave¬
length of the transmission, 12.6 centime¬
ters). In yellow is the creature’s planetary
system, the third planet having some par¬
ticular significance. In violet is the radio-
telescope transmitting the message. Its size
is given between the horizontal lines.
Courtesy Arecibo Observatory; National
Astronomy and Ionosphere Center, Cor¬
nell University.

Chapter XII

ENCYCLOPAEDIA

GALACTICA

“What are you? From where did you come? I have never seen anything like
you/’ The Creator Raven looked at Man and was . . . surprised to find that
this strange new being was so much like himself.

—An Eskimo creation myth

Heaven is founded,

Earth is founded,

Who now shall be alive, oh gods?

—The Aztec chronicle, The History of the Kingdoms

I know some will say, we are a little too bold in these Assertions of the
Planets, and that we mounted hither by many Probabilities, one of which, if
it chanced to be false, and contrary to our Supposition, would, like a bad
Foundation, ruin the whole Building, and make it fall to the ground. But...
supposing the Earth, as we did, one of the Planets of equal dignity and
honor with the rest, who would venture to say, that nowhere else were to
be found any that enjoy’d the glorious sight of Nature’s Opera? Or if there
were any Fellow/Bpectators, yet we were the only ones that had dived deep
to the secrets and knowledge of it?

—Christiaan Huygens in New Conjectures Concerning the Planetary Worlds ,
Their Inhabitants and Productions , c. 1690

The author of Nature . . . has made it impossible for us to have any
communication from this earth with the other great bodies of the universe,
in our present state; and it is highly possible that he has likewise cut off all
communication betwixt the other planets, and betwixt the different sys^
terns. . . . We observe, in all of them, enough to raise our curiosity, but not
to satisfy it... It does not appear to be suitable to the wisdom that shines
throughout all nature, to suppose that we should see so far, and have our
curiosity so much raised . . . only to be disappointed at the end . . . This,

292 - Cosmos

Jean Francois Champollion (1790—1832),
the decryptor of Egyptian hieroglyphics.
Portrait by Leon Cogniet, 1831. Courtesy
The Louvre, Paris, Reunion des musees
nationaux, Paris.

therefore, naturally leads us to consider our present state as only
the dawn or beginning of our existence, and as a state of prepa-
ration or probation for farther advancement. . . .

—Colin Maclaurin, 1748

There cannot be a language more universal and more simple,
more free from errors and obscurities . . . more worthy to express
the invariable relations of natural things [than mathematics]. It
interprets [all phenomena] by the same language, as if to attest
the unity and simplicity of the plan of the universe, and to make
still more evident that unchangeable order which presides over
all natural causes.

—Joseph Fourier, Analytic Theory of Heat, 1822

We HAVE LAUNCHED FOUR SHIPS TO THE STARS, Pioneers
10 and 11 and Voyagers 1 and 2. They are backward and primi-
tive craft, moving, compared to the immense interstellar dis¬
tances, with the slowness of a race in a dream. But in the future
we will do better. Our ships will travel faster. There will be desig¬
nated interstellar objectives, and sooner or later our spacecraft will
have human crews. In the Milky Way Galaxy there must be many
planets millions of years older than Earth, and some that are bil¬
lions of years older. Should we not have been visited? In all the
billions of years since the origin of our planet, has there not been
even once a strange craft from a distant civilization surveying our
world from above, and slowly settling down to the surface to be
observed by iridescent dragonflies, incurious reptiles, screeching
primates or wondering humans? The idea is natural enough. It has
occurred to everyone who has contemplated, even casually, the
question of intelligent life in the universe. But has it happened in
fact? The critical issue is the quality of the purported evidence,
rigorously and skeptically scrutinized—not what sounds plausible,
not the unsubstantiated testimony of one or two self-professed
eyewitnesses. By this standard there are no compelling cases of
extraterrestrial visitation, despite all the claims about UFOs and
ancient astronauts which sometimes make it seem that our planet
is awash in uninvited guests. I wish it were otherwise. There is
something irresistible about the discovery of even a token, per¬
haps a complex inscription, but, best by far, a key to the under¬
standing of an alien and exotic civilization. It is an appeal we
humans have felt before.

In 1801 a physicist named Joseph Fourier* was the prefect of a

* Fourier is now famous for his study of the propagation of heat in solids,
used today to understand the surface properties of the planets, and for
his investigation of waves and other periodic motion—a branch of
mathematics known as Fourier analysis.

Encyclopaedia Galactica - 293

departement of France called Isere. While inspecting the schools
in his province, Fourier discovered an eleven-year-old boy
whose remarkable intellect and flair for oriental languages had
already earned him the admiring attention of scholars. Fourier
invited him home for a chat. The boy was fascinated by Fourier’s
collection of Egyptian artifacts, collected during the Napoleonic
expedition where he had been responsible for cataloging the
astronomical monuments of that ancient civilization. The hiero-
glyphic inscriptions roused the boy’s sense of wonder. “But what
do they mean?” he asked. “Nobody knows,” was the reply. The
boy’s name was Jean Francois Champollion. Fired by the mystery
of the language no one could read, he became a superb linguist
and passionately immersed himself in ancient Egyptian writing.
France at that time was flooded with Egyptian artifacts, stolen by
Napoleon and later made available to Western scholars. The
description of the expedition was published, and devoured by
the young Champollion. As an adult, Champollion succeeded;
fulfilling his childhood ambition, he provided a brilliant deck
pherment of the ancient Egyptian hieroglyphics. But it was not
until 1828, twenty-seven years after his meeting with Fourier,
that Champollion first set foot in Egypt, the land of his dreams,
and sailed upstream from Cairo, following the course of the Nile,
paying homage to the culture he had worked so hard to unden
stand. It was an expedition in time, a visit to an alien civilization:

The evening of the 16th we finally arrived at Dendera.
There was magnificent moonlight and we were only an
hour away from the Temples: Could we resist the tempta¬
tion? I ask the coldest of you mortals! To dine and leave
immediately were the orders of the moment: alone and
without guides, but armed to the teeth we crossed the
fields . . . the Temple appeared to us at last . . . One could
well measure it but to give an idea of it would be impossi-
ble. It is the union of grace and majesty in the highest
degree. We stayed there two hours in ecstasy, running
through the huge rooms . . . and trying to read the exterior
inscriptions in the moonlight. We did not return to the boat
until three in the morning, only to return to the Temple at
seven . . . What had been magnificent in the moonlight was
still so when the sunlight revealed to us all the de-
tails . . . We in Europe are only dwarfs and no nation, am
cient or modern, has conceived the art of architecture on
such a sublime, great, and imposing style, as the ancient
Egyptians. They ordered everything to be done for people
who are a hundred feet high.

On the walls and columns of Karnak, at Dendera, everywhere
in Egypt, Champollion delighted to find that he could read the
inscriptions almost effortlessly. Many before him had tried and
failed to decipher the lovely hieroglyphics, a word that means
“sacred carvings.” Some scholars had believed them to be a kind

M

The ruins of Karnak. Frontispiece from
Description de L’Egypte, which Napoleon
arranged to be published in 1809 follow¬
ing his expedition to Egypt. Courtesy
UCLA Special Collections.

The temple at Dendera, partially inun¬
dated by the desert sands. The columns
display the head of the goddess Hathor.
From Description de L’Egypte. Courtesy
UCLA Special Collections.

294 — Cosmos

The Rosetta stone, made of black basalt
and about a meter high (top) shows the
same inscription in Egyptian hieroglyph'
ics, Demotic and Greek. Each cartouche
in the hieroglyphic text (above finger,
middle ) corresponds to the name Ptolemy
(Ptolemaios) in the Greek text (above
finger, bottom ).

of picture code, rich in murky metaphor, mostly about eyeballs
and wavy lines, beetles, bumblebees and birds—especially birds.
Confusion was rampant. There were those who deduced that the
Egyptians were colonists from ancient China. There were those who
concluded the opposite. Enormous folio volumes of spurious
translations were published. One interpreter glanced at the
Rosetta stone, whose hieroglyphic inscription was then still urn
deciphered, and instantly announced its meaning. He said that
the quick decipherment enabled him “to avoid the systematic
errors which invariably arise from prolonged reflection.” You get
better results, he argued, by not thinking too much. As with the
search for extraterrestrial life today, the unbridled speculation of
amateurs had frightened many professionals out of the field.

Champollion resisted the idea of hieroglyphs as pictorial met'
aphors. Instead, with the aid of a brilliant insight by the English
physicist Thomas Young, he proceeded something like this: The
Rosetta stone had been uncovered in 1799 by a French soldier
working on the fortifications of the Nile Delta town of Rashid,
which the Europeans, largely ignorant of Arabic, called Rosetta.
It was a slab from an ancient temple, displaying what seemed
clearly to be the same message in three different writings: in
hieroglyphics at top, in a kind of cursive hieroglyphic called
demotic in the middle, and, the key to the enterprise, in Greek at
the bottom. Champollion, who was fluent in ancient Greek, read that
the stone had been inscribed to commemorate the coronation
of Ptolemy V Epiphanes, in the spring of the year 196 B.C. On
this occasion the king released political prisoners, remitted
taxes, endowed temples, forgave rebels, increased military pre'
paredness and, in short, did all the things that modern rulers do
when they wish to stay in office.

The Greek text mentions Ptolemy many times. In roughly the
same positions in the hieroglyphic text is a set of symbols sun
rounded by an oval or cartouche. This, Champollion reasoned,
very probably also denotes Ptolemy. If so, the writing could not
be fundamentally pictographic or metaphorical; rather, most of
the symbols must stand for letters or syllables. Champollion also
had the presence of mind to count up the number of Greek
words and the number of individual hieroglyphs in what were
presumably equivalent texts. There were many fewer of the
former, again suggesting that the hieroglyphs were mainly letters
and syllables. But which hieroglyphs correspond to which letters?
Fortunately, Champollion had available to him an obelisk,
which had been excavated at Philae, that included the hiero'
glyphic equivalent of the Greek name Cleopatra. The two can
touches for Ptolemy and for Cleopatra, rearranged so they both
read left to right, are shown on p. 296. Ptolemy begins with P; the
first symbol in the cartouche is a square. Cleopatra has for its fifth
letter a P, and in the Cleopatra cartouche in the fifth position is
the same square. P it is. The fourth letter in Ptolemy is an L. Is it

Encyclopaedia Galactica — 295

The remains of Ancient Egypt. At top
left, a pharaonic stele, overgrown with
weeds, in the Valley of the Kings (photo-
graph by the author). At top right, the
Colossi of Memnon, the guardians of a
great mortuary temple of Amenophis III.

The temple itself was quarried away 1,900 years ago. The watercolors show the nineteenth-century appearance of
ancient Egyptian edifices, some still partially buried in sand. Watercolors commissioned by the King of Prussia,
Frederick William IV. From R. Lepsius, Denkmaeler . . . aus Aegypten, 1849-1859.

296 - Cosmos

The transliteration of a cartouche of Ptol-
emy from the Rosetta stone and one of
Cleopatra from the Philae obelisk.

represented by the lion? The second letter of Cleopatra is an L
and, in hieroglyphics, here is a lion again. The eagle is an A,
appearing twice in Cleopatra, as it should. A clear pattern is
emerging. Egyptian hieroglyphics are, in significant part, a simple
substitution cipher. But not every hieroglyph is a letter or sylla-
ble. Some are pictographs. The end of the Ptolemy cartouche
means “Ever-living, beloved of the god Ptah.” The semicircle and
egg at the end of Cleopatra are a conventional ideogram for
“daughter of Isis.” This mix of letters and pictographs caused
some grief for earlier interpreters.

In retrospect it sounds almost easy. But it had taken many
centuries to figure out, and there was a great deal more to do,
especially in the decipherment of the hieroglyphs of much earlier
times. The cartouches were the key within the key, almost as if
the pharaohs of Egypt had circled their own names to make the
going easier for the Egyptologists two thousand years in the
future. Champollion walked the Great Hypostyle Hall at Karnak
and casually read the inscriptions, which had mystified everyone
else, answering the question he had posed as a child to Fourier.
What a joy it must have been to open this one-way communica¬
tion channel with another civilization, to permit a culture that
had been mute for millennia to speak of its history, magic, medi¬
cine, religion, politics and philosophy.

Today we are again seeking messages from an ancient and
exotic civilization, this time hidden from us not only in time but
also in space. If we should receive a radio message from an
extraterrestrial civilization, how could it possibly be understood?
Extraterrestrial intelligence will be elegant, complex, internally
consistent and utterly alien. Extraterrestrials would, of course,
wish to make a message sent to us as comprehensible as possible.
But how could they? Is there in any sense an interstellar Rosetta
stone? We believe there is. We believe there is a common lan¬
guage that all technical civilizations, no matter how different,
must have. That common language is science and mathematics.
The laws of Nature are the same everywhere. The patterns in
the spectra of distant stars and galaxies are the same as those for
the Sun or for appropriate laboratory experiments: not only do
the same chemical elements exist everywhere in the universe, but
also the same laws of quantum mechanics that govern the ab¬
sorption and emission of radiation by atoms apply everywhere as
well. Distant galaxies revolving about one another follow the
same laws of gravitational physics as govern the motion of an
apple falling to Earth, or Voyager on its way to the stars. The
patterns of Nature are everywhere the same. An interstellar
message, intended to be understood by an emerging civilization,
should be easy to decode.

We do not expect an advanced technical civilization on any
other planet in our solar system. If one were only a little behind
us—10,000 years, say—it would have no advanced technology at

Encyclopaedia Galactica — 297

all If it were only a little ahead of us—we who are already
exploring the solar system—its representatives should by now be
here. To communicate with other civilizations, we require a
method adequate not merely for interplanetary distances but for
interstellar distances. Ideally, the method should be inexpensive,
so that a huge amount of information could be sent and received
at very little cost; fast, so an interstellar dialogue is rendered
possible; and obvious, so any technological civilization, no matter
what its evolutionary path, will discover it early. Surprisingly,
there is such a method. It is called radio astronomy.

The largest semi-steerable radio/ radar observatory on the
planet Earth is the Arecibo facility, which Cornell University
operates for the National Science Foundation. In the remote
hinterland of the island of Puerto Rico, it is 305 meters (a thorn
sand feet) across, its reflecting surface a section of a sphere laid
down in a pre-existing bowl-shaped valley. It receives radio
waves from the depths of space, focusing them onto the feed arm
antenna high above the dish, which is in turn electronically
connected to the control room, where the signal is analyzed.
Alternatively, when the telescope is used as a radar transmitter,
the feed arm can broadcast a signal into the dish, which reflects it
into space. The Arecibo Observatory has been used both to
search for intelligent signals from civilizations in space and, just
once, to broadcast a message—to Ml3, a distant globular cluster
of stars, so that our technical capability to engage in both sides of
an interstellar dialogue would be clear, at least to us.

In a period of a few weeks, the Arecibo Observatory could
transmit to a comparable observatory on a planet of a nearby star
all of the Encyclopaedia Britannica . Radio waves travel at the
speed of light, 10,000 times faster than a message attached to our
fastest interstellar spaceship. Radio telescopes generate, in narrow
frequency ranges, signals so intense they can be detected over
immense interstellar distances. The Arecibo Observatory could
communicate with an identical radio telescope on a planet 15,000
light-years away, halfway to the center of the Milky Way Gal¬
axy, if we knew precisely where to point it. And radio astronomy
is a natural technology. Virtually any planetary atmosphere, no
matter what its composition, should be partially transparent to
radio waves. Radio messages are not much absorbed or scattered
by the gas between the stars, just as a San Francisco radio station
can be heard easily in Fos Angeles even when smog there has
reduced the visibility at optical wavelengths to a few kilometers.
There are many natural cosmic radio sources having nothing to
do with intelligent life—pulsars and quasars, the radiation belts of
planets and the outer atmospheres of stars; from almost any
planet there are bright radio sources to discover early in the local
development of radio astronomy. Moreover, radio represents a
large fraction of the electromagnetic spectrum. Any technology
able to detect radiation of any wavelength would fairly soon

The Arecibo radio/radar observatory in
Puerto Rico. The hemispherical reflecting
dish is surmounted by the feed arms,
which are supported by three large obe¬
lisks, two of which are seen distorted in
the lower picture, taken with a fish-eye
lens at the level of the panels that make up
the dish. Courtesy of the National As¬
tronomy and Ionosphere Center, Cornell
University.

BILL RAY

298 - Cosmos

stumble on the radio part of the spectrum.

There may be other effective methods of communication that
have substantial merit: interstellar spacecraft; optical or infrared
lasers; pulsed neutrinos; modulated gravity waves; or some other
kind of transmission that we will not discover for a thousand
years. Advanced civilizations may have graduated far beyond
radio for their own communications. But radio is powerful,
cheap, fast and simple. They will know that a backward civiliza-
tion like ours, wishing to receive messages from the skies, is likely
to turn first to radio technology. Perhaps they will have to wheel
the radio telescopes out of the Museum of Ancient Technology.
If we were to receive a radio message we would know that there
would be at the very least one thing we could talk about: radio
astronomy.

But is there anyone out there to talk to? With a third or half a
trillion stars in our Milky Way Galaxy alone, could ours be the
only one accompanied by an inhabited planet? How much more
likely it is that technical civilizations are a cosmic commonplace,
that the Galaxy is pulsing and humming with advanced societies,
and, therefore, that the nearest such culture is not so very far
away—perhaps transmitting from antennas established on a
planet of a naked-eye star just next door. Perhaps when we look
up at the sky at night, near one of those faint pinpoints of light is
a world on which someone quite different from us is then glanc¬
ing idly at a star we call the Sun and entertaining, for just a
moment, an outrageous speculation.

It is very hard to be sure. There may be severe impediments to
the evolution of a technical civilization. Planets may be rarer
than we think. Perhaps the origin of life is not so easy as our
laboratory experiments suggest. Perhaps the evolution of ad¬
vanced life forms is improbable. Or it may be that complex life
forms evolve readily, but intelligence and technical societies re¬
quire an unlikely set of coincidences—just as the evolution of the
human species depended on the demise of the dinosaurs and the
ice-age recession of the forests in whose trees our ancestors
screeched and dimly wondered. Or perhaps civilizations arise
repeatedly, inexorably, on innumerable planets in the Milky
Way, but are generally unstable; so all but a tiny fraction are
unable to survive their technology and succumb to greed and
ignorance, pollution and nuclear war.

It is possible to explore this great issue further and make a
crude estimate of N, the number of advanced technical civiliza¬
tions in the Galaxy. We define an advanced civilization as one
capable of radio astronomy. This is, of course, a parochial if
essential definition. There may be countless worlds on which the
inhabitants are accomplished linguists or superb poets but indif¬
ferent radio astronomers. We will not hear from them. N can be
written as the product or multiplication of a number of factors,

Encyclopaedia Galactica — 299

each a kind of filter, every one of which must be sizable for there
to be a large number of civilizations:

N*, the number of stars in the Milky Way Galaxy;

f , the fraction of stars that have planetary systems;

n e , the number of planets in a given system that are ecolo-
gically suitable for life;

fj, the fraction of otherwise suitable planets on which life
actually arises;

f., the fraction of inhabited planets on which an intelligent
form of life evolves;

f c , the fraction of planets inhabited by intelligent beings on
which a communicative technical civilization develops;
and

f L , the fraction of a planetary lifetime graced by a technical
civilization.

Written out, the equation reads N = KL^n^f^. All the fs
are fractions, having values between 0 and 1; they will pare down
the large value of N*.

To derive N we must estimate each of these quantities. We
know a fair amount about the early factors in the equation, the
numbers of stars and planetary systems. We know very little
about the later factors, concerning the evolution of intelligence
or the lifetime of technical societies. In these cases our estimates
will be little better than guesses. I invite you, if you disagree with
my estimates below, to make your own choices and see what
implications your alternative suggestions have for the number of
advanced civilizations in the Galaxy. One of the great virtues of
this equation, due originally to Frank Drake of Cornell, is that it
involves subjects ranging from stellar and planetary astronomy to
organic chemistry, evolutionary biology, history, politics and ab¬
normal psychology. Much of the Cosmos is in the span of the
Drake equation.

We know N*, the number of stars in the Milky Way Galaxy,
fairly well, by careful counts of stars in small but representative
regions of the sky. It is a few hundred billion; some recent esti¬
mates place it at 4 x 10 11 . Very few of these stars are of the
massive short-lived variety that squander their reserves of ther¬
monuclear fuel. The great majority have lifetimes of billions or
more years in which they are shining stably, providing a suitable
energy source for the origin and evolution of life on nearby
planets.

There is evidence that planets are a frequent accompaniment
of star formation: in the satellite systems of Jupiter, Saturn and
Uranus, which are like miniature solar systems; in theories of the
origin of the planets; in studies of double stars; in observations of
accretion disks around stars; and in some preliminary investiga¬
tions of gravitational perturbations of nearby stars. Many, perhaps

300 - Cosmos

9 9

©

k

N*

X

f P

X

lie

X

fi

X

even most, stars may have planets. We take the fraction of
stars that have planets, f p , as roughly equal to 1 / 3 . Then the total
number of planetary systems in the Galaxy would be
N*f p - 1.3 x 10 11 (the symbol - means “approximately equal
to”). If each system were to have about ten planets, as ours does,
the total number of worlds in the Galaxy would be more than a
trillion, a vast arena for the cosmic drama.

In our own solar system there are several bodies that may be
suitable for life of some sort: the Earth certainly, and perhaps
Mars, Titan and Jupiter. Once life originates, it tends to be very
adaptable and tenacious. There must be many different environ'
ments suitable for life in a given planetary system. But conserve
tively we choose n e = 2. Then the number of planets in the
Galaxy suitable for life becomes N*f p n e - 3 x 10 11 .

Experiments show that under the most common cosmic com
ditions the molecular basis of life is readily made, the building
blocks of molecules able to make copies of themselves. We are
now on less certain ground; there may, for example, be impedu
ments in the evolution of the genetic code, although I think this
unlikely over billions of years of primeval chemistry. We choose
fj - x /3 implying a total number of planets in the Milky Way on
which life has arisen at least once as N*f p n e f! - 1 x 10 11 , a
hundred billion inhabited worlds. That in itself is a remarkable
conclusion. But we are not yet finished.

The choices of f. and f c are more difficult. On the one hand,
many individually unlikely steps had to occur in biological evo¬
lution and human history for our present intelligence and tech'
nology to develop. On the other hand, there must be many quite
different pathways to an advanced civilization of specified capa^
bilities. Considering the apparent difficulty in the evolution of
large organisms represented by the Cambrian explosion, let us
choose x f c = V loo, meaning that only 1 percent of planets
on which life arises eventually produce a technical civilization.
This estimate represents some middle ground among the vary'
ing scientific opinions. Some think that the equivalent of the
step from the emergence of trilobites to the domestication of fire
goes like a shot in all planetary systems; others think that, even
given ten or fifteen billion years, the evolution of technical

civilizations is unlikely. This is not a subject on which we can do
much experimentation as long as our investigations are limited
to a single planet. Multiplying these factors together, we find
N*f n^f^ - 1 x 10 9 , a billion planets on which technical civ-
ilizations have arisen at least once. But that is very different from
saying that there are a billion planets on which technical civiliza-
tions now exist. For this, we must also estimate f L .

What percentage of the lifetime of a planet is marked by a
technical civilization? The Earth has harbored a technical civili¬
zation characterized by radio astronomy for only a few decades
out of a lifetime of a few billion years. So far, then, for our planet
f L is less than Vio 8 , a millionth of a percent. And it is hardly out
of the question that we might destroy ourselves tomorrow. Sup¬
pose this were to be a typical case, and the destruction so com¬
plete that no other technical civilization—of the human or any
other species—were able to emerge in the five or so billion years
remaining before the Sun dies. Then N = N*f p n e fjfjf c f L - 10,
and at any given time there would be only a tiny smattering, a
handful, a pitiful few technical civilizations in the Galaxy, the
steady state number maintained as emerging societies replace
those recently self-immolated. The number N might even be as
small as 1. If civilizations tend to destroy themselves soon after
reaching a technological phase, there might be no one for us to
talk with but ourselves. And that we do but poorly. Civilizations
would take billions of years of tortuous evolution to arise, and
then snuff themselves out in an instant of unforgivable neglect.

But consider the alternative, the prospect that at least some
civilizations learn to live with high technology; that the contra¬
dictions posed by the vagaries of past brain evolution are con¬
sciously resolved and do not lead to self-destruction; or that,
even if major disturbances do occur, they are reversed in the
subsequent billions of years of biological evolution. Such socie¬
ties might live to a prosperous old age, their lifetimes measured
perhaps on geological or stellar evolutionary time scales. If 1
percent of civilizations can survive technological adolescence,
take the proper fork at this critical historical branch point and
achieve maturity, then f L - Vloo, N - 10 7 , and the number of
extant civilizations in the Galaxy is in the millions. Thus, for all

302 - Cosmos

our concern about the possible unreliability of our estimates of
the early factors in the Drake equation, which involve astron-
omy, organic chemistry and evolutionary biology, the principal
uncertainty comes down to economics and politics and what, on
Earth, we call human nature. It seems fairly clear that if self
destruction is not the overwhelmingly preponderant fate of ga-
lactic civilizations, then the sky is softly humming with messages
from the stars.

These estimates are stirring. They suggest that the receipt of a
message from space is, even before we decode it, a profoundly
hopeful sign. It means that someone has learned to live with high
technology; that it is possible to survive technological adoles-
cence. This alone, quite apart from the contents of the message,
provides a powerful justification for the search for other civiliza-
tions.

If there are millions of civilizations distributed more or less
randomly through the Galaxy, the distance to the nearest is
about two hundred light-years. Even at the speed of light it
would take two centuries for a radio message to get from there to
here. If we had initiated the dialogue, it would be as if the
question had been asked by Johannes Kepler and the answer
received by us. Especially because we, new to radio astronomy,
must be comparatively backward, and the transmitting civiliza¬
tion advanced, it makes more sense for us to listen than to send.
For a more advanced civilization, the positions are, of course,
reversed.

We are at the earliest stages of our radio search for other
civilizations in space. In an optical photograph of a dense star
field, there are hundreds of thousands of stars. By our more
optimistic estimates, one of them is the site of an advanced
civilization. But which one? Toward which stars should we point
our radio telescopes? Of the millions of stars that may mark the
location of advanced civilizations, we have so far examined by
radio no more than thousands. We have made about one-tenth
of one percent of the required effort. But a serious, rigorous,
systematic search will come soon. The preparatory steps are now
underway, both in the United States and in the Soviet Union. It
is comparatively inexpensive: the cost of a single naval vessel of
intermediate size—a modern destroyer, say—would pay for a dec¬
ade-long program in the search for extraterrestrial intelligence.

Benevolent encounters have not been the rule in human his¬
tory, where transcultural contacts have been direct and physical,
quite different from the receipt of a radio signal, a contact as light
as a kiss. Still, it is instructive to examine one or two cases from
our past, if only to calibrate our expectations: Between the times
of the American and the French Revolutions, Louis XVI of
France outfitted an expedition to the Pacific Ocean, a voyage
with scientific, geographic, economic and nationalistic objectives.
The commander was the Count of La Perouse, a noted explorer

Encyclopaedia Galactica -303

who had fought for the United States in its War of Indepem
dence. In July 1786, almost a year after setting sail, he reached
the coast of Alaska, a place now called Lituya Bay. He was
delighted with the harbor and wrote: “Not a port in the universe
could afford more conveniences.” In this exemplary location, La
Perouse

perceived some savages, who made signs of friendship, by
displaying and waving white mantles, and different skins.
Several of the canoes of these Indians were fishing in the
Bay. . . . [We were] continually surrounded by the canoes
of the savages, who offered us fish, skins of otters and other
animals, and different little articles of their dress in ex^
change for our iron. To our great surprise, they appeared
well accustomed to traffic, and bargained with us with as
much skill as any tradesman of Europe.

The Native Americans drove increasingly harder bargains. To
La Perouse’s annoyance, they also resorted to pilferage, largely of
iron objects, but once of the uniforms of French naval officers
hidden under their pillows as they were sleeping one night sun
rounded by armed guards—a feat worthy of Harry Houdini. La
Perouse followed his royal orders to behave peaceably but conn
plained that the natives “believed our forbearance inexhaustible.”
He was disdainful of their society. But no serious damage was
done by either culture to the other. After reprovisioning his two
ships La Perouse sailed out of Lituya Bay, never to return. The
expedition was lost in the South Pacific in 1788; La Perouse and
all but one of the members of his crew perished.*

Exactly a century later Cowee, a chief of the Tlingit, related to
the Canadian anthropologist G. T. Emmons a story of the first
meeting of his ancestors with the white man, a narrative handed
down by word of mouth only. The Tlingit possessed no written
records, nor had Cowee ever heard of La Perouse. This is a
paraphrase of Cowee’s story:

Late one spring a large party of Tlingit ventured North to
Yakutat to trade for copper. Iron was even more precious,
but it was unobtainable. In entering Lituya Bay four canoes
were swallowed by the waves. As the survivors made camp
and mourned for their lost companions two strange objects
entered the Bay. No one knew what they were. They
seemed to be great black birds with immense white wings.
The Tlingit believed the world had been created by a great

* When La Perouse was mustering the ship’s company in France, there
were many bright and eager young men who applied but were turned
down. One of them was a Corsican artillery officer named Napoleon
Bonaparte. It was an interesting branch point in the history of the world.
If La Perouse had accepted Bonaparte, the Rosetta stone might never
have been found, Champollion might never have decrypted Egyptian
hieroglyphics, and in many more important respects our recent history
might have been changed significantly.

304 - Cosmos

The Tlingit inhabitants of Port Frangais
(now Lituya Bay, Alaska), where Jean
Francois de Galaup, Comte de La Perouse
(1741—c. 1788), landed in 1786. From
L.M.A.D. Milet'Mureau’s Voyage de La
Perouse autour du monde, 1797.

bird which often assumed the form of a raven, a bird which
had freed the Sun, the Moon, and the stars from boxes in
which they had been imprisoned. To look upon the Raven
was to be turned to stone. In their fright, the Tlingit fled
into the forest and hid. But after a while, finding that no
harm had come to them, a few more enterprising souls crept
out and rolled leaves of the skunk cabbage into crude tele'
scopes, believing that this would prevent being turned to
stone. Through the skunk cabbage, it seemed that the great
birds were folding their wings and that flocks of small black
messengers arose from their bodies and crawled upon their
feathers.

Now one nearly blind old warrior gathered the people
together and announced that his life was far behind him; for
the common good he would determine whether the Raven
would turn his children into stone. Putting on his robe of
sea otter fur, he entered his canoe and was paddled seaward
to the Raven. He climbed upon it and heard strange voices.
With his impaired vision he could barely make out the
many black forms moving before him. Perhaps they were
crows. When he returned safely to his people they crowded
about him, surprised to see him alive. They touched him
and smelled him to see if it was really he. After much
thought the old man convinced himself that it was not the
god^raven that he had visited, but rather a giant canoe
made by men. The black figures were not crows but people
of a different sort. He convinced the Tlingit, who then
visited the ships and exchanged their furs for many strange
articles, chiefly iron.

The Tlingit had preserved in oral tradition an entirely recog'
nizable and accurate account of their first, almost fully peaceable

Encyclopaedia Galactica — 305

Aztec view of the conquest of Mexico,
sixteenth century. Horses and firearms,
including “the great Lombard gun,” were
important factors in their utter defeat by
Cortes. From the Lienco Tlaxcala. Cour-
tesy UCLA Special Collection.

encounter with an alien culture.* If someday we make contact
with a more advanced extraterrestrial civilization, will the en-
counter he largely peaceable, even if lacking a certain rapport,
like that of the French among the Tlingit, or will it follow some
more ghastly prototype, where the society that was a little more
advanced utterly destroyed the society that was technically more
backward? In the early sixteenth century a high civilization
flourished in central Mexico. The Aztecs had monumental ar¬
chitecture, elaborate record-keeping, exquisite art and an astro¬
nomical calendar superior to that of any in Europe. Upon
viewing the Aztec artifacts returned by the first Mexican treasure
ships, the artist Albrecht Durer wrote in August 1520: “I have
never seen anything heretofore that has so rejoiced my heart. I
have seen ... a sun entirely of gold a whole fathom broad [in
fact, the Aztec astronomical calendar]; likewise a moon entirely
of silver, equally large . . . also two chambers full of all sorts of
weapons, armor, and other wonderous arms, all of which is fairer
to see than marvels.” Intellectuals were stunned at the Aztec
books, “which,” one of them said, “almost resemble those of the
Egyptians.” Hernan Cortes described their capital Tenochtitlan as
“one of the most beautiful cities in the world . . . The people’s

*The account of Cowee, the Tlingit chief, shows that even in a preli¬
terate culture a recognizable account of contact with an advanced civili¬
zation can be preserved for generations. If the Earth had been visited
hundreds or thousands of years ago by an advanced extraterrestrial
civilization, even if the contacted culture was preliterate, we might well
expect to have some recognizable form of the encounter preserved. But
there is not a single case in which a legend reliably dated from earlier
pretechnological times can be understood only in terms of contact with
an extraterrestrial civilization.

306 - Cosmos

The Sun watches impassively as the com
quistadores and their Mexican allies—one
in the ceremonial headdress of a water
bird—slaughter the poorly armed and dis¬
heartened Aztecs. From the Lienco Tlax -
cala. Courtesy UCLA Special Collection.

activities and behavior are on almost as high a level as in Spain,
and as well-organized and orderly. Considering that these people
are barbarous, lacking knowledge of God and communication
with other civilized nations, it is remarkable to see all that they
have.” Two years after writing these words, Cortes utterly de¬
stroyed Tenochtitlan along with the rest of the Aztec civiliza¬
tion. Here is an Aztec account:

Moctezuma [the Aztec Emperor] was shocked, terrified by
what he heard. He was much puzzled by their food, but
what made him almost faint away was the telling of how
the great Lombard gun, at the Spaniards’ command, ex¬
pelled the shot which thundered as it went off. The noise
weakened one, dizzied one. Something like a stone came
out of it in a shower of fire and sparks. The smoke was foul;
it had a sickening, fetid smell. And the shot, which struck a
mountain, knocked it to bits—dissolved it. It reduced a tree
to sawdust—the tree disappeared as if they had blown it
away . . . When Moctezuma was told all this, he was ter¬
ror-struck. He felt faint. His heart failed him.

Reports continued to arrive: “We are not as strong as they,”
Moctezuma was told. “We are nothing compared to them.” The
Spaniards began to be called “the Gods come from the Heavens.”
Nevertheless, the Aztecs had no illusions about the Spaniards,
whom they described in these words:

They seized upon the gold as if they were monkeys, their
faces gleaming. For clearly their thirst for gold was insatia¬
ble; they starved for it; they lusted for it; they wanted to
stuff themselves with it as if they were pigs. So they went
about fingering, taking up the streamers of gold, moving

Encyclopaedia Galactica — 307

them back and forth, grabbing them to themselves, bab¬
bling, talking gibberish among themselves.

But their insight into the Spanish character did not help them
defend themselves. In 1517 a great comet had been seen in
Mexico. Moctezuma, captured by the legend of the return of the
Aztec god Quetzalcoatl as a white-skinned man arriving across
the Eastern sea, promptly executed his astrologers. They had not
predicted the comet, and they had not explained it. Certain of
forthcoming disaster, Moctezuma became distant and gloomy.
Aided by the superstition of the Aztecs and their own superior
technology, an armed party of 400 Europeans and their native
allies in the year 1521 entirely vanquished and utterly destroyed
a high civilization of a million people. The Aztecs had never seen
a horse; there were none in the New World. They had not
applied iron metallurgy to warfare. They had not invented
firearms. Yet the technological gap between them and the Span¬
iards was not very great, perhaps a few centuries.

We must be the most backward technical society in the Gal¬
axy. Any society still more backward would not have radio
astronomy at all. If the doleful experience of cultural conflict on
Earth were the galactic standard, it seems we would already have
been destroyed, perhaps with some passing admiration expressed
for Shakespeare, Bach and Vermeer. But this has not happened.
Perhaps alien intentions are uncompromisingly benign, more like
La Perouse than Cortes. Or might it be, despite all the preten¬
sions about UFOs and ancient astronauts, that our civilization
has not yet been discovered?

On the one hand, we have argued that if even a small fraction
of technical civilizations learn to live with themselves and with
weapons of mass destruction, there should now be an enormous
number of advanced civilizations in the Galaxy. We already

have slow interstellar flight, and think fast interstellar flight a
possible goal for the human species. On the other hand, we

maintain that there is no credible evidence for the Earth being
visited, now or ever. Is this not a contradiction? If the nearest
civilization is, say, 200 light-years away, it takes only 200 years to
get from there to here at close to the speed of light. Even at 1
percent or a tenth of a percent of the speed of light, beings from
nearby civilizations could have come during the tenure of hu¬
manity on Earth. Why are they not here? There are many possi¬
ble answers. Although it runs contrary to the heritage of

Aristarchus and Copernicus, perhaps we are the first. Some

technical civilization must be the first to emerge in the history of
the Galaxy. Perhaps we are mistaken in our belief that at least
occasional civilizations avoid self-destruction. Perhaps there is
some unforeseen problem to interstellar spaceflight—although, at
speeds much less than the velocity of light it is difficult to see
what such an impediment might be. Or perhaps they are here,

308 - Cosmos

A schematic representation of an ad'
vanced technical civilization which re-
builds its solar system into a spherical shell
of matter surrounding the local Sun, so
the valuable starlight is not mainly lost to
space. Painting by Jon Lomberg.

but in hiding because of some Lex Galactica , some ethic of
noninterference with emerging civilizations. We can imagine
them, curious and dispassionate, observing us, as we would
watch a bacterial culture in a dish of agar, to determine whether,
this year again, we manage to avoid self'destruction.

But there is another explanation that is consistent with every'
thing we know. If a great many years ago an advanced interstellar
spacefaring civilization emerged 200 light-years away, it would
have no reason to think there was something special about the
Earth unless it had been here already. No artifact of human
technology, not even our radio transmissions, has had time, even
traveling at the speed of light, to go 200 light-years. From their
point of view, all nearby star systems are more or less equally
attractive for exploration or colonization.*

An emerging technical civilization, after exploring its home
planetary system and developing interstellar spaceflight, would
slowly and tentatively begin exploring the nearby stars. Some
stars would have no suitable planets—perhaps they would all be
giant gas worlds, or tiny asteroids. Others would carry an entoU'
rage of suitable planets, but some would be already inhabited, or
the atmosphere would be poisonous or the climate uncomfort'
able. In many cases the colonists might have to change—or as we
would parochially say, terraform—a world to make it adequately
clement. The re'engineering of a planet will take time. Occa'
sionally, an already suitable world would be found and colom
ized. The utilization of planetary resources so that new
interstellar spacecraft could be constructed locally would be a
slow process. Eventually a second'generation mission of explora'
tion and colonization would take off toward stars where no one
had yet been. And in this way a civilization might slowly wend
its way like a vine among the worlds.

It is possible that at some later time with third and higher
orders of colonies developing new worlds, another independent
expanding civilization would be discovered. Very likely mutual
contact would already have been made by radio or other remote
means. The new arrivals might be a different sort of colonial
society. Conceivably two expanding civilizations with different
planetary requirements would ignore each other, their filigree
patterns of expansion intertwining, but not conflicting. They
might cooperate in the exploration of a province of the Galaxy.
Even nearby civilizations could spend millions of years in such

* There may be many motivations to go to the stars. If our Sun or a
nearby star were about to go supernova, a major program of interstellar
spaceflight might suddenly become attractive. If we were very advanced,
the discovery that the galactic core was imminently to explode might
even generate serious interest in transgalactic or intergalactic spaceflight.
Such cosmic violence occurs sufficiently often that nomadic spacefaring
civilizations may not be uncommon. Even so, their arrival here remains
unlikely.

A great star cloud in the constellation Sagittarius, looking towards the center of the Milky Way Galaxy. The obscuring
lanes of dust contain organic molecules; some of them contain stars in the earliest stages of formation. In this
photograph there are about a million stars. According to the estimates of this chapter, one of them is the sun of a
civilization more advanced than ours. Courtesy Hale Observatories.

310 - Cosmos

Three frames from a motion picture
showing the diffusion, through a small re¬
gion of the Galaxy, of an interstellar
spacefaring civilization—able to travel
only in steps of a few light-years per mis¬
sion. It then establishes a local colony that
eventually outfits further such missions.
Animation by Dov Jacobson.

separate or joint colonial ventures without ever stumbling upon
our obscure solar system.

No civilization can possibly survive to an interstellar spacefar¬
ing phase unless it limits its numbers. Any society with a marked
population explosion will be forced to devote all its energies and
technological skills to feeding and caring for the population on its
home planet. This is a very powerful conclusion and is in no way
based on the idiosyncrasies of a particular civilization. On any
planet, no matter what its biology or social system, an exponen¬
tial increase in population will swallow every resource. Con¬
versely, any civilization that engages in serious interstellar explo¬
ration and colonization must have exercised zero population
growth or something very close to it for many generations. But a
civilization with a low population growth rate will take a long
time to colonize many worlds, even if the strictures on rapid
population growth are eased after reaching some lush Eden.

My colleague William Newman and I have calculated that if a
million years ago a spacefaring civilization with a low population
growth rate emerged two hundred light-years away and spread
outward, colonizing suitable worlds along the way, their survey
starships would be entering our solar system only about now. But
a million years is a very long period of time. If the nearest
civilization is younger than this, they would not have reached us
yet. A sphere two hundred light-years in radius contains 200,000
suns and perhaps a comparable number of worlds suitable for
colonization. It is only after 200,000 other worlds have been
colonized that, in the usual course of things, our solar system
would be accidentally discovered to harbor an indigenous civili¬
zation.

What does it mean for a civilization to be a million years old?
We have had radio telescopes and spaceships for a few decades;
our technical civilization is a few hundred years old, scientific
ideas of a modern cast a few thousand, civilization in general a
few tens of thousands of years; human beings evolved on this
planet only a few million years ago. At anything like our present
rate of technical progress, an advanced civilization millions of
years old is as much beyond us as we are beyond a bush baby or a
macaque. Would we even recognize its presence? Would a soci¬
ety a million years in advance of us be interested in colonization
or interstellar spaceflight? People have a finite lifespan for a rea¬
son. Enormous progress in the biological and medical sciences
might uncover that reason and lead to suitable remedies. Could it
be that we are so interested in spaceflight because it is a way of
perpetuating ourselves beyond our own lifetimes? Might a civili¬
zation composed of essentially immortal beings consider inter¬
stellar exploration fundamentally childish? It may be that we
have not been visited because the stars are strewn abundantly in
the expanse of space, so that before a nearby civilization arrives,

Encyclopaedia Galactica — 311

it has altered its exploratory motivations or evolved into forms
indetectable to us.

A standard motif in science fiction and UFO literature assumes
extraterrestrials roughly as capable as we. Perhaps they have a
different sort of spaceship or ray gun, but in battle—and science
fiction loves to portray battles between civilizations—they and we
are rather evenly matched. In fact, there is almost no chance that
two galactic civilizations will interact at the same level. In any
confrontation, one will always utterly dominate the other. A
million years is a great many. If an advanced civilization were to
arrive in our solar system, there would be nothing whatever we
could do about it. Their science and technology would be far
beyond ours. It is pointless to worry about the possible malevo-
lent intentions of an advanced civilization with whom we might
make contact. It is more likely that the mere fact they have
survived so long means they have learned to live with them¬
selves and others. Perhaps our fears about extraterrestrial contact
are merely a projection of our own backwardness, an expression
of our guilty conscience about our past history: the ravages that
have been visited on civilizations only slightly more backward
than we. We remember Columbus and the Arawaks, Cortes and
the Aztecs, even the fate of the Tlingit in the generations after La
Perouse. We remember and we worry. But if an interstellar
armada appears in our skies, I predict we will be very accommo¬
dating.

A very different kind of contact is much more likely—the case
we have already discussed in which we receive a rich, complex
message, probably by radio, from another civilization in space,
but do not make, at least for a while, physical contact with them.
In this case there is no way for the transmitting civilization to
know whether we have received the message. If we find the
contents offensive or frightening, we are not obliged to reply. But
if the message contains valuable information, the consequences
for our own civilization will be stunning—insights on alien sci¬
ence and technology, art, music, politics, ethics, philosophy and
religion, and most of all, a profound deprovincialization of the
human condition. We will know what else is possible.

Because we will share scientific and mathematical insights with
any other civilization, I believe that understanding the interstel¬
lar message will be the easiest part of the problem. Convincing
the U.S. Congress and the Council of Ministers of the U.S.S.R.
to fund a search for extraterrestrial intelligence is the hard part.*
In fact, it may be that civilizations can be divided into two great

An interstellar colonial civilization, dif¬
fusing from star system to star system in
comparatively short hops (green) encoun¬
ters another such civilization (red), capable
of longer journeys. Animation by Dov Ja¬
cobson.

* Or other national organs. Consider this pronouncement from a British
Defence Department spokesman as reported in the London Observer for
February 26, 1978: “Any messages transmitted from outer space are the
responsibility of the BBC and the Post Office. It is their responsibility to
track down illegal broadcasts.”

312- Cosmos

Hypothetical worlds from the Encyclopaedia Galactica. Top left and right: A planet and its two moons, their surfaces
destroyed by a nearby supernova explosion. Middle left and right: An oceanic Earthdike world with two large moons.
Lower left: A terrestrial planet with major engineering work visible on its night side. Somewhat more advanced than
we, it is a candidate transmitting civilization for our first interstellar radio message. Lower right: A still more advanced
civilization, constructing a habitable ring system about its home planet. Paintings, respectively, by Rick Sternbach.
David Egge, Rick Sternbach, David Egge, John Allison and Jon Lomberg.

Civilization Type: 1.8 L.

Society Code: 2A11,

“We Who Survived”

Star: FOV, spectrum variable,
r=9.717 kpc, 0 = 00°07 51"

<p = 210°20'37 M

Planet: sixth, a = 2.4x10 13 cm,

M = 7 x 10 18 g, R = 2.1 xIO 9 cm,
p = 2.7x10 6 s, P = 4.5x10 7 s.
Extraplanetary colonies: none.
Planet age: 1.14 xIO 17 s.

First locally initiated contact:

2.6040 x 10 8 s ago.

Receipt first galactic nested
code: 2.6040 x 10 8 s ago.
Biology: C,N,0,H,S,Se,CI,Br,

H 2 0, S 8 , polyaromatic sulfonyl
halides. Mobile photochemo-
synthetic autotrophs in weakly
reducing atmosphere.

Polytaxic, monochromatic,
m » 3x10 12 g, t a 5x10 10 s.

No genetic prosthesis.

Genomes: ~6x10 7 (nonredundant
bits/genome: ~2x10 12 ).
Technology: exponentiating,
approaching asymptotic limit.
Culture: global, nongregarious,
polyspecific (2 genera, 41
species); arithmetic poetry.
Prepartum/postpartum: 0.52 [30],
Individual/communal: 0.73 [14],
Artistic/technological: 0.81 [18].
Probability of survival
(per 100 yr): 80%.

Encyclopaedia Galactica -313

Civilization Type: 2.3 R.

Society Code: 1H1,

“We Who Became One”

Interstellar civilization, no
planetary communities,
utilizes 1504 supergiants,

OV, BV, AV stars and pulsars.

Civilization Age: 6.09 xIO 15 s.

First locally initiated contact:

6.09 xIO 15 s ago.

Receipt first galactic nested
code: 6.09 xIO 15 s ago.

Source civilization, neutrino
channel.

Local Group polylogue.

Biology: C,H,0,Be,Fe,Ge,He.

4 K metal-chelated organic
semiconductors, types various.
Cryogenic superconducting
electrovores with neutron
crystal dense packing and
modular starminers; polytaxic.
m various, t ~ 5x10 15 s.
Genomes: 6x10 17 (nonredundant
bits/mean genome: ~3x10 17 ).

Probability of survival
(per 10 6 yr): 99%. _

Hypothetical computer summaries of two advanced civili-
zations from the Encyclopaedia Galactica . By Jon Lomberg
and the author.

314 - Cosmos

Civilization Type: 1.0 J.

Society Code: 4G4, “Humanity”

Star: G2V, r = 9.844 kpc, 0 =
00°05'24" 0=2O6°28'49"

Planet: third, a = 1.5x10 13 cm,

M = 6 x 10 27 g, R = 6.4 x 10 8 cm,
p = 8.6x10 4 s, P = 3.2x10 7 s.
Extraplanetary colonies: none.
Planet age: 1.45x10 17 s.

First locally initiated contact:

1.21 xIO 9 s ago.

Receipt first galactic nested
code: application pending.
Biology: C,N,0,S,H 2 0,P0 4 .
Deoxyribonucleic acid.

No genetic prosthesis.

Mobile heterotrophs, symbionts
with photosynthetic autotrophs.
Surface dwellers, monospecific,
polychromatic 0 2 breathers.
Fe-chelated tetraoyroles in
circulatory fluid. Sexual mammals,
m » 7x10 4 g,t~s2 xIO 9 s.
Genomes: 4x10 9 .

Technology: exponentiating/
fossil fuels/nuclear weapons/
organized warfare/
environmental pollution.

Culture: ~200 nation states,

- 6 global powers; cultural
and technological homogen-
iety underway.

Prepartum/postpartum: 0.21 [18],
Individual/communal: 0.31 [17],
Artistic/technological: 0.14 [11].
Probability of survival
(per 100 yr): 40%. _

Hypothetical summary of a newly
emerged technical civilization from the
Encyclopaedia Galactica. By Jon Lomberg
and the author.

categories: one in which the scientists are unable to convince
nonscientists to authorize a search for extraplanetary intelligence,
in which energies are directed exclusively inward, in which com
ventional perceptions remain unchallenged and society falters
and retreats from the stars; and another category in which the
grand vision of contact with other civilizations is shared widely,
and a major search is undertaken.

This is one of the few human endeavors where even a failure
is a success. If we were to carry out a rigorous search for extras
terrestrial radio signals encompassing millions of stars and heard
nothing, we would conclude that galactic civilizations were at
best extremely rare, a calibration of our place in the universe. It
would speak eloquently of how rare are the living things of our
planet, and would underscore, as nothing else in human history
has, the individual worth of every human being. If we were to
succeed, the history of our species and our planet would be
changed forever.

It would be easy for extraterrestrials to make an unambig¬
uously artificial interstellar message. For example, the first ten
prime numbers—numbers divisible only by themselves and by
one—are 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19, 23. It is extremely unlikely
that any natural physical process could transmit radio messages
containing prime numbers only. If we received such a message we
would deduce a civilization out there that was at least fond of
prime numbers. But the most likely case is that interstellar com¬
munication will be a kind of palimpsest, like the palimpsests of
ancient writers short of papyrus or stone who superimposed their
messages on top of preexisting messages. Perhaps at an adjacent
frequency or a faster timing, there would be another message,
which would turn out to be a primer, an introduction to the
language of interstellar discourse. The primer would be repeated
again and again because the transmitting civilization would have
no way to know when we tuned in on the message. And then,
deeper in the palimpsest, underneath the announcement signal
and the primer, would be the real message. Radio technology
permits that message to be inconceivably rich. Perhaps when we
tuned in, we would find ourselves in the midst of Volume 3,267
of the Encyclopaedia Galactica .

We would discover the nature of other civilizations. There
would be many of them, each composed of organisms astonish¬
ingly different from anything on this planet. They would view
the universe somewhat differently. They would have different
arts and social functions. They would be interested in things we
never thought of. By comparing our knowledge with theirs, we
would grow immeasurably. And with our newly acquired infor¬
mation sorted into a computer memory, we would be able to see
which sort of civilization lived where in the Galaxy. Imagine a
huge galactic computer, a repository, more or less up-to-date, of
information on the nature and activities of all the civilizations in

Encyclopaedia Galactica — 315

the Milky Way Galaxy, a great library of life in the Cosmos.
Perhaps among the contents of the Encyclopaedia Galactica will
be a set of summaries of such civilizations, the information enig¬
matic, tantalizing, evocative—even after we succeed in translating
it.

Eventually, taking as much time as we wished, we would
decide to reply. We would transmit some information about
ourselves—just the basics at first—as the start of a long interstellar
dialogue which we would begin but which, because of the vast
distances of interstellar space and the finite velocity of light,
would be continued by our remote descendants. And someday,
on a planet of some far distant star, a being very different from
any of us would request a printout from the latest edition of the
Encyclopaedia Galactica and acquire a little information about
the newest society to join the community of galactic civilizations.

An emissary from Earth: Apollo 14 poised before its night launch to the Moon. The same rocket and nuclear
technology which, misused, can bring about a global holocaust can also carry us to the planets and the stars. Photo by
Dennis Milon.

Chapter XIII

WHO SPEAKS
FOR EARTH?

To what purpose should I trouble myself in searching out the secrets of the
stars, having death or slavery continually before my eyes?

—A question put to Pythagoras by Anaximenes (c. 600 B.C.), according to

Montaigne

How vast those Orbs must be, and how inconsiderable this Earth, the
Theatre upon which all our mighty Designs, all our Navigations, and all our
Wars are transacted, is when compared to them. A very fit consideration,
and matter of Reflection, for those Kings and Princes who sacrifice the Lives
of so many People, only to flatter their Ambition in being Masters of some
pitiful corner of this small Spot.

—Christiaan Huygens, New Conjectures Concerning the Planetary Worlds,

Their Inhabitants and Productions , c. 1690

“To the entire world,” added our Father the Sun, “I give my light and my
radiance; I give men warmth when they are cold; I cause their fields to
fructify and their cattle to multiply; each day that passes I go around the
world to secure a better knowledge of men’s needs and to satisfy those
needs. Follow my example .”

—An Inca myth recorded in “The Royal Commentaries” of Garcilaso de la

Vega, 1556

We look back through countless millions of years and see the great will to
live struggling out of the intertidal slime, struggling from shape to shape and
from power to power, crawling and then walking confidently upon the land,
struggling generation after generation to master the air, creeping down into
the darkness of the deep; we see it turn upon itself in rage and hunger and
reshape itself anew, we watch it draw nearer and more akin to us, expand^
ing, elaborating itself, pursuing its relentless inconceivable purpose, until at

318 - Cosmos

last it reaches us and its being beats through our brains and
arteries . . . It is possible to believe that all the past is but the
beginning of a beginning, and that all that is and has been is but
the twilight of the dawn. It is possible to believe that all that the
human mind has ever accomplished is but the dream before the
awakening . . . Out of our . . . lineage, minds will spring, that will
reach back to us in our littleness to know us better than we know
ourselves. A day will come, one day in the unending succession
of days, when beings, beings who are now latent in our thoughts
and hidden in our loins, shall stand upon this earth as one stands
upon a footstool, and shall laugh and reach out their hands
amidst the stars.

—H. G. Wells, “The Discovery of the Future,” Nature 65, 326

(1902)

The cosmos was DISCOVERED ONLY YESTERDAY. For a
million years it was clear to everyone that there were no other
places than the Earth. Then in the last tenth of a percent of the
lifetime of our species, in the instant between Aristarchus and
ourselves, we reluctantly noticed that we were not the center and
purpose of the Universe, but rather lived on a tiny and fragile
world lost in immensity and eternity, drifting in a great cosmic
ocean dotted here and there with a hundred billion galaxies and
a billion trillion stars. We have bravely tested the waters and
have found the ocean to our liking, resonant with our nature.
Something in us recognizes the Cosmos as home. We are made
of stellar ash. Our origin and evolution have been tied to distant
cosmic events. The exploration of the Cosmos is a voyage of
self-discovery.

As the ancient mythmakers knew, we are the children equally
of the sky and the Earth. In our tenure on this planet we have
accumulated dangerous evolutionary baggage, hereditary pro-
pensities for aggression and ritual, submission to leaders and
hostility to outsiders, which place our survival in some question.
But we have also acquired compassion for others, love for our
children and our children’s children, a desire to learn from his-
tory, and a great soaring passionate intelligence—the clear tools
for our continued survival and prosperity. Which aspects of our
nature will prevail is uncertain, particularly when our vision and
understanding and prospects are bound exclusively to the
Earth—or, worse, to one small part of it. But up there in the
immensity of the Cosmos, an inescapable perspective awaits us.
There are not yet any obvious signs of extraterrestrial intelli¬
gence and this makes us wonder whether civilizations like ours
always rush implacably, headlong, toward self-destruction.
National boundaries are not evident when we view the Earth from
space. Fanatical ethnic or religious or national chauvinisms are a
little difficult to maintain when we see our planet as a fragile blue
crescent fading to become an inconspicuous point of light against
the bastion and citadel of the stars. Travel is broadening.

Who Speaks for Earth ? - 319

The Great Chain of Being. Between atoms and snowflakes on the scale of the very small, and suns and galaxies on the
scale of the very large, humans are growing to consciousness of our place in the Cosmos. Painting by Jon Lomberg.

320 - Cosmos

There are worlds on which life has never arisen. There are
worlds that have been charred and ruined by cosmic catastn>
phes. We are fortunate: we are alive; we are powerful; the welfare
of our civilization and our species is in our hands. If we do not
speak for Earth, who will? If we are not committed to our own
survival, who will be?

The human species is now undertaking a great venture that if
successful will be as important as the colonization of the land or
the descent from the trees. We are haltingly, tentatively breaking
the shackles of Earth—metaphorically, in confronting and taming
the admonitions of those more primitive brains within us; physk
cally, in voyaging to the planets and listening for the messages
from the stars. These two enterprises are linked indissolubly.
Each, I believe, is a necessary condition for the other. But our
energies are directed far more toward war. Hypnotized by mutual
mistrust, almost never concerned for the species or the planet,
the nations prepare for death. And because what we are doing is
so horrifying, we tend not to think of it much. But what we do
not consider we are unlikely to put right.

Every thinking person fears nuclear war, and every technology
ical state plans for it. Everyone knows it is madness, and every
nation has an excuse. There is a dreary chain of causality: The
Germans were working on the bomb at the beginning of World
War II; so the Americans had to make one first. If the Americans
had one, the Soviets had to have one, and then the British, the
French, the Chinese, the Indians, the Pakistanis ... By the end of
the twentieth century many nations had collected nuclear weapy
ons. They were easy to devise. Fissionable material could be
stolen from nuclear reactors. Nuclear weapons became almost a
home handicraft industry.

The conventional bombs of World War II were called block'
busters. Filled with twenty tons of TNT, they could destroy a
city block. All the bombs dropped on all the cities in World War
II amounted to some two million tons, two megatons, of TNT—
Coventry and Rotterdam, Dresden and Tokyo, all the death that
rained from the skies between 1939 and 1945: a hundred thorn
sand blockbusters, two megatons. By the late twentieth century,
two megatons was the energy released in the explosion of a single
more or less humdrum thermonuclear bomb: one bomb with the
destructive force of the Second World War. But there are tens of
thousands of nuclear weapons. By the ninth decade of the twem
tieth century the strategic missile and bomber forces of the Soviet
Union and the United States were aiming warheads at over
15,000 designated targets. No place on the planet was safe. The
energy contained in these weapons, genies of death patiently
awaiting the rubbing of the lamps, was far more than 10,000
megatons—but with the destruction concentrated efficiently, not
over six years but over a few hours, a blockbuster for every

Who Speaks for Earth ? - 321

I New York

family on the planet, a World War II every second for the length
of a lazy afternoon.

The immediate causes of death from nuclear attack are the
blast wave, which can flatten heavily reinforced buildings many
kilometers away, the firestorm, the gamma rays and the neutrons,
which effectively fry the insides of passersby. A school girl who
survived the American nuclear attack on Hiroshima, the event
that ended the Second World War, wrote this first-hand account:

Through a darkness like the bottom of hell, I could hear
the voices of the other students calling for their mothers.
And at the base of the bridge, inside a big cistern that had
been dug out there, was a mother weeping, holding above
her head a naked baby that was burned bright red all over
its body. And another mother was crying and sobbing as
she gave her burned breast to her baby. In the cistern the
students stood with only their heads above the water, and
their two hands, which they clasped as they imploringly
cried and screamed, calling for their parents. But every
single person who passed was wounded, all of them, and
there was no one, there was no one to turn to for help. And
the singed hair on the heads of the people was frizzled and
whitish and covered with dust. They did not appear to be
human, not creatures of this world.

Fallout in a nuclear war. Of the 15,000
targets in a full nuclear exchange, these
Titan and Minuteman intercontinental
ballistic missile sites in the American
Midwest are likely targets for surface
bursts by a pair of one-megaton thermo¬
nuclear weapons. The energy released by
these two explosions alone would equal all
the destruction caused all over the world
by all the aircraft in World War II. The
cloud of radioactive debris would be
blown by prevailing winds towards the
East Coast of the United States, the same
path followed by the Mount St. Helens
volcanic debris after its eruptions in 1980.
The outer contour curve shows the area
within which casualties would exceed 50
percent from radioactive fallout alone.
Comparable horrors would be visited on
the Soviet Union by two one-megaton
bursts on, say, the Western Ukraine.
Courtesy Scientific American. From Lim¬
ited Nuclear War by Sidney D. Drell and
Frank Von Hippel. Copyright © 1976 by
Scientific American. All rights reserved.

The Hiroshima explosion, unlike the subsequent Nagasaki ex¬
plosion, was an air burst high above the surface, so the fallout
was insignificant. But on March 1, 1954, a thermonuclear weap¬
ons test at Bikini in the Marshall Islands detonated at higher yield

322 - Cosmos

than expected. A great radioactive cloud was deposited on the
tiny atoll of Rongalap, 150 kilometers away, where the inhabi-
tants likened the explosion to the Sun rising in the West. A few
hours later, radioactive ash fell on Rongalap like snow. The
average dose received was only about 175 rads, a little less than
half the dose needed to kill an average person. Being far from the
explosion, not many people died. Of course, the radioactive
strontium they ate was concentrated in their bones, and the
radioactive iodine was concentrated in their thyroids. Two-
thirds of the children and one-third of the adults later developed
thyroid abnormalities, growth retardation or malignant tumors.
In compensation, the Marshall Islanders received expert medical
care.

The yield of the Hiroshima bomb was only thirteen kilotons,
the equivalent of thirteen thousand tons of TNT. The Bikini test
yield was fifteen megatons. In a full nuclear exchange, in the
paroxysm of thermonuclear war, the equivalent of a million
Hiroshima bombs would be dropped all over the world. At the
Hiroshima death rate of some hundred thousand people killed
per equivalent thirteen-kiloton weapon, this would be enough to
kill a hundred billion people. But there were less than five billion
people on the planet in the late twentieth century. Of course, in
such an exchange, not everyone would be killed by the blast and
the firestorm, the radiation and the fallout—although fallout does
last for a longish time: 90 percent of the strontium 90 will decay
in 96 years; 90 percent of the cesium 137, in 100 years; 90 percent
of the iodine 131 in only a month .

The survivors would witness more subtle consequences of the
war. A full nuclear exchange would burn the nitrogen in the
upper air, converting it to oxides of nitrogen, which would in
turn destroy a significant amount of the ozone in the high atmo-
sphere, admitting an intense dose of solar ultraviolet radiation.*
The increased ultraviolet flux would last for years. It would
produce skin cancer preferentially in light-skinned people. Much
more important, it would affect the ecology of our planet in an
unknown way. Ultraviolet light destroys crops. Many microor-
ganisms would be killed; we do not know which ones or how
many, or what the consequences might be. The organisms killed
might, for all we know, be at the base of a vast ecological
pyramid at the top of which totter we.

The dust put into the air in a full nuclear exchange would
reflect sunlight and cool the Earth a little. Even a little cooling
can have disastrous agricultural consequences. Birds are more
easily killed by radiation than insects. Plagues of insects and

* The process is similar to, but much more dangerous than, the destruc-
tion of the ozone layer by the fluorocarbon propellants in aerosol spray
cans, which have accordingly been banned by a number of nations; and
to that invoked in the explanation of the extinction of the dinosaurs by a
supernova explosion a few dozen light-years away.

Who Speaks for Earth? -323

consequent further agricultural disorders are a likely consequence
of nuclear war. There is also another kind of plague to worry
about: the plague bacillus is endemic all over the Earth. In the
late twentieth century humans did not much die of plague—not
because it was absent, but because resistance was high. However,
the radiation produced in a nuclear war, among its many other
effects, debilitates the body’s immunological system, causing a
deterioration of our ability to resist disease. In the longer term,
there are mutations, new varieties of microbes and insects, that
might cause still further problems for any human survivors of a
nuclear holocaust; and perhaps after a while, when there has
been enough time for the recessive mutations to recombine and
be expressed, new and horrifying varieties of humans. Most of
these mutations, when expressed, would be lethal. A few would
not. And then there would be other agonies: the loss of loved
ones; the legions of the burned, the blind and the mutilated;
disease, plague, longdived radioactive poisons in the air and
water; the threat of tumors and stillbirths and malformed chih
dren; the absence of medical care; the hopeless sense of a civilk
zation destroyed for nothing; the knowledge that we could have
prevented it and did not.

L. F. Richardson was a British meteorologist interested in war.
He wished to understand its causes. There are intellectual parah
lels between war and weather. Both are complex. Both exhibit
regularities, implying that they are not implacable forces but
natural systems that can be understood and controlled. To um
derstand the global weather you must first collect a great body of
meteorological data; you must discover how the weather actually
behaves. Our approach must be the same, Richardson decided, if
we are to understand warfare. So, for the years between 1820 and
1945, he collected data on the hundreds of wars that had then
been fought on our poor planet.

Richardson’s results were published posthumously in a book
called The Statistics of Deadly Quarrels . Because he was inten
ested in how long you had to wait for a war that would claim a
specified number of victims, he defined an index, M, the magnk
tude of a war, a measure of the number of immediate deaths it
causes. A war of magnitude M = 3 might be merely a skirmish,
killing only a thousand people (10 3 ). M = 5 or M = 6 denote
more serious wars, where a hundred thousand (10 5 ) or a million
(10 6 ) people are killed. World Wars 1 and II had larger magnk
tudes. He found that the more people killed in a war, the less
likely it was to occur, and the longer before you would witness it,
just as violent storms occur less frequently than cloudbursts.
From his data we can construct a graph (p. 327), which shows
how long on the average during the past century and a half you
would have to wait to witness a war of magnitude M.

Richardson proposed that if you continue the curve to very
small values of M, all the way to M = 0, it roughly predicts the

324 - Cosmos

Who Speaks for Earth ? — 325

The ominous shape of nuclear war: two nuclear explosions. Left: A high-speed photograph of the expanding blast
wave of a fission nuclear weapon. Note the silhouetted trees. Courtesy Harold Edgerton, Massachusetts Institute of
Technology. Right: The mushroom cloud of a thermonuclear explosion sends radioactive fallout into the stratosphere,
where it persists for years. Courtesy U.S. Department of Energy.

326 - Cosmos

worldwide incidence of murder; somewhere in the world some¬
one is murdered every five minutes. Individual killings and wars
on the largest scale are, he said, two ends of a continuum, an
unbroken curve. It follows, not only in a trivial sense but also I
believe in a very deep psychological sense, that war is murder
writ large. When our well-being is threatened, when our illusions
about ourselves are challenged, we tend—some of us at least—to
fly into murderous rages. And when the same provocations are
applied to nation states, they, too, sometimes fly into murderous
rages, egged on often enough by those seeking personal power or
profit. But as the technology of murder improves and the penal¬
ties of war increase, a great many people must be made to fly into
murderous rages simultaneously for a major war to be mustered.
Because the organs of mass communication are often in the
hands of the state, this can commonly be arranged. (Nuclear war
is the exception. It can be triggered by a very small number of
people.)

We see here a conflict between our passions and what is
sometimes called our better natures; between the deep, ancient
reptilian part of the brain, the R-complex, in charge of murder¬
ous rages, and the more recently evolved mammalian and human
parts of the brain, the limbic system and the cerebral cortex.
When humans lived in small groups, when our weapons were
comparatively paltry, even an enraged warrior could kill only a
few. As our technology improved, the means of war also im¬
proved. In the same brief interval, we also have improved. We
have tempered our anger, frustration and despair with reason.
We have ameliorated on a planetary scale injustices that only
recently were global and endemic. But our weapons can now kill
billions. Have we improved fast enough? Are we teaching reason
as effectively as we can? Have we courageously studied the causes
of war?

What is often called the strategy of nuclear deterrence is re¬
markable for its reliance on the behavior of our nonhuman
ancestors. Henry Kissinger, a contemporary politician, wrote:
“Deterrence depends, above all, on psychological criteria. For
purposes of deterrence, a bluff taken seriously is more useful than
a serious threat interpreted as a bluff.” Truly effective nuclear
bluffing, however, includes occasional postures of irrationality, a
distancing from the horrors of nuclear war. Then the potential
enemy is tempted to submit on points of dispute rather than
unleash a global confrontation, which the aura of irrationality
has made plausible. The chief danger of adopting a credible pose
of irrationality is that to succeed in the pretense you have to be
very good. After a while, you get used to it. It becomes pretense
no longer.

The global balance of terror, pioneered by the United States
and the Soviet Union, holds hostage the citizens of the Earth.
Each side draws limits on the permissible behavior of the other.

Who Speaks for Earth1 - 327

1000 yr

100 yr

lOyr

i=

£

•5 1mo

8hrs

5 min

War Magnitude, M->

The Richardson diagram. The horizontal
axis shows the magnitude of a war (M = 5
means 10 5 people killed; M = 10 means
10 10 , i.e., every human on the planet). The
vertical axis shows the time to wait until a
war of magnitude M erupts. The curve is
based on Richardsons data for wars be¬
tween 1820 and 1945. Simple extrapola¬
tion suggests that M = 10 will not be
reached for about a thousand years (1820
+ 1,000 = 2820). But the proliferation of
nuclear weapons has probably moved the
curve into the shaded area, and the wait¬
ing time to Doomsday may be ominously
short. The shape of the Richardson curve
is within our control, but only if humans
are willing to embrace nuclear disarma¬
ment and restructure dramatically the
planetary community.

The potential enemy is assured that if the limit is transgressed,
nuclear war will follow. However, the definition of the limit
changes from time to time. Each side must be quite confident that
the other understands the new limits. Each side is tempted to
increase its military advantage, but not in so striking a way as
seriously to alarm the other. Each side continually explores the
limits of the other’s tolerance, as in flights of nuclear bombers
over the Arctic wastes; the Cuban missile crisis; the testing of
anti-satellite weapons; the Vietnam and Afghanistan wars—a few
entries from a long and dolorous list. The global balance of terror
is a very delicate balance. It depends on things not going wrong,
on mistakes not being made, on the reptilian passions not being
seriously aroused.

And so we return to Richardson. In the diagram the solid line
is the waiting time for a war of magnitude M—that is, the average
time we would have to wait to witness a war that kills 10 M people
(where M represents the number of zeroes after the one in our
usual exponential arithmetic). Also shown, as a vertical bar at the
right of the diagram, is the world population in recent years,
which reached one billion people (M = 9) around 1835 and is
now about 4.5 billion people (M = 9.7). When the Richardson
curve crosses the vertical bar we have specified the waiting time
to Doomsday: how many years until the population of the Earth
is destroyed in some great war. With Richardson’s curve and the
simplest extrapolation for the future growth of the human popu¬
lation, the two curves do not intersect until the thirtieth century
or so, and Doomsday is deferred.

But World War II was of magnitude 7.7: some fifty million
military personnel and noncombatants were killed. The technology

328 - Cosmos

of death advanced ominously. Nuclear weapons were used
for the first time. There is little indication that the motivations
and propensities for warfare have diminished since, and both
conventional and nuclear weaponry has become far more deadly.
Thus, the top of the Richardson curve is shifting downward by
an unknown amount. If its new position is somewhere in the
shaded region of the figure, we may have only another few
decades until Doomsday. A more detailed comparison of the
incidence of wars before and after 1945 might help to clarify this
question. It is of more than passing concern.

This is merely another way of saying what we have known for
decades: the development of nuclear weapons and their delivery
systems will, sooner or later, lead to global disaster. Many of the
American and European emigre scientists who developed the
first nuclear weapons were profoundly distressed about the
demon they had let loose on the world. They pleaded for the
global abolition of nuclear weapons. But their pleas went un-
heeded; the prospect of a national strategic advantage galvanized
both the U.S.S.R. and the United States, and the nuclear arms
race began.

In the same period, there was a burgeoning international trade
in the devastating non-nuclear weapons coyly called “conven¬
tional.” In the past twenty-five years, in dollars corrected for
inflation, the annual international arms trade has gone from $300
million to much more than $20 billion. In the years between
1950 and 1968, for which good statistics seem to be available,
there were, on the average, worldwide several accidents involv¬
ing nuclear weapons per year, although perhaps no more than
one or two accidental nuclear explosions. The weapons estab¬
lishments in the Soviet Union, the United States and other na¬
tions are large and powerful. In the United States they include
major corporations famous for their homey domestic manufac¬
tures. According to one estimate, the corporate profits in military
weapons procurement are 30 to 50 percent higher than in an
equally technological but competitive civilian market. Cost
overruns in military weapons systems are permitted on a scale
that would be considered unacceptable in the civilian sphere. In
the Soviet Union the resources, quality, attention and care given
to military production is in striking contrast to the little left for
consumer goods. According to some estimates, almost half the
scientists and high technologists on Earth are employed full- or
part-time on military matters. Those engaged in the development
and manufacture of weapons of mass destruction are given sala¬
ries, perquisites of power and, where possible, public honors at
the highest levels available in their respective societies. The
secrecy of weapons development, carried to especially extrava¬
gant lengths in the Soviet Union, implies that individuals so
employed need almost never accept responsibility for their ac¬
tions. They are protected and anonymous. Military secrecy

Who Speaks for Earth ? - 329

makes the military the most difficult sector of any society for the
citizens to monitor. If we do not know what they do, it is very
hard for us to stop them. And with the rewards so substantial,
with the hostile military establishments beholden to each other
in some ghastly mutual embrace, the world discovers itself drift?
ing toward the ultimate undoing of the human enterprise.

Every major power has some widely publicized justification for
its procurement and stockpiling of weapons of mass destruction,
often including a reptilian reminder of the presumed character
and cultural defects of potential enemies (as opposed to us stout
fellows), or of the intentions of others, but never ourselves, to
conquer the world. Every nation seems to have its set of forbid¬
den possibilities, which its citizenry and adherents must not at
any cost be permitted to think seriously about. In the Soviet
Union these include capitalism, God, and the surrender of na¬
tional sovereignty; in the United States, socialism, atheism, and
the surrender of national sovereignty. It is the same all over the
world.

How would we explain the global arms race to a dispassionate
extraterrestrial observer? How would we justify the most recent
destabilizing developments of killer-satellites, particle beam
weapons, lasers, neutron bombs, cruise missiles, and the pro¬
posed conversion of areas the size of modest countries to the
enterprise of hiding each intercontinental ballistic missile among
hundreds of decoys? Would we argue that ten thousand targeted
nuclear warheads are likely to enhance the prospects for our
survival? What account would we give of our stewardship of the
planet Earth? We have heard the rationales offered by the nu¬
clear superpowers. We know who speaks for the nations. But
who speaks for the human species? Who speaks for Earth?

The upper atmosphere of the planet
Earth, seen at twilight. In a full nuclear
war, the protective ozone layer would be
partially destroyed and the stratosphere
would be filled with radioactive debris. A
visitor from another world might be
tempted to move on. Courtesy NASA.

330 — Cosmos

Surrogate monkey mothers. Given a
choice of two surrogate mothers—a wire
structure equipped with a milk bottle, or
the same structure covered with cloth and
with a milk bottle—infant monkeys unhe¬
sitatingly choose the latter. Humans and
other primates have genetically deter¬
mined needs for social interaction and for
physical affection and warmth. Courtesy,
Harry F. Harlow, University of Wisconsin
Primate Laboratory.

About two-thirds of the mass of the human brain is in the
cerebral cortex, devoted to intuition and reason. Humans have
evolved gregariously. We delight in each other’s company; we
care for one another. We cooperate. Altruism is built into us.
We have brilliantly deciphered some of the patterns of Nature.
We have sufficient motivation to work together and the ability
to figure out how to do it. If we are willing to contemplate
nuclear war and the wholesale destruction of our emerging global
society, should we not also be willing to contemplate a wholesale
restructuring of our societies? From an extraterrestrial perspec¬
tive, our global civilization is clearly on the edge of failure in the
most important task it faces: to preserve the lives and well-being
of the citizens of the planet. Should we not then be willing to
explore vigorously, in every nation, major changes in the tradi¬
tional ways of doing things, a fundamental redesign of economic,
political, social and religious institutions?

Faced with so disquieting an alternative, we are always
tempted to minimize the seriousness of the problem, to argue
that those who worry about doomsdays are alarmists; to hold
that fundamental changes in our institutions are impractical or
contrary to “human nature,” as if nuclear war were practical, or as
if there were only one human nature. Full-scale nuclear war has
never happened. Somehow this is taken to imply that it never
will. But we can experience it only once. By then it will be too
late to reformulate the statistics.

The United States is one of the few governments that actually
supports an agency devoted to reversing the arms race. But the
comparative budgets of the Department of Defense (153 billion
dollars per year in 1980) and of the Arms Control and Disar¬
mament Agency (0.018 billion dollars per year) remind us of the
relative importance we have assigned to the two activities.
Would not a rational society spend more on understanding and
preventing, than on preparing for, the next war? It is possible to
study the causes of war. At present our understanding is mea¬
ger—probably because disarmament budgets have, since the time
of Sargon of Akkad, been somewhere between ineffective and
nonexistent. Microbiologists and physicians study diseases mainly
to cure people. Rarely are they rooting for the pathogen. Let us
study war as if it were, as Einstein aptly called it, an illness of
childhood. We have reached the point where proliferation of
nuclear arms and resistance to nuclear disarmament threaten
every person on the planet. There are no more special interests or
special cases. Our survival depends on committing our intelli¬
gence and resources on a massive scale to take charge of our own
destiny, to guarantee that Richardson’s curve does not veer to
the right.

We, the nuclear hostages—all the peoples of the Earth—must
educate ourselves about conventional and nuclear warfare. Then
we must educate our governments. We must learn the science

Who Speaks for Earth ? — 331

and technology that provide the only conceivable tools for our
survival We must be willing to challenge courageously the com
ventional social, political, economic and religious wisdom. We
must make every effort to understand that our fellow humans, all
over the world, are human. Of course, such steps are difficult.
But as Einstein many times replied when his suggestions were
rejected as impractical or as inconsistent with “human nature”:
What is the alternative?

Mammals characteristically nuzzle, fondle, hug, caress, pet,
groom and love their young, behavior essentially unknown
among the reptiles. If it is really true that the R-complex and
limbic systems live in an uneasy truce within our skulls and still
partake of their ancient predelictions, we might expect affectiom
ate parental indulgence to encourage our mammalian natures,
and the absence of physical affection to prod reptilian behavior.
There is some evidence that this is the case. In laboratory ex-
periments, Harry and Margaret Harlow found that monkeys
raised in cages and physically isolated—even though they could
see, hear and smell their simian fellows—developed a range of
morose, withdrawn, self-destructive and otherwise abnormal
characteristics. In humans the same is observed for children
raised without physical affection—usually in institutions—where
they are clearly in great pain.

The neuropsychologist James W. Prescott has performed a
startling cross-cultural statistical analysis of 400 preindustrial so¬
cieties and found that cultures that lavish physical affection on
infants tend to be disinclined to violence. Even societies without
notable fondling of infants develop nonviolent adults, provided
sexual activity in adolescents is not repressed. Prescott believes
that cultures with a predisposition for violence are composed of
individuals who have been deprived—during at least one of two
critical stages in life, infancy and adolescence—of the pleasures of
the body. Where physical affection is encouraged, theft, orga¬
nized religion and invidious displays of wealth are inconspicuous;
where infants are physically punished, there tends to be slavery,
frequent killing, torturing and mutilation of enemies, a devotion
to the inferiority of women, and a belief in one or more super¬
natural beings who intervene in daily life.

We do not understand human behavior well enough to be
sure of the mechanisms underlying these relationships, although
we can conjecture. But the correlations are significant. Prescott
writes: “The percent likelihood of a society becoming physically
violent if it is physically affectionate toward its infants and toler¬
ant of premarital sexual behavior is 2 percent. The probability of
this relationship occurring by chance is 125,000 to one. I am not
aware of any other developmental variable that has such a high
degree of predictive validity.” Infants hunger for physical affec¬
tion; adolescents are strongly driven to sexual activity. If youngsters

332 - Cosmos

had their way, societies might develop in which adults have
little tolerance for aggression, territoriality, ritual and social hier-
archy (although in the course of growing up the children might
well experience these reptilian behaviors). If Prescott is right, in
an age of nuclear weapons and effective contraceptives, child
abuse and severe sexual repression are crimes against humanity.
More work on this provocative thesis is clearly needed. Mean-
while, we can each make a personal and noncontroversial com
tribution to the future of the world by hugging our infants
tenderly.

If the inclinations toward slavery and racism, misogyny and
violence are connected—as individual character and human his-
tory, as well as cross-cultural studies, suggest—then there is room
for some optimism. We are surrounded by recent fundamental
changes in society. In the last two centuries, abject slavery, with
us for thousands of years or more, has been almost eliminated in
a stirring planet-wide revolution. Women, patronized for mil¬
lennia, traditionally denied real political and economic power,
are gradually becoming, even in the most backward societies,
equal partners with men. For the first time in modern history,
major wars of aggression were stopped partly because of the
revulsion felt by the citizens of the aggressor nations. The old
exhortations to nationalist fervor and jingoist pride have begun
to lose their appeal. Perhaps because of rising standards of living,
children are being treated better worldwide. In only a few dec¬
ades, sweeping global changes have begun to move in precisely
the directions needed for human survival. A new consciousness
is developing which recognizes that we are one species.

“Superstition [is] cowardice in the face of the Divine,” wrote
Theophrastus, who lived during the founding of the Library of
Alexandria. We inhabit a universe where atoms are made in the
centers of stars; where each second a thousand suns are born;
where life is sparked by sunlight and lightning in the airs and
waters of youthful planets; where the raw material for biological
evolution is sometimes made by the explosion of a star halfway
across the Milky Way; where a thing as beautiful as a galaxy is
formed a hundred billion times—a Cosmos of quasars and quarks,
snowflakes and fireflies, where there may be black holes and
other universes and extraterrestrial civilizations whose radio
messages are at this moment reaching the Earth. How pallid by
comparison are the pretensions of superstition and pseudoscience;
how important it is for us to pursue and understand science, that
characteristically human endeavor.

Every aspect of Nature reveals a deep mystery and touches our
sense of wonder and awe. Theophrastus was right. Those afraid
of the universe as it really is, those who pretend to nonexistent
knowledge and envision a Cosmos centered on human beings
will prefer the fleeting comforts of superstition. They avoid

Who Speaks for Earth ? - 333

A reconstruction of the armaria of the
Great Library of Alexandria. At its peak,
it contained more than half a million voL
umes, almost all of which have been ir¬
revocably lost.

rather than confront the world. But those with the courage to
explore the weave and structure of the Cosmos, even where it
differs profoundly from their wishes and prejudices, will pene¬
trate its deepest mysteries.

There is no other species on Earth that does science. It is, so
far, entirely a human invention, evolved by natural selection in
the cerebral cortex for one simple reason: it works. It is not
perfect. It can be misused. It is only a tool. But it is by far the best
tool we have, self-correcting, ongoing, applicable to everything.
It has two rules. First: there are no sacred truths; all assumptions
must be critically examined; arguments from authority are
worthless. Second: whatever is inconsistent with the facts must
be discarded or revised. We must understand the Cosmos as it is
and not confuse how it is with how we wish it to be. The
obvious is sometimes false; the unexpected is sometimes true.
Humans everywhere share the same goals when the context is
large enough. And the study of the Cosmos provides the largest
possible context. Present global culture is a kind of arrogant
newcomer. It arrives on the planetary stage following four and a
half billion years of other acts, and after looking about for a few
thousand years declares itself in possession of eternal truths. But
in a world that is changing as fast as ours, this is a prescription for
disaster. No nation, no religion, no economic system, no body of
knowledge, is likely to have all the answers for our survival.
There must be many social systems that would work far better
than any now in existence. In the scientific tradition, our task is to
find them.

Only once before in our history was there the promise of a
brilliant scientific civilization. Beneficiary of the Ionian Awaken¬
ing, it had its citadel at the Library of Alexandria, where 2,000
years ago the best minds of antiquity established the foundations
for the systematic study of mathematics, physics, biology, as¬
tronomy, literature, geography and medicine. We build on those

334 - Cosmos

foundations still The Library was constructed and supported by
the Ptolemys, the Greek kings who inherited the Egyptian
portion of the empire of Alexander the Great. From the time of
its creation in the third century B.C. until its destruction seven
cen-turies later, it was the brain and heart of the ancient world.

Alexandria was the publishing capital of the planet. Of course,
there were no printing presses then. Books were expensive; every
one of them was copied by hand. The Library was the repository
of the most accurate copies in the world. The art of critical
editing was invented there. The Old Testament comes down to
us mainly from the Greek translations made in the Alexandrian
Library. The Ptolemys devoted much of their enormous wealth
to the acquisition of every Greek book, as well as works from
Africa, Persia, India, Israel and other parts of the world. Ptolemy
III Euergetes wished to borrow from Athens the original manu-
scripts or official state copies of the great ancient tragedies of
Sophocles, Aeschylus and Euripides. To the Athenians, these
were a kind of cultural patrimony—something like the original
handwritten copies and first folios of Shakespeare might be in
England. They were reluctant to let the manuscripts out of their
hands even for a moment. Only after Ptolemy guaranteed their
return with an enormous cash deposit did they agree to lend the
plays. But Ptolemy valued those scrolls more than gold or silver.
He forfeited the deposit gladly and enshrined, as well he might,
the originals in the Library. The outraged Athenians had to
content themselves with the copies that Ptolemy, only a little
shamefacedly, presented to them. Rarely has a state so avidly
supported the pursuit of knowledge.

The Ptolemys did not merely collect established knowledge;
they encouraged and financed scientific research and so generated
new knowledge. The results were amazing: Eratosthenes accu-
rately calculated the size of the Earth, mapped it, and argued that
India could be reached by sailing westward from Spain. Hippar-
chus anticipated that stars come into being, slowly move during
the course of centuries, and eventually perish; it was he who first
catalogued the positions and magnitudes of the stars to detect
such changes. Euclid produced a textbook on geometry from
which humans learned for twenty-three centuries, a work that
was to help awaken the scientific interest of Kepler, Newton and
Einstein. Galen wrote basic works on healing and anatomy which
dominated medicine until the Renaissance. There were, as we
have noted, many others.

Alexandria was the greatest city the Western world had ever
seen. People of all nations came there to live, to trade, to learn.
On any given day, its harbors were thronged with merchants,
scholars and tourists. This was a city where Greeks, Egyptians,
Arabs, Syrians, Hebrews, Persians, Nubians, Phoenicians, Ital¬
ians, Gauls and Iberians exchanged merchandise and ideas. It is
probably here that the word cosmopolitan realized its true meaning—

Who Speaks for Earth? -335

citizen, not just of a nation, but of the Cosmos.* To be a
citizen of the Cosmos . . .

Here clearly were the seeds of the modern world. What pre-
vented them from taking root and flourishing? Why instead did
the West slumber through a thousand years of darkness until
Columbus and Copernicus and their contemporaries redisco-
vered the work done in Alexandria? 1 cannot give you a simple
answer. But 1 do know this: there is no record, in the entire
history of the Library, that any of its illustrious scientists and
scholars ever seriously challenged the political, economic and
religious assumptions of their society. The permanence of the
stars was questioned; the justice of slavery was not. Science and
learning in general were the preserve of a privileged few. The
vast population of the city had not the vaguest notion of the
great discoveries taking place within the Library. New findings
were not explained or popularized. The research benefited them
little. Discoveries in mechanics and steam technology were ap¬
plied mainly to the perfection of weapons, the encouragement of
superstition, the amusement of kings. The scientists never
grasped the potential of machines to free peopled The great
intellectual achievements of antiquity had few immediate practi¬
cal applications. Science never captured the imagination of the
multitude. There was no counterbalance to stagnation, to pessi¬
mism, to the most abject surrenders to mysticism. When, at long
last, the mob came to burn the Library down, there was nobody
to stop them.

The last scientist who worked in the Library was a mathema¬
tician, astronomer, physicist and the head of the Neoplatonic
school of philosophy—an extraordinary range of accomplish¬
ments for any individual in any age. Her name was Hypatia. She
was born in Alexandria in 370. At a time when women had few
options and were treated as property, Hypatia moved freely and
unselfconsciously through traditional male domains. By all ac¬
counts she was a great beauty. She had many suitors but rejected
all offers of marriage. The Alexandria of Hypatia’s time—by then
long under Roman rule—was a city under grave strain. Slavery
had sapped classical civilization of its vitality. The growing
Christian Church was consolidating its power and attempting to
eradicate pagan influence and culture. Hypatia stood at the epi¬
center of these mighty social forces. Cyril, the Archbishop of
Alexandria, despised her because of her close friendship with the

* The word cosmopolitan was first invented by Diogenes, the rationalist
philosopher and critic of Plato.

t With the single exception of Archimedes, who during his stay at the
Alexandrian Library invented the water screw, which is used in Egypt to
this day for the irrigation of cultivated fields. But even he considered
such mechanical contrivances far beneath the dignity of science.

500 H

Thales

Pythagoras

— Democritus
Plato

BC

AD

Aristarchus of Samos
Eratosthenes

Antikythera machine

Heron of Alexandria
Ptolemy

<-Destruction of

Alexandrian Library
death of Hypatia, onset
of "Dark Ages"

1000 H

Columbus, Leonardo

Copernicus

Kepler

Huygens

Newton

La Perouse

Champollion

Einstein
Humason
Viking and Voyager

A time line of some of the people, ma¬
chines and events described in this book.
The Antikythera machine was an astro¬
nomical computer developed in ancient
Greece. Heron of Alexandria experi¬
mented with steam engines. The millen¬
nium gap in the middle of the diagram
represents a poignant lost opportunity for
the human species.

336 - Cosmos

Roman governor, and because she was a symbol of learning and
science, which were largely identified by the early Church with
paganism. In great personal danger, she continued to teach and
publish, until, in the year 415, on her way to work she was set
upon by a fanatical mob of Cyril’s parishioners. They dragged
her from her chariot, tore off her clothes, and, armed with
abalone shells, flayed her flesh from her bones. Her remains were
burned, her works obliterated, her name forgotten. Cyril was
made a saint.

The glory of the Alexandrian Library is a dim memory. Its last
remnants were destroyed soon after Hypatia’s death. It was as if
the entire civilization had undergone some self-inflicted brain
surgery, and most of its memories, discoveries, ideas and passions
were extinguished irrevocably. The loss was incalculable. In
some cases, we know only the tantalizing titles of the works that
were destroyed. In most cases, we know neither the titles nor the
authors. We do know that of the 123 plays of Sophocles in the
Library, only seven survived. One of those seven is Oedipus Rex.
Similar numbers apply to the works of Aeschylus and Euripides.
It is a little as if the only surviving works of a man named
William Shakespeare were Coriolanus and A Winter’s Tale , but
we had heard that he had written certain other plays, unknown
to us but apparently prized in his time, works entitled Hamlet ,
Macbeth , Julius Caesar , King Lear , Romeo and Juliet .

Of the physical contents of that glorious Library not a single
scroll remains. In modern Alexandria few people have a keen
appreciation, much less a detailed knowledge, of the Alexandrian
Library or of the great Egyptian civilization that preceded it for
thousands of years. More recent events, other cultural impera-
tives have taken precedence. The same is true all over the world.
We have only the most tenuous contact with our past. And yet
just a stone’s throw from the remains of the Serapaeum are
reminders of many civilizations: enigmatic sphinxes from
pharaonic Egypt; a great column erected to the Roman Emperor
Diocletian by a provincial flunky for not altogether permitting
the citizens of Alexandria to starve to death; a Christian
church; many minarets; and the hallmarks of modern industrial
civilization—apartment houses, automobiles, streetcars, urban
slums, a microwave relay tower. There are a million threads from
the past intertwined to make the ropes and cables of the modern
world.

Our achievements rest on the accomplishments of 40,000
generations of our human predecessors, all but a tiny fraction of
whom are nameless and forgotten. Every now and then we
stumble on a major civilization, such as the ancient culture of
Ebla, which flourished only a few millennia ago and about which
we knew nothing. How ignorant we are of our own past! Inscrip'
tions, papyruses, books time-bind the human species and permit
us to hear those few voices and faint cries of our brothers and

Who Speaks for Earth ? — 337

sisters, our ancestors. And what a joy of recognition when we
realize how like us they were!

We have in this book devoted attention to some of our am
cestors whose names have not been lost: Eratosthenes, Democri¬
tus, Aristarchus, Hypatia, Leonardo, Kepler, Newton, Huygens,
Champollion, Humason, Goddard, Einstein—all from Western
culture because the emerging scientific civilization on our planet
is mainly a Western civilization; but every culture—China, India,
West Africa, Mesoamerica—has made its major contributions to
our global society and had its seminal thinkers. Through tech¬
nological advances in communication our planet is in the final
stages of being bound up at a breakneck pace into a single global
society. If we can accomplish the integration of the Earth without
obliterating cultural differences or destroying ourselves, we will
have accomplished a great thing.

Near the site of the Alexandrian Library there is today a
headless sphinx sculpted in the time of the pharoah Horemheb,
in the Eighteenth Dynasty, a millennium before Alexander.
Within easy view of that leonine body is a modern microwave
relay tower. Between them runs an unbroken thread in the his¬
tory of the human species. From sphinx to tower is an instant of
cosmic time—a moment in the fifteen or so billion years that have
elapsed since the Big Bang. Almost all record of the passage of
the universe from then to now has been scattered by the winds of
time. The evidence of cosmic evolution has been more
thoroughly ravaged than all the papyrus scrolls in the Alexan¬
drian Library. And yet through daring and intelligence we have
stolen a few glimpses of that winding path along which our
ancestors and we have traveled:

For unknown ages after the explosive outpouring of matter
and energy of the Big Bang, the Cosmos was without form.
There were no galaxies, no planets, no life. Deep, impenetrable
darkness was everywhere, hydrogen atoms in the void. Here and
there denser accumulations of gas were imperceptibly growing,
globes of matter were condensing—hydrogen raindrops more
massive than suns. Within these globes of gas was first kindled
the nuclear fire latent in matter. A first generation of stars was
born, flooding the Cosmos with light. There were in those times
not yet any planets to receive the light, no living creatures to
admire the radiance of the heavens. Deep in the stellar furnaces
the alchemy of nuclear fusion created heavy elements, the ashes
of hydrogen burning, the atomic building materials of future
planets and lifeforms. Massive stars soon exhausted their stores
of nuclear fuel. Rocked by colossal explosions, they returned
most of their substance back into the thin gas from which they
had once condensed. Here in the dark lush clouds between the
stars, new raindrops made of many elements were forming, later
generations of stars being born. Nearby, smaller raindrops grew,
bodies far too little to ignite the nuclear fire, droplets in the

338 - Cosmos

interstellar mist on their way to form the planets. Among them
was a small world of stone and iron, the early Earth.

Congealing and warming, the Earth released the methane,
ammonia, water and hydrogen gases that had been trapped
within, forming the primitive atmosphere and the first oceans.
Starlight from the Sun bathed and warmed the primeval Earth,
drove storms, generated lightning and thunder. Volcanoes over¬
flowed with lava. These processes disrupted molecules of the
primitive atmosphere; the fragments fell back together again into
more and more complex forms, which dissolved in the early
oceans. After a time the seas achieved the consistency of a warm,
dilute soup. Molecules were organized, and complex chemical
reactions driven, on the surface of clays. And one day a molecule
arose that quite by accident was able to make crude copies of
itself out of the other molecules in the broth. As time passed,
more elaborate and more accurate self-replicating molecules
arose. Those combinations best suited to further replication were
favored by the sieve of natural selection. Those that copied
better produced more copies. And the primitive oceanic broth
gradually grew thin as it was consumed by and transformed into
complex condensations of self-replicating organic molecules.
Gradually, imperceptibly, life had begun.

Single-celled plants evolved, and life began to generate its own
food. Photosynthesis transformed the atmosphere. Sex was in¬
vented. Once free-living forms banded together to make a com¬
plex cell with specialized functions. Chemical receptors evolved,
and the Cosmos could taste and smell. One-celled organisms
evolved into multicellular colonies, elaborating their various
parts into specialized organ systems. Eyes and ears evolved, and
now the Cosmos could see and hear. Plants and animals discov¬
ered that the land could support life. Organisms buzzed, crawled,
scuttled, lumbered, glided, flapped, shimmied, climbed and
soared. Colossal beasts thundered through the steaming jungles.
Small creatures emerged, born live instead of in hard-shelled
containers, with a fluid like the early oceans coursing through
their veins. They survived by swiftness and cunning. And then,
only a moment ago, some small arboreal animals scampered
down from the trees. They became upright and taught them¬
selves the use of tools, domesticated other animals, plants and
fire, and devised language. The ash of stellar alchemy was now
emerging into consciousness. At an ever-accelerating pace, it in¬
vented writing, cities, art and science, and sent spaceships to the
planets and the stars. These are some of the things that hydrogen
atoms do, given fifteen billion years of cosmic evolution.

It has the sound of epic myth, and rightly. But it is simply a
description of cosmic evolution as revealed by the science of our
time. We are difficult to come by and a danger to ourselves. But
any account of cosmic evolution makes it clear that all the crea¬
tures of the Earth, the latest manufactures of the galactic

Who Speaks for Earth ? -339

hydrogen industry, are beings to be cherished. Elsewhere there
may be other equally astonishing transmutations of matter, so
wistfully we listen for a humming in the sky.

We have held the peculiar notion that a person or society that
is a little different from us, whoever we are, is somehow strange
or bizarre, to be distrusted or loathed. Think of the negative
connotations of words like alien or outlandish. And yet the
monuments and cultures of each of our civilizations merely rep'
resent different ways of being human. An extraterrestrial visitor,
looking at the differences among human beings and their socie^
ties, would find those differences trivial compared to the similar'
ities. The Cosmos may be densely populated with intelligent
beings. But the Darwinian lesson is clear: There will be no
humans elsewhere. Only here. Only on this small planet. We are
a rare as well as an endangered species. Every one of us is, in the
cosmic perspective, precious. If a human disagrees with you, let
him live. In a hundred billion galaxies, you will not find another.

Human history can be viewed as a slowly dawning awareness
that we are members of a larger group. Initially our loyalties were
to ourselves and our immediate family, next, to bands of warn
dering huntengatherers, then to tribes, small settlements, city'
states, nations. We have broadened the circle of those we love.
We have now organized what are modestly described as super'
powers, which include groups of people from divergent ethnic
and cultural backgrounds working in some sense together—surely
a humanizing and charactenbuilding experience. If we are to
survive, our loyalties must be broadened further, to include the
whole human community, the entire planet Earth. Many of those
who run the nations will find this idea unpleasant. They will fear
the loss of power. We will hear much about treason and disloy'
alty. Rich natiomstates will have to share their wealth with poor
ones. But the choice, as H. G. Wells once said in a different
context, is clearly the universe or nothing.

A few million years ago there were no humans. Who will be
here a few million years hence? In all the 4.6'billion'year history
of our planet, nothing much ever left it. But now, tiny unmanned
exploratory spacecraft from Earth are moving, glistening and
elegant, through the solar system. We have made a preliminary
reconnaissance of twenty worlds, among them all the planets
visible to the naked eye, all those wandering nocturnal lights that
stirred our ancestors toward understanding and ecstasy. If we
survive, our time will be famous for two reasons: that at this
dangerous moment of technological adolescence we managed to
avoid self'destruction; and because this is the epoch in which we
began our journey to the stars.

The choice is stark and ironic. The same rocket boosters used
to launch probes to the planets are poised to send nuclear war
heads to the nations. The radioactive power sources on Viking

340 - Cosmos

180
75

240

300 °

120 °

180 °
75 °

- 30 '

- 60 °

- 70 °
180

240 °

120 °

Radar exploration of two worlds. The surface of Venus, perpetually shrouded in clouds, is revealed on a global scale
for the first time in these maps. The data were obtained by the Pioneer Venus Orbiter, transmitting a radar signal from
just above the Venus clouds to the surface below; the reflected signal is then detected. The planet shows mountains,
craters and two large raised continents (in orange), Ishtar Terra and Aphrodite Terra. An artist’s conception of Ishtar
Terra is shown top right. The Venera 9 and 10 spacecraft landed near Beta Regio. The black gores are regions still
under radar exploration. A similar radar device, designed for the exploration of Venus, was tested over the cloud'
covered jungles of Guatemala and Belize, on Earth. To his surprise, the archeologist R. E. W. Adams discovered (right,
middle ) an intricate network of straight and curved lines, previously unknown, which subsequent field work proved to

Who Speaks for Earth ? - 341

be the canal system of the ancient Mayas (250 B.C. to 900). They are invisible in ordinary photographs of the same area
(right, bottom ). This answers the mystery of how the Mayas supported a high civilization of several million people.
Some historians believe that all high civilizations on Earth began with the construction of a canal network (cf. Chapter
5). In many ways, the exploration of other worlds permits us to better understand our own. Courtesy NASA.

342 - Cosmos

The annual budget for space sciences in
the United States since the founding of
NASA. Amounts have been corrected for
inflation by converting to 1967 dollars.
The surge in the early 1970’s reflects the
development of the Viking mission to
Mars. A vigorous program of planetary
exploration and the radio search for ex¬
traterrestrial intelligence would cost, in
these units, about a dollar a year for every
American.

and Voyager derive from the same technology that makes nu¬
clear weapons. The radio and radar techniques employed to track
and guide ballistic missiles and defend against attack are also used
to monitor and command the spacecraft on the planets and to
listen for signals from civilizations near other stars. If we use
these technologies to destroy ourselves, we surely will venture no
more to the planets and the stars. But the converse is also true. If
we continue to the planets and the stars, our chauvinisms will be
shaken further. We will gain a cosmic perspective. We will rec¬
ognize that our explorations can be carried out only on behalf of
all the people of the planet Earth. We will invest our energies in
an enterprise devoted not to death but to life: the expansion of
our understanding of the Earth and its inhabitants and the search
for life elsewhere. Space exploration—unmanned and manned-
uses many of the same technological and organizational skills and
demands the same commitment to valor and daring as does the
enterprise of war. Should a time of real disarmament arrive be¬
fore nuclear war, such exploration would enable the military-in¬
dustrial establishments of the major powers to engage at long last
in an untainted enterprise. Interests vested in preparations for war
can relatively easily be reinvested in the exploration of the
Cosmos.

A reasonable—even an ambitious—program of unmanned ex¬
ploration of the planets is inexpensive. The budget for space
sciences in the United States is shown in the table above. Com¬
parable expenditures in the Soviet Union are a few times larger.
Together these sums represent the equivalent of two or three
nuclear submarines per decade, or the cost overruns on one of
many weapon systems in a single year. In the last quarter of 1979,
the program cost of the U.S. F/A-18 aircraft increased by $5.1
billion, and the F-16 by $3.4 billion. Since their inceptions, sig¬
nificantly less has been spent on the unmanned planetary pro¬
grams of both the United States and the Soviet Union than has
been washed shamefully—for example, between 1970 and 1975,
in the U.S. bombing of Cambodia, an application of national
policy that cost $7 billion. The total cost of a mission such as
Viking to Mars, or Voyager to the outer solar system, is less than

Two human footprints. Above, from Tanzania, 3.6 million years ago. Below, from Mare Tranquilitatis.
Courtesy Mary Leakey and the National Geographic Society; and NASA.

344 - Cosmos

Who Speaks for Earth? -345

that of the 1979-80 Soviet invasion of Afghanistan. Through
technical employment and the stimulation of high technology,
money spent on space exploration has an economic multiplier
effect. One study suggests that for every dollar spent on the
planets, seven dollars are returned to the national economy. And
yet there are many important and entirely feasible missions that
have not been attempted because of lack of funds—including
roving vehicles to wander across the surface of Mars, a comet
rendezvous, Titan entry probes and a fulhscale search for radio
signals from other civilizations in space.

The cost of major ventures into space—permanent bases on
the Moon or human exploration of Mars, say—is so large that
they will not, I think, be mustered in the very near future unless
we make dramatic progress in nuclear and “conventional” disar¬
mament. Even then there are probably more pressing needs here
on Earth. But I have no doubt that if we avoid self-destruction,
we will sooner or later perform such missions. It is almost impos¬
sible to maintain a static society. There is a kind of psychological
compound interest: even a small tendency toward retrenchment,
a turning away from the Cosmos, adds up over many generations
to a significant decline. And conversely, even a slight commit¬
ment to ventures beyond the Earth—to what we might call, after
Columbus, “the enterprise of the stars”—builds over many gener¬
ations to a significant human presence on other worlds, a rejoic¬
ing in our participation in the Cosmos.

Some 3.6 million years ago, in what is now northern Tanzania,
a volcano erupted, the resulting cloud of ash covering the sur¬
rounding savannahs. In 1979, the paleoanthropologist Mary
Leakey found in that ash footprints—the footprints, she believes,
of an early hominid, perhaps an ancestor of all the people on the
Earth today. And 380,000 kilometers away, in a flat dry plain
that humans have in a moment of optimism called the Sea of
Tranquility, there is another footprint, left by the first human to
walk another world. We have come far in 3.6 million years, and
in 4.6 billion and in 15 billion.

For we are the local embodiment of a Cosmos grown to self-
awareness. We have begun to contemplate our origins: starstuff
pondering the stars; organized assemblages of ten billion billion
billion atoms considering the evolution of atoms; tracing the long
journey by which, here at least, consciousness arose. Our loyal¬
ties are to the species and the planet. We speak for Earth. Our
obligation to survive is owed not just to ourselves but also to that
Cosmos, ancient and vast, from which we spring.

The home planet of an emerging technical civilization, struggling to avoid self-destruction. This world is observed
from a temporary outpost near its lone natural satellite. The Earth travels some 2Vz million kilometers every day
around the Sun; eight times faster than that around the center of the Milky Way Galaxy; and, perhaps, twice faster still
as the Milky Way falls towards the Virgo cluster of galaxies. We have always been space travelers. Courtesy NASA.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Besides those thanked in the introduction, I am very grateful to the many people who generously contributed their
time and expertise to this book, including Carol Lane, Myrna Talman, and Jenny Arden; David Oyster, Richard
Wells, Tom Weidlinger, Dennis Gutierrez, Rob McCain, Nancy Kinney, Janelle Balnicke, Judy Flannery, and Susan
Racho of the Cosmos television staff; Nancy Inglis, Peter Mollman, Marylea O’Reilly, and Jennifer Peters of Random
House; Paul West for generously lending me the title of Chapter 5; and George Abell, James Allen, Barbara Amago,
Lawrence Anderson, Jonathon Arons, Halton Arp, Asma El Bakri, James Blinn, Ban Bok, Zeddie Bowen, John C.
Brandt, Kenneth Brecher, Frank Bristow, John Callendar, Donald B. Campbell, Judith Campbell, Elof Axel Carlson,
Michael Carra, John Cassani, Judith Castagno, Catherine Cesarsky, Martin Cohen, JudyTynn del Rey, Nicholas
Devereux, Michael Devirian, Stephen Dole, Frank D. Drake, Frederick C. Durant III, Richard Epstein, Von R.
Eshleman, Ahmed Fahmy, Herbert Friedman, Robert Frosch, Jon Fukuda, Richard Gammon, Ricardo Giacconi,
Thomas Gold, Paul Goldenberg, Peter Goldreich, Paul Goldsmith, J. Richard Gott III, Stephen Jay Gould, Bruce
Hayes, Raymond Heacock, Wulff Heintz, Arthur Hoag, Paul Hodge, Dorrit Hoffleit, William Hoyt, Icko Iben,
Mikhail Jaroszynski, Paul Jepsen, Tom Karp, Bishun N. Khare, Charles Kohlhase, Edwin Krupp, Arthur Lane, Paul
MacLean, Bruce Margon, Harold Masursky, Linda Morabito, Edmond Momjian, Edward Moreno, Bruce Murray,
William Murnane, Thomas A. Mutch, Kenneth Norris, Tobias Owen, Linda Paul, Roger Payne, Vahe Petrosian,
James B. Pollack, George Preston, Nancy Priest, Boris Ragent, Dianne Rennell, Michael Rowton, Allan Sandage,
Fred Scarf, Maarten Schmidt, Arnold Scheibel, Eugene Shoemaker, Frank Shu, Nathan Sivin, Bradford Smith,
Laurence A. Soderblom, Hyron Spinrad, Edward Stone, Jeremy Stone, Ed Taylor, Kip S. Thome, Norman
Thrower, O. Brian Toon, Barbara Tuchman, Roger Ulrich, Richard Underwood, Peter van de Kamp, Jurrie J. Van
der Woude, Arthur Vaughn, Joseph Veverka, Helen Simpson Vishniac, Dorothy Vitaliano, Robert Wagoner, Pete
Waller, Josephine Walsh, Kent Weeks, Donald Yeomans, Stephen Yerazunis, Louise Gray Young, Harold Zirin, and
the National Aeronautics and Space Administration. I am also grateful for special photographic help by Edwardo
Castaneda and Bill Ray.

Appendix 1

Reductio ad Absurdum and the Square Root of Two

The original Pythagorean argument on the irrationality of the square root of 2 depended on a kind of
argument called reductio ad absurdum , a reduction to absurdity: we assume the truth of a statement, follow
its consequences and come upon a contradiction, thereby establishing its falsity. To take a modern
example, consider the aphorism by the great twentieth-century physicist, Niels Bohr: “The opposite of
every great idea is another great idea.” If the statement were true, its consequences might be at least a little
perilous. For example, consider the opposite of the Golden Rule, or proscriptions against lying or “Thou
shalt not kill.” So let us consider whether Bohr’s aphorism is itself a great idea. If so, then the converse
statement, “The opposite of every great idea is not a great idea,” must also be true. Then we have reached
a reductio ad absurdum . If the converse statement is false, the aphorism need not detain us long, since it
stands self-confessed as not a great idea.

We present a modern version of the proof of the irrationality of the square root of 2 using a reductio ad
absurdum , and simple algebra rather than the exclusively geometrical proof discovered by the Pytha-
goreans. The style of argument, the mode of thinking, is at least as interesting as the conclusion:

Consider a square in which the sides are 1 unit long (1 centimeter, 1 inch, 1 light-year, it does not matter).
The diagonal line BC divides the square into two triangles, each containing a right angle. In such right

triangles, the Pythagorean theorem holds: l 2 + l 2 = x 2 . But l 2 + l 2 = 1 + 1 = 2, so x 2 = 2 and we write

x = V2, the square root of two. We assume VT is a rational number: V2 = p/q, where p and q are

integers, whole numbers. They can be as big as we like and can stand for any integers we like. We can

certainly require that they have no common factors. If we were to claim VT = 14/10, for example, we

would of course cancel out the factor 2 and write p = 7 and q = 5, not p = 14, q = 10. Any common

factor in numerator or denominator would be canceled out before we start. There are an infinite number
of p’s and q’s we can choose. From if2 = p/q, by squaring both sides of the equation, we find that 2 =
p 2 /q 2 , or, by multiplying both sides of the equation by q 2 , we find

p 2 = 2q 2 . (Equation 1)

p 2 is then some number multiplied by 2. Therefore p 2 is an even number. But the square of any odd
number is odd (l 2 = 1, 3 2 = 9, 5 2 = 25, 7 2 = 49, etc.). So p itself must be even, and we can write p = 2s,

where s is some other integer. Substituting for p in Equation (1), we find

p 2 = (2s) 2 = 4s 2 = 2q 2

Dividing both sides of the last equality by 2, we find

q 2 = 2s 2

Therefore q 2 is also an even number, and, by the same argument as we just used for p, it follows that q is
even too. But if p and q are both even, both divisible by 2, then they have not been reduced to their
lowest common factor, contradicting one of our assumptions. Reductio ad absurdum . But which assump¬
tion? The argument cannot be telling us that reduction to common factors is forbidden, that 14/10 is
permitted and 7/5 is not. So the initial assumption must be wrong; p and q cannot be whole numbers; and
if2 is irrational. In fact, VT = 1.4142135 . . .

What a stunning and unexpected conclusion! How elegant the proof! But the Pythagoreans felt
compelled to suppress this great discovery.

Appendix 2

The Five Pythagorean Solids

A regular polygon (Greek for “many-angled”) is a two-dimensional figure with some number, n, of equal
sides. So n = 3 is an equilateral triangle, n = 4 is a square, n = 5 is a pentagon, and so on. A polyhedron
(Greek for “many-sided”) is a three-dimensional figure, all of whose faces are polygons: a cube, for
example, with 6 squares for faces. A simple polyhedron, or regular solid, is one with no holes in it.
Fundamental to the work of the Pythagoreans and of Johannes Kepler was the fact that there can be 5 and
only 5 regular solids. The easiest proof comes from a relationship discovered much later by Descartes and
by Leonhard Euler which relates the number of faces, F, the number of edges, E, and the number of
corners or vertices V of a regular solid:

V — E + F = 2 (Equation 2)

So for a cube, there are 6 faces (F = 6) and 8 vertices (V = 8), and 8 — E + 6 = 2, 14 — E = 2, and E =
12; Equation (2) predicts that the cube has 12 edges, as it does. A simple geometric proof of Equation (2)
can be found in the book by Courant and Robbins in the Bibliography. From Equation (2) we can prove
that there are only five regular solids:

Every edge of a regular solid is shared by the sides of two adjacent polygons. Think again of the cube,
where every edge is a boundary between two squares. If we count up all the sides of all the faces of a
polyhedron, n F, we will have counted every edge twice. So

n F = 2 E (Equation 3)

Let r represent how many edges meet at each vertex. For a cube, r = 3. Also, every edge connects two
vertices. If we count up all the vertices, r V, we will similarly have counted every edge twice. So

rV = 2 E

Substituting for V and F in Equation (2) from Equations (3) and (4), we find

2 E Ci 2E -
r n

(Equation 4)

If we divide both sides of this equation by 2 E, we have

1 + 1 - 1 + 1

n r 2 E (Equation 5)

We know that n is 3 or more, since the simplest polygon is the triangle, with three sides. We also know
that r is 3 or more, since at least 3 faces meet at a given vertex in a polyhedron. If both n and r were
simultaneously more than 3, the left-hand side of Equation (5) would be less than 2 /3 and the equation
could not be satisfied for any positive value of E. Thus, by another reductio ad absurdum argument, either
n = 3 and r is 3 or more, or r = 3 and n is 3 or more.

If n = 3, Equation (5) becomes O/3) + 0 /r) = O/2) + 0/e), or

1

r

1 _

6

(Equation 6)

So in this case r can equal 3, 4, or 5 only. (If E were 6 or more, the equation would be violated.) Now n =
3, r = 3 designates a solid in which 3 triangles meet at each vertex. By Equation (6) it has 6 edges; by
Equation (3) it has 4 faces; by Equation (4) it has 4 vertices. Clearly it is the pyramid or tetrahedron; n = 3,
r = 4 is a solid with 8 faces in which 4 triangles meet at each vertex, the octahedron; and n = 3, r = 5

represents a solid with 20 faces in which 5 triangles meet at each vertex, the icosahedron (see figures on
p. 58).

If r = 3, Equation (5) becomes

and by similar arguments n can equal 3, 4, or 5 only, n = 3 is the tetrahedron again; n = 4 is a solid whose
faces are 6 squares, the cube; and n = 5 corresponds to a solid whose faces are 12 pentagons, the
dodecahedron (see figures on p. 184)-

There are no other integer values of n and r possible, and therefore there are only 5 regular solids, a
conclusion from abstract and beautiful mathematics that has had, as we have seen, the most profound
impact on practical human affairs.

FOR FURTHER READING

(The more technical scientific works are asterisked.)

CHAPTER 1

Boeke, Kees. Cosmic View: The Universe in Forty Jumps. New York: John Day, 1957.

Fraser, Peter Marshall. Ptolemaic Alexandria. Three volumes. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1972.

Morison, Samuel Eliot. Admiral of the Ocean Sea: A Life of Christopher Columbus. Boston: Little, Brown, 1942.

Sagan, Carl. Broca’s Brain: Reflections on the Romance of Science. New York: Random House, 1979.

CHAPTER 2

Attenborough, David. Life on Earth: A Natural History. London: British Broadcasting Corporation, 1979.

* Dobzhansky, Theodosius, Ayala, Francisco J., Stebbins, G. Ledyard and Valentine, James. Evolution. San Francisco: W.H.
Freeman, 1978.

Evolution. A Scientific American Book. San Francisco: W.H. Freeman, 1978.

Gould, Stephen Jay. Ever Since Darwin: Reflections on Natural History. New York: W.W. Norton, 1977.

Handler, Philip (ed.). Biology and the Future of Man. Committee on Science and Public Policy, National Academy of Sciences.
New York: Oxford University Press, 1970.

Huxley, Julian. New Bottles for New Wine: Essays. London: Chatto and Windus, 1957.

Kennedy, D. (ed.). Cellular and Organismal Biology. A Scientific American Book. San Francisco: W.H. Freeman, 1974.

*Kornberg, A. DNA Replication. San Francisco: W.H. Freeman, 1980.

* Miller, S.L. and Orgel, L. The Origins of Life on Earth. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: PrenticeHall, 1974.

Orgel, L. Origins of Life. New York: Wiley, 1973.

*Roemer, A.S. “Major Steps inVertebrate Evolution.” Science, Vol. 158, p. 1629, 1967.

* Roland, Jean Claude. Atlas of Cell Biology. Boston: Little, Brown, 1977.

Sagan, Carl. “Life.” Encyclopaedia Britannica, 1970 and later printings.

* Sagan, Carl and Salpeter, E.E. “Particles, Environments and Hypothetical Ecologies in the Jovian Atmosphere.” A strophysical
Journal Supplement, Vol. 32, p. 737, 1976.

Simpson, G.G. The Meaning of Evolution. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1960.

Thomas, Lewis. Lives of a Cell: Notes of a Biology Watcher. New York: Bantam Books, 1974.

* Watson, J.D. Molecular Biology of the Gene. New York: W.A. Benjamin, 1965.

Wilson, E.O., Eisner, T., Briggs, W.R., Dickerson, R.E., Metzenberg, R.L., O’Brien, R.D., Susman, M., and Boggs, W.E. Life on
Earth. Stamford: Sinauer Associates, 1973.

CHAPTER 3

Abell, George and Singer, B. (eds.). Science and the Paranormal. New York: Scribner’s, 1980.

*Beer, A. (ed.). Vistas in Astronomy: Kepler, Vol. 18. London: Pergamon Press, 1975.

Caspar, Max. Kepler. London: Abelard'Schuman, 1959.

Cumont, Franz. Astrology and Religion Among the Greeks and Romans. New York: Dover, 1960.

Koestler, Arthur. The Sleepwalkers. New York:Grosset and Dunlap, 1963.

Krupp, E.C. (ed.). In Search of Ancient Astronomies. New York: Doubleday, 1978.

Pannekoek, Anton. A History of Astronomy. London: George Allen, 1961.

Rey, H.A. The Stars: A New Way to See Them, third edition. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1970.

Rosen, Edward. Kepler’s Somnium. Madison, Wis.: University of Wisconsin Press, 1967'

Standen, A. Forget Your Sun Sign. Baton Rouge: Legacy, 1977'

Vivian, Gordon and Raiter, Paul. The Great Kivas of Chaco Canyon. Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press, 1965.

CHAPTER 4

Chapman, C. The Inner Planets. New York: Scribner’s, 1977.

Charney, J.G. (ed.). Carbon Dioxide and Climate: A Scientific Assessment. Washington, D.C.: National Academy of Sciences,
1979.

Cross, Charles A. and Moore, Patrick. The Atlas of Mercury. New York: Crown Publishers, 1977.

*Delsemme, A.H. (ed.). Comets, Asteroids, Meteorites. Toledo: University of Ohio Press, 1977.

Ehrlich, Paul R., Ehrlich, Anne EL and Holden, John P. E coscience: Population, Resources, Environment. San Francisco: W.H.
Freeman, 1977 *

* Dunne, James A. and Burgess, Eric. The Voyage of Mariner 10. NASA SP-424' Washington, D.C.:U.S. Government Printing
Office, 1978.

* EEBaz, Farouk. “The Moon After Apollo.” Icarus, Vol. 25, p. 495, 1975.

Goldsmith, Donald (ed.). Scientists Confront Velikovsky. Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1977.

Kaufmann, William J. Planets and Moons. San Francisco: W.H. Freeman, 1979.

* Keldysh, M.V. “Venus Exploration with the Venera 9 and Venera 10 Spacecraft.” Icarus, Vol. 30, p. 605, 1977.

* Kresak, F. “The Tunguska Object: A Fragment of Comet Encke?” Bulletin of the Astronomical Institute of Czechoslovakia, Vol.

29, p. 129, 1978.

Krinov, E.F. Giant Meteorites. New York: Pergamon Press, 1966.

Fovelock, F. Gaia. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1979.

* Marov, M. Ya. “Venus: A Perspective at the Beginning of Planetary Exploration.” Icarus, Vol. 16, p. 115, 1972.

Masursky, Harold, Colton, C.W. and ELBaz, Farouk (eds.). Apollo Over the Moon: A View from Orbit. NASA SP'362.

Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1978.

* Mulholland, J.D. and Calame, O. “Funar Crater Giordano Bruno: AD 1178 Impact Observations Consistent with Baser
Ranging Results.” Science, Vol. 199, p. 875, 1978.

‘Murray, Bruce and Burgess, Eric. Flight to Mercury. New York:Columbia University Press, 1977.

* Murray, Bruce, Greeley, R. and Malin, M. Earthlike Planets. San Francisco: W.H. Freeman, 1980.

Nicks, Oran W. (ed.). This Island Earth. NASA SP-250. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1970.

Oberg, James. “Tunguska: Collision with a Comet.” Astronomy, Vol. 5, No. 12, p. 18, December 1977.

* Pioneer Venus Results. Science, Vol. 203, No. 4382, p. 743, February 23, 1979.

* Pioneer Venus Results. Science, Vol. 205, No. 4401, p. 41, July 6, 1979.

Press, Frank and Siever, Raymond. Earth, second edition. San Francisco: W.H. Freeman, 1978.

Ryan, Peter and Pesek, F. Solar System. New York: Viking, 1979.

* Sagan, Carl, Toon, O.B. and Pollack, J.B. “Anthropogenic Albedo Changes and the Earth’s Climate.’’Science, Vol. 206, p. 1363,

1979.

Short, Nicholas M., Bowman, Paul D., Freden, Stanley C. and Finsh, William A. Mission to Earth: LANDSAT Views the World.

NASA SP-360. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1976.

Skylab Explores the Earth. NASA SP-380. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1977.

The Solar System. A Scientific American Book. San Francisco: W.H. Freeman, 1975.

Urey, H.C. “Cometary Collisions in Geological Periods.” Nature, Vol. 242, p. 32, March 2, 1973.

Vitaliano, Dorothy B. Legends of the Earth. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1973.

‘Whipple, F.F. Comets. New York:John Wiley, 1980.

CHAPTER 5

* American Geophysical Union. Scientific Results of the Viking Project. Reprinted from the Journal of Geophysical Research, Vol.

82, p. 3959, 1977.

Batson, R.M., Bridges, T.M. and Inge, J.F. Atlas of Mars: The 1:5,000,000 Map Series. NASA SP-438. Washington, D.C.: U.S.
Government Printing Office, 1979.

Bradbury, Ray, Clarke, Arthur C., Murray, Bruce, Sagan, Carl, and Sullivan, Walter. Mars and the Mind of Man. New York:
Harper and Row, 1973.

Burgess, Eric. To the Red Planet. New York: Columbia University Press, 1978.

Gerster, Georg. Grand Design: The Earth from Above. New York: Paddington Press, 1976.

Glasstone, Samuel. Book of Mars. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1968.

Goddard, Robert H. Autobiography. Worcester, Mass.: A.]. St. Onge, 1966.

* Goddard, Robert H. Papers. Three volumes. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1970.

Hartmann, W.H. and Raper, O. The New Mars: The Discoveries of Mariner 9. NASA SP-337. Washington, D.C.: U.S.
Government Printing Office, 1974 -

Hoyt, William G. Lowell and Mars. Tucson: University of Arizona Press, 1976.

Fowell, Percival. Mars. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1896.

Fowell, Percival. Mars and Its Canals. New York: Macmillan, 1906.

Fowell, Percival. Mars as an Abode of Life. New York: Macmillan, 1908.

Mars as Viewed by Mariner 9. NASA SP-329. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1974'

352 —For Further Reading

Morowitz, Harold. The Wine of Life. New York: St. Martin’s, 1979.

* Mutch, Thomas A., Arvidson, Raymond E., Head, James W., Jones, Kenneth L. and Saunders, R. Stephen. The Geology of
Mars. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1976.

* Pittendrigh, Colin S., Vishniac, Wolf and Pearman, J.P.T. (eds.). Biology and the Exploration of Mars. Washington, D.C.:
National Academy of Sciences, National Research Council, 1966.

The Martian Landscape. Viking Lander Imaging Team, NASA SP-425. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office,
1978.

* Viking 1 Mission Results. Science , Vol. 193, No. 4255, August 1976.

* Viking 1 Mission Results. Science , Vol. 194, No. 4260, October 1976.

* Viking 2 Mission Results. Science , Vol. 194, No. 4271, December 1976.

*“The Viking Mission and the Question of Life on Mars.” Journal of Molecular Evolution, Vol. 14, Nos. T3. Berlin: Springer-
Verlag, December 1979.

Wallace, Alfred Russel. Is Mars Habitable? London: Macmillan, 1907.

Washburn, Mark. Mars At Last! New York: G.P. Putnam, 1977-

chapter 6

* Alexander, A.L.O. The Planet Saturn. New York: Dover, 1980.

Bell, Arthur E. Christiaan Huygens and the Development of Science in the Seventeenth Century. New York: Longman’s Green, 1947-
Dobell, Clifford. Anton Van Leeuwenhoek and His “Little Animals.” New York: Russell and Russell, 1958.

Duyvendak, J.J.I Cliina’s Discovery of Africa. London: Probsthain, 1949.

* Gehrels, T. (ed.). Jupiter: Studies of the Interior, Atmosphere, Magnetosphere and Satellites. Tucson: University of Arizona Press,

1976.

Haley, K.H. The Dutch in the Seventeenth Century. New York: Harcourt Brace, 1972.

Huizinga, Johan. Dutch Civilization in the Seventeenth Century. New York: F. Ungar, 1968.

* Hunten, Donald (ed.). The Atmosphere of Titan. NASA SP-340. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1973.

* Hunten, Donald and Morrison, David (eds.). The Saturn System. NASA Conference Publication 2068. Washington, D.C.: U.S.
Government Printing Office, 1978.

Huygens, Christiaan. The Celestial Worlds Discover’d: Conjectures Concerning the Inhabitants, Planets and Productions of the
Worlds in the Planets. London: Timothy Childs, 1798.

* “First Scientific Results from Voyager 1.” Science, Vol. 204, No. 4396, June 1, 1979.

* “First Scientific Results from Voyager 2.” Science, Vol. 206, No. 4421, p. 927, November 23, 1979.

Manuel, Frank E. A Portrait of Isaac Newton. Washington: New Republic Books, 1968.

Morrison, David and Samz, Jane. Voyager to Jupiter. NASA SP-439. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1980.
Needham, Joseph. Science and Civilization in China, Vol. 4, Part 3, pp. 468-553. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1970.

* Palluconi, F.D. and Pettengill, G.H. (eds.). The Rings of Saturn. NASA SP-343. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing
Office, 1974-

Rimmel, Richard O., Swindell, William and Burgess, Eric. Pioneer Odyssey. NASA SP- 349. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government
Printing Office, 1977-

* “Voyager 1 Encounter with Jupiter and Io.” Nature, Vol. 280, p. 727, 1979.

Wilson, Charles H. The Dutch Republic and the Civilization of the Seventeenth Century. London: Weidenfeld and Nicolson, 1968.
Zumthor, Paul. Daily Life in Rembrandt’s Holland. London: Weidenfeld and Nicolson, 1962.

CHAPTER 7

Baker, Howard. Persephone’s Cave. Athens: University of Georgia Press, 1979.

Berendzen, Richard, Hart, Richard and Seeley, Daniel. Man Discovers the Galaxies. New York: Science History Publications,

1977.

Farrington, Benjamin. Greek Science. London: Penguin, 1953.

Finley, M.I. Ancient Slavery and Modern Ideology. London: Chatto, 1980.

Frankfort, H., Frankfort, H.A., Wilson, J.A. and Jacobsen, T. Before Philosophy: The Intellectual Adventure of Ancient Man.

Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1946.

Heath, T. Aristarchus of Samos. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1913.

Heidel, Alexander. The Babylonian Genesis. Chicago; University of Chicago Press, 1942.

Hodges, Henry. Technology in the Ancient World. London: Allan Lane, 1970.

Jeans, James. The Growth of Physical Science, second edition. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1951.

For Further Reading — 353

Lucretius. The Nature of the Universe. New York: Penguin, 195 L

Murray, Gilbert. Five Stages of Greek Religion. New York: Anchor Books, 1952.

Russell, Bertrand, A History of Western Philosophy. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1945.

Sarton, George. A History of Science, Vols. 1 and 2. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1952, 1959.

Schrodinger, Erwin. Nature and the Greeks. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1954'

Vlastos, Gregory. Plato’s Universe. Seattle: University of Washington Press, 1975.

CHAPTER 8

Barnett, Lincoln. The Universe and Dr. Einstein. New York: Sloane, 1956.

Bernstein, Jeremy. Einstein. New York: Viking, 1973.

Borden, M. and Graham, O. L. Speculations on American History. Lexington, Mass.: D.C. Heath, 1977.

* Bussard, R.W. “Galactic Matter and Interstellar Flight.” A stronautica Acta, Vol. 6, p. 179, 1960.

Cooper, Margaret. The Inventions of Leonardo Da Vinci. New York: Macmillan, 1965.

* Dole, S.H. “Formation of Planetary Systems by Aggregation: A Computer Simulation.” Icarus, Vol. 13, p. 494, 1970.

Dyson, F.J. “Death of a Project.” [Orion.] Science, Vol. 149, p. 141, 1965.

Gamow, George. Mr. Tompkins in Paperback. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1965.

Hart, Ivor B. Mechanical Investigations of Leonardo Da Vinci. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1963.

Hoffman, Banesh. Albert Einstein: Creator and Rebel. New York: New American Library, 1972.

* Isaacman, R. and Sagan, Carl. “Computer Simulation of Planetary Accretion Dynamics: Sensitivity to Initial Conditions.”
Icarus, Vol. 31, p.510, 1977'

Lieber, Lillian R. and Lieber, Hugh Gray. The Einstein Theory of Relativity. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1961.
MacCurdy, Edward (ed.). Notebooks of Leonardo. Two volumes. New York: Reynal and Hitchcock, 1938.

* Martin, A.R. (ed.). “Project Daedalus: Final Report of the British Interplanetary Society Starship Study.” Journal of the British

Interplanetary Society, Supplement, 1978.

McPhee, John A. The Curve of Binding Energy. New York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1974'

* Mermin, David. Space and Time and Special Relativity. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1968.

Richter, Jean-Paul. Notebooks of Leonardo Da Vinci. New York: Dover, 1970.

Schlipp, Paul A. (ed.). Albert Einstein: Philosopher-Scientist, third edition. Two volumes. La Salle, 111.: Open Court, 1970.

CHAPTER 9

Eddy, John A. The New Sun: The Solar Results from Skylab. NASA SP'402. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing
Office, 1979.

* Feynman, R.P., Leighton, R.B. and Sands, M. The Feynman Lectures on Physics. Reading, Mass.: Addison-Wesley, 1963.
Gamow, George. One, Two, Three... Infinity. New York: Bantam Books, 1971.

Kasner, Edward and Newman, James R. Mathematics and the Imagination. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1953.

Kaufmann, William J. Stars and Nebulas. San Francisco: W.H. Freeman, 1978.

Maffei, Paolo. Monsters in the Sky. Cambridge: M.I.T. Press, 1980.

Murdin, P. and Allen, D. Catalogue of the Universe, New York: Crown Publishers, 1979.

*Shklovskii, I.S. Stars: Their Birth, Life and Death San Francisco: W.H. Freeman, 1978.

Sullivan, Walter. Black Holes: The Edge of Space, The End of Time. New York: Doubleday, 1979.

Weisskopf, Victor. Knowledge and Wonder, second edition. Cambridge: M.I.T. Press, 1979.

Excellent introductory college textbooks on astronomy include:

Abell, George. The Realm of the Universe. Philadelphia: Saunders College, 1980.

Berman, Louis and Evans, J.C. Expltmng the Cosmos. Boston: Little, Brown, 1980.

Hartmann, William K. Astronomy: The Cosmic Journey. Belmont, Cal.: Wadsworth, 1978.

Jastrow, Robert and Thompson, Malcolm H. A stnmomy: Fundamentals and Frontiers, third edition. New York: Wiley, 1977.
Pasachoff, Jay M. and Kutner, M.L. University Astronomy. Philadelphia: Saunders, 1978.

Zeilik, Michael. Astronomy: The Evolving Universe. New York: Harper and Row, 1979.

CHAPTER 10

Abbott, E. Flatland, New York: Barnes and Noble, 1963.

* Arp, Halton. “Peculiar Galaxies and Radio Sources.” Science, Vol. 151, p. 1214, 1966.

Bok, Bart and Bok, Priscilla. The Milky Way, fourth edition. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1974'

354 — For Further Reading

Campbell, Joseph. The Mythic Image. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1974.

Ferris, Timothy. Galaxies. San Francisco: Sierra Club Books, 1980.

Ferris, Timothy. The Red Limit: The Searchby Astronomers for the Edge of the Universe. New York: William Morrow, 1977.

Gingerich, Owen (ed.). Cosmology + 1. A Scientific American Book. San Francisco: W.H. Freeman, 1977.

* Jones, B. “The Origin of Galaxies: A Review of Recent Theoretical Developments and Their Confrontation with Observa-

tion.” Reviews of Modem Physics, Vol. 48, p. 107, 1976.

Kaufmann, William J. Black Holes and Warped Space-Time. San Francisco: W.H. Freeman, 1979.

Kaufmann, William J. Galaxies and Quasars. San Francisco: W.H. Freeman, 1979.

Rothenberg, Jerome (ed.). Technicians of the Sacred. New York: Doubleday, 1968.

Silk, Joseph. The Big Bang: The Creation and Evolution of the Universe. San Francisco: W.H. Freeman, 1980.

Sproul, Barbara C. Primal Myths: Creating the World. New York: Harper and Row, 1979.

* Stockton, A.N. “The Nature of QSO Red Shifts.” AstrophysicalJournal Vol. 223, p. 747, 1978.

Weinberg, Steven. The First Three Minutes: A Modem View of the Origin of the Universe. New York: Basic Books, 1977.

* White, S.D.M. and Rees, M.J. “Core Condensation in Heavy Halos: A Two-Stage Series for Galaxy Formation and

Clustering.” MonthlyNoticesoftheRoyalAstronomicalSociety, Vol. 183, p. 341, 1978.

CHAPTER 11

Human Ancestors. Readings from Scientific American. San Francisco: W. H. Freeman, 1979.

Koestler, Arthur. The Act of Creation. New York: Macmillan, 1964.

Leaky, Richard E. and Lewin, Roger. Origins. New York: Dutton, 1977.

* Lehninger, Albert L. Biochemistry. New York: Worth Publishers, 1975.

* Norris, Kenneth S. (ed.). Whales, Dolphins and Porpoises. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1978.

* Payne, Roger and McVay, Scott. “Songs of Humpback Whales.” Science, Vol. 173, p. 585, August 1971.

Restam, Richard M. The Brain. New York: Doubleday, 1979.

Sagan, Carl. The Dragons of Eden: Speculations on the Evolution of Human Intelligence. New York: Random House, 1977.

Sagan, Carl, Drake, F.D., Druyan, A., Ferris, T., Lomberg, J., and Sagan, L.S. Murmurs of Earth: The Voyager Interstellar
Record. New York: Random House, 1978.

* Stryer, Lubert. Biochemistry. San Francisco: W.H. Freeman, 1975.

The Brain. A Scientific American Book. San Francisco: W.H. Freeman, 1979.

* Winn, Howard E. and Olla, Bori L. (eds.). Behavior of Marine Animals, Vol. 3: Cetaceans. New York: Plenum, 1979.

CHAPTER 12

Asimov, Isaac. Extraterrestrial Civilizations. New York: Fawcett, 1979.

Budge, E. A. Wallis. Egyptian Language: Easy Lessons in Egyptian Hieroglyphics. New York: Dover Publications, 1976.
de Laguna, Frederica. Under Mount St. Elias: History and Culture ofYacutatTlingit. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government
Printing Office, 1972.

Emmons, G.T. The Chilkat Blanket New York: Memoirs of the American Museum of Natural History, 1907.

Goldsmith, D. and Owen, T. The Search for Life in the Universe. Menlo Park: Benjamin/Cummings, 1980.

Klass, Philip. UFOs Explained. New York: Vintage, 1976.

Krause, Aurel. The Tkngit Indians. Seattle: University of Washington Press, 1956.

La Perouse, Jean F. de G., comte de. Voyage de la PerouseAutourdu Monde (four volumes). Paris: Imprimerie de la
Republique, 1797.

Mallove, E., Forward, R.L., Paprotny, Z., and Lehmann, J. “Interstellar Travel and Communication: A Bibliography.”

Journal of the British Interplanetary Society, Vol. 33, No. 6, 1980.

* Morrison, P., Billingham, J. andWolfe, J. (eds.). The Search for Extraterrestrial Intelligence. New York: Dover, 1979.

* Sagan, Carl (ed.). Communication with Extraterrestrial Intelligence (CETI). Cambridge: M.I.T. Press, 1973.

Sagan, Carl and Page, Thornton (eds.). UFOs: A Scientific Debate. New York: W.W. Norton, 1974.

Shklovskii, I. S. and Sagan, Carl. Intelligent Life in the Universe. New York: Dell, 1967.

Story, Ron. The Space-Gods Revealed: A Close Look at the Theories of Erich von Daniken. New York: Harper and Row, 1976.

Vaillant, George C. Aztecs of Mexico. New York: Pelican Books, 1965.

CHAPTER 13

Drell, Sidney D. and Von Hippel, Frank. “Limited Nuclear War.” Scientific American, Vol. 235, p. 2737, 1976.

For Further Reading - 355

Dyson, F. Disturbing the Universe. New York: Harper and Row, 1979*

Glasstone, Samuel (ed.). The Effects of Nuclear Weapons. Washington, D.C.:U.S. Atomic Energy Commission, 1964'
Humboldt, Alexander von. Cosmos. Five volumes. London: Bell, 1871 -
Murchee, G. The Seven Mysteries of Life. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1978.

Nathan, Otto and Norden, Heinz (eds.). Einstein on Peace. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1960.

Perrin, Noel. Giving Up the Gun: Japan s Reversion to the Sword 1543G879. Boston: David Godine, 1979.

Prescott, James W. “Body Pleasure and the Origins of Violence.” Bulletin of the Atomic Scientists, p. 10, November 1975.

* Richardson, Lewis F. The Statistics of Deadly Quarrels. Pittsburgh: Boxwood Press, 1960.

Sagan, Carl. The Cosmic Connection. An Extraterrestrial Perspective. New York: Doubleday, 1973.

World Armaments and Disarmament. SIPRI Yearbook, 1980 and previous years, Stockholm International Peace Research
Institute. New York: Crane Russak and Company, 1980 and previous years.

APPENDICES

Courant, Richard and Robbins, Herbert. What Is Mathematics ? An Elementary Approach to Ideas and Methods. New York:
Oxford University Press, 1969.

INDEX

Abbott, Edwin, 262, 263
Abu Simbel, 47

Adams, R. E. W., Maya canals discov-
ered, illus. 3404
Aeschylus, 336
Affection, need for, 3304
Africa: circumnavigated by Phoeni-
cians, 15, 183 n.; Dutch voyages
around, 141

Air: atoms in, 221; Empedocles’ experi¬
ment with, 179-80

Aircraft, Leonardo’s designs, 203, 207,
illus. 203

Air pollution, 98, 102

Alaska, La Perouse visits, 303, illus. 304

Albedo effect, 103 n., 133

Albertus Magnus, 137

Alchemy, 65 n., 220-1

Alcmaeon, 183-4 n.

Alexander the Great, 18, illus. 20
Alexandria, 15, 18; Eratosthenes’ ob¬
servations at, 14-15, illus. 16; Li¬
brary, 14, 18-20, 50, 62, 188, 281,
333-7, illus. 20, 21, 333; science in,
14-16, 19-20
Algae, blue-green, 32
Alice in Wonderland , influence of grav¬
ity on matter and light, example, 248,
illus. 236

Aliens (science fiction), 40, 41, illus. 40,

41

Allison, John: cells, paintings, illus.
36-7; hypothetical world, painting,
illus. 312; nebula (gas cloud sur¬
rounding supernova explosion,
painting, illus. 11; Orion Nebula,
paintings, illus. 12,13; Orion Nebula,
interior, painting, illus. 13; Orion
Nebula, Trapezium, painting, illus.
13; Pluto and Charon, painting, illus.
14; pulsar at center of supernova
remnant, painting, illus. 11
Allison, John, and Adolf Schaller,
black dust cloud and stars embedded
in gaseous nebulosities, painting,
illus. 10; red giant star and spiral arm,
painting, illus. 10

Allison, John, Adolf Schaller, and Rick
Sternbach, Saturn, model, illus. 14
Alpha Centauri, 198, 203, 210
Amalthea, satellite of Jupiter, 158, illus.
156

Amino acids, 39

Amsterdam Town Hall, 140-1; sculp¬
ture, illus. 140

Anasazi people: astronomical knowl¬
edge, 47; buildings, illus. 48, 49; rock
painting of supernova, 237, illus. 232

Anatomy, Alcmaeon’s discoveries,

183-4 m

Anaxagoras, 181-3, 225
Anaximander of Miletus, 177'9, 317
Ancient astronauts, see Extraterrestrial
visitors

Andromeda, constellation, 8, 191, 198,
207; Great Galaxy in, see M31
Angkor Wat, 47

Animals: domestication of, 26, 27; in¬
telligence of, 284

Antarctica, Vishniac’s studies of mi¬
crobiology, 123-4
Antoku, legend of, 24-5
Antoniadi, E. M., Mars, drawing, illus.
109

Apianus, Petrus, Astronomicum Cae-
sarium , illus. 44, 55
Apollo 11, illus. 113
Apollo 14, illus. 316
Apollo 16, astronauts, 86, illus. 86
Apollonius of Perga, 19, 62
Aquarius, constellation, illus. 232, 281
Aranda people, Great Father myth, 257
Archimedes, 19,52 n., 167,181 n., 219,
335 n.

Arecibo Interstellar Message, 297, illus.

290

Arecibo Observatory, 297, illus. 297
Argon atoms, 230

Aristarchus of Samos, 20, 188-90, 193,
200, 307, 337

Aristotle, 18, 53,79,177,184 m, 186-8
Arithmetic base 5 or 10, 282
Armitage, Frank, cells, paintings, illus.
36-7

Arp, Halton, 255, 256
Artificial selection, 26-7
Assyrian account of the creation of
Man, 269
Asteroids, 87

Astrology, 48-51, 57, 179 n., illus. 54,
55,282, 284; Brahe’s interest in, 65-6
n.; Newton’s interest in, 68
Astronomers, amateur, epitaph, 195
Astronomy, 51-3, 56-71; Chinese,

186-7; early, 47-8, illus. 54, 55;
Greek, 178, 182-3, 188-9; symbols
on flags, 50

Atmosphere of Earth: carbon dioxide
in, 102; greenhouse effect in, 133;
oxygen and nitrogen in, 32; pollu¬
tion, 98, 102; upper, illus. 329
Atomic theory of Democritus, 180
Atomic weapons, see Nuclear weapons
Atoms, 218-21, 223-4, illus. 218; in in¬
terstellar gas, 233; of marcasite, mag¬
nified, illus. 220; nature of, 218;

nuclei of, 218, 223-4, 239; in stars,
233

Augustine, Saint, 178
Australia, Dutch expeditions to, 141
Aztec chronicle, The History of the
Kingdoms , 291

Aztecs, 175, 187, 231-2 n.; Spanish
conquest of, 305-7, 311, illus. 305,
306; sun worship, 243 n.

Babylonia: astronomy and astrology,
49, 79; creation myth, 177
Bach, Johann Sebastian, 307
Bacilli in oxygen-free environment, 52
Banin, A., 125, 126
Barnard’s Star, 207, 210-11
Barrow, Isaac, 69
Bayeux Tapestry, illus. 76
Behavior, see Human behavior
Bernoulli, Johann, 70-1
Bernstein, People’s Book of Natural Sci¬
ence , 199
Berossus, 20
Beta Andromedae, 198
Beta T aurid meteor shower, 78
Bhagavad Gita , 73

Big Bang, 21, 218, 247, 252, 254, 337;
formation of universe, 246,247,256,
257, 259

Big Dipper: computer-generated

images, 196-7, illus. 196, 197; inter¬
pretations of, illus. 46, 47
Bikini, thermonuclear weapons test,
321-2

Bits of information (binary digits), 270;
used by bacteria and amoebae, 273;
used by whales, 271; in brains, 278;
in libraries, 281

Black-body background radiation, 256
Black dust clouds, illus. 10, 11; see also
Interstellar dust
Black dwarf stars, 232
Black holes, 10, 239, 241-2, 265, 267,
illus. 238; in galaxies, 249, 255; qua¬
sars related to, 250

Blood cells, 31,34, illus. 34, 35; red, 35,
illus. 34, 35; white, illus. 34, 35
Blue-shift spectra, 255, 260
Bohr, Niels, 347
Book of Prince Huai Nan, 78
“Book of the Stars and Constellations”
(Suwar Razi), illus. 279
Books, 279, 281-2, illus. 279-81
Brachistochrone problem, 70
Brahe, Tycho, 70,147 n., 237, illus. 78;
on astrology and alchemy, 65-6 n.;
Kepler with, 58-62; supernova ob¬
served by, 234

358 - Index

Brain, 276-9, illus. 276-7; cerebral con
tex, 277-9, illus. 276; corpus callo-
sum, 278; neurons, 277, 278, illus.
278; R-complex, 276-7, 279, 326,
331

Brain library: human, 276, 278; of
whale, 273

Brainstem, 276, illus. 278
British Interplanetary Society, 203
Bruno, Giordano, 86, 143, 147, 189,
265 n.

Buddha, 183 n.

Buffon, Georges Louis Leclerc, Comte
de, 27-8 n.

Burke, Bernard, 159
Burroughs, Edgar Rice, John Carter
novels, 110-11, illus. 110
Bussard, R. W., interstellar ramjet, 206,
207

Calame, Odile, 85, 86
Calculus, see Differential calculus
Calculus of variations, 70
Calendars, early astronomical, 97
Callisto, satellite of Jupiter, illus. 96,
148, 160, 161

Cambrian explosion, 32-3, 38 n., 300
Camel, constellation (Camelopardalis),
illus. 279

Cancer, constellation, illus. 283
Canterbury monks, lunar impact seen
by, 85, 86
Carbohydrates, 33

Carbon: atom, 220, 233; atomic nu¬
cleus, 220, 224; life associated with,

126-7

Carbon dioxide, 33; in atmosphere of
Earth, 102

Cartier, Edd, alien, drawing, illus. 40
Casa Bonita, N.M., illus. 48
Casa Rincafiada, N.M., illus. 48, 49
Cassiopeia A, 242

Catholic Church: and Copernicus, 53;

and Galileo, 141,142; and Kepler, 59
Celichius, Andreas, 78
Cells, 34-5, illus. 36-7; animal, 31; nu¬
cleus of, 34, illus. 36-7; origin of, 31;
plant, 31; work of, 34
Centaurus A, galaxy (NGC 5128), illus.
251

Cerebral cortex, 277-9, illus. 276
Chaco Canyon, N.M., 47
Champollion, Jean Francois, 337;
Egyptian hieroglyphics studied, 293—
4; 296, 303 n.; portrait, illus. 292
Chaos, Greek concept, 175
Charon, satellite of Pluto, 11, illus. 14
Chemical elements, see Elements,
chemical
Chichen Itzta, 47

China: ancient culture, 175; astronomy,
186-7, 235; creation myth and image,
258, illus. 257; Dutch voyage to, 141;

explorations from, 147 n., illus. 147;
printing and books, 281
Chlorine atoms converted to argon
atoms, 230
Chloroplasts, 31

Christianity, Earth and heaven in, 188
Chryse, region on Mars, 119-21, 130,
illus. 121,126, 130, 132,133
Chuang Tzu, 195
Cicero, 52 n., 184
Circinius X-2, 242

Cleopatra, name in hieroglyphics, 294,
29 6, illus. 296

Cleopatra’s Needle, New York, 98
Clepsydra, 179, illus. 179
Clogks, nautical, 145
Clube, S., 252

Coignet, Leon, Champollion, portrait,
illus. 292

Colossi of Memnon, illus. 295
Columbus, Christopher, 16-17, 188,
508, 311,335, 345, illus. 208
Comet Arend-Roland, 80
Comet Encke, 78

Comet Halley, 78-82, illus. 76, 77, 81,

82

Comet Humason, illus. 82
Comet Ikeya-Seki, illus. 80
Comet of 1556, illus. 79
Comet of 1577, illus. 78
Comets: collision with planets, 79, 82-
83; fragments striking Earth, 75-7,
79,82-3; gases in tails of, 80; meteors
and meteorites as remnants of, 78;
orbits of, 81-82; Spanish conquest of
Aztecs preceded by comet, 307, illus.
77; structure of, 76; Velikovsky’s hy¬
pothesis of encounters with planets,
90-1; as warnings or prophecies,
78-9, 307

Comet West, illus. 12, 83
Comte, Auguste, 93
Confucius, 183 n.

Constellations, 46, 196-7; in astrology,
48; computer-generated images,
196-7, illus. 196-8; apparent motion
of planets through, illus. 50
Copernicus, Nicholas, 57, 61, 62, 187—
9, 200, 307, 335; astronomy, 53,
145-6, illus. 56; portrait, illus. 52
Cornell University, Laboratory for
Planetary Studies, synthesis of or¬
ganic matter, 38-9, illus. 38
Corpus callosum, 278
Cortes, Hernan, 305-6, 311
Cosa, Juan de la, map showing
Americas, illus. 164
Cosmic radiation, 246; detection of,
235, 246, 261

Cosmos: dimensions in measurement
of, 5; evolution of, 337; Greek con¬
cept of, 18, 175, 184; human under¬
standing of, 332-3

Crab Nebula, 234, 237, 283, illus. 233;

pulsar at center of, 239
Crab Supernova, 237
Crane, Hart, 195

Craters: on Earth, 87, 98 n.; on Jupiter’s
satellites, illus. 96; on Mars, 83, 86 n.,
illus. 91,92; on Moon, 83,85-7,142,
illus. 84, 85, 87; on planets, 83; on
Venus, 95

Creation myths and religious interpre¬
tations, 177 n., 257-9, illus. 257-60
Croesus, King of Lydia, 177
Cube, 263-4; hypercube (tesseract),

264, illus. 262; two-dimensional rep¬
resentation, 264, illus. 262
Cydonia, region on Mars, 119-20
Cygnus, constellation, 226
Cygnus Loop, illus. 233
Cygnus X-l, 241-2, 250, illus. 238
Cyril, Saint, 335-6

Daedalus, Project, 203, 206, 207, illus.
204, 205

Darwin, Charles, 78 n.; The Origin of
Species, 23, 28; theory of evolution,
23, 27-9, 179, 339
Davis, Don: death of the dinosaurs,
painting, illus. 285; formation of the
Moon, paintings, illus. 88-9; Io, sat¬
ellite of Jupiter, model, illus. 14; late
stages of stellar evolution, painting,
illus. 235; Olympus Mons, Mars,
model, illus. 15; Viking lander,
paintings, illus. 122
Deimos, satellite of Mars, 83
Democritus of Abdera, 28 n., 167,
179-81, 188, 337; atomic theory,

180; portrait on Greek bill, illus. 182
Dendera, temple, 293, illus. 293; stars
represented, illus. 239
Deneh, 225

Deoxyribonucleic acid, see DNA
Descartes, Rene, 141, 142 n., 143
Diamonds from comets and meteorites,

77

Differential calculus, 68, 70, 181
Dinosaurs, 283, illus. 285
Diogenes, 335 n.

Dionysius of Thrace, 19
Dixon, don, hypothetical planets,
paintings, illus. 214

DNA (deoxyribonucleic acid), 31,
34-5, illus. 36-7; double helix, 31,
34, 273, illus. 36-7; and sexual activ¬
ity, 31-2

DNA polymerase (enzyme), 34, illus.

36-7

Dodecahedron, 186-7, 350
Dogon creation image, illus. 260
Dollfus, Audouin, Titan, drawings,
illus. 160

Dolphins, sounds (songs) of, 271
Dominic, Saint, 59 n.

Index - 359

Donne, John, 143

Doppler effect, 252-6, illus. 252 -5

Drake, Frank, equation, 299, 302

Drosophila melanogaster, 29-30

Durer, Albrecht, 305

Dutch, see Holland

Dutch East India Company, 140

Earth 5, 7, 1142, 1448; approach to,
from other planets, 11142; atoms in
221; as center of universe, 51-3, illus.
54, 56; circumference estimated by
Eratosthenes, 15; circumnavigation
of, 15; craters on, 87, 98 n.; curvature
in Eratosthenes’ experiments, 1445;
death of, 2314, illus. 228-9; evolu-
tion of, 338; first map to show the
Americas, illus. 164; life on, see Life
on Earth; maps of the world, early,
illus. 17, 164; orbit around Sun, 61,
63, 82 n.; planetary fragments strik-
ing, 75-7, 79, 82-3; planets colliding
with, 79, 82-3; surface changes, 98,
99, 102; view of, from Moon, illus.

67, 344; views of, from space, 111-
12, illus. 1004, 11448; voyages of
discovery, 139-41, map, illus. 19;
water on, affected by comets, 80
Ebla, 336

Eclipses, paper computers for study of,
illus. 44, 54, 55
Edda of Snorri Sturluson, 73
Eddington, Sir Arthur Stanley, 218
Egge, David: hypothetical ice planet in
Ring Nebula in Lyra, painting, illus.
194; hypothetical planets, paintings,
illus. 211, 215; hypothetical worlds,
paintings, illus. 312

Egypt: ancient civilization, 293-4, 296,
illus. 293-6; astrology, 49; creation
represented, illus. 260; hieroglyphics,
293-4, 296, illus. 294, 296; incanta¬
tion to Ra, 217; maps, illus. 16
Einstein, Albert, 198-201, 209, 242,
330, 331, 334, 337; general theory of
relativity, 206; “Miracle Year,” 1905,
69; particle theory of light, 144 n.;
portrait, illus. 199; special theory of
relativity, 200-2

Einstein High-Energy Astrophysical
Observatory, deep sky survey, illus.
263

Electrons, 218-19, 221, 223
Elements, chemical, 221, 224, illus. 221;

rare, 221, 233; in stars, 233, 234
Elements, four, 185, 220
Emmons, G. T., 303
Empedocles, 28 n., 179-80, 183 n.
Encyclopaedia Galactica , 314, 315; hy¬
pothetical computer summaries of
extraterrestrial civilizations, illus.
313-14; hypothetical worlds, illus.
312

Endoplasmic reticulum, illus. 36-7
Enuma Hish , 105

Environment, human effects on, 103
Enzymes, 34, 38

Eratosthenes, 1447,145, 208, 334, 337
Eridanus, constellation, deep sky sur¬
vey, illus. 263
Erosion, 98, 99

Eskimo creation myth, 167, 291
Euclid, 19, 56,60,68,94,176,187,334
Eudoxus, 181 n.

Europa, satellite of Jupiter, 102, 149,
151, 157, illus. 148, 150
Euripides, 336

Evolution: artificial selection, 26-7;
Darwin’s theory of, 23, 27-9, 179;
Greek theories on, 178; of human
beings, 282-4, 338, 339; mutations
in, 27, 30; natural selection, 27-30
Explosions, extraterrestrial causes sug¬
gested, 75; see also Tunguska event
Extraterrestrial visitors, 292, 307; pos¬
sible explorations by, 307-8, 311; see
also Life on other worlds

Farrington, Benjamin, 177, 186
Fijian creation myth, 177 n.

Fire in ancient cultures, 170-1 n.

Five solids, see Solids

Hags, astronomical symbols on, 50

Hatland, 262-4

Forests, destruction of, 103, 133
Fossil fuels, 102, 133
Fossils, 29, 30

Fourier, Joseph, 292-3, 296
Fourth dimension, 264—5, 267
Fox, Paul, 110
Franklin, Kenneth, 159
Friedman, Imre, 124

Galaxies, 5, 7, 8, 191, 193, 246-56,
264-5; barred spiral, 247, 249, illus.
7, 249; black holes in, 249, 255;
Centaurus A (NGC 5128), illus. 251;
clusters of, 247-8, illus. 2, 4; collid¬
ing, illus. 253; Doppler effect in,

252- 6, illus. 252; elliptical, 247-9,
illus. 247; elliptical, radio image, illus.
262; exploding radio galaxy with
symmetrical jets, illus. 5; formation
of, 246-7; Hercules cluster, illus. 255;
Local Group, 7-8, 247; M81, illus.
248; M87, 249, illus. 250; NGC
147, Ulus. 247; NGC 1300, illus. 249;
NGC 2623, illus. 253; NGC 4038
and 4039, illus. 253; NGC 5128,
illus. 251; NGC 6251, 249; NGC
7217, illus. 249; quasars in, 249-50,
255, 256, illus. 6, 249; red shift in,

253- 6; ring, 248, illus. 4; Seyfert’s
Sextet, illus. 254; Sombrero, Ml04
(NGC 4594), illus. 247; spiral, 8, 247,
265, illus. 7, 248; spiral arms, 248,

249, 251, 252, illus. 246-9; Stephan’s
Quintet, illus. 254; Virgo cluster,
247, 256-7; Whirlpool, M51 (NGC
5194), illus. 246; see also M31; Milky
Way

Galen, 334

Galileo Galilei, 60-1, 67, 142-3, 145,
189, 231; and Catholicism, 141, 142;
painting by Huens, illus. 141; tele¬
scope used by, 66, 91, 142; Venus
observed by, 91-2, 96
Gamma rays, 93, 235; burst of, and su¬
pernova remnant, 237, 238
Gamow, George, 201
Ganymede, satellite of Jupiter, 102,

149, illus. 96, 159
Garcilaso de la Vega, 317
Gene library, 273, 276, illus. 273-5
General theory of relativity, 206
Genetic code, 31, 38 n.

Geocentric hypothesis, 51-3, illus. 54,
56

Gervase of Canterbury, chronicle, 85
Giacconi, Ricardo, 262
Gilbert Islands, creation myth, 257
Gingerich, Owen, 53 n.

Giotto, Adoration of the Magi , 79, illus.

77

Giraffe brought to China, illus. 147
Glaciers, 102

Goddard, Robert Hutchings, 111, 232,
337; portrait, illus. Ill; rockets de¬
signed by, 111 , illus. 112
Gold, 224, 233; in alchemy, 220-1
Goldstone Tracking Station, Jet Pro¬
pulsion Laboratory, studies of
Venus, illus. 95
Googol, 219-20
Googolplex, 219-20
Grasslands, destruction of, 103, 133
Gravity: as distortion of space, 242; ac¬
celeration, due to on Earth, 206-7,
240-1, illus. 237; influence on matter
and light, Alice in Wonderland ex¬
ample, 240, illus. 236; Newton’s the¬
ory of, 69-70

Great Bear, see Big Dipper
Great Designer, idea of, 28-9
Great Nebula in Orion, see Orion
Nebula

Greek civilization and science, 174-88,
illus. 187, map 174; anatomy, 183-4
n.; astronomy, 178, 182-3, 188-9;
atomic theory, 180; decline of sci¬
ence, 186; evolution of animals, 178;
mathematics, 181, 183-5; slavery in
culture, 186-8; time measurement,
177-8

Greek literature in Alexandria Library,
334

Greenhouse effect in atmosphere: of
Earth, 102, 133; of Venus, 97, 98 n.
Grotius, Hugo, 142

360 — Index

GX339-4, star, 242

Halley, Edmund, 69 n., 79, 90 n.

Halley’s Comet, see Comet Halley
Hals, Frans, 141
Hand, significance of, 176
Hardy, David, hypothetical planets,
paintings, illus. 21345
Harlow, Harry and Margaret, 331
Harmony of the spheres, 63, 64
Hartung, Jack, 85'6
Heike, samurai clan, 25, illus. 25
Heike crabs, 25-6, 29, illus. 25
Helfand, David, 237
Helicase (enzyme), illus. 36-7
Helicopter, Leonardo’s design, illus.

203

Heliocentric hypothesis, 53, 57, 145-6,
188-9, illus. 56
Heliopause, 165

Helium, 93, 220, 2244; atoms, 224; in
stars, 233, 238; in sun, 225, 226, 230,
231

Hera, 173

Heraion (Temple of Hera), Samos, 173,
illus. 173

Hercules cluster, of galaxies, illus. 255
Heron of Alexandria, 19
Herophilus of Chalcedon, 19, 184 n.
Herschel, William, 190, 191
Hertz, unit of sound frequency, 272
Hexokinase (enzyme), 273
Hieroglyphics, 293-4, 296, illus. 294,

296

Hinduism: cosmic death and rebirth in,
258; Shiva’s dance of creation,
bronze, 259, illus. 244
Hipparchus, 19, 334
Hippasus, 185 n.

Hippocrates, 17 8-9, 181
Hiroshima, nuclear attack, 321, 322
Holbach, Paul Heinrich Dietrich, Baron
von, 167

Holland: in exploration and trade, 140—
1, 143; as intellectual and artistic
center, 141-3
Hooke, Robert, 136
Huai-nan Tzu, 258
Hubble, Edwin, 193, 254, 256
Huens, Jean-Leon: Albert Einstein,
portrait, illus. 199; Galileo, painting,
illus. 141; Isaac Newton, portrait,
illus. 69; Johannes Kepler, portrait,
illus. 52; Nicholas Copernicus, por¬
trait, illus. 52
Huggins, William, 23, 80
Huichol: painting of creation, illus. 258;
painting of origin of Sun, illus. 259
Human behavior: signs of improve¬
ment in, 332, 339; study of, 331-2
Human beings: chemicals in body,
127-8; effect on environment, 103;
evolution of, 33, 282-4, 338, 339;

future of, 339, 342, 345; intelligence
of, 284; understanding of Cosmos,
332-3

Humason, Milton, 253-4, 256, 337;
comet discovered by, illus. 82; por¬
trait, illus. 256

Humboldt, Alexander von, 78 n.

Hume, David, 79

Huxley, T. H., 3, 23, 28

Huygens, Christiaan, 105, 136, 137,

143- 7, 291, 317, 337; astronomy,
145-7, illus. 145, 230; brass plate for
measuring distance to stars, 190, 191,
illus. 190; inventions, 145; life on
planets believed possible, 147,162 n.;
microscope studies, 144, illus. 144;
portrait, illus. 143; telescope studies,

144- 5; theory of light, 143, 144 n.
Huygens, Constantijn, 143
Hydrogen, 218, 224-5; in atmosphere,

38; in Milky Way, 250; in stars, 233,
238; in Sun, 225, 226, 230, 231
Hygnius, Caius, De S ideribus Tractatus ,
illus. 281

Hypatia, 20, 335-6, 337

Ice planet, hypothetical, in Ring Nebula
in Lyra, painting, illus. 194
Inca myth, 317

India, ancient culture, 175, 187
Indians, American, see Native Ameri¬
cans

Indonesian Palintangatan astrological
calendar, illus. 284
Inertia, law of, 69
Infinity, sign for, 220
Infrared radiation, 93
Integral calculus, 68, 70, 181
Intelligence: of animals, 284; of human
beings, 284; on other planets, 284-5
Interstellar communication, radio, 272
Interstellar dust, 24, 211-12, 225, illus.
24

Interstellar flight, 307-8, 310-11, 313—
15; exploration and colonization,

308, 310-11, illus. 310, 311; see also
Spacecraft

Interstellar gas, 233, 247
Io, satellite of Jupiter, 102, 149, 156-9,
illus. 148, 153-5; atmosphere, 158;
map, illus. 164; model, illus. 14; vol¬
canoes, 157-8, illus. 153-5
Ionia, culture and science, 175-7, 179,
181-3,186-8; see also Greek civiliza¬
tion and science
Ionian Sea, 174 n.

Irrational numbers, 185

Jacobson, Dov, interstellar space colo¬
nization, animated film, illus. 310,
311

Japanese creation myth, 177 n.

Jesuits in China, 187

Jet Propulsion Laboratory, 138, illus.

139

Job, Book of, 3, 45
John Paul II, Pope, 142 n.

Josephus, 78-9

Judeo-Christian view of creation, illus.
258

Jupiter, 11, 38, 57, 83, 87, 102, 149,
158-60; craters on satellites, illus. 96;
Galilean satellites, 142, 149, 151;
Great Red Spot, illus. 136, 152; hy¬
drogen in, 224 n.; interior, 159,
model, illus. 156; life on, possible,
300; liquid metallic hydrogen, 159;
magnetic field, 159; orbit, 63; radio
emission from, 159; rings, 90, 139,
157, 159, illus. 162; satellites, 60, 61,
83, 142, 210, 299, illus. 148; see also
Amalthea, Callisto, Europa, Gany¬
mede, Io; a star that failed, 158; in
Velikovsky’s hypothesis of comet,
90, 91; Voyager 1 observations, 151,
illus. 148, 150-6, 159-61; Voyager 2
observations, 138-9, 149, 152, illus.
136,150,159,162

Jupiter-like planet, possible lifeforms
on, 40-1, illus. 42-3

Kant, Immanuel, 191
Kamak: ruins, illus. 293; temple, 293-4,
296, illus. 293
Kasner, Edward, 219
Kazantzakis, Nikos, 73
Kepler, Johannes, 19 n., 45, 68, 113,
142 n., 302, 334, 337; astronomy,
51-2, 57-8, 60-4, 146; on comets,
79; five Platonic solids, Cosmic Mys¬
tery, theory of, 57-8, 60, illus. 58;
The Harmonies of the World , 63; laws
of planetary motion, 61-4, 69, 70,
illus. 62, 63; life and works, 56-67;
mother accused of witchcraft, 65, 67;
Newton influenced by, 69-71; por¬
trait, illus. 52; Somnium, 65-7; super¬
nova observed, 234, 237; third
(harmonic) law, 63, 69, 70, 165, 211,
251, illus. 63; with Tycho Brahe,
58-62

Keynes, John Maynard, on Newton, 68
Kissinger, Henry, 326
Koran, 23

Krejanovsky, Judy, Big Dipper, inter¬
pretations of, illus. 46, 47
Kuiper, Gerard Peter, 143 n., 160
Kulik, L. A., illus. 74
!Kung Bushmen, beliefs on Milky Way,
172-3

Kuo Shou-ching, 186-7

Lao-tse, 183 n., 245
La Perouse, Comte de, expedition to
Alaska, 302-3, 307, illus. 304
Large Magellanic Cloud, 237'8, illus.
234

Index - 361

Laser retroreflectors on Moon, 86, Ulus.

86

Latitude, determination of, 145
Leakey, Mary, 345

Leeuwenhoek, Anton van, 141, 143,
144; microscope studies, 144
Leibniz, Gottfried Wilhelm von, 70
Leo, constellation, computer-generated
image, 197, illus. 198
Leonardo da Vinci, 188, 203, 209, 337;
bust, illus. 202; flying machines, de-
signs for, 203, 207, illus. 203
Libraries, 281-2; see also Alexandria,
Library

“Life of the Prophet” ( Daver Siyar-e
Nabi), illus. 281

Life on Earth, 24, 30-40, 122; in An¬
tarctica, Vishniac’s studies, 123-4;
new forms after Cambrian explosion,
32-3; origin of, 30-1; seen by visitors
from other planets, 112; and sun¬
light, 234-5; views of, from space,
111-12, illus. 114-18
Life on other worlds, 11, 24, 238, 270,
284-5, 298-302, 307-8, 310-11,

313-15; Arecibo Interstellar Message
to, illus. 290; attempts to communi¬
cate with, 296-302, illus. 297, 300-1;
chemical composition of, 128; esti¬
mated number of advanced technical
civilizations, 298-302; Huygens’
opinion of, 147, 162 n.; hypothetical
computer summaries of advanced
civilizations, illus. 313-14; intelli¬
gence, 284-5; possible lifeforms on
Jupiter-like planet, 40-1, illus. 42-3;
radio communication with, 285-7,
297-8, illus. 290, 297; science and
mathematics as common language,
296-7; television transmission to,
286-7, 289; on Titan, suggested, 162;
Voyager spacecraft carries recorded
messages to, 287, 289, illus. 288; see
also extraterrestrial visitors; Mars
Light: Doppler effect in, 253; Einstein’s
theory of, 144 n.; Huygens’ theory of,
143,144 n.; Newton’s discoveries on,
68, 144 n.; red shift, 253, 261; in
spectrum, 92-3;speed of, 5,198-202,
207

Light-years, 5, 198
Lilienthal, Otto, 203
Locke, John, 141

Lomberg, Jon: advanced technical civi¬
lization rebuilds its solar system,
painting, illus. 308; barred spiral gal¬
axy, painting, illus. 7; The Great
Chain of Being, painting, illus. 319;
hypothetical summaries of extrater¬
restrial civilizations, illus. 313-14;
hypothetical world, painting, illus.
312; infinite regression from one
universe to another, painting, illus.

266; Milky Way, Ulus. 7; Milky Way
(The Backbone of Night), painting,
illus. 166; Milky Way, schematic
representation, illus. 191; spiral gal¬
axy, painting, illus. 7
London, causes of death in 1632, 49,
illus. 51

Long, Knox, 237

Longitude, determination of, 145
Louis XVI, 302

Lowell, Percival, 107, 125, 134-5, 151,
illus. 107, 108; studies of Mars, 108—
12, illus. 109

Lowell Observatory, Flagstaff, Ariz.,

108

Luther, Martin, 53
Lymphocytes, illus. 35-7

M13, globular cluster, Arecibo Inter¬
stellar Message transmitted to, 297,
illus. 290

M31, Great Galaxy, 8, 191, 193, 198,
207, 247, 265, illus. 246
M81, galaxy, illus. 248
M87, galaxy, 249, illus. 250
M104, see Sombrero Galaxy
Maclaurin, Colin, 291-2
MacLean, Paul, 276
Magellan, Ferdinand, 15, 238
Magellanic Cloud: Large, 237-8, 243,
illus. 234; Small, 238
M ahapurana Jinasena , 245
Mankind, see Human beings
Marduk, 176

Mariner 9, observations of Mars, 110,
117,118,125, illus. 91,92,119,120,
128, 129

Mariner Valley, Mars (Vallis Marin-
eris), Ulus. 119

Mars, 11, 57, 60, 99, 105-35, illus. 106;
atmosphere, 79, 112, 113, 117; bio¬
logical studies, 119, 122-3, 125, 128;
canals, 107-12,134-5,151, illus. 107,
109; craters, 83, 86 n., 87, illus. 91,
92, 121; crescent, illus. 130; dust
storms, 117, 125; environment, sim¬
ulated, 113; first photographs from
surface, 121, illus. 131; future inves¬
tigations of, 129—35; Huygens’ studies
of, 145; Kasei Vallis, illus. 121; life
on, possible, 106-10, 112, 121-2,
126,128,132-3, 300; Lowell’s studies
of, 108-12; Mariner 9 observations,
110,117,118, 125, illus. 91,92, 119,
120,128,129;motion, 52-3, illus. 50,
56; Noctis Labyrinthus, Ulus. 121;
North Polar Cap, illus. 128, 130;
Olympus Mons, illus. 130, model,
Ulus. 15, 120; orbit, 62, 63; polar
caps, future studies of, 132-3; pyra¬
mids, 130 n., illus. 129; rovers, 130,
illus. 134; satellites, 60-1; see also
Deimos, Phobos; in science fiction,

107, 110-11,129, illus. 110;seasonal
changes, Ulus. 106; soil sample col¬
lection and study, 124-6, 129, illus.
123, 125, 134; Soviet explorations
(Mars 3 and 6), 113, 117; surface
changes, 102; terraforming, 133-5;
Thersis plateau, linear markings,
illus. 129; Viking studies of, 117-29;
see also Viking mission to Mars; vol¬
canoes, illus. 120; winds, 117, 118
Mars 3 and 6, Soviet spacecraft, 113,
117

Mathematics: Greek, 181, 183-5; of
Newton, 68, 70; square root of two,
185,347

Mauna Kea, Hawaii, illus. 132
Mayans, 175, 187; canal system, illus.
340-1; time scales in inscriptions, 259
n.

Mazets, E. P., 238

McDonald Observatory, University of
Texas, telescope, illus. 86
Medicine Wheel, Saskatchewan, illus.

49

Menok i Xrat, Zoroastrian text, 45
Mercury, 57, 60, 61, 63, 83; craters,
illus. 90

Merton, Robert, 146
Mesopotamian astronomy, 91
Meteor Crater, Ariz., 85, 86, illus. 84
Meteorites, 77, 78 n.

Meteors: as remnants of comets, 78;

showers of, 77-8
Michell, John, 241
Michelson-Morley experiment, 201
Microscope: Huygens’ studies, 144,
illus. 144; Leeuwenhoek’s studies,

144

Microtubules, illus. 36-7
Milky Way, 7,8,10, 24,181,198, 226,
243, 247, illus. 8, 10, 166, 192, 243;
core of, illus. 10; edge-on and face-
on, illus. 234; estimated number of
advanced technical civilizations in,
298-302; globular star clusters, illus.
192; !Kung Bushmen’s beliefs on,
172-3; motion of stars in, 250-2;
movement toward Virgo cluster,
256; origin of name, 173; spacecraft
flight to, 207; studies of, 190-1, Ulus -
191; supernovae in, 237
Miller, Stanley, 38

Mite, electron micrograph of, illus. 22
Mitochondrion, 31, 38 n., illus. 36-7
Moctezuma, Emperor, 306-7, illus.

77

Molecules, 218, 221; in cells, 34; in
human body, 127; in origin of life,

30-1, 38-40

Montaigne, Michel Eyquem de,

317

Moon: ancient knowledge of, 47, 48;
craters, 66-7,83,85-7,142, illus. 84,

362 - Index

paintings, illus. 88-9; influence on
life, 48; Kepler’s Somnium as journey
to, 65-7; in Newton’s gravitation
theory, 69-70; spacecraft design
(1939) for flight to, 203; views of,
from Earth, illus. 66
Morabito, Linda, 157
Morowitz, Harold, 128
Mortality, causes of death in London in
1632, 49, illus. 5 1

Mount St. Helens, volcanic eruption,
321

Mount Wilson Observatory, 94
Mulholland, Derral, 85, 86
Muller, H. ]., 29-30
Multicellular organisms, 31
Mutations, 27, 30; lethal, 31; from nu¬
clear weapons, 323; in nucleotides,

31, 35; from radiation, 29

Nagasaki, nuclear attack, 321
Napier, W., 252

Napoleon, 303 n.; Egyptian expedition,
293

National Aeronautics and Space Ad-
ministration (NASA), 123; budget,
illus. 342

Native Americans: astronomy, 47, 237,
illus. 48, 49, 232; La Perouse meets in
Alaska, 303, illus. 304; Tlingit narra-
tive of first meeting with white men,
303-5; see also Anasazi; Aztecs; Incas;
Mayans

Natural selection, 27-30
Navajo sand painting, illus. 259
Necho, Pharaoh, 15, 183 n.

Neptune, 11, 60, 90, 165
Neurons in brain, 277, 278, illus. 278
Neutrinos, xv, 230
Neutrons, 220, 221, 223, 224
Neutron stars, 239, 241
Newman, William I., 310
Newton, Isaac, 45, 67-71, 108 n., 113,
176, 181, 217, 221, 334, 337;calculus
of variations, 70; chronologies of an¬
cient civilizations, 71; comets ob¬
served, 79-80; differential and
integral calculus invented, 68; gravi-
tation theory, 69-70; and Huygens,
143-4 n.; Kepler’s influence on, 69-
71; law of inertia, 69; portrait, illus.
69; Principia , 69 n., 70; studies on
light, 68, 144 n.

NGC, galaxy numbers, see Galaxies
Nitrogen in atmosphere, 32
Noise pollution by ships, 272
Norcia, Anne: globular cluster, paint-
ing, /illus. 9; Sun, painting, illus. 15
Norm4n conquest of England, 79, illus.
76

Novae, 233

Nuclear arms race, 326-9
Nuclear fusion reactors, 203

Nuclear war, 320-9; effects of, 321-3;
fallout from, illus. 321; prevention
of, 330-1

Nuclear weapons, 320-2; balance be¬
tween U.S. and Soviet Union, 320,
326-9; effect on survivors, 322-3;
explosions, illus. 324, 325; mutations
caused by, 323; in Project Orion,
203; in World War II, 320-1, 328
Nucleic acids, 34, 35, 38, 39; in genetic
material, 273

Nucleotide bases, illus. 36-7
Nucleotides, 31, 39, 273

Oceans, life in, 270, 283 n.

Orion, constellation, 197
Orion, Project, 203,206,207, illus. 204,
205

Orion Nebula, 197, 226, illus. 12, 230;
interior, illus. 13; spiral arm, 252;
Trapezium, illus. 13
Ovid, 245, 269

Oxygen: in atmosphere, 32; plants gen¬
erating, 32

P’an Ku myths, 258
Paracelsus, 221

Paper computers for study of eclipses,
illus. 44, 54, 55
Pascal, Blaise, 3
Pasteur, Louis, 144
Payne, Roger, 271, 272
Peale, Stanton, 157
Perfect solids, see Solids
Pericles, 182

Peter the Great, Czar, 146-7
Phobos, satellite of Mars, 83; Viking
orbiter photographs, illus. 94
Photons, 230
Photosynthesis, 31
Physics, new laws of, 260 n.

Pioneer 11, observations of Saturn,

165, illus. 163
Pioneer spacecraft, 292
Pioneer Venus Orbiter, 95, 95-6 n.;

photographs from, illus. 99
Plague after nuclear war, 323
Planetary nebulae, 232, 233, illus. 232,
233

Planetary systems, 210-12; hypotheti¬
cal, illus. 211-15; seven systems gen¬
erated by computer system
ACCRETE, illus. 209
Planets, 10-11; in astrology, 48-9; birth
of, 225; craters on, see Craters; Huy¬
gens’ studies of, 145-7; influence on
human beings, 49, 51; Kepler’s study
and laws of motion, 61-4, 69, 70,
illus. 62, 63; and Kepler’s theory of
five solids, 57-8,60, illus. 58; life on,
see Life on planets; Mars; motion,
52-3, illus. 50, 56; number of, in all
galaxies, 7; orbits, 61-3, 188-9, illus.

62, 63; see also Heliocentric hypoth¬
esis

Plant cells, 31

Plants, oxygen generated by, 32
Plato, 61, 184, 186-8
Platonic solids, see Solids
Pleiades, 226, illus. 13, 231
Pliny, 49
Plutarch, 186

Pluto, 11,60,107, 165, illus. 14
Plutonium, 224
Pollack, J. B., 125
Polycrates, 178, 186
Popul Vuh of the Quiche Maya, 3, 27,
n., 257

PPLO (pleuropneumonia-like organ¬
isms), 39

Prescott, James W., 331
Printing, invention of, 281
Project Daedalus, 203, 206, 207, illus.
204, 205

Project Orion, 203, 206, 207, illus. 204,
205

Prophets, Biblical, 183 n.

Proteins, 38,39; and DNA, 34,35, illus.
36-7

Protestantism and Kepler’s astronomy,
56, 65

Protons, 220, 221, 223, 224
Proxima Centauri, 198, 199
Ptolemy (Claudius Ptolemaeus), 17,
19—20, 61, 71; astrology, 50-1; as¬
tronomy, 51-3, illus. 56; on comets,

78

Ptolemy III Euergetes, 334
Ptolemy V Epiphanes, name on Rosetta
stone, 294, 296, illus. 296
Ptolemys, kings, 334
Pulsar neutron star, illus. 235
Pulsars, 238, 239; at center of Crab
Nebula, 239; at center of supernova
remnant, illus. 11; quasars related to,
250

Pythagoras, 61, 63, 183, 188, 223, 317,
illus. 183

Pythagoreans, 183-6
Pythagorean solids, see Solids
Pythagorean theorem, 183

Quarks, 220

Quasars, 198-9, 260, 261; in galaxies,
249-50, 255, 256, illus. 6, 249

Radio astronomy, 297-8, 301, 302,
illus. 297

Radio communication: interstellar, 272
n., 285-7, 311; with other worlds,
297-8, illus. 290, 297
Radio telescopes, 260-1, illus. 261
R-complex, 276-7, 279, 326, 331
Red giant stars, 232-4, 239, illus. 10,
235; Sun to become, 231, 238, 239,
illus. 229

Index -363

Red shift, 253-6, 261
Reductio ad absurdum, 347
Relativity: general theory of, 206; spe-
cial theory of, 200-2
Rembrandt, 141, 143
Ribonucleic acid, see RNA
Ribosomes, illus. 3 6- 7
Richardson, L. F., 323, 326, 327, 330,
diagram, Ulus. 327
Rishpon, ]., 125, 126
RNA (ribonucleic acid), 34'5, 39, illus.

36-7; messenger, 35, illus. 36-7
Rockets, 111, illus. 112, 113
Roosevelt, Franklin D., 208
Rosetta stone, 294, 296, 303 n., illus.
294, 296

Rosette Nebula, illus. 231
Rubens, Peter Paul, 143
Rudolf II, Emperor, 58, 67
Russell, Bertrand, 183-4
Rutherford, Ernest, 218 n.

Sacro Bosco, Joannes de, Sphaera
Mundi, illus. 280

Sagittarius, constellation, 191; star
cloud in, illus. 309
Salpeter, E. E., 40, 41
Samos, 174; decoration from, illus. 176;
Heraion (temple of Hera), 173, illus.
173; tunnel of Eupalinos, 178, illus.
178

Saturn, 11, 57, 60, 61, 160, 165; Huy¬
gens’ studies of, 145, illus. 145; mag¬
netic field, 165; model, illus. 14;
orbit, 63; Pioneer 11 observations,
165, illus. 163 ; rings, 87,90,145,162,
165, illus. 145, 163; satellites, 210,
299; Voyager 2 passes, 139
Schaller, Adolf: black dust cloud,
painting, illus. 11; cells, paintings,
illus. 36-7; core of Milky Way,
painting, illus. 10; dark cloud of in¬
terstellar dust, painting, illus. 24;
death of the Earth and Sun, paint¬
ings, illus. 228-9; exploding radio
galaxy with symmetrical jets, paint¬
ing, illus. 5; Milky Way Galaxy,
painting, illus. 243; Pleiades, painting,
illus. 13; possible lifeforms on Ju-
piter-like planet, paintings, illus.
42-3; quasars, paintings, illus. 6, 249;
ring galaxy with supernova explo¬
sion, painting, illus. 4; small cluster of
galaxies, painting, illus. 2
Schaller, Adolf, and John Allison: black
dust cloud and stars embedded in
gaseous nebulosities, painting, illus.
10; red giant star and spiral arm,
painting, illus. 10

Schaller, Adolf, and Rick Sternbach,
extended cluster of galaxies, painting,
illus. 4

Schaller, Adolf, Rick Sternbach, and

John Allison; death of a solar system,
paintings, illus. 235; Saturn, model,
illus. 14

Schiaparelli, Giovanni, 107, 109, 135
Schiller, Julius, Coelum Stellatum
Christianum Concauum , illus. 283
Science fiction: aliens in, 40, illus. 40;
extraterrestrial civilizations in, 311;

Kepler’s Somnium, 65; Mars in, 110—
11, illus. 110; see also Wells, H. G.
Sequoia trees, 270 n.

Sex in evolution, 31-2
Seyfert’s Sextet, illus. 254
Shakespeare, William, 307, 336; first
folio, title page, illus. 284
Shapley, Harlow, 191, 193
Sherrington, Charles, 277
Shiva, dance of creation, bronze, 259,
illus. 244

Shklovskii, I. S., 242
Sickle cell anemia, 35
Sikorsky, Igor, 203

Silicon: atoms, 221 n., 233; fusion, 233,
238

Simultaneous events, paradox of, 199—
200, illus. 200

Sirius, measurement of distance to, 190
Sivin, Nathan, 187
Slavery in Greek civilization, 186-8
Slipher, V. M., 254
Small Magellanic Cloud, 238
Smoot, George, 256, 257
Snell (Snellius), Willebrord, 142, 143
Sobotovich, E., 77
Socrates, 181
Solar features, see Sun
Solar systems, hypothetical, see Plane¬
tary systems

Solar telescope, view of human being,
illus. 224

Solids (Pythagorean or Platonic), 184-5,
349-50, illus. 184; in Kepler’s theory,
57-8, 60,185-6, illus. 58
Sombrero Galaxy, M104 (NGC 4594),
illus. 247
Sophocles, 336

Sound: propagation of, 201; speed of,
200-1

Soviet Union: expenditures for space
exploration, 432; invasion of Af¬
ghanistan, 345; Mars spacecraft, 113,
117, illus. 118; non-nuclear weapons,
328—9; in nuclear arms race, 326-9;
nuclear weapons, 320; planetary ex¬
ploration programs, 113, 117; search
for extraterrestrial civilizations, 302;
see also Venera spacecraft
Space: curved, 262; and time, 198-9
Spacecraft, 203, 206-7, 210; accelera¬
tion and speed of flight, 206-7; de¬
signs for interstellar flight, illus.

204-5

Space exploration, future of, 342, 345

Special theory of relativity, 200-2
Spectrum, 92-3, illus. 93
Speed of light, 5,198-9; and interstellar
space travel, 207; in special theory of
relativity, 200-2
Speed of sound, 200-1
Speed of thought, 201
Spheres, celestial, 52-3
Sphinx, 98, 99, illus. 103
Spice Islands, 141
Spinoza, Benedict, 141
Square root of two, 185, 347
SS433, star, 242

Stars, 8, 10, 46-8, 168-9, 196-8, 231;
ancient ideas of, 171-3; in astrology,
48-9; atoms in, 218; binary, 212,
232-3, illus. 213-15; birth of, 225-6,
illus. 256; black dwarf, 232-3; central
temperatures, 231; colors of, 10; core
in supernova explosion, 238—9; dou¬
ble, 10; evolution of, 247; explora¬
tion or colonization of planets
orbiting, 308, 310, illus. 310; falling,
46, 77; on flags, 50; flight to, see In¬
terstellar flight; Spacecraft; globular
clusters of, 10, 243, illus. 9, 214;
measurement of distance to, 189-90,
illus. 190; neutron, 239, 241; and
planetary companions, model, illus.
210; red giant, see Red giant stars;
white dwarf, 232-3, 239, 241
Stephan’s Quintet, illus. 254
Sternbach, Rick: hypothetical worlds,
paintings, illus. 312; starship designs,
paintings, illus. 205

Sternbach, Rick, and Adolf Schaller,
extended cluster of galaxies, painting,
illus. 4

Sternbach, Rick, Adolf Schaller, and
John Allison, Saturn, model, illus. 14
Stonehenge, 47
Strabo, 16, 17

Sumerian creation myths, 177 n.
Sumerian pictograph for god, 243 n.
Sun, 7, 10, 11, 225-32, 234, illus. 15,
216; birth of, 225-6; as center of
universe, 53, 57,145-6,188-9, illus.
56; death of, 231—2, illus. 228—9; and
family of stars, 226; hole in corona,
illus. 227; interior of, 225, 230; ion¬
ized gas loops, illus. 226; magnetic
field, 225; magnetism (gravity) sug¬
gested by Kepler, 64; measurement of
distance to, 189-90; in Milky Way,
252; neutrinos in, 230; orbits of
planets around, 61-3, illus. 62, 63;
photosphere, illus. 223; to become
red giant star, 231, 238, 239, illus.
228-9; solar flares, 225; solar promi¬
nences, 225, illus. 216; solar storms,
225; solar wind, 82; stars nearest to,
198; surface of, illus. 222; worship of,
243

364 — Index

Sunlight and life on Earth, 234-5
Sunspots, 225, illus. 223
Supernovae, 10, 197, 236-9; in Anasazi
rock painting, 237, illus. 232; explo-
sions, 197, 226, 233, 234, 237, 238,
241, 247, 283, illus. 4, 233, 234; and
formation of new planetary systems,
illus. 235; nebula (gas island) sun
rounding explosion, illus. 11; pulsar
at center of remnant, 239, illus. 11;
quasars related to, 250; remnants of,
237-9, 242, illus. 11,233
Surrogate mothers, 331, illus. 330
Swift, Jonathan, 149
Syene, Eratosthenes’ use of observa-
tions at, 14-15, illus. 16
Synthesis of organic matter, 38-9, illus.
38

Talmey, Max, 199

Tantric Buddhism, world egg, illus. 257
Tanzania, human footprint 3.6 million
years old, 345, illus. 343
Taurus, constellation, illus. 233; super'
nova in, 235'6

Telescope: Galileo’s use of, 66, 91, 142;
Huygens’ studies, 144-5; invention
of, 66, 67

Television, transmission to other
planets, 286'7, 289
Terraforming on Mars, 133'5
Tesseract (hypercube), illus. 262
Thai manuscript on astrology and as-
tronomy, illus. 282
Thales of Miletus, 176'7
Theodorus, engineering inventions,
178

Theophrastus, 332

Thirty Years’War, 64'5, 67

Time and space, 198'9

Time line of people and events, illus.

335

Time travel, 207T0, illus. 208
Titan, satellite of Saturn, 145, 160'2,
165, illus. 160; atmosphere, 160T;
possibility of life on, 162, 300
Tlingit poeple, 311; first meeting with
white men, 303'5
Toon, O. B., 125

Toscanelli, Paolo dal Pozzo, map, illus.

17

Travelers’ tales, 148'9
Trees, 33, 38, illus. 33
Triffid Nebula, illus. 230
Trilobites, 32, illus. 32
Tsiolkovsky, Konstantin Eduardovich,
110, 111, portrait, illus. 110
Tsurezuregusa of Kenko, 50 n.
Tunguska Event, 73'6, 78, 82, 86, illus.
75

Twain, Mark, 217

Twins, astrology tested by, 49'50

UFOs, 292, 307, 311; see also Extrater-
restrial visitors

Uhuru, observations of X-rays, 241

Ultraviolet radiation, 92-3

United States: Arms Control and Dis¬
armament Agency, 330; bombing of
Cambodia, 342; budget for space sci¬
ences, 342, 345, illus. 342; non¬
nuclear weapons, 328-9; in nuclear
arms race, 326-9; nuclear weapons,
320; search for extraterrestrial civili¬
zations, 302

Universe: Big Bang and formation of,
246, 247, 256, 257, 259; evolution
and structure of, 246-57; expanding,
255-7, 259; four-dimensional, 264-5;
hierarchy of universes, 265, 267; in¬
finite regression between universes,
265, 267, illus. 266; oscillating, 259,
260, 262

Uranium, Geiger counter measure¬
ment, 235

Uranus, 11, 60, 165; rings, 90; satellites,
210, 299; Voyager 2 passes, 139

Urey, Harold, 38

Utopia, region on Mars, 120, 121, illus.
104, 131, 132

V-2 rocket, 111

V 861 Scorpii, 242

Vaillant, Bernard, Christian Huygens,
portrait, illus. 143

Valley of the Kings, Egypt: motifs of
Sun and stars, illus. 240; stele, illus.
295

van Gogh, Vincent, 217

Veil Nebula, illus. 233

Vela satellite, 76

Velikovsky, Immanuel, Worlds in Col¬
lision , 90—1

Venera spacecraft, 238; observations of
Venus, 94, 96, 97 m, 113, 121, illus.
98, 340

Venne, Adriaen van der, harbor at
Middelburg, Holland, painting, illus.
140

Venus, 57, 60, 61, 91-9, 102, 145; at¬
mosphere, 94, 96-7, 102; craters, 95;
Galileo’s observations, 91-2, 142;
greenhouse effect and temperature,
97, 98 n.; Pioneer Venus Orbiter
photographs of, illus. 99, 340; radio
and radar observations of, 94'8,
illus. 95, 340; surface, illus. 340-1;
surface, model reconstructions of,
illus. 99; surface temperatures, 95, 97,
illus. 97; Velikovsky’s hypothesis of
comet in collision, 90-1; Venera
spacecraft observations of, 94,96,97
m, 113,121, illus. 98, 340

Vermeer, Jan, 141, 143, 144, 307

Very Large Array (VLA) of radio tele¬
scopes, 261, illus. 261
Vespucci, Amerigo, 17
Viking 1, 119-20, 129, illus. 123, 124
Viking 2, 119-20, illus. 104
Viking mission to Mars, 117-29,139 n.,
339, 342, illus. 130, 131; biological
studies, 119, 122-3, 125, 128, 129;
landers, 119-22, 124, illus. 122, 127,
134; landings, 120-1, illus. 123; land¬
ing sites, 119-21; orbiter photo¬
graphs, illus. 94, 121; orb iters,

118-20; soil sample collection and
study, 124-6, illus. 124, 134
Vinci, Italy, traffic sign, illus. 201
Vinci, Leonardo da, see Leonardo da
Vinci

Virgo cluster, 247, 256-7
Viroids, 39

Vishniac, Helen Simpson, 124
Vishniac, Wolf, 126, 129; in Antarc¬
tica, 123-4, illus. 124; Wolf Trap,
122-3

Voltaire, Francois Marie Arouet, 149
Voyager 1, 139; observations, 151,
illus. 148, 150-6, 159-61
Voyager 2, 138; observations, 138-9,

149, 151, illus. 96, 136, 150, 151,
159, 162

Voyager spacecraft, 83, 147, 149, 151,
154,156-8,165,199, 292, 342, illus.
138; recorded messages for other
civilizations, 287, 289, illus. 288

WAC Corporal rocket, 111
Waldseemiiller, Martin, 17
Wallace, Alfred Russel, 134, 191 n.;
criticism of Lowell, 108-9; evolution
theory, 27-30
Wallenstein, Duke of, 67
War: alternatives to, 330; causes, Rich¬
ardson’s study of, 323, 326, 327, dia¬
gram, illus. 327; hope for avoiding,
332; nuclear, see Nuclear war
Water molecule, 221
Welles, Orson, The War of the Worlds ,
radio version, 107 n., 110, 129
Wells, H. G., 339; “The Discovery of
the Future,” 317T8; The Time Ma¬
chine, illus. 208; The War of the
Worlds , 107, 110, 111, 129
Wesley, John, 27 n.

Whales, 270-3; communications, 272;
finback, 272; genetic material, 273;
humpback, 287, illus. 268; slaughter
of, 273; sounds (songs) of, 271, 287,
illus. 271

Whirlpool Galaxy, M51 (NGC 5194),
illus. 246

White dwarf stars, 232-3, 239, 241
Wilkins, John, 137, 182
William the Conqueror, 79, illus. 76

Index - 365

Wolf Trap, Vishniac’s device, 122-3 Writing, 281 Young, Thomas, 294

World, see Earth Wurttemberg, Duke of, 57-8, 67

World War 11, 327^8; conventional Zeus, 173, 176

bombs, 320;nuclear weapons, 320-1, Xenophon, 186 Zodiac, 197; signs of, illus. 54

328 X-rays, 93; black holes observed with, Zoroaster, 183 n.

Wren, Christopher, 105 24T2; deep sky survey in Eridanus,

Wright, Thomas, 181, 191 Ulus. 263; glow between galaxies, 262

About the Author

CARL Sagan is Director of the Laboratory for Planetary Studies
and David Duncan Professor of Astronomy and Space Sciences
at Cornell University. He has played a leading role in the Mari¬
ner, Viking and Voyager expeditions to the planets, for which he
received the NASA medals for Exceptional Scientific Achievement
and for Distinguished Public Service, and the international
astronautics prize, the Prix Galabert. He has served as Chairman
of the Division for Planetary Sciences of the American Astro¬
nomical Society, as Chairman of the Astronomy Section of the
American Association for the Advancement of Science, and as
President of the Planetology Section of the American Geophysi¬
cal Union. For twelve years, he was Editor-in-Chief of Icarus , the
leading professional journal devoted to planetary research. In
addition to 400 published scientific and popular articles, Dr.
Sagan is the author, co-author or editor of more than a dozen
books, including Intelligent Life in the Universe , The Cosmic Com
nection , The Dragons of Eden , Murmurs of Earth and Broca’s
Braim In 1975, he received the Joseph Priestley Award “for dis¬
tinguished contributions to the welfare of mankind,” and in 1978
the Pulitzer Prize for literature.